BSR 64000 Command Reference Guide

BSR 64000 Command Reference Guide
Compass ID: 327594480 Version 3 Release 5.2.1
Notice
Copyright 2009 Motorola, Inc. All rights reserved No part of this publication my be reproduced in any form or by any means or used to make any derivative work (such as translation, transformation or adaptation) without written permission from Motorola, Inc. Motorola reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes in content from time to time without obligation on the part of Motorola to provide notification of such revision or change. Motorola provides this guide without warranty of any kind, either implied or expressed, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Motorola may make improvements or changes in the product(s) described in this manual at any time. Motorola and the stylized M logo are registered trademarks of Motorola, Inc. Broadband Services Router, BSR, BSR 64000, RiverDelta, and SmartFlow are trademarks of Motorola, Inc. All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Caring for the Environment by Recycling When you see this symbol on a Motorola product, do not dispose of the product with residential or commercial waste. Recycling your Motorola Equipment Please do not dispose of this product with your residential or commercial waste. Some countries or regions, such as the European Union, have set up systems to collect and recycle electrical and electronic waste items. Contact your local authorities for information about practices established for your region. If collection systems are not available, call Motorola Customer Service for assistance.
Compass ID: 327594480 Version 3 Release 5.2.1 Published: 9/09
Contents
Preface
Scope ........................................................................................................................................... xlv Audience...................................................................................................................................... xlv Documentation Set ...................................................................................................................... xlv Conventions...............................................................................................................................xlvii Notes, Cautions, Warnings .......................................................................................................xlviii If You Need Help........................................................................................................................xlix
System Administration Commands

Introduction .................................................................................................................................1-1 System Administration Command Descriptions .........................................................................1-2 aaa accounting commands default....................................................................................1-3 aaa accounting exec default..............................................................................................1-5 aaa authentication enable default......................................................................................1-7 aaa authentication fail-message........................................................................................1-8 aaa authentication local-override......................................................................................1-9 aaa authentication login default......................................................................................1-10 aaa authorization commands default ..............................................................................1-11 aaa authorization exec default ........................................................................................1-13 aaa console authentication..............................................................................................1-14 aaa console authorization commands default .................................................................1-15 aaa new-model................................................................................................................1-16 alias.................................................................................................................................1-17 banner motd ....................................................................................................................1-18
Compass ID: 327594480 Version 3
iii
Release 5.2.1
batch ...............................................................................................................................1-19 boot system.....................................................................................................................1-20 broadcast.........................................................................................................................1-21 carriage-return-lf-mode ..................................................................................................1-22 chassis alias ....................................................................................................................1-23 chassis assetid.................................................................................................................1-24 chkdsk.............................................................................................................................1-25 clear core log ..................................................................................................................1-26 clear evt ..........................................................................................................................1-27 clear log ..........................................................................................................................1-29 clear redundancy stats.....................................................................................................1-30 clock set ..........................................................................................................................1-31 clock summer-time .........................................................................................................1-32 clock timezone................................................................................................................1-34 configure.........................................................................................................................1-36 console authentication radius .........................................................................................1-37 copy ................................................................................................................................1-38 copy core ........................................................................................................................1-40 core .................................................................................................................................1-41 datapath keepalive ..........................................................................................................1-42 datapath pause enable .....................................................................................................1-43 delete...............................................................................................................................1-44 description ......................................................................................................................1-45 dir....................................................................................................................................1-46 disable.............................................................................................................................1-47 duplex .............................................................................................................................1-48 enable..............................................................................................................................1-49 enable authentication radius ...........................................................................................1-50 enable password..............................................................................................................1-51 enable rdn-process ..........................................................................................................1-52 enable secret ...................................................................................................................1-53 encapsulation snap..........................................................................................................1-54 erase................................................................................................................................1-55 exception.........................................................................................................................1-56
iv
Release 5.2.1
Contents
exit ..................................................................................................................................1-57 forced-download.............................................................................................................1-58 format .............................................................................................................................1-59 help .................................................................................................................................1-60 history size......................................................................................................................1-61 hostname.........................................................................................................................1-62 hsim4 slot........................................................................................................................1-63 icp keepalive...................................................................................................................1-64 ip ftp password ...............................................................................................................1-66 ip ftp username ...............................................................................................................1-67 ip netmask-format...........................................................................................................1-68 ip tacacs source-interface ...............................................................................................1-69 ip tftp source-interface loopback ....................................................................................1-70 ldap client .......................................................................................................................1-71 ldap search-base..............................................................................................................1-72 ldap server ......................................................................................................................1-73 load-interval....................................................................................................................1-74 logging............................................................................................................................1-76 logging admin-status ......................................................................................................1-77 logging buffered .............................................................................................................1-79 logging console...............................................................................................................1-81 logging control docsis.....................................................................................................1-83 logging default................................................................................................................1-84 logging disable bpi_auth_invalid_messages ..................................................................1-85 logging disable bpi_auth_reject_messages.....................................................................1-86 logging disable bpi_map_reject_messages.....................................................................1-87 logging disable bpi_tek_invalid_messages ....................................................................1-88 logging disable cm_ranging_fail_r103_0.......................................................................1-89 logging disable dcc_arrive_new_c203_0 .......................................................................1-90 logging disable dcc_depart_old_c202_0 ........................................................................1-90 logging disable securityuser-login..................................................................................1-91 logging evt clear .............................................................................................................1-92 logging evt set.................................................................................................................1-93 logging facility................................................................................................................1-94
Release 5.2.1
logging on.......................................................................................................................1-95 logging rate-limit ............................................................................................................1-96 logging reporting ............................................................................................................1-97 logging reporting default ..............................................................................................1-100 logging session .............................................................................................................1-101 logging snmp-trap.........................................................................................................1-102 logging source-interface loopback ...............................................................................1-104 logging trap...................................................................................................................1-105 login..............................................................................................................................1-107 logout............................................................................................................................1-108 macro ............................................................................................................................1-109 memory checkzero........................................................................................................1-110 message......................................................................................................................... 1-111 network-clock-select.....................................................................................................1-112 network-clock-select revertive .....................................................................................1-114 more..............................................................................................................................1-115 page...............................................................................................................................1-117 password .......................................................................................................................1-118 patch install...................................................................................................................1-119 privilege restricted ........................................................................................................1-120 radius-server .................................................................................................................1-121 radius-server source-interface loopback.......................................................................1-123 redundancy cmts...........................................................................................................1-124 redundancy dtx .............................................................................................................1-126 redundancy force-switchover cmts...............................................................................1-127 redundancy force-switchover dtx .................................................................................1-129 redundancy force-switchover srm ................................................................................1-130 reload ............................................................................................................................1-131 reload switched.............................................................................................................1-132 remote copy ..................................................................................................................1-136 remote delete slot..........................................................................................................1-138 remote rm slot...............................................................................................................1-138 remote dir slot...............................................................................................................1-139 remote ls slot.................................................................................................................1-139
vi
Release 5.2.1
Contents
repeat ............................................................................................................................1-141 reset...............................................................................................................................1-142 service password-encryption ........................................................................................1-143 session-timeout .............................................................................................................1-144 session-window set.......................................................................................................1-145 set bandwidth-factor .....................................................................................................1-146 set stats poll ..................................................................................................................1-147 show aliases ..................................................................................................................1-149 show boot......................................................................................................................1-151 show chassis alias .........................................................................................................1-152 show chassis assetid .....................................................................................................1-153 show chassis serial-num ...............................................................................................1-154 show chassis status .......................................................................................................1-155 show clock ....................................................................................................................1-159 show core log................................................................................................................1-160 show evt........................................................................................................................1-161 show forced-download .................................................................................................1-165 show history..................................................................................................................1-167 show keepalive .............................................................................................................1-169 show log........................................................................................................................1-171 show logging evt...........................................................................................................1-174 show logging reporting.................................................................................................1-175 show logging syslog .....................................................................................................1-178 show macro...................................................................................................................1-179 show memory ...............................................................................................................1-180 show network-clocks ....................................................................................................1-183 show patches-installed..................................................................................................1-184 show pool......................................................................................................................1-186 show process.................................................................................................................1-188 show process cpu..........................................................................................................1-190 show process memory ..................................................................................................1-194 show process msg-q-info..............................................................................................1-197 show process semaphores.............................................................................................1-198 show process stack .......................................................................................................1-200
vii
Release 5.2.1
show redundancy ..........................................................................................................1-202 show redundancy cmts .................................................................................................1-205 show redundancy dtx....................................................................................................1-209 show redundancy srm ...................................................................................................1-212 show reload...................................................................................................................1-214 show running-config.....................................................................................................1-215 show srm alias ..............................................................................................................1-217 show srm assetid...........................................................................................................1-218 show srm serial-num.....................................................................................................1-219 show startup-config ......................................................................................................1-220 show stats fastpath ........................................................................................................1-222 show stats summary error .............................................................................................1-224 show stats xfabric .........................................................................................................1-225 show system..................................................................................................................1-226 show system alarms......................................................................................................1-230 show system fans..........................................................................................................1-233 show tacacs...................................................................................................................1-235 show tacacs statistics ....................................................................................................1-236 show tech ......................................................................................................................1-237 show update ..................................................................................................................1-240 show user-group ...........................................................................................................1-241 show users ....................................................................................................................1-243 show vectron slot..........................................................................................................1-245 show version.................................................................................................................1-247 show xfabric .................................................................................................................1-249 slot ................................................................................................................................1-251 speed .............................................................................................................................1-252 srm alias........................................................................................................................1-253 srm assetid ....................................................................................................................1-254 sync file ........................................................................................................................1-256 system temperature-threshold.......................................................................................1-257 tacacs reset-connections ...............................................................................................1-259 tacacs-server host..........................................................................................................1-260 tacacs-server key ..........................................................................................................1-262
viii
Release 5.2.1
Contents
tacacs-server port..........................................................................................................1-263 tacacs-server retry.........................................................................................................1-264 tacacs-server timeout ....................................................................................................1-265 telnet .............................................................................................................................1-266 telnet authentication radius...........................................................................................1-267 telnet session-limit........................................................................................................1-268 update bypass................................................................................................................1-269 update chassis ...............................................................................................................1-270 update slot.....................................................................................................................1-271 username.......................................................................................................................1-272 username privilege........................................................................................................1-274 username user-group ....................................................................................................1-275 xfabric keepalive ..........................................................................................................1-276
IP Commands
Introduction .................................................................................................................................2-1 IP Command Descriptions ..........................................................................................................2-2 arp .....................................................................................................................................2-3 arp timeout........................................................................................................................2-5 cable helper-address .........................................................................................................2-6 clear arp-cache..................................................................................................................2-8 clear counters....................................................................................................................2-9 clear host.........................................................................................................................2-10 clear ip route ...................................................................................................................2-11 clear ip traffic .................................................................................................................2-12 clear sntp history.............................................................................................................2-13 host authorization ...........................................................................................................2-14 interface ..........................................................................................................................2-16 ip access-group ...............................................................................................................2-18 ip address ........................................................................................................................2-19 ip broadcast-address .......................................................................................................2-23 ip dhcp relay information ...............................................................................................2-24 ip domain-list..................................................................................................................2-26 ip domain-lookup............................................................................................................2-27
ix
Release 5.2.1
ip domain-name ..............................................................................................................2-28 ip forward-protocol udp..................................................................................................2-29 ip forwarding ..................................................................................................................2-30 ip helper-address.............................................................................................................2-31 ip host .............................................................................................................................2-32 ip irdp..............................................................................................................................2-33 ip mask-reply ..................................................................................................................2-35 ip mtu..............................................................................................................................2-36 ip multicast fastpath........................................................................................................2-37 ip name-server ................................................................................................................2-39 ip proxy-arp ....................................................................................................................2-40 ip rarp-server ..................................................................................................................2-41 ip redirects ......................................................................................................................2-42 ip route............................................................................................................................2-43 ip routing ........................................................................................................................2-44 ip source-route ................................................................................................................2-45 ip unreachables ...............................................................................................................2-46 passive-interface .............................................................................................................2-47 ping .................................................................................................................................2-49 show arp..........................................................................................................................2-51 show controllers..............................................................................................................2-53 show host authorization..................................................................................................2-55 show host authorization cpe ...........................................................................................2-56 show host authorization interface cable .........................................................................2-58 show host authorization summary ..................................................................................2-60 show host unauthorized cpe............................................................................................2-62 show hosts ......................................................................................................................2-63 show interfaces ...............................................................................................................2-64 show ip arp .....................................................................................................................2-66 show ip dhcp stats...........................................................................................................2-69 show ip filters .................................................................................................................2-70 show ip filters summary .................................................................................................2-74 show ip flows..................................................................................................................2-77 show ip forwarding-table................................................................................................2-79
Release 5.2.1
Contents
show ip interface.............................................................................................................2-81 show ip irdp ....................................................................................................................2-84 show ip multicast fastpath ..............................................................................................2-86 show ip multicast fwd-cache ..........................................................................................2-87 show ip protocols............................................................................................................2-89 show ip route ..................................................................................................................2-91 show ip traffic.................................................................................................................2-94 show l2-cam....................................................................................................................2-98 show sntp ......................................................................................................................2-101 show tcp brief ...............................................................................................................2-102 show tcp statistics .........................................................................................................2-103 shutdown.......................................................................................................................2-107 sntp authenticate ...........................................................................................................2-108 sntp authentication-key.................................................................................................2-109 sntp broadcastdelay ......................................................................................................2-110 sntp broadcast client ..................................................................................................... 2-111 sntp disable ...................................................................................................................2-112 sntp response timeout ...................................................................................................2-113 sntp server.....................................................................................................................2-114 sntp source-interface loopback .....................................................................................2-116 sntp timer ......................................................................................................................2-117 sntp trusted-key ............................................................................................................2-118 traceroute ......................................................................................................................2-119 trap-enable-if ................................................................................................................2-121 trap-enable-rdn .............................................................................................................2-122 tunnel destination..........................................................................................................2-123 tunnel mode ..................................................................................................................2-124 tunnel source.................................................................................................................2-125 unresolved-ip-packet-throttle .......................................................................................2-126
xi
Release 5.2.1
SNMP Commands
Introduction .................................................................................................................................3-1 SNMP Command Descriptions ...................................................................................................3-2 show snmp ........................................................................................................................3-3 snmp-server access ...........................................................................................................3-9 snmp-server chassis-id....................................................................................................3-11 snmp-server community .................................................................................................3-12 snmp-server community-table ........................................................................................3-13 snmp-server contact........................................................................................................3-16 snmp-server context........................................................................................................3-17 snmp-server convert .......................................................................................................3-18 snmp-server docs-trap-control........................................................................................3-19 snmp-server enable informs ...........................................................................................3-21 snmp-server enable traps ................................................................................................3-22 snmp-server engineID ....................................................................................................3-24 snmp-server group ..........................................................................................................3-25 snmp-server host.............................................................................................................3-26 snmp-server location ......................................................................................................3-29 snmp-server manager response-timeout .........................................................................3-30 snmp-server notify..........................................................................................................3-31 snmp-server notify-filter.................................................................................................3-33 snmp-server notify-filter-profile.....................................................................................3-35 snmp-server packetsize...................................................................................................3-37 snmp-server port number................................................................................................3-38 snmp-server shutdown....................................................................................................3-39 snmp-server sysname......................................................................................................3-40 snmp-server target-addr..................................................................................................3-41 snmp-server target-params .............................................................................................3-44 snmp-server trap rate-limit .............................................................................................3-47 snmp-server trap-source loopback..................................................................................3-48 snmp-server user.............................................................................................................3-49 snmp-server view............................................................................................................3-51
xii
Release 5.2.1
Contents
Debug Commands
Introduction .................................................................................................................................4-1 Debug Command Descriptions ...................................................................................................4-1 debug aps ..........................................................................................................................4-2 debug arp ..........................................................................................................................4-3 debug cable err .................................................................................................................4-4 debug cable keyman .........................................................................................................4-5 debug cable mac ...............................................................................................................4-6 debug cable map ...............................................................................................................4-7 debug cable modem-select ...............................................................................................4-8 debug cable privacy..........................................................................................................4-9 debug cable qos ..............................................................................................................4-10 debug cable range ...........................................................................................................4-11 debug cable reg...............................................................................................................4-12 debug cable remote-query ..............................................................................................4-13 debug cable ucc ..............................................................................................................4-14 debug ip access-list.........................................................................................................4-15 debug ip bgp ...................................................................................................................4-16 debug ip dvmrp...............................................................................................................4-18 debug ip icmp .................................................................................................................4-19 debug ip igmp .................................................................................................................4-20 debug ip mfm..................................................................................................................4-21 debug ip mrtm.................................................................................................................4-22 debug ip ospf ..................................................................................................................4-23 debug ip packet...............................................................................................................4-25 debug ip pim ...................................................................................................................4-27 debug ip policy ...............................................................................................................4-29 debug ip redistribute .......................................................................................................4-30 debug ip rip.....................................................................................................................4-32 debug ip rip database ......................................................................................................4-33 debug ip rip events..........................................................................................................4-34 debug ip rip trigger .........................................................................................................4-35 debug ip tcp transactions ................................................................................................4-36 debug ip udp ...................................................................................................................4-37
xiii
Release 5.2.1
debug ip vrrp...................................................................................................................4-38 debug ipsec .....................................................................................................................4-39 debug ipv6 all .................................................................................................................4-41 debug ipv6 dhcp .............................................................................................................4-42 debug ipv6 icmp6 ...........................................................................................................4-43 debug ipv6 packet...........................................................................................................4-44 debug ipv6 tcp6 ..............................................................................................................4-45 debug ipv6 udp6 .............................................................................................................4-46 debug isis adj-packets.....................................................................................................4-47 debug isis authentication ................................................................................................4-48 debug isis snp-packets ....................................................................................................4-49 debug isis spf-event ........................................................................................................4-50 debug isis spf-statistics ...................................................................................................4-51 debug isis spf-triggers.....................................................................................................4-52 debug isis update-packets ...............................................................................................4-53 debug mpls forwarding...................................................................................................4-54 debug mpls rsvp..............................................................................................................4-55 debug nd .........................................................................................................................4-57 debug packet-cable .........................................................................................................4-58 debug ppp fsm ................................................................................................................4-59 debug ppp packet............................................................................................................4-60 debug radius....................................................................................................................4-61 debug snmp.....................................................................................................................4-62 debug sntp.......................................................................................................................4-63 debug specmgr................................................................................................................4-64 debug ssh ........................................................................................................................4-65 debug tacacs....................................................................................................................4-66 debug tacacs events ........................................................................................................4-67 debug task monitor .........................................................................................................4-68 debug tunnel ...................................................................................................................4-72 show debugging..............................................................................................................4-73 undebug all .....................................................................................................................4-74
xiv
Release 5.2.1
Contents
Access List Commands

Introduction .................................................................................................................................5-1 Access List Command Descriptions ...........................................................................................5-1 access-class in...................................................................................................................5-2 access-list (standard) ........................................................................................................5-3 access-list (extended)........................................................................................................5-4 ip access-group ...............................................................................................................5-12 ip access-list....................................................................................................................5-13 show access-lists.............................................................................................................5-14
Routing Policy Commands

Introduction .................................................................................................................................6-1 Routing Policy Command Descriptions ......................................................................................6-1 default-information originate............................................................................................6-2 default-metric ...................................................................................................................6-4 ip local policy route-map..................................................................................................6-5 ip policy route-map...........................................................................................................6-6 match as-path....................................................................................................................6-7 match community .............................................................................................................6-8 match ip address ...............................................................................................................6-9 match ip next-hop ...........................................................................................................6-10 match ip route-source .....................................................................................................6-11 match metric ...................................................................................................................6-12 match route-type external ...............................................................................................6-13 match route-type internal................................................................................................6-14 match tag ........................................................................................................................6-15 route-map........................................................................................................................6-16 set as-path prepend .........................................................................................................6-18 set automatic-tag.............................................................................................................6-19 set comm-list ..................................................................................................................6-20 set community ................................................................................................................6-22 set default interface.........................................................................................................6-24 set interface.....................................................................................................................6-25 set ip default next-hop ....................................................................................................6-26
xv
Release 5.2.1
set ip diff-serv.................................................................................................................6-27 set ip next-hop ................................................................................................................6-29 set ip qos queue ..............................................................................................................6-30 set local-preference.........................................................................................................6-31 set metric ........................................................................................................................6-32 set metric-type ................................................................................................................6-33 set origin .........................................................................................................................6-34 set tag..............................................................................................................................6-35 set weight........................................................................................................................6-36 show ip redistribute ........................................................................................................6-37 show ip traffic.................................................................................................................6-39 show route-map ..............................................................................................................6-40
RIP Commands
Introduction .................................................................................................................................7-1 RIP Command Descriptions........................................................................................................7-1 auto-summary ...................................................................................................................7-2 clear ip rip statistics ..........................................................................................................7-3 default-information originate............................................................................................7-4 default-metric ...................................................................................................................7-5 distance .............................................................................................................................7-6 distribute-list in.................................................................................................................7-7 distribute-list out...............................................................................................................7-8 graceful-restart-period ......................................................................................................7-9 ip rip authentication key .................................................................................................7-10 ip rip host-routes.............................................................................................................7-11 ip rip message-digest-key md5.......................................................................................7-12 ip rip receive version ......................................................................................................7-13 ip rip send version ..........................................................................................................7-14 ip split-horizon................................................................................................................7-15 maximum-paths ..............................................................................................................7-16 network ...........................................................................................................................7-17 offset-list.........................................................................................................................7-18 output-delay....................................................................................................................7-20
xvi
Release 5.2.1
Contents
passive-interface .............................................................................................................7-21 redistribute......................................................................................................................7-22 router rip .........................................................................................................................7-24 show ip rip database .......................................................................................................7-25 source-port 520...............................................................................................................7-27 timers basic.....................................................................................................................7-28 version ............................................................................................................................7-30
OSPF Commands
Introduction .................................................................................................................................8-1 OSPF Command Descriptions ....................................................................................................8-1 area authentication............................................................................................................8-2 area default-cost................................................................................................................8-3 area nssa............................................................................................................................8-4 area range..........................................................................................................................8-5 area stub............................................................................................................................8-6 area virtual-link ................................................................................................................8-7 auto-cost reference-bandwidth .........................................................................................8-9 auto-virtual-link..............................................................................................................8-10 clear ip ospf ....................................................................................................................8-11 default-information originate..........................................................................................8-12 default-metric .................................................................................................................8-13 distance ...........................................................................................................................8-14 distance ospf ...................................................................................................................8-15 distribute-list...................................................................................................................8-17 graceful-restart................................................................................................................8-18 helper-mode ....................................................................................................................8-19 ip ospf authentication-key ..............................................................................................8-21 ip ospf cost......................................................................................................................8-22 ip ospf database-filter all out ..........................................................................................8-23 ip ospf dead-interval .......................................................................................................8-24 ip ospf hello-interval.......................................................................................................8-25 ip ospf message-digest-key.............................................................................................8-26 ip ospf network ...............................................................................................................8-27
xvii
Release 5.2.1
ip ospf priority ................................................................................................................8-28 ip ospf retransmit-interval ..............................................................................................8-29 ip ospf transmit-delay .....................................................................................................8-30 maximum-paths ..............................................................................................................8-31 moto-nsf..........................................................................................................................8-32 network area ...................................................................................................................8-34 passive-interface .............................................................................................................8-35 redistribute......................................................................................................................8-36 rfc1583-compatible.........................................................................................................8-38 router-id ..........................................................................................................................8-39 router ospf.......................................................................................................................8-40 show ip ospf....................................................................................................................8-41 show ip ospf border-routers............................................................................................8-43 show ip ospf database.....................................................................................................8-44 show ip ospf interface.....................................................................................................8-47 show ip ospf memory .....................................................................................................8-49 show ip ospf neighbor ....................................................................................................8-51 show ip ospf network......................................................................................................8-53 show ip ospf virtual-links ...............................................................................................8-54 summary-address............................................................................................................8-55 timers spf ........................................................................................................................8-56
IGMP Commands
Introduction .................................................................................................................................9-1 IGMP Command Descriptions ....................................................................................................9-2 clear ip igmp counters ......................................................................................................9-3 ip igmp access-group........................................................................................................9-4 ip igmp querier-timeout ....................................................................................................9-5 ip igmp query-interval ......................................................................................................9-6 ip igmp last-member-query-count ....................................................................................9-7 ip igmp last-member-query-interval.................................................................................9-8 ip igmp query-max-response-time....................................................................................9-9 ip igmp static-group........................................................................................................9-10 ip igmp version ...............................................................................................................9-11
xviii
Release 5.2.1
Contents
ip igmp version1-querier ................................................................................................9-12 show ip igmp groups ......................................................................................................9-13 show ip igmp interface ...................................................................................................9-15 show ip igmp statistics....................................................................................................9-17
10
VRRP Commands
Introduction ...............................................................................................................................10-1 VRRP Command Descriptions..................................................................................................10-1 clear ip vrrp.....................................................................................................................10-2 ip vrrp .............................................................................................................................10-3 ip vrrp (virtual router ID) ...............................................................................................10-4 ip vrrp address ................................................................................................................10-5 ip vrrp authentication key ...............................................................................................10-6 ip vrrp authentication type..............................................................................................10-7 ip vrrp enable..................................................................................................................10-8 ip vrrp preempt ...............................................................................................................10-9 ip vrrp priority ..............................................................................................................10-10 ip vrrp primary-ip .........................................................................................................10-11 ip vrrp timer..................................................................................................................10-12 ip vrrp verify-availability .............................................................................................10-13 show ip vrrp..................................................................................................................10-14
11
IP Multicast Commands
Introduction ...............................................................................................................................11-1 MRTM Command Descriptions ................................................................................................11-1 ip mroute.........................................................................................................................11-2 ip mroute static distance .................................................................................................11-3 ip mroute unicast distance ..............................................................................................11-4 ip multicast-routing ........................................................................................................11-5 show ip rpf ......................................................................................................................11-6 MFM Command Descriptions...................................................................................................11-7 clear ip multicast fwd-cache...........................................................................................11-8 clear ip multicast proto-cache.........................................................................................11-9 mtrace ...........................................................................................................................11-10
xix
Release 5.2.1
show ip multicast cache-summary................................................................................ 11-11 show ip multicast fwd-cache ........................................................................................11-12 show ip multicast interface...........................................................................................11-13 show ip multicast oi-fwd-cache....................................................................................11-14 show ip multicast no-oi-fwd-cache ..............................................................................11-15 show ip multicast proto-cache ......................................................................................11-16
12
DVMRP Commands
Introduction ...............................................................................................................................12-1 DVMRP Command Descriptions..............................................................................................12-1 ip dvmrp accept-filter .....................................................................................................12-2 ip dvmrp default-information originate ..........................................................................12-3 ip dvmrp metric-offset ....................................................................................................12-4 ip dvmrp output-report-delay .........................................................................................12-5 ip dvmrp out-report-filter ...............................................................................................12-6 ip dvmrp probe-interval..................................................................................................12-7 ip dvmrp reject-non-pruners ...........................................................................................12-8 ip dvmrp summary-address ............................................................................................12-9 network .........................................................................................................................12-10 router dvmrp .................................................................................................................12-11 show ip dvmrp information ..........................................................................................12-12 show ip dvmrp interface ...............................................................................................12-13 show ip dvmrp neighbor...............................................................................................12-14 show ip dvmrp network ................................................................................................12-15 show ip dvmrp route.....................................................................................................12-16 show ip dvmrp route hold-down...................................................................................12-17 show ip dvmrp summary-route.....................................................................................12-18 show ip dvmrp tunnels..................................................................................................12-19
13
CMTS Commands
Introduction ...............................................................................................................................13-1 CMTS Command Descriptions .................................................................................................13-1 arp timeout......................................................................................................................13-2 balance............................................................................................................................13-3
xx
Release 5.2.1
Contents
band ................................................................................................................................13-4 bind cmts ........................................................................................................................13-5 bootrom-filename ...........................................................................................................13-6 bootrom-invalidate slot...................................................................................................13-7 cable bind........................................................................................................................13-8 cable bundle..................................................................................................................13-10 cable bundle master ......................................................................................................13-11 cable cmts type .............................................................................................................13-12 cable concatenation docsis-1.0 .....................................................................................13-13 cable deny ip.................................................................................................................13-14 cable dhcp force-unicast ...............................................................................................13-15 cable dhcp preserve-server-id.......................................................................................13-16 cable dhcp-giaddr primary............................................................................................13-17 cable dhcp leasequery message-type ............................................................................13-18 cable disable 3140-nbpwr-adjustment ..........................................................................13-20 cable disable bpi-cmcert ...............................................................................................13-21 cable disable eth-pkt-filtering.......................................................................................13-22 cable downstream aggregate.........................................................................................13-23 cable downstream bdm-interval ...................................................................................13-24 cable downstream bonding disable...............................................................................13-25 cable downstream bonding-domain..............................................................................13-26 cable downstream bonding-group ................................................................................13-27 cable downstream carrier-only .....................................................................................13-29 cable downstream channel-id .......................................................................................13-30 cable downstream channel-mode .................................................................................13-31 cable downstream description ......................................................................................13-32 cable downstream fiber-node........................................................................................13-33 cable downstream frequency ........................................................................................13-34 cable downstream interleave-depth ..............................................................................13-36 cable downstream loadbalance-group ..........................................................................13-38 cable downstream modulation......................................................................................13-39 cable downstream mot-bonding-group.........................................................................13-40 cable downstream multicast enable ..............................................................................13-42 cable downstream non-bonding-reset interval..............................................................13-43
xxi
Release 5.2.1
cable downstream port..................................................................................................13-44 cable downstream power-level .....................................................................................13-45 cable downstream primary-capable..............................................................................13-47 cable downstream rate-limit .........................................................................................13-48 cable downstream schedule ..........................................................................................13-49 cable downstream scrambler on ...................................................................................13-50 cable downstream shutdown.........................................................................................13-51 cable downstream sync-interval ...................................................................................13-52 cable downstream threshold .........................................................................................13-53 cable downstream trap-enable-if ..................................................................................13-55 cable downstream trap-enable-rdn ...............................................................................13-56 cable dtx type................................................................................................................13-57 cable dynamic-service admitted-timeout......................................................................13-58 cable fast-path cm.........................................................................................................13-59 cable filter group index src-ip.......................................................................................13-60 cable filter group index dst-ip.......................................................................................13-61 cable filter group index ulp...........................................................................................13-62 cable filter group index tos ...........................................................................................13-63 cable filter group index action......................................................................................13-64 cable filter group index enable .....................................................................................13-65 cable flap-list aging ......................................................................................................13-66 cable flap-list insertion-time.........................................................................................13-68 cable flap-list miss-threshold........................................................................................13-69 cable flap-list percentage threshold ..............................................................................13-70 cable flap-list power-adjust threshold ..........................................................................13-71 cable flap-list size .........................................................................................................13-72 cable flap-list trap-enable .............................................................................................13-73 cable helper-address .....................................................................................................13-74 cable helper-address host vendor-class-identifiers .......................................................13-76 cable host authorization range ......................................................................................13-77 cable insert-interval ......................................................................................................13-78 cable intercept...............................................................................................................13-79 cable ip-broadcast-echo ................................................................................................13-81 cable ip-multicast-echo.................................................................................................13-82
xxii
Release 5.2.1
Contents
cable load-balance ........................................................................................................13-83 cable loadbalance-group...............................................................................................13-84 cable loadbalance-policy ..............................................................................................13-85 cable loadbalance-restricted .........................................................................................13-86 cable loadbalance-rule ..................................................................................................13-88 cable load-balance spectrum-group ..............................................................................13-91 cable mdd-interval ........................................................................................................13-92 cable modem-aging-timer.............................................................................................13-93 cable modem dcc ..........................................................................................................13-94 cable modem deny ........................................................................................................13-96 cable modem disable loadbalancing .............................................................................13-97 cable modem max-hosts ...............................................................................................13-98 cable modem max-hosts-all..........................................................................................13-99 cable modem qos dsa..................................................................................................13-100 cable modem qos dsc..................................................................................................13-102 cable modem qos dsd..................................................................................................13-103 cable modem remote-query ........................................................................................13-104 cable modem remote-query source-interface .............................................................13-105 cable modem service-class-name ...............................................................................13-108 cable modem ucc ........................................................................................................13-110 cable modem updis .....................................................................................................13-112 cable modulation-profile ............................................................................................13-113 cable modulation-profile copy....................................................................................13-117 cable modulation-profile description..........................................................................13-118 cable modulation-profile reset....................................................................................13-119 cable mta-protection enable........................................................................................13-120 cable multicast ............................................................................................................13-121 cable multi-ds-override...............................................................................................13-123 cable privacy auth life-time ........................................................................................13-124 cable privacy cert........................................................................................................13-125 cable privacy cm-auth life-time..................................................................................13-126 cable privacy cm-auth reset ........................................................................................13-127 cable privacy cm-tek life-time....................................................................................13-129 cable privacy cm-tek reset ..........................................................................................13-130
xxiii
Release 5.2.1
cable privacy enforce-bpi-plus ...................................................................................13-131 cable privacy mandatory.............................................................................................13-132 cable privacy mcast ....................................................................................................13-134 cable privacy mcast access .........................................................................................13-135 cable privacy tek life-time ..........................................................................................13-136 cable qos max-burst....................................................................................................13-137 cable qos-profile .........................................................................................................13-138 cable security authorized ............................................................................................13-139 cable security failure...................................................................................................13-140 cable shared-secret......................................................................................................13-141 cable shared-secondary-secret ....................................................................................13-142 cable spectrum-group .................................................................................................13-143 cable spm-management ..............................................................................................13-144 cable submgmt default cpe-control active..................................................................13-145 cable submgmt default cpe-control learnable.............................................................13-146 cable submgmt default cpe-control max-cpe..............................................................13-147 cable submgmt default filter-group ............................................................................13-148 cable submgmt default filter-group cm ......................................................................13-149 cable sync-interval......................................................................................................13-150 cable tcpudp-filter group index src-port .....................................................................13-151 cable tcpudp-filter group index dst-port .....................................................................13-152 cable tcpudp-filter group index enable .......................................................................13-153 cable tcpudp-filter group index tcp-flag .....................................................................13-154 cable ucd-interval .......................................................................................................13-155 cable upstream active-codes .......................................................................................13-156 cable upstream capability ...........................................................................................13-157 cable upstream channel-id ..........................................................................................13-158 cable upstream channel-type ......................................................................................13-159 cable upstream channel-width ....................................................................................13-160 cable upstream codes-minislot ...................................................................................13-161 cable upstream concatenation.....................................................................................13-162 cable upstream data-backoff.......................................................................................13-163 cable upstream description .........................................................................................13-164 cable upstream eng-nb-atten-backoff value................................................................13-165
xxiv
Release 5.2.1
Contents
cable upstream eq-magnitude-scaling ........................................................................13-167 cable upstream force-frag ...........................................................................................13-169 cable upstream frequency ...........................................................................................13-170 cable upstream global-clock .......................................................................................13-172 cable upstream global-clock enable............................................................................13-173 cable upstream hopping-seed .....................................................................................13-174 cable upstream ingress-canceller enable ....................................................................13-175 cable upstream invited-range-interval ........................................................................13-176 cable upstream iuc11-grant-size .................................................................................13-177 cable upstream loadbalance-group .............................................................................13-178 cable upstream maintain-power-density on................................................................13-179 cable upstream map-interval.......................................................................................13-180 cable upstream max-calls ...........................................................................................13-181 cable upstream minislot-size ......................................................................................13-182 cable upstream modem-ranging-delay .......................................................................13-184 cable upstream modulation-profile.............................................................................13-185 cable upstream physical-delay....................................................................................13-187 cable upstream power-level ........................................................................................13-191 cable upstream power-level default............................................................................13-193 cable upstream pre-equalization .................................................................................13-195 cable upstream range-backoff.....................................................................................13-196 cable upstream range-forced-continue .......................................................................13-197 cable upstream range-power-override ........................................................................13-198 cable upstream rate-limit ............................................................................................13-199 cable upstream schedule .............................................................................................13-200 cable upstream shutdown ...........................................................................................13-201 cable upstream snr-offset............................................................................................13-202 cable upstream spectrum-group..................................................................................13-203 cable upstream spread-interval ...................................................................................13-204 cable upstream trap-enable-cmts ................................................................................13-205 cable upstream trap-enable-if .....................................................................................13-206 cable upstream trap-enable-rdn ..................................................................................13-207 cable utilization-interval.............................................................................................13-208 channel-type ...............................................................................................................13-209
xxv
Release 5.2.1
clear cable dcc-stats....................................................................................................13-211 clear cable downstream bonding-group statistics.......................................................13-212 clear cable flap-list .....................................................................................................13-213 clear cable host ...........................................................................................................13-214 clear cable modem ......................................................................................................13-215 clear cable modem downstream .................................................................................13-216 clear cable modem reject-pk reset ..............................................................................13-217 clear cable modem reject-pt reset ...............................................................................13-217 clear cable modem offline ..........................................................................................13-218 clear cable modem sync..............................................................................................13-219 clear cable qos svc-flow statistics...............................................................................13-220 clear cable srvclass-stats.............................................................................................13-221 clear cable ucc-stats....................................................................................................13-223 clear cable ugs-stats....................................................................................................13-224 clear counters cable ....................................................................................................13-225 clear interfaces cable upstream channel-agility-stats .................................................13-226 clear interfaces cable upstream signal-quality............................................................13-227 clear usage-stats..........................................................................................................13-228 cmts-id ........................................................................................................................13-229 codes-subframe...........................................................................................................13-230 collect interval ............................................................................................................13-231 collect resolution ........................................................................................................13-232 dhcp leasequery authorization on ...............................................................................13-233 differential-encoding on .............................................................................................13-234 docstest .......................................................................................................................13-235 docstest type ...............................................................................................................13-236 fec-codeword ..............................................................................................................13-238 fec-correction..............................................................................................................13-239 fft display....................................................................................................................13-240 fft setup .......................................................................................................................13-242 fft start ........................................................................................................................13-243 fft store........................................................................................................................13-244 frequency-test-method................................................................................................13-245 guard-band ..................................................................................................................13-246
xxvi
Release 5.2.1
Contents
hop action band...........................................................................................................13-247 hop action channel-width ...........................................................................................13-248 hop action frequency ..................................................................................................13-249 hop action modulation-profile ....................................................................................13-250 hop action power-level ...............................................................................................13-251 hop action roll-back....................................................................................................13-253 hop modulation-rollback-count ..................................................................................13-254 hop period...................................................................................................................13-255 hop snr hysteresis .......................................................................................................13-256 hop sampling-period active-channel...........................................................................13-258 hop sampling-period rollback-channel .......................................................................13-259 hop sampling-period spare-channel............................................................................13-260 hop threshold error .....................................................................................................13-261 hop threshold flap .......................................................................................................13-262 hop threshold snr modulation-type.............................................................................13-263 init-tech.......................................................................................................................13-265 interface cable.............................................................................................................13-266 interleaver-block-size .................................................................................................13-267 interleaver-depth.........................................................................................................13-268 interleaver-step-size....................................................................................................13-269 ip address ....................................................................................................................13-270 ip dhcp relay information option ................................................................................13-273 iuc ...............................................................................................................................13-274 last-codeword-length ..................................................................................................13-277 load-balancing ............................................................................................................13-278 load-balancing static...................................................................................................13-279 max-burst....................................................................................................................13-280 mdrc enable ................................................................................................................13-281 modulation-type..........................................................................................................13-282 ping docsis ..................................................................................................................13-284 policy rule...................................................................................................................13-285 preamble-length..........................................................................................................13-286 preamble-type .............................................................................................................13-287 reference-modem-exclusion .......................................................................................13-288
xxvii
Release 5.2.1
scrambler-mode ..........................................................................................................13-289 scrambler-seed ............................................................................................................13-290 show bindings.............................................................................................................13-291 show cable binding .....................................................................................................13-292 show cable bonding-group minrr-multipliers .............................................................13-294 show cable dcc-stats ...................................................................................................13-296 show cable downstream..............................................................................................13-298 show cable downstream bonding-groups ...................................................................13-301 show cable downstream idlist.....................................................................................13-304 show cable fiber-node.................................................................................................13-305 show cable filter .........................................................................................................13-307 show cable flap-list.....................................................................................................13-308 show cable insert-interval...........................................................................................13-310 show cable loadbalance-group ...................................................................................13-311 show cable loadbalance-no-move-list ........................................................................13-313 show cable loadbalance-policy...................................................................................13-315 show cable loadbalance-restricted..............................................................................13-317 show cable loadbalance-rule.......................................................................................13-318 show cable md-ds-sg ..................................................................................................13-319 show cable modem .....................................................................................................13-321 show cable modem bonding .......................................................................................13-325 show cable modem cpe...............................................................................................13-327 show cable modem detail ...........................................................................................13-330 show cable modem downstream.................................................................................13-333 show cable flap-list.....................................................................................................13-336 show cable modem hosts ............................................................................................13-339 show cable modem loadbalance-group ......................................................................13-341 show cable modem mac..............................................................................................13-343 show cable modem mac30..........................................................................................13-346 show cable modem maintenance ................................................................................13-349 show cable modem max-rate ......................................................................................13-351 show cable modem mta ..............................................................................................13-352 show cable modem ps.................................................................................................13-352 show cable modem stb................................................................................................13-352
xxviii
Release 5.2.1
Contents
show cable modem offline..........................................................................................13-357 show cable modem offline-previous ..........................................................................13-359 show cable modem phy ..............................................................................................13-361 show cable modem qos...............................................................................................13-364 show cable modem qos summary...............................................................................13-367 show cable modem registered ....................................................................................13-370 show cable modem remote-query...............................................................................13-373 show cable modem security........................................................................................13-378 show cable modem stats .............................................................................................13-383 show cable modem summary .....................................................................................13-386 show cable modem summary total .............................................................................13-389 show cable modem svc-flow-id..................................................................................13-391 show cable modem svc-flow-id detail........................................................................13-393 show cable modem time-registered ............................................................................13-396 show cable modem timing-offset ...............................................................................13-399 show cable modem unregistered ................................................................................13-403 show cable modem vendor .........................................................................................13-405 show cable modem vendor summary .........................................................................13-407 show cable modem verbose........................................................................................13-409 show cable modulation-profile ...................................................................................13-411 show cable modulation-profile brief ..........................................................................13-414 show cable modulation-profile description ................................................................13-415 show cable privacy auth .............................................................................................13-416 show cable privacy cm-auth .......................................................................................13-417 show cable privacy cm-tek .........................................................................................13-418 show cable privacy cmts.............................................................................................13-420 show cable privacy enforce-bpi-plus..........................................................................13-421 show cable privacy mandatory ...................................................................................13-422 show cable privacy tek ...............................................................................................13-423 show cable qos profile ................................................................................................13-424 show cable qos profile user-defined ...........................................................................13-427 show cable qos svc-flow classifier .............................................................................13-430 show cable qos svc-flow dynamic-stat .......................................................................13-433 show cable qos svc-flow log.......................................................................................13-434
xxix
Release 5.2.1
show cable qos svc-flow param-set............................................................................13-435 show cable qos svc-flow phs ......................................................................................13-437 show cable qos svc-flow statistics..............................................................................13-439 show cable qos svc-flow summary.............................................................................13-441 show cable qos svc-flow upstream-stat ......................................................................13-442 show cable spectrum-group........................................................................................13-443 show cable spectrum-group load-balance summary...................................................13-446 show cable spectrum-group map ................................................................................13-447 show cable spectrum-group modem-exclusion-list ....................................................13-449 show cable spectrum-group reference-modem...........................................................13-450 show cable spectrum-group snr-thresholds ................................................................13-451 show cable spectrum-group stats................................................................................13-452 show cable submgmt default ......................................................................................13-454 show cable sync-interval ............................................................................................13-455 show cable tcpudp-filter .............................................................................................13-456 show cable ucc-stats ...................................................................................................13-457 show cable ucd-interval..............................................................................................13-459 show cable ugs-stats ...................................................................................................13-460 show cable upstream...................................................................................................13-462 show cable upstream global-clock..............................................................................13-466 show controllers cable ds-mac....................................................................................13-467 show controllers cable ds-phy ....................................................................................13-471 show docsis-version....................................................................................................13-473 show docstest..............................................................................................................13-474 show interfaces cable..................................................................................................13-475 show interfaces cable bandwidth voice ......................................................................13-481 show interfaces cable configuration ...........................................................................13-483 show interfaces cable downstream .............................................................................13-485 show interfaces cable intercept...................................................................................13-488 show interfaces cable service-class ............................................................................13-490 show interfaces cable stats..........................................................................................13-493 show interfaces cable upstream ..................................................................................13-495 show interfaces cable upstream channel-agility-stats.................................................13-500 show running-config cable downstream port .............................................................13-502
xxx
Release 5.2.1
Contents
show stats cmts ...........................................................................................................13-504 show stats summary error ...........................................................................................13-507 snr display...................................................................................................................13-509 snr loop .......................................................................................................................13-510 snr setup......................................................................................................................13-512 snr setup-get................................................................................................................13-514 snr setup-spare-mod-profile........................................................................................13-515 snr start .......................................................................................................................13-516 snr store ......................................................................................................................13-517 spectrum-copy ............................................................................................................13-518 spreader on..................................................................................................................13-519 tcm-encoding on .........................................................................................................13-520 time band ....................................................................................................................13-521 time delete ..................................................................................................................13-522 vendor-class-identifier ................................................................................................13-523
14
QoS Commands
Introduction ...............................................................................................................................14-1 QoS Command Descriptions .....................................................................................................14-1 qos bw default.................................................................................................................14-2 qos queue bw ..................................................................................................................14-3 qos queue dot1p..............................................................................................................14-4 show qos queue config ...................................................................................................14-5
15
POS Commands
Introduction ...............................................................................................................................15-1 POS Command Descriptions.....................................................................................................15-2 aps force..........................................................................................................................15-3 aps group ........................................................................................................................15-4 aps lockout......................................................................................................................15-5 aps manual ......................................................................................................................15-6 aps protect.......................................................................................................................15-7 aps revert ........................................................................................................................15-8 aps signal-degrade ber threshold ....................................................................................15-9
xxxi
Release 5.2.1
aps signal-fail ber threshold..........................................................................................15-10 aps unidirectional..........................................................................................................15-11 aps working ..................................................................................................................15-12 crc .................................................................................................................................15-13 interface pos..................................................................................................................15-14 ip address ......................................................................................................................15-15 peer default ip address ..................................................................................................15-16 pos ais-shut ...................................................................................................................15-17 pos flag .........................................................................................................................15-18 pos framing...................................................................................................................15-20 pos internal-clock .........................................................................................................15-21 pos report ......................................................................................................................15-22 pos scramble .................................................................................................................15-24 pos signal mode ............................................................................................................15-25 pos threshold.................................................................................................................15-26 ppp magic-number........................................................................................................15-28 ppp negotiation-count...................................................................................................15-29 ppp timeout...................................................................................................................15-30 show aps .......................................................................................................................15-31 show controllers pos .....................................................................................................15-32 show interfaces pos.......................................................................................................15-34 show ppp info ...............................................................................................................15-37 show ppp statistics........................................................................................................15-38
16
BGP Commands
Introduction ...............................................................................................................................16-1 BGP Command Descriptions ....................................................................................................16-1 aggregate-address ...........................................................................................................16-2 auto-summary .................................................................................................................16-3 bgp always-compare-med...............................................................................................16-4 bgp client-to-client reflection .........................................................................................16-5 bgp cluster-id ..................................................................................................................16-6 bgp confederation identifier ...........................................................................................16-7 bgp confederation peers..................................................................................................16-8
xxxii
Release 5.2.1
Contents
bgp dampening ...............................................................................................................16-9 bgp default ....................................................................................................................16-11 bgp permit.....................................................................................................................16-12 bgp router-id .................................................................................................................16-13 clear ip bgp ...................................................................................................................16-14 clear ip bgp dampening ................................................................................................16-15 clear ip bgp flap-statistics.............................................................................................16-16 default-information originate........................................................................................16-17 default-metric ...............................................................................................................16-18 distance bgp ..................................................................................................................16-19 distribute-list in.............................................................................................................16-21 distribute-list out...........................................................................................................16-22 ip as-path access-list .....................................................................................................16-23 ip bgp-community new-format.....................................................................................16-24 ip community-list..........................................................................................................16-26 match as-path................................................................................................................16-28 match community .........................................................................................................16-29 maximum-paths ............................................................................................................16-30 neighbor advertisement-interval...................................................................................16-31 neighbor confed-segment .............................................................................................16-32 neighbor default-originate ............................................................................................16-33 neighbor description .....................................................................................................16-34 neighbor distribute-list..................................................................................................16-35 neighbor ebgp-multihop ...............................................................................................16-36 neighbor filter-list .........................................................................................................16-37 neighbor maximum-prefix............................................................................................16-39 neighbor next-hop-self..................................................................................................16-41 neighbor password........................................................................................................16-42 neighbor peer-group (assigning members) ...................................................................16-43 neighbor peer-group (creating).....................................................................................16-44 neighbor remote-as .......................................................................................................16-45 neighbor remove-private-as..........................................................................................16-47 neighbor route-map ......................................................................................................16-48 neighbor route-reflector-client......................................................................................16-49
xxxiii
Release 5.2.1
neighbor route-refresh ..................................................................................................16-50 neighbor send-community ............................................................................................16-51 neighbor shutdown .......................................................................................................16-52 neighbor soft-reconfiguration inbound.........................................................................16-53 neighbor timers.............................................................................................................16-54 neighbor update-source loopback.................................................................................16-56 neighbor weight ............................................................................................................16-57 network .........................................................................................................................16-58 redistribute....................................................................................................................16-59 route-map......................................................................................................................16-61 router bgp......................................................................................................................16-62 set as-path prepend .......................................................................................................16-63 set comm-list ................................................................................................................16-64 set community ..............................................................................................................16-66 set ip next-hop ..............................................................................................................16-68 set local-preference.......................................................................................................16-69 set metric-type ..............................................................................................................16-70 set origin .......................................................................................................................16-71 set tag............................................................................................................................16-72 set weight......................................................................................................................16-73 show ip as-path-access-list ...........................................................................................16-74 show ip bgp...................................................................................................................16-75 show ip bgp cidr-only ...................................................................................................16-77 show ip bgp community ...............................................................................................16-78 show ip bgp community-list .........................................................................................16-80 show ip bgp dampened-paths .......................................................................................16-81 show ip bgp flap-statistics ............................................................................................16-82 show ip bgp ipv4 unicast ..............................................................................................16-84 show ip bgp memory ....................................................................................................16-88 show ip bgp neighbors..................................................................................................16-90 show ip bgp next-hops..................................................................................................16-92 show ip bgp paths .........................................................................................................16-93 show ip bgp peer-group ................................................................................................16-94 show ip bgp regexp.......................................................................................................16-96
xxxiv
Release 5.2.1
Contents
show ip bgp summary...................................................................................................16-97 show ip community-list ................................................................................................16-99 synchronization...........................................................................................................16-100 timers bgp ...................................................................................................................16-101
17
PIM Commands
Introduction ...............................................................................................................................17-1 PIM Command Descriptions .....................................................................................................17-1 ip pim border ..................................................................................................................17-2 ip pim bsr-candidate .......................................................................................................17-3 ip pim bsr-candidate ip-address......................................................................................17-4 ip pim dr-priority ............................................................................................................17-5 ip pim message-interval..................................................................................................17-6 ip pim query-interval ......................................................................................................17-7 ip pim rp-candidate.........................................................................................................17-8 ip pim rp-candidate group-list ........................................................................................17-9 ip pim rp-candidate interval..........................................................................................17-10 ip pim rp-candidate ip-address .....................................................................................17-11 ip pim rp-candidate priority..........................................................................................17-12 ip pim spt-threshold lasthop .........................................................................................17-13 ip pim spt-threshold rp..................................................................................................17-14 ip pim ssm.....................................................................................................................17-15 network .........................................................................................................................17-16 pim accept-rp ................................................................................................................17-17 pim graceful-restart restart-interval..............................................................................17-18 pim register-checksum..................................................................................................17-19 pim rp-address ..............................................................................................................17-20 pim unicast-route-lookup..............................................................................................17-22 router pim .....................................................................................................................17-23 show ip pim ..................................................................................................................17-24
xxxv
Release 5.2.1
18
MPLS Commands
Introduction ...............................................................................................................................18-1 About RSVP ...................................................................................................................18-3 MPLS Command Descriptions..................................................................................................18-3 clear ip rsvp statistics......................................................................................................18-4 clear mpls traffic.............................................................................................................18-5 debug mpls forwarding...................................................................................................18-6 debug mpls rsvp..............................................................................................................18-7 ip rsvp .............................................................................................................................18-9 mpls create-lsp rsvp......................................................................................................18-11 mpls create-lsp rsvp explicit-route identifier................................................................18-12 mpls create-lsp rsvp next-hop.......................................................................................18-13 mpls create-lsp static ....................................................................................................18-14 mpls fp max ..................................................................................................................18-16 mpls ip ..........................................................................................................................18-17 mpls label range............................................................................................................18-18 mpls rsvp restart-lsp .....................................................................................................18-20 mpls ttl ..........................................................................................................................18-21 show fast-path ranges ...................................................................................................18-22 show ip rsvp explicit-routed-lsps..................................................................................18-23 show ip rsvp interface...................................................................................................18-24 show ip rsvp lsp ............................................................................................................18-25 show ip rsvp neighbor ..................................................................................................18-26 show ip rsvp reservation...............................................................................................18-27 show ip rsvp sender ......................................................................................................18-28 show ip rsvp statistics...................................................................................................18-29 show mpls filters...........................................................................................................18-30 show mpls forwarding-table .........................................................................................18-32 show mpls label range ..................................................................................................18-35 show mpls lsp ...............................................................................................................18-36 show mpls lsp interface ................................................................................................18-39 show mpls rsvp refresh-time ........................................................................................18-41 show mpls traffic ..........................................................................................................18-42
xxxvi
Release 5.2.1
Contents
19
Service Class Commands

Introduction ...............................................................................................................................19-1 Entering Service Class Configuration Mode..................................................................19-2 Service Class Command Descriptions ......................................................................................19-2 activity-timeout...............................................................................................................19-3 admission-timeout ..........................................................................................................19-4 admitted-bw-threshold....................................................................................................19-5 allow-share .....................................................................................................................19-6 cable service-class ..........................................................................................................19-7 cap...................................................................................................................................19-8 clear cable srvclass-stats.................................................................................................19-9 enforce-cmts-qos ..........................................................................................................19-10 grant-interval ................................................................................................................19-11 grant-jitter .....................................................................................................................19-12 grant-size ......................................................................................................................19-13 grants-per-interval ........................................................................................................19-14 mab ...............................................................................................................................19-15 max-burst......................................................................................................................19-17 max-concat-burst ..........................................................................................................19-18 max-latency ..................................................................................................................19-19 max-rate........................................................................................................................19-20 min-pkt-size..................................................................................................................19-21 min-rate.........................................................................................................................19-22 name .............................................................................................................................19-23 over-max-rate ...............................................................................................................19-24 poll-interval ..................................................................................................................19-25 poll-jitter .......................................................................................................................19-26 req-trans-policy.............................................................................................................19-27 restricted admission disabled........................................................................................19-29 schedpriority .................................................................................................................19-30 show cable service-class...............................................................................................19-31 show cable srvclass-stats ..............................................................................................19-35 tos-overwrite.................................................................................................................19-37 trafpriority.....................................................................................................................19-38
xxxvii
Release 5.2.1
ugs-stats-window..........................................................................................................19-39
20
Secure Shell Server Commands

Introduction ...............................................................................................................................20-1 Secure Shell Server Command Descriptions ............................................................................20-1 password ssh-passphrase ................................................................................................20-2 show ssh config ..............................................................................................................20-3 show ssh hostkey-fingerprint..........................................................................................20-6 show users ssh ................................................................................................................20-7 ssh ciphers ......................................................................................................................20-8 ssh enable......................................................................................................................20-10 ssh-keygen2 ..................................................................................................................20-11 ssh load-host-key-files..................................................................................................20-13 ssh logout session-id.....................................................................................................20-14 ssh message-authentication ..........................................................................................20-15 ssh password-authentication radius ..............................................................................20-16 ssh password-guesses ...................................................................................................20-17 ssh port..........................................................................................................................20-18 ssh session-limit............................................................................................................20-19 ssh timeout....................................................................................................................20-20
21
PacketCable Commands
Overview ...................................................................................................................................21-1 Command Descriptions .............................................................................................................21-1 cable dynamic-service authorization-mode....................................................................21-2 cable dynamic-service active-timeout ............................................................................21-4 clear configuration..........................................................................................................21-5 clear cops pdp-ip all........................................................................................................21-6 clear counters ipsec.........................................................................................................21-7 clear packet-cable cops...................................................................................................21-8 clear packet-cable gate ...................................................................................................21-9 clear packet-cable statistics ..........................................................................................21-10 cmts-ip ..........................................................................................................................21-11 cops client-timer ...........................................................................................................21-12
xxxviii
Release 5.2.1
Contents
cops pdp-ip ...................................................................................................................21-13 cops pep-id....................................................................................................................21-14 cops status-trap-enable .................................................................................................21-15 dqos dscp ......................................................................................................................21-16 dqos emergency-preempt..............................................................................................21-17 dqos emergency-trap-enable.........................................................................................21-18 dqos res-req-trap-enable ...............................................................................................21-19 dqos shutdown ..............................................................................................................21-20 dqos t0-timer/t1-timer...................................................................................................21-21 em dscp .........................................................................................................................21-22 em element-number ......................................................................................................21-23 em event-disable-mask .................................................................................................21-24 em event-priority ..........................................................................................................21-25 em flag-override ...........................................................................................................21-26 em max-batch-events....................................................................................................21-27 em max-batch-time.......................................................................................................21-28 em qos-descriptor-disable.............................................................................................21-29 em retry-count ..............................................................................................................21-30 em retry-interval ...........................................................................................................21-31 em rks-failure-trap-enable ............................................................................................21-32 em shutdown.................................................................................................................21-34 em udp-port ..................................................................................................................21-35 es...................................................................................................................................21-36 es ccc-dscp....................................................................................................................21-38 ike client-addr ...............................................................................................................21-39 ike phase1 .....................................................................................................................21-40 ike phase2 .....................................................................................................................21-41 ike retries ......................................................................................................................21-42 ike timeout ....................................................................................................................21-43 ipsec..............................................................................................................................21-44 ipsec shutdown .............................................................................................................21-45 mm dscp........................................................................................................................21-46 mm shutdown ...............................................................................................................21-47 mm t1-timer ..................................................................................................................21-48
xxxix
Release 5.2.1
packet-cable..................................................................................................................21-49 show cable dynamic-service.........................................................................................21-50 show ipsec ....................................................................................................................21-51 show packet-cable configuration ..................................................................................21-54 show packet-cable cops ................................................................................................21-59 show packet-cable gate.................................................................................................21-61 show packet-cable statistics..........................................................................................21-64 spd allow-dynamic-rsp .................................................................................................21-69 spd override ..................................................................................................................21-70 spd policy......................................................................................................................21-71 spd preshared-key .........................................................................................................21-73
22
VLAN Tagging Commands

Introduction ...............................................................................................................................22-1 VLAN Tagging Command Descriptions...................................................................................22-1 bridge cable intercept .....................................................................................................22-2 bridge cable modem .......................................................................................................22-4 bridge mode trunk...........................................................................................................22-5 clear bridge vlan counters...............................................................................................22-6 encapsulation dot1q ........................................................................................................22-7 show bridge vlan.............................................................................................................22-8
23
DSG Commands
Introduction ...............................................................................................................................23-1 Command Descriptions .............................................................................................................23-1 cable downstream dsg.....................................................................................................23-2 cable downstream dsg enable .........................................................................................23-3 cable dsg .........................................................................................................................23-4 channel-list .....................................................................................................................23-5 classifier..........................................................................................................................23-6 client-list .........................................................................................................................23-8 group-map.....................................................................................................................23-10 show cable dsg..............................................................................................................23-12 show cable dsg channel-list ..........................................................................................23-14
xl
Release 5.2.1
Contents
show cable dsg classifier ..............................................................................................23-15 show cable dsg client-list..............................................................................................23-16 show cable dsg downstream .........................................................................................23-17 show cable dsg group-map ...........................................................................................23-18 show cable dsg timer ....................................................................................................23-19 show cable dsg tunnel...................................................................................................23-20 show cable dsg tunnel-group ........................................................................................23-21 show cable dsg vendor-param ......................................................................................23-22 timer..............................................................................................................................23-23 tunnel ............................................................................................................................23-25 vendor-param................................................................................................................23-27
24
IPDR Commands
Introduction ...............................................................................................................................24-1 Command Descriptions .............................................................................................................24-1 debug ipdr.......................................................................................................................24-2 ipdr acksequenceinterval ................................................................................................24-3 ipdr acktimeinterval........................................................................................................24-4 ipdr collection-interval ...................................................................................................24-5 ipdr collector...................................................................................................................24-6 ipdr enable ......................................................................................................................24-9 ipdr keepaliveinterval ...................................................................................................24-10 ipdr poll-rate .................................................................................................................24-11 ipdr source-interface.....................................................................................................24-12 show cable metering-status...........................................................................................24-13 show ipdr connection....................................................................................................24-15 show ipdr session..........................................................................................................24-16
25
Cable Traffic Management Commands

Introduction ...............................................................................................................................25-1 Command Descriptions .............................................................................................................25-1 bidirectional....................................................................................................................25-2 cable traffic sample-interval ...........................................................................................25-3 cable traffic policy ..........................................................................................................25-4
xli
Release 5.2.1
clear cable traffic enforcement .......................................................................................25-6 clear cable traffic history ................................................................................................25-7 credit ...............................................................................................................................25-8 enabled..........................................................................................................................25-10 enforce ..........................................................................................................................25-12 max-rate........................................................................................................................25-14 peak-time ......................................................................................................................25-16 penalty-period...............................................................................................................25-18 show cable subscriber-usage ........................................................................................25-20 show cable subscriber-usage summary.........................................................................25-26 show cable traffic policy ..............................................................................................25-29
26
IPv6 Commands
Introduction ...............................................................................................................................26-1 IPv6 Command Descriptions ....................................................................................................26-1 cable ipv6 helper-address ...............................................................................................26-2 cable ip prov-mode .........................................................................................................26-4 clear ipv6 neighbor-cache...............................................................................................26-6 clear ipv6 traffic .............................................................................................................26-7 ipv4 range .......................................................................................................................26-8 ipv6 address ....................................................................................................................26-9 ipv6 helper-address.......................................................................................................26-11 ipv6 icmp error-interval................................................................................................26-12 ipv6 nd ..........................................................................................................................26-13 ipv6 neighbor................................................................................................................26-15 ipv6 range .....................................................................................................................26-16 ipv6 redirects ................................................................................................................26-17 ipv6 route......................................................................................................................26-18 ipv6 unicast-routing......................................................................................................26-19 ping6 .............................................................................................................................26-20 service ipv6 cpe-forwarding enable..............................................................................26-21 show ipv6 dhcp.............................................................................................................26-22 show ipv6 interface.......................................................................................................26-24 show ipv6 interface brief ..............................................................................................26-27
xlii
Release 5.2.1
Contents
show ipv6 neighbor ......................................................................................................26-29 show ipv6 route ............................................................................................................26-31 show ipv6 traffic...........................................................................................................26-33 traceroute6 ....................................................................................................................26-36
27
IS-IS Commands
Introduction ...............................................................................................................................27-1 IS-IS Command Descriptions....................................................................................................27-1 area-password .................................................................................................................27-2 authentication mode........................................................................................................27-3 clear isis ..........................................................................................................................27-4 default-information originate..........................................................................................27-5 distance ...........................................................................................................................27-6 domain-password............................................................................................................27-7 hello padding ..................................................................................................................27-8 ignore-lsp-errors .............................................................................................................27-9 ip router isis ..................................................................................................................27-10 isis authentication mode ...............................................................................................27-11 isis circuit-type .............................................................................................................27-12 isis csnp-interval...........................................................................................................27-13 isis hello padding..........................................................................................................27-14 isis hello-interval ..........................................................................................................27-15 isis hello-multiplier.......................................................................................................27-16 isis lsp-interval..............................................................................................................27-17 isis message-digest-key ................................................................................................27-18 isis metric......................................................................................................................27-19 isis network point-to-point ...........................................................................................27-20 isis password.................................................................................................................27-21 isis priority....................................................................................................................27-22 isis retransmit-interval ..................................................................................................27-23 isis retransmit-throttle-interval .....................................................................................27-24 is-type ...........................................................................................................................27-25 log-adjacency-changes .................................................................................................27-26 lsp-gen-interval.............................................................................................................27-27
xliii
Release 5.2.1
lsp-refresh-interval .......................................................................................................27-28 max-lsp-lifetime ...........................................................................................................27-29 maximum-paths ............................................................................................................27-30 message-digest-key md5 ..............................................................................................27-31 metric-style ...................................................................................................................27-32 net .................................................................................................................................27-33 passive-interface ...........................................................................................................27-34 redistribute....................................................................................................................27-35 router isis ......................................................................................................................27-37 set-overload-bit.............................................................................................................27-38 show clns interface .......................................................................................................27-39 show clns is-neighbors .................................................................................................27-42 show clns neighbors .....................................................................................................27-44 show clns protocol........................................................................................................27-46 show clns traffic ...........................................................................................................27-48 show ip redistribute ......................................................................................................27-51 show isis database.........................................................................................................27-53 show isis hostname .......................................................................................................27-56 show isis neighbors.......................................................................................................27-57 show isis spf-log ...........................................................................................................27-59 show isis topology ........................................................................................................27-64 summary-address..........................................................................................................27-66
Index
xliv
Preface
Scope
This document describes how to install and configure the Motorola Broadband Services Router 64000 (BSR 64000).
Audience
This document is for use by those persons who will install and configure the BSR 64000 product. Only trained service personnel should install, maintain, or replace the BSR 64000.
Documentation Set
The following documents comprise the BSR 64000 documentation set:
BSR 64000 Quick Start Guide The quick start guide provides a "roadmap" to the tasks involved in physically installing the BSR 64000 product, physically connecting it to your network/HFC infrastructure, and performing configuration tasks to enable the BSR 64000 to operate in your networking environment.
BSR 64000 Installation Guide This guide provides detailed instructions for physically installing the BSR 64000 product including: procedures for rack mounting, making physical network cable connections, connecting DC power, and for determining the status of the BSR 64000 after applying power to it. This document also provides a description of the BSR 64000 chassis, its hardware components and modules.
xlv
Release 5.2.1
BSR 64000 Resource and I/O Module Installation Guide This guide contains procedures for installing additional and replacement Resource and I/O Modules in a BSR 64000 chassis and for making physical cable connections to the modules.
BSR 64000 Command Line Interface Users Guide For users, this guide describes the structure of the BSR 64000 Command Line Interface (CLI) and its various command modes. It also provides rules and guidelines for navigating through the CLI.
BSR 64000 Command Reference Guide This guide contains individual descriptions of the entire set of commands that comprise the BSR 64000 Command Line Interface (CLI). These commands are used to interface with, configure, manage, and maintain the BSR 64000.
BSR 64000 System Administration Guide For system administrators, this guide provides detailed procedures for performing initial configuration tasks including setting up: user accounts and passwords; telnet and console access; system logging; and associated servers such as DHCP, DNS, etc.
BSR 64000 CMTS Configuration and Management Guide This guide provides the instructions and procedures for configuring and managing BSR 64000 CMTS operation.
BSR 64000 Routing Configuration and Management Guide This guide contains the instructions and procedures for configuring and managing BSR 64000 routing operation, including RIP, OSPF, and BGP.
BSR 64000 SNMP Configuration and Management Guide This guide provides the instructions and procedures for configuring and managing BSR 64000 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) operation. It also describes SNMP MIBs; provides information that describes standard and proprietary MIB support; describes how to walk MIBs; and how to compile and load SNMP MIBs.
BSR 64000 BGP/MPLS VPN Configuration Guide
ii-xlvi
Release 5.2.1
Preface
This guide provides the instructions and procedures for configuring and managing the BSR 64000 to support and implement Border Gateway Protocol/ MultiProtocol Label Switching Virtual Private Networks (BGP/MPLS VPNs).
BSR 64000 Troubleshooting Guide This guide contains instructions and procedures for troubleshooting typical configuration problems that might be encountered using the BSR 64000. It also offers suggestions for information to record, and have available should the need arise to call Motorola support for assistance with BSR 64000 operational problems.
BSR 64000 Release Notes These documents are specific to each release of the BSR 64000 product (software and hardware). Release notes provide information about features not documented or incorrectly documented in the main documentation set; known problems and anomalies; product limitations; and problem resolutions.
Conventions
This document uses the conventions in the following table: Convention
angle brackets < >
Example
ping <ip-address> ping 54.89.145.71
Explanation
Arguments in italic and enclosed by angle brackets must be replaced by the text the argument represents. In the example, 54.89.145.71 replaces <ip-address>. When entering the argument, do not type the angle brackets. Bar brackets enclose optional arguments. The example indicates you can use the disable command with or without specifying a level. Some commands accept more than one optional argument. When entering the argument, do not type the bar brackets. Boldface text must be typed exactly as it appears.
bar brackets [ ]
disable [level]
bold text
cable relay-agent-option
ii-xlvii
Release 5.2.1
Convention
brace brackets {}
Example
page {on | off}
Explanation
Brace brackets enclose required text. The example indicates you must enter either on or off after page. The system accepts the command with only one of the parameters. When entering the text, do not type the brace brackets. Italic type indicates variables for which you supply values in command syntax descriptions. It also indicates file names, directory names, document titles, or emphasized text. This font indicates system output. A vertical bar separates the choices when a parameter is required. The example indicates you can enter either command: page on or page off When entering the parameter, do not type the vertical bar or the brace brackets.
italic text
boot system <filename>
screen display
vertical bar |
Wed May 6 17:01:03 2000

page {on | off}
Notes, Cautions, Warnings

The following icons and associated text may appear in this document. Note: A note contains tips, suggestions, and other helpful information, such as references to material not contained in the document, that can help you complete a task or understand the subject matter.
Caution: The exclamation point, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of important installation, servicing, and operating instructions in the documents accompanying the equipment.
Warning: This symbol indicates that dangerous voltage levels are present within the equipment. These voltages are not insulated and may be of sufficient strength to cause serious bodily injury when touched. The symbol may also appear on schematics.
ii-xlviii
Release 5.2.1
Preface
If You Need Help

If you need assistance while working with the BSR 64000 HD or BSR 64000, contact the Motorola Technical Response Center (TRC):
Inside the U.S. Outside the U.S. Motorola Online 1-888-944-HELP 1-888-944-4357 +1-215-323-0044 http://businessonline.motorola.com
The TRC is on call 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. In addition, Motorola Online offers a searchable solutions database, technical documentation, and low-priority issue creation and tracking.
ii-xlix
1
Introduction
This chapter describes the following types of commands for the BSR 64000: User management commands which establish authentication and to protect the network from unauthorized users. Configuration file commands that handle the operating system and the system software for the BSR. The configuration file commands allow you to customize the operating system configuration at system startup, and to modify and store the configuration file for later use. System services commands that globally configure IP system services used with the BSR, such as protocols, NVRAM, IP parameters, the operating system, and the system clock Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) commands that are used with the BSR to access online directory services over the TCP/IP network protocol. The BSR becomes an LDAP client and connects to an LDAP server to requests services and/or information.
1-1
Release 5.2.1
Logger commands which provide a way to configure system event reporting intended for diagnostics. The information in the report contains actions such as system startup, status, and event classes.
System Administration Command Descriptions

This section contains an alphabetized list and descriptions of the system administration commands supported by the BSR.
1-2
Release 5.2.1
aaa accounting commands default

The aaa accounting commands default command enables command use accounting on the BSR. Enabling command use accounting provides resource usage data for commands used at a specified privilege level by creating a default list of methods used for accounting services. The no aaa accounting commands command disables command use accounting.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Line Usage

aaa accounting commands {exec | isp-ro | isp-rw | mso-ro | mso-rw | sysadmin} default {none | start-stop | stop-only | wait-start} {local | none | radius | tacacs} no aaa accounting commands [exec | isp-ro | isp-rw | mso-ro | mso-rw | sysadmin]
Command Syntax
exec isp-ro isp-rw mso-ro mso-rw sysadmin none commands in the User EXEC privilege level commands in the ISP Read/Only privilege level commands in the ISP Read/Write privilege level commands in the MSO Read/Only privilege level commands in the MSO Read/Write privilege level commands in the SYSADMIN privilege level disables accounting services
1-3
Release 5.2.1
start-stop
sends a "start" accounting notice at the beginning of a process and a "stop" accounting notice at the end of a process - the requested user process begins regardless of whether the "start" accounting notice was received by the accounting server sends a "stop" accounting notice at the end of the requested user process - does not send a "start" accounting request at the start of the process sends a "start" accounting notice at the beginning of a process and a "stop" accounting notice at the end of a process - the requested user process does not begin until the "start" accounting notice is received by the server local database to be used as the accounting method no method is specified as the accounting method RADIUS to be used as the accounting method. TACACS+ to be used as the accounting method.
stop-only
wait-start
local none radius tacacs
1-4
Release 5.2.1
aaa accounting exec default

The aaa accounting exec default command enables terminal session accounting on the BSR. Enabling terminal session accounting provides resource usage data for a specified terminal session and creates a default list of methods used for accounting services. The no aaa accounting exec command disables terminal session accounting.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

aaa accounting exec {none | start-stop | stop-only | wait-start} default {local | none | tacacs} no aaa accounting exec
Command Syntax
none start-stop disables accounting services sends a "start" accounting notice at the beginning of a process and a "stop" accounting notice at the end of a process - the requested user process begins regardless of whether the "start" accounting notice was received by the accounting server sends a "stop" accounting notice at the end of the requested user process - does not send a "start" accounting request at the start of the process
stop-only
1-5
Release 5.2.1
wait-start
sends a "start" accounting notice at the beginning of a process and a "stop" accounting notice at the end of a process - the requested user process does not begin until the "start" accounting notice is received by the server local database to be used as the authorization method. no method is specified as the accounting method RADIUS to be used as the accounting method. TACACS+ to be used as the accounting method.
local none radius tacacs
1-6
Release 5.2.1
aaa authentication enable default

The aaa authentication enable default command enables AAA authentication to determine if a user can access the privilege level 15 (system administrator). The aaa authentication enable default command enables a specific authentication method or list of methods The no aaa authentication enable command disables AAA authentication.
Note: If multiple authentication methods are specified, the methods are invoked in the sequence they are configured.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

aaa authentication enable default {enable | local | none | radius | tacacs} no aaa authentication enable
Command Syntax
enable local none radius tacacs enable password command setup to be used as the authentication method local database to be used as the authentication method no method is specified as the authentication method RADIUS to be used as the authentication method TACACS+ to be used as the authentication method
1-7
Release 5.2.1
aaa authentication fail-message

The aaa authentication fail-message command allows you to configure an error message to display when a TACACS login has failed. The no aaa authentication login default command disables the error message.
Group Access
System Administrator
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

aaa authentication fail-message [<LINE>] no aaa authentication fail-message
Command Syntax
LINE the text message to display for the failed login/authentication
1-8
Release 5.2.1
aaa authentication local-override

The aaa authentication local-override command enables local authentication. This command overrides any configured default authentication method. A configured default authentication method will be used only if local authentication fails. The no aaa authentication local-override disables local authentication.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

aaa authentication local-override no aaa authentication local-override
Command Default
Disabled
1-9
Release 5.2.1
aaa authentication login default

The aaa authentication login default command enables AAA authentication to determine if a user can login to the BSR. The no aaa authentication login default command disables AAA login authentication.
Note: If multiple authentication methods are specified, the methods are invoked in the sequence they are configured.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

aaa authentication login default {enable | line | local | none | radius | tacacs} no aaa authentication login
Command Syntax
enable line local none radius tacacs enable password command setup to be used as the authentication method line password to be used as the authentication method local database to be used as the authentication method no method is specified as the authentication method RADIUS to be used as the authentication method TACACS+ to be used as the authentication method
1-10
Release 5.2.1
aaa authorization commands default

The aaa authorization commands default command enables command authorization on the BSR. Command authorization determines if a user is allowed to run commands at a specified privilege level by creating a default list of methods used for authorization services. The no aaa authorization commands default command disables command authorization.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

aaa authorization commands {exec | isp-ro | isp-rw | mso-ro | mso-rw | sysadmin} default {local | none | tacacs} no aaa authentication commands {exec | isp-ro | isp-rw | mso-ro | mso-rw | sysadmin}
Command Syntax
exec isp-ro isp-rw mso-ro mso-rw sysadmin local commands in the User EXEC privilege level commands in the ISP Read/Only privilege level commands in the ISP Read/Write privilege level commands in the MSO Read/Only privilege level commands in the MSO Read/Write privilege level commands in the SYSADMIN privilege level local database to be used as the authorization method
1-11
Release 5.2.1
none tacacs
no method is specified as the authorization method TACACS+ to be used as the authorization method
1-12
Release 5.2.1
aaa authorization exec default

The aaa authorization exec default command enables privilege level authorization on the BSR. Privilege level authorization determines if a user is allowed to run an EXEC shell (user session) by creating a default list of methods used for authorization services. The no aaa authorization exec default command disables privilege level authorization.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

aaa authorization exec default {local | none | tacacs} no aaa authorization exec
Command Syntax
local none tacacs local database to be used as the authorization method no method is specified as the authorization method TACACS+ to be used as the authorization method
1-13
Release 5.2.1
aaa console authentication

The aaa console authentication command enables TACACS authentication for the console if AAA is configured. The no aaa console authentication command disables login authentication for the console.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

aaa console authentication no aaa console authentication
Command Default
Enabled
1-14
Release 5.2.1
aaa console authorization commands default

The aaa console authorization commands default command enables command authorization for the console if AAA is configured. The no aaa console authorization commands default command disables command authorization for the console.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

aaa console authorization commands default no aaa console authorization commands default
Command Default
Disabled
1-15
Release 5.2.1
aaa new-model
The aaa new model command enables the AAA network security model. The AAA network security model provides a software mechanism or framework for consistent authentication, authorization and accounting on the BSR. The no aaa new model disables the AAA network security model.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

aaa new model no aaa new model
Command Default
Disabled
1-16
Release 5.2.1
alias
The alias command allows you to specify an alias for a CLI command in a specific command mode (User EXEC, Privileged EXEC, or Global Configuration). The no alias command deletes a specific alias defined within the command mode.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

alias {all | exec | priv | conf} <WORD> <WORD> no alias {all | exec | priv | conf} <WORD>
Command Syntax
all exec priv conf WORD WORD alias visible in all modes User EXEC mode alias command Privileged EXEC mode alias command Global Configuration mode alias command name of alias the command that is aliased
1-17
Release 5.2.1
banner motd
The banner motd command allows you to create a message-of the-day (motd) that displays before the login prompt. The no banner motd command deletes the message of the day.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

banner motd [<1-25>] [...<WORD> ] no banner motd
Command Syntax
1-25 WORD message line number text of the message
1-18
Release 5.2.1
batch
The batch command executes a series of commands from a batch file stored in Flash memory or NVRAM.
Group Access
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

batch {flash: | nvram:} [acknowledge]
Command Syntax
flash: nvram: acknowledge execute a batch file from Flash memory execute a batch file from NVRAM acknowledge the execution of each command
1-19
Release 5.2.1
boot system
The boot system command lets you boot the BSR using a boot image file stored in either Flash memory, NVRAM on the Supervisory Routing Module (SRM), or an FTP or TFTP server.
Group Access
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

boot system {flash: | nvram:|} {<filename>}
Command Syntax
flash: nvram: specifies flash memory as the location of the boot image file specifies Non-volatile Random Access Memory (NVRAM) as the location of the boot image file filename of the boot image stored in Flash, NVRAM, or an FTP or TFTP server
filename
1-20
Release 5.2.1
broadcast
The broadcast command is used to send a message to all connected users.
Group Access
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

broadcast <WORD>
Command Syntax
WORD The text message intended for broadcast
1-21
Release 5.2.1
carriage-return-lf-mode
The carriage-return-lf-mode command controls the order of the carriage return and linefeed sequence. When enabled, the carriage return will be output before the linefeed. When disabled, the linefeed will be output before the carriage return.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

carriage-return-lf-mode {disable | enable}
Command Syntax
disable enable
disables carriage return then linefeed mode enables carriage return then linefeed mode
Command Default
Disabled
1-22
Release 5.2.1
chassis alias
The chassis alias command is used to configure an alias name for the BSR 64000 chassis.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

chassis alias <string>
Command Syntax
string the chassis alias name - enclose the alias name within quotation marks if the string contains spaces
1-23
Release 5.2.1
chassis assetid
The chassis assetid command is used to configure your organizations asset ID number that is assigned to the BSR 64000 chassis.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

chassis assetid <string>
Command Syntax
string the BSR 64000 chassis asset ID number - enclose the asset ID name within quotation marks if the string contains spaces
1-24
Release 5.2.1
chkdsk
The chkdsk command checks for and corrects any file system errors found in files stored in Flash memory or NVRAM.
Group Access
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

chkdsk {flash: | nvram: }
Command Syntax
flash: nvram: check the Flash memory file system check the NVRAM filesystem
1-25
Release 5.2.1
clear core log

The clear core log command clears the core.log file.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
All mores except for User EXEC
Command Line Usage

clear core log
1-26
Release 5.2.1
clear evt
The clear evt command resets the event count to "0" for all groups on all slots, groups on a specified slot, a specified group, or specified events.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
All modes except User EXEC
Command Line Usage

clear evt [<NUM> | <WORD>]
Command Syntax
NUM WORD the chassis slot number the name of an EVT group - refer to Table Table
1-27
Release 5.2.1
Table EVT Event Subsystems memchk net ipevt tpt arp rpt im icp evtm evta rmbind rm crmbpi crm crmsub crmfft crmsnr crmutl crmdtm crmcli crmdsg dsgif csm brmtag rsm rdb fpevt spcmgr dgm dqos pcmm em lbgmgr drm drme Memory Check Network IP Event System Testpoint Facility ARP SRM Repeater Interface Manager ICP EVT Manager EVT Agent RM Bind Resource Manager CRM BPI CRM CRM SubMgt CRM FFT CRM SNR CRM Util CRM DOCSTEST CRM CLI CRM DSG DSG Interface Certificate Storage Module BRM VLAN Tagging Redundancy SRM Run Time Database FP EVT Spectrum Manager DQM PacketCable DQOS PacketCable Multimedia PacketCable Event Message Load Balance Manage DOCSIS Redundancy Manager DOCSIS Redundancy Manager Engine drmr DOCSIS Redundancy Manager SRM swr Switched Reload tacacs TACACS+ vrfmgr VRF Manager ipsec IPSEC sys SYS UTIL snmpa SNMP Agent dsgmib SNMP DSG bufmgr Buffer Manager eth8 Ethernet Switch fei FEI srpcmt SRM Reporter CMTS maccfg MAC CFG cmtbuf CMTS Buffer fpga CMTS FPGA bcm Broadcom Driver bcmpkt Broadcam Driver Per Packet frm FRM ard ARD ardpkt ARD PKT que QUE Manager upc Upconverter res RES resrtr RES RTR resaut RES AUTH ressf RES SF resmgr RES MGR lbm Load Balancing lbm2 Load Balancing 2nd Table lbmsnr Load Balacing SNR cms Cable Modem Selector acc ACC accpkt ACC Packet ACC DHCP REG Range Data Path Mapping DOCSIS Redundancy Agent ubsha Upstream Scheduler RTR ubsbst Upstream Scheduler Burst ubsmac UBS CMTS MAC RTR ubs Upstream Scheduler ubsim UBS IM SYNC ubsmap UBS MAP macmr MAC MGR docsif DOCS IF macrtr MACRTR brgtag BRG TAG BRG brg brgrtr BRG RTR Spectrum Agent FFT spafft spasnr Spectrum Agent SNR rssi Spectrum Agent RSSI spasc Spectrum Agent SC ardrtr ARD RTR acctrt ACC RTR btp Boot Uptime mcns MCNS red CMTS Redundancy ICP ucc Upstream Channel Change dcc Dynamic Channel Change dsx Dynamic Service svcflo Service Flow cra CRA cra2 CRA SNR bcm1 Broadcom 3138 Driver bcmmac Broadcom 3212 Driver pream Preamble upcmot Upconverter Motorola accdhc reg range dpm dra
1-28
Release 5.2.1
clear log
The clear log command deletes buffered log data.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

clear log
1-29
Release 5.2.1
clear redundancy stats

The clear redundancy stats command clears redundancy statistics.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

clear redundancy stats [<0-15>]
Command Syntax
0-15 the chassis slot number
1-30
Release 5.2.1
clock set
The clock set command sets the system clock.
Group Access
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

clock set <hh:mm:ss> {<1-31> <MONTH> | <MONTH> <1-31>} <1993-2035>
Command Syntax
hh:mm:ss 1-31 MONTH 1993-2035 current time in 24-hour format numeric notation for the current day three letter abbreviated name of the current month numeric notation for the current year
1-31
Release 5.2.1
clock summer-time
The clock summer-time command provides the BSR system administrator with the ability to adjust when the BSR will change the system clock offset for the start and end of daylight saving time. The Energy Policy Act of 2005 (H.R.6.ENR), Section 110 changes the start date of daylight saving time from the first Sunday of April to the second Sunday of March and changes the end date of daylight saving time from the last Sunday of October to the first Sunday of November. Starting in 2007, this new rule may cause the BSR to generate timestamps (such as in syslog messages) that are inaccurate if the time is not adjusted by the administrator or this command. The clock summer-time command changes the BSR clock offset from Greenwich Mean Time at the start and end times specified in the command. The no clock summer-time command restores the default daylight saving time configuration. The following command example sets the correct daylight saving time changes as specified by the Energy Policy Act of 2005: BSR:7A(config:)#clock summer-time EDT 60 start 2 sun mar 2:00 end first sun nov 2:00
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

clock summer-time <WORD> <1-1440> start {{<1-4> | first | last} <day> <MONTH> <hh:mm>} end {{<1-4> | first | last} <day> <MONTH> <hh:mm>} clock summer-time <WORD> <1-1440> start {<1-31> <MONTH> <hh:mm>} end {<1-31> <MONTH> <hh:mm>} clock summer-time <WORD> <1-1440> start {<MONTH> <1-31> <hh:mm>} end {<MONTH> <1-31> <hh:mm>} no clock summer-time
1-32
Release 5.2.1
Note: The clock summer-time command arguments used after the start argument must be mirrored by the command arguments available after the end argument. For example: clock summer-time est 60 start 11 mar 10:30 end 4 nov 03:30 clock summer-time EDT 60 start 2 sun mar 2:00 end first sun nov 2:00
Command Syntax
WORD 1-1440 start 1-31 1-4 MONTH day hh:mm first last end the name of the time zone during daylight savings time minute offset to be added during daylight savings time the start of day light savings time the day of the month the week of the month the month of the year (3 letter abbreviation) the day of the week (3 letter abbreviation) the time of day that daylight savings time starts the first week of the month the last week of the month the end of daylight savings time
1-33
Release 5.2.1
clock timezone
The clock timezone command allows you to set the time zone for the system. The no clock timezone command changes the system time to Universal Time Coordinated (UTC).
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

clock timezone <WORD > <Hours_offset> [<Minute_offset>] [daylightsavings] [on | off] no clock timezone Note: The daylightsavings option has no effect on the setting of time on the BSR. It is present only to satisfy a requirement for Packetcable. Packetcable has a field in a network bound event message that must be set to whether or not daylight savings time is in effect. To satisfy this, the user must manually configure this parameter when daylight savings time begins and also when it ends. For automatic setting of the time, the BSR can be configured to obtain its time via SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol). Since SNTP has no way of indicating whether daylight savings time is in effect, the operator must use the daylightsavings option for compliance with Packetcable.
1-34
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
WORD Hours_offset Minute_offset daylightsavings on | off time zone listed when standard time is in effect hours corrected from UTC, range -23 to 23 non-negative difference in minutes corrected from UTC, range 0 to 59 configure daylight savings daylight savings on or off
Command Default
UTC
1-35
Release 5.2.1
configure
The configure command lets you enter Global Configuration mode from Privileged EXEC mode.
Note: To return to Privileged EXEC mode, enter exit, end, or Control-Z at the Global Configuration Mode prompt.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

configure
1-36
Release 5.2.1
console authentication radius

The console authentication radius command enables RADIUS authentication for user console logins. The no console authentication radius command disables this feature.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

console authentication radius [ local-password | username <WORD>] no console authentication radius [ local-password | username ]
Command Syntax
local-password authenticate with a locally configured password if there is no response from the RADIUS server configure a console username to use for authentication the text of the console username - maximum of 64 characters
username WORD
1-37
Release 5.2.1
copy
The copy command copies a local or network file from one location to another, either locally or on the network.
Group Access
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

copy {flash: | ftp: | nvram: | running-config | startup-config | system: | tftp:} | {flash: | nvram: | running-config | startup-config | system:}
Command Syntax
flash: ftp: nvram: running-config startup-config system: tftp: copy the configuration file from flash copy the configuration file from a File Transport Protocol (FTP) server copy the configuration file from NVRAM copy from a currently running system configuration copy from the startup configuration in NVRAM copy from the system copy the configuration file from a Trivial File Transport Protocol (TFTP) server copy the configuration file to flash copy the configuration file to a File Transport Protocol (FTP) server
flash: ftp:
1-38
Release 5.2.1
nvram: running-config startup-config system: tftp:
copy the configuration file to NVRAM copy to the currently running system configuration copy to the startup configuration in NVRAM copy to the system copy the configuration file to a Trivial File Transport Protocol (TFTP) server
1-39
Release 5.2.1
copy core
The copy core command copies an SRM core file to a remote FTP host. This feature provides for effective debugging by allowing a review of the exact state of the BSR prior to a software failure.
Warning: The copy core command is for debugging purposes only and should be used under the guidance of Motorola technical support staff.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

copy core [<NUM> [ ftp ]]
Command Syntax
NUM ftp
the slot number of the SRM module copy core file to ftp: filesystem
1-40
Release 5.2.1
core
The core command allows a user to configure memory core dump options.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

core {compression <0-9> | path <WORD> | protocol ftp | server <WORD>} no core {path <WORD> | server <WORD>}
Command Syntax
compression 0-9 the core dump compression level - "0" indicates compression is disabled while "9" indicates the maximum compression level the path to the core dump file on a target core dump server the FTP network protocol will be used to transfer core dump files the core dump target servers IP address or hostname
path WORD protocol ftp server WORD
1-41
Release 5.2.1
datapath keepalive
The datapath keepalive command is enabled by default to protect the data path on redundant 2:8 CMTS modules. A CMTS module is reset after 100 datapath ICP keepalive message failures. This threshold may be reconfigured using the threshold argument. The no datapath keepalive command disables this feature.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Slot Configuration
Command Line Usage

datapath keepalive {monitor | slot-reset} [threshold <5-255>] no datapath keepalive
Command Syntax
monitor slot-reset threshold 5-255 monitor the status reset the CMTS module after the threshold of ICP keepalive failures is reached the number of ICP keepalive failures permitted before resetting the CMTS module
Command Default
slot-reset threshold = 100
1-42
Release 5.2.1
datapath pause enable

The datapath pause enable command enables FPGA PAUSE frames on the 2:8 CMTS module. The no datapath pause enable command disables FPGA PAUSE frames.
Note: Only use the datapath pause enable command when directed to do so by Motorola Support.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Slot Configuration
Command Line Usage

datapath pause enable no datapath pause enable
Command Default
Enabled
1-43
Release 5.2.1
delete
The delete command deletes a file stored in Flash memory or NVRAM or deletes the startup configuration file.
Group Access
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

delete {flash: | nvram: | startup-config}
Command Syntax
flash: nvram: startup-config delete all files from Flash memory delete all files from NVRAM delete the startup-configuration file
1-44
Release 5.2.1
description
The description command is used to specify descriptive information for any interface on the BSR. This information is limited to 79 characters. Use the characters: _ or - to separate words. For example, if a particular CMTS interface served a certain section of a city, the MSO could assign the following description: MOT:7A(config-if)#description charlestown_1 Note: The entered description can be seen in the running configuration, and in the command output of show commands such as the show ip interface and show running-config commands. You can also use SNMP to view the descriptions. However, if you use SNMP to view the descriptions, be aware that SNMP has a display limit of 63 characters. Descriptions beyond this length will appear truncated when viewed via SNMP.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (all interface types)
Command Line Usage

description <WORD> [<WORD>...]
Command Syntax
WORD is the text that describes this interface.
1-45
Release 5.2.1
dir
The dir command lists directories and files on a filesystem.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

dir [all [time]] [flash: [time]] [nvram: [time]] [time]
Command Syntax
all flash: nvram: time list all directories and files list all directories and files in flash list all directories and files in NVRAM sort by modification time
Command Default
NVRAM
1-46
Release 5.2.1
disable
The disable command allows you to enter User EXEC mode from the Privileged EXEC mode.
Note: To return to Privileged EXEC mode, enter enable at the User EXEC prompt and, if required, a password.
Group Access
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

disable
1-47
Release 5.2.1
duplex
The duplex command configures an Ethernet interface for duplex mode (full or half) and enables/disables auto-negotiation
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode Interface Configuration (Ethernet interface only) Command Line Usage
duplex {half | full | auto} no duplex {half | full | auto}
Command Syntax
half configures the interface for half-duplex operation. Half-duplex operation allows the interface to send and receive signals, but not at the same time. configures the interface for full-duplex operation. Full-duplex operation allows the interface to send and receive signals at the same time. configures the interface to auto negotiate its operational mode (either full-duplex or half-duplex) with the device to which it is physically connected.
full
auto
Command Default
Auto negotiation enabled
1-48
Release 5.2.1
enable
The enable command allows you to enter Privileged EXEC mode from User EXEC mode. If the system prompts you for a password, enter the password. After entering Privileged EXEC mode, the prompt changes from the User EXEC mode prompt (hostname>) to the privileged EXEC mode prompt (hostname#).
Group Access
Command Mode
User EXEC
Command Line Usage

enable
1-49
Release 5.2.1
enable authentication radius

The enable authentication radius command enables RADIUS authentication for user logins. The no enable authentication radius command disables this feature.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

enable authentication radius [ local-password ] no enable authentication radius [ local-password ]
Command Syntax
local-password authenticate with a locally configured password if there is no response from the RADIUS server
1-50
Release 5.2.1
enable password
The enable password command allows you to specify a password associated with the enable command. After specifying the password, entering the enable command at the User EXEC prompt causes the system to prompt you for the password. You must supply the password to enter the Privileged EXEC mode. The no enable password command deletes the password.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

enable password <LINE> enable password {0 | 7 } <WORD> no enable password
Command Syntax
LINE the password (31 character maximum) - enclosed with double quotes if the password contains spaces). The "%" and "!" characters must not be used. specifies an UNENCRYPTED password specifies a HIDDEN password the UNENCRYPTED or HIDDEN 'enable' password
0 7 WORD
1-51
Release 5.2.1
enable rdn-process
This enable rdn-process command enables the process for collecting CPU utilization statistics.The no enable rdn-process command disables the collection of CPU utilization statistics.
Note: This feature is enabled by default, and must remain enabled if you intend to use it in conjunction with SNMP polling of the BSR.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

enable rdn-process no enable rdn-process
Command Default
enabled
1-52
Release 5.2.1
enable secret
The enable secret command allows you to provide an encrypted password that supersedes the enabled password. The no enable secret command removes the secret. Use the enable secret command to provide an encrypted password for entering Privileged EXEC mode in the running configuration file when then no service password-encryption command is in effect.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

enable secret [5] <WORD> no enable secret
Command Syntax
5 WORD specifies an ENCRYPTED secret the secret (31 character maximum) enclosed with double quotes if the secret contains spaces). The "%" and "!" characters must not be used.
1-53
Release 5.2.1
encapsulation snap
The encapsulation snap command specifies SNAP as the encapsulation method for Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet interfaces. The SNAP encapsulation method, as specified in RFC 1042, allows Ethernet protocols to run on the IEEE 802.2 media. The no encapsulation snap command returns the interface encapsulation method to the default method which is ARPA.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet notifies only)
Command Line Usage

encapsulation snap no encapsulation snap
1-54
Release 5.2.1
erase
The erase command erases a file system stored in Flash memory or NVRAM or the contents of the startup-configuration file.
Group Access
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

erase {flash: | nvram: | startup-config}
Command Syntax
flash: nvram: startup-config erase all files in Flash memory erase all files in NVRAM erase the startup-configuration file
1-55
Release 5.2.1
exception
The exception command enables the Exception Handler. The Exception Handler is a set of processes that are invoked when errors (exceptions) are caused by another process that is executing when the particular exception occurs. Exceptions can be reported or the BSR can be configured to automatically reboot if an exception occurs.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

exception {extended <0-1>| reboot <0-1>}
Command Syntax
extended 0-1 perform Extended Exception Reporting: 1 = enable Extended Exception Reporting 0 = disable Extended Exception Reporting reboot on Exception: 1 = enable reboot 0 = disable reboot
reboot 0-1
1-56
Release 5.2.1
exit
The exit command (used from the Router Configuration, Interface Configuration, and Global Configuration modes) accesses the previous command mode in the command mode hierarchy. For example: using the exit command in Interface Configuration mode accesses Global Configuration mode. Using the exit command in Privileged EXEC or User EXEC modes, ends the command line session.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
All modes
Command Line Usage

exit
1-57
Release 5.2.1
forced-download
The forced-download command ensures that boot images are properly downloaded to modules in the BSR 64000 chassis. Use the forced-download command to ensure that all modules receive the correct boot image before performing an upgrade process or to ensure that a specific module receives the correct boot image before performing an upgrade process.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

forced-download [<0-15>] no forced-download [<0-15>]
Command Syntax
0-15 BSR 64000 slot number
1-58
Release 5.2.1
format
The format command formats a filesystem in flash or NVRAM.
Group Access
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

format {flash: | nvram:}
Command Syntax
flash: nvram: format flash format NVRAM
1-59
Release 5.2.1
help
The help command displays instructions for using the CLI help functionality. Refer to the BSR 64000 Configuration and Management Guide for additional instructions on using the CLI help functionality.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
All modes
Command Line Usage

help
1-60
Release 5.2.1
history size
The history command enable and controls the command history function. The history size command lets you specify the size of the history buffer by number of lines. The no history command deletes the history buffer.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
All modes
Command Line Usage

history [size <1-256>] no history
Command Syntax
1-256 the number of lines in the history buffer
Command Default
10
1-61
Release 5.2.1
hostname
The hostname command configures the name for the system host.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

hostname <WORD>
Command Syntax
WORD the systems alphanumeric network hostname
1-62
Release 5.2.1
hsim4 slot
The hsim4 slot command sets the mode in which the Ether-Flex module operates. If this command is not configured for a given slot, the default is for the module to operate in Gigabit Ethernet mode. Once this command is used, you must reset the configured slot for the module to operate in the newly selected mode. As a reminder, each time you use this command, the following warning message displays on the console:
%Warning: You must reset slot <num> in order for the configuration to take effect.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

hsim4 slot <0-5, 9-15> {gigaether | ethernet}
Command Syntax
0-5, 9-15 The slot number of the Ether-Flex module. Ether-Flex modules cannot be installed in slots 6, 7 and 8. Gigabit Ethernet mode Ethernet mode
gigaether ethernet
1-63
Release 5.2.1
icp keepalive
The icp keepalive command allows you to set the threshold for missed ICP keepalives after which the SRM module will be reset. The icp keepalive command also configures console or system logging of event messages related to missed ICP keepalives. The Resource Manager (RM) software component of the SRM module sends an ICP SRM_READY message as a poll every 2.5 seconds to all modules in the BSR chassis. If any module fails to respond after 10 SRM_READY messages (25 seconds), the SRM generates an RM.35 log message and the module is reset.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

icp keepalive { debug | monitor | slot-reset} [threshold <1-255>] no icp keepalive [ debug | monitor | slot-reset] [threshold ]
Command Syntax
debug
enables the display of ICP keepalive log reports to the SRM console enables the display of ICP keepalive log reports to the system logger the number of missed ICP keepalive responses after which the SRM will reset the slot.
monitor
slot-reset
1-64
Release 5.2.1
threshold <1-255>
configures number of ICP keepalive retransmits until an action is taken restores the default threshold value for the no icp keepalive debug, monitor, and slot-reset commands
threshold
Command Defaults
icp keepalive debug icp keepalive monitor icp keepalive slot-reset icp keepalive debug threshold icp keepalive monitor threshold icp keepalive slot-reset threshold
Disabled Disabled Disabled 10 messages 10 messages 10 messages
1-65
Release 5.2.1
ip ftp password
The ip ftp password command displays the password to use to connect to the network using FTP. The no ip ftp password command deletes the password for an FTP connection.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip ftp password {0 <LINE>| 7 <LINE> | <LINE>} no ip ftp password
Command Syntax
0 7 LINE specifies an unencrypted password will follow specifies a hidden password will follow the password (31 character minimum, 78 character maximum for option 7) - enclosed with double quotes if the password contains spaces). The "%" and "!" characters must not be used.
1-66
Release 5.2.1
ip ftp username
The ip ftp username command configures the connection to the network for using FTP. The no ip ftp username command configures the router anonymously for FTP. Use the ip ftp username command that is related to an account on the server.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip ftp username <WORD> no ip ftp username
Command Syntax
WORD username (31 character maximum)
1-67
Release 5.2.1
ip netmask-format
The ip netmask-format command lets you specify the format in which netmask values appear in show command output. The no ip netmask format command sets the output format back to the default.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip netmask-format {bit-count | decimal | hexadecimal} no ip netmask-format {bit-count | decimal | hexadecimal}
Command Syntax
bit-count decimal hexadecimal displays netmask as number of significant bits displays netmask in dotted decimal displays the netmask in hexadecimal
Command Default
bitcount
1-68
Release 5.2.1
ip tacacs source-interface
The ip tacacs source-interface command allows an operator to control the source IP address of TACACS+ packets generated by the BSR by specifying an Ethernet or loopback interface as the source IP address for TACACS+ packets. The normal convention for generated TACACS+ packets is to set the source IP address equal to the IP address of the outgoing interface. The ip tacacs source-interface command overrides this convention and instead uses the IP address of a specified Ethernet or loopback interface. This command facilitates the use of one IP address entry associated with the TACACS+ client instead of maintaining a list of all IP addresses and is useful in cases where the a router has many interfaces and an operator wants to ensure that all TACACS+ packets from a particular router have the same IP address. The no ip tacacs source-interface command removes the specified source interface. Note: Before using the ip tacacs source-interface command, the interface must be configured, assigned an IP address, and up and running. Any configuration change with this command will not take effect until after the next BSR connection attempt.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip tacacs source-interface {ethernet <X/Y> | loopback <1-255>} no ip tacacs source-interface
Command Syntax
ethernet X/Y loopback 1-255 the Ethernet interface slot and port number the loopback interface number
1-69
Release 5.2.1
ip tftp source-interface loopback

The ip tftp source-interface loopback command allows an operator to control the source IP address of TFTP packets generated by the BSR by specifying a loopback interface as the source IP address for TFTP packets. The normal convention for generated TFTP packets is to set the source IP address equal to the IP address of the outgoing interface. The ip tftp source-interface loopback command overrides this convention and instead uses the IP address of the specified loopback interface. The no ip tftp source-interface loopback command removes the loopback source interface.
Note: Before using the ip tftp source-interface loopback command, the loopback interface must be configured and assigned an IP address.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip tftp source-interface loopback <1-255> no ip tftp source-interface loopback
Command Syntax
1-255 the loopback interface number
1-70
Release 5.2.1
ldap client
The ldap client command enables the LDAP client. The no ldap client command disables the LDAP client.
Note: Configure a primary or secondary LDAP server addresses before enabling the LDAP client.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ldap client no ldap client
1-71
Release 5.2.1
ldap search-base
The ldap search-base command specifies the base distinguished name of the starting point for a search of the LDAP database. The no ldap search-base ends the search of the LDAP database.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ldap search-base WORD no ldap search-base WORD
Command Syntax
WORD Distinguished name of entry to where the search will start
1-72
Release 5.2.1
ldap server
The ldap server command configures LDAP server parameters. The no ldap server command clears the LDAP server parameters.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ldap server {<WORD> [binddn <WORD>] [nobinddn] [nopassword] [password <WORD>} no ldap server <WORD>
Command Syntax
WORD binddn WORD nobinddn nopassword password WORD the primary LDAP server distinguished name distinguished name not required to bind to this server password not required password
1-73
Release 5.2.1
load-interval
The load-interval command specifies the load interval timer value in minutes. The load interval timer captures bandwidth utilization information on a per-port basis for both received and transmitted data. Bandwidth utilization information can then be displayed with the show interfaces command. The following is typical load interval information as displayed with the show interfaces command:
Cable2/0 is up, line protocol is up Hardware is BCM3210 ASIC, address is 0030.7b74.3238 (bia 0030.7b74.3238) Internet address is 10.10.128.1/17 MTU 1500 bytes, BW 27000 Kbit, DLY 1000 usec, reliability 255/255, txload 1/255, rxload 20/255 Encapsulation MCNS, loopback not set Keepalive not set ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00 Last input 00:00:00, output 00:00:00, output hang never Last clearing of "show interface" counters never Queueing strategy: fifo Output queue 0/40, 69 drops; input queue 0/75, 7 drops 5 minute input rate 2202000 bits/sec, 416 packets/sec Load Interval 5 minute output rate 120000 bits/sec, 13 packets/sec Bandwidth Utilization 1125177443 packets input, 14081732 bytes, 25 no buffer Information Received 3125750 broadcasts, 0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles 1018 input errors, 87 CRC, 0 frame, 0 overrun, 0 ignored, 0 abort 25006326 packets output, 1183354279 bytes, 0 underruns 0 output errors, 0 collisions, 4 interface resets 0 output buffer failures, 0 output buffers swapped out
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Interface Configuration
Command Line Usage

load-interval <1-300>
1-74
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
1-300 the load interval timer value in minutes
Command Default
5 minutes
1-75
Release 5.2.1
logging
The logging command specifies the IP address of a remote SYSLOG server. The no logging command clears the IP address specification of a remote SYSLOG server.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

logging <A.B.C.D> no logging <A.B.C.D>
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D. SYSLOG server IP address - up to 8 SYSLOG servers can be specified
1-76
Release 5.2.1
logging admin-status
The logging admin-status command controls the transmission of traps and SYSLOG messages with respect to the threshold specified with the logging rate-limit command. The logging admin-status command is only relevant if DOCSIS logging control has been specified with the logging control docsis command. In CLI logging control mode, the logging admin-status command will be ignored by the system and a warning message will display if it is used. In this mode, only the logging rate-limit command is relevant. In DOCSIS logging control mode, both the logging admin-status and logging rate-limit commands are needed to specify throttling. Note: An event is always treated as a single event for threshold counting. For example: an event causing both a trap and a SYSLOG message is still treated as a one event.
Command Line Usage

logging admin-status {inhibited | maintainBelowThreshold | stopAtThres | unconstrained} no logging admin-status {inhibited | maintainBelowThreshold | stopAtThres | unconstrained}
Command Syntax
inhibited causes all trap transmission and SYSLOG messages to be suppressed - if a threshold has been specified with the logging rate-limit command, a warning message will be displayed causes trap transmission and SYSLOG messages to be suppressed if the number of traps/messages would exceed the threshold specified with the logging rate-limit command
maintainBelowThreshold
1-77
Release 5.2.1
stopAtThres
causes trap transmission SYSLOG messages to cease at the threshold specified with the logging rate-limit command - transmission will not resume until the logging admin-status command is reset to an option other than "stopAtThres" or the threshold is set to a higher value causes all traps and SYSLOG messages to be transmitted - if a threshold has been specified with the logging rate-limit command, a warning message will be displayed
unconstrained
1-78
Release 5.2.1
logging buffered
The logging buffered command sets the size of the logging buffer and the severity level. The no logging buffered command returns to the default buffer size (256 KB).
Note: Use the show log command, in Privileged EXEC mode, to display logged messages with the newest message displayed first.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

logging buffered <4096 -16777216> [alerts | critical | emergencies | errors | informational | notifications | warnings] no logging buffered <4096 -16777216> [alerts | critical | emergencies | errors | informational | notifications | warnings]
Command Syntax
4096 -16777216 logging buffer size in bytes
Severity Levels and Descriptions emergencies emergency conditions where the system is unusable - reserved for vendor-specific, fatal hardware or software errors that prevents normal system operation and causes reporting system to reboot (severity level = 0) conditions where immediate action is needed - a serious failure which causes the reporting system to reboot but is not caused by hardware or software malfunctioning (severity level = 1)
alert
1-79
Release 5.2.1
critical
critical conditions - a serious failure that requires immediate attention and prevents the device from transmitting data but the system could recover without rebooting (severity level = 2) error conditions - a failure occurred that could interrupt the normal data flow (severity level = 3) warning conditions - a failure occurred that could interrupt the normal data flow (severity level = 4) normal but significant conditions - an event of importance occurred which is not a failure (severity level = 5) informational descriptive system messages an unimportant event, which could be helpful for tracing normal operations (severity level = 6)
error
warnings
notifications
information
Command Default
notifications, log file is 256 Kbytes
1-80
Release 5.2.1
logging console
The logging console command enables the sending of system logging messages to the console. Additionally, the logging of messages displayed on the console terminal can be limited to a specified severity level. Use the no logging console command to disable console logging.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

logging console [alerts | critical | debugging | emergencies | errors | informational | notifications | warnings] no [alerts | critical | debugging | emergencies | errors | informational | notifications | warnings]
Command Syntax
alert
1-81
Release 5.2.1
critical
error
warnings
notifications
information
Command Default
notifications
1-82
Release 5.2.1
logging control docsis

The logging control docsis command allows the DOCSIS docsDevEvControlTable to determine which severity logs go to which destinations.
Note: Any of the various logging <destination> <severity> commands in place are overridden with this command.
The no logging control docsis disables the docsDevEvControlTable and re-establishes CLI logging control. Any configurations previously set with the logging <destination> <severity> command will now control which severity logs go to which destinations.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

logging control docsis no logging control docsis
Command Default
no logging control docsis
1-83
Release 5.2.1
logging default
The logging default command restores the default settings for all logging, including logging <destination> <severity>, logging reporting, and EVT configurations.

The docsDevEvControlTable is restored to its DOCSIS-specified default values. CLI logging control is re-established. All logging evt configuration lines are removed from the running configuration file. Any logging <A.B.C.D> (for SYSLOG server) commands are unaffected. The logging rate-limit command is unaffected. The logging buffered <size> command is restored to its default size. The command restores the following entries to the running configuration file: no logging control docsis logging buffered notifications logging console error no logging trap no logging snmp-trap logging facility local7
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

logging default
1-84
Release 5.2.1
logging disable bpi_auth_invalid_messages

The logging disable bpi_auth_invalid_messages command disables logging of the "BPI authorization invalid" DOCSIS error message. The no logging disable bpi_auth_invalid_messages command enables the logging of this error message. This command is useful in situations where a high volume of this error message is being generated and logged.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

logging disable bpi_auth_invalid_messages no logging disable bpi_auth_invalid_message
Command Default
Logging of BPI authorization invalid messages is enabled by default.
1-85
Release 5.2.1
logging disable bpi_auth_reject_messages

The logging disable bpi_auth_reject_messages command disables logging of the "BPI authorization reject" DOCSIS error message. The no logging disable bpi_auth_reject_messages command enables the logging of this error message. This command is useful in situations where a high volume of this error message is being generated and logged.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

logging disable bpi_auth_reject_messages no logging disable bpi_auth_reject_messages
Command Default
Logging of BPI authorization reject messages is enabled by default.
1-86
Release 5.2.1
logging disable bpi_map_reject_messages

The logging disable bpi_map_reject_messages command suppresses Map Reject DOCSIS error messages being printed to the console but the error messages will still be logged through the EVT system. The no logging disable bpi_map_reject_messages command enables the console printing of Map Reject error messages. This command is useful in situations where large numbers of these error messages are being generated.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

logging disable bpi_map_reject_messages no logging disable bpi_map_reject_messages
Command Default
Logging of Map Reject messages is disabled by default.
1-87
Release 5.2.1
logging disable bpi_tek_invalid_messages

The logging disable bpi_tek_invalid_messages command disables logging of the "BPI TEK Invalid" DOCSIS error message. The no logging disable bpi_auth_reject_messages command enables the logging of this error message. This command is useful in situations where a high volume of this error message is being generated and logged.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

logging disable bpi_tek_invalid_messages no logging disable bpi_tek_invalid_messages
Command Default
Logging of BPI TEK Invalid messages is enabled by default.
1-88
Release 5.2.1
logging disable cm_ranging_fail_r103_0

The logging disable cm_ranging_fail_r103_0 command disables logging of the "Unable to Successfully Range CM Retries Exhausted" DOCSIS error message. The no logging disable cm_ranging_fail_r103_0 command enables the logging of this error message. This command is useful in situations where a high volume of this error message is being generated and logged.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

logging disable cm_ranging_fail_r103_0 no logging disable cm_ranging_fail_r103_0
Command Default
Logging of these error messages is enabled by default.
1-89
Release 5.2.1
logging disable dcc_arrive_new_c203_0 logging disable dcc_depart_old_c202_0

With Dynamic Load Balancing configured, there can be too many DCC transactions on a large system. The console or log buffer can be easily flooded with the following OSSI Event Messages (error codes C202.0 and C203.0) which are defined as a Notice priority by the OSSI specification:
[06/28-07:50:40.88- 11:CMTSMAC]<133>CMTS[DOCSIS]:<67020200>DCC depart old (CM 0011.8092.e47c, US:5) [06/28-07:50:41.26- 11:CMTSMAC]<133>CMTS[DOCSIS]:<67020300>DCC arrive new (CM 0011.8092.e47c, US:4)
The logging disable dcc_arrive_new_c203_0 and logging disable dcc_depart_old_c202_0 commands disable the logging of these messages. The no logging disable dcc_arrive_new_c203_0 and no logging disable dcc_depart_old_c202_0 commands enable the logging of these messages.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Defaults
Enabled
1-90
Release 5.2.1
logging disable securityuser-login

The logging disable securityuser-login command disables the logging of Legal Intercept securityuser login/logout transactions to the SYSLOG. The no logging disable securityuser-login enables the logging of securityuser login/logout transactions.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

logging disable securityuser-login no logging disable securityuser-login
1-91
Release 5.2.1
logging evt clear

The logging evt clear command disables logging of all EVTs or disables EVT logging for a specific logging destination (s). The no logging evt clear command restores the default EVT logging configuration.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

logging evt clear {l|t|s|c} {<slot:group>} [<range>] no logging evt clear {l|t|s|c} {<slot:group>} [<range>]
Command Syntax
l|t|s|c the log message destination: l = local t = trap s = SYSLOG c = console the chassis slot number the name of an EVT group specific EVTs in the specified EVT group such as '1+5+8-13'
slot group range
1-92
Release 5.2.1
logging evt set

The logging evt set command configures EVT logging to log messages to a different destination. The EVT messages logged can also be configured on a per-slot, per group, or single, per-event basis. The no logging evt set command with no specified EVT group name restores the original logging configuration changed with one or more logging evt set commands.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

logging evt set {l|t|s|c} {<slot:group>} [<range>] no logging evt set {l|t|s|c} {<slot:group>} [<range>]
Command Syntax
l|t|s|c the log message destination: l = local t = trap s = SYSLOG c = console the chassis slot number the name of an EVT group specific EVTs in the specified EVT group such as '1+5+8-13'
slot group range
1-93
Release 5.2.1
logging facility
The logging facility command specifies the SYSLOG facility to which error messages are sent. The no logging facility command reverts to the default of "local7".
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

logging facility {local 0 | local 1 | local 2 | local 3 | local 4 | local 5 | local 6 | local 7} no logging facility
Command Syntax
local 0-7 local facility 0 through 7
Command Default
local 7
1-94
Release 5.2.1
logging on
The logging on command starts and stops the SYSLOG, and sends debug and error messages to a logging process. The no logging on command stops sending debug or error messages to a logging process.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

logging on no logging on
Command Default
Disabled
1-95
Release 5.2.1
logging rate-limit
The logging rate-limit command limits the rate of system messages and SNMP traps logged per second. The no logging rate-limit command disables the rate limit.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

logging rate-limit <0-2147483647> <1-2147483647> no logging rate-limit
Command Syntax
0-2147483647 1-2147483647 the number of logged messages the rate of messages logged per second
1-96
Release 5.2.1
logging reporting
The logging reporting command specifies the recording mechanism for logging reports.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

logging reporting {alert | critical | debug | default | emergency | error | information | notice | warning} {all-clear | all-set | local | local-syslog | local-trap | local-trap-syslog} no logging reporting {alert | critical | debug | default | emergency | error | information | notice | warning} {all-clear | all-set | local | local-syslog | local-trap | local-trap-syslog}
Command Syntax
Severity Levels and Descriptions emergency emergency conditions where the system is unusable - reserved for vendor-specific, fatal hardware or software errors that prevents normal system operation and causes reporting system to reboot (severity level = 0) conditions where immediate action is needed - a serious failure which causes the reporting system to reboot but is not caused by hardware or software
alert
malfunctioning
(severity level = 1)
1-97
Release 5.2.1
critical
critical conditions - a serious failure that requires immediate attention and prevents the device from transmitting data but the system could recover without rebooting (severity level = 2) error conditions - a failure occurred that could interrupt the normal data flow (severity level = 3) warning conditions - a failure occurred that could interrupt the normal data flow (severity level = 4) normal but significant conditions - an event of importance occurred which is not a failure (severity level = 5) informational descriptive system messages - an unimportant event, which could be helpful for tracing normal operations (severity level = 6) debugging messages (severity level = 7) set all the severity levels to default
error
warnings
notice
information
debug default
Logging Location Options local local-syslog local-trap log messages to local-nonvolatile memory (NVRAM) log messages to local NVRAM and the SYSLOG server log messages, excluding the specified trap level, to local NVRAM
local-trap-syslog log messages, excluding the specified trap level, to local NVRAM and a SYSLOG server
1-98
Release 5.2.1
all-clear all-set
unsets all logging locations for the report. sets all logging locations for the report.
Note: Debug messages will not be reported unless debugging has been turned on for a subsystem with the corresponding CLI debug command (e.g. debug snmp).
1-99
Release 5.2.1
logging reporting default

The logging reporting default command is used to return to the default destination/ severity log reporting configuration.
Note: The default destination/severity log reporting configuration depends on which logging control mode is enabled.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

logging reporting default
1-100
Release 5.2.1
logging session
The logging session command enables the transmission of system logging messages to the current login session. The no logging session command disables the transmission of system logging messages to the current login session.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

logging session no logging session
1-101
Release 5.2.1
logging snmp-trap
The logging snmp-trap command logs all SNMP traps or logs SNMP traps of a specified severity level and higher. Note: The logging snmp-trap command limits SNMP trap logging to SNMP traps with a level up to and including the severity level specified with this command.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

logging snmp-trap [alerts | critical | emergencies | errors | informational | notifications | warnings] no logging snmp-trap [alerts | critical | emergencies | errors | informational | notifications | warnings]
Command Syntax
Severity Levels and Descriptions emergencies emergency conditions where the system is unusable reserved for vendor-specific, fatal hardware or software errors that prevents normal system operation and causes reporting system to reboot (severity level = 0) conditions where immediate action is needed - a serious failure which causes the reporting system to reboot but is not caused by hardware or software malfunctioning (severity level = 1)
alert
1-102
Release 5.2.1
critical
critical conditions - a serious failure that requires immediate attention and prevents the device from transmitting data but the system could recover without rebooting (severity level = 2) error conditions - a failure occurred that could interrupt the normal data flow (severity level = 3) warning conditions - a failure occurred that could interrupt the normal data flow (severity level = 4) normal but significant conditions - an event of importance occurred which is not a failure (severity level = 5) informational descriptive system messages - an unimportant event, which could be helpful for tracing normal operations (severity level = 6)
error warnings
notifications
information
1-103
Release 5.2.1
logging source-interface loopback

The logging source-interface loopback command allows an operator to control the source IP address of SYSLOG packets generated by the BSR by specifying a loopback interface as the source IP address for SYSLOG packets. The normal convention for generated SYSLOG packets is to set the source IP address equal to the IP address of the outgoing interface. The logging source-interface loopback command overrides this convention and instead uses the IP address of the specified loopback interface.
Note: Before using the logging source-interface loopback command, the loopback interface must be configured and assigned an IP address.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

logging source-interface loopback<1-255>
Command Syntax
1-104
Release 5.2.1
logging trap
The logging trap command filters messages logged to the SYSLOG servers based on severity. The command limits the log messages sent to a SYSLOG server to messages with a severity level up to and including the severity level specified with this command. The no logging trap command disables the logging of these messages to the SYSLOG servers.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

logging trap {alerts | critical | emergencies | errors | informational | notifications | warnings} no logging trap {alerts | critical | emergencies | errors | informational | notifications | warnings}
Command Syntax
alert
1-105
Release 5.2.1
critical
error
warnings
notifications
information
Command Default
notifications level (severity=5)
1-106
Release 5.2.1
login
The login command logs a user on to the system.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
User EXEC
Command Line Usage

login [<WORD>]
Command Syntax
WORD 1 to 16 character username
1-107
Release 5.2.1
logout
The logout command logs a user out of the system. Use the logout command to end the current session. The logout command is used the same way as the exit command. In Privileged EXEC mode, use the logout command with a character argument to log a particular user out of the system. Only users with administrative privileges can log other users out.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
User EXEC and Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

logout [<session-id> | <username>] (Privileged EXEC mode only) logout (User EXEC mode only)
Command Syntax
session-id username the session ID number of the user to log out the name of the user to log out
1-108
Release 5.2.1
macro
The macro command defines a group of existing CLI commands that can be executed by entering the macro name at the command line. The no macro command removes a macro from the macro list.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
All modes except User EXEC and Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

macro <WORD> {Variable | <WORD>} ... [Variable | <WORD>]}} no macro <WORD>
Command Syntax
WORD Variable WORD the macro name macro variables the CLI commands - CLI commands must be added one at a time
1-109
Release 5.2.1
memory checkzero
The memory checkzero command enables memory checking on the BSR.
Note: Memory checking can use considerable BSR system resources.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

memory checkzero <0-1>
Command Syntax
0-1 1 = enable Memory Checking 0 = disable Memory Checking
1-110
Release 5.2.1
message
The message command sends a message to a specified active user.
Group Access
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

message <WORD> <WORD>
Command Syntax
WORD WORD session number or username message to send
1-111
Release 5.2.1
network-clock-select
The network-clock-select command configures network timing parameters. The no network-clock-select command disables network timing parameters.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

network-clock-select {1 | 2 } {bits | pos <X/Y>} {e1 {pcm31-crc | pcm31-hdb3 | pcm31-nocrc} | t1 {esf-b8zs | sf-d4 | slc96 | t1dm }} {a | b} no network-clock-select {1 | 2 } {bits | pos <X/Y>} {e1 {pcm31-crc | pcm31-hdb3 | pcm31-nocrc} | t1 {esf-b8zs | sf-d4 | slc96 | t1dm }} {a | b}
Command Syntax
1 2 bits pos <X/Y> e1 pcm31-crc pcm31-hdb3 pcm31-nocrc a b primary priority secondary priority E1/T1 BITS clock BSR POS interface slot and port configure interface as E1 PCM-31 framing with AMI line coding, CRC Multiframe PCM-31 framing with HDB3 line coding, CRC Multiframe PCM-31 framing with AMI line coding, No CRC Multiframe select port A select port B
1-112
Release 5.2.1
t1 esf-b8zs sf-d4 slc96 t1dm
configure interface as T1 ESF framing with B8ZS line coding SF-D4 framing with AMI line coding SLC96 framing with AMI line coding T1DM framing with AMI line coding
1-113
Release 5.2.1
network-clock-select revertive
The network-clock-select revertive command enables revertive mode. The no network-clock-select revertive command disables revertive mode. Revertive mode enables the automatic switch-over to the highest priority clock source available if the current clock goes offline Note: In order for revertive mode to work properly, you must configure both the primary and secondary clock sources. If there are no clock sources configured, the Stratum 3 module on the SRM will remain in free-running mode.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

network-clock-select revertive no network-clock-select revertive
1-114
Release 5.2.1
more
The more command displays the contents of a specified file. Use the more nvram:startup-config command to view the startup configuration file in NVRAM. The config_file environmental table will be displayed if the startup configuration file is not displayed. The user can determine the status of the file which is either a complete or a distilled version of the configuration file. Use the more system:running-config command to view the running configuration file. The more system:running-config command displays the version of the software and any changes that were previously made.
Note: You can use the more command to view files on remote systems.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

more {flash: <filename> | ftp: <filename> | nvram: <filename> | nvram:startup-config | startup-config | system:startup-config } [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} | {count | count-only}] more {flash: <filename> | ftp: <filename> | nvram: <filename> | nvram:startup-config | startup-config | system:startup-config } [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
filename | begin file name turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string
1-115
Release 5.2.1
exclude include WORD count count-only
filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
1-116
Release 5.2.1
page
The page command controls the scrolling of system output displays.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
All modes
Command Line Usage

page {off | on}
Command Syntax
off on scrolling continues until the end of the display without stopping controlled scrolling through the use of the Enter/Return key and spacebar
Command Default
on
1-117
Release 5.2.1
password
The password command establishes a password that must be specified by users attempting to establish a console or telnet session with the BSR. A console or telnet session will not be established if the correct password is not specified by the user. The no password command removes the password.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

password {console | telnet}[0 | 7] <WORD> no password {console | telnet}
Command Syntax
console telnet 0 7 WORD password for console connections password for telnet connections specifies an UNENCRYPTED password specifies a HIDDEN password the password (31 character maximum, 78 character maximum for option 7) - enclosed with double quotes if the key contains spaces). The "%" and "!" characters must not be used.
1-118
Release 5.2.1
patch install
The BSR supports a maximum of 16 unique patch files. A patch file can be configured through the CLI and then displayed in the running-config file. Once the running-config file is copied to the startup-config file, the patches are persistently applied to the BSR chassis. The patch install command applies text patch files to the BSR chassis or to a specified slot in the BSR chassis. The SRM copies the specified patch file to all the running modules. Once a module receives the patch file and a patch indicate message, the module begins the patching process. The patching process involves opening the patch file and determining whether the patch file is compatible with the modules system version. If the patch file is compatible with the modules system version, the patch file is executed on the module. The patch install slot command executes the patching process on a single module. The no patch install command removes a patch from the BSR chassis or from a specified slot in the BSR chassis.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

patch install {flash: | nvram:} {<filename>} [slot <NUM>] no patch install {flash: | nvram:} {<filename>} [slot <NUM>]
Command Syntax
flash: nvram: Specifies flash memory as the location of the patch file. Specifies Non-volatile Random Access Memory (NVRAM) as the location of the patch file. Patch filename stored in Flash or NVRAM. The BSR slot number.
filename slot NUM
1-119
Release 5.2.1
privilege restricted
The privilege restricted command designates a specific CLI command or group of commands as belonging to the "restricted" user group. Only users in the "restricted" user group have read-write access to commands designated as "restricted". Note: By default, users in the "restricted" user group will not be able to execute any commands unless they have been specified as "restricted" with the privilege restricted command.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

privilege restricted {<WORD> [<...WORD>] | all} no privilege {<WORD> [<...WORD>] | all}
Command Syntax
WORD the command whose privilege level is to be changed to "restricted" - multiple commands can be specified separated by spaces changes the privilege level to "restricted" for all of the sub-options of a given command
all
1-120
Release 5.2.1
radius-server
The radius-server command configures a RADIUS client to allow communication with a RADIUS server. Configuring a RADIUS client involves the following tasks:

specifying the RADIUS server defining the shared encryption key for authentication between the RADIUS server and the RADIUS client specifying the number of retry attempts if there is no response from an active RADIUS server specifying the time interval between retry attempts if there is no response from from an active RADIUS server
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

radius-server host {<A.B.C.D>|<Hostname>} [auth-port <0-65535> [primary]] radius-server key <WORD> radius-server retransmit <0-100> radius-server timeout <1-1000> no radius-server host {<A.B.C.D>|<Hostname>} [auth-port] no radius-server key no radius-server retransmit no radius-server timeout
Command Syntax
host A.B.C.D specifies a RADIUS server the IP address of the RADIUS server
1-121
Release 5.2.1
Hostname auth-port 0-65535 primary key WORD
the hostname of the RADIUS server specify a UDP port number for RADIUS authentication - default port number is 1812 select this server as the primary RADIUS server text of the encryption key shared between the RADIUS client and the RADIUS servers Motorola recommends a 22 character minimum specify the number of retry attempts if there is no response from an active RADIUS server default is 3 retries specify the time interval in seconds between retry attempts if there is no response from from an active RADIUS server - default is 5 seconds
retransmit 0-100
timeout 1-1000
1-122
Release 5.2.1
radius-server source-interface loopback

The radius-server source-interface loopback command allows an operator to control the source IP address of Radius authentication protocol packets generated by the BSR by specifying a loopback interface as the source IP address for Radius authentication protocol packets. The normal convention for generated Radius authentication protocol packets is to set the source IP address equal to the IP address of the outgoing interface. The radius-server source-interface loopback command overrides this convention and instead uses the IP address of the specified loopback interface. The no radius-server source-interface loopback command removes the loopback source interface. Note: Before using the radius-server source-interface loopback command, the loopback interface must be configured and assigned an IP address.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

radius-server source-interface loopback <1-255> no radius-server source-interface loopback
Command Syntax
1-123
Release 5.2.1
redundancy cmts
The redundancy cmts command enables CMTS redundancy protection for a primary CMTS. The slot number of the primary CMTS must be in the range 0..5 or 9..14. Slot 15 may not be used for CMTS redundancy. The no redundancy cmts command disables CMTS redundancy protection for a slot.The slot number must be a primary slot number in the range 0..5 or 9..14. By default, redundancy is automatically enabled for all installed CMTS modules. Note: It is important to save any configuration changes made to a primary CMTS interface in the running configuration to the startup configuration with the copy running-config startup-config command. This ensures that any configuration changes are guaranteed to be maintained when a Primary CMTS Module switches over service to the Standby CMTS Module or the Standby CMTS Module gives back service to a Primary CMTS Module. If a CPE that is statically configured with an IP address instead of obtaining and IP address via DHCP registers on an active CMTS card, then a switchover occurs, the arp entry will not be deleted if the CM de-registers. If the CM attempts to re-register, the CPE will not pass data until the arp timeout expires.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

redundancy cmts <NUM> no redundancy cmts <NUM>
Command Syntax
NUM the BSR 64000 CMTS slot number
1-124
Release 5.2.1
Command Default
redundancy enabled
1-125
Release 5.2.1
redundancy dtx
The redundancy dtx command enables TX32 redundancy protection for a Primary TX32. The slot number of the Primary TX32 must be in the range 0..5 or 9..14. Slots 7 and 8 are reserved for SRM modules, slot 6 is reserved for a standby CMTS, and slot 15 does not support the necessary backplane signals. The no redundancy cmts command disables TX32 redundancy protection for a slot. The slot number must be a primary slot number in the range 0..5 or 9..14. By default, redundancy is automatically enabled for all installed TX32 modules. Note: It is important to save any configuration changes in the running configuration to the startup configuration with the copy running-config startup-config command so that these changes are maintained whenever any primary module switches over to a redundant module or is restored back to a primary module.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

redundancy dtx {<X> | reset-after-switchover } no redundancy dtx {<X> | reset-after-switchover }
Command Syntax
X the TX32 slot number
reset-after-switchover enables resetting a surrendering TX32 card following a manual switchover
Command Defaults
redundancy enabled reset-after-switchover = disabled
1-126
Release 5.2.1
redundancy force-switchover cmts

The redundancy force-switchover cmts command forces a CMTS to switchover to the CMTS that provides redundancy for it. For a primary slot in the range 0..5, 9..14, the spare CMTS in slot 6 takes over. For slot 6, the spare CMTS gives back operation to whatever primary CMTS for which it was operating. Note: After the first administrative (manual) switchover you perform for BSR 64000 systems employing Redundant SRMs, Redundant CMTS modules, or both; wait a minimum of 5 minutes for SRMs and 60 seconds for CMTS modules before initiating another administrative switchover. It is important to save any configuration changes made to a primary CMTS interface in the running configuration to the startup configuration with the copy running-config startup-config command. This ensures that any configuration changes are guaranteed to be maintained when a Primary CMTS Module switches over service to the Standby CMTS Module or the Standby CMTS Module gives back service to a Primary CMTS Module. If a CPE that is statically configured with an IP address instead of obtaining and IP address via DHCP registers on an active CMTS card, then a switchover occurs, the arp entry will not be deleted if the CM de-registers. If the CM attempts to re-register, the CPE will not pass data until the arp timeout expires. Only users with read/write privileges are allowed to use the redundancy force-switchover cmts command. If a user has read-only privileges, the command is not executed and a message is displayed informing the user of insufficient privileges.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

redundancy force-switchover cmts <NUM>
1-127
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
NUM the BSR 64000 CMTS slot number
1-128
Release 5.2.1
redundancy force-switchover dtx

The redundancy force-switchover dtx command forces a Primary TX32 module to switchover to the Standby TX32 module that provides redundancy for it.. Note: It is important to save any configuration changes in the running configuration to the startup configuration with the copy running-config startup-config command so that these changes are maintained whenever any primary module switches over to a redundant module or is restored back to a primary module. Only users with read/write privileges are allowed to use the redundancy force-switchover dtx command. If a user has read-only privileges, the command is not executed and a message is displayed informing the user of insufficient privileges.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

redundancy force-switchover dtx <NUM>
Command Syntax
NUM the TX32 slot number
1-129
Release 5.2.1
redundancy force-switchover srm

The redundancy force-switchover srm command allows an administrative switchover from the active SRM to the standby SRM and will cause control of the BSR 64000 to pass from the active SRM to the standby SRM. Note: After the first administrative (manual) switchover you perform for BSR 64000 systems employing Redundant SRMs, Redundant CMTS modules, or both; wait a minimum of 5 minutes for SRMs and 60 seconds for CMTS modules before initiating another administrative switchover. It is important to save any configuration changes made to a primary SRM interface in the running configuration to the startup configuration with the copy running-config startup-config command. This ensures that any configuration changes are guaranteed to be maintained when a Primary SRM Module switches over service to the Standby SRM Module or the Standby SRM Module gives back service to a Primary SRM Module. Only users with read/write privileges are allowed to use the redundancy force-switchover srm command. If a user has read-only privileges, the command is not executed and a message is displayed informing the user of insufficient privileges.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

redundancy force-switchover srm
1-130
Release 5.2.1
reload
The reload command reloads the operating system. The reload command is most often used to reload upgraded software.
Group Access
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

reload [ at <hh:mm:> <LINE> <MONTH> | cancel | fast | in countdown | reason <LINE>]
Command Syntax
at hh:mm MONTH cancel fast in countdown reason LINE reloads at a specific time specific hour and minute to reload name of the month cancels a pending reload reloads the system immediately reloads after a time interval time interval in mm or hh:mm text of the reason to reload
1-131
Release 5.2.1
reload switched
A Hitless Upgrade is performed by distributing new software image(s) to all modules in the BSR 64000 chassis via the update chassis command and then using the reload switched command to sequentially reload the image to all modules in the chassis. The reload switched command performs a sequential reload of every module resident in the BSR chassis as part of a hitless upgrade. While each module is reloading, its operation will be performed by another module. Note: The reload switched command can be used by itself (without the update chassis command) to perform a hitless reload (not upgrade) of the chassis.
Note: The reload switched command checks to determine if redundancy is enabled for all slots. If any CMTS slot is not enabled for redundancy, a warning message appears. The reload switched command will not be executed in the following circumstances:

a non-switched reload is currently pending. there are modules cards in the BSR chassis that are not in either the RUN or STBY state. the BSR chassis does not support both SRM and CMTS redundancy.
Warning: If a user attempts a Hitless Upgrade between archives having different HU Software Group numbers, the following warning message is displayed: WARNING - Attempting Hitless Upgrade between two incompatible archives. Recommended aborting the "reload switched" command Abort the "switched reload" ? [yes/no]: The user is given the choice of proceeding with the Hitless Upgrade or aborting the operation with the recommendation being to abort.
1-132
Release 5.2.1
CLI commands that would interfere with operation of the reload switched command will not be executed during the switched reload procedure. These commands are:

balance boot copy download (debug mode command) update redundancy cmts enable/disable redundancy force srm/cmts reload (except reload cancel) reset shutdown (if configuring an HSIM interface) no shutdown (if configuring HSIM interface)
During a switched hitless upgrade reload, the above commands will not execute even if the command does not apply to the module currently being reloaded. If an attempt is made to use these commands, the system will display a message similar to the following:
This command may not be performed while a switched reload is in progress. Enter . show reload to display the current progress of the switched reload. Enter reload cancel to cancel the switched reload.
Group Access
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

reload switched [check | hsim-delay <15-120> | resume [ hsim-delay <15-120>]]
1-133
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
check hsim-delay 15-120 check the system to see if Hitless Upgrade is supported the number of seconds (15-120) that Hitless Upgrade waits between the end of the reload of one HSIM card and the start of the reload of the next HSIM card - this time allows the routing tables to be populated before reloading the next HSIM card resume a cancelled or terminated switched reload
resume
The following is an example of typical output from the reload switched check command:\
Switched reload validation summary: System card types and states meet requirements of Hitless Upgrade. Please verify the software compatibility between the current and target application archives by checking the Hitless Upgrade Group numbers and making sure that they are the same in both the archives. eg - archive 4.1.0T00P48H04KRAU.Z - HU group is 04 For boot rom upgrade refer to release documentation to verify suitablity for Hitless Upgrade. Please check user documentation to insure that hardware revision numbers meet the requirements of the new software archive. It is the user's responsibility to insure that multi-path routes to the desired destinations have been configured. The software does not verify this.
1-134
Release 5.2.1
Note: For the reload switched resume command, the hsim-delay option has the same functionality as described above with one important difference; If the hsim-delay option is not specified with the reload switched resume command, then the hsim-delay value used during Hitless Upgrade will be the hsim-delay value specified with the previous reload switched hsim-delay command or the default hsim-delay value of 15 seconds. For example, the reload switched command is started with an hsim-delay of 35 secondS. reload switched hsim-delay 35 For some reason Hitless Upgrade is either aborted by the user or terminates due to some issue. When the issue has been addressed and Hitless Upgrade is resumed, the following scenarios will apply: if the reload switched resume hsim-delay command is used without explicitly specifying an hsim-delay value, Hitless Upgrade uses the previous value of 35 seconds for the hsim-delay. if the reload switched resume command is used with an hsim-delay value of 25 seconds (reload switched resume hsim-delay 25), Hitless Upgrade will use the new specified value of 25 seconds for the hsim-delay.
Command Default
hsim-delay = 15 seconds
1-135
Release 5.2.1
remote copy
The remote copy command provides the ability to copy a file from an external File Transport Protocol (FTP) server to a remote module such as the CMTS 2:8 or TX32. The remote copy command also provides the ability to copy a file from a remote module to an external FTP server. The following example copies the cmts2x8_ar.z file from an FTP server onto BSR slot 4's filesystem: MOT:7A# remote copy ftp://10.14.37.195/mgi515/cmts2x8_ar.z slot 4 cmts2x8_ar.z The following example copies the cmts2x8_ar.z file from BSR slot 4's filesystem onto an FTP server: MOT:7A# remote copy slot 4 cmts2x8_ar.z ftp://10.14.37.195/mgi515/ cmts2x8_ar.z
Group Access
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

remote copy ftp: <filesystem> slot <NUM> [<WORD> [gateway <A.B.C.D>]] [gateway <A.B.C.D>] remote copy slot <NUM> <WORD> ftp: [gateway <A.B.C.D>]
Command Syntax
ftp: filesystem slot NUM Copy the configuration file from an FTP server. Copy the configuration file from a FTP server BSR slot number.
1-136
Release 5.2.1
WORD gateway A.B.C.D
Destination filename or file to be copied. Specifies a port-forwarding gateways local logical interfaces IP address.
1-137
Release 5.2.1
remote delete slot remote rm slot

The remote delete slot and remote rm slot commands delete a specified file on a specified BSR slot.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

remote delete slot <NUM> <WORD> remote rm slot <NUM> <WORD>
Command Syntax
NUM WORD The BSR slot number. The filename of the file to be deleted.
1-138
Release 5.2.1
remote dir slot remote ls slot

The remote dir slot and remote ls slot commands display a list of filenames, creation dates, file sizes and space available on a filesystem. The following is typical screen output from the remote dir slot and remote ls slot commands:
Directory of Slot 11: 8667918 2097148 2097148 2097148 5230 129356 1144176 0 0 0 0 0 Tue Mon Mon Tue Thu Thu Thu Fri Thu Fri Fri Fri Jun Jun Jun Jun Jan Jan Jan Jan Feb Jan Jan Jan 23 22 22 23 15 15 15 16 05 16 16 16 09:59:44 13:57:37 16:08:53 10:03:27 15:13:43 15:14:06 15:14:51 15:29:42 12:16:46 15:16:16 15:19:49 15:26:13 2009 2009 2009 2009 2009 2009 2009 2009 2009 2009 2009 2009 tx.bin eventlog8.mer eventlog9.mer eventlog1.mer tx32_qrm_eeprom.hex tx32_qrm_flash.hex tx32_qrm_fpga.cbt core_dsphy.Initial_01 core_ProcessTask_01 core_dsphy.Initial_04 core_dsphy.Initial_05 core_dsphy.Initial_06
Number of Files: 12 Kbytes -----50495 Used ---15919 Avail ----34576 Use% ---31 %
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

remote dir slot <NUM> remote ls slot <NUM>
1-139
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
NUM The BSR slot number.
1-140
Release 5.2.1
repeat
The repeat command repeats a command or series of commands
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

repeat {<NUM>} {<WORD> [...<WORD>] | delay <NUM> {<WORD> [...<WORD>]}}
Command Syntax
NUM WORD delay NUM the number of times to repeat the command or series of commands the command or series of commands the delay (in seconds) between the execution of each command
1-141
Release 5.2.1
reset
The reset command resets all slots or a specific slot in the BSR 64000 chassis. Note: It is important to save any configuration changes made in the running configuration to the startup configuration with the copy running-config startup-config command before resetting a slot. This ensures that any configuration changes are guaranteed to be maintained after a slot is reset.
Group Access
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

reset {all | slot <0-6, 8-15>}
Command Syntax
all slot 0-6, 8-15 reset all slots in the BSR 64000 chassis reset a specific slot
1-142
Release 5.2.1
service password-encryption
The service password-encryption command enables password encryption. The no service password-encryption disables password encryption. The service password-encryption command will also encrypt previously specified passwords in the running-config file that are currently unencrypted. Note: Once passwords appearing in the running configuration file are encrypted, they cannot be unencrypted using the no service password-encryption command.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

service password-encryption no service password-encryption
Command Default
No encryption
1-143
Release 5.2.1
session-timeout
The session-timeout command lets you specify the length of time (in minutes) before the BSR terminates any inactive session. An inactive session is a session has received no user input or system output during the specified time interval.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

session-timeout {console | telnet} <0-30>
Command Syntax
console telnet 0-30 specifies console sessions specifies telnet sessions length of time in minutes before the session is terminated automatically by the BSR
Command Default
5 minutes for telnet sessions 0 for console sessions (session maintained indefinitely)
1-144
Release 5.2.1
session-window set
The session-window set command specifies the height and width parameters of the current CLI session window.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

session-window set {height <4-128> | width <16-384>}
Command Syntax
height 4-128 width 16-384 sets window height in number of lines sets window width in number of columns
1-145
Release 5.2.1
set bandwidth-factor
The set bandwidth-factor command configures the percentage of bandwidth that may be used by a Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet interface. The no set bandwidth-factor command restores the default bandwidth factor of 100%.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet interfaces only)
Command Line Usage

set bandwidth-factor <10-100> no set bandwidth-factor
Command Syntax
10-100 the percentage of bandwidth that can be used (min 10 Mbps)
Command Default
100%
1-146
Release 5.2.1
set stats poll

The set stats poll command specifies a polling interval in seconds for various BSR slot statistics. The no set stats poll command disables slot statistics polling.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Slot Configuration
Command Line Usage

For the SRM module in slot 7: set stats poll update <1-3600> no set stats poll update <1-3600> For all Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet slots: set stats poll {bmeth | fastpath {ip | mpls} | gige | lcpu | update | xfabric} {<1-3600>} no set stats poll {bmeth | fastpath {ip | mpls} | gige | lcpu | update | xfabric} {<1-3600>} For all CMTS slots: set stats poll {cmts | update | xfabric} {<1-3600>} no set stats poll {cmts | update | xfabric} {<1-3600>}
Command Syntax
bmeth cmts fastpath ip fastpath mpls buffer manager Ethernet statistics
CMTS Statistics Fastpath forwarding IP statistics Fastpath forwarding MPLS statistics
1-147
Release 5.2.1
gige lcpu update xfabric 1-3600
Gigabit Ethernet statistics local CPU Ethernet statistics report statistics to SRM switch fabric statistics poll time in seconds
1-148
Release 5.2.1
show aliases
The show aliases command displays any one of the following:

Aliases for commands in all modes Aliases for commands in a specific mode. Aliases for all commands that begin with, include, or exclude a specified string. Aliases for a specific mode that begin with, include, or exclude a specified string.
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show aliases command:
Privilege mode aliases: getHa22 copy ftp://150.21.2.61/pub/tter/tterHa22.Z nvram: getSf copy ftp://10.14.37.103/pub/tter/tter.Z nvram:tter.Z ccm clear cable modem all reset ccmoff clear cable modem offline getElf copy ftp://10.14.37.103/pub/tter/vxWorks.Z.elf nvram:vxWorks.Z.elf getVtag copy ftp://10.14.37.103/pub/tter/tterVtag.Z nvram:tterVtag.Z System-wide aliases: scmst show cable modem summary total scm show cable modem
Group Access
All
Command Mode
All except User EXEC
Command Line Usage

show alias [conf | exec | priv] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} | {count | count-only}] show alias [conf | exec | priv] [ | {count | count-only}]
1-149
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
conf exec priv | begin exclude include WORD count count-only specifies aliases for Global Configuration mode specifies aliases for User EXEC mode specifies aliases for Privileged EXEC mode turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
1-150
Release 5.2.1
show boot
The show boot command lists the boot parameters. Use the show boot command to display the contents of the BOOT environment variables and the configuration register setting. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show boot command:
Boot location currently set to nvram:tter.Z
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show boot [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} | {count | count-only}] show boot [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
| begin exclude include WORD count count-only turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
1-151
Release 5.2.1
show chassis alias

The show chassis alias command to show the alias name for the BSR chassis.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
All modes
Command Line Usage

show chassis alias
1-152
Release 5.2.1
show chassis assetid

The show chassis assetid command is used to view the asset ID number assigned to the BSR.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
All modes
Command Line Usage

show chassis assetid
1-153
Release 5.2.1
show chassis serial-num

The show chassis serial-num command is used to view the serial number assigned to your BSR 64000.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
All modes
Command Line Usage

show chassis serial-num
1-154
Release 5.2.1
show chassis status

The show chassis status command displays the operational status and twhe type of modules that are installed in the BSR. The following information is provided: Slot Type module slot number from 0 to 15 the type of module inserted into the BSR 64000. HSIM indicates either the POS or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface modules (NIMs)- CMTS indicates the DOCSIS module - SRM indicates the Supervisory Routing Module (SRM3 or SRM4) the module subtype - 2X8 CMTS, ETH1, ETH8, etc. indicates the slot number of the redundant backup module indicates the current operational state of the module. RUN indicates that the module is fully operational. Flash indicates that the module is updating its FLASH memory. boot indicates that the module is currently in a boot state. stby indicates that the module is in standby mode resource module. An x indicates that this module is operational. A - (dash) indicates that this module is not currently operational physical module (IO module). An x indicates that this module is operational. A - (dash) indicates that this module is not currently operational if the system clock has been set using the clock set command, the UpTime field displays the amount of time that the module has been operational. The time is expressed in hh:mm:ss format if the module is down, the last operational time for the module displays the module booted successfully. the module failed the boot process.
Sub Red State
RM IO
UpTime
LastUpTime Success Failure
1-155
Release 5.2.1
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show chassis status command: For Release 5.0.0, the show chassis status command has been enhanced with the TX32 module type and operational status. The following is typical screen output from the show chassis status command:
Current Time: 11/19-06:43:15 Running archive: NVRAM:500T00P01.Z Slot 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Type Sub Red State RUN RUN stby RUN RUN RUN RUN RM x x x x x x x IO x x x x x x x x x x UpTime LastUpTime Success Failure 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 TX32 Module 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
CMTS 2x8(2.0)
0w2d16h
CMTS 2x8 CMTS 2x8(2.0) SRM4
0w2d16h 0w2d16h 0w2d16h
DTX
TX32
0w2d16h
HSIM MMGE HSIM ETH8
0w2d16h 0w2d16h
1-156
Release 5.2.1
Note: The value displayed with the sysUpTime SNMP MIB object and the "UpTime" field as displayed in the show chassis status command output represent different system up time values. The sysUpTime MIB object represents the amount of time that the SNMP Agent has been running. This is relative to the time that the SNMP Agent was last restarted. Initially, this will be close to the time that the SRM module last restarted because the SNMP Agent resides on the SRM module. However, if the SNMP Agent itself is restarted with the snmp-server shutdown or snmp-server enable CLI commands, the sysUpTime will be reset to zero. The "UpTime" value displayed in the show chassis status command output represents the amount of time that the modules have been running relative to the last reboot of the chassis or last reset of the modules. These system time values may be different for each module, even after a reboot of the entire chassis, because not all modules complete their initialization at the same time. Also, the system time values will be different if individual modules are restarted via the CLI or are manually inserted at a later time. However, the per-module 'UpTime" values displayed in the show chassis status command output are NOT affected by the snmp-server shutdown and snmp-server enable commands because these values are relative to the modules boot time not to the SNMP Agents boot time.
Note: After an SRM switchover, the show chassis status command output may display an inaccurate uptime value for SRM4 modules in the BSR chassis. This should not otherwise affect system performance. For BSR 64000 systems with an SRM4, a file called timezone is automatically created in NVRAM to store the system clock time zone information configured with the clock set and clock timezone commands. The timezone file should not be deleted. If the file is removed for any reason, then the system clock and time zone configuration must be re-entered using the clock set and clock timezone commands and verified using the show clock command.
1-157
Release 5.2.1
Group Access
All
Command Mode
All modes
Command Line Usage

show chassis status [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} | {count | count-only}] show chassis status [ | {count | count-only}] Note: Do not truncate the show chassis status command (ex. sh ch st) when in Interface Configuration Mode. Truncating the show chassis status command when in Interface Configuration Mode will produce the expected command output but will also place the CLI into Global Configuration Mode.
Command Syntax
1-158
Release 5.2.1
show clock
The show clock command shows the system clock. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show clock command:
TUE JAN 24 10:05:05 2006 Timezone eastern, -5 hr 0 min offset from UTC
Group Access
All
Command Mode
All modes
Command Line Usage

show clock [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} | {count | count-only}] show clock [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
1-159
Release 5.2.1
show core log

The show core log command addresses the problem of logged exception data being removed from a log file as other logged data is added and the log files capacity is exceeded before the exception log data can retrieved. In addition to logging exception data in the regular log file, the exception data is stored in a core log file. This log file can be viewed with the show core log command and cleared with the clear core log command.
The core log file stores up to 400 lines of exception data, occupying a maximum 102.4 KB file size in FLASH. The filename is core.log. After a reload, a new core.log file is created, and the old core.log file is backed up to a file named core.old. The core.old file can be viewed in a text editor.
The following displays typical output from the show core log command:
Preparing log file for reading ... [07/21-18:14:22.4807/21-18:13:41.89[07/21-18:14:22.3607/21-18:13:41.89[07/21-18:14:22.3407/21-18:13:41.89[07/21-18:14:22.3307/21-18:13:41.89[07/21-18:14:22.2907/21-18:13:41.89[07/21-18:14:22.2807/21-18:13:41.89-
08:EXC]-E- Reformating Exception Storage 08:EXC]-EtRDNc Timeout:0 08:EXC]-E- Tasks blocked on semaphore 0xfffff80: 08:EXC]-EtTnetRDNtd Timeout:0 08:EXC]-E- Tasks blocked on semaphore 0xb17d88c: 08:EXC]-EEventMgr Timeout:28
Group Access
All
Command Mode
All mores except for User EXEC
Command Line Usage

show core log
1-160
Release 5.2.1
show evt
The show evt command displays EVT counts for all EVT groups, a specific EVT group, EVT group counts that only occur on a specific BSR slot, or individual event. By default, only EVT groups with non-zero event counts are displayed. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show evt command:
Slot 0: CRA - Cra event system EVT Base : 4608 Num Title Count Sv Logging ------------------------------------------ ---------- -- -------1 rcvd crm msg 144 D 14 Received CA Certificate SET request 3 D 18 Sent GET CA Cert. message to CRM 1 D 23 cmtsSendCrmCmAdd 12 D 24 cmtsSendCrmCmDel 8 D 25 cmtsSendCrmCmReg 12 D
Slot 0: MACCFG - macCfg event system EVT Base : 9984 Num Title Count Sv Logging ------------------------------------------ ---------- -- -------1 Flap tree add success 3 D 3 Flap tree delete success 3 D 8 FlapListAdd success 3 D 10 FlapListDel success 3 D 15 FlapListAgeout success 2 D 18 set cmh flap rowstatus to active 3 D 19 set cmh flap rowstatus to destroy 3 D 22 set cmh flap mac addr 4 D
In addition to the BSR 64000 slot number, EVT group name, and EVT base number, the following information is displayed Num Title the EVT number - EVTs are numbered from 1 to 255 (maximum) the title of the individual event
1-161
Release 5.2.1
Count Sv
the number of times the EVT has occurred since the count was last reset the severity level of the event - in order of increasing severity, the abbreviations are: D = Debug I = Informational N = Notice W = Warning E = Error C = Critical A = Alert E = Emergency
Logging
indicates to which logging subsystems EVT messages are forwarded: L = Local log file T = Trap to SNMP S = SYSLOG C = Console
Group Access
All
Command Mode
All modes
Command Line Usage

show evt [<NUM> | <WORD>]
1-162
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
NUM WORD the chassis slot number the name of an EVT group - refer to the table below.
1-163
Release 5.2.1
Table EVT Event Subsystems memchk net ipevt tpt arp rpt im icp evtm evta rmbind rm crmbpi crm crmsub crmfft crmsnr crmutl crmdtm crmcli crmdsg dsgif csm brmtag rsm rdb fpevt spcmgr dgm dqos pcmm em lbgmgr drm drme Memory Check Network IP Event System Testpoint Facility ARP SRM Repeater Interface Manager ICP EVT Manager EVT Agent RM Bind Resource Manager CRM BPI CRM CRM SubMgt CRM FFT CRM SNR CRM Util CRM DOCSTEST CRM CLI CRM DSG DSG Interface Certificate Storage Module BRM VLAN Tagging Redundancy SRM Run Time Database FP EVT Spectrum Manager DQM PacketCable DQOS PacketCable Multimedia PacketCable Event Message Load Balance Manage DOCSIS Redundancy Manager DOCSIS Redundancy Manager Engine drmr DOCSIS Redundancy Manager SRM swr Switched Reload tacacs TACACS+ vrfmgr VRF Manager ipsec IPSEC sys SYS UTIL snmpa SNMP Agent dsgmib SNMP DSG bufmgr Buffer Manager eth8 Ethernet Switch fei FEI srpcmt SRM Reporter CMTS maccfg MAC CFG cmtbuf CMTS Buffer fpga CMTS FPGA bcm Broadcom Driver bcmpkt Broadcam Driver Per Packet frm FRM ard ARD ardpkt ARD PKT que QUE Manager upc Upconverter res RES resrtr RES RTR resaut RES AUTH ressf RES SF resmgr RES MGR lbm Load Balancing lbm2 Load Balancing 2nd Table lbmsnr Load Balacing SNR cms Cable Modem Selector acc ACC accpkt ACC Packet ACC DHCP REG Range Data Path Mapping DOCSIS Redundancy Agent ubsha Upstream Scheduler RTR ubsbst Upstream Scheduler Burst ubsmac UBS CMTS MAC RTR ubs Upstream Scheduler ubsim UBS IM SYNC ubsmap UBS MAP macmr MAC MGR docsif DOCS IF macrtr MACRTR brgtag BRG TAG BRG brg brgrtr BRG RTR Spectrum Agent FFT spafft spasnr Spectrum Agent SNR rssi Spectrum Agent RSSI spasc Spectrum Agent SC ardrtr ARD RTR acctrt ACC RTR btp Boot Uptime mcns MCNS red CMTS Redundancy ICP ucc Upstream Channel Change dcc Dynamic Channel Change dsx Dynamic Service svcflo Service Flow cra CRA cra2 CRA SNR bcm1 Broadcom 3138 Driver bcmmac Broadcom 3212 Driver pream Preamble upcmot Upconverter Motorola accdhc reg range dpm dra
1-164
Release 5.2.1
show forced-download
The show forced-download command shows information about which slots are set for forced download from the SRM. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show forced-download command:
Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
is is is is is is is is is is is is is is is is
forced forced forced forced forced forced forced forced forced forced forced forced forced forced forced forced
to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to
always always always always always always always always always always always always always always always always
download download download download download download download download download download download download download download download download
from from from from from from from from from from from from from from from from
the the the the the the the the the the the the the the the the
SRM SRM SRM SRM SRM SRM SRM SRM SRM SRM SRM SRM SRM SRM SRM SRM
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show forced-download [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} | {count | count-only}] show forced-download [ | {count | count-only } {<WORD>}]
1-165
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
1-166
Release 5.2.1
show history
The show history command displays a list of commands executed during a session. The list size is determined by the setting of the history size command. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show history command:
show show show show show show show show show show
ip bgp next-hops ip bgp summary ip bgp community boot aliases boot chassis alias chassis asset-id clock history
Group Access
All
Command Mode
All modes
Command Line Usage

show history [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} | {count | count-only}] show history [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
| begin exclude turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string
1-167
Release 5.2.1
include WORD count count-only
filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
1-168
Release 5.2.1
show keepalive
The show keepalive command displays keepalive status and configuration information for all switch fabric or ICP keepalives. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show keepalive command:
Status
: : Features : : Thresholds: :
xfabric keepalive enabled icp keepalive enabled xfabric(monitor, 880-recover, slot-recover, cmts-rebind) icp(monitor, slot-reset ) xfabric (monitor 3, 880-recover 10, slot-recover 60, cmts-rebind 5) icp (monitor 10, slot-reset 10)
Keepalive Retransmit Counts: Slot xfabric ICP ---------------------10 : 1 0
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show keepalive [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show keepalive [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
| begin turns on output modifiers (filters or counters) filter for output that begins with the specified string
1-169
Release 5.2.1
1-170
Release 5.2.1
show log
The show log command displays message logging in the log file, the oldest message first. The show log command displays log file contents and information about users who have logged into the BSR. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show log command::
Preparing log file for reading ... [02/11-10:39:08- 07:telnet01]-N-user enabled-user authenticated [02/11-10:39:04- 07:telnet01]-N-connection made from 10.14.11.218 on session 01 [02/10-18:41:11- 07:RMs]-N-Module state RUNNING CMTS slot 1 . [02/10-18:41:11- 07:RMs]-I-Slot 1 booted with version 2.1.0T00P39.KRBU [02/10-18:41:09- 07:SPECMGR]-N-No shut down succeed for channel ifIndex = 98561 [02/10-18:41:09[02/10-18:41:08[02/10-18:41:08[02/10-18:41:08[02/10-18:41:07iguration(), for [02/10-18:41:07disable [02/10-18:41:073 shutdown [02/10-18:41:07[02/10-18:41:072 shutdown [02/10-18:41:07[02/10-18:41:071 shutdown [02/10-18:41:07[02/10-18:41:07eam 0 shutdown [02/10-18:41:07[02/10-18:41:0707:CRMTASK]-N-link up notification, ifIndex = 98561. 07:CRMTASK]-N-link up notification, ifIndex = 98305. 07:IM]-N-IP Interface cable 1/0 on 150.31.41.1 is up 07:IM]-N-Interface cable 1/0 is up 07:RMsc]-E-bad return value 0 from parse() in loadInterfaceConf config line:' cable dynamic-service authorization-mode disable' 07:RMsc]-I-restoring: cable dynamic-service authorization-mode 07:RMsc]-N-configuration change by [hotswapper]: cable upstream 07:RMsc]-I-restoring: cable upstream 3 shutdown 07:RMsc]-N-configuration change by [hotswapper]: cable upstream 07:RMsc]-I-restoring: cable upstream 2 shutdown 07:RMsc]-N-configuration change by [hotswapper]: cable upstream 07:RMsc]-I-restoring: cable upstream 1 shutdown 07:RMsc]-N-configuration change by [hotswapper]: no cable upstr 07:RMsc]-I-restoring: no cable upstream 0 shutdown 07:RMsc]-N-configuration change by [hotswapper]: cable upstream
Group Access
All
Command Mode All modes except User EXEC
1-171
Release 5.2.1
Command Line Usage

show log [chronological] [security] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show log [chronological] [security] [ | {count | count-only}]
1-172
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
chronological displays the log file from the oldest entry to the newest entry - this is the reverse of using the show log command without options displays security privilege information Note: the security option is only available to a user logged in as securityuser - refer to Configuring Cable Intercepts in the BSR 64000 CMTS Configuration and Management Guide turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
security
| begin exclude include WORD count count-only
1-173
Release 5.2.1
show logging evt

The show logging evt command displays the EVT configuration entries in the running configuration file. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show logging evt command:
EVT RUNNING logging evt logging evt logging evt
CONFIG: set c drme 82 set c rdb 197 set c dra 121
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show logging evt
1-174
Release 5.2.1
show logging reporting

The show logging reporting command displays the recording mechanism for logging messages based on their severity level. The display output is in the format: logging reporting <severity> <logging location> e.g. logging reporting alert local. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show logging reporting command:
no logging control docsis logging reporting emergency local logging reporting alert local logging reporting critical local-trap-syslog logging reporting error local-trap-syslog logging reporting warning local-trap-syslog logging reporting notice local-trap-syslog logging reporting information all-clear logging reporting debug all-clear
The following information is displayed:
Severity Levels and Descriptions emergency emergency conditions where the system is unusable reserved for vendor-specific, fatal hardware or software errors that prevents normal system operation and causes reporting system to reboot (severity level = 0) conditions where immediate action is needed - a serious failure which causes the reporting system to reboot but is not caused by hardware or software malfunctioning (severity level = 1) critical conditions - a serious failure that requires immediate attention and prevents the device from transmitting data but the system could recover without rebooting (severity level = 2)
alert
critical
1-175
Release 5.2.1
error
error conditions - a failure occurred that could interrupt the normal data flow (severity level = 3) warning conditions - a failure occurred that could interrupt the normal data flow (severity level = 4) normal but significant conditions - an event of importance occurred which is not a failure (severity level = 5) informational descriptive system messages - an unimportant event, which could be helpful for tracing normal operations (severity level = 6) debugging messages (severity level = 7) set all the severity level to default
warnings
notice
information
debug default
Logging Location Options local local-syslog local-trap local-trap-syslog log messages for the report go to local-nonvolatile memory (NVRAM) log messages for the report go to local NVRAM and the SYSLOG server log messages for the report go to local NVRAM. SNMP traps are also sent to an SNMP manager log messages for the report go to local NVRAM and a SYSLOG server - SNMP traps are also sent to an SNMP manager unsets all logging locations for the report sets all logging locations for the report
all-clear all-set
1-176
Release 5.2.1
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show logging reporting
1-177
Release 5.2.1
show logging syslog

The show logging syslog command displays a counter of the total number of log messages sent to the SYSLOG server and the number of messages dropped if a logging threshold has been exceeded. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show logging syslog command:
Syslog Messages Sent: 654 Syslog Messages Dropped due to throttling: 0
The following information is displayed: Syslog Messages Sent: Syslog Messages Dropped due to throttling: the number of log messages logged to the SYSLOG server the number of log messages that were to be logged to the SYSLOG server but were discarded because the threshold set with the logging rate-limit command was exceeded
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show logging syslog
1-178
Release 5.2.1
show macro
The show macro command lists all configured macros on the BSR.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show macro [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show macro [ | {count | count-only}}]
Command Syntax
1-179
Release 5.2.1
show memory
The show memory command displays the memory content of the starting address. Use the show memory command to view information about memory available after the system image decompresses and loads. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show memory command with the fastpath argument:
Fast Path memory usage as follows: Category -------Buffer Manager L2 Cam Total size Buffer Manager L2 CAM mapping table size Buffer Manager L2 CAM hash table size Buffer Manager L2 CAM MAC address tables size Buffer Manager L2 CAM Miscellaneous size Flow Classification Total size Icmp Filter FC mapping/hashing table size Policy FC mapping/hashing table size Flow Classification CAM/SRAM mapping table size Flow Classification Miscellaneous size Unicast Routing Total size Unicast Routing local route mapping Unicast Routing LME/SRAM mapping table size Total : : : : : : : : : : : # Of Bytes ---------1559084 1245232 2040 311808 4 5127504 52 144 5127304 4 12630540 : 49152 : 12581384 19317128
1-180
Release 5.2.1
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show memory command with the information argument:
FREE LIST: num addr size --- ---------- ---------1 0x6ea6718 72 2 0x6ee8248 32 3 0x6ea67e0 40 4 0x6ee8d60 32 5 0x6ea6a10 40 6 0x6ea6960 24
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show memory [<address> <1-4294967295> | byte | end <address> | long | short ] [ fastpath [brief] ] [ information [brief] [slot <NUM>] ] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show memory [<address> <1-4294967295> | byte | end <address> | long | short ] [ fastpath [brief] ] [ information [brief] [slot <NUM>] ] [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
address 1-4294967295 byte end long the starting memory address expressed in hexadecimal notation the number of bytes to dump display in byte format the ending memory address expressed in hexadecimal notation display in long format
1-181
Release 5.2.1
short fastpath brief information slot
display in short format the number of bytes used to program the HSIM FastPath display only the summary displays free memory statistics and a summary of memory usage displays free memory statistics and a summary of memory usage for a specified slot in the BSR chassis the BSR slot number turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
NUM | begin exclude include WORD count count-only
Command Default
32 bit
1-182
Release 5.2.1
show network-clocks
The show network-clocks command displays the network clock configuration. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show network-clocks command:
Priority 1 clock source: Reference not configured Priority 2 clock source: Reference not configured Current clock status: Out of Range Non-revertive mode selected Unlocked Free-running
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show network-clocks
1-183
Release 5.2.1
show patches-installed
The show patches-installed command displays all slots in the BSR chassis that have patches installed and descriptions of these patches. The show patches-installed slot command displays only the names of the patches on a particular slot and the timestamp for when the patch was installed on that slot. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show patches-installed command:
Slot 0 0 7 7 14 14 15
Patch File patch_cq40400 patch_cq40420 patch_cq40400 patch_cq40420 patch_cq40400 patch_cq40420 patch_cq40420
Description CQ40400 Patch CQ40400 Patch CQ40400 Patch CQ40400 Patch CQ40400 Patch CQ40400 Patch CQ40400 Patch
Text Text Text Text Text Text Text
File File File File File File File
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show patches-installed slot command:
Slot 14 patch_cq40400
Installed on 04/30 at 12:06:59
Group Access
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

show patches-installed [slot <NUM>]
1-184
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
slot NUM The BSR slot number.
1-185
Release 5.2.1
show pool
The show pool command displays information on data buffering including all memory buffer pools, application-specific pools, the network pool, system physical structures, and all mBuf pool names. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show pool command:
Statistics for pool: network number of FREE mbufs: 38271 number of mbufs: 38272 number of times failed to find space: 0 number of times waited for space: 0 number of times drained protocols for space: 0 high water mark: 9 __________________ CLUSTER POOL TABLE _____________________________________________________ size clusters free usage highwater mark ----------------------------------------------------64 16384 16383 44153 6 128 32768 32768 22520 2 256 4096 4096 64 1 512 2048 2048 25 1 1024 2048 2048 647 3 2048 512 512 0 0 -----------------------------------------------------
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show pool [<WORD> | all | application | icp | names | network | system ] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show pool [<WORD> | all | application | icp | names | network | system ] [ | {count | count-only}]
1-186
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
WORD all application icp names network system the name of the buffer pool view all memory buffer pools view all application-specific pools view chassis control messages in the ICP pool view the network pool where network data transfer information for the stack is located view the network pool where network data transfer information for the stack is located view system pool physical structures such as the number of sockets, routes, interface addresses, PCB, and multicast addresses turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
1-187
Release 5.2.1
show process
The show process command displays information about software processes that are running on the router. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show process command:
All CPU accounting is approximate, there are 103 ticks per second NAME -------tExcTask TaskMon ctrlMon tPCCARD BgpTask DiagTask DvmrpTask EventMgr FpMsgHndlr IcpTask OspfTask PimTask SntpTask SonetBoardAP SonetTimingT StatsMgrTask VrrpTask fanStatus TID ------f7fbb60 7925f38 7928958 f69d078 6a566e0 76af6b0 609d888 b17caf8 9118668 a29e4d8 637da80 61afd80 76a9a68 76b20d0 76b4af0 ae05e80 79ba698 76ac558 PRI --0 1 2 20 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 total % (ticks) -----------------000.00%( 8 000.00%( 12 000.00%( 0 000.00%( 0 000.01%( 68 000.00%( 0 000.00%( 2 000.00%( 8 000.00%( 32 000.11%( 1289 000.02%( 203 000.00%( 8 000.00%( 2 000.00%( 0 000.00%( 12 000.00%( 13 000.00%( 27 000.18%( 2173 delta % (ticks) -----------------000.00%( 0) 000.00%( 0) 000.00%( 0) 000.00%( 0) 000.00%( 0) 000.00%( 0) 000.00%( 0) 000.00%( 0) 000.00%( 0) 000.10%( 2) 000.00%( 0) 000.00%( 0) 000.00%( 0) 000.00%( 0) 000.00%( 0) 000.00%( 0) 000.05%( 1) 000.25%( 5)
Group Access
All
Command Mode
1-188
Release 5.2.1
Command Line Usage

show process [cpu | memory | msg-q-info | semaphores | stack] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show process [cpu | memory | msg-q-info | semaphores | stack] [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
cpu memory msg-q-info semaphores stack | begin exclude include WORD count count-only cpu utilization by each process memory information per process information about current message queues display state of semaphore(s) process stack usage and interrupt routines, including the reason for the last system reboot turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
1-189
Release 5.2.1
show process cpu

The show process cpu command displays detailed CPU usage statistics for active SRM and CMTS modules in the BSR 64000 chassis. The module type (for example: 2x8 CMTS slot <NUM>) is displayed along with the CPU usage statistics for that module. For HSIM modules, the module sub type (for example: Sub Type: SMGE) is displayed.
Note: CPU usage statistics for HSIM or standby SRM modules will not be displayed using this command.
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show process cpu command:
Slot: 4 Module Type: 2x8
CMTS
All CPU accounting is approximate, there are 503 ticks per second NAME -------tExcTask TaskMon tShell ctrlMon tKADEBUG tWdbTask DiagTask EventMgr tCmdHdlQ tRdnCollectT tRdnReportTa tRmIomLedTas tUbs redMonitorTa redSyncTask tFtpdTask TID ------fbfd6d8 eea6498 eee0168 eea8eb8 8b8c720 eee2388 ec0acd0 f081f78 ee72b60 8d65288 8d638f8 8d6b888 c4d1598 ec08248 a7ea9f8 f077380 PRI --0 1 1 2 2 3 30 30 30 30 30 30 40 50 50 55 total % (ticks) -----------------000.00%( 0 000.00%( 119 000.00%( 0 000.00%( 0 000.00%( 32 000.00%( 0 000.00%( 0 000.00%( 9 000.00%( 38 000.03%( 1516 000.00%( 0 000.00%( 50 004.31%( 260069 000.00%( 268 000.15%( 9299 000.00%( 0 delta % (ticks) -----------------000.00%( 0) 000.00%( 119) 000.00%( 0) 000.00%( 0) 000.00%( 32) 000.00%( 0) 000.00%( 0) 000.00%( 9) 000.00%( 38) 000.03%( 1516) 000.00%( 0) 000.00%( 50) 004.31%( 260069) 000.00%( 268) 000.15%( 9299) 000.00%( 0)
1-190
Release 5.2.1
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show process cpu [frequency <30-200> | restart | slot <NUM> | stop] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show process cpu [frequency <30-200> | restart | slot <NUM> | stop] [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
frequency 30-200 restart how many times per second a CPU statistic measurement is taken in 30-200 Hz restart the utilization measurement process on any or all slots containing a CMTS or active SRM
1-191
Release 5.2.1
slot NUM
displays detailed CPU usage statistics for a CMTS or SRM module specified by the modules slot number (0-15) Note: CPU usage statistics are not displayed for a standby NIM or standby SRM module if the specified slot is an HSIM module, the following message displays: This command does NOT accept HSIM slot if the specified slot does not contain a module, the following message displays: No data available for slot <NUM>
stop | begin exclude include WORD count count-only
stops the utilization measurement process turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
1-192
Release 5.2.1
Command Default
frequency = 60 Hz
1-193
Release 5.2.1
show process memory

The show process memory command displays per process memory usage information about software processes that are running on the BSR. The following screen output is displayed:
NAME TID STATUS Memory Requested Overhead HW mark --------------- --------- -------- --------- --------- --------- --------tRootTask bfffdf8 61713912 61706523 7389 61713936 tShell aeea888 PEND 3248 2981 267 3248 ctrlMon aeb20e8 PEND 152 128 24 152 tCmdHdlQ ae92450 READY 3712 3548 164 14016 tLogTask aeb7308 PEND+T 136 108 28 136 DiagTask ac2fd28 PEND 1928 1856 72 1928 redMonitorTask ac2d2a0 DELAY 379008 378976 32 379008 redSyncMsgTask ac2c018 DELAY 380664 380584 80 380664 redIcpTask ac2ad90 PEND 380696 380600 96 380696 redSTSIHTask ac28a70 PEND 48 32 16 48 IcpTask ac42d78 READY 65832 65772 60 74528 tEVTA ac3d3f0 PEND 2952 2920 32 4440 StatsMgrTask ac32dd8 PEND+T 528 464 64 528 tUpc aafe4d0 PEND 1680 1616 64 12520 fpgaDsTask 908f280 READY 48 32 16 48 tDftTask 908a570 DELAY 48 32 16 48 tArdTim 8583fb8 DELAY 48 32 16 48 dpsDsTask 8582b00 PEND 104 60 44 16144 resMgrTask 853e440 PEND 22240 22072 168 22768 tSftTask 853c088 PEND 48 32 16 48 tUbs 8446a40 READY 563368 562880 488 563896 tMcns2 8436000 PEND 48 32 16 48 tMacTask 842a5c0 READY 34793632 34792500 1132 34795744 rdnBpiMain 843e7b8 PEND+T 4048960 4048228 732 4048960 tMcnsLogTask 8434de0 PEND 6344 6284 60 6344 tRcyc 84223a0 READY 352 288 64 352 tCmacStats 8420180 PEND 262440 262368 72 262440 tSrmReporter 841df60 PEND+T 112 80 32 112 tRLimit 841bd40 DELAY 352 288 64 352 tMacRtr 8419b20 PEND 409352 408640 712 409880 tAccDhcp 8293c48 DELAY 48 32 16 48 tSPA 8292a28 PEND 148232 148188 44 148232 tDra 8286e18 PEND+T 184224 183832 392 185280 tCRA 5c26998 PEND 395976 395784 192 396632 tDownloadTask 5bbc540 PEND 15528 15480 48 15528 tRdb005 5bb1eb0 PEND+T 16352 16216 136 16880 tMcnsTask 842c7e0 READY 56 28 28 56 37 tasks used 103802408 103789516 12892
1-194
Release 5.2.1
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show process memory {<process-id> [ bytes | kilobytes | megabytes ]} | {<process-name> [ bytes | kilobytes | megabytes ]} | {slot <NUM>} {sorted [bytes | high-water-mark [bytes | kilobytes | megabytes ] | kilobytes | megabytes | name [bytes | kilobytes | megabytes ] | no-sort [bytes | kilobytes | megabytes ] | use [bytes | kilobytes | megabytes ]} [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show process memory {<process-id> [ bytes | kilobytes | megabytes ]} | {<process-name> [ bytes | kilobytes | megabytes ]} | {slot <NUM>} {sorted [bytes | high-water-mark [bytes | kilobytes | megabytes ] | kilobytes | megabytes | name [bytes | kilobytes | megabytes ] | no-sort [bytes | kilobytes | megabytes ] | use [bytes | kilobytes | megabytes ]} [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
process-id bytes kilobytes megabytes process-name slot NUM A process identifier in hexadecimal format Display total sizes in bytes Display total sizes in kilobytes Display total sizes in megabytes The alphanumeric process name up to 15 characters Displays detailed memory usage statistics for a CMTS module specified by the modules slot number Display sorted memory information for all processes Sort by maximum memory used
sorted high-water-mark
1-195
Release 5.2.1
name no-sort use | begin exclude include WORD count count-only
Sort by name Display the first memory request order Sort by memory used now turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
Command Defaults
All display output is shown in bytes Sorting is disabled
1-196
Release 5.2.1
show process msg-q-info

The show process msg-q-info command displays information about current message queues.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show process msg-q-info [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show process msg-q-info [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
1-197
Release 5.2.1
show process semaphores

The show process semaphores command creates a message when an attempt to unlock a semaphore when it is already unlocked. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show process semaphores command:
B - Binary, M - Mutex, C - Counting, O - Old * - new from last show Creator Id(Hex) Type/sub ------------ -------- ----------tRootTask ef1808 B-ShowSem tRootTask c724b0 B-Init tRootTask c7258c M-Init tRootTask ec02d8 M-Spl tRootTask ec1c64 B-Mux tRootTask ec26e8 B-NetBuf tRootTask ec2708 B-NetBuf tRootTask ec2728 B-NetTask tRootTask ec9f98 M-PppHook tRootTask eca058 M-PppSecret tRootTask eca69c M-Evt tRootTask eca6bc M-Evt tRootTask eca6d8 M-Evt tRootTask eca6f8 M-Evt tLogTask eca7c4 M-LogCtrl tRootTask eeb7b8 B-Icp tRootTask eeb7dc M-FIO tRootTask ef14f8 B-MemCheck Queue #Pend State Blocked-Task TIMEOUT ----- ----- ---------- ------------ ------FIFO 0 FULL PRIOR 0 FULL PRIOR 0 OWNER:NONE PRIOR 0 OWNER:NONE PRIOR 0 FULL PRIOR 0 EMPTY PRIOR 0 EMPTY PRIOR 1 EMPTY tNetTask 5 PRIOR 0 OWNER:NONE PRIOR 0 OWNER:NONE PRIOR 0 OWNER:NONE PRIOR 0 OWNER:NONE PRIOR 0 OWNER:NONE PRIOR 0 OWNER:NONE PRIOR 0 OWNER:NONE FIFO 0 FULL PRIOR 0 OWNER:NONE FIFO 0 FULL
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show process semaphores [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show process semaphores [ | {count | count-only}]
1-198 Compass ID: 327594480 Version 3
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
1-199
Release 5.2.1
show process stack

The show process stack command monitors the stack utilization of processes and interrupt routines. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show process stack command:
NAME -----------tExcTask TaskMon ctrlMon tPCCARD tLogTask EventMgr tRtmMgrTask tNetTask igmpTask StatsMgrTask statsMgrIcp tEvtHdlr IcpTask tEVTM tEVTA tDRM tCRM tCsm tRM_elect tDownloadTas tRM_sm ENTRY -----------excTask 0x000089987c ctrlKeyTask pcd logTask EventMgrMain RtmMgrTask netTask igmpTask statsMgrTask statsMgrIcpT 0x000081103c IcpTask 0x00000b4b00 0x00000b4d00 drm_main crmTaskMain CsmMain RM_election_ DownloadTask RM_sm TID SIZE CUR HIGH MARGIN -------- ----- ----- ----- -----f7fbb60 7976 248 1520 6456 7925f38 10224 1112 1288 8936 7928958 10224 208 2040 8184 f69d078 3984 216 280 3704 f6a3ba8 20456 464 5512 14944 b17caf8 15336 216 5272 10064 ae850e8 10216 256 3232 6984 ae2eb38 19976 336 5264 14712 ae29af8 19976 296 2128 17848 ae05e80 10216 272 2104 8112 a82eb80 10216 232 2120 8096 a6898c0 10216 728 4520 5696 a29e4d8 10224 296 4416 5808 a27d508 32752 320 4312 28440 a2752e8 32752 320 2288 30464 a2633d0 10224 544 3592 6632 a2609b0 32752 2216 6576 26176 963bcc8 16368 1696 4848 11520 9634750 40936 168 2184 38752 919c498 10216 248 3216 7000 917f278 40944 584 20112 20832
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show process stack [ procID | procName ] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show process stack [ procID | procName ] [ | {count | count-only}]
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
procID procName | begin exclude include WORD count count-only process identifier in decimal or hexadecimal format (0x is required) the name of the process turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
1-201
Release 5.2.1
show redundancy
The show redundancy command displays the BSR redundancy configuration for all modules in the BSR chassis. The following information is displayed: Slot Sub Type Slot Status the slots configured for redundancy the type of module installed in the slot indicates whether the module is in the RUN (active) state or stby (standby) state - the stby state indicates that the module is ready to accept a switch-over for another slot the redundant slot providing redundancy protection for this slot the context in which this module slot is active: when a primary module slot is active, the slot number indicated is the same as a primary module slot when a standby module slot is active, the primary slot for which the standby module is running is indicated full indicates that TX32 information has been fully replicated to the Standby TX32 module for this slot inactive indicates that the TX32 is not running or has no redundant slot to which to replicate. partial indicates that replication is currently underway - a TX32 cannot be forced to switchover until it has completed replication. If a failure occurs in this situation, auto-takeover will still takeover - only manual takeover will not work.
Red Slot Primary Slot
Logging Status
1-202
Release 5.2.1
Manual Takeovers Auto-takeovers
the number of operator-requested takeovers the number of takeovers prompted by a TX32 module failure, reset, or de-insertion - each takeover count represents the number of times that a slot has been taken over the time in dd:mm:ss since the last chassis boot when the Primary TX32 Module was not active and the Standby TX32 Module did not takeover for it the time in dd:mm:ss since the Standby TX32 Module has taken over for the Primary TX32 Module the status of the phase lock loop between the CMTS 2:8 and the TX32
Unavailable Time
Time Since Failover
PLL
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show redundancy command:
Sub Slot Type 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Slot Red Status Slot 4 4 8 6 6 6 6
Primary Slot 2 3 5 7 7 9 10 11 12 13
Logging Status inactive full inactive full inactive NA NA inactive full full full full
Manual Takeovers 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Auto Takeovers 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Time Unavail Since PLL Time Failover 0:00:00 0:06:14 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 NA NA 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 5:37:03 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 Ok Ok Ok Ok Ok n/a n/a Loss Ok Ok Ok Ok
2x8E(2.0)RUN TX32 RUN TX32 stby TX32 RUN 2x8(2.0) stby SRM3 RUN SRM3 stby 2x8(2.0) RUN 2x8 RUN 2x8(2.0) RUN 2x8(2.0) RUN 2x8(2.0) RUN
1-203
Release 5.2.1
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show redundancy [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show redundancy [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
1-204
Release 5.2.1
show redundancy cmts

The show redundancy cmts command displays the BSR 64000 redundancy configuration for CMTS modules in the BSR 64000 chassis. The following information is displayed: CMTS Slot Sub Type Slot Status the CMTS slots configured for CMTS redundancy the type of CMTS module installed in the slot- either 2x8, or 2x8(2.0) indicates whether the module is in the RUN (active) state or stby (standby) state - the stby state indicates that the module is ready to accept a switch-over from another slot the redundant slot to which this chassis slot switches over the context in which this Primary CMTS module slot is active - the chassis slot number is the same as a Primary CMTS module slot when a Primary CMTS module slot is active and when the Standby CMTS module slot is active, the Primary slot for which it is running is indicated
1-205
Release 5.2.1
Logging Status
full indicates that CMTS information has been fully replicated to the Standby CMTS module for this slot inactive indicates that the CMTS is not running or has no redundant slot to which to replicate. partial indicates that replication is currently underway - a CMTS cannot be forced to switchover until it has completed replication. If a failure occurs in this situation, auto-takeover will still takeover - only manual takeover will not work.
the number of operator-requested takeovers the number of takeovers prompted by a CMTS module failure, reset, or de-insertion each takeover count represents the number of times that a slot has been taken over for (For example, the takeover counts for slot 3 gives the number of times that slot 6 (Standby CMTS Module) has taken over for slot 3 - the takeover counts for slot 6 give the number of givebacks from slot 6) the time in dd:mm:ss since the last chassis boot when the Primary CMTS Module was not active and the Standby CMTS Module did not takeover for it the time in dd:mm:ss since the Standby CMTS Module has taken over for the Primary CMTS Module
Unavailable Time
Time Since Failover
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show redundancy cmts command:
1-206
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Slot 5 6 9
Sub Type 2x8(2.0) 2x8 2x8
Slot Status boot boot boot
Red Slot -
Primary Slot 5 9
Logging Status inactive inactive inactive
Manual Takeovers 0 0 0
Auto Takeovers 0 0 0
Unavail Time 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00
Time Since Failover 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show redundancy cmts [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show redundancy cmts [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
| begin exclude include WORD turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string
1-207
Release 5.2.1
count count-only
count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
1-208
Release 5.2.1
show redundancy dtx

The show redundancy dtx command displays the BSR redundancy configuration for TX32 modules in the BSR chassis. The following information is displayed: DTX Slot Sub Type Slot Status the TX32 slots configured for TX32 redundancy the type of TX32 module installed in the slot indicates whether the module is in the RUN (active) state or stby (standby) state - the stby state indicates that the module is ready to accept a switch-over for another slot the redundant slot providing redundancy protection for this slot the context in which this Primary TX32 module slot is active: when a Primary TX32 module slot is active, the slot number indicated is the same as a Primary TX32 module slot when a Standby TX32 module slot is active, the Primary TX32 module slot for which the Standby TX32 module is running is indicated
1-209
Release 5.2.1
Logging Status
full indicates that TX32 information has been fully replicated to the Standby TX32 module for this slot inactive indicates that the TX32 is not running or has no redundant slot to which to replicate. partial indicates that replication is currently underway - a TX32 cannot be forced to switchover until it has completed replication. If a failure occurs in this situation, auto-takeover will still takeover - only manual takeover will not work.
the number of operator-requested takeovers the number of takeovers prompted by a TX32 module failure, reset, or de-insertion - each takeover count represents the number of times that a slot has been taken over the time in dd:mm:ss since the last chassis boot when the Primary TX32 Module was not active and the Standby TX32 Module did not takeover for it the time in dd:mm:ss since the Standby TX32 Module has taken over for the Primary TX32 Module the status of the phase lock loop between the CMTS 2:8 and the TX32
Unavailable Time
Time Since Failover
PLL
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show redundancy dtx command:
1-210
Release 5.2.1
DTX Sub Slot Type 3 4 5 TX32 TX32 TX32
Slot Red Status Slot RUN stby RUN 4 4
Primary Slot 3 5
Logging Status full inactive full
Manual Takeovers 0 0 0
Auto Takeovers 1 0 0
Time Unavail Since PLL Time Failover 0:06:14 0:00:00 0:00:00 9:36:22 0:00:00 0:00:00 Ok Ok Ok
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show redundancy dtx [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show redundancy dtx [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
1-211
Release 5.2.1
show redundancy srm

The show redundancy srm command tracks takeover statistics on the SRM module in a chassis. When a manual or an automatic takeover occurs, this will be reflected in the statistics for that SRM module by showing an increase in takeovers for the respective field on the respective module (the one that was just taken over). The command displays the SRM module slot number, subtype, status, redundant slot number, primary slot number, number of manual takeovers, number of automatic takeovers, and the time since its last failover. The time since failover on a certain module will display the amount of time since the respective module was last taken over. The following displays typical screen output for the show redundancy srm command:
SRM Slot 7
Sub Type SRM3
Slot Status RUN
Red Slot -
Primary Slot 7
Manual Takeovers 0
Auto Takeovers 0
Time Since Failover 0:00:00
Group Access
All
Command Mode
All modes except for User EXEC mode
Command Line Usage

show redundancy srm [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]]
Command Syntax
| begin exclude include turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string
1-212
Release 5.2.1
WORD count count-only
the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
1-213
Release 5.2.1
show reload
The show reload command displays the status of a Hitless Upgrade in progress after a software reload of all modules in the BSR chassis has been initiated with the reload switched command.
Last reload reason: power reset No reload is scheduled
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show reload
1-214
Release 5.2.1
show running-config
The show running-config command displays configuration information currently running on the BSR.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show running-config [interface [cable <X/Y> ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y> | | pos <X/Y> | loopback <1-255> | tunnel <0-255>]] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show running-config [interface [cable <X/Y> ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y> | | pos <X/Y> | loopback <1-255> | tunnel <0-255>]] [ | {count | count-only}] show running-config verbose [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show running-config verbose [ | {count | count-only}] show running-config security [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show running-config security [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
interface cable X/Y ethernet X/Y gigaether X/Y loopback 1-255 display running configuration information on all interfaces or a specific interface card the CMTS slot and MAC Domain number on the BSR the Ethernet/Fast Ethernet IEEE 802.3 slot and port number on the BSR the Gigabit Ethernet slot and port number on the BSR the loopback interface number
1-215
Release 5.2.1
pos X/Y tunnel 0-255 verbose security
the Packet over SONET slot and port number on the BSR the tunnel interface number runs the show running-config command in verbose mode displays security privilege information Note: the security option is only available to a user logged in as securityuser - refer to Configuring Cable Intercepts in the BSR 64000 CMTS Configuration and Management Guide turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
1-216
Release 5.2.1
show srm alias

The show srm alias command is used to show the alias name for the SRM module.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show srm alias
1-217
Release 5.2.1
show srm assetid

The show srm assetid command is used to view the asset ID number assigned to the SRM.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show srm assetid
1-218
Release 5.2.1
show srm serial-num

The show srm serial-num command is used to view the serial number assigned to your SRM.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show srm serial-num
1-219
Release 5.2.1
show startup-config
The show startup-config command displays the contents of the system startup configuration file.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

show startup-config [security] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show startup-config [security] [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
security displays security privilege information Note: the security option is only available to a user logged in as securityuser - refer to Configuring Cable Intercepts in the BSR 64000 CMTS Configuration and Management Guide turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string
| begin exclude include WORD
1-220
Release 5.2.1
count count-only
1-221
Release 5.2.1
show stats fastpath

The show stats fastpath command allows a user to view various fastpath statistical information. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show stats fastpath command:
FastPath Statistics:
IP ----------
Unicast ---------Packets Header errors Version errors TTL errors Checksum errors Length errors Protocol errors Source address errors Destination address errors Forwarded packets Forwarded tunnel packets To SRM De-encapsulated Discards Dropped : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 153018 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 147876 0 5142 0 0 0
Group Access
All
Command Mode
All modes
1-222
Release 5.2.1
Command Line Usage

show stats <NUM> fastpath [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} | {count | count-only}] show stats <NUM> fastpath [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
NUM | begin exclude include WORD count count-only the BSR slot number containing the HSIM module turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
1-223
Release 5.2.1
show stats summary error

The show stats summary error command displays FEC error counts and ratios. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show stats summary error command:
MAC Address 0008.0e16.e6e2 0008.0e16.f954 00e0.0c60.02b4
I/F 0/0/U1 0/0/U1 0/0/U1
SID 2 1 3
CorrFec Count 0 0 0
CorrFec Ratio 0.00000000 0.00000000 0.00000000
UnCorrFec Count 0 0 0
UnCorrFec Ratio 0.00000000 0.00000000 0.00000000
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show stats summary error [sid <1-2049> | slot <NUM>]
Command Syntax
sid 1-2049 display cable modem service flow identifier (SID) Forward Error Correction (FEC) error counts and ratios display FEC error counts and ratios for a particular chassis slot
slot NUM
1-224
Release 5.2.1
show stats xfabric

The show stats xfabric command displays downstream and upstream successfully transmitted packet counts and dropped or aborted packet counts for the switch fabric. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show stats xfabric command:
Downstream --------Packet Count Drop Count Upstream --------Packet Count Abort Count
: :
44907 0
: :
44907 0
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show stats <NUM> xfabric
Command Syntax
NUM the BSR slot number
1-225
Release 5.2.1
show system
This show system command displays various operating information for the BSR 64000. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show stats system command:
Station-ID (mac) -------------------00:30:b8:c6:5c:00
Uptime h:m:s ------------3:49:04
Model Serial # HW SW --------- ---------- ------------ ---------BSR 64000 027006554 CHS-0009-01 4.2.0T00P43.H14.KRBU Module Status Temperature Low High ---------- --------- ----------- ----- ----SRM (750) ok 25C 77F 0C 65C SRM (DIMM) ok 29C 84F 0C 65C SRM (DC2DC) ok 28C 82F 0C 65C SRM (XFAB) ok 42C 107F 0C 80C Fan Temp ok 28C 82F 0C 50C CO Alarm Severity ------------------Critical Major Minor Number Active ------------0 0 0
1-226
Release 5.2.1
The following information is provided: Station-ID a proper indication of which MAC address is being used for the system and can be either the SRM7/SRM8 or Chassis MAC ID the routing modules uptime in hh:mm:ss format - use the show chassis status command for information on other modules Motorola identifiers that can also be retrieved with the show version command for the current master SRM
Uptime
Model/Serial #
Module temperature and status and the number of each class of alarms are also displayed.
1-227
Release 5.2.1
Note: The value displayed with the sysUpTime SNMP MIB object and the "UpTime" field as displayed in the show system command output represent different system up time values. The sysUpTime MIB object represents the amount of time that the SNMP Agent has been running. This is relative to the time that the SNMP Agent was last restarted. Initially, this will be close to the time that the SRM module last restarted because the SNMP Agent resides on the SRM module. However, if the SNMP Agent itself is restarted with the snmp-server shutdown or snmp-server enable CLI commands, the sysUpTime will be reset to zero. The "UpTime" value displayed in the show system command output represents the amount of time that the modules have been running relative to the last reboot of the chassis or last reset of the modules. These system time values may be different for each module, even after a reboot of the entire chassis, because not all modules complete their initialization at the same time. Also, the system time values will be different if individual modules are restarted via the CLI or are manually inserted at a later time. However, the per-module 'UpTime" values displayed in the show system command output are NOT affected by the snmp-server shutdown and snmp-server enable commands because these values are relative to the modules boot time not to the SNMP Agents boot time.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show system [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show system [ | {count | count-only}]
1-228
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
1-229
Release 5.2.1
show system alarms

The show system alarms command provides a summary of alarm information for the entire BSR 64000. The alarm summary display can be filtered according to whether the alarm is active, critical, major, or minor. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show stats alarms command:
CO Alarm Severity Number Active ------------------- ------------Critical 0 Major 0 Minor 0 BSR64K-9:7A#sho sys BSR64K-9:7A#sho system al BSR64K-9:7A#sho system alarms Alarm Summary Alarms Active Disabled Severity Error -------------- ------ -------- -------- ----------------------Power A Power B Top Fan Bot Fan Fan Temp Temp 750 Temp DIMM Temp DC2DC Temp XFab SRM I2C FAN I2C x -
The following information is provided:
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Release 5.2.1
Alarms
the BSR component for which the alarm is valid: Power A Power B Top Fan Bot Fan Temp Fans Temp 750 Temp DIMM Temp DC2DC Temp XFab SRM I2C FAN I2C indicates if there is an active alarm per component - an "x" is present in the Active column if the current alarm is triggered an "x"' is present in the Disabled column if the current alarm will suppress an audio/ visual event, SYSLOG, and/or SNMP traps the severity level of the alarm - depending on severity, the severity column will indicate "Critical", "Major", or "Minor" matching the led (s) on the front of the BSR 64000 chassis the Error column is used to display a message sent to the central alarm component when an error occurs - two examples of possible error messages are: 2. "Fan Tray Communication Failed" - upon FAN I2C failure 3. "General Failure" - for Power A failure representing a case where a specific message was not supplied to the subsystem at the time of the alarm
Active
Disabled
Severity
Error
1-231
Release 5.2.1
Command Line Usage

show system alarms [active | critical | major | minor] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show system alarms [active | critical | major | minor] [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
active critical major minor | begin exclude include WORD count count-only display active alarms display critical alarms display major alarms display minor alarms turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
1-232
Release 5.2.1
show system fans

This show system fans command displays the current state of the fan tray subsystem. It is used for troubleshooting and operational verification. All alarm events are indicated with as corresponding error messages. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show stats fans command:
Fan Tray GLB: [ Top: [ Top: [ Bot: [ Bot: [
Alarm Status 0] Fan Trays Good 0] No Current Alarms 0] All Fans Good 0] No Current Alarms 0] All Fans Good
Top Fan Readings: ROM Rev# = 0x83 Status = [ 00] Alarm 1 = [ 00] Status 1 = [ 00] ThermOff1 = [ 4] Therm 1 = [ 137] Fan1Speed Fan3Speed Fan4Speed Buck PWM1 Buck PWM3 Buck PWM4 = = = = = = [ [ [ [ [ [ 94] 95] 95] 92] 97] 97]
28C
82F
2144rpms 2122rpms 2122rpms
AckCnt 1 = [ 0] MaxAckCnt1= [ 255] SetPnt SetPnt 1 = [ = [ 0] 94] 0rpms 2144rpms
Group Access
All
Command Mode
1-233
Release 5.2.1
Command Line Usage

show system fans [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show system fans [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
1-234
Release 5.2.1
show tacacs
The show tacacs command displays statistics for all TACACS+ servers on the network including the IP address of the servers, connections, failed connection attempts, and packets sent and received. If there is more than one TACACS+ server configured, the command output displays statistics for all servers in the order in which they were configured. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show tacacs command:
Tacacs+ Server : 11.14.162.80/49 Number of Sessions: 1 Socket opens: 3 Socket closes: 3 Socket aborts: 0 Socket errors: 0 Socket Timeouts: 0 Failed Connect Attempts: 0 No current connection Session 1 Statistics Total Packets Sent: 7 Total Packets Recv: 7 Expected Replies: 0
Note: TACACS+ statistics can also be displayed with the show ip traffic command.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show tacacs
1-235
Release 5.2.1
show tacacs statistics

The show tacacs statistics command displays overall TACACS+ statistics including the total number of access (AAA) requests, the number of denied requests, and the number of allowed requests. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show tacacs statistics command:
TACACS+ Overall Statistics Number of access requests : 7 Number of access deny responses : 1 Number of access allow responses: 6
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show tacacs statistics
1-236
Release 5.2.1
show tech
The show tech command displays statistics and log information from the output of the following technical support related show commands: show chassis status show version show running-config show log show core log show ip traffic show stats xfabric show xfabric status show stats fastpath show stats lcpu show stats gige show stats bmeth show stats feth show controllers cable ds-mac show controllers cable ds-phy show controllers cable show interfaces cable service-class all show process memory show memory information show stats cmts show pool show pool application show process cpu show process memory sorted show process msg-q-info show process semaphores show process stack
1-237
Release 5.2.1
show evt show memory fastpath show interfaces show redundancy cmts show cable modem summary show cable modem summary total show bind show packet-cable cops inactive show packet-cable statistics show packet-cable statistics gate cops show l2-cam mac show l2-cam ip show l2-cam label show cable spectrum-group show cable downstream bonding-groups statistics
The display output of the show tech command is a compilation of the above show commands and can take several minutes to display on the screen. The output can also be saved to a file for later viewing. For a sample display of the output of the show tech command, see the individual show commands listed above. The show tech light version of the show tech command displays information that is helpful for trouble shooting. The show tech light command displays only dynamic information. The show tech command displays both dynamic and static information. Static commands are commands like show running config, show chassis status, show version and show log and are not included in the display output of the show tech light command. However, dynamic commands like show stats xfabric and show memory info are included in the display output of the show tech light command.
Note: The show tech command output will not display SNMP community and username or password entries.
1-238
Release 5.2.1
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show tech [flash: <filename> | light | nvram: <filename>]
Command Syntax
flash: filename light output to a file on the Flash memory file system display abbreviated version of the show tech command - dynamic command information only output to a file on the NVRAM file system
nvram: filename
1-239
Release 5.2.1
show update
The show update command displays bypassed Resource Manager behaviors or ongoing or prior upgrade status for each slot on the BSR.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show update {bypass | status} [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show update {bypass | status} [ | {count | count-only}}]
Command Syntax
bypass status | begin exclude include WORD count count-only display bypassed Resource Manager behaviors display ongoing or prior upgrade status turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
1-240
Release 5.2.1
show user-group
The show user-group command displays the group access level for a specific CLI command. The group access levels are as follows: SYSADMIN ISP MSO RESTRICTED ALL access for users with System Administrator privileges access for users with Internet Service Provider privileges access for users with Multiple Service Operator privileges access for users with "restricted" privileges access for all users
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show user-group <WORD> For example, entering the following: show user-group password telnet 0 test would return the following: The command "password telnet 0 test" is set to SYSADMIN access
1-241
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
WORD the command name - the complete command syntax must be entered otherwise the system will return an "is not a valid command" error message
1-242
Release 5.2.1
show users
The show users command displays information about active Telnet sessions including the username, user group and privilege level, the IP address of the originating host, and the session ID. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show users command:
Active connections user group/privilege origin session -----------------------------------------------------------------console sysadmin/rw console 0 enabled-user sysadmin/rw 10.14.37.103 1*
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC and Global Configuration
Command Line Usage

show users [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show users [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
1-243
Release 5.2.1
count count-only
1-244
Release 5.2.1
show vectron slot

The show vectron slot command displays the version of the Vectron TRU clock/data recovery chip resident on a specified slot in the BSR chassis. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show vectron slot command:
Vectron time module version CL 4/27/2005 * BL 10/19/2004* FL 10/19/2004* GA 10/19/2004*
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show vectron slot <0-15> [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show vectron slot <0-15> [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
0-15 | begin exclude include WORD the BSR chassis slot number turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string
1-245
Release 5.2.1
count count-only
1-246
Release 5.2.1
show version
The show version command displays the configuration of the system hardware, the software version, the names and sources of configuration files, and the boot images. The following is typical screen output from the show version command:
Slot07 Master SRM3 Versions: Boot ROM: RDN 5.0.0.34 Created: Friday, January 30, 2009 System Image: 5.0.0T00P95.HXX.KRAU Patches: patch_cq40400 patch_cq40420 Date Built: Fri Apr 24 18:15:47 EDT 2009 CPU: MPC750-MPC8260 Memory Size: 256 MB
4:05:44 PM EST
The table below describes the displayed fields: Slot 0-15 The type of module present in the slot such as 2:8 CMTS, 2:8 CMTS (2.0), Gigabit Ethernet, Supervisory Routing Module (SRM3 or SRM4), etc. The Boot ROM version. The current software version running on the module. The patches installed on this BSR module. The date the above version was built. The processor type name. The processor memory size.
Boot ROM: System Image: Patches: Date Built: CPU: Memory Size:
1-247
Release 5.2.1
Depending on the module type, the remaining output in each show version display shows the format version, assembly type, hardware revision, serial, part, and product numbers, FPGA Version number, and buffer management information.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show version [slot <0-15>] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show version [slot <0-15>] [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
slot 0-15 The slot number in the BSR 64000 chassis from which version information is to be displayed. Turns on output modifiers (filters). Filter for output that begins with the specified string. Filter for output that excludes the specified string. Filter for output that includes the specified string. The specified string. Count the number of outputted lines. Count the number of lines while suppressing screen output.
1-248
Release 5.2.1
show xfabric
The show xfabric command displays keepalive status and configuration information for all switch fabric keepalives and the status of all operational slots.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show xfabric {keepalive | status} [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show xfabric {keepalive | status} [ | {count | count-only}}]
Command Syntax
keepalive status | begin exclude include WORD count count-only display the switch fabric keepalive configuration display status of operational slots turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
1-249
Release 5.2.1
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show xfabric keepalive command:
Status
: : Features : : Thresholds: :
xfabric keepalive enabled icp keepalive enabled xfabric(monitor, 880-recover, slot-recover, cmts-rebind) icp(monitor, slot-reset ) xfabric (monitor 3, 880-recover 10, slot-recover 60, cmts-rebind 5) icp (monitor 10, slot-reset 10)
Keepalive Retransmit Counts: Slot xfabric ICP ---------------------1 : 1 0
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show xfabric status command:
Slot 1 14 10 0 15 7
Sync normal normal normal normal normal normal
Status ok ok ok ok ok ok
1-250
Release 5.2.1
slot
The slot command enters Slot Configuration mode for a specified BSR slot from Global Configuration mode. To return to Global Configuration mode, use the end command.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

slot <NUM>
Command Syntax
NUM the specified BSR slot number
1-251
Release 5.2.1
speed
The speed command specifies the speed at which the Ethernet interface operates. The default speed is auto-negotiated but the speed can be manually set to either 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode Interface Configuration (Ethernet interface only) Command Line Usage
speed {100 | 10 | auto} no speed {100 | 10 | auto}
Command Syntax
100 10 auto 100 Mbps 10 Mbps autonegotiate the connection speed (100 Mbps or 10 Mbps) with the device at the other end of the physical connection.
Command Default
Auto negotiation enabled
1-252
Release 5.2.1
srm alias
The srm alias command is used to configure an alias name for the SRM module.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

srm alias <string>
Command Syntax
string the SRM alias name - enclose the alias name within quotation marks if the string contains spaces
1-253
Release 5.2.1
srm assetid
The srm assetid command is used to configure your organizations asset ID number that is assigned to the SRM module.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

srm assetid <string>
Command Syntax
string the SRM alias name - enclose the alias name within quotation marks if the string contains spaces
1-254
Release 5.2.1
srm assetid
The srm assetid command is used to configure your organizations asset ID number that is assigned to the SRM module.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

srm assetid <string>
Command Syntax
string the SRM asset ID number - enclose the alias name within quotation marks if the string contains spaces
1-255
Release 5.2.1
sync file
The sync file command synchronizes all files stored in Flash memory or NVRAM between an Active SRM and a Standby SRM including the startup and running configuration files.
Group Access
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

sync file {flash: | nvram:}
Command Syntax
flash: nvram: synchronize files from Flash memory synchronize files from NVRAM
1-256
Release 5.2.1
system temperature-threshold
The system temperature-threshold command sets temperature threshold values that are retained between reboots of the chassis.
Group Access
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

system temperature-threshold low <num> system temperature-threshold {high srm {750 | dimm | dc2dc | xfab} | high fan} <num> system temperature-threshold default [srm | fan]
Command Syntax
low high srm 750 dimm dc2dc xfab high fan <num> default set the minimum system temperature set the maximum temperature a the SRM module component set the maximum temperature for the SRM module 750 component set the maximum temperature for the SRM module dimm component set the maximum temperature for the SRM module dc2dc component set the maximum temperature for the SRM module xfab component set the maximum temperature for the fan tray temperature value (low or high), in degrees Celsius set the minimum and maximum temperature values to the defaults
1-257
Release 5.2.1
Command Defaults
low = 0C high srm 750 = 65C high srm dimm = 65C high srm dc2dc = 65C high srm xfab = 80C high fan = 50C
1-258
Release 5.2.1
tacacs reset-connections
The tacacs reset-connections command is used to reset all the TACACS+ server connections and associated sessions. After reset, all connections will be re-established. The tacacs reset-connections command is useful to initiate a reset and re-establish the existing connections after making any connection-specific configuration changes.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

tacacs reset-connections
1-259
Release 5.2.1
tacacs-server host
The tacacs-server host command is used to specify and configure individual TACACS+ servers. The command can also be used to configure multiple TACACS+ servers. The TACACS+ client will contact the servers in the order in which they are specified.The no tacacs-server host command removes a TACACS+ server from the list. Note: Since the key, port, retry, and timeout parameters specified with the tacacs-server host command override any global settings made by the tacacs-server key, tacacs-server port, tacacs-server retry, and tacacs-server timeout commands, the tacacs-server host command can be used to enhance network security by uniquely configuring individual TACACS+ servers.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

tacacs-server host {<hostname> | <A.B.C.D>} [key <WORD> | port <0-65535>| retry <0-100> | single-connection | timeout <1-1000>] no tacacs-server host [<hostname> | <A.B.C.D>]
Command Syntax
key WORD specifies an authentication and encryption key - specifying a key with this command overrides the global key specified by the tacacs-server key command for this TACACS+ server only specifies a server port number - this value overrides the global port number value set with the tacacs-server port command for this TACACS+ server only
port 0-65535
1-260
Release 5.2.1
retry 0-100
specifies a retry value - this value overrides the global retry value set with the tacacs-server retry command for this TACACS+ server only opens a new TCP connection for every TACACS session established specifies a timeout value in seconds - this value overrides the global timeout value set with the tacacs-server timeout command for this TACACS+ server only
single-connection timeout 1-1000
1-261
Release 5.2.1
tacacs-server key
The tacacs-server key command is used to specify a global authentication encryption key used for all TACACS+ communications between the TACACS+ client and the TACACS+ server. A global encryption key is used if no encryption key is specifically configured for this TACACS+ server. The no tacacs-server key disables authentication encryption. Note: The key entered must match the key used on the TACACS+ server. All leading spaces are ignored; spaces within and at the end of the key are not. If spaces are used within the key, the key should not be enclosed in quotation marks unless the quotation marks themselves are part of the key.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

tacacs-server key <WORD> no tacacs-server key
Command Syntax
WORD specifies an authentication and encryption key - this key must match the key used by the TACACS+ server and is limited to 127 characters
1-262
Release 5.2.1
tacacs-server port
The tacacs-server port command to specify a global port number for all communication between the TACACS+ server and the TACACS client. A global port number is used if no port number is specifically configured for this TACACS+ server. The no tacacs-server port command restores the default port number value of 49.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

tacacs-server port <0-65536> no tacacs-server port
Command Syntax
0-65536 specifies the global port number used for all communication between the TACACS+ server and the TACACS client.
Command Default
49
1-263
Release 5.2.1
tacacs-server retry
The tacacs-server retry command is used to globally specify a retry count for all TACACS+ servers. A global retry count is used if no retry count is specifically configured for this TACACS+ server. The no tacacs-server retry command restores the global default value of 3 retries.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

tacacs-server retry <0-100> no tacacs-server retry
Command Syntax
0-100 the retry count
Command Default
3 retries
1-264
Release 5.2.1
tacacs-server timeout
The tacacs-server timeout command is used to specify a global timeout interval for all TACACS+ servers. A global timeout value is used if no timeout value is specifically configured for this TACACS+ server. The no tacacs-server timeout command restores the global default timeout value or specifies another value.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

tacacs-server timeout <1-1000> no tacacs-server timeout [<1-1000>]
Command Syntax
1-1000 timeout value in seconds.
Command Default
10 seconds
1-265
Release 5.2.1
telnet
The telnet command establishes a telnet connection between the BSR and a remote system.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

telnet {<A.B.C.D> | <WORD>} [<0-65535>]
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D WORD 0-65535 the IP address of the remote system the hostname of the remote system the destination port of the remote system
1-266
Release 5.2.1
telnet authentication radius

The telnet authentication radius command enables RADIUS authentication for telnet access. The no telnet authentication radius command disables this feature.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

telnet authentication radius [ fail-message <LINE> | local-password ] no telnet authentication radius [ fail-message | local-password ]
Command Syntax
fail-message LINE local-password specify message to display for a failed login/ authentication authenticate with a locally configured password if there is no response from the RADIUS server
1-267
Release 5.2.1
telnet session-limit
The telnet session-limit command specifies a limit on the number of concurrent telnet sessions allowed to the BSR. Setting the session-limit to "0" will disallow any telnet sessions from being accepted. Setting a session-limit value will not affect any currently open telnet sessions. The no telnet session-limit command restores the default session limit of 16 concurrent telnet sessions.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

telnet session-limit <0-16> no telnet session-limit [<0-16>]
Command Syntax
0-16 the telnet session limit number
Command Default
16
1-268
Release 5.2.1
update bypass
The update bypass command bypasses specified Resource Manager behaviors.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

update bypass {all | boot | download | format | reset} [<0-15>] no update bypass {all | boot | download | format | reset} [<0-15>]
Command Syntax
all boot download format bypass all configurable behaviors bypass boot command to daughter card bypass behavior for default and forced download bypass slot format - causes the spare SRM to format the target boot device before receiving a new application image bypass slot reset slot number of the BSR 64000 chassis
reset 0-15
1-269
Release 5.2.1
update chassis
The update chassis command allows a runtime upgrade of the BSR 64000 I/O module bootrom, the FPGA, and applications.
Note: Using the update chassis command may result in an audible loss of voice-over-IP data for up to 20 seconds
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

update chassis {flash: <filename> | ftp:<filename> | nvram: <filename>| tftp: <filename>} [reload]
Command Syntax
flash: ftp: nvram: tftp: filename reload upgrade from archive in flash: copy to nvram: and upgrade upgrade from archive in nvram: copy to nvram: and upgrade filename of the boot image stored in flash, NVRAM, or an FTP or TFTP server set bootfile and perform reload
1-270
Release 5.2.1
update slot
The update slot command allows a user to perform a runtime upgrade of a Boot ROM on a single module with a single command instead of having to use the additional upgrade steps necessary when using the update bypass all command.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

update slot <NUM> {all | app | boot | fpga} [flash: | nvram:] Note: Entering the update slot command without specifying a boot image initiates an update from the boot system image. Otherwise, the update slot command attempts the specified upgrade type (all, app, boot, or fpga) using the specified boot image.
Command Syntax
NUM all app boot fpga flash: <boot image> nvram: <boot image> the slot number for a module installed in the BSR chassis upgrade all updates upgrade application upgrade boot image upgrade FPGA(s) upgrade from archive in the Flash memory file system upgrade from archive in the NVRAM file system
1-271
Release 5.2.1
username
The username command establishes a login authentication system based on a
username.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

username <WORD> password [ 0 | 7 ]<WORD> username <WORD> nopassword
Command Syntax
WORD nopassword password the username, up to 16 characters no password is required for the user to log in specify a password for the user (31 character maximum) - enclosed with double quotes if the key contains spaces). The "%" and "!" characters must not be used. specifies an UNENCRYPTED password specifies a HIDDEN password will follow the UNENCRYPTED (cleartext) user password (31 character maximum) - enclosed with double quotes if the key contains spaces). The "%" and "!" characters must not be used.
0 7 WORD
1-272
Release 5.2.1
Note: Refer to Defining a User Name with an Encrypted Password in the BSR 64000 Configuration and Management Guide for Release 3.1 for details on encrypting passwords.
1-273
Release 5.2.1
username privilege
The username privilege command sets a privilege level for a user.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

username <WORD> privilege {ro | rw}
Command Syntax
WORD privilege ro rw the username, up to 16 characters the user privilege level read-only privilege read and write privilege
1-274
Release 5.2.1
username user-group
The username user-group command assigns a user to a user group. The no username user-group command removes a user from a user group.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

username <WORD> user-group {isp <1-1> | mso | restricted | sysadmin} no username <WORD> user-group {isp <1-1> | mso | restricted | sysadmin}
Command Syntax
WORD user-group isp the username, up to 16 characters assigns the user group name provides this user access to most CLI commands including routing commands but excluding cable commands the number of the virtual ISP provides this user access to most CLI commands including cable commands but excluding routing commands only provides this user access to CLI commands with a designated privilege level of "restricted" as defined with the privilege restricted CLI command. provides this user access to all CLI commands
1-1 mso
restricted
sysadmin
1-275
Release 5.2.1
xfabric keepalive
The xfabric keepalive command enables the switch fabric keepalive timer and specifies the type of system reaction in the event of a switch fabric failure. The no xfabric keepalive command disables the switch fabric keepalive timer. Note: Motorola recommends always enabling the xfabric keepalive slot-recover command and copying the running configuration to the startup configuration. This causes the BSR to reset a slot which fails to respond to a 1-second switch fabric keepalive message for 10 consecutive intervals. If for any reason a customer's configuration or traffic level results in undesirably frequent slot resets, the threshold number of intervals can be increased to <1-255> intervals with the xfabric keepalive slot-recover threshold <1-255> command.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

xfabric keepalive { 880-recover | cmts-rebind | hsim-warmstart | monitor | slot-recover} [threshold <1-255>] no xfabric keepalive [880-recover | cmts-rebind | monitor | slot-recover ] [threshold] no xfabric keepalive threshold
Command Syntax
880-recover cmts-rebind hsim-warmstart initiate 880-recover if switch fabric is not operational rebind all CMTS modules to available HSIM modules if the data path is not operational initiate HSIM warmstart if the data path is not operational
1-276
Release 5.2.1
monitor slot-recover threshold 1-255 threshold
system logger notification only initiate a slot recovery reset if the switch fabric is not operational configures the number of 2.5 second timeouts until an action is taken restores the default threshold value for the no xfabric keepalive 880-recover, cmts-rebind, hsim-warmstart, monitor, and slot-recover commands - the no xfabric keepalive threshold command restores all default threshold values
Command Defaults
880-recover cmts-rebind hsim-warmstart monitor slot-recover 880-recover threshold cmts-rebind threshold Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 5 15
hsim-warmstart threshold 10 monitor threshold slot-recover threshold 10 60
1-277
2
IP Commands
Introduction
This chapter describes the following types of commands for the BSR: Interface commands not associated with a specific protocol can be used to configure interface features with any device on the network. Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) commands handle network communications between network nodes. This includes network addressing information, control information that enables packets to be routed, and reliable transmission of data. Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) commands map IP addresses to physical hardware addresses. An ARP cache is used to maintain a correlation between each MAC address and its corresponding IP address. Domain Name System (DNS) commands are used to dynamically map hostnames to IP addresses and to control Internet routing information. Lists of domain names and IP addresses are distributed throughout the Internet by DNS servers. Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) commands are used to synchronize computer clocks in the global internet. SNTP operates in unicast, broadcast, and IP multicast modes. Tunneling commands provide a way to encapsulate packets inside of a transport protocol. IP in IP Encapsulation for tunnel interfaces is supported by the BSR.
Release 5.2.1 2-1
Release 5.2.1
IP Command Descriptions
This section contains an alphabetized list and descriptions of the IP commands supported by the BSR.
2-2
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
arp
The arp command adds a permanent entry in the ARP cache. The no arp command removes the entry from the ARP cache. The arp command can also specify the type of ARP packet that is used, whether to use an alias if proxy arp is enabled, and to specify a cable bundle interface if cable bundling is being used. Note: Proxy ARP is not enabled by default. ARP cache entries map IP addresses and their associated 48-bit hardware MAC addresses. If the host supports dynamic resolution, static entries are usually not needed. Use the clear arp-cache command to remove all dynamically learned entries.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

arp <A.B.C.D> <H.H.H> {arpa | snap} [alias | cablebundle cable <X/Y> | cm-hardware-address <H.H.H>] no arp <A.B.C.D> <H.H.H> {arpa | snap} [alias | cablebundle cable <X/Y> | cm-hardware-address <H.H.H>]
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D H.H.H arpa snap alias IP address of ARP entry associated with the local data link address 48-bit local data link address (MAC address), format xxxx.xxxx.xxxx standard Ethernet-style ARP, RFC 826 IEEE 802.3 usage of ARP packets conforming to RFC 1042 respond to ARP as if it owns the specified address, if proxy arp is enabled
2-3
Release 5.2.1
cablebundle cable X/Y slot X and MAC domain Y of the cable bundle physical interface on the CMTS module cm-hardware-address H.H.H MAC address of the cable modem, format xxxx.xxxx.xxxx
Command Default
no entries in table arpa (ethernet ARP)
2-4
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
arp timeout
The arp timeout command configures the amount of time an entry stays in the ARP cache. The no arp timeout command removes the time configuration an entry stays in the ARP cache. Use the show interfaces command in Privileged EXEC mode to view the ARP time-out value. Note: If the ARP time-out value is changed, the new value affects all the existing entries in the ARP cache and any entries subsequently added to the ARP cache.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

arp timeout <4-6000> no arp timeout <4-6000>
Command Syntax
4-6000 amount of time, in minutes, that an entry is allowed to stay in the ARP cache
Command Default
60 minutes
2-5
Release 5.2.1
cable helper-address
The cable helper-address command enables broadcast forwarding for User Datagram Protocol (UDP) packets. The cable helper address function disassembles a DHCP broadcast packet and reassembles it into a unicast packet so that the packet can traverse the router and communicate with the DHCP server. The cable helper-address command is also used to bind a cable helper address to a secondary IP subnet of a CM connected to CPEs belonging to a particular ISP. This allows CPEs to have their IP address assigned from the DHCP server belonging to the corresponding ISP.
Note: The isp-bind option is only available after selecting the host or mta options. It is not available for the cable modem option.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (cable and loopback interfaces only)
Command Line Usage

cable helper-address <A.B.C.D> {cable-modem | host | mta} [isp-bind <A.B.C.D> | global ] no cable helper-address <A.B.C.D> {cable-modem | host | mta} [isp-bind <A.B.C.D> | global ]
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D cable-modem host mta IP address of the destination DHCP server only CM UDP broadcasts are forwarded only CPE UDP broadcasts are forwarded only MTA UDP broadcasts are forwarded
2-6
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
isp-bind A.B.C.D global
secondary IP subnet to which the cable-helper is bound cable-helper is on the global network
2-7
Release 5.2.1
clear arp-cache
The clear arp-cache command clears all dynamic entries or a specific entry from the ARP cache.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

clear arp-cache [<A.B.C.D>]
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D IP address entry to be cleared from the ARP table
2-8
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
clear counters
The clear counters command is used to clear a specific interface counter or all interface counters.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

clear counters [cable <X/Y | X/Y.N> | ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y | X/Y.N> | ipsec | loopback <1-255> | pos <X/Y> | tunnel <0-255> ]
Command Syntax
cable X/Y cable X/Y.N ethernet X/Y gigaether X/Y gigaether X/Y.N ipsec loopback 1-255 tunnel 0-255 pos X/Y clear the cable counters for the specified slot X, port Y, and if applicable, sub-interface N clear the Ethernet counters for the specified slot X and port Y clear the Gigabit Ethernet counters for the specified slot X, port Y, and if applicable, sub-interface N clear the IPSEC counters clear the loopback counters for the specified loopback interface number clear the tunnel interface counters for the specified tunnel interface number clear the Packet over SONET (POS) counters for the specified slot X and port Y
2-9
Release 5.2.1
clear host
The clear host command deletes DNS host entries from the host-name-and-address cache.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

clear host {<Word> | *}
Command Syntax
Word * delete a specific DNS hostname entry delete all DNS hostname entries
2-10
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
clear ip route
The clear ip route command deletes route table entries.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

clear ip route {* | <A.B.C.D> [<A.B.C.D>]}
Command Syntax
* A.B.C.D A.B.C.D delete all routes destination network route to delete destination network subnet mask
2-11
Release 5.2.1
clear ip traffic
The clear ip traffic command resets the IP traffic statistic counters to zero.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

clear ip traffic
2-12
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
clear sntp history

The clear sntp history command removes servers from the SNTP server history list displayed by the show sntp command and the show sntp detail command. To remove a specific SNTP server from the display, that particular SNTP server must be specified with the clear sntp history command. To remove all SNTP servers from the display, the clear sntp history command is used without specifying an individual SNTP server.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

clear sntp history [<A.B.C.D> | <Hostname>]
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D Hostname the IP address of an SNTP server the hostname of an SNTP server
Command Default
All SNTP servers on the SNTP server list are displayed by the show sntp command and the show sntp detail command.
2-13
Release 5.2.1
host authorization
The host authorization command is used to enforce the binding of the CM and CPE MAC addresses to the IP address assigned to them (statically or through DHCP). The no host authorization command disables host authorization on the cable interface. The host authorization feature is used for security purposes on the cable network. When enabled, host authorization denies access to any hacker who tries to take or spoof an IP address from any legitimate user on the same cable network. A hacker takes the IP address from a user to steal their data service. The hacker accomplishes this by changing the IP address on their PC to the IP address that the DHCP server assigned to a legitimate users CPE. Cable operators can create static entries to deny hackers from stealing service from users. Through static entries, cable operators can manually bind the CPE MAC (hardware) and IP address to a particular cable modem. This command may be used in circumstances when DHCP is not used to assign the CPE IP addresses.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Interface Configuration mode (cable interface only)
Command Line Usage

host authorization {<mac> {cpe <mac> <A.B.C.D> | cpr <mac> <A.B.C.D>} | on} no host authorization on {<mac> {cpe <mac> <A.B.C.D> | cpr <mac> <prefix>} | on}
Command Syntax
mac cpe cpr mac cable modem MAC address, format xxxx.xxxx.xxxx Customer Premises Equipment Customer Premise Router MAC address of the CPE or CPR, format xxxx.xxxx.xxxx
2-14
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
A.B.C.D on
IP address of the CPE or CPR enable host authorization
Command Default
Disabled
2-15
Release 5.2.1
interface
The interface command specifies an interface for further configuration. Once the interface is selected you enter Interface Configuration mode.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

interface {cable <X/Y | X/Y.N> | ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y | X/Y.N> | loopback <1-255> | pos <X/Y> | tunnel <0-255>}
Command Syntax
cable X/Y cable X/Y.N ethernet X/Y slot X, MAC domain Y, and, if applicable, the cable sub-interface N of the CMTS module slot X and port Y on the Ethernet interface: On the 8-port Ethernet module, there are 8 10/100 Mbps Ethernet ports On the SRM module, Ethernet interface 0 is a 10 Mbps management interface that does not support the negotiation feature and is associated with its corresponding port on the SRM I/O module Ethernet ports 1 and 2 are typically used to support an external T1/E1 BITS clock and are associated with their corresponding ports on the SRM I/O module gigaether X/Y gigaether X/Y.N slot X, port Y, and, if applicable, the sub-interface N of the 1000 Mbps optical Ethernet interface
2-16
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
loopback 1-255
loopback interfaces are used as inbound logical interfaces when physical interfaces go down - up to 255 loopback interfaces are supported slot X and port Y on the high speed OC3/OC12 SONET interface tunnels are logical interfaces used to make point-to-point links between two devices, up to 255 tunnels are supported
pos X/Y tunnel 0-255
2-17
Release 5.2.1
ip access-group
The ip access-group command configures an interface to use an access list. The no ip access-group command removes an access-list for the interface.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip access-group {<1-199> | <1300-2699>} {in | out} no ip access-group {<1-199> | <1300-2699>} {in | out}
Command Syntax
1-199 1300-2699 in out standard access-list number range extended access-list number range incoming packet is processed only if the source address is permitted by the access-list outgoing packet is processed only if access-list permits the packet
Command Default
No access groups defined.
2-18
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
ip address
The ip address command configures a primary or secondary IP address for an interface or defines the Gateway IP address (giaddr) for Customer Premises Equipment (CPE), Multimedia Telephone Adapter (MTA), or cable modem DHCP requests. The no ip address command is used to remove an IP address from the interface. The BSR now allows multiple BSRs connected to the same LAN (or VLAN) to share the same IP subnet by using the shared-proxy-arp option. An interface configured with the shared-proxy-arp option is allowed to share ARP resolutions with all Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet interfaces configured with the ip proxy-arp command. When the BSR needs to resolve an IP address in a shared-proxy-arp IP subnet, it sends an ARP request upstream on the Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet interfaces configured with the ip proxy-arp command and also sends the ARP request downstream on the cable interface(s) configured with the shared-proxy-arp option. The BSR then learns the host addresses of shared-proxy-arp IP subnets present on the Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet interfaces configured with the ip proxy-arp command. Note: The shared-proxy-arp option must be specified after all other options. For example, when enabling shared-proxy-arp on a secondary host subnet, the secondary host options must be specified prior to the shared-proxy-arp option. When configuring the IP address of a cable or loopback interface, two additional options are supported; the host and mta options. The host and mta options are only available from cable or loopback interface configuration mode when selecting an IP address. During the DHCP process, the relay agent requests an IP address in a particular subnet by inserting the IP address of the interface into the DHCP requests from CMs, hosts, and MTAs. The primary address is always inserted in cable modem DHCP requests. If a secondary address or a secondary host address is defined, then the first secondary or secondary host IP address in the list is inserted into DHCP requests from hosts. If one or multiple secondary mta IP address are defined, then the first secondary mta IP address defined is inserted into DHCP requests from secondary MTA devices. The ip dhcp relay information option command must be enabled to allow the BSR to determine what type of device originated the DHCP request. By default, the primary address will be inserted into DHCP requests.
2-19
Release 5.2.1
The ip address command is also used to bind a secondary IP address to a secondary IP subnet of a CM which is connected to CPEs belonging to a particular ISP. This allows the BSR to set the giaddr of the CPE's DHCP packets to the secondary address of the CM to which the secondary addresses of the CPE are bound.
Note: You must configure a primary IP address before configuring any secondary IP addresses.
Note: The BSR supports 256 secondary IP subnets per CMTS module. The maximum number of secondary IP subnets that can be configured on the entire BSR chassis is 1024. If you are running a BCM 3140-based DOCSIS 2.0 2:8 CMTS module as two 1:4 configurations, the limit is still 256 secondary IP subnets for the entire 2:8 CMTS module. The total number of secondary IP subnets between MAC Domain 0 and MAC Domain 1 can only equal 256. Also, if you apply the same cable bundle to each MAC domain even though the secondary IP subnets are the same they must be counted twice. For example, if you have 256 secondary IP subnets in a cable bundle and you apply that cable bundle to two MAC domains, the total number of secondary IP subnets would be 512 which exceeds the limit for the DOCSIS 2.0 CMTS module. In this example, there can be no more than 128 secondary IP subnets on the cable bundle.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
2-20
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
Command Line Usage

ip address {<A.B.C.D>{<A.B.C.D>}} [secondary] no ip address {<A.B.C.D>{<A.B.C.D>}} [secondary] Cable or Loopback interfaces only: ip address {<A.B.C.D>{<A.B.C.D>}} [shared-proxy-arp] ip address {<A.B.C.D>{<A.B.C.D>}} [secondary [ host | mta] [isp-bind <A.B.C.D> | shared-proxy-arp]] ip address {<A.B.C.D>{<A.B.C.D>}} [secondary [shared-proxy-arp]] no ip address {<A.B.C.D>{<A.B.C.D>}} [shared-proxy-arp] no ip address {<A.B.C.D> {<A.B.C.D>}} [ secondary [ host | mta ][isp-bind <A.B.C.D>]] no ip address {<A.B.C.D>{<A.B.C.D>}} [secondary [shared-proxy-arp]]
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D A.B.C.D the IP address the subnetwork mask for the IP address - the BSR supports up to a 30-bit subnetwork IP address mask designates the specified IP address as a secondary IP address - on a cable interface, defines this IP address as the IP address to be inserted into host DHCP requests share ARP resolutions with Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet interfaces configured with the ip proxy-arp command
secondary
shared-proxy-arp
2-21
Release 5.2.1
host
defines the IP address for the cable interface as the giaddr for host DHCP requests - on the cable interface, defines this IP address as the IP address to be inserted into host DHCP requests (this option is only available on the cable interface) defines the IP address for the cable interface as the giaddr for all MTA DHCP requests - on the cable interface, defines this IP address as the IP address to be inserted into MTA DHCP requests (this option is only available on the cable interface) specifies the secondary IP subnet to which this secondary address is bound.
mta
isp-bind A.B.C.D
2-22
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
ip broadcast-address
The ip broadcast-address command configures a broadcast address for an interface. The no ip broadcast-address command deletes the broadcast address for an interface.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip broadcast-address <A.B.C.D> no ip broadcast-address <A.B.C.D>
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D IP broadcast address assigned to the interface
2-23
Release 5.2.1
ip dhcp relay information

The ip dhcp relay information command enables the BSR to insert the DHCP relay information option (option-82) into received DHCP client messages being forwarded to a DHCP server (configured using the cable helper command). Support for DHCP Option-82, sub-option 2 (Agent Remote ID), which is enabled by the ip dhcp relay information option command, allows the relay agent in the BSR to insert the MAC address of the modem that the DHCP client is behind into outbound DHCP client requests (i.e., DHCP Discovers and DHCP Requests as they traverse the BSR). This enables the receiving DHCP server to identify the user sending the request and to treat that client appropriately. Support for DHCP Option-82, sub-option 1 (Agent Circuit ID), which is enabled by the ip dhcp relay information spectrum-group-name command, allows the relay agent in the BSR to insert, when available, the Spectrum Group name associated with the upstream channel that the DHCP client is using into outbound DHCP client requests (i.e., DHCP Discovers and DHCP Requests as they traverse the BSR).
The ip dhcp relay informationmulti-isp-enable command allows the BSR to

insert the DHCP relay information option (option-82) into received DHCP client messages being forwarded to a DHCP server. Note: If you are configuring two MAC domains on the 2x8 CMTS module, the ip dhcp relay information option command must be entered for each MAC domain. If this command is not entered in for each domain, CMs cannot register in that domain. Note: If a DHCP client on a particular subnet is using an upstream frequency that is not configured as a member of a Spectrum Group, the Spectrum Group name is not inserted by the DHCP relay agent into the DHCP discover packet.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (cable interface only)
2-24
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
Command Line Usage

ip dhcp relay information { multi-isp-enable | option | spectrum-group-name} no ip dhcp relay information { multi-isp-enable | option | spectrum-group-name}
Command Syntax
multi-isp-enable enables the insertion of the DHCP relay information option when multiple ISPs are used insert a MAC address (Agent Remote ID) only into a clients DHCP discover packets insert the Spectrum Group name into all DHCP outbound requests
option spectrum-group-name
2-25
Release 5.2.1
ip domain-list
The ip domain-list command configures up to six domain names to resolve unqualified host names when the primary domain, specified by the ip domain-name command, fails to resolve. Use the ip domain-list command to define a list of secondary domain names. Secondary domain names are used if the primary domain name fails to resolve.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip domain-list <WORD> [<WORD>] [<WORD>] [<WORD>] [<WORD>] [<WORD>] no ip domain-list <WORD> [<WORD>] [<WORD>] [<WORD>] [<WORD>] [<WORD>]
Command Syntax
WORD domain name
2-26
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
ip domain-lookup
The ip domain-lookup command enables the IP Domain Name System (DNS) based host name-to-address translation. The no ip domain-lookup command disables the IP DNS-based name-to-address translation.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip domain-lookup no ip domain-lookup
Command Default
Enabled
2-27
Release 5.2.1
ip domain-name
The ip domain-name command is used to configure a domain name. The no ip domain-name command removes the domain name. For each BSR, you should configure the name of the domain in which the BSR is located. This is the default domain name that is appended to host names that are not fully qualified.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip domain-name <WORD> no ip domain-name <WORD>
Command Syntax
WORD domain name
Command Default
No domain is configured.
2-28
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
ip forward-protocol udp
The ip forward-protocol udp command controls what type of UDP packet to forward when broadcasting packets or allows all types of UDP packets to be forwarded. The no ip forward-protocol udp command disables IP forwarding.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip forward-protocol udp [<0-65535> | bootpc | bootps | domain | netbios-dgm | netbios-ns | tacacs | tftp | time] no ip forward-protocol udp [<0-65535> | bootpc | bootps | domain | netbios-dgm | netbios-ns | tacacs | tftp | time]
Command Syntax
0-65535 bootpc bootps domain netbios-dgm netbios-ns tacacs tftp time UDP port number Bootstrap Protocol client (port 68) Bootstrap Protocol server (port 67) Domain Name Service (DNS) (port 53) NetBios datagram service (port 138) NetBios name service (port 137) TAC Access Control System (port 49) Trivial File Transfer Protocol (port 69) Time service (port 37)
2-29
Release 5.2.1
ip forwarding
The ip forwarding command neutralizes virus or hacking attacks by forwarding the offending traffic to Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) or User Datagram Protocol (UDP) source or destination port zero (depending where this traffic is coming from). It is then discarded through the BSRs hardware. Once the hacking or virus problem is resolved, the no ip forwarding command is used to stop discarding TCP or UDP packets on their respective source port 0 or destination port 0.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip forwarding {tcp | udp}{dst-zero | src-zero} no ip forwarding {tcp | udp}{dst-zero | src-zero}
Command Syntax
tcp udp dest-zero src-zero TCP port UDP port destination port is 0 source port is 0
Command Default
Disabled
2-30
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
ip helper-address
The ip helper-address command specifies the destination IP address of the DHCP server for where broadcast packets are forwarded. The no ip helper-address command removes the IP address where broadcast packets are forwarded. Use the ip helper-address command to forward broadcast packets received on an interface.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip helper-address <A.B.C.D> no ip helper-address <A.B.C.D>
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D IP address of the DHCP server
2-31
Release 5.2.1
ip host
The ip host command is used to add a static, classless DNS host entry and its IP address to the IP hostname table. The no ip host command deletes the host address-to-name mapping in the host cache.
Note: The initial character of the name must be a letter.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip host <Hostname> <A.B.C.D> no ip host <Hostname> <A.B.C.D>
Command Syntax
Hostname A.B.C.D name of host IP address
Command Default
No hosts configured.
2-32
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
ip irdp
The ip irdp command enables the ICMP Router Discovery Protocol (IRDP) on an interface. The no ip irdp command disables the ICMP IRDP on an interface.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet interfaces only)
Command Line Usage

ip irdp [address <A.B.C.D> | holdtime <1-9000> | maxadvertinterval <4-1800> | minadvertinterval <3-1800> | multicast | preference <-2147483648-2147483647>] no ip irdp [address <A.B.C.D> | holdtime <1-9000> | maxadvertinterval <4-1800> | minadvertinterval <3-1800> | multicast | preference <-2147483648-2147483647>]
Command Syntax
address A.B.C.D holdtime 1-9000 IP address to proxy-advertise, preference value amount of time, in seconds, advertisements hold valid
maxadvertinterval 4-1800 maximum time, in seconds, between advertisements minadvertinterval 3-1800 multicast preference -2147483648-2147483647 minimal time between advertisement in seconds advertisements are sent with multicast preference value for this interface, -231 to 231, higher values increase performance, preferred router
2-33
Release 5.2.1
Command Default
holdtime = 1800 seconds 600 seconds 450 seconds
maxadvertinterval = minadvertinterval =
2-34
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
ip mask-reply
The ip mask-reply command enables Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) netmask reply messages. The no ip mask-reply command disables ICMP netmask reply messages.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Mode
ip mask-reply no ip mask-reply
Command Default
Enabled
2-35
Release 5.2.1
ip mtu
The ip mtu command configures the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) packet size allowed on the interface. The no ip mtu command resets the default.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip mtu <68-1500> no ip mtu
Command Syntax
68-1500 MTU size in bytes
Command Default
1496 bytes
2-36
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
ip multicast fastpath
The ip multicast fastpath command is used to specify which multicast flow or flows will be given preferential treatment for forwarding in the fast path. Which flow is forwarded in the fast path depends on the user configuration. A flow or a range of flows can be configured with an extended access list (eACL). If no eACL configured flows are present, all flows will be forwarded through the slow path in the SRM. When the traffic for these eACL configured flows is active, they will be forwarded in the fast path. Only the maximum allowed 16 fast path entries can be forwarded even though there might be more active flows configured. When an active flow is deleted, either due to a timeout or forced removal, the next active eACL configured flow, if any, will be forwarded in the fast path. Source and group destination IP addresses can be setup in ranges using wildcard network masks in the eACL. Only permit entries are parsed for eligibility of installing into the fast path. The fast path entries will be installed up to the first 16 flows configured in the eACL initially. When a multicast flow becomes active in the multicast forwarding cache and it matches any of the entries in the eACL, the entry will be programmed into the fast path if one of the 16 flows are available. A flow is considered active when traffic of that flow is being forwarded within a 3 minute window. The entries in the fast path will be re-evaluated on any updates to the eACL. For entries no longer matched in the eACL, they will be taken out of the fast path. The updated eACL will be parsed to see if any corresponding active flows need to be programmed into the fast path if there are still room in the fast path. However, if all 16 installed entries still match the configured range, no entry in the fast path will be replaced even if the configured range has become higher in the sequence order of the eACL. This is because ACLs only provide a way to make a binary decision, i.e. it is either eligible for the fast path or not, and not used for ordering to determine which entries get installed. There is an optional parameter queue for all multicast data packets to be forwarded out one of the eight specified queues which can be used for statistics, debugging or QoS purposes. The queue number cannot be changed once configured unless a new extended ACL is configured where all previous fast path flows are removed and any new fast path flows are created with the new queue number.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
2-37
Release 5.2.1
Command Line Usage

ip multicast fastpath {<100-199> | <2000-2699>} [ queue <0-7>] no ip multicast fastpath {<100-199> | <2000-2699>} [ queue <0-7>]
Command Syntax
100-199 2000-2699 queue 0-7 the mulitcast acceleration eligibility list the extended ACL range the HSIM transmit queue number
Command Default
queue = 1
2-38
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
ip name-server
The ip name-server command is used to enter the IP address of one or more Domain Name System (DNS) servers. Up to six DNS servers can be configured on the BSR. The no ip name-server command deletes a DNS entry.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip name-server <A.B.C.D> [<...A.B.C.D>] no ip name-server <A.B.C.D> [<...A.B.C.D>]
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D IP address of a DNS server, 6 addresses may be specified
2-39
Release 5.2.1
ip proxy-arp
The ip proxy-arp command enables proxy Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) on an Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet interface. The no ip proxy-arp command disables proxy ARP on an interface. Note: If a host in the local network is incapable of responding to an ARP request for some reason, the router will respond on behalf of the host when proxy arp is enabled and the IP-to-MAC address mapping of the host is stored in the router with a static arp command and the alias option specified. To verify ARP status, use the show running-config command. The BSR will also respond to an ARP request for a network on a different interface when proxy ARP is enabled.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet Interfaces only)
Command Line Usage

ip proxy-arp no ip proxy-arp
Command Default
Disabled
2-40
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
ip rarp-server
The ip rarp-server command is used to enable the router to act as a Reverse Address Resolution Protocol (RARP) server. The no ip rarp-server command disables the router to act as a RARP server. The RARP server can be configured on each interface to ensure that the router does not affect RARP traffic on other subnetworks that do not need RARP assistance. The following conditions must be satisfied before receiving RARP support:

The ip rarp-server command must be configured on the requesting interface A static entry, must exist in the IP ARP table, mapping the MAC address in the RARP request to an IP address
The IP address should be set to whatever address the user configures as the primary address for the interface.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip rarp-server <A.B.C.D> no ip rarp-server <A.B.C.D>
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D IP address for use as the source protocol address
Command Default
Disabled
2-41
Release 5.2.1
ip redirects
The ip redirects command enables the processing of "Host Redirect" messages. If both the global and interface configuration modes are enabled, the BSR will send an ICMPv4 "Host Redirect" packet to the original source of an IPv4 packet received by the BSR from that interface when both the source IP address and destination IP address of the packet are within a logical IPv4 subnet implemented on the incoming interface. The source should send packets directly to the destination rather than routing through the BSR. The no ip redirects command disables the processing of "Host Redirect" messages. When disabled, the BSR will not send an ICMPv4 "Host Redirect" message to the source. This command applies only to IP version 4 packets. Regardless of the configuration, the BSR attempts to forward packets back onto the incoming interface in order to reach their destinations. Note: Unless your network devices respond to IP redirects, which can be a security issue, Motorola recommends that this function be disabled. This will minimize network traffic load and packet processing by the BSR.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Global Configuration and Interface Configuration (not supported for Cable interfaces)
Command Line Usage

ip redirects no ip redirects
Command Default
Enabled
2-42
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
ip route
The ip route command is used to configure a static route when the router cannot dynamically build a route to the specific destination or if the route must be in place permanently. The no ip route command removes a static route.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip route <A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D> {<A.B.C.D> | null <NUM> | pos <X/Y> | tunnel <0-255>} [<1-255> ] [ range <1-65536> ] [tag <1-4294967295>] no ip route <A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D> {<A.B.C.D> | null <NUM> | pos <X/Y> | tunnel <0-255>} [<1-255> ] [ range <1-65536> ] [tag <1-4294967295>]
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D A.B.C.D A.B.C.D null <NUM> pos X/Y tunnel 0-255 1-255 range 1-65536 tag 1-4294967295 IP address of the destination network netmask of the destination network IP address of the forwarding router null interface number POS slot X and port Y tunnel interface number administrative distance number of route entries match value to control route-map redistribution
Command Default
Administrative distance = 1
2-43
Release 5.2.1
ip routing
The ip routing command enables IP routing. The no ip routing command disables IP routing.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip routing no ip routing
Command Default
Enabled
2-44
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
ip source-route
The ip source-route command allows the BSR to handle IP datagrams with source routing header options. The no ip source-route command discards any IP datagrams containing a source-route option.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip source-route no ip source-route
2-45
Release 5.2.1
ip unreachables
The ip unreachables command enables processing of an ICMP unreachable message when the BSR can not deliver a received packet. When enabled for both the global and interface configuration modes, the BSR will send an ICMPv4 "Network Unreachable" packet to the original source of an IPv4 packet received by the BSR for which the BSR does not have a route. The no ip unreachables command disables ICMP unreachable message processing when the router can not deliver a received a packet. If either the global or interface configuration mode is disabled, then the BSR will not send an ICMPv4 packet to the source. This command applies only to IP version 4 packets. Regardless of the configuration, the BSR will discard the packet when it has no route to its destination. Note: Because enabling this feature can cause large amounts of data to be sent on the network interface, Motorola recommends that this feature be disabled.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Global Configuration and Interface Configuration (not supported for Cable interfaces)
Command Line Usage

ip unreachables no ip unreachables
Command Default
Enabled
2-46
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
passive-interface
The passive-interface command suppresses routing updates from being transmitted over a specific ethernet or cable routing interface. The no passive-interface command re-enables route updates to be transmitted over the routing interface.
Note: Updates from routers that are directly connected to the passive interface continue to be received and processed.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Router Configuration
Command Line Usage

passive-interface {cable <X/Y | X/Y.N> | default | ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y | X/Y.N> | loopback <1-255> | pos <X/Y>} no passive-interface {cable <X/Y | X/Y.N> | default | ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y | X/Y.N> | loopback <1-255> | pos <X/Y>}
Command Syntax
cable X/Y cable X/Y.N default ethernet X/Y gigaether X/Y gigaether X/Y.N slot X, MAC domain Y, and, if applicable, the cable sub-interface N of the CMTS module suppress routing updates on all interfaces Ethernet interface slot X and port Y slot X, port Y, and, if applicable, the sub-interface N of the 1000 Mbps optical Ethernet interface
2-47
Release 5.2.1
loopback 1-255 pos X/Y
loopback interface number Packet-Over-SONET interface slot X and port Y
Command Default
Routing updates are transmitted over the router (no passive-interface command).
2-48
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
ping
The Packet Internet Groper (PING) ping command sends an Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) echo request to a remote host that reports errors and provides information relevant to IP packet addressing. Use the ping command to check host reachability and network connectivity, or to confirm basic network connectivity. Note: The address of the source in an echo message will be the destination of the echo reply message. To form an echo reply message, the source and destination addresses are simply reversed, the type code changed to 0, and the checksum recomputed. ICMP is used to report problems with delivery of IP datagrams within an IP network. It can also show when a particular node is not responding, when an IP network is not reachable, when a node is overloaded, when an error occurs in the IP header information, etc. The protocol is also frequently used by Internet managers to verify correct operations of nodes and to check that routers are correctly routing packets to the specified destination address.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ping {<A.B.C.D> | <Hostname>}[size <40-65515> [<1-65535>] [timeout <1-1024>] [source <A.B.C.D>] [tos <0-255>] [ttl <0-255>] [df]]
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D Hostname size 40-65535 IP address of the destination system name of the destination system size, in bytes, of the echo message
2-49
Release 5.2.1
1-65535 timeout 1-1024 source A.B.C.D tos 0-255 ttl 0-255 df
number of ping requests to send time, in seconds, to wait for a reply before the connection times out IP address of the BSR interface to use as the source of the ping request type of service time to live value set the "dont fragment" IP flag in the outgoing ping IP header
2-50
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
show arp
The show arp command displays static and dynamic entries in the ARP table. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show arp command:
Protocol Internet Internet Internet Internet Internet Internet Internet Internet Internet Internet Internet Internet Internet Internet Internet Internet
Address Age(min) 10.10.10.10 10.255.4.1 10.255.5.1 10.255.6.1 10.255.7.1 150.31.60.1 41 150.31.60.10 150.31.60.99 150.31.61.23 21 150.31.61.27 31 150.31.61.28 3 150.31.61.29 3 150.31.61.34 3 150.31.61.37 3 150.31.61.80 3 150.31.61.81 3
Hardware Address 0030.b801.c5f4 0000.0000.0004 0000.0000.0005 0000.0000.0006 0000.0000.0007 00e0.6367.99b1 0030.b801.c570 0000.0000.9999 0008.0ee4.84e8 0008.0ee4.d550 0020.4026.77c0 0020.4027.a028 0020.4026.d5dc 0020.4026.77bc 0020.4029.19dc 0020.4027.a038
Type ARPA ARPA ARPA ARPA ARPA ARPA ARPA ARPA ARPA ARPA ARPA ARPA ARPA ARPA ARPA ARPA
Interface ethernet 15/4
ethernet 7/0 ethernet 7/0 ethernet 7/0 cable 0/0 cable 0/0 cable 0/0 cable 0/0 cable 0/0 cable 0/0 cable 0/0 cable 0/0
Group Access
All
Command Mode All modes except User EXEC Command Line Usage show arp [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show arp [ | {count | count-only}] Command Syntax
| begin turn on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string
2-51
Release 5.2.1
2-52
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
show controllers
The show controllers command displays detailed hardware and configuration information for each module installed in the BSR chassis.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show controllers {ethernet [<X/Y>] | gigaether [<X/Y | X/Y.N>] | pos [<X/Y>] | cable <X/Y | X/Y.N> [upstream <NUM> | downstream <NUM> | mac ]} [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show controllers {ethernet [<X/Y>] | gigaether [<X/Y | X/Y.N>] | pos [<X/Y>] | cable <X/Y | X/Y.N> [upstream <NUM> | downstream <NUM> | mac ]} [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
ethernet X/Y display Ethernet interface controller information for the entire BSR chassis or the optional, specified BSR chassis slot X and port Y display Gigabit Ethernet interface controller information for the entire BSR chassis or the optional, specified BSR chassis slot X, port Y, and if applicable, sub-interface N display POS interface controller information for the entire BSR chassis or the optional, specified BSR chassis slot X and port Y
gigaether X/Y gigaether X/Y.N
pos X/Y
2-53
Release 5.2.1
cable X/Y cable X/Y.N
display cable interface controller information for the specified BSR chassis slot X, MAC domain Y, and if applicable sub-interface N display information for the specified upstream port including the upstream modulation type, channel width, frequency, and modulation profile information (i.e minislots, interleave, preamble, etc.) display information for the downstream port number including downstream modulation type, frequency (label), and symbol rate display MAC layer (layer 2) information for all cable modems on this specific CMTS module turn on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
upstream NUM
downstream NUM
mac
2-54
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
show host authorization

The show host authorization command displays the host authorization enabled state and displays all cable host entries in the ARP authorization table. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show host authorization command:
Device Host Modem Host Modem
Type Dyn Dyn Dyn Dyn
State Ack Ack-TD-TF Learned Ack-TD-TF
Seconds 90000 90000 90000 90000
Modem MAC Addr 0008.0e72.bf70 0008.0e72.bf70 0008.0e73.1dba 0008.0e73.1dba
Host IP Addr 150.31.43.3 150.31.42.2 150.31.43.2 150.31.42.3
Host MAC Addr 0008.0e72.bf72 0008.0e72.bf70 0008.0e73.1dbc 0008.0e73.1dba
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show host authorization <0-15>
Command Syntax
0-15 CMTS slot number
2-55
Release 5.2.1
show host authorization cpe

The show host authorization cpe command is used to display the dynamic or static ARP entries for CPEs only. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show host authorization cpe command:
Type Dynamic Dynamic
Host IP Address 150.31.43.3 150.31.43.2
Host MAC Address 0008.0e72.bf72 0008.0e73.1dbc
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show host authorization cpe {leased | static} [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show host authorization cpe {leased | static} [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
leased static | begin exclude include display dynamically configured host authorization entries display statically configured host authorization entries turn on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string
2-56
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
2-57
Release 5.2.1
show host authorization interface cable

The show host authorization interface cable command displays host authorization configuration information for a cable interface. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show host authorization interface cable command:
Device Host Host Modem Modem
Type Dyn Dyn Dyn Dyn
State Ack Ack Ack-TD-TF Ack-TD-TF
Seconds 3600 3600 3600 3600
Modem MAC Addr 0012.25d9.59f8 000e.5c6c.9810 0019.5eb4.8176 000e.5c00.d2e2
Host IP Addr 150.31.56.2 150.31.56.3 150.31.54.20 150.31.54.15
Host MAC Addr 0008.0ecc.9a52 0008.0ecc.9a3a 0019.5eb4.8176 000e.5c00.d2e2
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show host authorization interface cable <X/Y> [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show host authorization interface cable <X/Y> [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
X/Y | begin exclude include slot X and MAC Domain Y of the CMTS module turn on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string
2-58
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
2-59
Release 5.2.1
show host authorization summary

The show host authorization summary command is used to display ARP table summary information. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show host authorization summary command:
Interface Cable 4/0
Total Modems 2
Total Hosts 2
Total Routers 0
Dynamic Entries 4
Static Entries 0
Total Entries 4
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show host authorization summary [<0-15>] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show host authorization summary [<0-15>] [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
0-15 | begin exclude include WORD CMTS slot number turn on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string
2-60
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
count count-only
2-61
Release 5.2.1
show host unauthorized cpe

The show host unauthorized cpe command displays the list of hosts/CPEs that are unauthorized due to a failed DHCP lease query response. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show host unauthorized cpe command:
Index 32767
Seconds 600
Modem MAC Addr 0012.2588.33ac
Host IP Addr 150.42.101.2
Host MAC Addr Vrf Index 0030.1bb4.a703 0
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show host unauthorized cpe
2-62
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
show hosts
The show hosts command displays the cache list of hostnames with their IP addresses and aliases.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

show hosts
2-63
Release 5.2.1
show interfaces
Use the show interfaces command to display the status and statistics for the network interfaces. Use the show interfaces command without the slot and interface argument to display all interfaces. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show interfaces command:
gigaether 14/0.10 is up, line protocol is up Hardware address is 00:30:b8:80:63:3f Internet address is 150.31.90.10/24 Encapsulation Arpa 802.1Q Virtual LAN, VLAN ID 63 ARP Timeout 01:00:00 Last state change at 1d16h, 63 interface resets Queueing strategy: FIFO
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show interfaces [ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y | X/Y.N> | cable <X/Y | X/Y.N> | pos <X/Y> | loopback <1-255> | tunnel <0-255>] [accounting] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show interfaces [ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y | X/Y.N> | cable <X/Y | X/Y.N> | pos <X/Y> | loopback <1-255> | tunnel <0-255>] [accounting] [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
ethernet X/Y gigaether X/Y gigaether X/Y.N Ethernet interface slot X and port Y Gigabit Ethernet interface slot X, port Y, and if applicable, sub-interface N
2-64
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
cable X/Y cable X/Y.N pos X/Y loopback 1-255 tunnel 0-255 accounting
cable interface slot X, port Y, and if applicable, sub-interface N Packet-over-SONET interface slot X and port Y loopback interface number tunnel interface number display the number of packets for each protocol type that has been sent through an interface turn on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
2-65
Release 5.2.1
show ip arp
The show ip arp command displays the Internet Protocol (IP) Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) cache table entries for individual interfaces or all interfaces on the BSR. Each ARP entry describes the protocol type, IP address to MAC address binding, age time, ARP type, and interface location and type. Use the additional command arguments to filter the output information you want to receive. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show ip arp command:
Protocol Internet Internet Internet Internet Internet Internet Internet Internet Internet Internet Internet Internet Internet Internet Internet Internet Internet Internet
Address Age(min) 150.31.90.1 0 150.31.90.10 150.31.93.10 21 150.31.93.12 10 150.31.93.13 13 150.31.93.14 8 150.31.93.15 20 150.31.93.16 28 150.31.93.17 3 150.31.94.10 1 150.31.94.11 1 150.31.94.12 6 150.31.94.13 1 150.31.94.14 0 150.31.94.15 2 150.31.98.10 150.31.98.100 0 150.31.99.7 -
Hardware Address 00e0.6367.99b1 0030.b8c6.5c70 0011.1aca.1388 0011.1ac9.2094 0011.8061.3f0e 0011.1aca.13a6 0011.1aca.1394 00c0.4f5e.e476 0011.805f.fd30 0011.1ac9.2096 0011.1aca.138a 0011.1aca.1396 0011.8061.3f10 0011.1aca.13a8 0011.805f.fd32 0030.b8c6.5cf2 00c0.4f63.482c 0030.b800.0701
Type ARPA ARPA ARPA ARPA ARPA ARPA ARPA ARPA ARPA ARPA ARPA ARPA ARPA ARPA ARPA ARPA ARPA ARPA
Interface ethernet 7/0 ethernet 7/0 cable 11/1 cable 11/1 cable 4/0 cable 11/0 cable 11/0 cable 11/1 cable 4/0 cable 11/1 cable 11/1 cable 11/0 cable 4/0 cable 11/0 cable 4/0 ethernet 15/2 ethernet 15/2 ethernet 7/1
Group Access
All
Command Mode
All modes except for User EXEC
Command Line Usage

show ip arp [<A.B.C.D> | <H.H.H> | <Hostname> | cable <X/Y | X/Y.N> | ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y | X/Y.N> | loopback <0-255> | incomplete ] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]]
2-66
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
show ip arp [<A.B.C.D> | <H.H.H> | <Hostname> | cable <X/Y | X/Y.N> | ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y | X/Y.N> | loopback <0-255> | incomplete ] [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D H.H.H Hostname cable X/Y cable X/Y.N ethernet X/Y gigaether X/Y gigaether X/Y.N loopback 0-255 incomplete | begin exclude include WORD display ARP entries matching the specified IP address display ARP entries matching the specified 48 bit MAC address display ARP entries matching the specified hostname display ARP entries for the specified cable interface in the BSR slot X, MAC Domain Y, and if applicable, sub-interface N display ARP entries for the specified Ethernet interface in BSR slot X and port number Y display ARP entries for the specified Gigabit Ethernet interface in BSR slot X, port Y, and if applicable sub-interface N display ARP entries for the specified loopback interface display incomplete ARP entries turn on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string
2-67
Release 5.2.1
count count-only
2-68
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
show ip dhcp stats

The show ip dhcp stats command displays DHCP messages sent and received for a specified slot or all slots on the BSR. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show ip dhcp stats command:
DHCP statistics: CMTS Slot Upstream Downstream 4 30238 30234 6 0 0 9 0 0 11 40174 40160
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip dhcp stats [<NUM>]
Command Syntax
NUM CMTS slot number
2-69
Release 5.2.1
show ip filters
The show ip filters command displays a variety of filter and routing policy configuration information. IP filters provide a mechanism for determining whether or not to process IP packets received over the BSR 64000 POS OC-3/C12, Multi-Mode Gigabit Ethernet (SX), Single-Mode Gigabit Ethernet (LX), or 10/100 Ethernet Network Interface Modules (NIMs). When an IP packet matches one of the patterns in a filter, the filter determines whether the packet is discarded or passed to the IP routing module for forwarding. Filtering decisions can be based on combinations of source address, destination address, TCP/UDP port, and protocol. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show ip filters command:
NL AP DR TL PP IG
= = = = = =
Null Filter, SM = Send To Srm, UA = Unresolved ARP, Access List Permit, AD = Access List Deny, PR = ACL Permit Range, ACL Deny Range, IR = ICMP Redirect, IU = ICMP Unreachable, Ip Tunnel Loopback, TE = Ip Tunnel Decap, TN = Ip Tunnel Encap, Policy Route Permit, PD = Policy Route Deny, PT = Policy Tunnel, Ignore CAM use LME, PU = Ip to Mpls Push VRF Dest Ip Address Src Ip Address Pro 134.33.90.99 172.50.1.100 150.31.98.100 150.31.94.11 ip ip SP / DP / DS Interface FT QId Type Code 0 IU 0 IU
Type InF InF
The show ip filters command displays the following filter configuration information for the acl, icmp, policy, qos, srm, and tunnel command options: Dest Ip Address Src Ip Address Pro destination IP address for this filter source IP address for this filter first three characters of the routing protocol acronym for this filter. For example, OSPF is displayed as OSP. source IP port for this filter
SP
2-70
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
DP FT
destination IP port for this filter Flow (classification) Type (FT). Flow types include the following: AP = Access List Permit AD = Access List Deny PR = ACL Permit Range DR = ACL Deny Range II = IP Ingress IR = ICMP Redirect IU = ICMP Unreachable TL = IP Tunnel Loopback TE = IP Tunnel Egress TN = IP Tunnel PP = Policy Route Permit PD = Policy Route Deny QS = QoS SM = Send To Srm NL = Drop outgoing QoS queue ID number
QId
The following additional filter configuration information is displayed for the policy command option: In If Out If DS Def incoming TCP/UDP port number associated with this filter entry outgoing TCP/UDP port number associated with this filter entry Diff-serv Code Point (differentiated services) default filter indicator
2-71
Release 5.2.1
Mac Mtu
MAC address for the interface Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) packet size allowed on the interface
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip filters [acl | icmp | policy | srm | summary | tunnel] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show ip filters [acl | icmp | policy | qos | srm | summary | tunnel] [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
acl icmp policy srm display access list filters display ICMP filters display policy routing filters send filters to the SRM to troubleshoot problems - for example, this can be used in instances when ARP is unresolved display a summary of all Fast Path filters - refer to show ip filters summary display IP tunneling filters turn on output modifiers (filters)
summary
tunnel |
2-72
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
begin exclude include WORD count count-only
filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
2-73
Release 5.2.1
show ip filters summary

The show ip filters summary command displays a summary of filter and routing policy statistics for IP filters for the BSR 64000 POS OC-3/C12, Multi-Mode Gigabit Ethernet (SX), Single-Mode Gigabit Ethernet (LX), or 10/100 Ethernet Network Interface Modules (NIMs). The show ip filters summary command displays the following filter summary statistics: Flow Classification Type Flow Classification Types: Null Filter Access List Permit Access List Deny IP Ingress IP Tunnel Egress IP Tunnel Loopback ICMP Redirect ICMP Unreachable IP Tunnel Policy Route Permit Policy Route Deny Qos Send To Srm number of filters applied to each Flow Classification Type BSR 64000 slot number of filters applied to the corresponding BSR 64000 slot
Number of Filters Slot Number of Filters
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show ip filters summary command:
2-74
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
Flow Classification Type ------------------------Null Filter Send To Srm Unresolved ARP Access List Permit Access List Deny ACL Permit Range ACL Deny Range ICMP Redirect ICMP Unreachable Ip Tunnel Loopback Ip Tunnel Decap Ip Tunnel Encap Policy Route Permit Policy Route Deny Policy Tunnel Ignore CAM use LME Ip to Mpls Push ------------------------total
Number of Filters ----------------0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -------1
Slot ---15
Number of Filters ----------------1
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip filters summary [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show ip filters summary [ | {count | count-only}]
Compass ID: 327594480 Version 3 2-75
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
| begin exclude include WORD count count-only turn on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
2-76
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
show ip flows
The show ip flows command displays active TCP/UDP flows/connections including servers. PCB specifies the source physical address of the flow or connection - PCB denotes printed circuit board specifies the protocol used in this flow or connection specifies the number of packets received specifies the number of packets sentr specifies the source IP address and UDP port of the flow specifies the destination IP address and UDP port of the flow the state of the flow or connection the Virtual Private Network associated with this flow or connection
Proto Recv-Q Send-Q Local Address Foreign Address (state) VPN
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show ip flows command:
Active Internet connections (including servers) PCB Proto Recv-Q Send-Q Local Address Foreign Address (state) VPN ----- ------ ------ -----------------------------------1fb10e8 TCP 56 54 150.31.20.10.23 10.14.37.103.39345 ESTABLISHED global 1fb0fd8 TCP 1fb1060 TCP 1fb0f50 UDP 89 45 101 78 23 0 150.31.20.10.43 10.14.37.103.42034 ESTABLISHED global 150.31.20.10.67 10.14.37.103.54220 ESTABLISHED global 127.0.0.1.161 0.0.0.0.0 LISTENING global
2-77
Release 5.2.1
Group Access
All
Command Mode
All modes
Command Line Usage

show ip flows [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} | {count | count-only}] show ip flows [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
2-78
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
show ip forwarding-table
The show ip forwarding-table command displays all unicast route entries in the HSIM IP forwarding table. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show ip forwarding-table command:
NL NA GW LN PU
= = = = =
Null Route, LI = Local Interface, BC = Subnet Broadcast, Directly Connected Need ARP, WA = Directly Connected With ARP, Gateway Route, CH = Cmts Host Route, CI = Cmts Interface Route, Local Interface Network Route, CR = Cmts Route, TL = Tunnel Route, Ip to Mpls Push, 2P = Ip to Mpls 2 Push, LS
VRF ------
Ip Address/Prefix -----------------150.31.83.0/24 150.31.83.3/32 150.31.83.0/32 150.31.83.255/32 150.31.85.0/24 150.31.89.255/32 10.14.0.0/16 0.0.0.0/0 150.31.91.0/24 150.31.83.15/32 150.31.1.0/24
Phys If ------------eth 7/0 eth 7/0 eth 7/0 eth 7/0 eth 7/0 eth 7/1 eth 7/0 eth 7/0 eth 7/0 cab 2/0 eth 7/0
RT -LN LI BC BC LN BC LN LN LN CH LN
Gateway -----------------------150.31.83.3 --
MAC Address HitCnt -------------- ----------------0 9808 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 546
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip forwarding-table [<A.B.C.D> | hitCount [<NUM>] | summary ] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} | {count | count-only}] show ip forwarding-table [<A.B.C.D> | hitCount [<NUM>] | summary ] [ | {count | count-only }]
2-79
Release 5.2.1
show ip forwarding-table [mpls | tunnel | vrf {<word>}] [hitCount [<NUM>]] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} | {count | count-only}] show ip forwarding-table [mpls | tunnel | vrf {<word>}] [hitCount [<NUM>]] [ | {count | count-only }]
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D hitCount NUM summary mpls tunnel vrf word | begin count count-only exclude include WORD display the entries for the specified IP address display the access-list hit count for the (optional) BSR chassis slot number display a summary display the MPLS Fast Path filters display the tunnel filters display a VPN Routing/Forwarding instance turn on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string
2-80
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
show ip interface
The show ip interface command displays the status, statistical information, and configuration for the network interfaces. The show ip interface command without any command arguments displays status, statistical information, and configuration for all interfaces. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show ip interface command:
ethernet 7/0 is up, line protocol is up Internet address is 150.31.90.10/24 Broadcast address is 255.255.255.255 MTU 1500 bytes Directed broadcast forwarding is disabled Outgoing access list is not set Inbound access list is not set Policy routing is disabled Proxy ARP is disabled Split horizon is enabled ICMP redirects are always sent ICMP unreachables are always sent ICMP mask replies are always sent Router Discovery is disabled loopback 3 is up, line protocol is up Internet address is 150.31.93.1/24 Destination address is 150.31.93.1 MTU 1514 bytes Cable cable-modem helper addresses are: 150.31.1.100 global Cable host helper addresses are: 150.31.1.100 global Cable mta helper addresses are: 150.31.1.100 global Directed broadcast forwarding is disabled Outgoing access list is not set Inbound access list is not set Policy routing is disabled Split horizon is enabled ICMP redirects are never sent ICMP unreachables are always sent ICMP mask replies are always sent Router Discovery is disabled Secondary address 150.31.94.1/24
2-81
Release 5.2.1
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

show ip interface [ brief | cable <X/Y | X/Y.N> | ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y | X/Y.N> | loopback <1-255> | pos <X/Y> | tunnel <0-255>] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show ip interface [ brief | cable <X/Y | X/Y.N> | ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y | X/Y.N> | loopback <1-255> | pos <X/Y> | tunnel <0-255>] [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
brief provides a brief summary of IP status and configuration information for a specific interface or all interfaces cable interface slot X, MAC Domain Y, and if applicable, sub-interface N Ethernet interface slot X and port Y Gigabit Ethernet interface slot X, port Y, and if applicable, sub-interface N loopback interface number Packet-over-SONET interface slot X and port Y tunnel interface number turn on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string
cable X/Y cable X/Y.N ethernet X/Y gigaether X/Y gigaether X/Y.N loopback 1-255 pos X/Y tunnel 0-255 | begin
2-82
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
2-83
Release 5.2.1
show ip irdp
The show ip irdp command displays ICMP Router Discovery Protocol information including interface holdtime values, configured preface values, and advertisement values for specified Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet interfaces or all Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet interfaces on the BSR. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show ip irdp command:
ethernet 7/0 has router discovery disabled ethernet 7/1 has router discovery disabled ethernet 15/0 has router discovery disabled ethernet 15/1 has router discovery disabled ethernet 15/2 has router discovery disabled ethernet 15/3 has router discovery disabled ethernet 15/4 has router discovery disabled ethernet 15/5 has router discovery disabled ethernet 15/6 has router discovery disabled ethernet 15/7 has router discovery disabled
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

show ip irdp [ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y | X/Y.N>] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show ip irdp [ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y | X/Y.N>] [ | {count | count-only}]
2-84
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
Command Syntax
ethernet X/Y gigaether X/Y gigaether X/Y.N | begin exclude include WORD count count-only Ethernet interface slot X and port Y Gigabit Ethernet interface slot X, port Y, and if applicable, sub-interface N turn on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
2-85
Release 5.2.1
show ip multicast fastpath

The show ip multicast fastpath command display multicast entries in the fast path. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show ip multicast fastpath command:
Source/Group ----------------------8.8.8.21/224.2.166.71 20.1.1.10/224.2.166.71 8.8.8.21/224.2.231.191 20.1.1.10/224.2.231.191
In Phys If ---------feth 2/0 feth 3/0 feth 2/1 feth 2/2
Out Phys Ifs ------------cab 5/0 cab 4/0 cab 5/0 cab 5/1 eth 2/6 cab 5/0 cab 1/0
FP Idx -----2 5 13 6
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip multicast fastpath
2-86
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
show ip multicast fwd-cache

The show ip multicast fwd-cache command displays the multicast forwarding cache on a source and group pair basis. The added legend of s indicates that the flow is currently being switched/forwarded in the fast path. If the entry is in the fast path, the column in parenthesis displays any packets that have come through to the slow path. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show ip multicast fwd-cache command:
Legend (L): D = DVMRP accept, d = DVMRP drop, P = PIM accept, p = PIM drop s = Switched (FastPath), N = None/Drop, U = unknown Source/ (L) Incoming/ # in pkts # out pkts # OI Entry Group Outgoing (# in SRM) Timeout ------------------------------------------------ ------8.8.8.21/ Ps 90.1.1.15/ 2352 1 208 224.2.166.71 Ps 1.1.1.1 (49) 20.1.1.10/ P PIM REG IN/ 1074 1 210 224.2.166.71 P 90.1.1.15 1074 8.8.8.21/ Ps 90.1.1.15/ 47 1 209 224.2.231.191 Ps 1.1.1.1 (147) 20.1.1.10/ Ps 1.1.1.1/ 24709 1 210 224.2.231.191 Ps 90.1.1.15 (1)
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip multicast fwd-cache [<A.B.C.D> | <A.B.C.D> | physical ]
2-87
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D A.B.C.D physical only displays the cache for this source or group address only displays the cache for this specified source and group displays the cache only in relation to the physical interface - if "physical" is not specified - if "physical" is not specified, the command output relates to the logical interface
2-88
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
show ip protocols
The show ip protocols command is used for debugging routing activity and processes by displaying the status of routing protocol processes currently on the system. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show ip protocols command:
Routing Protocol is "bgp 4 " Bgp default capabilities: ipv4-unicast route-refresh Timers: keepalive 60 hold 180 Client-to-client reflection is enabled Default local-preference 100 Routing Process OSPF with ID 150.31.94.1 Supports only single TOS(TOS0) routes This is an autonomous system boundary router SPF schedule delay 5 secs, Hold time between two SPFs 10 secs Minimum LSA interval 5 secs. Minimum LSA arrival 1 secs Number of external LSA 63 Number of areas in this router is 1. 1 normal 0 stub 0 nssa Area 0.0.0.0 Number of interfaces in this area is 6 Area has no authentication SPF algorithm executed 215 times Routing for Networks: 150.31.0.0/16 Distance: 110 (default is 110)
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

show ip protocols [bgp | summary] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]]
2-89
Release 5.2.1
show ip protocols [bgp | summary] [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
bgp summary | begin exclude include WORD count count-only display BGP protocol infomation display a summary of system routing protocol processes turn on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
2-90
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
show ip route
The show ip route command displays active entries in the BSR routing table. The following is typical screen output from the show ip route command:
Codes: C - connected, S - static, R - RIP, B - BGP i - IS-IS derived L1- IS-IS level-1, L2- IS-IS level 2 route O - OSPF, IA - OSPF inter area, N1 - OSPF NSSA external type 1 N2 - OSPF NSSA external type 2, E1 - OSPF external type 1 E2 - OSPF external type 2, * - candidate default U - per-user static route, P - periodic downloaded static route T - traffic engineered route Gateway of last resort is 150.31.90.1 to network 0.0.0.0 *S O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 0.0.0.0/0 [1/0] via 150.31.90.1, ethernet 15/1 150.31.1.0/24 [110/1] via 150.31.90.1, ethernet 15/1 150.31.2.0/24 [110/1] via 150.31.90.1, ethernet 15/1 150.31.10.0/24 [110/21] via 150.31.90.1, ethernet 15/1 150.31.11.0/24 [110/31] via 150.31.90.1, ethernet 15/1 150.31.17.0/24 [110/31] via 150.31.90.1, ethernet 15/1 150.31.19.0/24 [110/22] via 150.31.90.1, ethernet 15/1 150.31.20.0/24 [110/21] via 150.31.90.1, ethernet 15/1 150.31.21.0/24 [110/31] via 150.31.90.1, ethernet 15/1 150.31.22.0/24 [110/31] via 150.31.90.1, ethernet 15/1 150.31.24.0/24 [110/22] via 150.31.90.1, ethernet 15/1 150.31.26.0/24 [110/31] via 150.31.90.1, ethernet 15/1 150.31.30.0/24 [110/21] via 150.31.90.1, ethernet 15/1 150.31.31.0/24 [110/31] via 150.31.90.1, ethernet 15/1 150.31.32.0/24 [110/31] via 150.31.90.1, ethernet 15/1 150.31.39.0/24 [110/22] via 150.31.90.1, ethernet 15/1
E2 E2
2-91
Release 5.2.1
"Rep" in the show ip route command display ouptut indicates a replicated route. For example:
10.1.6.0/24 [110/2] via 8.8.8.50, ethernet 12/2 (Rep) 186.1.1.0/24 [110/2] via 8.8.8.50, ethernet 12/2 (Rep)
Replicated routes are removed after an OSPF graceful restart function completes and routes are recalculated after an SRM switchover by the new active SRM or if the OSPF graceful restart process fails to complete. Note: The IP route information displayed reflects the routes that the routing table has exported after being filtered by each routing protocols export routing policy statements.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip route [<A.B.C.D> [longer-prefixes] [<A.B.C.D> [longer-prefixes] | bgp | connected | <Hostname> | isis | ospf | rip | static | summary | vrf <word> ] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show ip route [<A.B.C.D> [longer-prefixes] [<A.B.C.D> [longer-prefixes] | bgp | connected | <Hostname> | isis | ospf | rip | static | summary | vrf <word> ] [ | {count | count-only}]
2-92
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D A.B.C.D longer-prefixes bgp connected Hostname isis ospf rip static summary vrf word | begin exclude include WORD count count-only display routes for the specified IP address subnet mask display routes matching the specified network and mask pair only display Border Gateway Protocol routes display connected routes display routes for the hostname display ISIS routes display OSPF routes display RIP routes display static routes display a summary of routes display a VPN Routing/Forwarding instance turn on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
2-93
Release 5.2.1
show ip traffic
The show ip traffic command displays IP, ICMP, UDP, TCP, ARP, OSPF, IGMP, DVMRP, PIM, and RADIUS protocol packet statistics, depending on what protocols are in use on the BSR. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show ip traffic command:
IP statistics: Rcvd: 3348 total, 1215 local destination 0 no ip address configured on vrf 0 incoming interface with no ip addresses, 0 null incoming interface 0 packet received on a cable bundle i/f with master, 0 packets with local src addr 0 packets with src addr = 0xffffffff, 0 packets with src addr = 0 0 format errors, 0 checksum errors, 0 bad hop count 0 unknown protocol, 0 not a gateway 0 security failures, 0 bad options, 0 with options Opts: 0 end, 0 nop, 0 basic security, 0 loose source route 0 timestamp, 0 extended security, 0 record route 0 streamID, 0 strict source route, 0 alert, 0 cipso 0 policy-based routing forward, 0 other Frags: 0 reassembled, 0 timeouts, 0 couldn't reassemble 0 fragmented, 0 couldn't fragment Bcast: 34 received, 0 sent Mcast: 971 control pkt received, 3126 control pkt sent 0 data pkt received, 0 data pkt sent Sent: 6395 generated, 2133 forwarded Drop: 0 encapsulation failed, 0 unresolved, 0 no adjacency 0 Mcast In Drop, 0 Mcast Out Drop 0 no route, 0 unicast RPF, 0 forced drop 0 acces-list inbound, 0 access-list outbound 0 policy-based routing drop ICMP statistics: Rcvd: 0 format errors, 0 checksum errors, 0 redirects, 0 unreachable 0 echo, 0 echo reply, 0 mask requests, 0 mask replies,0 quench 0 parameter problem, 0 timestamp, 0 timestamp reply, 0 info request 0 other, 0 irdp solicitations, 0 irdp advertisements Sent: 0 redirects, 0 unreachable, 0 echo, 0 echo reply 0 mask requests, 0 mask replies, 0 quench, 0 timestamp 0 info reply, 0 time exceeded, 0 parameter problem
2-94
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
UDP statistics: Rcvd: 34 total, 0 checksum errors, 0 no port, 34 no port broadcast Sent: 0 total, 0 forwarded broadcasts Dhcp Relay Rcvd: 20 discover, 20 offer, 14 request 14 ack, 0 nak Dhcp Relay Sent: 20 discover, 20 offer, 14 request 14 ack, 0 nak DhcpLeaseQuery Sent: 0 DhcpLeaseQuery Rcvd: 0 Active, 0 Known, 0 Unknown, 0 Unimplemented TCP statistics: Dropped 0 broadcast/multicast TCP packets in the IP layer Rcvd: 109 total, 0 checksum errors, 0 no port Sent: 111 total ARP statistics: Rcvd: 10 requests, 1 replies, 0 reverse replies, 0 reverse requests, 0 oth er Sent: 4 requests, 7 replies (0 proxy), 0 reverse replies, 0 reverse reques ts OSPF statistics: Rcvd: 1044 total (dropped 0), 665 hello (dropped 0) 3 database desc, 0 link state req, 301 link state updates 75 link state acks Sent: 3131 total, 2756 hello 2 database desc, 2 link state req, 77 link state updates 294 link state acks IGMP statistics: Sent/Received Total: 0/0, Format errors: 0/0, Checksum errors: 0/0 Host Queriers: 0/0, Host Reports: 0/0, Host Leaves: 0/0 Bad Queries: 0/0, Bad Reports: 0/0
2-95
Release 5.2.1
DVMRP statistics: Total DVMRP routes: 0, Valid DVMRP routes: 0 Total Probes sent: 0, Total Probes received: 0 Total Reports sent: 0, Total Reports received: 0 Total Prunes sent: 0, Total Prunes received: 0 Total Grafts sent: 0, Total Grafts received: 0 Total Graft Acks sent: 0, Total Graft Acks received: 0 Total Unknown packets received: 0 PIM statistics: All Pim Send & Receive counters: 0 RADIUS client statistics: Recv: invalid server 0
TACACS+ Statistics TACACS+ Overall Statistics Number of access requests : 0 Number of access deny responses : 0 Number of access allow responses: 0
No TACACS+ Servers Configured.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip traffic [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]]
2-96
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
show ip traffic [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
| begin exclude include WORD count count-only turn on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
2-97
Release 5.2.1
show l2-cam
The show l2-cam command displays the BSRs Layer 2 Content Addressable Memory (L2 CAM). The following is typical output from the show l2-cam command:
Index -----256 257 260 261 8059 8061
PID IP Address/Mask --------- ------------------eth 15/1 eth 15/2 eth 15/1 eth 15/2 eth 15/2 eth 15/1 150.31.90.10/32 150.31.98.10/32 150.31.90.0/24 150.31.98.0/24 0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.0/0
PRI/CFI/VLAN -----------0/ 0/ 0/ 0/ 0/ 0/ 0/ 0/ 0/ 0/ 0/ 0/ 0 0 0 0 0 0
EN -1 1 1 1 1 1
PT -0 0 0 0 0 0
TOS --0 0 0 0 0 0
VRF ------
IIID -----eth 15/1 eth 15/2 eth 15/1 eth 15/2
ILID -----2 3 2 3 3 2
eth 15/2 eth 15/1
The following provides descriptions of the various show l2-cam command output fields: Index PID IP Address/Mask Type Label PRI label specified by this router Port ID - the BSR module slot and port number IP address identifies either the Provider (P) or Provider Edge (PE) router MPLS label frame priority level which is used for prioritizing traffic and is capable of representing 8 levels (0-7) Canonical Format Indicator (CFI), 1 indicates the MAC address is in non-canonical format, 0 indicates the MAC address is in canonical format VLAN ID number
CFI
VLAN
2-98
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
TP BEN EN PT TOS VRF EIID/IIID IIID ILID MAC Address
reserved by Motorola. Layer 2 Bridge status, 0 indicates disabled, 1 indicates enabled Routing status, 0 indicates disabled, 1 indicates enabled Preserve (P) Type of Service (TOS) status, 0 indicates disabled, 1 indicates enabled Type of Service value VRF name Egressing or Ingressing Interface ID Ingressing Interface ID Ingressing Logical ID MAC address (not valid for POS) of the BSR module slot and port number
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show l2-cam {ip | label | mac [<NUM>]} [ { | begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | count | count-only}]] show l2-cam {ip | label | mac [<NUM>]} [ | {count | count-only}]
Note: The "l2" portion of the command syntax command contains a lower case "L" not a 1.
2-99
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
ip display the Internet Protocol table, including bridging (VLAN tagging) entries display leased host authorization entries for a CPE display the entire MAC address table or MAC addresses for a specific BSR module, including VRF host authorization entries for all leased CPEs turn on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string count lines outputted count lines outputted while surpressing output filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string
label mac [NUM]
| begin count count-only exclude include WORD
2-100
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
show sntp
The Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) provides system time with high accuracy. The show sntp command displays the following SNTP information for the BSR: SNTP server Stratum Version Last Recvd. Trusted Server? configured SNTP server to request NTP packets or broadcast NTP server address number of NTP hops a machine is from an authoritative time source NTP server version when the last update was received "Yes" - if an authentication was attempted and succeeded; "No" - otherwise
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show sntp command:
Polling interval is 100 seconds. SNTP server Stratum Version 150.31.1.32 14 3
Last Recvd. Trusted Server? 0 hours 0 min 21 sec No
Group Access
All
Command Mode
All modes excpet User EXEC
Command Line Usage

show sntp [detail]
Command Syntax
detail display transaction details even if no SNTP server is configured
2-101
Release 5.2.1
show tcp brief

The show tcp brief command displays a brief summary of TCP status and configuration. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show tcp brief command:
Active TCP connections (including servers) PCB Proto Recv-Q Send-Q Local Address Foreign Address (state) VPN -------- ----- ------ ------ ---------------- ------------------ ----------- --d2bf708 TCP 0 0 150.31.90.10.23 10.14.37.103.41479 ESTABLISHED global all vpns d2bf460 TCP 0 0 0.0.0.0.179 0.0.0.0.0 LISTEN all vpns d2be4f8 TCP 0 0 0.0.0.0.23 0.0.0.0.0 LISTEN
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

show tcp brief
2-102
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
show tcp statistics

The show tcp statistics command displays the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) statistics. The show tcp statistics command displays the following information: sent: packets sent data packets data packet retransmitted ack-only packets URG only packet window probe packet window update packet control packets received: packets received acks duplicate acks ack for unsent data packets received in sequence statistics for packets sent by the router total number of packets sent number of data packets sent number of data packets retransmitted number of packets sent that are acknowledgments only number of urgent packets sent number of window probe packets sent number of window update packets sent number of control packets (SYN, FIN, or RST) sent statistics in this section refer to packets received by the router total number of packets received number of acknowledgment packets received number of duplicate acknowledgment packets received number of acknowledgment packets with unsent data received number of data packets received in sequence
completely duplicate number of duplicate packets received packets
2-103
Release 5.2.1
packets with some dup data out-of-order packet packet of data after window window probe window update packets
number of packets received with partially duplicated data number of packets received out of order number of packets received with data that exceeds the receiver window size number of window probe packets received number of window update packets received
packet received after number of packets received after the close connection has been closed discarded for bad checksum discarded for bad header offset field discarded because packet too short connection request connection accepts number of packets received with checksum error number of packets received with bad offset to data number of packets received that were too short number of connections initiated number of connections accepted
connections established number of connections established connections closed retransmit timeout connection dropped by rxmit timeout keepalive timeouts keepalive probes sent connection dropped by keepalive number of connections closed number of times the router tried to retransmit, but timed out number of connections dropped in retransmit timeout number of keepalive packets in timeout number of keepalive probes number of connections dropped in keepalive
2-104
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show tcp statistics command:
TCP: 20117 packets sent 11990 data packets (399789 bytes) 0 data packet (0 byte) retransmitted 8116 ack-only packets (4 delayed) 0 URG only packet 0 window probe packet 0 window update packet 14 control packets 22949 packets received 11896 acks (for 399790 bytes) 2921 duplicate acks 0 ack for unsent data 11794 packets (12305 bytes) received in-sequence 2 completely duplicate packets (1 byte) 0 packet with some dup. data (0 byte duped) 0 out-of-order packet (0 byte) 0 packet (0 byte) of data after window 0 window probe 5573 window update packets 0 packet received after close 0 discarded for bad checksum 0 discarded for bad header offset field 0 discarded because packet too short 0 connection request 9 connection accepts 8 connections established (including accepts) 9 connections closed (including 8 drops) 1 embryonic connection dropped 11895 segments updated rtt (of 11903 attempts) 1 retransmit timeout 0 connection dropped by rexmit timeout 0 persist timeout 2916 keepalive timeouts 2915 keepalive probes sent 0 connection dropped by keepalive 0 pcb cache lookup failed
2-105
Release 5.2.1
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

show tcp statistics
2-106
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
shutdown
The shutdown command disables an interface. An interface is in a shutdown state when some configuration tasks must be performed on the interface. All interfaces on the BSR are shutdown by default. The no shutdown command is used to enable a disabled interface.
Note: Use the show interfaces command to display which interfaces are enabled or disabled.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

shutdown no shutdown
2-107
Release 5.2.1
sntp authenticate
The sntp authenticate command enables authentication for SNTP. The no sntp authenticate command disables authentication for SNTP.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

sntp authenticate no sntp authenticate
2-108
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
sntp authentication-key
The sntp authentication-key command enables authentication for SNTP. The no sntp authentication-key command disables authentication for SNTP. Use the sntp authentication-key command to authenticate SNTP sources for additional security.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

sntp authentication-key <1-4294967295> [md5 <WORD>] no sntp authentication-key <1-4294967295>
Command Syntax
1-4294967295 md5 WORD key number use the md5 algorithm key value, up to 8 characters
2-109
Release 5.2.1
sntp broadcastdelay
The sntp broadcastdelay command establishes the round-trip delay time between the system and a broadcast server. The no sntp broadcastdelay command removes the round-trip delay time between the system and a broadcast server and returns it to the default. Use the sntp broadcastdelay command to set the exact time between the router as a broadcast client and the network.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

sntp broadcastdelay <1-999999> no sntp broadcastdelay <1-999999>
Command Syntax
1-999999 round-trip delay in microseconds
Command Default
3000 microseconds
2-110
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
sntp broadcast client

The sntp broadcast client command configures the BSR to listen for SNTP broadcasts. The no sntp broadcast client command blocks the BSR from receiving SNTP broadcast traffic. Use the sntp broadcast client command to receive NTP traffic from a broadcast server.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

sntp broadcast client no sntp broadcast client
2-111
Release 5.2.1
sntp disable
The sntp disable command disables SNTP. The no sntp disable command enables the BSR to accept NTP traffic from other servers.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

sntp disable no sntp disable
Command Default
Enabled
2-112
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
sntp response timeout

The sntp response timeout command is used to configure the switchover criteria when the active SNTP server is not responding and the next SNTP server on the SNTP server list becomes the active SNTP server. For details on configuring the list of SNTP servers, refer to the sntp server command. The switchover criteria is determined by the total number of failures occurring within a number of attempts at communicating with the active SNTP server. When the number of failures out of the number of attempts match the numbers configured with the sntp response timeout command, then the next SNTP server on the list will become the active SNTP server. The default values are three failures and five attempts. If using the default values and a server has three failures out of five attempts, then the next configured SNTP server on the SNTP server list becomes the active SNTP server. The no sntp response timeout command restores the default values.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

sntp response timeout attempts <1-5> sntp response timeout failures <1-5> no sntp response timeout attempts no sntp response timeout failures
Command Syntax
1-5 the number of attempts/failures allowed with the active SNTP server before switching to the next SNTP server
Command Default
attempts = 5 failures = 3
Release 5.2.1
sntp server
The sntp server command configures a BSR for SNTP to accept NTP traffic. The no sntp server command disables the BSR from receiving NTP traffic. A secondary SNTP server can also be configured as a backup in case the primary SNTP server goes down unexpectedly. This secondary SNTP server automatically becomes the primary SNTP server after 5 unsuccessful attempts to contact the primary SNTP server.
Note: When the SNTP server address is set to 224.0.1.1 (the assigned multicast address for NTP), the BSR operates in unicast mode. It then transmits a request to this multicast address and waits for replies. It then "binds" to the first SNTP server that replies. All subsequent transactions happen in a unicast mode. In this way, the SNTP servers address does not need to be known beforehand. If you configure the BSR to operate in authenticated mode, you must also configure an authentication key with the sntp authentication-key command and a trusted key with the sntp trusted-key command. Caution: If the sntp server configuration command is specified, the clock timezone command must also be specified. Otherwise, the timezone may not be initialized properly on the standby SRM and wildly fluctuating time changes may be recorded when switching from the primary to the standby SRM.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

sntp server {224.0.1.1 | <A.B.C.D> | <Hostname>} [key <1-4294967295>] [secondary [key <1-4294967295>]] no sntp server [secondary]
2-114
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
Command Syntax
224.0.1.1 A.B.C.D Hostname key 1-4294967295 secondary the NTP Multicast group the SNTP servers IP address. the SNTP servers hostname the key number for authentication purposes specifies this SNTP server as a secondary SNTP server
2-115
Release 5.2.1
sntp source-interface loopback

The sntp source-interface loopback command specifies a configured loopback interface as the interface for sending SNTP messages. The no sntp source-interface loopback command removes the configured SNTP source-interface.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

sntp source-interface loopback <1-255> no sntp source-interface
Command Syntax
loopback 1-255 the loopback interface number; the loopback interface must be previously configured
Command Default
An SNTP source-interface is not configured.
2-116
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
sntp timer
The sntp timer command specifies the time interval between queries to the SNTP server. The no sntp timer command removes the time interval.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

sntp timer <1-86400> no sntp timer
Command Syntax
1-86400 time interval in seconds
2-117
Release 5.2.1
sntp trusted-key
The sntp trusted-key command authorizes synchronization and authenticates system identity. The no sntp trusted-key command disables synchronization and removes system identity. Use the sntp trusted-key command to establish a key or keys following the sntp authentication-key command to synchronize the system. The sntp trusted-key command synchronizes with only those systems that are trusted to deliver additional security.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

sntp trusted-key <1-4294967295> no sntp trusted-key <1-4294967295>
Command Syntax
1-4294967295 trusted authentication key-number for trusted time source
Command Default
No trusted keys defined
2-118
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
traceroute
The traceroute command is used to trace the route that packets take through the network from their source to their destination. The BSR sends out a sequence of User Datagram Protocol (UDP) datagrams to an invalid port address at the remote host to trace the route through the network, as follows:
First, three UDP datagrams are sent, each with a TTL field value set to 1. The TTL value of 1 causes the datagram to "timeout" as soon as it reaches the first router in the path. The router responds with an ICMP "time exceeded" message indicating that the datagram has expired. Next, three more UDP datagrams are sent, each with the TTL value set to 2. This causes the second router in the path to the destination to return an ICMP "time exceeded" message. This process continues until the UDP datagrams reach the destination and the system originating the traceroute has received an ICMP "time exceeded" message from every router in the path to the destination. Since the UDP datagrams are trying to access an invalid port at the destination host, the host responds with an ICMP "port unreachable" message which signals the traceroute program to finish. The following is typical screen output from the traceroute command:
traceroute to 150.31.40.10 : 1-64 hops, 38 byte packets 1 172.17.103.65 0.000 ms 0.000 ms 0.000 ms 2 172.17.1.1 0.000 ms 0.000 ms 0.000 ms 3 150.31.1.21 0.000 ms 16.7 ms 0.000 ms 4 150.31.40.10 0.000 ms 0.000 ms 0.000 ms Trace complete
Group Access
All
Command Mode
2-119
Release 5.2.1
Command Line Usage

traceroute {<A.B.C.D> | <Hostname>} [Source <A.B.C.D>] [timeout <1-1024>] [nprobes <1-1024>] [minhops <1-64>] [maxhops <2-1024>] [port <0-65535>] [tos <0-255>] [df ]
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D Hostname Source A.B.C.D timeout 1-1024 nprobes 1-1024 minhops 1-64 destination IP address destination hostname IP address of the source interface number of seconds to wait for a response to a probe packet number of probes to send minimum TTL value - the default value is 1 but can be set to a higher value to suppress the display of known hops maximum TTL value - the traceroute command terminates when the destination or this value is reached destination port used by the UDP probe messages type of service value set the "Dont Fragment" flag in the IP header
maxhops 2-1024
port 0-65535 tos 0-255 df
Command Defaults
timeout = 3 seconds nprobes = 3 minhops = 1 maxhops = 64 port = 32868 tos = 0 df = disabled
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
trap-enable-if
The trap-enable-if command enables the ifLinkUpDownTrapEnable trap. The ifLinkUpDownTrapEnable trap indicates whether a link up or link down trap should be generated for an interface. The no trap-enable-if command disables the ifLinkUpDownTrapEnable trap.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Syntax
trap-enable-if no trap-enable-if
Command Default
Disabled
2-121
Release 5.2.1
trap-enable-rdn
The trap-enable-rdn command enables the rdnCardIfLinkUpDownEnable trap. The rdnCardIfLinkUpDownEnable trap indicates whether a link up or link down trap should be generated for a BSR module. The no trap-enable-rdn command disables the rdnCardIfLinkUpDownEnable trap.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Syntax
trap-enable-rdn no trap-enable-rdn
Command Default
Disabled
2-122
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
tunnel destination
The tunnel destination command provides a tunnel interface destination. The no tunnel destination command removes a tunnel interface destination. Note: The tunnel destination command specifies the endpoint of the tunnel. If a hostname is specified, DNS must have already been configured. The host name-to-address translation is done following the command only once. If mapping changes occur, the command needs to be re-issued and is stored as an IP address in the configuration files.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (tunnel interface only)
Command Line Usage

tunnel destination {<A.B.C.D> | <Hostname>} no tunnel destination
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D Hostname IP address of the tunnel interface destination DNS name of tunnel interface destination
2-123
Release 5.2.1
tunnel mode
The tunnel mode command specifies the tunnel encapsulation method to be used when configuring a tunnel interface.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

tunnel mode {dvmrp | gre | ipip}
Command Syntax
dvmrp Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol (DVMRP) - routes multicast datagrams only within a single Autonomous System Generic Routing Encapsulation (GRE) - a transport layer tunneling protocol that encapsulates a wide variety of protocol packet types inside IP tunnels IP in IP (IPIP) - is an IP-within-IP encapsulation protocol in which an outer IP header is added before the original IP header. The outer IP header Source and Destination addresses identify the "endpoints" of the tunnel. The original IP header Source and Destination addresses identify the original sender and recipient of the datagram.
gre
ipip
2-124
Release 5.2.1
IP Commands
tunnel source
The tunnel source command specifies a source address for a tunnel interface. The no tunnel source command removes a source address for a tunnel interface.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (tunnel interface only)
Command Line Usage

tunnel source {<A.B.C.D> | cable <X/Y> | default | ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y> | loopback <1-255> | pos <X/Y>} no tunnel source {<A.B.C.D> | cable <X/Y> | default | ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y> | loopback <1-255> | pos <X/Y>}
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D cable X/Y default ethernet X/Y gigaether X/Y loopback 1-255 pos X/Y source IP address for the tunnel interface CMTS interface slot X and MAC Domain Y source interface is based on the destination IP address Ethernet interface slot X and port Y Gigabit Ethernet interface slot X and port Y loopback interface number Packet-Over-SONET interface slot X and port Y
2-125
Release 5.2.1
unresolved-ip-packet-throttle
The unresolved-ip-packet-throttle command provides a throttling mechanism to prevent problems such as voice packet drops or latency that can be caused by short bursts of a large number of packets which require ARP resolutions being sent to the CMTS at a rate higher than the CMTS can process. The unresolved-ip-packet-throttle command prevents such problems from occurring regardless of configuration or traffic load by preventing the CMTS from being overrun but still allowing normal ARP resolution traffic to occur
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

unresolved-ip-packet-throttle { burst-rate <1-8000> | rate <1-4000>} no unresolved-ip-packet-throttle
Command Syntax
burst-rate 1-8000 rate 1-4000 configures the unresolved IP packet throttling burst-rate in packets/second configures the unresolved IP packet throttling packet rate in packets/second
Command Defaults
Enabled burst-rate = 20 packets/second rate = 200 packets/second
2-126
3
SNMP Commands
Introduction
This chapter describes the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) commands used to manage the BSR 64000. Since it was developed in 1988, SNMP has become the de facto standard for internetwork management. SNMP is an application layer protocol and is based on the manager/agent model. SNMP is referred to as simple because the agent requires minimal software. Most of the processing power and the data storage resides on the management system, with a subset of those functions residing in the managed system. A typical agent usually implements the SNMP protocol, stores and retrieves management data (as defined by the MIB); can asynchronously signal an event to the manager; and can be a proxy for some non-SNMP network node. A typical manager implemented as a Network Management Station (NMS) Network-management stations implements the SNMP protocol; learns of problems by receiving event notifications, called traps, from network devices implementing SNMP; is able to query agents; gets responses from agents; sets variables in agents; and acknowledges synchronous events from agents. The primary protocols that SNMP runs on are the User Datagram Protocol (UDP) and IP. SNMP also requires Data Link Layer protocols such as Ethernet to implement the communication channel from the management to the managed agent.
3-1
Release 5.2.1
SNMP Command Descriptions

This section contains an alphabetized list and descriptions of the SNMP commands supported by the BSR.
3-2
Release 5.2.1
SNMP Commands
show snmp
The show snmp command displays SNMP statistics, determine the running status, and display configuration information such as chassis ID, system description, and system location, chassis ID, and counter information for the SNMP process. The show snmp command, without arguments, displays the following information:
SNMP In Packets Bad SNMP version errors Unknown community names Illegal operations for community names supplied ASN parse errors Requested variables Changed variables Get requests Get-next requests Get responses Set requests SNMP Out Packets Get-next requests Get responses Set requests Timeouts
total number of SNMP packets received by the SNMP agent number of bad SNMP packets received with bad SNMP version errors number of SNMP packets received with unknown community names number not allowed
number incorrectly encoded variables requested by SNMP managers variables altered by SNMP managers numberof get-request PDUs received number of get-next PDUs received number of get-response PDUs received number of set request PDUs received number of SNMP packets sent by the agent number of get-next PDUs sent by the agent number of get-response PDUs sent by the agent number of set request PDUs sent by the agent number of out PDU timeouts
3-3
Release 5.2.1
Packets too big No such name errors Bad values General errors
larger than maximum packet size sent by the agent name errors nonexistent number, undefinable Management Information Base (MIB) number of set requests that detail an invalid value for a MIB object number of requests failed due to some other error, excluding a noSuchName error, badValue error, or any of the other specific errors number of responses number of traps sent number of traps dropped due to exceeding a throttling rate limit
Responses Traps Traps Dropped due to throttling Informs Notification Errors Probes Inform Retries Probe Retries
number of inform requests sent

number of notification errors sent
number of probes sent number of inform retries sent number of probe retries sent
3-4
Release 5.2.1
SNMP Commands
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show snmp command:
SNMP Information: Status: running Port Number: 161 Contact: Tom Terrific (Tom.Terrific@motorola.com) Description: BSR 64000(tm) << HW_REV: Hardware Revision: CHS-000 otorola Inc, BOOTR: RDN 4.1.0.10, SW_REV: SW Version: 4.2.0T00P43 opyright(c) 2001 Motorola, Compiled: Tue Jan 3 14:37:10 EST 2006 MPC750-MPC8260, Memory: 256MB Location: Location not set 0 SNMP In Packets 0 Bad SNMP version errors 0 Unknown community names 0 Illegal operations for community names supplied 0 ASN parse errors 0 Requested variables 0 Changed variables 0 Get requests 0 Get-next requests 0 Get responses 0 Set requests 0 SNMP Out Packets 0 Get requests 0 Get-next requests 0 Set requests 0 Timeouts 0 Packets too big 0 No such name errors 0 Bad values 0 General errors 0 Responses 0 Traps 0 Traps Dropped due to no memory 0 Traps Queued, waiting linkUp 0 Traps Dropped, queue full 0 Informs 0 Notification Errors
3-5
Release 5.2.1
Group Access
All
Command Mode
show snmp without arguments - all modes show snmp with arguments - all modes except User EXEC
Command Line Usage

show snmp [access | chassis-id | community | contact | context | description | engineID | group | host | location | packetsize | port | sysname | traps | users | view]
3-6
Release 5.2.1
SNMP Commands
Command Syntax
access Displays SNMPv3 access rights for SNMP groups and users with security models and levels. It also displays the associations between SNMP views and these security parameters. Displays SNMP chassis-id information Displays information about configured SNMP communities. Displays SNMP system contact information from the MIB object sysContact. Displays SNMPv3 context information from the MIB object sysContext. Display SNMP system description from MIB object sysDescr. Displays the local and remote SNMPv3 engines that were configured on the BSR. Displays SNMPv3 groups. Displays the hosts configured to receive SNMP notifications - both SNMP Traps and Informs. Displays SNMP system location information from ther sysLocation MIB object. Displays the maximum SNMP packet size that the SNMP agent can send and receive. The maximum packet size is 484-17940 bytes. Displays the UDP port number on which the SNMP agent is configured. Displays the system information from the sysName MIB object.
chassis-id community contact context description engineID group host
location packetsize
port sysname
3-7
Release 5.2.1
traps users
Displays a list of SNMP traps. Displays a list of configured SNMPv3 users stored in the SNMP group username table and their associated access privileges, such as engineID and security level. Displays the SNMPv3 view-name and the object-identifier subtrees associated with it
view
3-8
Release 5.2.1
SNMP Commands
snmp-server access
The snmp-server access command defines access policy information. The no snmp-server access command clears the SNMP access policies..
Note: Community Name Access Method is used predominantly with SNMPv1 and v2c.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

snmp-server access <WORD> {v1 | v2c | v3 {noauth | auth | priv }} [match {exact | prefix} | notify <WORD>] [prefix <WORD>] [read <WORD> [notify | write]] [write <WORD> [notify]] no snmp-server access <WORD> {v1 | v2c | v3 {noauth | auth | priv }} [prefix <WORD>]
Command Syntax
WORD v1 v2c v3 noauth auth priv match SNMP group name access group using v1 security model access group using v2c security model access group using v3 security model (USM) no authentication authentication privacy specify match parameters
3-9
Release 5.2.1
exact prefix notify WORD prefix WORD read WORD notify write write WORD
match exact match prefix specify a notify view name from 0 to 32 bits in length specify a prefix name from 0 to 32 bits in length specify a read view name from 0 to 32 bits in length specify a notify view for this access group specify a write view for this access group specify a write view name from 0 to 32 bits in length
3-10
Release 5.2.1
SNMP Commands
snmp-server chassis-id
The snmp-server chassis-id command specifies a new chassis ID to uniquely identify the SNMP servers chassis. The no snmp-server chassis-id command returns the chassis ID to the default value which is the serial number of the chassis.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

snmp-server chassis-id <string> no snmp-server chassis-id <string>
Command Syntax
string a unique ID string which overwrites the MIB object chassisId
Command Default
Defaults to chassis serial number
3-11
Release 5.2.1
snmp-server community
The snmp-server community command enables SNMP and sets community strings and access privileges. The no snmp-server community command removes community strings and access privileges to a particular SNMP community.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

snmp-server community <WORD> [<1-199> | ro | rw | view <WORD>] no snmp-server community <WORD>
Command Syntax
1-199 ro rw IP access list allowed access with this community string set read-only access with this community string sets read-write access; authorized management stations can retrieve and modify MIB objects MIB view to restrict community
view WORD
3-12
Release 5.2.1
SNMP Commands
snmp-server community-table
The snmp-server community-table command configures the snmpCommunityTable which is part of the snmpCommunityMIB (RFC 2576). The snmpCommunityMIB defines objects to help support coexistence between SNMPv1, SNMPv2c, and SNMPv3. The snmpCommunityTable contains a database of community strings and provides mappings between community strings and the parameters required for View-based Access Control. The no snmp-server community-table command removes an snmpCommunityTable entry.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

snmp-server community-table <octet-string> <octet-string> [access-list <num> | active | context-name <octet-string>| eng-id <HEX>| index <octet-string>| nonvolatile | not-in-service | transport-tag <octet-string> | volatile ] no snmp-server community-table <octet-string> Note: The no snmp-server community-table <octet-string> command requires an snmpCommunityIndex (the unique index value of a row in the snmpCommunityTable) as an entered value for the <octet-string> parameter NOT an snmpCommunityName.
3-13
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
octet-string the community string (snmpCommunityName) whose configuration is represented by a row in this community-table a string representing the corresponding value of snmpCommunityName in a Security Model independent format the number (1-199) of the IP access-list allowed access with this community string set the snmpCommunityStatus object to "active" the context in which management information is accessed when using the community string specified by the snmpCommunityName specifies the context EngineID (snmpCommunityContextEngineID) indicating the location of the context in which management information is accessed when using the community string specified by the corresponding value of the snmpCommunityName object the unique index value of a row in the snmpCommunityTable specifies the storage type (snmpCommunityStorageType) as nonvolatile which is defined as having persistent memory so that the storage content remains after the device is turned off and on again sets the snmpCommunityStatus object to "notInService"
octet-string
access-list num active context-name
eng-id HEX
index octet-string nonvolatile
not-in-service
3-14
Release 5.2.1
SNMP Commands
transport-tag
specifies the transport tag (snmpCommunityTransportTag) which is a set of transport endpoints from which a SNMP command responder application will accept management requests - if a management request containing this community is received on a transport endpoint other than the transport endpoints identified by this object, the request is deemed unauthentic specifies the storage type (snmpCommunityStorageType) as volatile which is the defined as having temporary memory and so that the storage content is deleted if the device is turned off
volatile
Command Defaults
snmpCommunityStatus = active snmpCommunityStorageType = nonvolatile
3-15
Release 5.2.1
snmp-server contact
The snmp-server contact command specifies the contact information in the sysContact MIB object
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

snmp-server contact <string>
Command Syntax
string name of system contact person- provides text for the MIB object sysContact
Command Default
no contact set
3-16
Release 5.2.1
SNMP Commands
snmp-server context
The snmp-server context defines or updates a context record. The no snmp-server context command clears a context record. Note: By defining a context record, an access policy can be specified that includes the context. The context record identifies object resources that are accessible.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

snmp-server context <WORD> no snmp-server context <WORD>
Command Syntax
WORD the name of context record - provides text for the MIB object sysContext
3-17
Release 5.2.1
snmp-server convert
The snmp-server convert command converts a key or password to a localized authentication key.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

snmp-server convert {key <WORD> | password <WORD> } {md5 | sha} [eng-id <HEX>]
Command Syntax
key WORD password WORD md5 sha eng-id HEX specify the key to convert to a localized authentication key specify the password to convert to a localized authentication key use MD5 Authentication use SHA Authentication specify the engine-id- if not specified the local engine ID is used
3-18
Release 5.2.1
SNMP Commands
snmp-server docs-trap-control
The snmp-server docs-trap-control command enables various CMTS traps. The no snmp-server docs-trap-control disables the CMTS trap.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

snmp-server docs-trap-control {cmtsBPKMTrap | cmtsBpiInitTrap | cmtsDCCAckFailTrap | cmtsDCCReqFailTrap | cmtsDCCRspFailTrap | cmtsDynServAckFailTrap | cmtsDynServReqFailTrap | cmtsDynServRspFailTrap | cmtsDynamicSATrap | cmtsInitRegAckFailTrap | cmtsInitRegReqFailTrap | cmtsInitRegRspFailTrap} no snmp-server docs-trap-control {cmtsBPKMTrap | cmtsBpiInitTrap | cmtsDCCAckFailTrap | cmtsDCCReqFailTrap | cmtsDCCRspFailTrap | cmtsDynServAckFailTrap | cmtsDynServReqFailTrap | cmtsDynServRspFailTrap | cmtsDynamicSATrap | cmtsInitRegAckFailTrap | cmtsInitRegReqFailTrap | cmtsInitRegRspFailTrap}
Command Syntax
cmtsBPKMTrap cmtsBpiInitTrap the failure of a BPKM operation detected on the CMTS side the failure of a BPI initialization attempt happened during the CM registration process and detected on the CMTS side the failure of a dynamic channel change acknowledgement that happened during the dynamic channel change process on the CMTS side
cmtsDCCAckFailTrap
3-19
Release 5.2.1
cmtsDCCReqFailTrap
the failure of a dynamic channel change request that happened during the dynamic channel change process on the CM side and detected on the CMTS side the failure of a dynamic channel change response that happened during the dynamic channel change process on the CMTS side the failure of a dynamic service acknowledgement that happened during the dynamic services process and detected on the CMTS side the failure of a dynamic service request that happened during the dynamic services process and detected on the CMTS side the failure of a dynamic service response that happened during the dynamic services process and detected on the CMTS side the failure of a dynamic security association operation detected on the CMTS side the failure of a registration acknowledgement from the CM that happened during the CM initialization process and was detected on the CMTS side the failure of a registration request from the CM happened during the CM initialization process and was detected on the CMTS side the failure of a registration response happened during the CM initialization process and was detected on the CMTS side
cmtsDCCRspFailTrap
cmtsDynServAckFailTrap
cmtsDynServReqFailTrap
cmtsDynServRspFailTrap
cmtsDynamicSATrap cmtsInitRegAckFailTrap
cmtsInitRegReqFailTrap
cmtsInitRegRspFailTra
3-20
Release 5.2.1
SNMP Commands
snmp-server enable informs

The snmp-server enable informs command enables SNMP informs and allows this SNMP management station to send SNMP informs to hosts also configured to accept informs using this command. The snmp-server host command configures a host or hosts to accept SNMP informs. At least one SNMP-server host must be configured. For a host to receive an inform, an snmp-server host informs command must be configured for that host, and the inform must then be enabled globally through the use of the snmp-server enable informs command. The no snmp-server enable informs command disables sending inform notification messages from this SNMP management station.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

snmp-server enable informs no snmp-server enable informs
Command Default
Disabled
3-21
Release 5.2.1
snmp-server enable traps

The snmp-server enable traps command enables SNMP traps and allows the SNMP agent to send an unsolicited notification to one or more pre-configured management stations. The no snmp-server enable traps command disables all SNMP traps or a specific trap type.The snmp-server enable traps command enables all SNMP traps or specific types of traps and allows this SNMP management station to send SNMP traps to hosts identified to receive traps with the snmp-server host command. At least one SNMP-server host must be configured.
Note: The snmp-server enable traps command without arguments enables BGP, OSPF, SNMP, and VRRP state change traps.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

snmp-server enable traps [bgp | docsdevcmts | entity | flap | ospf | pim | registration | remote-query | snmp | snr | vrrp] no snmp-server enable traps [bgp | docsdevcmts | entity | flap | ospf | pim | registration | remote-query | snmp | snr | vrrp]
Command Syntax
bgp docsdevcmts entity flap ospf enable BGP state change traps enable docs device cmts traps enable entity state change traps enable flap state change traps enable OSPF state change traps
3-22
Release 5.2.1
SNMP Commands
pim registration remote-query snmp snr vrrp
enable PIM state change traps enable CM (de)registration traps enable remote query traps enable SNMP state change traps enable Signal/Noise Ratio measurement traps enable VRRP state change traps
Command Default
Disabled
3-23
Release 5.2.1
snmp-server engineID
The snmp-server engineID command specifies an identification name (ID) for a local or remote SNMPv3 engine. The no snmp-server engineID command returns the local agent engineID to the default, or deletes a remote engineID from the agent. Note: A local SNMP Engine ID must be configured to use SNMPv3.The SNMP agent is configured with a default Engine ID equal to the MAC address of the chassis.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

snmp-server engineID {local <HEX>} {remote <A.B.C.D> [udp-port <0-65535>] <HEX>} no snmp-server engineID {local <HEX>} {remote <A.B.C.D> [udp-port <0-65535>] <HEX>}
Command Syntax
local HEX remote A.B.C.D udp-port 0-65535 sets local engine identification engine ID octet string change or add remote engine id parameters IP address of remote SNMP notification host configures a remote engine-ID UDP port number
3-24
Release 5.2.1
SNMP Commands
snmp-server group
The snmp-server group command associates (or maps) SNMP groups to SNMP users. Use the no snmp-server group command to delete the group or a table to match SNMP users with SNMP groups. The snmp-server group command is used to create an SNMP group, associate it with an SNMP user, and define a security level (SNMPv1, v2c, v3) for use with the group.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

snmp-server group <WORD> <WORD> [v1 | v2c | v3] no snmp-server group <WORD> <WORD> [v1 | v2c | v3]]
Command Syntax
WORD WORD v1 v2c v3 security name belonging to this group name of user creating group - user (security name) belonging to this group provides the least security provides the next level of security provides the most security
3-25
Release 5.2.1
snmp-server host
The snmp-server host command configures the SNMP agent to send notifications to a remote host.You configure an SNMP inform or trap host with the snmp-server host command by specifying the receiver of specific inform or trap types. All informs or raps are sent if one is not specified. Each time the snmp-server host command is used, one host acting as a inform or trap recipient is configured. The no snmp-server host clears the host recipient from receiving SNMP notification activity.
Note: A maximum of 40 remote hosts can be specified with the snmp-server host command.
Note: If the community-string is not defined using snmp-server community command prior to using the snmp-server host command, the default form of the snmp-server community command is automatically inserted into the configuration. The password (community-string) used for this default configuration is the same as that specified in the snmp-server host command. When removing an SNMP trap host from the trap host list with the no snmp-server host command, the community name that is specified in the command must exist. If the community name does not exist, the command will fail.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

snmp-server host <A.B.C.D> {<WORD>} {informs {<WORD> | version {1 | 2c | 3 {auth | noauth | priv}}} {traps {<WORD> | version {1 | 2c | 3 {auth | noauth | priv}}} {version {1 | 2c | 3 {auth | noauth | priv} {<WORD>}}} [bgp | docsdevcmts | entity | environ | flap | ospf | pim | registration | remote-query | snmp | udp-port<0-65535>| vrrp]
3-26
Release 5.2.1
SNMP Commands
no snmp-server host <A.B.C.D> {<WORD>} {informs {<WORD> | version {1 | 2c | 3 {auth | noauth | priv}}} {traps {<WORD> | version {1 | 2c | 3 {auth | noauth | priv}}} {version {1 | 2c | 3 {auth | noauth | priv} {<WORD>}}} [bgp | docsdevcmts | entity | environ | flap | ospf | pim | registration | remote-query |snmp | udp-port<0-65535>| vrrp]
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D WORD informs version 1 2c auth no auth priv traps bgp docsdevcmts entity environ flap ospf pim IP address of SNMP notification host 1 to 32 alphabetic characters specifying an SNMP community enable SNMP informs version to use for notification messages lowest security level second level, more than security level 1 most secure level, authenticates without encryption no authentication, unscrambled packet privileged level, authenticates and scrambles packet enable SNMP traps send BGP state change informs or traps send docsdevicecmts change informs or traps send entity state change informs or traps send SNMP environment change informs or traps send flap state change informs or traps send OSPF state change informs or traps send PIM state change informs or traps
3-27
Release 5.2.1
registration remote-query snmp udp-port 0-65535 vrrp
send CM (de)registration traps send remote query traps send SNMP state change informs or traps the UDP port number for the host to use send VRRP state change informs or traps
Command Default
No hosts configured
3-28
Release 5.2.1
SNMP Commands
snmp-server location
The snmp-server location command specifies the system location information in the sysLocation MIB object.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

snmp-server location <string>
Command Syntax
string text for MIB object sysLocation; identifies the physical location of the SNMP server, using 1 to 255 alphanumeric characters including spaces
3-29
Release 5.2.1
snmp-server manager response-timeout

The snmp-server manager response-timeout command specifies the number of milliseconds that the SNMP manager running on the BSR waits for an SNMP response from a cable modem polled by the Remote Query feature. Note: Increasing the response-timeout value increases the probability of receiving a cable modem remote query response under high upstream load conditions, but also increases the overall polling cycle time when cable modems completely fail to respond.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

snmp-server manager response-timeout <10-60000> no snmp-server manager response-timeout <10-60000>
Command Syntax
10-60000 the number of milliseconds
Command Default
2000 milliseconds
3-30
Release 5.2.1
SNMP Commands
snmp-server notify
The snmp-server notify command specifies the target addresses for notifications by setting the snmpNotifyName object in the snmpNotifyTable and the snmpNotifyTag object in the snmpTargetAddrTable. The snmpNotifyTable contains entries which are used to select which entries in the snmpTargetAddrTable should be used for generating notifications and the type of notifications to be generated.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

snmp-server notify <octet-string> <octet-string> {inform | trap} {nonvolatile | volatile} [active | not-in-service ] no snmp-server notify <octet-string>
Command Syntax
octet-string specifies the snmpNotifyName (index into the snmpNotifyTable) which is a unique identifier associated with this snmpNotifyEntry specifies the snmpNotifyTag object which is
octet-string
used to select entries in the

snmpTargetAddrTable inform send Inform notification messages to the host identified in the snmpTargetAddrTable through the corresponding snmpNotifyTag send Trap notification messages to the host identified in the snmpTargetAddrTable through the corresponding snmpNotifyTag
trap
3-31
Release 5.2.1
nonvolatile
specifies the storage type (snmpNotifyStorageType) as nonvolatile which is defined as having persistent memory so that the storage content remains after the device is turned off and on again specifies the storage type (snmpNotifyStorageType) as volatile which is the defined as having temporary memory and so that the storage content is deleted if the device is turned off sets the snmpNotifyRowStatus object to "active" sets the snmpNotifyRowStatus object to "notInService"
volatile
active not-in-service
Command Default
snmpNotifyRowStatus = active snmpNotifyStorageType = nonvolatile
3-32
Release 5.2.1
SNMP Commands
snmp-server notify-filter
The snmp-server notify-filter configures the snmpNotifyFilterTable.The snmpNotifyFilterTable is a table containing filter profiles. Filter profiles are used to determine whether a particular management target should receive particular notifications. When a notification is generated, it must be compared to the filters associated with each management target that is configured to receive notifications in order to determine whether the notification can be sent to that management target. Entries in the snmpNotifyFilterTable are created and deleted using the snmpNotifyFilterRowStatus object.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

snmp-server notify-filter <octet-string> <OID> <octet-string> {excluded | included} {nonvolatile | volatile} [active | not-in-service ] no snmp-server notify-filter <octet-string> <OID>
Command Syntax
octet-string the name of the filter profile (snmpNotifyFilterProfileName) to be used when generating notifications using the corresponding entry in the snmpTargetAddrTable the MIB subtree (snmpNotifyFilterSubtree) which, when combined with the corresponding value of the snmpNotifyFilterMask object, defines a family of subtrees which are included in or excluded from the filter profile
OID
3-33
Release 5.2.1
octet-string
the bit mask (snmpNotifyFilterMask) which, in combination with the corresponding OID value of the snmpNotifyFilterSubtree object, defines a family of subtrees which are included in or excluded from the filter profile indicates whether the family of filter subtrees defined by the snmpNotifyFilterSubtree and snmpNotifyFilterMask objects are excluded from a filter indicates whether the family of filter subtrees defined by the snmpNotifyFilterSubtree and snmpNotifyFilterMask objects are included in a filter specifies the storage type (snmpNotifyFilterStorageType) as nonvolatile which is defined as having persistent memory so that the storage content remains after the device is turned off and on again specifies the storage type (snmpNotifyFilterStorageType) as volatile which is the defined as having temporary memory and so that the storage content is deleted if the device is turned off sets the snmpNotifyFilterRowStatus object to "active" sets the snmpNotifyFilterRowStatus object to "notInService"
excluded
included
nonvolatile
volatile
Command Default
snmpNotifyFilterMask = empty snmpNotifyFilterRowStatus = active snmpNotifyFilterStorageType = nonvolatile
3-34
Release 5.2.1
SNMP Commands
snmp-server notify-filter-profile
The snmp-server notify-filter-profile command configures the snmpNotifyFilterProfileTable. The snmpNotifyFilterProfileTable is used to associate a notification filter profile with a particular set of target parameters. An entry in this table indicates the name of the filter profile to be used when generating notifications using the corresponding entry in the snmpTargetParamsTable. Entries in the snmpNotifyFilterProfileTable are created or deleted using the snmpNotifyFilterProfileRowStatus object.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

snmp-server notify-filter-profile <octet-string> <octet-string> {nonvolatile | volatile} [active | not-in-service] no snmp-server notify-filter-profile <octet-string>
Command Syntax
octet-string specifies the snmpTargetParamsName (index into the snmpTargetParamsTable) which is a unique identifier associated with this snmpTargetParamsEntry specifies the snmpNotifyFilterProfileName which is the name of the filter profile to be used when generating notifications using the corresponding entry in the snmpTargetAddrTable
octet-string
3-35
Release 5.2.1
nonvolatile
specifies the storage type (snmpNotifyFilterProfileStorType) as nonvolatile which is defined as having persistent memory so that the storage content remains after the device is turned off and on again specifies the storage type (snmpNotifyFilterProfileStorType) as volatile which is the defined as having temporary memory and so that the storage content is deleted if the device is turned off set the snmpNotifyFilterProfileRowStatus object to "active" set the snmpNotifyFilterProfileRowStatus object to "notInService"
volatile
Command Default
snmpNotifyFilterProfileRowStatus = active snmpNotifyFilterProfileStorType = nonvolatile
3-36
Release 5.2.1
SNMP Commands
snmp-server packetsize
The snmp-server packetsize command sets the maximum SNMP packet size that the server sends or receives. The no snmp-server packetsize command sets SNMP packet size back to the default.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

snmp-server packetsize <484-17940> no snmp-server packetsize
Command Syntax
484-17940 maximum packet size in bytes
Command Default
1400 bytes
3-37
Release 5.2.1
snmp-server port number

The snmp-server port number sets the UDP port number the SNMP agent is to use. The no snmp-server port number sets the UDP port number the SNMP agent is to use back to the default.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

snmp-server port number <0-65535> no snmp-server port number <0-65535>
Command Syntax
0-65535 port number for the SNMP agent to listen
Command Default
161
3-38
Release 5.2.1
SNMP Commands
snmp-server shutdown
The snmp-server shutdown command shuts down the SNMP Agent, preventing it from further processing SNMP packets, while retaining all SNMP configuration data in the event the agent is restarted. The snmp-server shutdown delete command shuts down the SNMP Agent and deletes all SNMP configuration data (all SNMP configuration data is lost).
Note: The snmp-server shutdown command is identical to the no snmp-server command.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

snmp-server shutdown [delete]
Command Syntax
delete deletes all SNMP configuration data upon shutting down (without this option all SNMP configuration data is retained and the agent is suspended).
Command Default
Disabled
3-39
Release 5.2.1
snmp-server sysname
The snmp-server sysname command specifies the system name information in the sysLocation MIB object.
Note: The sysName MIB variable is the name of the node. The show snmp sysname command gets the sysName MIB variable.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

snmp-server sysname <string>
Command Syntax
string text for the MIB object sysName
3-40
Release 5.2.1
SNMP Commands
snmp-server target-addr
The snmp-server target-addr command configures the SNMP target address entries in the snmpTargetAddressTable. The snmpTargetAddrTable contains information about transport domains and addresses to be used in the generation of SNMP operations. It also contains the snmpTargetAddrTagList object which provides a mechanism for grouping table entries. Entries in the snmpTargetAddrTable are created or deleted using the snmpTargetAddrRowStatus object.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

snmp-server target-addr <octet-string> <A.B.C.D> udp-port <0-65535> <0-2147483647> <0-255> <octet-string> <octet-string> <octet-string> {0 | <484-2147483647>} {nonvolatile | volatile} [active | not-in-service ] no snmp-server target-addr <octet-string>
Command Syntax
octet-string specifies the snmpTargetAddrName (index into the snmpTargetAddrTable) which is a unique identifier associated with this snmpTargetAddrEntry the IP address of the SNMP notification host specifies the SNMP notification host's UDP port number the expected maximum round trip time (snmpTargetAddrTimeout) for communicating with the transport address defined by this row
A.B.C.D udp-port 0-65535 0-2147483647
3-41
Release 5.2.1
0-255
specifies a default number of retries (snmpTargetAddrRetryCount) to be attempted when a response is not received for a generated message - if an application provides its own retry count, the value of this object is ignored
octet-string
sets the snmpTargetAddrTagList object which is a list of tag values which are used to select target addresses for a particular operation - if there is more than
one tag, use quotation marks to separate each tag
octet-string
sets the snmpTargetAddrParams object which identifies an entry in the snmpTargetParamsTable - the identified entry contains SNMP parameters to be used when generating messages to be sent to this transport address sets the snmpTargetAddrTMask object which is the mask associated with snmpTargetParamsTable the maximum message size in bytes specified by the snmpTargetAddrMMS object - "0" = an empty message specifies the storage type (snmpTargetAddrStorageType) as nonvolatile which is defined as having persistent memory so that the storage content remains after the device is turned off and on again specifies the storage type (snmpTargetAddrStorageType) as volatile which is the defined as having temporary memory so that the storage content is deleted if the device is turned off
octet-string
0 | 484-2147483647
nonvolatile
volatile
3-42
Release 5.2.1
SNMP Commands
sets the snmpTargetAddrRowStatus object to "active" sets the snmpTargetAddrRowStatus object to "notInService"
Command Default
snmpTargetAddrMMS = 484 snmpTargetAddrRowStatus = active snmpTargetAddrStorageType = nonvolatile
3-43
Release 5.2.1
snmp-server target-params
The snmp-server target-params configures the snmpTargetParamsTable. The snmpTargetParamsTable contains information about SNMP version and security information to be used when sending messages to particular transport domains and addresses. Entries in the snmpTargetParamsTable are created or deleted using the snmpTargetParamsRowStatus object.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

snmp-server target-params <octet-string> <0-3> <0-3> <octet-string> {authNoPriv | authPriv | noAuthNoPriv} {nonvolatile | volatile} [active | not-in-service ] no snmp-server target-params <octet-string>
3-44
Release 5.2.1
SNMP Commands
Command Syntax octet-string
specifies the snmpTargetParamsName (index into the snmpTargetParamsTable) which is a unique identifier associated with this snmpTargetParamsEntry the message processing model (snmpTargetParamsMPModel) to be used when generating SNMP messages using this entry 0 = SNMPv1, 1 = SNMPv2c 2 = SNMPv2u and SNMPv2 3 = SNMPv3
0-3
0-3
the security model (snmpTargetParamsSecurityModel) to be used when generating SNMP messages using this entry - an implementation may choose to return an "inconsistentValue" error if an attempt is made to set this variable to a value for a security model which the implementation does not support 0 = any 1 = SNMPv1 2 = SNMPv2c 3 = USM (User-Based Security)
octet-string
the security name (snmpTargetParamsSecurityName) for generating notifications which identifies the principal on whose behalf SNMP messages will be generated using this entry
set the snmpTargetParamsSecurityLevel object to "authorization/no privilege"
authNoPriv
3-45
Release 5.2.1
authPriv noAuthNoPriv nonvolatile
set the snmpTargetParamsSecurityLevel object to "authorization/privilege" set the snmpTargetParamsSecurityLevel object to "no authorization/no privilege" specifies the storage type (snmpTargetParamsStorageType) as nonvolatile which is defined as having persistent memory so that the storage content remains after the device is turned off and on again specifies the storage type (snmpTargetParamsStorageType) as volatile which is the defined as having temporary memory and so that the storage content is deleted if the device is turned off set snmpTargetParamsRowStatus to "active" set snmpTargetParamsRowStatus to "notInService"
volatile
Command Default
snmpTargetParamsRowStatus = active snmpTargetParamsStorageType = nonvolatile
3-46
Release 5.2.1
SNMP Commands
snmp-server trap rate-limit

The snmp-server trap rate-limit command constricts the rate of SNMP messages and log messages sent to a remote host and used by the agent to send an unsolicited notification to one or more pre-configured management stations. The no snmp-server trap rate-limit clears the SNMP agent and increases the number of traps sent to a remote host.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

snmp-server trap rate-limit <0-2147483647> <1-2147483647> no snmp-server trap rate-limit <0-2147483647> <1-2147483647>
Command Syntax
0-2147483647 1-2147483647 number of SNMP traps; affects both trap and SYSLOG per unit time in seconds
3-47
Release 5.2.1
snmp-server trap-source loopback

The snmp-server trap-source loopback command allows an operator to control the source IP address of SNMP traps generated by the BSR by specifying a loopback interface as the source IP address for SNMP traps. The normal convention for generated SNMP traps is to set the source IP address equal to the IP address of the outgoing interface. The snmp-server trap-source loopback command overrides this convention and instead uses the IP address of the specified loopback interface. The no snmp-server trap-source loopback command removes the loopback source interface.
Note: Before using the snmp-server trap-source loopback command, the loopback interface must be configured and assigned an IP address.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

snmp-server trap-source loopback <1-255> no snmp-server trap-source loopback <1-255>
Command Syntax
3-48
Release 5.2.1
SNMP Commands
snmp-server user
The snmp-server user command adds a new user to an SNMP group. The no snmp-server user command removes a user from an SNMP group.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

snmp-server user <WORD> [auth {sha | md5} {key <string> [eng-id <HEX>| priv des56 <string> | public <octet-string>] | local <string> [eng-id <HEX>| priv des56 <string> | public <octet-string>] | password <string> [eng-id <HEX>| priv des56 <string> | public <octet-string>] | <string> [eng-id <HEX>| priv des56 <string>]}] no snmp-server user <WORD> [eng-id <HEX>]
Command Syntax
WORD auth md5 sha key string local string password string string username authentication parameters for user uses HMAC/MD5 algorithm for authentication uses HMAC/SHA algorithm for authentication specifies a non-localized authentication key (SHA = 20 octets, MD5 = 16 octets) specifies a localized authentication key (SHA = 20 octets, MD5 = 16 octets) specifies a password string (must be at least 8 characters) specifies an authentication password string for this user
3-49
Release 5.2.1
eng HEX priv des56
specifies engine-id with this user; local value of engine ID provides DES-56 bit encryption with authentication based on the CBC-DES (DES-56) standard sets the usmUserPublic MIB object
public octet-string
3-50
Release 5.2.1
SNMP Commands
snmp-server view
The snmp-server view command defines an SNMPv2 MIB view. The no snmp-server view command removes the defined view. You can assign MIB views to SNMP Groups or community strings to limit the MIB objects that an SNMP manager can access. You can use a predefined view or create your own view. Other SNMP commands, such as snmp-server community, can use the view to create records associated with a view.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

snmp-server view <WORD> [<OID> | at | bgp | directory | docsif | dod | dot3 | egp | experimental | icmp | ifmib | igmp | interfaces | internet | ip | iso | mgmt | mib-2 | org | ospf | ppp | private | rip2 | riverdelta | security | snmp | snmpv2 | sonet | system | tcp | transmission | udp | vrrp ] {included | excluded} no snmp-server view <WORD> [<OID> | at | bgp | directory | docsif | dod | dot3 | egp | experimental | icmp | ifmib | igmp | interfaces | internet | ip | iso | mgmt | mib-2 | org | ospf | ppp | private | rip2 | riverdelta | security | snmp | snmpv2 | sonet | system | tcp | transmission | udp | vrrp ] {included | excluded}
Command Syntax
WORD used for reference identification to view record being generated or removed reference identification subtree of MIB view family name (ex: 1.3.6.1.= internet, 1.3.6.1.2.1.1 = system) AT MIB group BGP MIB group directory MIB group
OID at bgp directory
3-51
Release 5.2.1
docsif dod dot3 egp experimental icmp ifmib igmp interfaces internet ip iso mgmt mib-2 org ospf ppp private rip2 riverdelta security snmp snmpv2 sonet system
docsisIf MIB group DOD MIB group ether-like MIB group EGP MIB group experimental MIB group ICMP MIB group ifMib MIB group IGMP MIB group interfaces MIB group internet MIB group IP MIB group ISO MIB group mgmt MIB group MIB-2 MIB group org MIB group OSPF MIB group PPP MIB group private MIB group RIP2 MIB group RiverDelta Networks proprietary MIB groups security MIB group SNMP MIB group SNMPv2 MIB group SONET MIB group System MIB group
3-52
Release 5.2.1
SNMP Commands
tcp transmission udp vrrp included excluded
TCP MIB group transmission MIB group UDP MIB group VRRP MIB group specifies MIB group is included from view specifies MIB group is excluded from view
3-53
4
Debug Commands
Introduction
This chapter describes the debug commands supported by the BSR 64000. Debug commands help to isolate the source of a system failure. The output provides diagnostic information, protocol status, and network activity which can be used to diagnose and resolve networking problems. Note: These debug commands and messages only function or display packets which are routed through the SRM. Most user-to-user traffic is switched through hardware which bypasses the SRM so these commands would not show those packets.
Debug Command Descriptions

This section contains an alphabetized list and descriptions of the debug commands supported by the BSR.
4-1
Release 5.2.1
debug aps
The debug aps command enables APS debugging. The no debug aps command turns APS debugging off.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

debug aps {all {all | slot <0-15>}} {switching {all | slot <0-15>}} no debug aps {all {all | slot <0-15>}} {switching {all | slot <0-15>}}
Command Syntax
all switching all slot 0-15 debug all APS commands, actions and configurations debug only APS switch commands and actions debug all valid slots select slot number to debug
4-2
Release 5.2.1
Debug Commands
debug arp
The debug arp command displays Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) information exchanges between the BSR and other devices on the network. The no debug arp command turns off ARP debugging.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

debug arp no debug arp
4-3
Release 5.2.1
debug cable err

The debug cable err command displays miscellaneous error conditions.\ Note: The debug cable err command is only supported on the 2:8 CMTS module and is available through the NUM (chassis slot) option on the command line. This command is not supported on the 2:8 (2.0) CMTS module. To determine which CMTS modules are installed in the BSR 64000, use the show chassis status command.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

debug cable <NUM> err no debug cable <NUM> err
Command Syntax
NUM the BSR 64000 chassis slot number containing the CMTS module
4-4
Release 5.2.1
Debug Commands
debug cable keyman

The debug cable keyman command activates debugging of TEK and KEK baseline privacy key activity. The no debug cable keyman turns off this debugging operation. Note: The debug cable keyman command is only supported on the 2:8 CMTS module and is available through the NUM (chassis slot) option on the command line. This command is not supported on the 2:8 (2.0) CMTS module. To determine which CMTS modules are installed in the BSR 64000, use the show chassis status command.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

debug cable <NUM> keyman no debug cable <NUM> keyman
Command Syntax
4-5
Release 5.2.1
debug cable mac

The debug cable mac command displays dynamic service messages and/or MAC layer management information MAC-layer information. The no debug cable mac command turns off MAC-layer debugging. Note: The debug cable mac command is only supported on the 2:8 CMTS module and is available through the NUM (chassis slot) option on the command line. This command is not supported on the 2:8 (2.0) CMTS module. To determine which CMTS modules are installed in the BSR 64000, use the show chassis status command.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

debug cable <NUM> mac {dynsrv | information} no debug cable <NUM> mac {dynsrv | information}
Command Syntax
4-6
Release 5.2.1
Debug Commands
debug cable map

The debug cable map command displays map debugging messages. The no debug cable map command turns off this debugging operation. Note: The debug cable map command is only supported on the 2:8 CMTS module and is available through the NUM (chassis slot) option on the command line. This command is not supported on the 2:8 (2.0) CMTS module. To determine which CMTS modules are installed in the BSR 64000, use the show chassis status command.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

debug cable <NUM> map no debug cable <NUM> map
Command Syntax
4-7
Release 5.2.1
debug cable modem-select

The debug cable modem-select command lets you select a specific cable modem for debug tracing. The no debug cable modem-select command turns off this debugging operation. Note: The debug cable modem-select command is only supported on the 2:8 CMTS module and is available through the NUM (chassis slot) option on the command line. This command is not supported on the 2:8 (2.0) CMTS module. To determine which CMTS modules are installed in the BSR 64000, use the show chassis status command.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

debug cable <NUM> modem-select <mac> no debug cable <NUM> modem-select <mac>
Command Syntax
mac NUM MAC address of a specific cable modem the BSR 64000 chassis slot number containing the CMTS module
4-8
Release 5.2.1
Debug Commands
debug cable privacy

The debug cable privacy command activates debugging of baseline privacy. The no debug cable privacy command turns off this debugging operation. Note: The debug cable privacy command is only supported on the 2:8 CMTS module and is available through the NUM (chassis slot) option on the command line. This command is not supported on the 2:8 (2.0) CMTS module. To determine which CMTS modules are installed in the BSR 64000, use the show chassis status command.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

debug cable <NUM> privacy no debug cable <NUM> privacy
Command Syntax
4-9
Release 5.2.1
debug cable qos

The debug cable qos command activates debugging of Quality of Service (QoS). The no debug cable qos command turns off this debugging operation. Note: The debug cable qos command is only supported on the 2:8 CMTS module and is available through the NUM (chassis slot) option on the command line. This command is not supported on the 2:8 (2.0) CMTS module. To determine which CMTS modules are installed in the BSR 64000, use the show chassis status command.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

debug cable <NUM> qos no debug cable <NUM> qos
Command Syntax
4-10
Release 5.2.1
Debug Commands
debug cable range

The debug cable range command displays ranging messages exchanged between cable modems and the CMTS. The no debug cable range command turns off this debugging operation. Note: The debug cable range command is only supported on the 2:8 CMTS module and is available through the NUM (chassis slot) option on the command line. This command is not supported on the 2:8 (2.0) CMTS module. To determine which CMTS modules are installed in the BSR 64000, use the show chassis status command.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

debug cable <NUM> range no debug cable <NUM> range
Command Syntax
4-11
Release 5.2.1
debug cable reg

The debug cable reg command displays registration messages exchanged between cable modems and the CMTS. The no debug cable reg command turns off this debugging operation. Note: The debug cable reg command is supported on the 2:8, and 2:8 (2.0) CMTS modules and is only available through the X/Y (chassis slot and MAC Domain) option on the command line. The debug cable reg command is not available through the NUM (chassis slot) option on the command line.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

debug cable <X/Y> reg no debug cable <X/Y> reg
Command Syntax
X/Y the slot and MAC Domain number of the CMTS module
4-12
Release 5.2.1
Debug Commands
debug cable remote-query

The debug cable remote-query command enables console logging of messages for each SNMP packet sent and received by the Remote Query polling feature.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

debug cable remote-query
4-13
Release 5.2.1
debug cable ucc

The debug cable ucc command displays upstream channel change (UCC) messages generated when cable modems request or are assigned a new channel. The no debug cable ucc command turns of this debugging operation. Note: The debug cable ucc command is only supported on the 2:8 CMTS module and is available through the NUM (chassis slot) option on the command line. This command is not supported on the 2:8 (2.0) CMTS module. To determine which CMTS modules are installed in the BSR 64000, use the show chassis status command.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

debug cable <NUM> ucc no debug cable <NUM> ucc
Command Syntax
4-14
Release 5.2.1
Debug Commands
debug ip access-list
The debug ip access-list command enables IP access-list debugging. The no debug ip access-list command turns IP access-list debugging off.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

debug ip access-list {in | out } no debug ip access-list {in | out }
Command Syntax
in out debug inbound packets debug outbound packets
Command Default
Disabled
4-15
Release 5.2.1
debug ip bgp
The debug ip bgp command displays Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) transactions. The no debug ip bgp command turns off this debugging operation. Use the debug ip bgp command to:

Show events that change the state of the BGP session with any peer Show open messages sent and received between peers Show keepalive messages sent and received between peers Show update messages sent and received between peers including advertised routes and withdrawn routes Show notification messages sent and received between peers Troubleshoot BGP peer sessions and route exchanges
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

debug ip bgp [<A.B.C.D> | dampening | events | inbound-connection [access-list [<1-199> | <1300-2699> ]] | keepalives [ in | out ] | message-dump [ in | keepalive | notify | open | others | out | refresh | update ] | notifies [ in | out ] | rules [ in | out ] | soft-reconfiguration-inbound | updates [ in | out ]] no debug ip bgp [<A.B.C.D> | dampening | events | inbound-connection [access-list [<1-199> | <1300-2699> ]] | keepalives [ in | out ] | message-dump [ in | keepalive | notify | open | others | out | refresh | update ] | notifies [ in | out ] | rules [ in | out ] | soft-reconfiguration-inbound | updates [ in | out ]]
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D dampening events neighbor IP address to debug BGP dampening enables logging of BGP state transitions
4-16
Release 5.2.1
Debug Commands
inbound-connection access-list 1-199 1300-2699 keepalives in out message dump keepalive notify open others refresh update notifies rules soft-reconfiguration-inbound updates
information about peers trying to make a connection select the peer from which inbound to display inbound connections access list number access list number (expanded range) BGP keepalives incoming information outgoing information displays contents of messages display contents of KEEPALIVE messages display contents of NOTIFY messages display contents of OPEN messages display contents of any other messagesd display contents of ROUTE-REFRESH messages display contents of UPDATE messages BGP notification messages display an explanation of the treatment of update messages process clear ip bgp soft in updates generates per update messages
4-17
Release 5.2.1
debug ip dvmrp
The debug ip dvmrp command displays information on Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol (DVMRP) packets received and transmitted. The no debug ip dvmrp command turns off this debugging operation.
Note: The debug ip dvmrp command uses considerable bandwidth to output debugging information. This may interrupt router activities.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

debug ip dvmrp no debug ip dvmrp
Command Default
Disabled
4-18
Release 5.2.1
Debug Commands
debug ip icmp
The debug ip icmp command displays Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) information exchanges between the BSR and other devices on the network. The no debug ip icmp turns off ICMP debugging. Use the debug ip icmp command to determine whether the BSR is sending or receiving ICMP messages.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

debug ip icmp no debug ip icmp
Command Default
Disabled
4-19
Release 5.2.1
debug ip igmp
The debug ip igmp command displays all Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) packets, and all IGMP host-related actions. The no debug ip igmp command turns off the IGMP debugging. Use the debug ip igmp command to target IGMP protocol messages and mtrace messages.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

debug ip igmp no debug ip igmp
Command Default
Disabled
4-20
Release 5.2.1
Debug Commands
debug ip mfm
The debug ip mfm command displays Multicast Forwarding Manager (MFM) control packet activity. The no debug ip mfm command turns off MFM debugging.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

debug ip mfm no debug ip mfm
Command Default
Disabled
4-21
Release 5.2.1
debug ip mrtm
The debug ip mrtm command displays changes made to the IP multicast routing table made by the Multicast Routing Table Manager. The no debug ip mrtm command turns off MRTM debugging.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

debug ip mrtm {all | general} no debug ip mrtm {all | general}
Command Syntax
all general all MRTM processing information general, non-specific MRTM application information
Command Default
Disabled
4-22
Release 5.2.1
Debug Commands
debug ip ospf
The debug ip ospf command displays Open Shortest Path First (OSPF)-related activity. The no debug ip ospf command turns off OSPF-related debugging. Use the debug ip ospf command to turn on debugging for IP OSPF. The debug ip ospf command can be used to do the following:

Confirm that the routers match the same IP mask Verify same hello interval Verify same dead interval Verify neighbors are part of the same area
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

debug ip ospf {adj | dr | events | graceful-restart | lsa | packet | retransmission | spf [detail] } no debug ip ospf {adj | dr | events | graceful-restart | lsa | packet | retransmission | spf [detail] }
Command Syntax
adj dr events graceful-restart lsa packet retransmission debug OSPF adjacency events debug OSPF DR election events debug all OSPFevents debug OSPF graceful-restart | debug OSPF LSA rx/tx events debug OSPF packets reception events debug OSPF retransmission events
4-23
Release 5.2.1
spf detail
debug OSPF SPF calculation events display detailed SPF calculation events debug information
Command Default
Disabled
4-24
Release 5.2.1
Debug Commands
debug ip packet
The debug ip packet command displays general IP debugging information generated and forwarded through th SRM including packets received, generated, and forwarded. The no debug ip packet command turns IP debugging operations.
Note: The debug ip packet command uses considerable bandwidth to output debugging information. This may interrupt router activities.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

debug ip packet [<1-199> | <1300-2699> | detail ] no debug ip packet Command Usage Examples: debug ip packet debug ip packet detail debug ip packet detail [<1-199> | <1300-2699>] debug ip packet [<1-199> | <1300-2699> debug ip packet [<1-199> | <1300-2699> detail debug ip packet [<1-199> | <1300-2699> detail [<1-199> | <1300-2699>]
4-25
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
1-199 1300-2699 detail access list number extended access list number display more detailed IP packet; debugging information
Command Default
Disabled
4-26
Release 5.2.1
Debug Commands
debug ip pim
The debug ip pim command enables PIM debugging. The no debug ip pim command turns PIM debugging off.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

debug ip pim {all | assert | bsr | cache | general | hello | join-prune | register | rp | rp-db | rt-change } no debug ip pim
Command Syntax
all assert bsr cache general hello join-prune register rp rp-db rt-change debug all pim processing information debug assert processing information debug BSR-RP processing information debug internal cache maintenance information debug non-specific PIM application information debug hello processing information debug Join/Prune processing information debug register processing information debug RP processing information debug RPSet Database processing information debug route change processing information
4-27
Release 5.2.1
Command Default
Disabled
4-28
Release 5.2.1
Debug Commands
debug ip policy
The debug ip policy command displays IP policy routing packet activity. The debug ip policy command displays information about whether a packet matches the routing policy criteria and the resulting routing information for the packet.The no debug ip policy command turns off IP policy debugging.
Note: The debug ip policy command uses considerable bandwidth to output debugging information. This may interrupt router activities.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

debug ip policy no debug ip policy
Command Default
Disabled
4-29
Release 5.2.1
debug ip redistribute
The debug ip redistribute command displays route redistribution information from one routing domain to another routing domain. The no debug ip redistribute command turns off IP redistribute debugging.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

debug ip redistribute to {all | bgp | isis | ospf | rip} from {all | bgp | connected | isis | ospf | rip | static} no debug ip redistribute to {all | bgp | isis | ospf | rip} from {all | bgp | connected | isis | ospf | rip | static}
Command Syntax
to all bgp isis ospf rip from all bgp connected isis to protocols all supported protocols routes redistributed into BGP routes redistributed into IS-IS routes redistributed into OSPF routes redistributed into RIP from protocols all supported protocols routes redistributed from BGP routes redistributed connected routes redistributed from IS-IS
4-30
Release 5.2.1
Debug Commands
ospf rip static
routes redistributed from OSPF routes redistributed from RIP routes redistributed static
Command Default
Disabled
4-31
Release 5.2.1
debug ip rip
The debug ip rip command displays Routing Information Protocol (RIP) send and receive information. The no debug ip rip turns off RIP debugging.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

debug ip rip [database | events | trigger] no debug ip rip [database | events | trigger]
Command Syntax
database events trigger RIP database events RIP protocol events RIP triggered events
Command Default
Disabled
4-32
Release 5.2.1
Debug Commands
debug ip rip database

The debug ip rip database command displays information on RIP route entry events; additions, deletions, and changes. The no debug ip rip database command turns off RIP database debugging.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

debug ip rip database no debug ip rip database
4-33
Release 5.2.1
debug ip rip events

The debug ip rip events command displays information on RIP-related events. The no debug ip rip events turns off RIP-related event debugging.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

debug ip rip events no debug ip rip events
Command Default
Disabled
4-34
Release 5.2.1
Debug Commands
debug ip rip trigger

The debug ip rip trigger command displays RIP routing events that occur as a result of RIP trigger extensions. The no debug ip rip trigger command turns off RIP triggered events debugging.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

debug ip rip trigger no debug ip rip trigger
Command Default
Disabled
4-35
Release 5.2.1
debug ip tcp transactions

The debug ip tcp transactions command displays information on significant TCP activity such as state changes, retransmissions, and duplicate packets. The no debug tcp transactions command turns off TCP debugging. Note: The debug ip tcp transactions command reports output for packets the BSR 64000 transmits and receives, but does not display output for packets it forwards.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

debug ip tcp transactions no debug ip tcp transactions
Command Default
Disabled
4-36
Release 5.2.1
Debug Commands
debug ip udp
The debug ip udp command displays UDP-based transactions.The debug output shows whether packets are being received from the host. The no debug ip udp command turns off UDP debugging.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

debug ip udp [dhcp [<mac>]] no debug ip udp [dhcp [<mac>]]
Command Syntax
dhcp mac display Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) packet information client hardware/MAC address in the form of xxxx.xxxx.xxxx
Command Default
Disabled
4-37
Release 5.2.1
debug ip vrrp
The debug ip vrrp command displays Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) transactions. The no debug ip vrrp command turns off VRRP debugging.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

debug ip vrrp no debug ip vrrp
Command Default
Disabled
4-38
Release 5.2.1
Debug Commands
debug ipsec
The debug ipsec command displays all realtime IP security (IPSec) debugging information to the console. The no debug ipsec command turns off this debugging function.
Note: Debugging for IPSec can only occur when IPSec is not shutdown.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

debug ipsec {ike [chan-agent | del-msg | info-msg | key-exg | main | quick] | ipsec | sadb | spd} no debug ipsec {ike [chan-agent | del-msg | info-msg | key-exg | main | quick] | ipsec | sadb | spd}
Command Syntax
ike enables the debugging of the Internet Key Exchange (IKE) channel agent information, delete messages, informational messages, key exchanges, main mode (IKE phase 1) and quick mode (IKE phase 2) information to the console. Disabling this parameter shuts down all six of the IKE debug printing categories. enables the debugging of the channel agent information and prints it to the console enables the debugging of delete messages and prints them to the console
chan-agent del-msg
4-39
Release 5.2.1
info-msg key-exg main
enables the debugging of informational messages and prints them to the console enables the debugging of key exchanges and prints them to the console enables the debugging Internet Security Association Key Management Protocol (ISAKMP) exchange statements and prints them to the console enables the debugging of ISAKMP IKE Security Association (SA) exchange statements and prints them to the console enables the debugging of IPSec information and prints it to the console enables the debugging of Security Association Database (SADB) information and prints it to the console enables the debugging of the IPSec Security Policy Database (SPD) information and prints it to the console
quick
ipsec sadb
spd
Command Default
Disabled
4-40
Release 5.2.1
Debug Commands
debug ipv6 all

The debug ipv6 all command turns on debugging messages for all IPv6 debug functions. The no debug ipv6 all command turns off this debugging operation.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

debug ipv6 all no debug ipv6 all
Command Default
Disabled
4-41
Release 5.2.1
debug ipv6 dhcp

The debug ipv6 dhcp command turns on debugging messages for all DHCP based transactions. The no debug ipv6 dhcp command turns off this debugging operation.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

debug ipv6 dhcp no debug ipv6 dhcp
Command Default
Disabled
4-42
Release 5.2.1
Debug Commands
debug ipv6 icmp6

The debug ipv6 icmp6 command turns on debugging messages for all ICMP6 based transactions. The no debug ipv6 icmp6 command turns off this debugging operation. Caution: The debug ipv6 icmp6 command could cause a huge number of messages to be displayed or logged and should only be enabled for short periods.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

debug ipv6 icmp6 no debug ipv6 icmp6
Command Default
Disabled
4-43
Release 5.2.1
debug ipv6 packet

The debug ipv6 packet command displays general IPv6 debugging information generated and forwarded through the SRM including packets received, generated, and forwarded. The no debug ipv6 packet command turns off this debugging operation. The detail option displays more detailed IPV6 packet debugging.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

debug ipv6 packet [detail] no debug ipv6 packet [detail]
Command Default
Disabled
4-44
Release 5.2.1
Debug Commands
debug ipv6 tcp6

The debug ipv6 tcp6 command turns on debugging messages for all TCP6 based transactions. The no debug ipv6 tcp6 command turns off this debugging operation.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

debug ipv6 tcp6 no debug ipv6 tcp6
Command Default
Disabled
4-45
Release 5.2.1
debug ipv6 udp6

The debug ipv6 udp6 command turns on debugging messages for all UDP6 based transactions. The no debug ipv6 udp6 command turns off this debugging operation.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

debug ipv6 udp6 no debug ipv6 udp6
Command Default
Disabled
4-46
Release 5.2.1
Debug Commands
debug isis adj-packets

The debug isis adj packets command displays debug information on all adjacency-related activity such as hello packets sent and received and IS-IS adjacencies going up and down. The no debug isis adj packets command disables debugging output.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

debug isis adj packets no debug isis adj packets
Command Default
Disabled
4-47
Release 5.2.1
debug isis authentication

The debug isis authentication command turns on debugging messages for all IS-IS packet authentication. The no isis authentication command turns off this debugging operation.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

debug isis authentication no debug isis authentication
Command Default
Disabled
4-48
Release 5.2.1
Debug Commands
debug isis snp-packets

The debug isis snp-packets command turns on debugging messages for all IS-IS CSNP/PSNP packets. The no isis snp-packets command turns off this debugging operation.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

debug isis snp-packets no debug isis snp-packets
Command Default
Disabled
4-49
Release 5.2.1
debug isis spf-event

The debug isis spf-events command turns on debugging messages for all IS-IS Shortest Path First Events. The no isis spf-events command turns off this debugging operation.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

debug isis spf-events no debug isis spf-events
Command Default
Disabled
4-50
Release 5.2.1
Debug Commands
debug isis spf-statistics

The debug isis spf-statistics command turns on debugging messages for all IS-IS shortest path first statistics. The no debug isis spf-statistics command turns off this debugging operation.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

debug isis spf-statistics no debug isis statistics
Command Default
Disabled
4-51
Release 5.2.1
debug isis spf-triggers

The debug isis spf-triggers command turns on debugging messages for all IS-IS SPF triggering events. The no debug isis spf-triggers command turns off this debugging operation.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

debug isis spf-triggers no debug isis spf-triggers
Command Default
Disabled
4-52
Release 5.2.1
Debug Commands
debug isis update-packets

The debug isis update-packets command displays various sequence number protocol data units (PDUs) and link state packets that are detected by the BSR. The no debug isis update-packets command turns off this debugging operation.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

debug isis update-packets no debug isis update-packets
Command Default
Disabled
4-53
Release 5.2.1
debug mpls forwarding

The debug mpls forwarding command enables debugging for MPLS forwarding. The no debug mpls forwarding disables debugging for MPLS forwarding.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

debug mpls forwarding no debug mpls forwarding
4-54
Release 5.2.1
Debug Commands
debug mpls rsvp

The debug mpls rsvp command enables various debugging functions for MPLS RSVP protocol messages. The no debug mpls rsvp command disables debugging for MPLS RSVP protocol messages.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

debug mpls rsvp {all | path | resv | ptear | rtear | error} no debug mpls rsvp {all | path | resv | ptear | rtear | error}
Command Syntax
all path debug all MPLS RSVP protocol messages debug MPLS RSVP protocol Path messages each sender transmits Path messages downstream along the routes provided by the unicast and multicast routing protocols debug MPLS RSVP protocol Resv messages each receiver sends reservation request (Resv) messages upstream toward senders and sender applications and follow the reverse route of Path messages debug MPLS RSVP protocol PathTear messages - PathTear messages remove path states and dependent reservation states in any routers along a path and follow the same route as Path messages.
resv
ptear
4-55
Release 5.2.1
rtear
debug MPLS RSVP protocol ResvTear messages - ResvTear messages remove reservation states along a path and travel upstream toward senders of the session debug MPLS RSVP protocol PathErr and ResvErr error messages
error
4-56
Release 5.2.1
Debug Commands
debug nd
The debug nd command turns on debugging messages for all Neighbor Discovery (ND) functions. The no debug nd command turns off this debugging operation.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

debug nd [dad | error | na | ns | nud | ra | rs] no debug nd [dad | error | na | ns | nud | ra | rs]
Command Syntax
dad error na ns nud ra rs debug duplicate address detection debug error messages debug neighbor advertisement messages debug neighbor solicitation messages debug neighbor unreachablily detection debug router advertisement messages debug router advertisement solicitation messages
Command Default
Disabled
4-57
Release 5.2.1
debug packet-cable
The debug packet-cable command enables Packet Cable debugging. The no debug packet-cable command disables debugging output.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

debug packet-cable {gate | trace [cops | em]} no debug packet-cable {gate | trace [cops | em]}
Command Syntax
gate trace trace cops displays DQoS and Multimedia gate state transition information enable packet trace enables COPS packet trace - dumps COPS messages in hexidecimal format to the console enable Event Message PCES packet trace dumps event messages in hexidecimal format to the console
trace em
Command Default
Disabled
4-58
Release 5.2.1
Debug Commands
debug ppp fsm

The debug ppp fsm command turns debugging on for the PPP finite state machine (FSM). The no debug ppp fsm command turns off PPP FSM debugging.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

debug ppp fsm no debug ppp fsm
Command Default
Disabled
4-59
Release 5.2.1
debug ppp packet

The debug ppp packet command displays PPP packets being transmitted and received. The no debug ppp packet command turns off PPP debugging. The debug ppp packet command to displays low-level packet dumps and is useful in identifying the following information and error conditions:
Network Control Protocols (NCPs) that are supported on either end of a PPP connection any loops that might exist in a PPP internetwork nodes that are (or are not) properly negotiating PPP connections errors that have occurred over the PPP connection
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

debug ppp packet no debug ppp packet
Command Default
Disabled
4-60
Release 5.2.1
Debug Commands
debug radius
The debug radius command displays RADIUS client authentication transactions. The no debug radius command turns off RADIUS debugging.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

debug radius no debug radius
4-61
Release 5.2.1
debug snmp
The debug snmp command display detailed information about every SNMP packet transmitted or received by the BSR 64000. The no debug snmp command turns off SNMP debugging.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
All modes
Command Line Usage

debug snmp {headers | packets} no debug snmp {headers | packets}
Command Syntax
headers packets display SNMP packet headers display SNMP packets
Command Default
Disabled
4-62
Release 5.2.1
Debug Commands
debug sntp
The debug sntp command displays information on Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) activity. The no debug sntp command turns off SNTP debugging.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

debug sntp no debug sntp
4-63
Release 5.2.1
debug specmgr
The debug specmgr command enables the display of spectrum management debugging messages. The command output displays a time stamp, the error rate, the number of word errors, total word count, and the upstream noise power level in one-tenth of a dBmV. The no debug specmgr stops displaying spectrum management debugging messages.
Note: The debug cable reg command is supported on the 2:8, and 2:8 (2.0) CMTS modules.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

debug specmgr [cable <X/Y> [ upstream <NUM>]] no debug specmgr [cable <X/Y> [ upstream <NUM>]]
Command Syntax
cable X/Y upstream NUM display cable information the slot and MAC Domain number of the CMTS module display upstream information upstream port number
4-64
Release 5.2.1
Debug Commands
debug ssh
The debug ssh command enables debugging for SSH. The no debug ssh command turns SSH debugging off.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

debug ssh [verbose] no debug ssh [verbose]
Command Syntax
verbose display detailed SSH debug information
4-65
Release 5.2.1
debug tacacs
The debug tacacs command displays debug information associated with TACACS+ Client operations.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

debug tacacs
4-66
Release 5.2.1
Debug Commands
debug tacacs events

The debug tacacs events command displays debug information related to TACACS+ server events generated as a result of interaction with a client. This command can produce substantial amount of output on the console. The debug tacacs events command is generally used as a tool to collect data to analyze a problem reported by users.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

debug tacacs events
4-67
Release 5.2.1
debug task monitor

The debug task monitor command enables task-based debugging through the Task Monitor. The Task Monitor monitors task resource contention. The no debug task monitor command disables debugging output. The Task Monitor operates in two modes: background and foreground. In both modes it monitors the amount of available memory (for SRM only and only if configured) and performs reboot or switchover to a redundant SRM if the amount of available memory falls below the configured threshold.The background mode is the default mode of operation for all boards and the Task Monitor will run on all boards after boot. The foreground mode is used for debugging purposes. In background mode the Task Monitor checks to see if there has been ICP activity on the board during the configured delay-interval. If ICP activity has been detected, no other checking is done. Otherwise it checks to see if there have been non-zero idle ticks. If there have been non-zero idle ticks, the checking is done. Otherwise it displays brief information about all tasks that consumed non-zero CPU ticks during the previous delay-interval, and detailed information about tasks that consumed the maximum number of CPU ticks. If such tasks consumed more than 99% of the CPU ticks and suspension of such tasks has been requested with the Ctrl-@ key sequence, and suspension of such tasks is permitted, then those tasks will be suspended. Note: The following tasks are never suspended: tRDNc, tExcTask, tShell, TaskMon, ctrlMon, DiagTask, tNetTask and all telnet tasks. Also note that the Ctrl-@ request will be canceled if no task consumed more than 99% of the CPU ticks during the delay-interval. The following applies only to the background mode on active SRM. If the same task consumed more than threshold-percent of CPU time within the threshold-interval during consecutive checks and suspend-task has been requested and suspension of such task is permitted, then those tasks will be suspended. If the switchover-reboot has been requested, then the SRM will be rebooted if there is no running redundant SRM, or switched over otherwise.
4-68
Release 5.2.1
Debug Commands
In foreground mode the Task Monitor checks to see if idle ticks have fallen below the idle-trigger value. If so, it will display detailed information about all tasks that consumed non-zero CPU ticks during the delay-interval. If one of the tasks consumed more than 99% of the CPU ticks and suspension of such task has been requested with Ctrl-@ key, and suspension of such task is permitted, then that task will be suspended. In foreground mode the Task Monitor performs its checks during num-times delay-intervals and after that will automatically revert to the background mode of operation.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

debug task monitor {<NUM>| all} background [delay-interval <1-86400> | mem-switchover <0-1> | registers | suspend-task | switchover-reboot <0-1> | threshold-interval <10-3600> | threshold-mem-low <0-128000000> | threshold-percent <50-100>] debug task monitor {<NUM>| all} [delay-interval <1-86400> | idle-trigger <1-100>| num-times <1-24000> | registers] no debug task monitor {<NUM>| all}
Command Syntax
NUM all background run Task Monitor for the specified slot number run Task Monitor for all operational slots run Task Monitor in the background
delay-interval 1-86400 the number of seconds between data collection intervals
4-69
Release 5.2.1
mem-switchover 0-1
If system memory falls below the value specified by the threshold-mem-low parameter on the SRM, then switch-over or reboot and switch-over. Display registers for running tasks Suspend task if it consumes more than the percentage of CPU time specified by the threshold-percent parameter during the time interval specified by the threshold-interval parameter. If a single task consumes more than the percentage of CPU time specified by the threshold-percent parameter during the time interval specified by the threshold-interval parameter, switchover to redundant SRM if it is available, otherwise reboot. Time interval in seconds during which if a single task spends more than the percentage of CPU time specified by the threshold-percent parameter, special actions will be taken depending on the values of the suspend-task and switchover-reboot parameters. If the memory on the primary SRM falls below the set amount, a reboot and/or switch-over will be initiated. The frequency of this check is in accordance with the task monitor threshold-interval. If a single task consumes more than this value of CPU time during the time interval specified by the threshold-interval parameter, special actions will be taken depending on the values of the suspend-task and switchover-reboot parameters.
registers suspend-task
switchover-reboot 0-1
threshold-interval 10-3600
threshold-mem-low 0-128000000
threshold-percent 50-100
4-70
Release 5.2.1
Debug Commands
delay-interval 1-86400 the number of seconds between data collection intervals idle-trigger 1-100 the idle-trigger percentage - Task Monitor displays running tasks if the idle tick percentage is less than or equal to the specified idle-trigger percentage the number of times to run Task Monitor display registers for running tasks
num-times 1-24000 registers
Command Default Values

Task Monitor is running in background mode for all boards delay-interval = 20 seconds for the SRM, 5 seconds for all other modules mem-switchover = do both (switch-over, then reboot and switch-over) registers = no display suspend-task = no switchover-reboot = yes threshold-interval = 180 seconds threshold-mem-low = 16000000 bytes threshold-percent = 99 percent idle-trigger = 10 percent
4-71
Release 5.2.1
debug tunnel
The debug tunnel command displays IP-in-IP encapsulated packets as they are transmitted and received on a tunnel interface in real time and displays debugging information on the tunnel interface. The no debug tunnel command turns off tunnel debugging.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

debug tunnel no debug tunnel
Command Default
Disabled
4-72
Release 5.2.1
Debug Commands
show debugging
The show debugging command displays enabled debugging operations and other types of debugging functions on the system.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show debugging [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show debugging [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
4-73
Release 5.2.1
undebug all
The undebug all command disables all debugging functions on the system.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

undebug all
4-74
5
Introduction
This chapter describes the access list commands used with the BSR 64000. Access lists are used on the BSR to control entry or exit access to or from the BSR. Access lists are also used within a route-map statement that is part of the routing configuration. Access lists can be configured for all routed network protocols to filter packets as the packets pass through the BSR. The access list criteria can be defined by the source or the destination address, upper-layer protocol, or other routing information. There are many reasons to configure access lists including to restrict contents of routing updates or to provide traffic flow control. One of the most important reasons to configure access lists is to provide a basic level of security on the network. All packets passing through the BSR can be allowed onto all parts of the network if an access list is not part of the router configuration.
Access List Command Descriptions

This section contains an alphabetized list and descriptions of the access list commands supported by the BSR.
5-1
Release 5.2.1
access-class in
The access-list in command filters incoming connections based on an IP access list. The no access-class command disables incoming connection filtering.
Group Access
Command Mode
Gloval Configuration
Command Line Usage

access-class {<1-99> | <1300-1999>} in no access-class
Command Syntax
1-99 1300-1999 the IP access-list number the IP access-list number (expanded range)
5-2
Release 5.2.1
access-list (standard)
The standard access-list command defines a standard access list to configure and control the flow of routing information and traffic by matching a packet with a permit or deny result. The no access-list command deletes the access-list. Use the access-list command to restrict routing update information; control the transmission of packets on an interface, or control virtual terminal line access.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

access-list <1-99> <1300-1999> {deny | permit} {<A.B.C.D> [<A.B.C.D>] | any | host <A.B.C.D>} no access-list <1-99> <1300-1999>
Command Syntax
1-99 1300-1999 deny permit A.B.C.D A.B.C.D any host A.B.C.D standard access list standard IP access list (expanded range) deny access if conditions are matched permit access if conditions are matched address to match wildcard bits any source host a single source host
5-3
Release 5.2.1
access-list (extended)
The extended access-list command defines an extended access list to configure and control the flow of routing information and network traffic by matching a packet with a permit or deny result. The no access-list command deletes the access-list. Use the access-list command to restrict routing update information, control the transmission of packets on an interface, or control virtual terminal line access.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

To configure an extended access list for AHP, ESP, GRE, IP, IPINIP, OSPF, PCP, and PIM, use the following command: access-list <100-199> <2000-2699> {deny | permit} {<0-255> | ahp | esp | gre | ip | ipinip | ospf | pcp | pim} {<A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D> | any | host <A.B.C.D>} {<A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D> | any | host <A.B.C.D>} To configure an extended access list for ICMP, use the following command: access-list <100-199> <2000-2699> {deny | permit} icmp {<A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D> | any | host <A.B.C.D>} {<A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D> | any | host <A.B.C.D>} [<0-255> | administratively-prohibited | alternate-address | diff-serv <0-63> | dod-host-prohibited | dod-net-prohibited | echo | echo-reply | fragments [diff-serv <0-63>] | general-parameter-problem | host-isolated | host-precedence-unreachable | host-redirect | host-tos-redirect | host-tos-unreachable | host-unknown | host-unreachable | information-reply | information-request | mask-reply | mask-request | net-redirect | net-tos-redirect | net-tos-unreachable | net-unreachable | network-unknown | no-room-for-option | option-missing | packet-too-big | parameter-problem | port-unreachable | precedence-unreachable | protocol-unreachable | reassembly-timeout | redirect | router-advertisement | router-solicitation | source-quench | source-route-failed | time-exceeded | timestamp-reply | timestamp-request | ttl-exceeded | unreachable] To configure an extended access list for IGMP, use the following command:
5-4
Release 5.2.1
access-list <100-199> <2000-2699> {deny | permit} igmp {<A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D> | any | host <A.B.C.D>} {<A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D> | any | host <A.B.C.D>} [<0-255> | diff-serv <0-63> | dvmrp | fragments [diff-serv <0-63>] | host-query | host-report | pim ] To configure an extended access list for TCP, use the following command: access-list <100-199> <2000-2699> {deny | permit} tcp {<A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D> | any | host <A.B.C.D>} {<A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D> | any | eq | gt | host <A.B.C.D> | lt | neq | range} [diff-serv <0-63> | <0-65535> | bgp | chargen | cmd | daytime | discard | domain | echo | exec | finger | fragments [diff-serv <0-63>] | ftp | ftp-data | gopher | hostname | ident | irc | klogin | kshell | login | lpd | nntp | pim-auto-rp | pop2 | pop3 | smtp | sunrpc | talk | telnet | time | uucp | whois | www] To configure an extended access list for UDP, use the following command: access-list <100-199> <2000-2699> {deny | permit} udp {<A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D> | any | host <A.B.C.D>} {<A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D> | any | eq | gt | host <A.B.C.D> | lt | neq | range} [diff-serv <0-63> | <0-65535> | biff | bootpc | discard | domain | echo | fragments [diff-serv <0-63>] | mobile-ip | netbios-dgm | netbios-ns | netbios-ss | ntp | pim-auto-rp | rip | snmp | snmptrap | sunrpc | syslog | talk | tftp | time | who | xdmcp] To remove an access list, use the following command: no access-list <100-199> <2000-2699>
Command Syntax
100-199 2000-2699 deny permit Extended access list. Extended IP access list (expanded range). deny access if conditions are matched. Permit access if conditions are matched.
5-5
Release 5.2.1
Name or number of an IP protocol. 0-255 ahp esp gre icmp igmp ip ipinip ospf pcp pim tcp udp vrrp A.B.C.D A.B.C.D any host A.B.C.D A.B.C.D A.B.C.D any host A.B.C.D The number of an IP protocol. Authentication Header Protocol (51) Encapsulation Security Payload (50) General Routing Encapsulation (47) Internet Control Message Protocol (1) Internet Group Management Protocol (2) Any Internet protocol (0) IP in IP tunneling (4) OSPF routing protocol (89) Payload Compression Protocol (108) Protocol Independent Multicast (103 Transmission Control Protocol (6) User Datagram Protocol (17) Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (112) source address source wildcard bits any source host a single source host destination address destination wildcard bits any destination host a single destination host
5-6
Release 5.2.1
Filter ICMP packets by message type number (0-255) or message type name. 0-255 administratively-prohibited alternate-address diff-serv <0-63> dod-host-prohibited dod-net-prohibited echo echo-reply fragments general-parameter-problem host-isolated host-precedence-unreachable host-redirect host-tos-redirect host-tos-unreachable host-unknown host-unreachable information-reply information-request mask-reply mask-request net-redirect net-tos-redirect net-tos-unreachable net-unreachable network-unknown no-room-for-option option-missing packet-too-big parameter-problem port-unreachable Filter by message type number. Administrativelyprohibited Alternate address Diff-Serv Code Point Host prohibited Network prohibited Echo - ping Echo reply Check non-initial fragments Parameter problem Host isolated Host unreachable for precedence Host redirect Host redirect for TOS Host unreachable for TOS Host unknown Host unreachable Information replies Information requests Mask replies Mask requests Network redirect Network redirect for TOS Network unreachable for TOS Network unreachable Network unknown Parameter required but no room Parameter required but not present Fragmentation needed and DF set All parameter problems Port unreachable
5-7
Release 5.2.1
precedence-unreachable protocol-unreachable reassembly-timeout redirect router-advertisement router-solicitation source-quench source-route-failed time-exceeded timestamp-reply timestamp-request ttl-exceeded unreachable Filter IGMP packets by message type number (0-255) or message type name. 0-255 diff-serv dvmrp fragments host-query host-report pim Only match packets on a TCP or UDP port number or range of port numbers. eq gt lt neq range
Precedence cutoff Protocol unreachable Reassembly timeout All redirects Router discovery advertisements Router discovery solicitations Source quenches Source route failed All time exceededs Timestamp replies Timestamp requests TTL exceeded All unreachables
Filter by message type number. Diff-Serv Code Point Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol (0x13) Check non-initial fragments Host query (0x11) Host report (0x12) Protocol Independent Multicast (0x14)
Match only packets on a given port number. Match only packets with a greater port number. Match only packets with a lower port number. Match only packets not on a given port number. Match only packets in a range of port numbers.
5-8
Release 5.2.1
0-65535 bgp chargen cmd daytime discard domain echo exec fragments finger ftp ftp-data gopher hostname ident irc klogin kshell login lpd nntp pim-auto-rp pop2 pop3
A TCP port number. Border Gateway Protocol (179) Character generator (19) Remote commands - rcmd (514) Daytime (13) Discard (9) Domain Name Service (53) Echo (7) Exec - rsh (512) Check non-initial fragments Finger (79) File Transfer Protocol (21) File Transfer [Default Data] (20) Gopher (70) NIC hostname server (101) Authentication Service (113) Internet Relay Chat (194 Kerberos login (543) Kerberos shell (544) Login - rlogin (513) Printer service (515) Network News Transport Protocol (119) PIM Auto-RP (496) Post Office Protocol v2 (109) Post Office Protocol v3 (110)
5-9
Release 5.2.1
smtp sunrpc talk telnet time uucp whois www
Simple Mail Transport Protocol (25) Sun Remote Procedure Call (111) Talk (517) Telnet (23) Time (37) Unix-to-Unix Copy Program (540) Nickname (43) World Wide Web - HTTP (80)
5-10
Release 5.2.1
The number or name of a UDP port. 0-65535 biff bootpc bootps discard domain echo fragments mobile-ip netbios-dgm netbios-ns netbios-ss ntp pim-auto-rp rip snmp snmptrap sunrpc syslog talk tftp time who xdmcp A UDP port number. Biff - mail notification (512) Bootstrap Protocol Client (68) Bootstrap Protocol Server (67) Discard (9) Domain Name Service (53) Echo (7) Check non-initial fragments Mobile IP registration (434) NetBios Datagram Service (138) NetBios Name Service (137) NetBios Session Service (139) Network Time Protocol (123) PIM Auto-RP (496) Routing Information Protocol (520) Simple Network Management Protocol (161) SNMP Traps (162) Sun Remote Procedure Call (111) Syslog (514) Talk (517) Trivial File Transfer Protocol (69) Time (37) Who service - rwho (513) X Display Manager Control Protocol (177)
5-11
Release 5.2.1
ip access-group
Use the ip access-group command to assign an access list to an interface and determine if the interface accepts inbound or outbound packets, or both from this access list. The no ip access-group command removes the access list or disables inbound or outbound packets.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip access-group <1-199> <1300-2699> {in | out} no ip access-group <1-199> <1300-2699> {in | out}
Command Syntax
1-199 1300-2699 in out access list number access list number (expanded range) inbound packets outbound packets
5-12
Release 5.2.1
ip access-list
The ip access-list command adds a standard or extended access-list entry. The no ip access-list command removes the entry.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip access-list {standard <1-99> | extended <100-199>} no ip access-list {standard <1-99> | extended <100-199>}
Command Syntax
standard 1-99 extended 100-199 standard access list number extended access list number
5-13
Release 5.2.1
show access-lists
The show access-lists command displays an access list, or all access lists, without displaying the entire configuration file. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show access-lists command:
Standard IP access list 10 deny host 150.31.91.71 permit any Extended IP access list 113 permit tcp any lt 200 any
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show access-lists [<1-199> <1300-2699>] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show access-lists [<1-199> <1300-2699>] [ | {count | count-only}]
5-14
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
1-199 1300-2699 | begin exclude include WORD count count-only access list number access list number (expanded range) turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
Command Default
All access lists are displayed.
5-15
6
Introduction
This chapter contains the Routing Policy and Policy-Based Routing commands used with the BSR 64000. Routing Policy allows the control of information that is imported from or exported into different routing domains or Autonomous Systems (AS). BSR Routing Policy allows the filtering and altering of routing information so that some of them can be advertised to other routers. The BSR Routing Policy is quite versatile and flexible. The BSR also supports Policy-based routing. Policy-based routing uses sets of rules that define the criteria for obtaining specific routing paths for different users to give some users better-routed Internet connections than others. Policy-based routing is established by the source information of the packets, rather than the destination information that traditional routing protocols use. The network administrator determines and implements routing policies to allow or deny router paths.
Routing Policy Command Descriptions

This section contains an alphabetized list and descriptions of the routing policy commands supported by the BSR.
6-1
Release 5.2.1
default-information originate
The default-information originate command injects the default network in a routing domain such as Border Gateway Protocol (BGP).The no default-information originate command disables the default network redistribution in the routing domain. The network 0.0.0.0 command in Router Configuration mode performs the same function as the default-information originate command. In the Routing Information Protocol (RIP) the metric is always set to 1. In BGP, the default route needs to exist in the BGP routing database. BGP uses the metric associated with the default entry in its database.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

default-information originate [always] [metric <0-16777214>] [metric-type <1-2>] no default-default-information originate [always] [metric <0-16777214>] [metric-type <1-2>]
Command Syntax
originate software generates a default external route into an Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) domain to propagate another route if a default route exists advertises the default route even when the default route does not exist (OSPF only) metric for generating the default route, default is 1 if no metric-value value specified (OSPF only) 1- external type 1 (OSPF only) 2- external type 2 (OSPF only)
always metric 0-16777214
metric-type 1-2
6-2
Release 5.2.1
Command Default
Disabled
6-3
Release 5.2.1
default-metric
The default-metric command sets the default metric value for redistribution of routes from one domain into another. The no default-metric command removes the set default value for metric. Use the default-metric command with the redistribute command to enforce the same metric value for all redistributed routes.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

default-metric <1-4294967295> no default-metric [<1-4294967295>]
Command Syntax
1-4294967295 default metric value; the range of values depends on the routing protocol for which this is configured; for RIP 1 to 16, OSPF from 1 to 16777214, and BGP from 1 to 4294967295
Command Default
A built-in automatic metric translation for each routing protocol
6-4
Release 5.2.1
ip local policy route-map

The ip local policy route-map command enables local policy routing for a specified route map. The no ip local policy route-map command disables local policy routing for a specified route map.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip local policy route-map <WORD> no ip local policy route-map <WORD>
Command Syntax
WORD the route map name
6-5
Release 5.2.1
ip policy route-map
The ip policy route-map command identifies the route-map used on an interface to perform policy-based routing. The no ip policy route-map command removes the route-map on an interface, and disables policy-based routing on that interface. Use the ip policy route-map command for paths other than the shortest path. This command has associated match and set commands: match commands specify policy routing rules, set commands perform tasks
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip policy route-map <WORD> no ip policy route-map <WORD>
Command Syntax
WORD route-map name that must match a specified map tag
Command Default
No policy routing
6-6
Release 5.2.1
match as-path
The match as-path command matches a BGP autonomous system path access list to a match entry or appends new list numbers to the existing match entry. The no match as-path command removes the list numbers from the match entry used in the command. Use the match as-path command to match at least one BGP autonomous system path to ensure advertisement on the route-map. Values can be set using the match as-path command. Use the match as-path command to globally replace values matched and set with the match as-path command and the set weight command to supersede weights established with the neighbor weight and the neighbor filter-list commands. The values set by the match and set commands override global values. For example, the weights assigned with the match as-path and set weight route-map commands override the weights assigned using the neighbor weight and neighbor filter-list commands. The implemented weight is established by the initial autonomous system match.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Route Map Configuration
Command Line Usage

match as-path [<1-199>]
no match as-path [<1-199>]

Command Syntax
1-199 as-path list number - you can specify a
single number or multiple numbers separated by a space
6-7
Release 5.2.1
match community
The match community command creates a BGP autonomous system community access list match entry or appends new list numbers to the existing match entry. The no match community command removes the match entry completely. The no match community command removes the list numbers or the exact-match attribute from the match entry. Use the match community-list command to ensure that the route is advertised for outbound and inbound route-maps. If a change to some of the information is to match is needed, configure a second route-map with specifics.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

match community [<1-99> | <100-199> | exact-match] no match community [<1-99> | <100-199> | exact-match]
Command Syntax
1-99 100-199 exact-match standard community list number extended community list number exact match required; all of the communities and only those communities in the community list must be present
6-8
Release 5.2.1
match ip address
The match ip address command matches the destination and source IP address or other fields of the IP header on packets with a standard or extended access list allocated. The no match ip address command disables policy routing on packets. This command can also be used for filtering routes based on the destination network of the route. Use the match ip address command to match any routes that have a source network number and a destination network number address that a standard or extended access list permits. To match both source and destination numbers, use an extended access list. The match ip address command can also be used to filter routing information.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

match ip address [<1-199> | <1300-2699>] no match ip address [<1-199> | <1300-2699>]
Command Syntax
1-199 1300-2699 standard access list number extended access list number
6-9
Release 5.2.1
match ip next-hop
The match ip next-hop command establishes the condition for the next hop IP address of a route to match against the specified access lists. The no match ip next-hop command removes the access-list from the match condition. Use the match ip next-hop command to match any routes that have a next-hop router address permitted one of the specified access lists.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

match ip next-hop [<1-199> | <1300-2699>] no match ip next-hop [<1-199> | <1300-2699>]
Command Syntax
6-10
Release 5.2.1
match ip route-source
The match ip route-source command specifies match conditions for the source IP address of a route to match against the specified address list(s). The no match ip route-source command removes access lists from such a match statement. The match ip route-source command is used to match routes where source IP addresses are permitted by specified access lists.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

match ip route-source [<1-199> | <1300-2699>] no match ip route-source [<1-199> | <1300-2699>]
Command Syntax
6-11
Release 5.2.1
match metric
The match metric command matches routes imported or otherwise with specified metric value. The no match metric command disables matching imported routes with specified metric values. Use the match metric command to match a route for the specified metric value(s).
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

match metric [<0-4294967295>] no match metric [<0-4294967295>]
Command Syntax
0-4294967295 metric value
6-12
Release 5.2.1
match route-type external

The match route-type external command is used to match the type of OSPF routes. The no match route-type external clears the match condition.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

match route-type external [level-1 | level-2 | type-1 | type-2] no match route-type external [level-1 | level-2 | type-1 | type-2]
Command Syntax
type-1 type-2 level-1 level-2 matches only type 1 external route (OSPF) matches only type 2 external route (OSPF) IS-IS level-1 route IS-IS level-2 route
6-13
Release 5.2.1
match route-type internal

The match route-type internal command matches and redistributes OSPF routes of an internal type. The no match route-type internal command clears the condition.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

match route-type internal [level-1 | level-2] no match route-type internal [level-1 | level-2]
Command Syntax
level-1 level-2 IS-IS level-1 route IS-IS level-2 route
6-14
Release 5.2.1
match tag
The match tag command redistributes routes in the routing table that match a specified tag value. Use the no match tag command to disable redistributing routes in the routing table that match a specified tag.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

match tag [<0-4294967295>] no match tag
Command Syntax
0-4294967295 tag value
6-15
Release 5.2.1
route-map
The route-map command defines the conditions for redistributing routes from one protocol to another, or to configure routing policies. The no route-map command removes some or all of the instances of the route map. Use the route-map command and the match and set commands, to define the conditions for redistributing routes from one routing protocol into another, or for accepting routes from a neighboring router. Each route-map command has an associated list of match and set commands. The match commands specify the conditions under which redistribution is allowed for the current route-map command. The set commands specify the particular redistribution set actions to perform if the criteria enforced by the match commands are met. When all match criteria are met, all set actions are performed. The no route-map command deletes the route-map, or an instance.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

route-map <WORD> [permit | deny] [0-65535] no route-map <WORD> [permit | deny] [0-65535]
6-16
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
WORD permit tag name, more than one instance of the route-map can share name distributes route as controlled by set actions when permit is specified and the match criteria are met, the route is specified by the specific actions distributes route as controlled by set actions, if criteria not met, route not distributed position a new instance will have in the list of route-map instances already established with the same map name.
deny 0-65535
6-17
Release 5.2.1
set as-path prepend

The set as-path prepend command modifies AS system path attributes for the matched BGP routes. The no set as-path prepend command ends modification of a system path for BGP routes. Use the set as-path prepend command to guide the path information to control the BGP decision process.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

set as-path prepend <1-65535> [...<1-65535>] no set as-path prepend <1-65535> [...<1-65535>]
Command Syntax
1-65535 prepend string - you can specify a single
number or multiple numbers separated by a space
6-18
Release 5.2.1
set automatic-tag
The set automatic-tag command enables the automatic computing of tag values. The no set automatic-tag command disables the automatic computing of tag values.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

set automatic-tag no set automatic-tag
6-19
Release 5.2.1
set comm-list
The set comm-list command deletes communities from the community attribute of an inbound or outbound update. The no set comm-list command deletes the entry. Use the set comm-list command to delete communities from the community attribute of inbound or outbound updates using a route map to filter and determine the communities to be deleted. If the standard list is referred in the set comm-list delete command, only the elements with the single community number or no community number in them will be used. All others will be quietly ignored. Any element specified with the 'internet' keyword is equivalent to element without community number. If the set community comm and set comm-list list-num delete commands are configured in the same sequence of a route-map attribute, the deletion operation (set comm-list list-num delete) is performed before the set operation (set community comm). Note: If the set community and set comm-list delete commands are configured in the same sequence of a route-map attribute, the deletion operation (set comm-list delete) is performed before the set operation (set community).
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

set comm-list {<1-99> | <100-199>} delete no set comm-list {<1-99> | <100-199>} delete
Command Syntax
1-99 standard community list number
6-20
Release 5.2.1
100-199 delete
extended community list number delete inbound or outbound communities from the community attribute
6-21
Release 5.2.1
set community
The set community command adds or replaces communities from the community attribute of an inbound or outbound update. Use the no set community command removes the specified communities from the set. Use the route-map command, and the match and set commands to configure the rules for redistributing routes from one routing protocol to another. Each route-map command has a list of match and set commands associated with it. The match commands specify the match criteria, which are the conditions under which redistribution is allowed for the current route-map command. The set commands specify the set actions, the particular redistribution actions to perform if the criteria enforced by the match commands are met. The no route-map command deletes the route map. Note: The communities could be specified as numbers; the result will be the same; none removes community attribute from the update unless additive is specified for the set entry. In this case it doesn't modify update community attributes. In other words, the no set community command, if the entry had some community numbers in it before removal, and as the result of the removal no numbers are left, then the entry itself is deleted. The command set community none removes all community numbers from set entry, if any, but leaves the value of the additive attribute intact.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Route-map Configuration
Command Line Usage

set community {<1-4294967295> | local-AS | no-advertise | no-export | additive | none} no set community {<1-4294967295> | local-AS | no-advertise | no-export | additive | none}
6-22
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
1-4294967295 additive local-AS no-advertise no-export community number add to the existing community do not advertise this route to peers outside of the local autonomous system do not advertise this route to any peer internal or external routes with this community are sent to peers in other sub-autonomous systems within a confederation no community attribute
none
6-23
Release 5.2.1
set default interface

The set default interface command sets a default output interface for a packet in the default destination-based routing process. The no set default interface command disables this function.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

set default interface {null0 | pos <X/Y> | tunnel <0-255>} no set default interface {null0 | pos <X/Y> | tunnel <0-255>}
Command Syntax
null0 pos X/Y tunnel 0-255 forces packets to be dropped and not routed to the default destination-based routing process the POS interface slot and port number the tunnel interface number
Command Default
Disabled
6-24
Release 5.2.1
set interface
The set interface command sets the output interface for a packet in the destination-based routing process. The no set interface command disables this function.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

set interface {null0 | pos <X/Y> | tunnel <0-255>} no set interface {null0 | pos <X/Y> | tunnel <0-255>}
Command Syntax
null0 sets the last entry in the interface list to force packets to be dropped and not routed to the default destination-based routing process the POS interface slot and port number the tunnel interface number
pos X/Y tunnel 0-255
Command Default
Disabled
6-25
Release 5.2.1
set ip default next-hop

The set ip default next-hop command specifies a default next hop IP address that indicates where the BSR sends packets that pass a match clause in a route map for policy routing but have no route to the destination. The no set ip default next-hop removes the default next hop IP address. Note: The presence of a default route in the routing table will ensure that destination-based forwarding will always be applied and policy will be ignored.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

set ip default next-hop <A.B.C.D> no set ip default next-hop <A.B.C.D>
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D the IP address of the next hop
6-26
Release 5.2.1
set ip diff-serv
The set ip diff-serv command assigns a differentiated service value which is placed in the IP packet header that determines which packets are given transmission priority. When these packets are received by another router, they are transmitted based on the precedence value. A higher precedence value indicates a higher priority. The no set ip diff-serv command disables assigning a differentiated service value.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

set ip diff-serv <0-63> no set ip diff-serv [<0-63>]
Command Syntax
0-63 IP packet precedence value.
The following table describes the number and name values for IP Precedence: Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Name routine priority immediate flash flash-override critical internet network
6-27
Release 5.2.1
Command Default
0
6-28
Release 5.2.1
set ip next-hop
The set ip next-hop command establishes a next-hop IP address for the AS path. The no ip next-hop command deletes the entry. Use the ip policy route-map interface configuration command, the route-map global configuration command, and the match and set route-map configuration commands, to define the conditions for policy routing packets. The ip policy route-map command identifies a route map by name. Each route-map command has a list of match and set commands associated with it. The match commands specify the match criteria---the conditions under which policy routing occurs. The set commands specify the set actions---the particular routing actions to perform if the criteria enforced by the match commands are met. If the interface associated with the first next hop specified with the set ip next-hop command is down, the optionally specified IP addresses are tried in turn.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

set ip next-hop <A.B.C.D> no set ip next-hop
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D IP address of the next hop to which packets are output; address of the adjacent router
Command Default
Disabled
6-29
Release 5.2.1
set ip qos queue

The set ip qos queue command specifies Quality Of Service (QoS) queue number.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

set ip qos queue <0-7>
Command Syntax
0-7 the QoS queue number
6-30
Release 5.2.1
set local-preference
The set-local preference command establishes a preference value for the AS system path. Use the set local-preference command to send the local-preference to all routers in the local autonomous system. Use the no set-local preference form of this command to delete the entry.
Note: In the no set-local preference command, the optional <0-4294967295> argument has no effect.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

set local-preference <0-4294967295> no set local-preference <0-4294967295>
Command Syntax
0-4294967295 local preference value
6-31
Release 5.2.1
set metric
The set metric command sets the metric value for a routing protocol. The no set metric command changes the metric value for a routing protocol to the default value.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

set metric <0-4294967295> no set metric <0-4294967295>
Command Syntax
0-4294967295 metric value or bandwidth in Kbytes per second
Command Default
Metric value dynamically learned or a default value
6-32
Release 5.2.1
set metric-type
The set metric-type command sets the metric type for the destination routing protocol. The no set metric-type command disables the metric type set for the destination routing protocol. Use the route-map command to set the type of metric for the route imported by OSPF into its domain.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

set metric-type {external | internal | type-1 | type-2} no set metric-type {external | internal | type-1 | type-2}
Command Syntax
external internal type-1 type-2 IS-IS external metric use IGP metric as the MED for BGP OSPF external type 1 metric OSPF external type 2 metric
Command Default
Disabled
6-33
Release 5.2.1
set origin
The set origin command configures the conditions for redistributing routes from any protocol to any protocol. The no set origin command deletes the BGP origin code. When the set origin command configures redistributing routes from any protocol to any protocol, any match clause is necessary which includes pointing to a permit everything to set tags.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

set origin {egp | igp | incomplete} no set origin {egp | igp | incomplete}
Command Syntax
egp igp incomplete EGP remote IGP unknown history
6-34
Release 5.2.1
set tag
The set tag command sets the value of the destination routing protocol. The no set tag command removes the value. The route-map global configuration command and the match and set route-map configuration commands are used together to define the conditions for redistributing routes from one routing protocol into another. Each route-map command has a list of match and set commands associated with it. The match commands specify the conditions for redistribution for the current route-map command. The set commands specify the particular redistribution actions to perform if the criteria enforced by the match commands are met. The no route-map command deletes the route map.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

set tag <0-4294967295> no set tag <0-4294967295>
Command Syntax
0-4294967295 tag value
Command Default
if not specified, tag is forwarded to the new destination protocol
6-35
Release 5.2.1
set weight
The set-weight command to set the route weight on the network. The first autonomous system match determines the weight to be set. Use the set weight command to set the route weight on the network. The first AS match determines the weight to be set. The route with the highest weight is chosen as the choice route when multiple routes are available on the network. Weights spoken when an as path is matched, override any weight set by the neighbor command. Any match clause is necessary which includes pointing to a permit everything to set tags
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

set weight <0-65535> no set weight
Command Syntax
0-65535 weight value
6-36
Release 5.2.1
show ip redistribute
The show ip redistribute command displays the routing protocols that are being redistributed to other routing domains. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show ip redistribute command:
To ospf in ipv4 redistribute connected subnets
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip redistribute [bgp | ospf | rip] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show ip redistribute [bgp | ospf | rip] [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
bgp ospf rip | begin exclude displays routing domains redistributed into BGP displays routing domains redistributed into OSPF displays routing domains redistributed into RIP turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string
6-37
Release 5.2.1
6-38
Release 5.2.1
show ip traffic
The show ip traffic command displays the number of routing policy forwards and routing policy drops.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip traffic [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show ip traffic [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
6-39
Release 5.2.1
show route-map
The show route-map command displays configured route maps. The following displays typical screen output from the show route-map command:
route-map LOOPBACK2, permit, sequence 10 Match clauses: ip address (access-list): 100 Set clauses: ip next-hop 150.31.50.1 route-map TEST, permit, sequence 10 Match clauses: Set clauses: community 1:57920 route-map QOS, permit, sequence 1 Match clauses: ip address (access-list): 101 102 Set clauses: ip qos queue 1
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show route-map [<WORD>] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show route-map [<WORD>] [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
WORD the specified route-map
6-40
Release 5.2.1
turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
6-41
7
RIP Commands
Introduction
This chapter contains the Routing Information Protocol (RIP) commands used with the BSR 64000. RIP exchanges routing information to resolve routing errors. RIP coordinates routers on the network to broadcast their routing database periodically and determine the route with the least number of hops relative to the active routing table. Each hop determination message lists each destination with a distance in number of hops to the destination.
RIP Command Descriptions

This section contains an alphabetized list and descriptions of the RIP commands supported by the BSR.
7-1
Release 5.2.1
auto-summary
The auto-summary command restores automatic summarization of subnet routes into network-level routes. The no auto summary command disables automatic summarization. Note: RIP Version 1 always uses automatic summarization. RIP Version 2 when routing between disconnected subnets, requires automatic summarization to be off which is the default state.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

auto summary no auto summary
Command Default
Disabled
7-2
Release 5.2.1
RIP Commands
clear ip rip statistics

The clear ip rip statistics command clears all routes from the RIP routing table. This is the same route information displayed with the show ip rip database command.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

clear ip rip statistics
7-3
Release 5.2.1
The default-information originate command generates a default route into the RIP database. The no default-information originate command disables default route generation.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

default-information originate no default-information originate
Command Default
Disabled
7-4
Release 5.2.1
RIP Commands
default-metric
The default-metric command specifies a new RIP default metric value. The no metric command returns the metric value to the default. Use the default-metric command to set the current protocol to the same metric value for all distributed routes. The default-metric command is used with the redistribute command to obtain the same metric value for all distributed protocol-specific routes. Note: This command assures that metrics are compatible during route redistribution. The default metric delivers an alternate for successful distribution if the network metrics are not converted.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

default metric <1-16> no default metric <1-16>
Command Syntax
1-16 the metric value
Command Default
Automatic metric translations given for each routing protocol
7-5
Release 5.2.1
distance
The distance command sets the administrative distances for routes. The no distance command disables the administrative distance for routes.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

distance <1-255> no distance <1-255>
Command Syntax
1-255 administrative distance for setting routes
Command Default
120
7-6
Release 5.2.1
RIP Commands
distribute-list in
The distribute-list in command filters networks received in routing updates. The no distribute-list in command changes or cancels the filters received in updates.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

distribute-list <1-199> <1300-2699> in no distribute-list <1-199> <1300-2699> in
Command Syntax
1-199 1300-2699 in access list number extended access list number applies access list to incoming route updates
Command Default
Disabled
7-7
Release 5.2.1
distribute-list out
The distribute-list out command prevents networks from being advertised in updates. The no distribute-list out command enables update advertisements. Use the distribute-list out command to apply the access list to outgoing route updates.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

distribute-list <1-199> <1300-2699> out no distribute-list <1-199> <1300-2699> out
Command Syntax
1-199 1300-2699 out pre-defined access list number applies access list to outgoing route updates
Command Default
Disabled
7-8
Release 5.2.1
RIP Commands
graceful-restart-period
The graceful-restart-period command enables RIP graceful restart. Graceful restart allows a RIP router to stay on the forwarding path even as its RIP software is being restarted. As the graceful restart procedure executes, the RIP routing table is updated with recalculated route entries that replace older entries in the routng table which are marked with a replicated flag. RIP graceful restart has a configurable time period (in seconds) that must elapse before routing table updates are completed and entries with the replicated flag are flushed from the routing table and the Fast Path database. The no graceful-restart-period command disables RIP graceful restart.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Routing Configuration
Command Line Usage

graceful-restart-period <0-360> no graceful-restart-period <0-360>
Command Syntax
0-360 the time period, in seconds, for completion of RIP graceful restart following an SRM switchover
Command Default
180 seconds
7-9
Release 5.2.1
ip rip authentication key

The ip rip authentication key command enables RIP authentication on an interface by specifying a password or group of passwords that can be used on that interface. The no rip authentication key command deletes the associated password(s).
Note: Only RIP version 2 supports authentication.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip rip authentication key { 7 <WORD> | <Password>} no ip rip authentication key <Password>
Command Syntax
7 WORD Password specifies a that HIDDEN password will follow the ENCRYPTED password: 18-50 hex digits (even number of digits) a plain text password with a 16 character maximum
7-10
Release 5.2.1
RIP Commands
ip rip host-routes
The ip rip host-routes command enables sending or receiving host routes with RIP version 1 for an interface. The no ip rip host-routes command disables sending or receiving host routes with RIP version 1 for an interface.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip rip host-routes no ip rip host-routes
Command Default
Disabled
7-11
Release 5.2.1
ip rip message-digest-key md5

The ip rip message-digest-key command is used to configure a Message Digest 5 (MD5) Authentication key for a RIP V2 interface.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip rip message-digest-key <1-255> md5 {7 <WORD> | <WORD>} no ip rip message-digest-key <1-255> md5 {7 <WORD> | <WORD>}
Command Syntax
1-255 7 <WORD> WORD the range of numbers from which an MD5 secret Key ID can be selected specifies a hidden (encrypted) MD5 password will follow that is between 1-50 characters. MD5 password that is between 1-16 characters.
Note: A maximum of ten key IDs can be configured at the same time.
Command Default
Disabled
7-12
Release 5.2.1
RIP Commands
ip rip receive version

The ip rip receive version command configures an interface to only receive packets from a specific version of the RIP protocol. Use the ip rip receive version command to configure the interface to receive one or both RIP versions. The no ip rip receive version command resets the RIP protocol version to RIP version 1 and 2.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip rip receive version {0, 1, 2} no ip rip receive version {0, 1, 2}
Command Syntax
0 1 2 RIP version 1 and 2 RIP version 1 only RIP version 2 only
Command Default
0
7-13
Release 5.2.1
ip rip send version

The ip rip receive version command configures an interface to only transmit packets from a specific version of the RIP protocol. Use the ip rip receive version command to configure the interface to transmit one or both RIP versions. The no ip rip receive version command resets the RIP protocol version to RIP version 2.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip rip send version {0, 1, 2, 3} no ip rip send version {0, 1, 2, 3}
Command Syntax
0 1 2 3 RIP 2 compatible RIP version 1 only RIP version 2 only none
Command Default
2
7-14
Release 5.2.1
RIP Commands
ip split-horizon
The ip split-horizon command blocks route information from being advertised by a router out any interface from which that information originated. Enabling split-horizon optimizes communications among multiple routers, particularly when links are broken. The no ip split-horizon disables split-horizon.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip split-horizon no ip split-horizon
Command Default
Enabled
7-15
Release 5.2.1
maximum-paths
The maximum-paths command specifies the maximum number of parallel routes an IP routing protocol can support. The no maximum-paths command changes or cancels the number of maximum paths.
Group Access
RESTRICTED
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

maximum-paths <1-2> no maximum-paths
Command Syntax
1-2 the maximum number of parallel routes
7-16
Release 5.2.1
RIP Commands
network
The RIP version of the network command enables networks for the routing process. The no network command disables networks for the RIP routing process.
Note: If a network with RIP is not specified, the system does not advertise the network in any RIP routes.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

network <A.B.C.D> [<A.B.C.D>] no network <A.B.C.D [<A.B.C.D>]
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D A.B.C.D IP address of directly connected networks Network mask
7-17
Release 5.2.1
offset-list
The offset-list command adds an offset to incoming and outgoing metrics to routes learned via RIP. The offset value is added to the routing metric. An offset-list with an interface slot/port is considered extended and takes precedence over an offset-list that is not extended. The no offset-list command removes the offset for incoming and outgoing metrics to routes learned via RIP.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

offset-list {<1-99> | any} {in | out} <0-16> [cable <X/Y | X/Y.N> | ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y | X/Y.N> | pos <X/Y>] no offset-list {<1-99> | any} {in | out} <0-16> [cable <X/Y | X/Y.N> | ethernet <X/Y >| gigaether <X/Y | X/Y.N> | pos <X/Y>]
Command Syntax
1-99 any in out 0-16 standard access-list-number, if 0, no action is taken apply offset to all networks apply the offset to incoming metrics apply the offset list to outgoing metrics positive offset to be applied to metrics for networks matching the access list, if set to 0, no action is taken cable interface slot X, MAC Domain Y, and if applicable, sub-interface N to which the offset-list is applied Ethernet interface slot X and port Y to which the offset-list is applied
cable X/Y cable X/Y.N ethernet X/Y
7-18
Release 5.2.1
RIP Commands
gigaether X/Y gigaether X/Y.N pos X/Y
Gigabit Ethernet interface slot X, port Y, and if applicable, sub-interface N to which the offset-list is applied POS interface slot X and port Y to which the offset-list is applied
Command Default
Disabled
7-19
Release 5.2.1
output-delay
The output-delay command changes the inter-packet delay for RIP updates to ensure that transmitted information is received by lower-speed routers. The no output delay command removes the inter-packet delay for RIP updates.
Note: This command helps prevent the loss of routing table information.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

output-delay <8-50> no output delay <8-50>
Command Syntax
8-50 delay time, in milliseconds, between packets of a multiple-packet RIP update
Command Default
0
7-20
Release 5.2.1
RIP Commands
passive-interface
The passive-interface command disables an interface from sending route updates by prohibiting packets from being transmitted from a specified port. When disabled, the subnet continues advertising to other interfaces. The no passive-interface command enables the interface to send route updates.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

passive-interface {cable <X/Y> | default | ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y> | loopback <1-255> | pos <X/Y>} no passive-interface {cable <X/Y> | default | ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y> | loopback <1-255> | pos <X/Y>}
Command Syntax
cable X/Y default ethernet X/Y gigaether X/Y loopback 1-255 pos X/Y cable interface slot and MAC Domain number suppresses routing updates on all interfaces Ethernet interface slot and port number Gigabit Ethernet interface slot and port number Loopback interface number POS interface slot and port number
7-21
Release 5.2.1
redistribute
The redistribute command redistributes routes from one protocol domain to another routing domain. The no redistribute command disables route distribution from one protocol domain to another routing domain.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

redistribute {bgp | connected | ospf [match {internal | external | external 1 | external 2}] | static} [metric <1-16>] [route-map <WORD>] no redistribute {bgp | connected | ospf [match {internal | external | external 1 | external 2}] | static} [metric <1-16>] [route-map <WORD>]
Command Syntax
bgp connected ospf match internal external BGP source protocol established routes as result of IP enabled on an interface OSPF source protocol the criteria by which OSPF routes are redistributed into RIP. routes that are internal to an autonomous system routes external to an autonomous system, but are imported into OSPF as either Type 1 or Type 2 external route routes that are external to an autonomous system, but are imported into OSPF as Type 1 external route
external 1
7-22
Release 5.2.1
RIP Commands
external 2
routes that are external to an autonomous system, but are imported into OSPF as Type 2 external route IP or RIP static routes metric used for the redistributed route. the RIP default metric route-map used to conditionally control the route redistribution the name of the route-map
static metric 1-16 route-map WORD
Command Default
Disabled
7-23
Release 5.2.1
router rip
The router rip command enables the routing process for RIP. The no router rip command disable the RIP routing process.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

router rip no router rip
7-24
Release 5.2.1
RIP Commands
show ip rip database

The show ip rip database command displays RIP database routing table information.The following is an example of typical screen output from the show ip rip database command:
172.19.13.0 10.10.0.0 172.22.251.0 172.22.244.0 10.10.10.0 12.12.12.0 50.0.0.0 21.21.21.0 58.0.0.0 80.0.0.0 4.4.4.0 80.80.80.0 172.22.0.0 10.0.0.0 4.0.0.0 58.58.58.0 12.0.0.0 172.19.0.0 172.168.0.0 21.0.0.0 50.50.50.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.252.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.0.0.0 255.255.255.0 255.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.0.0 255.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 255.255.255.0 255.0.0.0 255.255.0.0 255.255.0.0 255.0.0.0 255.255.255.0 redistributed redistributed redistributed redistributed via redistributed auto summary directly connected auto summary auto summary directly connected directly connected redistributed via auto summary directly connected redistributed redistributed redistributed auto summary directly connected 172.17.1.1 58.58.58.2 58.58.58.2 58.58.58.2 58.58.58.2 172.17.1.1 50.50.50.4 21.21.21.1 58.58.58.1 80.80.80.4 4.4.4.4 80.80.80.4 58.58.58.2 58.58.58.2 4.4.4.4 58.58.58.1 172.17.1.1 172.17.1.1 58.58.58.2 21.21.21.1 50.50.50.4 m:1 m:1 m:1 m:1 m:2 m:1 m:1 m:1 m:1 m:1 m:1 m:1 m:1 m:1 m:1 m:1 m:1 m:1 m:1 m:1 m:1 t:0 t:0 t:0 t:0 t:12 t:0 t:0 t:0 t:0 t:0 t:0 t:0 t:0 t:0 t:0 t:0 t:0 t:0 t:0 t:0 t:0
Note: The show ip route rip command can be used to display RIP routes in the routing table.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
7-25
Release 5.2.1
Command Line Usage

show ip rip database [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show ip rip database [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
7-26
Release 5.2.1
RIP Commands
source-port 520
The source-port 520 command enables UDP port 520 to be used by the RIP routing process. The no source-port 520 command disables UDP port 520.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

source port 520 no source port 520
Command Default
Disabled
7-27
Release 5.2.1
timers basic
The timers basic command configures RIP network timers. The no timers basic command resets the network timer default. Note: The basic timers for RIP are adjustable, but must be the same for all routers and servers on the network to execute a distributed, asynchronous routing algorithm. When the route-timeout timer expires, the route is marked invalid but is retained in the table until the route-flush timer expires.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

timers basic <update> <invalid> <flush> no timers basic <update> <invalid> <flush>
Command Syntax
update specify the interval, in seconds, between periodic routing updates; valid values: 0-4294967295
7-28
Release 5.2.1
RIP Commands
invalid
specify the interval of time, in seconds, after which a route is declared invalid; valid values: 1-4294967295 invalid should be at least three times the value of the update argument. A route becomes invalid when there is an absence of updates that refresh the route. The route then enters into a holddown state. The route is marked inaccessible and advertised as unreachable. However, the route is still used for forwarding packets. specify the amount of time (in seconds) that must pass before the route is removed from the routing table; valid range: 1-4294967295 flush should be greater than the value of the invalid argument. If it is less than this sum, the proper holddown interval cannot elapse, which results in a new route being accepted before the holddown interval expires.
flush
Command Default
update = 30 seconds invalid = 180 seconds flush = 300 seconds
7-29
Release 5.2.1
version
The version command specifies the routing RIP version. The no version command disables the routing RIP version and resets the default. Use the ip rip receive version and the ip rip send version commands to specify versions per interface.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

version {1 | 2} no version
Command Syntax
1 2 RIP version 1 RIP version 2
Command Default
RIP receives version 1 and 2, but sends only version 1
7-30
8
OSPF Commands
Introduction
This chapter describes the Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) commands used with the BSR 64000. OSPF is a link-state routing protocol that runs internally to a single Autonomous System, such as an enterprise network. At the core of the OSPF protocol is a distributed, replicated link-state database. OSPF specifies Link-state Advertisements (LSAs) that allow OSPF routers to update each other about the LAN and WAN links to which they are connected. OSPF ensures that each OSPF router has an identical link-state database, except during periods of convergence. Using the link-state database, each OSPF router calculates its IP routing table with the best routes through the network.
OSPF Command Descriptions

This section contains an alphabetized list and descriptions of the OSPF commands supported by the BSR.
8-1
Release 5.2.1
area authentication
Use the area authentication command to enable authentication for an OSPF area to Type 1, Type 2, simple password, as specified in RFC 1247, while specification of Type 0 is assumed. Authentication type must match all routers and access servers in a particular area. The no authentication command disables authentication for the specified OSPF area. Note: Ensure that the ip ospf authentication-key command is used to specify a password, which must be the same for all OSPF routers on a network for communication to take place before the area authentication command is issued.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

area {<0-4294967295> | <A.B.C.D>} authentication [message-digest] no area {<0-4294967295> | <A.B.C.D>} authentication [message-digest] no area {<0-4294967295> | <A.B.C.D>}
Command Syntax
0-4294967295 A.B.C.D message-digest OSPF area ID number in decimal format. OSPF area ID in IP address format. Enables MD5 authentication only on the area specified by the area ID or IP address.
Command Default
No authentication
8-2
Release 5.2.1
OSPF Commands
area default-cost
Use the area default-cost command to specify a cost metric for the default summary route sent into the stub area by an area border router (ABR) only. The no area default-cost command removes the specified cost for the default summary route sent into a stub area. Note: The area stub command is used in conjunction with the area default-cost command to define a specified area as a stub area for all routers and access servers attached to the area.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

area {<0-4294967295> | <A.B.C.D>} default-cost <0-65535> no area {<0-4294967295> | <A.B.C.D>} default-cost <0-65535>
Command Syntax
0-4294967295 A.B.C.D 0-65535 OSPF area ID number in decimal format. OSPF area ID in IP address format Outgoing OSPF cost metric for packets sent from an interface, which is an unsigned 16-bit integer from 0 to 65535.
8-3
Release 5.2.1
area nssa
Use the area nssa command to configure an area as a Not So Stubby Area (NSSA). The no nssa command removes the NSSA configuration of an area.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

area {<0-4294967295> | <A.B.C.D>} nssa [default-information-originate] [no-redistribution] [no-summary] no area {<0-4294967295> | <A.B.C.D>} nssa [default-information-originate] [no-redistribution] [no-summary] no area {<0-4294967295> | <A.B.C.D>}
Command Syntax
0-4294967295 A.B.C.D OSPF area ID number in decimal format. OSPF area ID in IP address format.
default-information-originate Originates a Type 7 default LSA into the NSSA area on an NSSA Area Border Router (ABR) only. no-redistribution When the router is a NSSA ABR, the no-redistribute option imports routes into normal areas, but not into the NSSA area. Does not send summary LSAs into NSSA.
no-summary
Command Default
No NSSA area is defined.
8-4
Release 5.2.1
OSPF Commands
area range
Use the area range command to consolidate OSPF routes for an Area Border Router (ABR) only by advertising a single summary route for each address range that is external to the area. The no area range command removes summarized routes for the ABR.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

area {<0-4294967295> | <A.B.C.D>} range <A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D> [advertise | not-advertise ] no area {<0-4294967295> | <A.B.C.D>} range <A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D> [advertise | not-advertise ] no area {<0-4294967295> | <A.B.C.D>}
Command Syntax
0-4294967295 A.B.C.D A.B.C.D A.B.C.D advertise not-advertise OSPF area ID number in decimal format. OSPF area ID in IP address format Network IP address to match. Subnet mask. Sets address range status to advertise, generates a Type 3 summary LSA. Sets address range status to DoNotAdvertise, Type 3 summary LSA is suppressed, and the component networks remain hidden from other networks.
8-5
Release 5.2.1
area stub
Use the area stub command to configure an OSPF area as a stub area. A stub area allows a default route, intra-area routes, and inter-area routes, but disallows autonomous system (AS) external routes, virtual links, and Autonomous System Boundary Router (ASBR) routes. Note: If there is more than one router within a stub area, ensure that the area that you are creating as a stub area is defined as a stub area on each of these routers. The optional area stub no-summary command argument is used to prevent an area border router (ABR) from sending further Type 3 link-state advertisements (LSAs) into the stub area. Use the no area stub command to return the area that you defined as a stub area to a non-stub OSPF area.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Router configuration
Command Line Usage

area {<0-4294967295> | <A.B.C.D>} stub [no-summary] no area {<0-4294967295> | <A.B.C.D>} stub no area {<0-4294967295> | <A.B.C.D>}
Command Syntax
0-4294967295 A.B.C.D no-summary OSPF area ID number in decimal format. OSPF area ID in IP address format. Prevents ABR from sending summary link advertisements into the stub area.
8-6
Release 5.2.1
OSPF Commands
area virtual-link
Use the area virtual link command to create a virtual link that connects an OSPF area to the backbone area (area 0) without being physically connected to the OSPF backbone area. Use the no area virtual-link command to delete the defined OSPF virtual link.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

area {<0-4294967295> | <A.B.C.D>} virtual-link <A.B.C.D> [authentication-key <WORD> | dead-interval <1-65535> | hello-interval <1-65535> | message-digest-key <1-255> | retransmit-interval <1-65535> | transmit-delay <1-8192>] no area {<0-4294967295> | <A.B.C.D>} virtual-link <A.B.C.D> [authentication-key <WORD> | dead-interval <1-65535> | hello-interval <1-65535> | message-digest-key <1-255> | retransmit-interval <1-65535> | transmit-delay <1-8192>]
Command Syntax
0-4294967295 A.B.C.D A.B.C.D authentication-key WORD dead-interval 1-65535 OSPF area ID number in decimal format. OSPF area ID in IP address format. IP address of the virtual link neighbor. Unencrypted cleartext password that is 1 to 8 characters in length. Number of seconds that the router does not receive hello packets from its neighbor before declaring the neighbor is down.
8-7
Release 5.2.1
hello-interval 1-65535
Time in seconds between hello packets on an interface; the value must be the same for all routers and access servers attached to a common network. OSPF MD5 authentication key. Expected round-trip delay between two routers on the attached network; the value must be more than the expected delay. Approximate time to transmit an LSA packet.
message-digest-key 1-255 retransmit-interval 1-65535
transmit-delay 1-8192
Command Defaults
hello-interval retransmit-interval transmit-delay dead-interval = = = = 10 seconds 5 seconds 1 second 40 seconds
8-8
Release 5.2.1
OSPF Commands
auto-cost reference-bandwidth
The BSR OSPF routing process calculates the OSPF cost metric for an interface according to the bandwidth of the interface. The cost of an interface depends on the type of interface. The formula to calculate the cost is the reference bandwidth divided by the interface bandwidth. Use the auto-cost reference-bandwidth command to set the automatic cost metric that the OSPF routing process uses to differentiate the cost of multiple high-bandwidth links. Use the no auto-cost reference-bandwidth command to remove the OSPF cost metric for a link.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

auto-cost reference-bandwidth <1-4294967> no auto-cost reference-bandwidth <1-4294967>
Command Syntax
1-4294967 The reference bandwidth in Mbps.
Command Default
100 Mbps
8-9
Release 5.2.1
auto-virtual-link
Use the auto-virtual-link command to automatically detect and create OSPF virtual links. The no auto-virtual-link command disables automatic detection and creation of OSPF virtual links.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

auto-virtual-link no auto-virtual-link
Command Default
Disabled
8-10
Release 5.2.1
OSPF Commands
clear ip ospf
The clear ip ospf command resets an OSPF connection using a soft reconfiguration.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

clear ip ospf
8-11
Release 5.2.1
The default-information originate command generates a default route into an OSPF routing domain by configuring the metric for redistributed routes and is used with the redistribute command to redistribute routes into an OSPF routing domain so they are included in an automatic Autonomous System Border Router (ASBR) summary. The no default-information originate command removes default routes from the OSPF routing domain.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

default-information originate [always] [metric <0-16777214>] [metric-type <1-2>] no default-information originate [always] [metric <0-16777214>] [metric-type <1-2>]
Command Syntax
always Always advertise the default route into the OSPF domain regardless of whether the routing table has a default route. OSPF metric assigned to a default route. External link type associated with the default route advertised into the OSPF routing domain, values are 1 and 2, 1 being comparable to the link state metric and 2 larger than the cost of intra-AS path.
metric 0-16777214 metric-type 1-2
Command Default
Disabled
8-12
Release 5.2.1
OSPF Commands
default-metric
The default metric feature is used to eliminate the need for separate metric definitions for each routing protocol redistribution.The default-metric command forces the OSPF routing protocol to use the same metric value for all distributed routes from other routing protocols. The no default-metric command removes or changes the default metric value for the OSPF routing protocol.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

default-metric <1-4294967295> no default-metric
Command Syntax
1-4294967295 Default metric value.
8-13
Release 5.2.1
distance
The distance command sets all 3 OSPF distances (intra-area, inter-area, and external) for routes to the same administrative value. The no distance command disables the administrative distance for routes.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

distance <1-255> no distance <1-255>
Command Syntax
1-255 administrative distance assigned to all OSPF routes
Command Default
120
8-14
Release 5.2.1
OSPF Commands
distance ospf
The distance ospf command defines OSPF route administrative distances based on route type. The no distance ospf command deletes OSPF route administrative distances based on route type. Use the distance ospf command to set a distance for a group of routers, as opposed to any specific route passing an access list. The distance ospf command serves the same function as the distance command used with an access list. Use the distance ospf command when OSPF processes have mutual redistribution, to choose internal routes from one external route to another.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

distance ospf intra-area <1-255> inter-area <1-255> external <1-255> no distance ospf intra-area <1-255> inter-area <1-255> external <1-255>
Command Syntax
intra-area 1-255 inter-area 1-255 external 1-255 sets distance for all routes within an area, default value 110 sets distance for all routes from one area to another area, default value 110 sets distance for routes learned by redistribution from other routing domains
8-15
Release 5.2.1
Command Default
intra-area distance = 110 inter-area distance = 110 external distance = 110
8-16
Release 5.2.1
OSPF Commands
distribute-list
Use the distribute-list command to filter networks received and sent in routing updates and networks suppressed in routing updates by using access lists. The networks that are permitted or denied are defined in access lists. The no distribute-list command removes access list from an incoming or outgoing routing update.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

distribute-list {<1-199> | <1300-2699>} {in | out} no distribute-list {<1-199> | <1300-2699>} {in | out}
Command Syntax
1-199 1300-2699 Access list number that is used to filter incoming and outgoing routing updates. Expanded range access list number that is used to filter incoming and outgoing routing updates. Filters incoming routing updates. Filters outgoing routing updates.
in out
Command Default
Disabled
8-17
Release 5.2.1
graceful-restart
The graceful-restart command enables the OSPF graceful restart feature. The graceful restart feature allows an OSPF router to stay on the forwarding path even as its OSPF software is being restarted. The no graceful-restart command disables OSPF graceful restart.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

graceful-restart [restart-interval <1-1800>] no graceful-restart [restart-interval <1-1800>]
Command Syntax
restart-interval 1-1800 the time period, in seconds, for completion of the OSPF graceful restart following an SRM switchover
8-18
Release 5.2.1
OSPF Commands
helper-mode
The helper-mode command enables OSPF graceful restart helper mode on the BSR. The no helper-mode command disables graceful restart helper mode on the BSR. The BSRs neighbors must cooperate in order for the OSPF restart to be graceful. During graceful restart, the neighbor routers are running in "helper mode". The helper mode relationship is on a per network segment basis. The BSR or another router acting in helper mode monitors the network for topology changes, and as long as there are none, continues to advertise its LSAs as if the restarting router had remained in continuousoperation. If the restarting router was also the Designated Router on the network segment when the helper relationship began, the helper router assumes the Designated Router until the helping relationship is terminated and the restarting router is re-established as the Designated Router. Note: The helper mode command only enables/disables helper mode on the BSR. Neighboring routers must support helper mode and have helper mode enabled locally for graceful restart to be fully operational on the network. Helper mode and OSPF graceful restart are independent. You can disable graceful restart in the configuration, but still allow the router to cooperate with a neighbor attempting to restart gracefully.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

helper-mode [<A.B.C.D> | grace-period <1-1800> | strict-lsa-checking ] no helper-mode [<A.B.C.D> | grace-period <1-1800> | strict-lsa-checking ]
8-19
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D grace-period 1-1800 neighbor router ID specifies the helper mode grace period in seconds - a grace period is set to specify the time period for which the neighbors should consider the restarting router as part of the topology specifies helper mode strict LSA checking - strict LSA checking indicates whether or not an OSPF restart helper should terminate graceful restart when there is a change to an LSA that would be flooded to the restarting router or when there is a changed LSA on the restarting router's retransmission list when graceful restart is initiated
strict-lsa-checking
Command Default
Enabled
8-20
Release 5.2.1
OSPF Commands
ip ospf authentication-key
The ip ospf authentication-key command assigns a password for use by neighboring OSPF routers that are using OSPF simple password authentication. The no ip ospf authentication-key command deletes the password assigned for use by neighboring OSPF routers that are using OSPF simple password authentication.
Note: All neighbor routers on the same network need the same password to exchange OSPF information.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip ospf authentication-key <WORD> no ip ospf authentication-key <WORD>
Command Syntax
WORD character string up to 8 bytes in length
8-21
Release 5.2.1
ip ospf cost
The ip ospf cost command establishes a precise cost metric value for sending a packet on an OSPF interface. The no ip ospf cost command disables a precise cost metric value for sending the path cost to the default. Use the ip ospf cost command to assign a cost metric value for a particular interface. The user can set the metric manually if the default needs to be changed.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip ospf cost <1-65535> no ip ospf cost
Command Syntax
1-65535 the link state metric
8-22
Release 5.2.1
OSPF Commands
ip ospf database-filter all out

The ip ospf database-filter all out command filters OSPF LSAs during synchronization and flooding on the specified interface. The no ip ospf database-filter all out command disables filtering OSPF LSAs during synchronization and flooding on the specified interface.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip ospf database-filter all out no ip ospf database-filter all out
Command Default
Disabled
8-23
Release 5.2.1
ip ospf dead-interval
The ip ospf dead-interval command sets the number of seconds after which a neighbor routers is considered to be down. The no ip ospf dead-internal resets the dead interval to the default value.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip ospf dead-interval <1-65535> no ip ospf dead-interval
Command Syntax
1-65535 time, in seconds, after which a neighbor is considered dead; the value must be the same for all routers on the network
Command Default
40
8-24
Release 5.2.1
OSPF Commands
ip ospf hello-interval
The ip ospf hello-interval command sets the number of seconds between hello packets sent by the BSR on the interface. The no ip ospf hello-interval command resets the number of seconds between hello packets sent by a router on an interface to the default value. Use the ip ospf hello-interval command as a form of keepalive used by routers in order to acknowledge their existence on a segment.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip ospf hello-interval <1-65535> no ip ospf hello-interval
Command Syntax
1-65535 time, in seconds, between transmitting hello packets on an interface, the time value must be the same for all nodes on the network.
Command Default
10
8-25
Release 5.2.1
ip ospf message-digest-key
The ip ospf message-digest-key command enables OSPF MD5 authentication. The no ip ospf message-digest-key command disables OSPF MD5 authentication. Use the ip ospf message-digest-key md5 command to generate authentication information when sending packets and to authenticate incoming packets. Neighbor routers must have the same key identifier.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip ospf message-digest-key <1-255> md5 <WORD> no ip ospf message-digest-key <1-255>
Command Syntax
1-255 WORD key identifier OSPF password, string between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters
Command Default
Disabled
8-26
Release 5.2.1
OSPF Commands
ip ospf network
The ip ospf network command configures the OSPF network type to a type other than the default for a given media. The no ip ospf network command returns to the default network type.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip ospf network [ broadcast | point-to-point] no ip ospf network
Command Syntax
broadcast point-to-point
specifies an OSPF broadcast multi-access network specifies an OSPF point-to-point network OSPF point-to-point networks reduces the time it takes for designated router election and peering
Command Default
Dependant upon the network type.
8-27
Release 5.2.1
ip ospf priority
The ip ospf priority command sets router priority to aid in determining the OSPF designated router for a network. The no ip ospf priority command changes priority to aid in determining the OSPF designated router for a network to the default value. Use the ip ospf priority command value to configure OSPF broadcast networks. The router with a higher priority takes precedence when attempting to become the designated router. If the routers share the same priority, router ID takes precedence.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip ospf priority <0-255> no ip ospf priority <0-255>
Command Syntax
0-255 the priority value
Command Default
1
8-28
Release 5.2.1
OSPF Commands
ip ospf retransmit-interval
The ip ospf retransmit-interval command establishes the number of seconds between LSAs retransmissions for adjacencies belonging to an OSPF interface. The no ip ospf retransmit-interval command changes the number of seconds between LSA retransmissions for adjacencies belonging to an OSPF interface to the default value. Use the ip ospf retransmit-interval command to establish the time a router sends an LSA to its neighbor. The neighbor keeps the LSA until it receives the acknowledgement.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip ospf retransmit-interval <1-3600> no ip ospf retransmit-interval
Command Syntax
1-3600 the amount of time between LSA retransmissions in seconds
Command Default
5
8-29
Release 5.2.1
ip ospf transmit-delay
The ip ospf transmit-delay command sets the approximate amount of time to transmit an LSA retransmissions for adjacencies belonging to an OSPF interface. The no ip ospf transmit-delay command changes the approximate amount of time set to transmit an LSA retransmissions for adjacencies belonging to an OSPF interface. Use the ip ospf transmit-delay command to enable the delay over a link. The delay is defined as the time that it takes for the LSA to propagate over a link. Before transmission, LSAs in the update packet must have their ages incremented by the amount specified in the seconds argument. The value should take into account the transmission and propagation delays for the interface. If the delay is not added before transmission over a link, the time in which the LSA propagates over the link is not considered. Significance is greater on low-speed links.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip ospf transmit-delay <1-3600> no ip ospf transmit-delay
Command Syntax
1-3600 the time it takes to transmit an LSA in seconds
Command Default
1
8-30
Release 5.2.1
OSPF Commands
maximum-paths
Group Access
RESTRICTED
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

Command Syntax
8-31
Release 5.2.1
moto-nsf
The BSR 64000 supports Non Stop Forwarding (NSF) of network traffic during an SRM switchover based on its High Availability Routing architecture. NSF is required to maintain data integrity for critical applications such as streaming video and voice. If OSPF has been selected to route video and voice traffic, the BSRs OSPF graceful restart feature and NSF architecture would be the optimal choice to ensure no packet loss during an SRM switchover. However, in a network that includes devices that do not support OSPF graceful restart, there would be an interruption in network traffic during an SRM switchover. The moto-nsf command enables the moto-nsf feature which allows a router that does not support OSPF graceful restart to continue forwarding data as its OSPF software is being restarted. Like OSPF graceful restart, the moto-nsf restart process prevents the router running OSPF from losing adjacency, maintains the protocols previous state, and allows OSPF routes to be relearned after the SRM switchover is completed. The no moto-nsf command disables the moto-nsf feature. Note: If OSPF graceful restart and/or its helper mode is enabled on the BSR with the graceful-restart and/or helper-mode commands, moto-nsf must be disabled. If moto-nsf is enabled on the BSR, OSPF graceful restart and/or its helper mode must be disabled. A warning notifying a user of this rule will be printed to the console.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

moto-nsf [restart-interval <1-1800>] no moto-nsf [restart-interval <1-1800>]
8-32
Release 5.2.1
OSPF Commands
Command Syntax
restart-interval 1-1800 the time period, in seconds, for completion of the OSPF restart process following an SRM switchover
Command Defaults
Disabled restart-interval = 120 seconds
8-33
Release 5.2.1
network area
The network area command defines the interfaces and area ID on which OSPF runs. The no network area command deletes the interfaces and area ID on which OSPF runs. Use the network area command to cover IP address(es) for OSPF to operate on an interface. Use the address and wildcard-mask as one command to define one or more interfaces for an intended area. A subnet address may be designated as the area ID if associated areas are used with IP subnets. Each IP subnet is associated with a single area only.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

network <A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D> area {<0-4294967295> | <A.B.C.D>} no network <A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D> area {<0-4294967295> | <A.B.C.D>}
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D A.B.C.D 0-4294967295 A.B.C.D Network IP address. IP address type mask with wild card bits OSPF area ID as a decimal value OSPF area ID as an IP address if OSPF areas are associated with IP subnets
Command Default
Disabled
8-34
Release 5.2.1
OSPF Commands
passive-interface
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

passive-interface {cable <X/Y> | ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y>| loopback <1-255> | pos <X/Y>} no passive-interface {cable <X/Y> | ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y>| loopback <1-255> | pos <X/Y>}
Command Syntax
cable X/Y ethernet X/Y gigaether X/Y loopback 1-255 pos X/Y cable interface slot and MAC Domain number Ethernet interface slot and port number Gigabit Ethernet interface slot and port number Loopback interface number POS interface slot and port number
8-35
Release 5.2.1
redistribute
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

redistribute {bgp | connected | rip | static} [metric <1-16777215>] [metric-type {1 | 2}] [route-map <WORD>] [subnets] [tag <0-4294967295>] no redistribute {bgp | connected | rip | static} [metric <1-16777215>] [metric-type {1 | 2}] [route-map <WORD>] [subnets] [tag <0-4294967295>]
Command Syntax
bgp connected rip static metric 1-16777215 metric-type 1 metric-type 2 route-map WORD subnets tag 0-4294967295 BGP source protocol established routes as result of IP enabled on an interface RIP source protocol IP or OSPF static routes metric used for the redistributed route. OSPF exterior metric type for redistributed routes the name of the route-map used to conditionally control the route redistribution consider subnets for redistribution into OSPF set a 32-bit tag value for routes redistributed into OSPF
8-36
Release 5.2.1
OSPF Commands
Command Default
Disabled
8-37
Release 5.2.1
rfc1583-compatible
The rfc1583-compatible enables RFC1583 preference rules on choosing AS-External-LSAs during shortest path first (SPF) calculation according to RFC2328, section 16.4. The no rfc1583-compatible command disables RFC1583 preference rules on choosing AS-External-LSAs during SPF calculation according to RFC2238, section 16.4.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

rfc1583-compatible no rfc1583-compatible
Command Default
Disabled
8-38
Release 5.2.1
OSPF Commands
router-id
The router-id command overrides a configured OSPF router identifier (IP address) by manually configuring a new identifier. The no router-id command restores the initial configuration.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

router-id <A.B.C.D> no router-id
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D
the new OSPF router identifier (IP address)
8-39
Release 5.2.1
router ospf
The router ospf command enables an OSPF routing process. The no router ospf command disables the OSPF routing process.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

router ospf no router ospf
8-40
Release 5.2.1
OSPF Commands
show ip ospf
To display general information about OSPF routing processes, use the show ip ospf command. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show ip ospf command:
Routing Process OSPF with ID 150.31.94.1 Supports only single TOS(TOS0) routes This is an autonomous system boundary router SPF schedule delay 5 secs, Hold time between two SPFs 10 secs Minimum LSA interval 5 secs. Minimum LSA arrival 1 secs Number of external LSA 63 Number of areas in this router is 1. 1 normal 0 stub 0 nssa Area 0.0.0.0 Number of interfaces in this area is 6 Area has no authentication SPF algorithm executed 215 times Routing for Networks: 150.31.0.0/16 Distance: 110 (default is 110)
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip ospf [network] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show ip ospf [network] [ | {count | count-only}]
8-41
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
network | begin exclude include WORD count count-only shows IP OSPF network; displays network area information turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
8-42
Release 5.2.1
OSPF Commands
show ip ospf border-routers

The show ip ospf border-routers command displays the internal OSPF routing table for Autonomous System Boundary Routers (ASBRs), and Area Border Routers (ABRs).
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip ospf border-routers [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show ip ospf border-routers} [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
8-43
Release 5.2.1
show ip ospf database

The show ip ospf database command displays list of information related to the OSPF database. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show ip ospf database command:
OSPF Router with ID (150.31.94.1)
Router Link States (Area 0.0.0.0) Link ID 150.31.1.21 150.31.11.1 150.31.22.1 150.31.39.7 150.31.62.1 ADV Router 150.31.1.21 150.31.11.1 150.31.22.1 150.31.39.7 150.31.62.1 Age 1298 1016 603 1551 49 Seq# 0x8000002B 0x800000F2 0x8000099D 0x80000A19 0x800005BE Checksum 0x4B90 0x68F 0xFADD 0xCF11 0xEA93 Link count 11 3 5 4 4
Network Link States (Area 0.0.0.0) Link ID 150.31.10.10 150.31.20.10 150.31.30.10 150.31.60.10 150.31.70.10 ADV Router 150.31.11.1 150.31.22.1 150.31.39.7 150.31.62.1 150.31.70.10 Age 1685 495 1951 1413 1717 Seq# 0x800000B2 0x80000022 0x80000022 0x80000022 0x800000E6 Checksum 0x3F50 0x8F7 0xD3F3 0x9EE8 0xDABB
Link ID 150.31.1.0 150.31.2.255 150.31.40.255
Type-5 AS External Link States ADV Router Age Seq# 150.31.1.21 1455 0x80000026 150.31.1.21 1392 0x80000026 150.31.1.21 63 0x80000027
Checksum Tag 0x1C4F 3221225472 0x1159 3221225472 0x6BD7 3221225472
Group Access
All
Command Mode
All Modes except User EXEC
8-44
Release 5.2.1
OSPF Commands
Command Line Usage

show ip ospf [<0-4294967295>] database [A.B.C.D | adv-router <A.B.C.D> | asbr-summary | database-summary | external | network | nssa-external | router | self-originate | summary] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show ip ospf [<0-4294967295>] database [A.B.C.D | adv-router <A.B.C.D> | asbr-summary | database-summary | external | network | nssa-external | router | self-originate | summary] [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
0-4294967295 A.B.C.D Assigned OSPF area ID number. Link state ID in IP address format, always the same as the advertising router, value dependent upon advertisement LSA type. Displays all LSAs for the specified advertising router. Specifies the advertised router ID. Autonomous System Boundary Router (ASBR) summary. summary of the OSPF database. external LSAs. network LSAs. NSSA external LSA information. router LSAs. LSAs from the local router. summary LSAs. turns on output modifiers (filters). filter for output that begins with the specified string.
adv-router A.B.C.D asbr-summary database-summary external network nssa-external router self-originate summary | begin
8-45
Release 5.2.1
8-46
Release 5.2.1
OSPF Commands
show ip ospf interface

The show ip ospf interface command displays OSPF-related interface information. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show ip ospf interface command:
ethernet 7/0 is up, line protocol is up Internet Address 150.31.90.10/24, Area 0.0.0.0 Router ID 150.31.94.1, Network Type BROADCAST, Cost: 10 Transmit Delay is 1 sec, State DR, Priority 1 Designated Router (ID) 150.31.94.1, Interface address 150.31.90.10 Backup Designated Router (ID) 150.31.1.21, Interface address 150.31.90.1 Timer intervals configured, Hello 10, Dead 40, Wait 40, Retransmit 5 Neighbor Count is 1, Adjacent neighbor count is 1 Adjacent with neighbor 150.31.1.21 (Backup Designated Router) loopback 2 is up, line protocol is up Internet Address 150.31.92.1/24, Area 0.0.0.0 Router ID 150.31.94.1, Network Type BROADCAST, Cost: 10 Transmit Delay is 1 sec, State DR, Priority 1 Designated Router (ID) 150.31.94.1, Interface address 150.31.92.1 Backup Designated Router (ID) 0.0.0.0, Interface address 0.0.0.0 Timer intervals configured, Hello 10, Dead 40, Wait 40, Retransmit 5 Neighbor Count is 0, Adjacent neighbor count is 0
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip ospf interface [<A.B.C.D> | cable <X/Y | X/Y.N> | ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y | X/Y.N> | loopback <1-255>| pos <X/Y> | tunnel <0-255>] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show ip ospf interface [<A.B.C.D> | cable <X/Y | X/Y.N> | ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y | X/Y.N> | loopback <1-255>| pos <X/Y> | tunnel <0-255>] [ | {count | count-only}]
8-47
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D cable X/Y cable X/Y.N ethernet X/Y gigaether X/Y gigaether X/Y.N loopback 1-255 pos X/Y tunnel 0-255 | begin exclude include WORD count count-only turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output Interface IP address OSPF information over the cable interface slot X, MAC Domain Y, and if applicable, sub-interface N OSPF information over the Ethernet/ FastEthernet 802.3 interface slot X and port Y OSPF information over the Gigabit Ethernet interface slot X, port Y, and if applicable, sub-interface N OSPF information over the loopback interface OSPF information over the Packet Over SONET interface slot X and port Y
8-48
Release 5.2.1
OSPF Commands
show ip ospf memory

The show ip ospf memory command displays OSPF memory usage information. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show ip ospf memory command:
OSPF Memory Usage Mem Pool Free In-Use Hi-Water Mark ----------------------------------------------------------Gen256 499 1 69 Gen512 500 0 9 Gen1k 500 0 0 Gen2k 494 6 7 Gen16k 8 0 1 Lsd256 412 88 142 Lsa256 437 63 113 Lsa2k 191 9 15 Lsa16k 6 10 13
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip ospf memory [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show ip ospf memory [ | {count | count-only}]
8-49
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
8-50
Release 5.2.1
OSPF Commands
show ip ospf neighbor

The show ip ospf neighbor command displays information about all OSPF neighbors. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show ip ospf neighbor command:
Neighbor ID 150.31.1.21 Pri 1 State FULL/BDR Dead Time 00:00:30 Address 150.31.90.1
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip ospf neighbor [<A.B.C.D>] [detail] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show ip ospf neighbor [<A.B.C.D>] [detail] [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D detail | begin exclude include WORD specific OSPF neighbor ID list of neighbor information in detail turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string
8-51
Release 5.2.1
count count-only
8-52
Release 5.2.1
OSPF Commands
show ip ospf network

The show ip ospf network command displays information about OSPF network areas. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show ip ospf network command:
network 150.31.0.0 0.0.255.255 area 0.0.0.0
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip ospf network [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show ip ospf network [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
8-53
Release 5.2.1
show ip ospf virtual-links

The show ip ospf virtual-links command displays parameters regarding the current state of the OSPF virtual links.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip ospf virtual-links [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show ip ospf virtual-links [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
8-54
Release 5.2.1
OSPF Commands
summary-address
The summary-address aggregates external routes at the border of the OSPF domain. The no summary-address command deletes aggregated external routes at the border of the OSPF domain. Use the summary-address command to summarize routes from other routing protocols that are redistributed to OSPF. The area range command summarizes routes between OSPF areas. The summary-address command is responsible for an OSPF autonomous system boundary router to advertise one external route as an aggregate. This applies to all redistributed routes that the address covers.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

summary-address <A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D> [tag <0-4294967295>] no summary-address <A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D> [tag <0-4294967295>]
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D A.B.C.D tag 0-4294967295 summary address IP subnet mask for the summary route tag value, can be used as a match value to control redistribution
Command Default
All redistributed routes advertised separately
8-55
Release 5.2.1
timers spf
The timers spf command configures the amount of time between OSPF topology change receipt and when it starts a shortest path first (SPF) calculation. This includes the hold time between two consecutive SPF calculations. The no timers spf command changes the configuration of the amount of time between OSPF topology changes receipt and when it starts an SPF calculation and returns it to the default value. Use the timers spf command to set the delay time and hold time to change routing to a faster path.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

timers spf <0-65535> <0-65535> no timers spf <0-65535> <0-65535>
Command Syntax
0-65535 0-65535 time in seconds between receipt and SPF minimum time in seconds between two consecutive SPF calculations
Command Default
SPF delay = 5 seconds SPF hold time = 10 seconds
8-56
9
IGMP Commands
Introduction
This chapter describes the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) commands used with the BSR 64000. Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP), part of the Internet Protocol (IP) suite, is used between hosts and routers to report dynamic multicast group membership. IP multicasting is the transmission of an IP datagram to a "host group" identified by a single IP destination address. Multicasting directs the same information packets to multiple destinations at the same time, versus unicasting, which sends a separate copy to each individual destination. Because the destinations receive the same source packet at once, delivery of the information takes place in a more timely manner. As stated in RFC 1112, the membership of a host group is dynamic; that is, hosts may join and leave groups at any time. There is no restriction on the location or number of members in a host group, and a host may be a member of more than one group at a time. There are three types of messages structures supported by IGMP to communicate with each other about the multicast traffic: queries, reports, and leave group messages. Query messages are used to discover which hosts are in which multicast groups. In response, the hosts sends a report message to inform the querier of a hosts membership. (Report messages are also used by the host to join a new group). Leave group messages are sent when the host wishes to leave the multicast group.
9-1
Release 5.2.1
Applications that implement IGMP effectively eliminate multicast traffic on segments that are not destined to receive this traffic, thus limiting the overall amount of traffic on the network.
IGMP Command Descriptions

This section contains an alphabetized list and descriptions of the IGMP commands supported by the BSR.
9-2
Release 5.2.1
IGMP Commands
clear ip igmp counters

The clear ip igmp counters command clears IGMP statistics counters on a specific router.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

clear ip igmp counters
9-3
Release 5.2.1
ip igmp access-group
The ip igmp access-group command controls multicast groups that hosts can join. The no ip igmp access-group command removes control and allows the hosts to join all groups.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip igmp access-group <1-99> <1300-1999> no ip igmp access-group <1-99> <1300-1999>
Command Syntax
1-99 1300-1999 standard access list standard access-list number (expanded range)
Command Default
any group allowed on interface
9-4
Release 5.2.1
IGMP Commands
ip igmp querier-timeout
The ip igmp querier-timeout command configures the timeout value indicating when the router takes over as the interface querier. The no ip igmp querier-timeout removes the configured timeout prior to the time the router takes over as the interface querier, and returns it to the default. Note: After a no ip igmp querier-timeout command is issued and only after the querier has completed the last query, then the router takes over as the interface querier.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip igmp querier-timeout <1-3600> no ip igmp querier-timeout <1-3600>
Command Syntax
1-3600 querier timeout value in seconds
Command Default
query-interval value x 2
9-5
Release 5.2.1
ip igmp query-interval
The igmp query-interval command sets the frequency at which the router sends out IGMP queries on the interface. The no ip igmp query-interval command returns the query interval to the default value. Use the ip igmp query-interval command to configure how often the router solicits the IGMP report responses from all of the multicast hosts on the network.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip igmp query-interval <1-3600> no ip igmp query-interval <1-3600>
Command Syntax
1-3600 query interval in seconds
Command Default
125 seconds
9-6
Release 5.2.1
IGMP Commands
ip igmp last-member-query-count
The ip igmp last-member-query-count command configures the number of times that the BSR sends Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) group-specific query messages in response to receiving a group-specific leave message. The no ip igmp last-member-query-count command resets this interval to the default value of 2.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip igmp last-member-query-count <1-7> no ip igmp last-member-query-count <1-7>
Command Syntax
1-7 the number of times that the BSR sends Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) group-specific query messages in response to receiving a group-specific leave message
Command Default
2
9-7
Release 5.2.1
ip igmp last-member-query-interval
The ip igmp last-member-query-interval command configures the interval (in tenths of a second) at which the BSR sends Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) group-specific query messages. The no ip igmp last-member-query-interval command resets this interval to the default value of 10 (1 second).
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip igmp last-member-query-interval <1-255> no ip igmp last-member-query-interval <1-255>
Command Syntax
1-255 the interval (in tenths of a second) at which the BSR sends Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) group-specific query messages
Command Default
10 (1 second)
9-8
Release 5.2.1
IGMP Commands
ip igmp query-max-response-time
The ip igmp query-max-response-time command sets the maximum response time advertised in query. Use the no ip igmp query-max-response-time command to remove the set maximum response time advertised in query and return it to the default.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip igmp query-max-response-time <1-255> no ip igmp query-max-response-time <1-255>
Command Syntax
1-255 query response value in seconds
Command Default
10 seconds
9-9
Release 5.2.1
ip igmp static-group
The ip igmp static-group command is used for the following:
Connects or configures the router as a member of a particular multicast group on the interface. Gives a host (that does not run IGMP) membership in a multicast group. Allows an IP unicast source address and the multicast group address channel to join an upstream PIM neighbor.
Note: Packet forwarding of this IP unicast source address and the multicast group address channel will only be sent onto physical interfaces that have this static IP unicast source address and the multicast group address channel Join message. The no ip igmp static-group disassociates the router from the group.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip igmp static-group <A.B.C.D> [source <A.B.C.D>] no ip igmp static-group <A.B.C.D> [source <A.B.C.D>]
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D The multicast group IP address that the router is configured to be a member, which is in the Class D IP address range 224.0.0.0 through 232.255.255.255. The unicast source IP address.
source A.B.C.D
Command Default
Disabled
Release 5.2.1
IGMP Commands
ip igmp version
The ip igmp version command configures a specific IGMP version used on an interface. The no ip igmp version removes the specific version used by the interface and returns it to the default IGMP version.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip igmp version { 1 | 2 | 3 } no ip igmp version { 1 | 2 | 3 }
Command Syntax
1 2 3 IGMP Version 1 IGMP Version 2 IGMP Version 3
Command Default
Version 2
9-11
Release 5.2.1
ip igmp version1-querier
The ip igmp version1-querier command configures the router to act as the querier for IGMPv1. This is done by manually assigning the IGMP querier. The no ip igmp version1-querier command disables the router from acting as the querier.
Note: The interface is not affected when IGMPv2 is running on the interface. It is recommended that only one querier is enabled in a network segment.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip igmp version1-querier no ip igmp version1-querier
Command Default
Disabled
9-12
Release 5.2.1
IGMP Commands
show ip igmp groups

The show ip igmp groups command displays the following information for multicast groups connected to a specific router using IGMP. The show ip igmp groups command displays the following IGMP group information: Group Address Interface IP Address Uptime Expires Last Reporter multicast address interface reachable source IP address for the group hours, minutes, and seconds multicast known hours, minutes, and seconds until the entry is removed from IGMP groups table last host of multicast group
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show ip igmp groups command:
IGMP Connected Group Membership Legend: # - Version 1 Host detected, * - all sources Interface loopback 1 IP Address 40.4.4.15 Uptime 142:12:11 Expires 00:00 Last Reporter 0.0.0.0
Group Address 232.1.1.1/ 20.1.1.10
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip igmp groups [summary] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]]
9-13
Release 5.2.1
show ip igmp groups [summary] [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
summary | begin exclude include WORD count count-only shows summary report of IGMP groups turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
9-14
Release 5.2.1
IGMP Commands
show ip igmp interface

The show ip igmp interface command displays the multicast information for an interface. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show ip igmp interface command:
loopback 2 IGMP is disabled on interface 150.31.92.1 loopback 3 IGMP is disabled on interface 150.31.93.1 IGMP is disabled on interface 150.31.94.1 ethernet 7/0 IGMP is disabled on interface 150.31.90.10 ethernet 7/1 IGMP is disabled on interface 150.31.99.7 ethernet 15/0 IGMP is disabled on interface ethernet 15/1 IGMP is disabled on interface ethernet 15/2 IGMP is disabled on interface 150.31.98.10
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip igmp interface [groups | brief] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show ip igmp interface [groups | brief] [ | {count | count-only}]
9-15
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
groups brief | begin exclude include WORD count count-only multicast groups that are joined on each interface brief summary of IGMP interface turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
9-16
Release 5.2.1
IGMP Commands
show ip igmp statistics

The show ip igmp statistics command displays statistics for a specified IGMP interface. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show ip igmp statistics command:
IGMP statistics: Sent/Received Total: 0/0, Format errors: 0/0, Checksum errors: 0/0 Host Queries: 0/0, Host Reports: 0/0 Bad Queries: 0/0, Bad Reports: 0/0
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip igmp statistics [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show ip igmp statistics [ | {count | count-only}]
9-17
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
9-18
10
VRRP Commands
Introduction
This chapter contains the Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) commands for the BSR 64000. VRRP specifies an election protocol that dynamically assigns responsibility for a virtual router to one of the VRRP routers on a LAN. The Master VRRP router is responsible for forwarding packets that are sent to the IP addresses of the virtual router from hosts on the LAN. The election process provides dynamic failover in the forwarding responsibility if the Master becomes unavailable. When the Master goes down, the remaining VRRP routers elect a new Master VRRP router based on priority and primary IP address. VRRP provides a higher-availability default path without requiring configuration of dynamic routing or router discovery protocols on every end host.
VRRP Command Descriptions

This section contains an alphabetized list and descriptions of the VRRP commands supported by the BSR.
10-1
Release 5.2.1
clear ip vrrp
The clear ip vrrp command resets all VRRP statistic counters of all virtual routers configured on the router. A specific interface and specific Virtual Router ID (VRID) may be specified.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

clear ip vrrp {* } | {ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y>} [<1-255>]
Command Syntax
* ethernet X/Y gigaether X/Y 1-255 resets all VRRP statistics counters for all virtual routers on all interfaces on this router resets VRRP statistics counters on the Ethernet interface slot X and port Y resets VRRP statistics counters on the Gigabit Ethernet interface slot X and port Y virtual router ID (VRID)
10-2
Release 5.2.1
VRRP Commands
ip vrrp
The ip vrrp command activates the VRRP protocol on all interfaces that are configured to run VRRP. The no ip vrrp command de-activates the VRRP protocol on all interfaces that are configured to run VRRP. Use the ip vrrp command to enable all interfaces so that multiple virtual routers can be enabled or disabled all at once.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip vrrp no ip vrrp
Command Default
Enabled
10-3
Release 5.2.1
ip vrrp (virtual router ID)

The ip vrrp (virtual router ID) command creates a virtual router. The no ip vrrp (virtual router ID) command deletes the virtual router from the interface. Use the ip vrrp (virtual router ID) command to specify and associate the virtual router. Each virtual router group selects its own Master and Backup routers independently of other virtual router groups. Each individual virtual router has a unique virtual MAC address and virtual IP addresses.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip vrrp <1-255> no ip vrrp <1-255>
Command Syntax
1-255 the Virtual Router ID (VRID)
10-4
Release 5.2.1
VRRP Commands
ip vrrp address
The ip vrrp address command specifies a virtual IP address and secondary IP addresses for a virtual router. The no ip vrrp removes the specified virtual IP address or addresses for a virtual router. Use the ip vrrp address command to configure IP addresses for virtual routers. VRRP is not enabled for the virtual router until at least one IP address has been specified. If one or more IP addresses are specified, then the addresses will be used as the designated ip addresses among routers associating with the virtual router.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip vrrp <1-255> address <A.B.C.D> [...<A.B.C.D>] no ip vrrp <1-255> address [<A.B.C.D>] [...<A.B.C.D>]
Command Syntax
1-255 A.B.C.D ...A.B.C.D virtual router ID (VRID) specify the IP address of this virtual router specifies additional secondary IP addresses of this virtual router
10-5
Release 5.2.1
ip vrrp authentication key

The ip vrrp authentication key command specifies the authentication string for use with the authentication type, text only. The no ip vrrp authentication key command removes the specified authentication string for use with the authentication type, text only. Use the ip vrrp authentication key command to set a simple text key in VRRP messages. The unencrypted authentication string is transmitted for authentication type simple text in all VRRP protocol messages. The same authentication string must be configured on all routers for a virtual router. Authentication mismatch will not prevent a router from taking over as the designated Master. Authentication mismatch will cause VRRP to stop working properly for a virtual router due to authentication failure, and results in lack of communication between virtual routers.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip vrrp <1-255> authentication key <WORD> no ip vrrp <1-255> authentication key
Command Syntax
1-255 WORD the identification number of a configured virtual router an authentication key string of up to 8 characters
10-6
Release 5.2.1
VRRP Commands
ip vrrp authentication type

The ip vrrp authentication type command specifies the type of authentication to use for the given virtual router on the configured interface. The no ip vrrp authentication type command removes the specified type of authentication to use for the given virtual router on the configured interface. The same authentication type must be configured on all routers for a given virtual router. Authentication mismatch will not prevent a router from taking over as the designated Master. Authentication mismatch may cause VRRP not to work properly for a given virtual router due to authentication failure, and results in lack of communication between virtual routers.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip vrrp <1-255> authentication type {text} no ip vrrp <1-255> authentication type
Command Syntax
1-255 text the virtual router ID (VRID) simple text authentication type
Command Default
No authentication
10-7
Release 5.2.1
ip vrrp enable
The ip vrrp enable command enables a specific VRRP router on a configured interface. The no vrrp enable command disables a specific VRRP router on a configured interface. Use the ip vrrp enable command to bring up a specific VRRP router on the given interface if the interface is being enabled. This command brings the VRRP router to either Backup or Master VRRP router when the router is enabled (if at least one IP address is configured for the virtual router).
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip vrrp <1-255> enable no ip vrrp <1-255> enable
Command Syntax
1-255 the virtual router ID (VRID)
Command Default
Enabled
10-8
Release 5.2.1
VRRP Commands
ip vrrp preempt
The ip vrrp preempt command indicates whether a higher priority Backup can pre-empt a lower priority Master. The no ip vrrp preempt command disables pre-emption of a lower priority Master by a higher priority Backup. If the router owns the IP address or addresses associated with the virtual router, the Master will always pre-empt, regardless of this command setting. To determine which of the routers should be allowed to pre-empt, use the ip vrrp preempt command for virtual routers that have IP addresses that do not belong to any router interface.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip vrrp <1-255> preempt no ip vrrp <1-255> preempt
Command Syntax
1-255 the identification number of a configured virtual router
Command Default
Enabled
10-9
Release 5.2.1
ip vrrp priority
The ip vrrp priority command specifies the priority of the router to act as Master for a given virtual router. The no ip vrrp priority command restores the default priority value of the router. Use the ip vrrp priority command to select a Master when multiple routers are associated with the same virtual router. If two routers have the same priority, their primary IP address is compared, and the router with the higher IP address value takes precedence. A priority of 255 is reserved for VRRP routers that own the virtual IP address. Therefore, during configuration, if the router owns that IP address, priority is automatically set to 255 and cannot be changed. A priority of 0 is reserved for the Master to indicate the relinquishing of responsibility of the virtual router.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip vrrp <1-255> priority <1-254> no ip vrrp <1-255> priority
Command Syntax
1-255 priority 1-254 the virtual router ID (VRID) priority value of the VRRP router
Command Default
100
10-10
Release 5.2.1
VRRP Commands
ip vrrp primary-ip
The ip vrrp primary-ip command configures the primary IP address for a virtual router with multiple interface addresses in a VRRP group. The no ip vrrp primary-ip command resets the primary IP address to the lowest IP address among all real interface addresses for the given interface.
Note: VRRP advertisements are always sent using the primary IP address as the source of the IP packet.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip vrrp <1-255> primary-ip <A.B.C.D> no ip vrrp <1-255> primary-ip
Command Syntax
1-255 A.B.C.D the virtual router ID (VRID) IP address to set as the source of outgoing IP packets when selected as the master VRRP router
Command Default
The lowest IP address value among all valid IP addresses of the given interface.
10-11
Release 5.2.1
ip vrrp timer
The ip vrrp timer command specifies the time interval that the Master should send VRRP advertisement messages. The no ip vrrp timer command restores the default. All VRRP routers are associated with a particular virtual router, and must use the same advertisement interval to have VRRP run properly. Note: The system is configured to send VRRP advertisements every 3 seconds for the virtual router on the configured interface Ethernet 1/0, if the router is configured as the Master for the virtual router 1. If not, this interval is used as the factor to determine if the Master is down, if the router is configured as Backup for virtual router 1.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip vrrp <1-255> timer <1-255> no ip vrrp <1-255> timer
Command Syntax
1-255 timer 1-255 the virtual router ID (VRID) advertisement interval in seconds
Command Default
1 second
10-12
Release 5.2.1
VRRP Commands
ip vrrp verify-availability
The ip vrrp verify-availability command configures the VRRP router to monitor one or more ip addresses. The no ip vrrp verify-availability command stops monitoring one or more of the designated IP addresses. Use the ip vrrp verify-availability command to configure the VRRP router to monitor the link states of other VRRP router interfaces. If one or more IP addresses is configured for monitoring, and all of the monitored links are down, the virtual router is brought down automatically. The Master relinquishes responsibility by sending an advertisement 0. If at least one link of all monitored IP addresses being monitored comes back up, the associated virtual router will be brought back up automatically. If a virtual router is not monitoring any link state where no IP address is configured for verify-availability, the virtual router will continue as usual.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip vrrp <1-255> verify-availability <A.B.C.D> [...<A.B.C.D>] no ip vrrp <1-255> verify-availability <A.B.C.D> [...<A.B.C.D>]
Command Syntax
1-255 A.B.C.D ...A.B.C.D the identification of a configured virtual router number VRRP IP address that this VRRP router monitors additional IP addresses that this virtual router monitors
10-13
Release 5.2.1
show ip vrrp
The show ip vrrp command displays detailed status information on all VRRP virtual routers configured on the router. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show ip vrrp command:
VRRP Global Statistic: Recv: 0 checksum errors, 0 bad version 0 bad vrid, 0 bad packet size
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip vrrp [ethernet <X/Y> [<1-255>]] | [ gigaether <X/Y> [1-255>]] | [summary]
Command Syntax
ethernet X/Y gigaether X/Y 1-255 summary Ethernet interface slot X and port Y Gigabit Ethernet interface slot X and port Y identification number of a configured virtual router summary information for all VRRP routers configured on all interfaces
10-14
11
Introduction
This chapter describes the IP Multicast Protocol commands used with the BSR. This chapter contains the following sections on the Multicast Routing Table Manager (MRTM), and Multicast Forwarding Manager (MFM) protocols.

MRTM Command Descriptions MFM Command Descriptions
MRTM Command Descriptions

Unlike traditional Internet traffic that requires separate connections for each source-destination pair, IP Multicasting allows many recipients to share the same source. The IP Multicast protocol sends data to distributed servers on the multicast backbone, and MRTM allows different IP protocols to work together on the same router. This means that just one set of packets is transmitted for all destinations. MRTM also manages Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol (DVMRP) and Multicast Open Shortest Path First (MOSPF), and provides multicast routing support for Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP). For large amounts of data, IP Multicast is more efficient than normal Internet transmissions because the server can broadcast a message to many recipients simultaneously. This section contains an alphabetized list and descriptions of the MRTM IP multicast commands supported by the BSR.
11-1
Release 5.2.1
ip mroute
The ip mroute command configures an IP multicast static route. The no ip mroute command removes the configuration of an IP multicast static route.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip mroute <A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D> [<1-255>] no ip mroute <A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D> [<1-255>]
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D A.B.C.D A.B.C.D 1-255 static source address static network mask RPF neighbor address or route administrative distance for mroute
11-2
Release 5.2.1
ip mroute static distance

The ip mroute static distance command configures a static multicast route. The no ip mroute static distance command removes the route.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip mroute static distance <1-255> no ip mroute static distance <1-255>
Command Syntax
1-255 the administrative distance for the multicast static route - a lower distance has preference
11-3
Release 5.2.1
ip mroute unicast distance

The ip mroute unicast distance command configures a unicast multicast route. The no ip mroute unicast distance command removes the route.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip mroute unicast distance <1-255> no ip mroute unicast distance <1-255>
Command Syntax
1-255 the administrative distance for the unicast multicast route - a lower distance has preference
11-4
Release 5.2.1
ip multicast-routing
The ip multicast-routing command enables IP multicast routing. The no ip multicast-routing command disables IP multicast routing. This command is used with multicast routing protocols, such as DVMRP.
Note: Multicast packets are not forwarded unless IP multicast routing is enabled.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip multicast-routing no ip multicast-routing
Command Default
Disabled
11-5
Release 5.2.1
show ip rpf
The show ip rpf command displays how IP multicast routing does Reverse Path Forwarding (RPF).
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip rpf <A.B.C.D>
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D displays RPF information for a specified source address
11-6
Release 5.2.1
MFM Command Descriptions

MFM supports multicast tools for tracing routes, maintains a multicast forwarding cache and forwards multicast traffic. To forward multicast traffic, each multicast routing protocol must register with the MFM with the APIs for inbound check and outbound check. Parameters such as cache age for the flow, and a time-to-live value for the interface being registered, is included. When MFM receives a data packet that does not have a multicast forwarding cache, the MFM will call the protocol check inbound function, and check the outbound function to the registered protocol to determine the cache. This section contains an alphabetized list and descriptions of the MFM commands supported by the BSR.
11-7
Release 5.2.1
clear ip multicast fwd-cache

The clear ip multicast fwd-cache command clears the IP multicast forwarding cache table. Use the clear ip multicast fwd-cache command to clear the multicast forwarding table which is built from the multicast forwarding cache, and then used for forwarding traffic. Once cleared, the Multicast Forwarding Manager regenerates the cache when multicast traffic is received.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

clear ip multicast fwd-cache
11-8
Release 5.2.1
clear ip multicast proto-cache

The clear ip multicast proto-cache command clears the IP multicast protocol cache and also clears the IP multicast forwarding cache.
Note: The MFM manager regenerates the multicast protocol cache when multicast traffic is received.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

clear ip multicast proto-cache
11-9
Release 5.2.1
mtrace
The mtrace command traces the path from a multicast source to a multicast destination branch of a multicast distribution tree.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

mtrace [<A.B.C.D (group)> | <A.B.C.D (hostname)> | <A.B.C.D (hostname)>]
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D (group) A.B.C.D (hostname) A.B.C.D (hostname) group address or group hostname destination IP address or destination hostname source IP address or source hostname
Command Default
group address or group hostname = 224.2.0.1
11-10
Release 5.2.1
show ip multicast cache-summary

The show ip multicast cache-summary command displays the number of multicast flows currently passing through the router. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show ip multicast cache-summary command:
Total number of protocol cache: 0 Total number of forwarding cache: 0
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip multicast cache-summary
11-11
Release 5.2.1
show ip multicast fwd-cache

The show ip multicast fwd-cache command displays all of the multicast forwarding cache on a source group basis.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip multicast fwd-cache [[<A.B.C.D>] [<A.B.C.D>]] | [ physical ]
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D A.B.C.D physical display the cache for this source or group address display the cache for this specified source and group address display the cache only in relation to the physical interface - if "physical" is not specified, the cache will display in relation to the logical interface
11-12
Release 5.2.1
show ip multicast interface

The show ip multicast interface command is used to list the IP address, multicast protocol (PIM, DVMRP, or IGMP), and time-to-live (TTL) information that is associated with each multicast interface.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip multicast interface [<A.B.C.D>]
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D display information only for this interface address
11-13
Release 5.2.1
show ip multicast oi-fwd-cache

The show ip multicast oi-fwd-cache command is used to display multicast forwarding cache entries that have outgoing interfaces (OIs).
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip multicast oi-fwd-cache
11-14
Release 5.2.1
show ip multicast no-oi-fwd-cache

The show ip multicast no-oi-fwd-cache command is used to display multicast forwarding cache entries, which have no outgoing interfaces (OIs).
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip multicast no-oi-fwd-cache
11-15
Release 5.2.1
show ip multicast proto-cache

The show ip multicast proto-cache command is used to display multicast protocol cache entries.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip multicast proto-cache [<A.B.C.D>] [<A.B.C.D>]
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D A.B.C.D only displays the cache for this source or group address only displays the cache for this specified source and group address
11-16
12
DVMRP Commands
Introduction
This chapter contains the Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol (DVMRP) commands used with the BSR 64000. DVMRP is the original IP Multicast routing protocol. It was designed to run over both multicast LANs as well as non-multicast routers. In this case, the IP Multicast packets are tunneled through the routers as unicast packets. This replicates the packets and affects performance, but provides intermediate solution for IP Multicast routing on the Internet while router vendors decide to support native IP Multicast routing.
DVMRP Command Descriptions

This section contains an alphabetized list and descriptions of the DVMRP commands supported by the BSR.
12-1
Release 5.2.1
ip dvmrp accept-filter
The ip dvmrp accept-filter command configures a filter for incoming DVMRP reports. The no ip dvmrp accept-filter command removes configuration of a filter for incoming DVMRP reports. Use the ip dvmrp accept-filter command to configure filters to accept and deny DVMRP routes learned from this interface. The accepted routes are added to the Multicast Routing Table.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip dvmrp accept-filter <1-99> no ip dvmrp accept-filter <1-99>
Command Syntax
1-99 access list for filtering routes
Command Default
Accepts destination reports from all neighbors.
12-2
Release 5.2.1
DVMRP Commands
ip dvmrp default-information originate

The ip dvmrp default-information originate command advertises network 0.0.0.0 to DVMRP neighbors and the multicast backbone. The no ip dvmrp default-information originate command prevents network 0.0.0.0. from being advertised to DVMRP neighbors and the multicast backbone. Use the ip dvmrp default-information originate command with the ip dvmrp metric-offset command to configure the metric used when advertising the default route 0.0.0.0.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip dvmrp default-information originate [only] no ip dvmrp default-information originate
Command Syntax
only the default DVMRP route is distributed to neighbors only
Command Default
Disabled
12-3
Release 5.2.1
ip dvmrp metric-offset
The ip dvmrp metric-offset command modifies the metrics of the advertised DVMRP routes. The no ip dvmrp metric-offset sets the modified metrics of the advertised DVMRP routes to the default.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip dvmrp metric-offset [in | out] <0-31> no ip dvmrp metric-offset [in | out] <0-31>
Command Syntax
in 0-31 out 0-31 increment value for incoming DVMRP routes increment value for outgoing DVMRP routes
Command Default
in = 1 out = 0
12-4
Release 5.2.1
DVMRP Commands
ip dvmrp output-report-delay
The ip dvmrp output-report-delay command configures transmission delays between packet sets of a DVMRP report. The no ip dvmrp output-report-delay command removes configuration of transmission delays of a DVMRP report.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip dvmrp output-report-delay <1-10> [<1-100>] no ip dvmrp output-report-delay <1-10> [<1-100>]
Command Syntax
1-10 1-100 delay between each route report burst in seconds number of DVMRP reports in each burst
Command Default
Delay between each route report burst = 1 second Number of DVMRP reports in each burst = 2
12-5
Release 5.2.1
ip dvmrp out-report-filter
The ip dvmrp out-report-filter command uses the specified access list to filter the outgoing DVMRP route report for the interface. The no ip dvmrp out-report-filter command disables the use of the specified access list to filter the outgoing DVMRP route report for the interface.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip dvmrp out-report-filter <1-99> no ip dvmrp out-report-filter <1-99>
Command Syntax
1-99 access list for filtering outgoing route reports
Command Default
Disabled
12-6
Release 5.2.1
DVMRP Commands
ip dvmrp probe-interval
The ip dvmrp probe-interval command configures how often a query is sent to neighboring multicast routers for DVMRP multicast routes. The no ip dvmrp probe-interval command disables sending queries.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip dvmrp probe-interval <5-3600> no ip dvmrp probe-interval <5-3600>
Command Syntax
5-3600 probe interval in seconds
12-7
Release 5.2.1
ip dvmrp reject-non-pruners
The ip dvmrp reject-non-pruners command prevents peering with neighbors that do not support DVMRP pruning or grafting. The no ip dvmrp reject-non-pruners command enables peering with all neighbors, even those that do not support DVMRP pruning or grafting. Use the ip dvmrp reject-non-pruners command to discard a DVMRP report message that does not have the prune-capable flag set.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip dvmrp reject-non-pruners no ip dvmrp reject-non-pruners
Command Default
Disabled
12-8
Release 5.2.1
DVMRP Commands
ip dvmrp summary-address
The ip dvmrp summary-address command configures a DVMRP summary address to be advertised out of the interface. The no ip dvmrp summary-address command removes the configuration of a DVMRP summary address that is advertised out of the interface. Use the ip dvmrp summary-address command to advertise the summary address if there is a more specific route in the DVMRP routing table that matches. The summary is advertised with the metric value when specified.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip dvmrp summary-address <A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D> [metric <1-31>] no ip dvmrp summary-address <A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D> [metric <1-31>]
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D A.B.C.D metric 1-31 summary IP address advertised rather than a more specific route mask on summary IP address metric value advertised with the summary address
Command Default
metric = 1
12-9
Release 5.2.1
network
The network command specifies which IP interface should enable DVMRP. The no network command removes the specified IP address to enable DVMRP. Use the network command to be able to use a single command to define one or multiple interfaces to be associated with DVMRP using both the prefix and wildcard-mask arguments. For DVMRP to operate on the interface, the specific IP address on the interface must be covered by the network command. This software sequentially evaluates the address/wildcard-mask pair for each interface as follows:

The wildcard-mask is logically ORed with the interface IP address. The wildcard-mask is logically ORed with address in the network command.
The software compares the two resulting values, and, if they match, DVMRP is enabled on the associated interface.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

network <A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D> no network <A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D>
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D A.B.C.D IP address prefix, network type to broadcast IP address-type mask that includes dont care bits
12-10
Release 5.2.1
DVMRP Commands
router dvmrp
The router dvmrp command configures the DVMRP routing process. The no router dvmrp command removes the DVMRP configured routing process.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

router dvmrp no router dvmrp
Command Default
Disabled
12-11
Release 5.2.1
show ip dvmrp information

The show ip dvmrp information command displays global DVMRP information. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show ip dvmrp information command:
DVMRP Summary Information ------------------------Full Update Interval Trigger Update Interval Route Expiration Timeout Number of Multicast Routes : : : : 60 5 140 0
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip dvmrp information
12-12
Release 5.2.1
DVMRP Commands
show ip dvmrp interface

The show ip dvmrp interface command displays information about interfaces with DVMRP enabled.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip dvmrp interface [statistics]
Command Syntax
statistics display DVMRP interface statistical information
12-13
Release 5.2.1
show ip dvmrp neighbor

The show ip dvmrp neighbor command displays information about neighbors discovered by DVMRP.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip dvmrp neighbor [detail]
Command Syntax
detail detailed information about DVMRP neighbors including neighbor address, interface through which the neighbor is reachable, and the number of routes learned from the neighbor
12-14
Release 5.2.1
DVMRP Commands
show ip dvmrp network

The show ip dvmrp network command shows the DVMRP network configuration as entered by the network command.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip dvmrp network
12-15
Release 5.2.1
show ip dvmrp route

The show ip dvmrp route command displays the DVMRP routing table.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip dvmrp route [entry <A.B.C.D> | neighbor <A.B.C.D>] [detail]
Command Syntax
entry A.B.C.D neighbor A.B.C.D detail IP address of an entry in the routing table IP address of a neighbor in the routing table displays detailed information
12-16
Release 5.2.1
DVMRP Commands
show ip dvmrp route hold-down

The show ip dvmrp route hold-down command displays all of the routes in the DVMRP hold-down table.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip dvmrp route hold-down
12-17
Release 5.2.1
show ip dvmrp summary-route

The show ip dvmrp summary-route command displays the configured DVMRP summary address that is advertised for each interface.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip dvmrp summary-route
12-18
Release 5.2.1
DVMRP Commands
show ip dvmrp tunnels

The show ip dvmrp tunnels command displays information about DVMRP configured tunnels.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip dvmrp tunnels
12-19
13
CMTS Commands
Introduction
This chapter describes the commands used to configure and manage the Cable Modem Termination System (CMTS). The CMTS permits data to be transmitted and received over a broadband cable TV (CATV) network. Downstream network data traffic flows from the CMTS to connected cable modems (CMs), and upstream network data traffic flows from the CMs to the CMTS.
CMTS Command Descriptions

This section contains an alphabetized list and descriptions of the CMTS commands supported by the BSR.
13-1
Release 5.2.1
arp timeout
The arp timeout command configures the amount of time an entry stays in the ARP cache. The no arp timeout command removes the time configuration an entry stays in the ARP cache. Use the show interfaces command in Privileged EXEC mode to view the ARP time-out value. Note: If the ARP time-out value is changed, the new value affects all the existing entries in the ARP cache and any entries subsequently added to the ARP cache.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

arp time-out <1-6000> no arp timeout <1-6000>
Command Syntax
1-6000 amount of time, in minutes, that an entry is allowed to stay in the ARP cache
Command Default
60 minutes
13-2
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
balance
The balance command automatically redistributes CMTS modules across the available HSIM modules in the BSR chassis. Binding re-distributes CMTS traffic to optimize network efficiency. The BSR allows for both manual and automatic binding. For example; if there are 7 CMTS modules in the BSR, and 3 have been manually bound, issuing the balance command will redistribute the remaining 4 CMTS modules while leaving the manually bound modules unaffected.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

balance
13-3
Release 5.2.1
band
The band command is used to define the start and end frequency band for the Spectrum Group.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Cable Spectrum Group
Command Line Usage

band <5000000-42000000> <5000000-42000000> no band <5000000-42000000> <5000000-42000000>
Command Syntax
5000000-42000000 5000000-42000000 The start upstream frequency in Hertz. The end upstream frequency in Hertz.
13-4
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
bind cmts
The bind cmts command manually binds or unbinds a CMTS module to an HSIM module. Binding re-distributes CMTS traffic to optimize network efficiency.The no bind cmts command manually unbinds a CMTS module to an HSIM module.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Slot Configuration
Command Line Usage

bind cmts <NUM> no bind cmts <NUM>
Command Syntax
NUM the number of the slot to bind the CMTS module to
13-5
Release 5.2.1
bootrom-filename
The bootrom-filename command sets the BSR Boot ROM filename using a Boot ROM image file stored in either Flash memory, NVRAM on the Supervisory Routing Module (SRM), or on an FTP or TFTP server. Note: Using the update chassis <Boot ROM filename> command will set the Boot ROM filename automatically. However, you must save the configuration when prompted to preserve the Boot ROM filename across a reboot of the chassis. If the chassis has been restarted before the updated configuration has been saved, you will need to use the bootrom-filename command to set the Boot ROM filename so that automatic Boot ROM recovery can function properly.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

bootrom-filename {flash: | nvram:} {<filename>}
Command Syntax
flash: nvram: specifies flash memory as the location of the boot image file specifies Non-volatile Random Access Memory (NVRAM) as the location of the boot image file filename of the boot image stored in Flash, NVRAM, or on an FTP or TFTP server
filename
13-6
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
bootrom-invalidate slot
Boot ROM invalidate and recovery is a feature available on BSR 64000 5.x releases that allows the SRM to send Boot Invalidation Indication messages to a module running Mini ROM through the bootroom-invalidate slot command for the desired module. If Mini ROM receives a Boot Invalidation Indication message, it will mark its current secondary boot image as invalid and start a TFTP download of a new boot image from the SRM. Bootrom invalidate is useful in the event that a module has a valid secondary boot image, but has unforeseen issues with bringing up the module properly, such as neglecting to provide support for a newer version of a particular component. Boot ROM invalidate allows a user to downgrade a module to a previously known working Boot ROM or to a newer version which properly handles the newer components. Note: The Boot ROM invalidate and recovery feature is only supported by the TX32 and 2:8 CMTS modules. These are the only modules that currently support running a Mini ROM and therefore the Boot ROM invalidate and recovery feature.
Group Access
All
Command Modes
Command Line Usage

bootrom-invalidate slot <NUM>
Command Syntax
NUM the BSR chassis slot number
13-7
Release 5.2.1
cable bind
After using the interface cable command in Global Configuration mode to select a cable interface and MAC Domain, use the cable bind command to modify the MAC Domain definition for the module. Each MAC Domain must have at least one downstream and one upstream channel associated (bound) to it. Using the cable bind command, a user can associate (bind) either one or both of the two downstream channels and a specific group of the eight upstream channels on the module to either of the two MAC Domains available on the module. When installed in an operating BSR chassis, the 2:8 Primary CMTS Resource Module sets up MAC Domains based on the default definition in the startup configuration file.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable bind {downstream <NUM> | upstream <NUM>}
Command Syntax
downstream NUM is a list of local and/or remote downstream channels separated by spaces for a description of the local channels are represented as a single digit channel number NUM syntax for downstream channels, remote channels are in the form slot/downstream port refer to the figure below number/downstream channel number - a remote this table TX32 downstream channel must be bound before it can be bonded upstream NUM specifies a single upstream port number, a subset of upstream port numbers (0,1,2,3 or 4,5,6,7) separated by commas, or all the upstream port numbers on the module (0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7) separated by commas
13-8
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
4/[0-7]/[0-3] 9/[0-1] 11/[0-1]
TX32 Module Slot Number/ TX32 Downstream Port Number/ TX32 Downstream Channel Number
2:8 CMTS Module Slot Number/ Downstream Port Number
Command Default
A MAC Domain definition is defined for each resource module slot in which a 2:8 Primary CMTS Module can be installed (slots 0-7, 9-15) in the BSR startup configuration file. When a 2:8 Primary CMTS Resource Module is installed into an operating BSR chassis, the module, after booting, has one MAC Domain (0). MAC Domain 0 comprises downstream port 0 and upstream ports 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7.
13-9
Release 5.2.1
cable bundle
Cable bundling allows you to group multiple cable interfaces into a single IP subnet. The cable bundle command is used to assign the cable interface as the slave cable interface and assign the bundle the same number as the master cable interface.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable bundle <1-255>
Command Syntax
1-255 the number of the cable bundle
13-10
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable bundle master

The cable bundle master command is used to assign a cable or loopback interface as the master cable interface and assign the cable bundle a number. Cable bundling allows you to group multiple cable interfaces into a single IP subnet. Cable bundling simplifies network management and conserves IP addresses.
A cable bundle comprises two or more cable interfaces: one cable interface is configured as the master, while the remaining interfaces are configured as slaves to the master. If one CMTS module is configured as the master, the other CMTS modules can become slaves. The master cable interface is assigned IP addresses and the slaves share the same IP address with the master. The bundling feature eliminates the need for an IP subnet for each cable interface. Configuring a loopback interface as a cable bundle master provides a mechanism for configuring the IP parameters of a cable bundle in a virtual interface which is independent of physical cable interfaces. The advantage of configuring a virtual interface as the cable bundle master is that IP configuration information will be always available regardless of the state of the CMTS hardware. The slave cable interfaces of a bundle whose master is a virtual interface will not lose their IP information when the hardware module for one of the cable interfaces has either failed or been removed.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable bundle <1-255> master
Command Syntax
1-255 the cable bundle identifying number
13-11
Release 5.2.1
cable cmts type

The cable cmts type command specifies the DOCSIS type supported by all CMTS modules resident in the BSR chassis.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable cmts type {Domestic | Japan} no cable cmts type {Domestic | Japan}
Command Syntax
Domestic specifies the CMTS module type to the North American DOCSIS or Euro-DOCSIS standards specifies the CMTS module types to the Japan DOCSIS (J-DOCSIS) Standard
Japan
Command Default
Domestic
13-12
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable concatenation docsis-1.0

The cable concatenation docsis-1.0 command enables or disables concatenation for DOCSIS 1.0 cable modems. The no cable concatenation docsis-1.0 command disables concatenation for DOCSIS 1.0 cable modems.
Note: Concatenation must be enabled globally with the cable upstream concatenation command before any setting specified with the cable concatenation command is valid. Once concatenation is enabled globally, the cable concatenation command will enable or disable concatentation for DOCSIS 1.0 cable modems only and concatenation will always be enabled for DOCSIS 1.1 and DOCSIS 2.0 cable modems regardless of any setting specified with this command.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable concatenation docsis-1.0 no cable concatenation docsis-1.0
Command Syntax
docsis-1.0
concatenation is enabled for DOCSIS 1.0 cable modems only
Command Default
Concatenation is enabled for DOCSIS 1.0, 1.1, and 2.0 cable modems if concatenation is globally enabled with the cable upstream concatenation command.
13-13
Release 5.2.1
cable deny ip
The cable deny ip command allows operators to filter (drop) worm/virus packets on both the upstream and downstream cable interfaces by specifying the IP protocol used by the virus or worm and its packet length (in bytes) to enable a filter for a particular threat. The no cable deny ip command disables the filter.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable deny ip <0-255> <20-65535> no cable deny ip <0-255> <20-65535>
Command Syntax
0-255 20-65535 a numeric value indicating which IP protocol number to drop the length in bytes indicating the size of the IP packet to drop
13-14
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable dhcp force-unicast

The cable dhcp force-unicast command forces downstream DHCP traffic to be unicasted regardless of the setting of the DHCP broadcast bit. The initial DHCP exchange for a cable modem occurs before the cable modem completes DHCP. Therefore the packets for that DHCP exchange must be sent unencrypted. If the downstream DHCP responses are broadcasted, then they must be broadcasted unencrypted. These downstream broadcasts will then "leak" onto the CPE LAN of all cable modems on that MAC Domain. The cable dhcp force-unicast command can be used to prevent this leakage. When the cable dhcp force-unicast command is present in the running configuration, the BSRs DHCP relay agent ignores the "broadcast bit" in downstream cable modem DHCP responses and always sends unicasted downstream DHCP responses to cable modems. These broadcasts will be encrypted using the appropriate SAID.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable dhcp force-unicast no cable dhcp force-unicast
13-15
Release 5.2.1
cable dhcp preserve-server-id

The cable dhcp preserve-server-id command prevents the modification of DHCP option 54, server ID, as a part of MPLS VPN support on the BSR 64000. The no cable dhcp preserve-server-id command re-establishes the default behavior, which is to allow modification of DHCP option 54.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable dhcp preserve-server-id no cable dhcp preserve-server-id
Command Default
Disabled
13-16
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable dhcp-giaddr primary

This cable dhcp-giaddr primary command forces the BSR to always set the giaddr in host DHCP requests to the primary cable interface IP address. The no cable dhcp-giaddr primary command sets the giaddr field in DHCP host requests to the default. When set to the default, the first secondary address, if one is defined, is used in DHCP host requests, otherwise the primary IP address is used.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable dhcp-giaddr primary no cable dhcp-giaddr primary
Command Default
The giaddr for cable modems is the primary IP address on the cable interface. The giaddr for Hosts is the first secondary IP address on the cable interface.
13-17
Release 5.2.1
cable dhcp leasequery message-type

The cable dhcp leasequery message-type command sets the DHCP Leasequery message type values that the BSR uses. The default DHCP Leasequery message types are defined by RFC4388 DHCP Leasequery. The no cable dhcp leasequery message-type command re-establishes the default DHCP Leasequery message type values. Guidelines for Configuring DHCP Leasequery Message Types RFC4388 defines the DHCP Leasequery protocol. Various DHCP server and CMTS vendors have implemented draft revisions of the DHCP Leasequery protocol prior to the publication of RFC4388. The main difference between these vendor specific drafts and RFC4388 is the specification of the message type value for each of the DHCP Leasequery message types. These inconsistencies have led to interoperability problems. To address this issue, Motorola now supports configurable DHCP Leasequery message type values (through the cable dhcp leasequery message-type command) to support non-compliant implementations of the DHCP Leasequery protocol. Note: If a DHCP server allows configurable DHCP Leasequery message types, Motorola recommends that the message type values specified in RFC4388 be used. Some implementations of the DHCP Leasequery protocol may not use all four DHCP Leasequery message types. In such cases, any unused message type value may be configured for the unimplemented message types.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable dhcp leasequery message-type <10-254> no cable dhcp leasequery message-type <10-254>
13-18
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
Command Syntax
10-254 DHCPLEASEQUERY message type
Command Default
10
13-19
Release 5.2.1
cable disable 3140-nbpwr-adjustment

The cable disable 3140-nbpwr-adjustment command allows an operator to enable NB-PWR adjustments for the BCM3140. The command configures upstream nominal power levels to be 3dB lower which eliminates any US TX power discrepancies for the DOCSIS 2.0 2x8 CMTS module. A US TX power discrepancy could potentially cause cable modem registration/ranging issues for cable modems operating at a maximum US TX power level. The no cable disable 3140-nbpwr-adjustment disables NB-PWR adjustment.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable disable 3140-nbpwr-adjustment no cable disable 3140-nbpwr-adjustment
Command Default
Disabled
13-20
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable disable bpi-cmcert

The cable disable bpi-cmcert command bypasses the cable modem (CM) certificate verification during the BPI authentication key exchange. Using the cable disable bpi-cmcert command is similar to provisioning a cable modem certificate. The difference is that provisioning a cable modem certificate is on a per cable modem basis whereas the cable disable bpi-cmcert command is for all cable modems with the same Manufacturer ID. The no cable disable bpi-cmcert command disables bypassing cable modem certificate verification
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable disable <mac> <mac> bpi-cmcert no cable disable <mac> <mac> bpi-cmcert
Command Syntax
mac the cable modem Vendor MAC address in the form of xxxx.xxxx.xxxx - the first 3 bytes have to be 0xFF (ffff.ffxx.xxxx) in order to extract the Manufacturer ID from Vendor MAC Address the mask to specify a particular cable modem or a range of cable modems in the form yyyy.yyyy.yyyy
mac
Command Default
Disabled
13-21
Release 5.2.1
cable disable eth-pkt-filtering

The cable disable eth-pkt-filtering command disables filtering of Ethernet packets based on MAC addresses received at the CMTS. When Ethernet packet filtering is disabled, the CMTS accepts and processes any Ethernet packet. The no cable disable eth-pkt-filtering command enables the filtering of Ethernet packets.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable disable eth-pkt-filtering no cable disable eth-pkt-filtering
Command Default
Enabled
13-22
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable downstream aggregate

The cable downstream aggregate command configures a downstream aggregate rate limiter. If numerous service flows are backlogged and rate limiting is turned on, dpsDsTask can run at high CPU levels This command implements a downstream ARL and calendar scheduled flow rate limiting to resolve the high dspDsTask CPU level due to rate limiting and can also improved downstream throughput.
Warning: The cable downstream aggregate command should be used only when instructed to do so by Motorola support personnel
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable downstream <NUM> aggregate { burst <250-1000000> | fraction <0-100>} no cable downstream <NUM> aggregate { burst <250-1000000> | fraction <0-100>}
Command Syntax
NUM burst 250-1000000 fraction 0-100 the downstream port number the downstream traffic burst downstream in usec the percentage of downstream throughput
Command Default
fraction = 95%
13-23
Release 5.2.1
cable downstream bdm-interval

The cable downstream bdm-interval command configures the Motorola proprietary bonding descriptor message transmission interval.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable bdm-interval <100-2000> no cable bdm-interval <100-2000>
Command Syntax
100-2000
bonding descriptor message interval in milliseconds - entries will be rounded to nearest 50 milliseconds - for example, an entry of 151 milliseconds would be rounded to 200 milliseconds - the default bonding descriptor message transmission interval is 2000 milliseconds (2 seconds) - a value of "0" disables sending MDD messages on this MAC Domain
Command Default
250 milliseconds
13-24
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable downstream bonding disable

The cable downstream bonding disable command disables channel bonding for a downstream channel. The no cable downstream bonding disable command enables channel bonding for a downstream channel. Note: Disabling downstream channel bonding during run-time will result in the deregistration of all bonding cable modems associated with this MAC domain.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable downstream bonding disable no cable downstream bonding disable
Command Default
Enabled
13-25
Release 5.2.1
cable downstream bonding-domain

The cable downstream bonding-domain command configures a bonding domain that will be used for binding more than one MAC Domain to a bonding group. The no cable downstream bonding-domain removes a bonding domain from the BSRs configuration. All bonding groups configured in a bonding domain must be deleted before removing that bonding domain from the BSRs configuration. The BSR will not allow the configuration of bonding domains whose slots are currently configured in an existing bonding domain. For example, if a bonding domain is currently configured to include slots 1 and 2 and the user wants to remove slot 2 from that bonding domain, the bonding domain consisting of slots 1 and 2 must first be removed and then a new bonding domain must be created that only includes slot 1.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable downstream bonding-domain <NUM> [<NUM>] no cable downstream bonding-domain <NUM> [<NUM>]
Command Syntax
NUM
the BSR 2:8 CMTS module slot number
13-26
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable downstream bonding-group

The cable downstream bonding-group command is used to configure a DOCSIS 3.0 downstream channel bonding group. The no cable downstream bonding-group command removes a downstream channel bonding group.
Note: To configure a Motorola Proprietary downstream channel bonding group, refer to the cable downstream mot-bonding-group command.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable downstream bonding-group <1-65535> <NUM> no cable downstream bonding-group <1-65535> <NUM>
13-27
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
1-65535 NUM the DOCSIS 3.0 downstream channel bonding group number a list of local and/or remote downstream channels associated with this channel bonding group which includes TX32 or 2:8 CMTS modules installed in the BSR local channels are represented as a single digit channel number remote channels are in the form slot/downstream port number/ downstream channel number each in the channel list needs to be separated by a space - a remote TX32 downstream channel must be bound before it can be bonded (refer to the example output below)
4/[0-7]/[0-3] 9/[0-1] 11/[0-1]
13-28
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable downstream carrier-only

The downstream carrier-only function is disabled by default and is used for testing purposes only to control the behavior of the downstream output. The cable downstream carrier-only command is optionally used as a test function to enable the sending of an un-modulated (CW) RF carrier on the downstream port. The no cable downstream carrier-only command disables the sending of the un-modulated RF carrier on the downstream port.
Group Access
MSO
Command Modes
TX32 Downstream Configuration Interface Configuration (cable interface only)
Command Line Usage

cable downstream <NUM> carrier-only no cable downstream <NUM> carrier-only
Command Syntax
NUM the downstream channel or port number
Command Default
Modulation to the RF carrier is disabled.
13-29
Release 5.2.1
cable downstream channel-id

The cable downstream channel-id command allows a user to specify a Channel ID number for a downstream port instead of using the default pre-defined Channel IDs that are automatically assigned to the downstream ports by the SRM. Refer to the BSR 64000 CMTS Configuration and Management Guide for a listing of the default downstream channel IDs.
Note: Channel IDs must be unique within a BSR chassis.
Group Access
MSO
Command Modes
Command Line Usage

cable downstream <NUM> channel-id <1-255> no cable downstream <NUM> channel-id <1-255>
Command Syntax
NUM 1-255 the downstream channel or port number the downstream Channel ID number
13-30
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable downstream channel-mode

The cable downstream channel-mode command configures the channel mode (1 channel, 2 channel, or 4 channel) of a TX32 downstream RF port. The no cable downstream channel-mode command returns to the default value. When configured to the default value of 4, the configuration is not displayed in with the show running-config downstream port command. Note: The TX32 downstream RF port must be shutdown before changing the channel mode of the port. Also, the user must first unbind the already bound affected channels of the TX32 downstream RF port before changing the channel mode of the port.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
TX32 Downstream Configuration
Command Line Usage

cable downstream channel-mode {1 | 2 | 4} no cable downstream channel-mode {1 | 2 | 4}
Command Syntax
1 2 4 allocate 1 channel on this port allocate 2 channels on this port allocate 4 channels on this port
Command Default
4 = allocate 4 channels on this port
13-31
Release 5.2.1
cable downstream description

The cable downstream description command is used to specify descriptive information for a downstream port. For example: an MSO could assign the following description:
MOT:7A(config-ds)#cable downstream description TX32 dsport 0 MOT:7A(config-if)#cable downstream 0 description 2:8 local dsport 0
Note: The entered description can be seen in the running configuration, and in the command output of show commands such as the show ip interface and show running-config commands.
Group Access
MSO
Command Modes
Command Line Usage

TX32 Downstream Configuration Mode cable downstream description <LINE> Cable Interface Configuration Mode cable downstream <NUM> description <LINE>
Command Syntax
NUM LINE the downstream port number the text that describes the interface - this information is limited to 80 characters spaces can be used and are counted as a part of the 80 character limit
13-32
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable downstream fiber-node

The cable downstream fiber-node command associates a TX32 RF Port or CMTS 2:8 downstream port to one or more configured Fiber Nodes. The no cable downstream fiber-node command removes a Fiber Node association.
Group Access
MSO
Command Modes
Command Line Usage

TX32 Downstream Configuration Mode cable downstream fiber-node <WORD> no cable downstream fiber-node Cable Interface Configuration Mode cable downstream <NUM> fiber-node <WORD> no cable downstream <NUM> fiber-node
Command Syntax
NUM WORD the downstream port number is the list of Fiber Node names separated by commas with no spaces allowed
13-33
Release 5.2.1
cable downstream frequency

The cable downstream frequency command is used to set the fixed center downstream frequency for RF output. The no cable downstream command returns the fixed center downstream frequency of RF output to the default. Note: The four downstream frequencies of a TX32 downstream port are configured by configuring downstream channel 0s center frequency. Explicit configuration of the downstream frequency for channels 1-3 is not allowed. The downstream frequencies of channels 1-3 are derived internally as the next three contiguous frequencies in the spectrum (based on a channel-width of 6 or 8 MHz) from the downstream frequency defined for channel 0. Note: The respective DOCSIS standard (North American DOCSIS, Euro-DOCSIS, or Japan-DOCSIS) must be specified with the cable dtx type command before a downstream frequency can be selected for a TX32 module. The Japan DOCSIS Standard must be specified with the cable cmts type command before a downstream frequency can be selected for any Japan DOCSIS Standard CMTS 2:8 module.
Group Access
MSO
Command Modes
13-34
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
Command Line Usage

North American DOCSIS cable downstream <NUM> frequency <91000000-857000000> no cable downstream <NUM> frequency <91000000-857000000> EuroDOCSIS Standard cable downstream <NUM> frequency <91000000-858000000> no cable downstream <NUM> frequency <91000000-858000000> Japan DOCSIS (J-DOCSIS) Standard cable downstream <NUM> frequency <91000000-860000000> no cable downstream <NUM> frequency <91000000-860000000>
Command Syntax
NUM 91000000-857000000 the downstream channel or port number the downstream carrier center frequency for the North American DOCSIS standard - valid values are from 91000000 to 857000000 Hertz (Hz) for North American DOCSIS and should be in multiples of 62500 Hz the downstream carrier center frequency for the EuroDOCSIS standard - valid values are from 112000000 to 858000000 Hertz (Hz) for EuroDOCSIS and should be in multiples of 62500 Hz the downstream carrier center frequency for the Japan DOCSIS (J-DOCSIS) Standard valid values are from 91000000 to 857000000 Hertz (Hz) for Japan DOCSIS and should be in multiples of 62500 Hz
112000000-858000000
91000000-860000000
Command Default
555000000 Hz
13-35
Release 5.2.1
cable downstream interleave-depth

The cable operator can protect the downstream path from excess noise or decrease latency on the downstream path by setting the interleave depth. A higher interleave depth provides more protection from noise on the HFC network, but increases downstream latency. A lower interleave depth decreases downstream latency, but provides less protection from noise on the HFC network. The cable downstream interleave-depth command sets the downstream port interleave depth criteria.
Note: A higher interleave depth provides more protection from bursts of noise on the HFC network; however, it increases downstream latency.
Group Access
MSO
Command Modes
Command Line Usage

TX32 Downstream Configuration Mode cable downstream interleave-depth {8 | 16 | 32 | 64 | 128} no cable downstream interleave-depth {8 | 16 | 32 | 64 | 128} Cable Interface Configuration Mode cable downstream <NUM> interleave-depth {8 | 16 | 32 | 64 | 128} no cable downstream <NUM> interleave-depth {8 | 16 | 32 | 64 | 128}
Command Syntax
NUM the downstream port number
13-36
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
Review the following to determine the appropriate interleave-depth. The increment parameter determines the amount of delay increment in symbols for each additional tap in the algorithm Depth
8 12 16 32 64 128
# of Taps
8 12 16 32 64 128
Increments
16 17 8 4 2 1
Note: The Euro DOCSIS standard requires an interleave depth of 12.
Command Default
The command default is 8 for North American DOCSIS.
13-37
Release 5.2.1
cable downstream loadbalance-group

The cable downstream loadbalance-group command assigns a downstream channel to a load balancing group. The no cable downstream loadbalance-group command removes the downstream channel from the load balancing group.
Note: The same downstream channel may be assigned to multiple load balancing groups.
Group Access
MSO
Command Modes
Command Line Usage

cable downstream <NUM> loadbalance-group <WORD> no cable downstream <NUM> loadbalance-group <WORD>
Command Syntax
NUM WORD the downstream channel or port number the name of the load balancing group to assign to this downstream channel or port number
13-38
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable downstream modulation

The cable downstream modulation command sets the modulation rate for a downstream port. The no cable downstream modulation command returns the modulation rate setting to the default.
Group Access
MSO
Command Modes
Command Line Usage

TX32 Downstream Configuration Mode cable downstream modulation {256 | 64} no cable downstream modulation {256 | 64} Cable Interface Configuration Mode cable downstream <NUM> modulation {256 | 64} no cable downstream <NUM> modulation {256 | 64}
Command Syntax
NUM 256 64 the downstream port number the modulation rate, 8 bits per downstream symbol the modulation rate, 6 bits per downstream symbol
Command Default
64 QAM
13-39
Release 5.2.1
cable downstream mot-bonding-group

The cable downstream mot-bonding-group command is used to configure a Motorola proprietary downstream channel bonding group. The no cable downstream mot-bonding-group command removes a downstream Motorola proprietary downstream channel bonding group.
Note: To configure a DOCSIS 3.0 downstream channel bonding group, refer to the cable downstream bonding-group command.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable downstream mot-bonding-group <1-65535> <NUM> no cable downstream mot-bonding-group <1-65535> <NUM>
13-40
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
Command Syntax
1-65535 the downstream Motorola proprietary channel bonding group number a list of local and/or remote downstream channels associated with this channel bonding group which includes TX32 or 2:8 CMTS modules installed in the BSR local channels are represented as a single digit channel number remote channels are in the form slot/downstream port number/ downstream channel number each in the channel list needs to be separated by a space - a remote TX32 downstream channel must be bound before it can be bonded (refer to the example output below)
NUM
4/[0-7]/[0-3] 9/[0-1] 11/[0-1]
13-41
Release 5.2.1
cable downstream multicast enable

The cable downstream multicast enable command allows a user to configure a downstream channel as multicast capable. This enables the replication of downstream multicast packets on the specified channel/port. The no cable downstream multicast enable command disables the replication of a downstream multicast packets on this downstream channel/port.
Group Access
MSO
Command Modes
Command Line Usage

TX32 Downstream Configuration Mode cable downstream <0-3> multicast enable no cable downstream <0-3> multicast enable Cable Interface Configuration Mode cable downstream <NUM> multicast enable no cable downstream <NUM> multicast enable
Command Syntax
0-3 NUM the TX32 downstream channel number the CMTS 2:8 downstream port number
Command Default
Enabled
13-42
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable downstream non-bonding-reset interval

The cable downstream non-bonding-reset interval configures the periodic resetting of bonding capable cable modems operating in a non-bonded mode fter a specific time interval. The no cable downstream non-bonding-reset interval command disables the periodic resetting of bonding capable cable modems operating in a non-bonded mode fter a specific time interval.
Group Access
All
Command Mode Global Configuration Command Line Usage

cable downstream non-bonding-reset interval <5-10080> no cable downstream non-bonding-reset interval
Command Syntax
10080 the reset interval in minutes
Command Default
Disabled
13-43
Release 5.2.1
cable downstream port

TX32 Downstream Port Configuration mode allows a user to configure a TX32 downstream port. The cable downstream port command enters TX32 Downstream Port Configuration mode. After issuing the cable downstream port command, the command line prompt changes to: MOT:7A(config-ds)# Use the end or exit commands to return to Global Configuration mode.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable downstream port <X/Y>
Command Syntax
X/Y the slot and downstream port number of the TX32 module
13-44
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable downstream power-level

The cable downstream power-level command sets the power level of a downstream channel. The no cable downstream power-level changes the power level setting of a downstream channel to the default. The cable downstream power-level command set the absolute power level in tenths of dBmV. Note: The allowed power levels that can be specified with the cable downstream power-level command for theTX32 will vary depending on the channel mode that the TX32 is set to with the cable downstream channel-mode command (1, 2, or 4 channel mode). Power-level ranges valid for a TX32 port are as follows: Channel Mode 1 Power Level <520-600> Channel Mode 2 Power Level <480-560> Channel Mode 4 Power Level <440-520> If a power level is configured beyond the range allowed, an error will be displayed and the configuration will be rejected.
Group Access
MSO
Command Modes
13-45
Release 5.2.1
Command Line Usage

TX32 Downstream Configuration Mode cable downstream power-level <440-600> no cable downstream power-level <440-600> Cable Interface Configuration Mode cable downstream <NUM> power-level <450-630> no cable downstream <NUM> power-level <450-630>
Command Syntax
NUM 440-600 450-630 the downstream port number downstream power level value for a TX32 module in tenths of a dBmV downstream power level value for a 2:8 CMTS module in tenths of a dBmV
Command Defaults
2:8 CMTS module = 550 (55.0 dBmV) TX32 module = 520 (52.0 dBmV)
13-46
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable downstream primary-capable

The cable downstream primary-capable command enables the primary capable option for a downstream channel port. The no cable downstream primary-capable command to disables the primary capable option for a downstream channel or port. When configured to the default to value of Enabled, the cable downstream primary-capable configuration is not displayed in the show running-config command output.
Group Access
MSO
Command Modes
Command Line Usage

cable downstream <NUM> primary-capable no cable downstream <NUM> primary-capable
Command Syntax
Command Default
Enabled
13-47
Release 5.2.1
cable downstream rate-limit

The cable downstream rate-limit command controls whether rate limiting is applied to downstream traffic on a given downstream interface. The no cable upstream rate-limit command disables downstream rate limiting. A token-bucket algorithm is used for rate limiting. Note: If rate limiting is enabled, downstream traffic is rate limited according to the cable modems configured throughput. Packets may be buffered at times when any cable modem or the hosts behind the cable modems transmit data exceeding the permitted bandwidth.
Group Access
MSO
Command Modes
TX32 Downstream Configuration Mode Interface Configuration (cable interface only)
Command Line Usage

cable downstream <NUM> rate-limit no cable downstream <NUM> rate-limit
Command Syntax
Command Default
Disabled
13-48
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable downstream schedule

The cable downstream schedule command is used to configure the type of scheduling to be applied on downstream ports.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable downstream schedule {priority-only | priority-wfq}
Command Syntax
priority-only priority-wfq specifies the use of straight priority-based scheduling specifies the use of priority-based weighted fair queuing scheduling
13-49
Release 5.2.1
cable downstream scrambler on

The cable downstream scrambler on command enables the scrambler for a downstream port. The no cable downstream scrambler on command disables the scrambler for a downstream port.
Group Access
All
Command Modes
Command Line Usage

TX32 Downstream Configuration Mode cable downstream scrambler on no cable downstream scrambler on Cable Interface Configuration Mode cable downstream <NUM> scrambler on no cable downstream <NUM> scrambler on
Command Syntax
13-50
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable downstream shutdown

The cable downstream shutdown command is used to disable an enabled downstream port. Certain downstream parameters require that the downstream port is disabled before these parameters are configured. The downstream port is disabled by default. Use the no cable downstream shutdown command to enable the downstream port after the required downstream parameters are configured for the BSR. The downstream port is not active for data transmission until it is enabled.
Group Access
MSO
Command Modes
Command Line Usage

TX32 Downstream Configuration Mode cable downstream shutdown no cable downstream shutdown cable downstream <NUM> shutdown no cable downstream <NUM> shutdown Cable Interface Configuration Mode cable downstream <NUM> shutdown no cable downstream <NUM> shutdown
Command Syntax
Command Default
The downstream port(s) on the cable interface is disabled or "shut down" by default.
13-51
Release 5.2.1
cable downstream sync-interval

The cable downstream sync-interval command sets the synchronization interval between transmission of successive SYNC messages from the TX32 to the cable modems. The synchronization message interval is the interval between successive synchronization message transmissions from a TX32s RF port. The no cable downstream sync-interval returns the interval setting to transmit SYNC messages to the default.
Note: Disable the cable interface using the cable downstream shutdown command before using the cable downstream sync-interval command.
The BSR will only send SYNC messages on primary capable downstream channels.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
TX32 Downstream Configuration
Command Line Usage

cable downstream sync-interval <0-200> no cable downstream sync-interval <0-200>
Command Syntax
0-200 synchronization interval in milliseconds.
Command Default
10
13-52
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable downstream threshold

The cable downstream threshold command specifies downstream channel upper and lower queue thresholds for a 2:8 CMTS or 2:8 (2.0) CMTS module. This command allows an operator to configure "back pressure" parameters for various applications. For example, if the BSR is running both a time critical application (such as Voice Over IP) and best effort service, the cable downstream threshold command guarantees that the downstream scheduler can only release bandwidth within a certain specified range to the downstream channel. When a higher priority VOIP packet arrives, the VOIP packet will move ahead of the previously queued downstream non-VOIP data.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable downstream <NUM> threshold {bytes <500-65535> [<500-65535>] | pdu <16-256> <16-256>} no cable downstream <NUM> threshold {bytes <500-65535> [<500-65535>] | pdu <16-256> <16-256>}
Command Syntax
NUM bytes 500-65535 500-65535 pdu 16-256 16-256 the downstream channel number use the byte count as a threshold unit specify the upper byte threshold specify the optional lower byte threshold use the PDU count as a threshold unit specify the upper PDU threshold specify the lower PDU threshold
13-53
Release 5.2.1
Command Defaults
upper byte threshold = 1000 bytes lower byte threshold = 500 bytes upper pdu threshold = 32 PDUs lower pdu threshold = 16 PDUs
Note: When using the byte count parameter as the threshold unit, you must specify a value for the lower byte threshold. If the lower byte threshold is not specified, the BSR will automatically use one half of the upper byte threshold value as the lower byte threshold value.
13-54
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable downstream trap-enable-if

The cable downstream trap-enable-if command enables the ifLinkUpDownTrapEnable trap for a downstream channel. The ifLinkUpDownTrapEnable trap indicates whether a link up or link down trap should be generated. The cable downstream no trap-enable-if command disables the ifLinkUpDownTrapEnable trap.
Group Access
All
Command Modes
Command Line Usage

cable downstream <NUM> trap-enable-if no cable downstream <NUM> trap-enable-if
Command Syntax
Command Default
Disabled
13-55
Release 5.2.1
cable downstream trap-enable-rdn

The cable downstream trap-enable-rdn command enables the rdnCardIfLinkUpDownEnable trap for a downstream channel. The rdnCardIfLinkUpDownEnable trap indicates whether a link up or link down trap should be generated. The no cable downstream trap-enable-rdn command disables the rdnCardIfLinkUpDownEnable trap.
Group Access
All
Command Modes
Command Line Usage

cable downstream <NUM> trap-enable-rdn no cable downstream <NUM> trap-enable-rdn
Command Syntax
Command Default
Disabled
13-56
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable dtx type

The cable dtx type command configures the operational mode of a TX32 module. If the default configuration of domestic is used, the cable dtx type command configuration does not appear in the show running-config command output. The cable dtx type command is only applicable to TX32 slots. Note: All downstream channels of the DTX card must be administratively shutdown before the DTX type is changed. The respective DOCSIS standard (North American DOCSIS, EuroDOCSIS, or Japan-DOCSIS) must be specified with the cable dtx type command before a downstream frequency can be selected for a TX32 module.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
TX32 Slot Configuration
Command Line Usage

cable dtx type {domestic | euro | japan }
Command Syntax
domestic euro japan set module type to North American DOCSIS standard set module type to EuroDOCSIS standard set module type to Japan-DOCSIS standard
Command Default
domestic
13-57
Release 5.2.1
cable dynamic-service admitted-timeout

The cable dynamic-service admitted-timeout command allows a user to set an admitted timeout value for admitted service flows. If the admitted timeout value is exceeded by a service flow, the service flow is deleted. In previous software releases, the service flow was only deferred. The value specified with this command will be used for the admitted timeout unless an admitted timeout value is specified by the TLV. The no cable dynamic-service admitted-timeout command disables the admitted timeout timer.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (cable or loopback interfaces only)
Command Line Usage

cable dynamic-service admitted-timeout <0-65535> no cable dynamic-service admitted-timeout
Command Syntax
0-65535
the admitted timeout in seconds, a value of "0" disables the admitted timeout timer
Note: Disabling the cable dynamic-service admitted-timeout command by using a value of "0" or using the no version of the command, causes a service flow that has exceeded an admitted timeout to be deferred instead of deleted as in previous software releases.
Command Default
0
13-58
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable fast-path cm
The cable fast-path cm command enables HSIM fast path forwarding of cable modem traffic by adding cable modem ARP entries to the HSIM fast path. The no cable fast-path cm command disables HSIM fast path forwarding of cable modem traffic.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable fast-path cm no cable fast-path cm
Command Default
Enabled
13-59
Release 5.2.1
cable filter group index src-ip

The cable filter group index src-ip command configures the source IP address and bit mask, which must match the classified packets source IP address and bit mask. The no cable filter group index src-ip command returns to the default values. The no cable filter group index command deletes the assigned packet filter group.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable filter group <1-32> index <1-64> src-ip <A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D> no cable filter group <1-32> index <1-64> src-ip <A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D> no cable filter group <1-32> index <1-64>
Command Syntax
1-32 1-64 A.B.C.D A.B.C.D subscriber management filter group number submanagement packet filter number (index) source IP address source IP bit mask
Command Default
source IP address: 0.0.0.0 source IP bit mask: 0.0.0.0
13-60
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable filter group index dst-ip

The cable filter group index dst-ip command configures the destination IP address and bit mask, which must match the classified packets destination IP address and bit mask. The no cable filter group index dst-ip command returns to the default values. The no cable filter group index command deletes the assigned packet filter group.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable filter group <1-32> index <1-64> dst-ip <A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D> no cable filter group <1-32> index <1-64> dst-ip <A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D> no cable filter group <1-32> index <1-64>
Command Syntax
1-32 1-64 A.B.C.D A.B.C.D subscriber management filter group number submanagement packet filter number (index) destination IP address destination IP bit mask
Command Default
destination IP address: 0.0.0.0 destination IP bit mask: 0.0.0.0
13-61
Release 5.2.1
cable filter group index ulp

Use the cable filter group index ulp command in Global Configuration mode to configure the Layer 4 upper level protocol (ULP) IP protocol number, which is to be matched in the classified packet. The no cable filter group index ulp command returns to the default value. The no cable filter group index command deletes the assigned packet filter group.
Note: If the ULP number is 256, it matches all ULP values.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable filter group <1-32> index <1-64> ulp <0-256> no cable filter group <1-32> index <1-64> ulp <0-256> no cable filter group <1-32> index <1-64>
Command Syntax
1-32 1-64 0-256 subscriber management filter group number submanagement packet filter number (index) ULP number
Command Default
256
13-62
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable filter group index tos

The cable filter group index tos command configures the Type of Service (TOS) value and mask, which is to be matched in the classified packet. The no cable filter group index tos command returns to the default value. The no cable filter group index command deletes the assigned packet filter group.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable filter group <1-32> index <1-64> tos <0x0-0xff> <0x0-0xff> no cable filter group <1-32> index <1-64> tos <0x0-0xff> <0x0-0xff> no cable filter group <1-32> index <1-64>
Command Syntax
1-32 1-64 0x0-0xff 0x0-0xff subscriber management filter group number submanagement packet filter number (index) hexidecimal TOS number hexidecimal TOS mask
Command Default
0x0
13-63
Release 5.2.1
cable filter group index action

The cable filter group index action command configures the action to take when the packet filter matches. The no cable filter group index action command disables the packet filter. The no cable filter group index command deletes the assigned packet filter group.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable filter group <1-32> index <1-64> action {accept | drop} no cable filter group <1-32> index <1-64> action {accept | drop} no cable filter group <1-32> index <1-64>
Command Syntax
1-32 1-64 accept drop subscriber management filter group number submanagement packet filter number (index) accepts the packet for further processing discards the packet
Command Default
accept
13-64
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable filter group index enable

The cable filter group index enable command enables the configured packet filter. The no cable filter group index enable command disables the configured packet filter. The no cable filter group index command deletes the assigned packet filter group.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable filter group <1-32> index <1-64> enable no cable filter group <1-32> index <1-64> enable no cable filter group <1-32> index <1-64>
Command Syntax
1-32 1-64 subscriber management filter group number submanagement packet filter number (index)
Command Default
Disabled
13-65
Release 5.2.1
cable flap-list aging

The cable flap-list aging command specifies the cable flap-list aging in terms of maximum number of minutes a cable modem is kept in the flap-list. Use the no cable flap-list aging command to disable cable flap-list aging. Use this command to keep track of cable modem mac address upstream and downstream traffic for every cable modem having communication problems. Problems can be detected when the cable is inactive. This command will show cable modem registration events, missed ranging packets, upstream power adjustments, and the CMTS physical interface. Monitoring the flap list can not affect cable modem communications. The user can get the following information with the cable flap-list aging number of days command: Upstream performance data. Quality control installation data. Cable modem problem isolation and location. CMTS problems based upon high activity. Unreliable upstream paths based on high CRC errors. Unreliable in-home wiring problems based on high CRC errors.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Global Configuration and Interface Configuration (cable interface only)
Command Line Usage

cable flap-list aging <1-86400> no cable flap-list aging <1-86400>
Command Syntax
1-86400 maximum number of minutes a cable modem is kept in the flap-list
13-66
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
Command Default
1440 minutes
13-67
Release 5.2.1
cable flap-list insertion-time

The cable flap-list insertion-time command sets the insertion time interval in seconds. Use the no form of this command to disable insertion time.
Use the cable flap-list insertion-time command to manage the flapping modem detector and place the cable modem on the flap list if the connection time is outside the insertion time interval.
Note: The insertion-time is the time taken by cable modems to complete their registration.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable flap-list insertion-time <1-86400> no cable flap-list insertion-time <1-86400>
Command Syntax
1-86400 insertion time interval in seconds
Command Default
60 seconds
13-68
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable flap-list miss-threshold

The cable flap-list miss-threshold command specifies the threshold for missing consecutive polling messages which triggers the polling flap detector. The no cable flap-list miss-threshold removes the specified threshold.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable flap-list miss-threshold <1-12> no cable flap-list miss-threshold <1-12>
Command Syntax
1-12 missing consecutive polling messages
Command Default
6
13-69
Release 5.2.1
cable flap-list percentage threshold

The cable flap-list percentage-threshold command specifies the CM miss percentage threshold. The no cable flap-list percentage-threshold command restores the default threshold value. If CM miss percentage exceeds the flapListPercentageThreshold and the flapListTrap is enabled with the cable flap-list trap-enable command, a flapListTrap will be sent to the CMTS by the SNMP agent.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable flap-list percentage-threshold <1-100> no cable flap-list percentage-threshold
Command Syntax
1-100 the CM miss threshold percentage
Command Default
10 percent
13-70
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable flap-list power-adjust threshold

The cable flap-list power-adjust threshold specifies the flap-list power adjustment parameters in dBmV for recording a flap-list event. The no cable flap-list power-adjust threshold command disables power-adjust thresholds. Use the cable flap-list power-adjust threshold to manage the flapping modem detector and place the cable modem on the flap-list if the connection exceeds the parameters.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable flap-list power-adjust threshold <1-10> no cable flap-list power-adjust threshold <1-10>
Command Syntax
1-10 threshold in dBmV
Command Default
2 dBmV
13-71
Release 5.2.1
cable flap-list size

The cable flap-list size command specifies the flap-list size, the maximum number of cable modems in the flap-list. The no cable flap-list size command sets the default flap-list table size. Use the cable flap-list size number command to set the number of modems that the cable flap-list table can record.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable flap-list size <1-8191> no cable flap-list size <1-8191>
Command Syntax
1-8191 number of cable modems that can register to the flap-list table
Command Default
256 cable modems
13-72
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable flap-list trap-enable

The cable flap-list trap-enable command controls whether a flapListTrap will be sent to the CMTS by the SNMP agent if the CM miss percentage exceeds the flapListPercentageThreshold specified with the cable flap-list percentage threshold command. The no cable flap-list percentage-threshold command disables sending the flapListTrap.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable flap-list trap-enable no cable flap-list trap-enable
Command Default
Enabled
13-73
Release 5.2.1
cable helper-address
The cable helper address function disassembles a DHCP broadcast packet, and reassembles it into a unicast packet so that the packet can traverse the router and communicate with the DHCP server. The cable helper-address command enables broadcast forwarding for User Datagram Protocol (UDP) packets. The cable helper-address command can also be used to define the cable helper address to be used for all CPEs whose CMs have an IP address in a particular subnets address space. This forces the BSR relay agent to forward DHCP requests from a CPE using a selected ISP to a DHCP server configured for that selected ISP.
Note: The isp-bind option is only available after selecting the host or mta options. It is not available for the cable modem option.
Note: The cable helper-address command allows operators to support multiple CM subnets bound to a single cable helper-address. Any DHCP requests from clients that are attached to CMs that are part of the Multiple ISP configuration will have their requests relayed to any defined ip helper-addresses.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable helper-address <A.B.C.D> {cable-modem [isp-bind <A.B.C.D>] | mta [isp-bind <A.B.C.D>]} no cable helper-address <A.B.C.D> {cable-modem [isp-bind <A.B.C.D>] | mta [isp-bind <A.B.C.D>]}
13-74
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D cable-modem mta isp-bind A.B.C.D the IP address of the destination DHCP server. specifies that only CM UDP broadcasts are forwarded. specifies that only CPE MTA broadcasts are forwarded. specifies the secondary IP subnet to which the cable-helper is bound.
13-75
Release 5.2.1
cable helper-address host vendor-class-identifiers

The cable helper-address host vendor-class-identifiers command assigns a helper address to a vendor class identifier (VCI) group. This helper address will only be used when a host includes the VCI option (option 60) and the field matches one of the VCI strings in the assigned VCI group.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable helper-address <A.B.C.D> host vendor-class-identifiers <1-32> [global | vrf ] no cable helper-address <A.B.C.D> host vendor-class-identifiers <1-32> [global | vrf ]
Command Syntax
1-32 global vrf the vendor class identifier group number specify that the helper address is on the global network specify that the helper address is on a VPN
13-76
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable host authorization range

The cable host authorization range command configures an authorization IP address range for Customer Premises Equipment (CPE) access to the BSR. The no cable host authorization range command disables IP address range authorization.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable host authorization range <prefix> <prefix> no cable host authorization range <prefix> <prefix>
Command Syntax
prefix prefix starting CPE IP address range ending CPE IP address range
13-77
Release 5.2.1
cable insert-interval
The cable insert-interval command sets the interval at which Initial Maintenance intervals are scheduled in the upstream.These intervals are used by cable modems to send ranging request messages when attempting to join the network. The no cable insert-interval command is used to set the default insertion interval.
Note: Ensure that the upstream port is down before setting the insertion interval.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable insert-interval <0-200> no cable insert-interval <0-200>
Command Syntax
0-200 The insert interval in hundredths of a second.
Command Default
The default insertion interval is 20 hundredths of a second.
13-78
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable intercept
The BSR provides a way to monitor and intercept data originating from a DOCSIS network through the Cable Intercept feature, which provides Multiple System Operators (MSOs) with Lawful Intercept capabilities required by the Communications Assistance for Law Enforcement Act (CALEA) for electronic surveillance. Lawful Intercept capabilities are used by law enforcement agencies to conduct electronic surveillance of circuit and data communications. Warning: Lawful Intercept capabilities to intercept customer traffic are authorized by either a judicial means to support local laws or through an administrative order governed by service level agreements (SLAs). The proper legal or administrative persons must be contacted first before customer traffic is intercepted and examined.
Note: The cable intercept command is only available to a user logged in as securityuser - refer to Configuring Cable Intercepts in the BSR 64000 CMTS Configuration and Management Guide. When the Cable Intercept feature is initiated, copies of the data transmissions from and to a specified Customer Premises Equipment (CPE) MAC address (such as a PC) are sent to an intercept collector, which is a server at a specified IP address and UDP port number. Each CMTS resource module supports a maximum of 16 cable intercept entries in the startup configuration and running configuration files. Only one MAC address per CPE device, such as a PC can be intercepted and only packets from these CPEs are intercepted. Use the cable intercept command to create a cable intercept on the CMTS interface to respond to CALEA requests from law enforcement for traffic regarding a specific user. Use the no cable intercept command to delete a cable intercept on the CMTS interface.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
13-79
Release 5.2.1
Command Line Usage

cable intercept <mac> <prefix> <0-65535> no cable intercept <mac> <prefix> <0-65535>
Command Syntax
mac The intercept source, which is the MAC address from which traffic is intercepted. Packets with a source or destination MAC address that matches this address are copied and forwarded to the data collection server. Most often, this MAC address is the user's CPE device (such as a PC or VoIP phone), and not the MAC address of the user's CM. Specifies the destination IP address for the data collection server that receives copies of the forwarded traffic. The destination User Datagram Port (UDP) port number, which is used exclusively by the data collection server. A default UDP port number is not provided.
prefix
0-65535
13-80
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable ip-broadcast-echo
The cable ip-broadcast-echo command reflects all upstream broadcast flows back to the downstream to mimic a broadcast domain. The no cable ip-broadcast-echo command disabled this functionality.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage
cable ip-broadcast-echo no cable ip-broadcast-echo

Command Default
Disabled
13-81
Release 5.2.1
cable ip-multicast-echo
The cable ip-multicast-echo command reflects all upstream multicast flows back to the downstream to mimic a multicast domain. The no cable ip-multicast-echo command disabled this functionality.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage
cable ip-multicast-echo no cable ip-multicast-echo

Command Default
Disabled
13-82
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable load-balance
The cable load-balance command executes downstream or upstream static load balancing (based on ds-reg or us-reg rules) for all registered cable modems in the affected load balancing groups. Downstream or upstream static count-based load balancing evenly distributes cable modems across multiple channels serving the same geographical community or Spectrum Group. The term "static" means that the BSR will only attempt to move a cable modem to another channel after the registration process is complete. Static downstream or upstream load balancing occurs automatically moves a newly registered cable modem to the least loaded channel.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

cable load-balance [downstream| upstream] [loadbalance-group <WORD>]
Command Syntax
downstream upstream loadbalance-group WORD enable downstream cable modem count load balancing enable upstream cable modem count load balancing load balance the specified load balancing group
13-83
Release 5.2.1
cable loadbalance-group
The cable loadbalance-group command accesses Load Balancing Group Configuration mode. Load Balancing Group Configuration mode allows you to create a new load balancing group or modify an existing load balancing group. The no cable loadbalance-group command removes a load balancing group.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Global Configuration and Load Balancing Configuration Group Mode
Command Line Usage

cable loadbalance-group <WORD> [snmp-index <0-4294967295>] no cable loadbalance-group <WORD> [snmp-index <0-4294967295>]
Command Syntax
WORD snmp-index 0-4294967295 the name of the load balancing group to be created or modified the SNMP index value
13-84
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable loadbalance-policy
The cable loadbalance-policy command enters Load Balancing Policy Configuration mode for a specified load balancing policy. Load Balancing Policy Configuration mode allows you to create a new load balancing policy or modify an existing load balancing policy. Load balancing policies provide control over the autonomous load balancing process on a per-CM basis. A load balancing policy is described by a set of conditions (rules) that govern the autonomous load balancing process for the CM. The no cable loadbalance-policy command removes a load balancing policy.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable loadbalance-policy <WORD> [snmp-index <0-4294967295>] no cable loadbalance-policy <WORD> [snmp-index <0-4294967295>]
Command Syntax
WORD snmp-index 0-4294967295 the name of the load balancing policy to be created or modified the SNMP index value
13-85
Release 5.2.1
cable loadbalance-restricted
The cable loadbalance-restricted command allows you to designate a particular CM or a range of CMs in a Load Balancing Group as restricted. A Restricted Load Balancing Group is associated with a specific, provisioned set of cable modems. Restricted Load Balancing Groups are used to accommodate a topology specific or provisioning specific restriction such as a set of channels reserved exclusively for business customers. The no cable loadbalance-restricted command allows you to remove the restricted designation.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable loadbalance-restricted [<1-256> | <WORD> [ snmp-index <0-4294967295>]] no-move [<1-100> [<mac> [<mac>]]] no cable loadbalance-restricted [<1-256> | <WORD> [ snmp-index <0-4294967295>]] no-move [<1-100> [<mac> [<mac>]]]
Command Syntax
1-256 WORD snmp-index 0-4294967295 no-move 1-100 the load balancing group ID the load balancing group name the SNMP index value restricted cable modems that cannot be moved to another channel the restricted cable modem index that cannot be moved to another channel
13-86
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
mac
the MAC address of the CM to be restricted from load balancing in the form of xxxx.xxxx.xxxx the mask to specify a particular CM or a range of CMs in the form of xxxx.xxxx.xxxx
mac
Note: The cable modem index refers to an index of the Restricted List not the index of the CM record.
13-87
Release 5.2.1
cable loadbalance-rule
The cable loadbalance-rule command creates a new load balancing rule or modifies an existing load balancing rule. The no cable loadbalance-rule command removes a load balancing rule.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable loadbalance-rule <WORD> {dis-period <0-86400> <0-86400> | disable | ds-util {min <0-100> delta <0-100> stop <0-100} | enable | interval <0-480> | rem-dsx | spec-trigger | us-reg modem-count-thresh <1-50> | us-util {min <0-100> delta <0-100> stop <0-100}} [snmp-index <0-4294967295>] no cable loadbalance-rule <WORD> {dis-period <0-86400> <0-86400> | disable | ds-util {min <0-100> delta <0-100> stop <0-100} | enable | interval <0-480> | rem-dsx | spec-trigger | us-reg modem-count-thresh <1-50> | us-util {min <0-100> delta <0-100> stop <0-100}} [snmp-index <0-4294967295>]
Command Syntax
WORD dis-period 0-86400 0-86400 disable the policy rule name disable load balancing for a specified time period dis-period start time in seconds after 12:00 AM dis-period length in seconds disable the load balancing rule
13-88
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
ds-util min 0-100
minimum threshold percentage of downstream utilization before load-balancing starts - any downstream channel that has a minimum utilization value of "0" will participate in load balancing delta percentage of downstream utilization between load-balancing channels to start load balancing - the delta between two downstream channels must be equal to or exceed a utilization of "0" before load balancing can start delta percentage of downstream utilization between load-balancing channels to stop load balancing - when moving cable modems between downstream channels the process will attempt to bring the channels as close to "0" as possible before stopping enable the load balancing rule periodic interval for load balancing in minutes remote DSX resource failure load-balancing trigger load balancing when there is a spectrum management configuration change the maximum allowed difference in the cable modem count between the cable modem's initial upstream channel and the least loaded upstream channel in the load balance group minimum threshold percentage of upstream utilization before load-balancing starts - any upstream channel that has a minimum utilization value of "0" will participate in load balancing
ds-util delta 0-100
ds-util stop 0-100
enable interval 5-480 rem-dsx spec-trigger us-reg modem-count-thresh 1-50 us-util min 0-100
13-89
Release 5.2.1
us-util delta 0-100
delta percentage of upstream utilization between load-balancing channels to start load balancing - the delta between two upstream channels must be equal to or exceed a utilization of "0" before load balancing can start delta percentage of upstream utilization between load-balancing channels to stop load balancing - when moving cable modems between upstream channels the process will attempt to bring the channels as close to "0" as possible before stopping the SNMP index value
us-util stop 0-100
snmp-index 0-4294967295
Note: Only the maximum utilized channel must meet the minimum threshold value before load balancing starts within a load balancing group.
Note: The load balancing disable period (dis-period) that is entered in a load balancing rule cannot span AM to PM (i.e. 4 PM through 9 AM). For example, to disable load balancing for this time period, you would need to enter two separate command strings, 4 PM to 11:59:59 PM and 00:00:01 AM to 9 AM, as follows: cable loadbalance-rule <WORD> dis-period 57600 86399 cable loadbalance-rule <WORD> dis-period 1 32400
Command Defaults
us-reg modem-count-thresh = 5
13-90
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable load-balance spectrum-group

The cable load-balance spectrum-group command balances cable modems across all upstream channels within the same Spectrum Group. This command can be used for one specific Spectrum Group or for all Spectrum Groups.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

cable load-balance spectrum-group [<WORD>]
Command Syntax
WORD only balance the specified Spectrum Group
Note: If load balancing is disabled for a Spectrum Group, that specific Spectrum Group can still be load balanced by including the Spectrum Group name with the cable load-balance spectrum-group command. If the cable load-balance spectrum-group command is used without a specific Spectrum Group name, any Spectrum Groups that have load balancing disabled will not be load balanced.
13-91
Release 5.2.1
cable mdd-interval
In order to communicate topology and IP layer service initialization parameters to a DOCSIS 3.0 Cable Modem, the BSR transmits an MAC Domain Descriptor (MDD) message periodically on every downstream channel in the MAC Domain. The MDD message is configured with the cable mdd-interval command. A separate MDD message is sent for each downstream channel associated with the bonding domain where a DOCSIS 3.0 bonding group is configured. This message is used by the cable modem during initialization. The information provided to the cable modem in the MDD message allows the cable modem to identify the downstream fiber node it is connected to and which downstream channels reach it. The downstream fiber node is identified by the MAC Domain Downstream Service Group (MD-DS-SG). MDD messages will coexist on the same downstream channel with Motorola Proprietary BDM messages if a Motorola Proprietary bonding group and a DOCSIS 3.0 bonding group share the same channel.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable mdd-interval <0-2000> no cable mdd-interval <0-2000>
Command Syntax
0-2000
MAC Domain Descriptor message interval in milliseconds - entries will be rounded to nearest 50 milliseconds - a value of "0" disables sending MDD messages on this MAC Domain
Command Default
2000 milliseconds (2 seconds)
13-92
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable modem-aging-timer
The cable modem-aging-timer command specifies a cable modem aging timer in minutes. Cable modems that go off-line are automatically removed from the network after the configured time period.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable modem-aging-timer {<10-30240> | off}
Command Syntax
10-30240 off the cable modem aging timer number in minutes (10 minutes to 21 days) disables the cable modem aging timer
Command Default
Disabled
13-93
Release 5.2.1
cable modem dcc

The cable modem dcc command allows an operator to manually move DOCSIS 1.1 and 2.0 cable modems or MTAs to a specified upstream and/or downstream port and logical channel using DOCSIS Dynamic Channel Change (DCC). Note: The upstream channel must be physically connected for DOCSIS 1.1 and 2.0 cable modems to be manually moved. When moving a CM or MTA to a different downstream or upstream channel , the upstream channel must be specified first followed by the downstream channel. The same init-tech must be specified for both the upstream and downstream channels.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

cable modem {<mac> | <prefix>} dcc [downstream <0-1> [init-tech <0-4>] | init-tech <0-4>| upstream <0-7>/<0-3> [init-tech <0-4>| [downstream [init-tech <0-4>]]]
Command Syntax
mac prefix downstream 0-1 the cable modem MAC address in the form of xxxx.xxxx.xxxx the cable modem IP address the downstream port number
13-94
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
init-tech 0-4
the ranging technique used for DCC: 0 = re-initialize the MAC 1 = perform broadcast intitial ranging on the new channel before normal operation 2 = perform unicast ranging on the new channel before normal operation 3 = perform either broadcast or unicast ranging on the new channel before normal operation 4 = use the new channel directly without re-intializing or ranging the upstream port/logical channel
upstream 0-7/0-3
13-95
Release 5.2.1
cable modem deny

The cable modem deny command removes a specified cable modem from the network and denies it future entry. The no cable modem deny command removes the restriction from the specified cable modem.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable modem deny <mac> no cable modem deny <mac>
Command Syntax
mac CM MAC address.
13-96
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable modem disable loadbalancing

The cable modem disable loadbalancing command disables Dynamic Load Balancing on all BSR CMTS modules. If disabled on the BSR, Dynamic Load Balancing operations are only allowed from an external management station. The no cable modem disable loadbalancing command enables Dynamic Load Balancing on all BSR CMTS modules.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable modem disable loadbalancing no cable modem disable loadbalancing
Command Default
Enabled
13-97
Release 5.2.1
cable modem max-hosts

The cable modem max-hosts command sets the limit for the maximum Customer Premises Equipment (CPE) hosts behind a particular cable modem. The no cable modem max-hosts sets the limit to the default value.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

cable modem {<mac> | <prefix>} max-hosts <0-32> no cable modem {<mac> | <prefix>} max-hosts <0-32>
Command Syntax
mac prefix 0-32 Cable modem MAC address. Cable modem IP address. Number of CPE hosts.
13-98
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable modem max-hosts-all

The cable modem max-hosts-all command sets the limit for the maximum Customer Premises Equipment (CPE) hosts behind all cable modems on the network. The no cable modem max-hosts-all sets the limit to the default value.
Warning: Cable modems already registered need to be reset for any configuration change to take effect.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

cable modem max-hosts-all <0-32> no cable modem max-hosts-all <0-32>
Command Syntax
0-32 the number of CPE hosts
13-99
Release 5.2.1
cable modem qos dsa

The cable modem qos dsa command triggers a dynamic service change (DSC) initiated by the CMTS for a specified cable modem. The DSC is in a binary file that conforms to the DOCSIS cable modem configuration file format. This configuration file is saved in the TFTP "boot" directory on a TFTP server with a known IP address. The current implementation has only the change of service based on service-flow (not the flow classifier, nor the payload-header-suppression). Note: The definition of the dynamic service is defined in a binary file that conforms to the DOCSIS 1.1 cable modems configuration file format. This configuration file is saved in the TFTP "boot" directory on a TFTP server with known IP address.
Warning: This command should be used with extreme caution as the dynamic service definition in the configuration file will be overwritten.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

cable modem {<mac> | <prefix>} qos dsa <prefix> <string>
Command Syntax
mac prefix prefix string The CM Dynamic Service Addition MAC address of the specified cable modem. Specified cable modem IP address to create or delete a SID. IP address of TFTP server. File name to be configured.
13-100
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
Command Default
none
13-101
Release 5.2.1
cable modem qos dsc

The cable modem qos dsc command triggers a Dynamic Service Change (DSC) initiated by the CMTS for a specified cable modem (CM).The cable modem qos dsc command triggers a dynamic service change (DSC) initiated by the CMTS for a specified cable modem. The definition of the dynamic service is defined in a binary file that conforms to the DOCSIS cable modems configuration file format. This configuration file is saved in /tftpboot directory on a TFTP server with known IP address. The current implementation only the change of service based on service-flow (not the flow classifier, nor the payload-header-suppression). The definition of the dynamic service is defined in a binary file that conforms to the DOCSIS cable modem configuration file format. This configuration file is saved in the /tftpboot directory on a TFTP server with a known IP address. The current implementation only is the change of service based on service-flow (not the flow classifier, nor the payload-header-suppression).
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

cable modem {<mac> | <prefix>} qos dsc <prefix> <string>
Command Syntax
mac prefix prefix string The CM Dynamic Service Addition MAC address of the specified cable modem. Specified cable modem IP address to create or delete a SID. IP address of TFTP server. File name to be configured.
13-102
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable modem qos dsd

The cable modem qos dsd command triggers a dynamic service deletion (DSD) initiated by the CMTS for a specified service flow.
Note: The cable modem qos dsd command should be used with extreme caution as the correct service-flow identifier must be specified.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

cable modem qos dsd <X/Y> <1-262143>
Command Syntax
X/Y 1-262143 the slot and MAC Domain number of the CMTS module Service Flow Identifier (not all values are valid at all times in a running system)
Command Default
none
13-103
Release 5.2.1
cable modem remote-query

The cable modem remote-query command enables the Remote Query features polling operation, configures the polling interval to use when querying each cable modem, and specifies the SNMP community name to use when to reading a cable modems RF parameters. The new polling interval starts immediately when specified with this command. The no cable modem remote-query command disables Remote Query polling. Note: The Remote Query feature polls cable modems using SNMPv1 only. The MSO must configure CMs to accept the SNMPv1 community string specified with the cable modem remote-query command.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable modem remote-query <1-86400> <snmp-community-name> no cable modem remote-query <1-86400> <snmp-community-name>
13-104
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable modem remote-query source-interface

If cable modems are configured to only allow SNMP access from certain trusted subnets and the current Remote Query feature uses the virtual cable bundle IP address as the source for SNMP access to these cable modems, access can be blocked. Allowing a user to specify a source interface for Remote Query will provide SNMP access to a trusted subnet. The cable modem remote-query source-interface command sets the source interface of the polls that are sent to cable modems when Remote Query is active. If a source interface is not specified and Remote Query is active, polls will be sent from any available IP address. The source interface may be specified before the interface has an IP address configured and will then function as described once the IP address is configured on the interface. If the source interface is specified before it is active, Remote Query will use any available IP address and will use the specified source interface once it is active. The no cable modem remote-query source-interface disables the Remote Query source interface configuration.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable modem remote-query source-interface {cable <X/Y | X/Y.N> | ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y | X/Y.N> | loopback <1-255> | tunnel <0-255>} no cable modem remote-query source-interface {cable <X/Y | X/Y.N> | ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y | X/Y.N> | loopback <1-255> | tunnel <0-255>
13-105
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
cable X/Y cable X/Y.N ethernet X/Y gigaether X/Y gigaether X/Y.N loopback 1-255 tunnel 0-255 set the remote query source interface for cable interface slot X, MAC domain Y, and, if applicable, cable sub-interface N set the remote query source interface slot X and port Y on the Ethernet interface: set the remote query source interface slot X, port Y, and, if applicable, the sub-interface N on the Gigabit Ethernet set the remote query source interface for the specified loopback interface number set the remote query source interface for the specified tunnel interface
13-106
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
Command Syntax
1-86400 configures the interval, in seconds, that the Remote Query task waits after completing one full polling cycle of all cable modems and then starting the next polling cycle the SNMPv1 community name that the Remote Query task uses to read a cable modems RF parameters - an example value is public
snmp-community-name
Note: An operator can force the immediate execution of a Remote Query polling cycle by entering the following sequence of commands: 1) cable modem remote-query <1-86400> <snmp-community-name> 2) no cable modem remote-query 3) show cable modem remote-query (check the status of the polling cycle) The frequency of Remote Query polling should be selected with care so as not to introduce excessive overhead that would degrade performance. The cable modem remote-query command is the only command required to enable the Remote Query feature. No additional SNMP commands are required.
Command Default
Disabled
13-107
Release 5.2.1
cable modem service-class-name

Motorola assigns a Service Class Name (SCN) to all service flows for a cable modem whether the CM registers with DOCSIS 1.0 or DOCSIS 1.1 registration parameters. However, the SCN can also be explicitly assigned with DOCSIS 1.1 Type-Length-Value (TLV) parameters in the cable modems registration request, or (as usually deployed) selected implicitly by the BSR based on the TLVs. The cable modem service-class-name command overrides the selected service class that defines the QoS parameters of one or both primary service flows for the referenced CM. When the cable modem service-class-name command is issued and the referenced CM is already registered, the BSR dynamically changes the QoS parameters of the primary service flow(s) according to the command without de-registering the CM. When the referenced CM registers (or re-registers) with the cable modem service-class-name command in effect, the BSR selects the referenced SCN(s) for the QoS parameters of the CMs primary service flow(s). The cable modem service-class-name command is typically used to lower the QoS received by a CM as a penalty for non-payment, bandwidth overuse, etc. The no cable modem service-class-name command removes the service class name override.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable modem <mac> service-class-name <WORD> [<WORD> ] no cable modem <mac> service-class-name [<WORD> | <WORD> ]
13-108
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
Command Syntax
mac WORD WORD The cable modem MAC address in the form of xxxx.xxxx.xxxx. An existing service class name in either the upstream or downstream direction. An existing service class name in the opposite direction of <WORD> above. This is an optional second service class name.
13-109
Release 5.2.1
cable modem ucc

The cable modem ucc command allows an operator to manually move a DOCSIS 1.0 or 1.1 CM or MTA to a different upstream channel within the same MAC domain.
Note: The cable modem will not be moved if the old and new upstream channels are associated to two different Spectrum Groups.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

cable modem {<mac> | <prefix>} ucc <0-7> [init-tech <0-4> | logical <0-3>]
Command Syntax
mac prefix 0-7 cable modem MAC address in the form of xxxx.xxxx.xxxx cable modem IP address the upstream physical channel
13-110
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
init-tech 0-4
the ranging technique used for UCC: 0 = re-initialize the MAC 1 = perform broadcast intitial ranging on the new channel before normal operation 2 = perform unicast ranging on the new channel before normal operation 3 = perform either broadcast or unicast ranging on the new channel before normal operation 4 = use the new channel directly without re-intializing or ranging the upstream logical channel
logical 0-3
13-111
Release 5.2.1
cable modem updis

The cable modem updis command enables the transmission of an an Upstream Transmitter Disable (UP-DIS) MAC layer message that disables a specified cable modems upstream transmitter. Upon receipt of an UP-DIS message, the cable modem autonomously disables its upstream transmitter. Once disabled through an UP-DIS message, the cable modems upstream transmitter can only be re-enabled by power cycling the cable modem. The cable modem updis command is not intended to be a replacement for existing mechanisms for controlling a subscribers service. The cable modem updis command provides an additional tool to protect against some forms of denial of service, such as a virus propagated across the Internet, that cannot be controlled with existing management mechanisms.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

cable modem updis <mac>
Command Syntax
mac the cable modem MAC address in the form of xxxx.xxxx.xxxx
13-112
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable modulation-profile
The cable modulation-profile command navigates to Modulation Profile Configuration Mode. Modulation Profile Configuration Mode provides a series of modulation profile commands that allow an MSO to create or modify a modulation profile. Warning: Motorola does not recommend modification of modulation profile parameters without a thorough understanding of modulation changes and DOCSIS interface specifications. Modulation profile parameters will affect the physical layer and may cause disruption or degradation of services. Note: Modulation profiles 1-4, 101-116, 201-205, and 301-310 are pre-configured modulation profiles. To view the configuration of these profiles, use the show cable modulation-profile command. Motorola recommends that user-created modulation profiles use the numbering range of 401-600 to ensure better future portability. For a complete list and configuration of all 35 pre-defined modulation profiles, refer to Appendix A, Pre-Defined Modulation Profiles in the BSR 64000 Configuration and Management Guide. For guidelines on modifying modulation profile parameters, refer to Appendix B, Understanding and Modifying Modulation Profiles in the BSR 64000 Configuration and Management Guide.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable modulation-profile {<1-600>} [a-long | a-short | a-ugs] cable modulation-profile {<1-600>} [initial | long | request | short | station] [<0-10>] <16-253> <0-255> {16qam | qpsk} {scrambler | no-scrambler} <0x0000 - 0x7fff> {diff | no-diff} <64-256> {fixed | shortened}
13-113
Release 5.2.1
no cable modulation-profile {<1-600>} [a-long | a-short | a-ugs] no cable modulation-profile {<1-600>} [initial | long | request | short | station] [<0-10>] <16-253> <0-255> {16qam | qpsk} {scrambler | no-scrambler} <0x0000 - 0x7fff> {diff | no-diff} <64-256> {fixed | shortened}
Command Syntax
1-600 specify a modulation profile number and enter Modulation Profile Configuration Mode for that modulation profile - the default IUC submode is request enter the Modulation Profile Configuration Mode a-long IUC submode for the specified cable modulation profile number for configuring the advanced PHY long data grant enter the Modulation Profile Configuration Mode a-short IUC submode for the specified cable modulation profile number for configuring the advanced PHY short data grant enter the Modulation Profile Configuration Mode a-ugs IUC submode for the specified cable modulation profile number for configuring the Unsolicited Grant Service enter the Modulation Profile Configuration Mode initial IUC submode for the specified cable modulation profile number for configuring the Initial Ranging Burst enter the Modulation Profile Configuration Mode long IUC submode for the specified cable modulation profile number for configuring the Long Grant Burst
a-long
a-short
a-ugs
initial
long
13-114
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
request
enter the Modulation Profile Configuration Mode request IUC submode for the specified cable modulation profile number for configuring the Request Burst enter the Modulation Profile Configuration Mode short IUC submode for the specified cable modulation profile number for configuring the Short Grant Burst enter the Modulation Profile Configuration Mode station IUC submode for the specified cable modulation profile number for configuring the Station Ranging Burst the FEC correction value - 0 indicates no Forward Error Correction the FEC codeword length in kilobytes the maximum burst length in minislots - "0" means no limit the modulation type enable or disable scrambler the scrambler seed in hexadecimal format.
short
station
0-10 16-253 0-255 16qam | qpsk scrambler | no-scrambler 0x0000 - 0x7fff
13-115
Release 5.2.1
diff | no-diff
enable or disable differential encoding Note: If a modulation profile is in use, differential

encoding cannot be enabled or disabled for any of the burst types. To enable or disable differential encoding for a burst type, an operator must copy the modulation profile to a new modulation profile number, enable or disable differential encoding for the new modulation profile, and assign the new modulation profile to the desired upstream channel. Attempting to enable or disable differential encoding for a modulation profile that is in use will generate the following error message: [10/07-10:26:06.5907:CRMTASK]-E-mod profile in use, cannot change diff encoding
64-256 fixed | shortened
the preamble length in bits the handling of FEC for last codeword length
13-116
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable modulation-profile copy

The cable modulation-profile copy command copies an existing modulation profile from a source modulation profile number to a destination modulation profile number. The destination modulation profile is overwritten by the source modulation profile.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable modulation-profile copy {<1-600>} {<1-600>} no cable modulation-profile copy {<1-600>} {<1-600>}
Command Syntax
1-600 1-600 source modulation profile number destination modulation profile number
13-117
Release 5.2.1
cable modulation-profile description

The cable modulation-profile description command sets the description of the specified modulation profile to the given string. A string that contains spaces must be enclosed within quotation marks.The no cable modulation-profile description form of this command clears the description and resets it to the default.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable modulation-profile <1-600> description {<string>} no cable modulation-profile <1-600> description
Command Syntax
1-600 string the modulation profile number the description text for the modulation profile
13-118
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable modulation-profile reset

The cable modulation-profile reset command resets a modified, pre-defined modulation profile back to the system default.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable modulation-profile reset {<1-4> | <101-116> | <201-205> | <301-310>}
Command Syntax
1-4, 101-116, 201-205, 301-310 the pre-defined modulation profile number
13-119
Release 5.2.1
cable mta-protection enable

The cable mta-protection enable command enables or disables MTA protection for a MAC domain. An MTA will be moved to a protected channel only when MTA protection has been enabled with the cable mta-protection enable command in the MAC domain in which the MTA registers. MTA protection is enabled by default. The no cable mta-protection enable command disables MTA protection for a MAC domain.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable mta-protection enable no cable mta-protection enable
Command Default
Enabled
13-120
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable multicast
The cable multicast command creates a static multicast downstream service flow and assigns the service flow to a service class. Creating a static multicast downstream service flow and assigning the service flow to a service class allows the BSR to limit the amount of multicast traffic (including DVMRP or PIM) on the downstream channel. The cable multicast command allows an MSO to balance the bandwidth requirements of IP-based video streaming services with other bandwidth critical services such as voice traffic or high-priority business traffic. The no cable multicast command disables the downstream multicast traffic limiting. This feature is configurable as a percentage of the total bandwidth available on the downstream channel through the service class to which it is assigned. The cable multicast command can be used to optionally specify a service class with the new downstream service flow. If a service class is not specified, the downstream service flow defaults to the DefMCDown service class. Note: The BSR supports the configuration of 256 downstream multicast service flows specified by unique combinations of a destination IP multicast address and destination IP multicast address mask {ipAddr, ipMask}. The BSR supports the mapping of different downstream multicast service flows to a specific user defined service class for a maximum of 256 mappings.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable multicast <A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D> [<WORD>] no cable multicast <A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D> [<WORD>]
13-121
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D A.B.C.D WORD destination IP multicast address destination IP multicast address mask the service class name
Command Defaults
Disabled Service Class = DefMCDown
13-122
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable multi-ds-override
The cable multi-ds-override commands enables downstream frequency override during ranging. Downstream frequency override allows an MSO to instruct a cable modem to move to a specific downstream/upstream pair during ranging by sending an RNG-RSP message with a downstream frequency override that tells a specific cable modem to move to a specific downstream channel. The no cable multi-ds-override command disables downstream frequency override during ranging.
Note: The downstream override feature is supported between any two 2:8 Primary CMTS Resource Modules that share a downstream path.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable multi-ds-override no cable multi-ds-override
Command Default
Disabled
13-123
Release 5.2.1
cable privacy auth life-time

The cable privacy auth life-time command sets the authorization key (AK) life-time values for baseline privacy. The no cable privacy auth life-time command changes the AK life-time values for baseline privacy back to the default.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable privacy auth life-time <300-6048000> no cable privacy auth life-time <300-6048000>
Command Syntax
300-6048000 Length of the key encryption life-time, valid values 300 seconds (5 minutes) to 6048000 seconds (70 days).
Command Default
604800 seconds (7 days)
13-124
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable privacy cert

The cable privacy cert command allows cable modems to register using self-signed manufacturer certificates, as opposed to a manufacturer certificate that is chained to the DOCSIS root certificate. The no cable privacy cert command disables this feature.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable privacy cert {trust [trusted | untrusted] | valid [false | true]} no cable privacy cert {trust [trusted | untrusted] | valid [false | true]}
Command Syntax
trust [trusted | untrusted] valid false true set trust for all self-signed manufacturer certificates - default is untrusted enable/disable the checking for a certificate's validity period disable certificate validity checking enable certificate validity checking (default)
Command Default
trust is set to "untrusted" certificate validity checking is enabled
13-125
Release 5.2.1
cable privacy cm-auth life-time

The cable privacy cm-auth life-time command sets AK life-time values for a cable modem. The no cable privacy cm-auth life-time changes the setting of AK life-time values for a cable modem back to the default.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable privacy cm-auth life-time <mac> [<300-6048000>] no cable privacy cm-auth life-time <mac>
Command Syntax
mac 300-6048000 cable modem physical address (MAC) in the form xxxx.xxxx.xxxx length of key encryption life-time in seconds
Command Default
604800 seconds (7 days)
13-126
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable privacy cm-auth reset

The cable privacy cm-auth reset command resets a Traffic Encryption Key (TEK) before expiration on a grace-time or a life-time value. The no cable privacy cm-auth reset command changes the TEK expiration back to the default.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable privacy cm-auth reset <mac> <1-4> no cable privacy cm-auth reset
Command Syntax
mac 1-4 cable modem MAC address of 6 bytes number representing an action: 1 noReset requested - causes CMTS to do nothing 2 invalidateAuth - causes CMTS to invalidate current CM authorization key, does not transmit an Authorization Invalid message to the CM, does not invalidate unicast TEKs 3 sendAuthInvalid - causes CMTS to invalidate current CM authorization key, does not transmit an Authorization invalid message to CM, does not invalidate unicast TEKs 4 invalidateTeks - causes CMTS to invalidate current CM authorization key, to transmit an Authorization Invalid message to the CM, and to invalidate all unicast TEKs related to this CM authorization
13-127
Release 5.2.1
Command Default
profile 1
13-128
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable privacy cm-tek life-time

The cable privacy cm-tek life-time command sets the TEK life-time value for baseline privacy. The no cable privacy cm-tek life-time command returns the TEK life-time value to the default value.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable privacy cm-tek life-time <0-16383> <1800-604800> no cable privacy cm-tek life-time <0-16383> <1800-604800>
Command Syntax
0-16383 1800-604800 CM primary SID. Traffic encryption life-time value in seconds.
Command Default
43200 seconds
13-129
Release 5.2.1
cable privacy cm-tek reset

The cable privacy cm-tek reset command resets a CM Traffic Encryption Key (TEK).
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable privacy cm-tek reset [<1-16383>]
Command Syntax
1-16383 the primary Service Identifier (SID) of the cable modem
13-130
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable privacy enforce-bpi-plus

The cable privacy enforce-bpi-plus command mandates that a cable modem provisioned in DOCSIS 1.1 or higher must register with DOCSIS Baseline Privacy Interface Plus (BPI+) and not use the earlier version of DOCSIS BPI. The no cable privacy enforce-bpi-plus command disables BPI+ enforcement.
Note: CMs provisioned with DOCSIS 1.0 are permitted to register without BPI+.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Global Configuration Interface Configuration (cable interface only)
Command Line Usage

cable privacy enforce-bpi-plus no cable privacy enforce-bpi-plus
13-131
Release 5.2.1
cable privacy mandatory

The cable privacy mandatory command allows a cable operator to enable the encryption of all routed broadcasts and routed unmapped multicast traffic. The cable privacy mandatory command encrypts otherwise unencrypted downstream routed non-unicasts and only gives the key to decrypt these messages to routing cable modems. Bridging cable modems will discard all downstream routed broadcasts or routed multicasts. The no cable privacy mandatory disables the encryption of routed broadcasts and routed unmapped multicast traffic. Note: The cable privacy mandatory feature requires that all cable modems have BPI enabled in order to register. If a cable modem does not have BPI enabled and cable privacy mandatory is turned on, the cable modem will not be able to register. With cable privacy mandatory enabled, routed broadcasts are not received by VLAN Tagging CM's. Therefore, VLAN tagging cable modems will not be able to respond to broadcast pings. Warning: After enabling the cable privacy mandatory feature, the cable operator must issue the clear cable modem all reset command to re-register all cable modems and allow non-unicast traffic (including ARPs) to function correctly.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Global Configuration Interface Configuration (cable interface only)
Command Line Usage

cable privacy mandatory [bpi-plus-only ] no cable privacy mandatory [bpi-plus-only ]
13-132
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
Command Syntax
bpi-plus-only Require BPI+ for all CMs by default.
13-133
Release 5.2.1
cable privacy mcast

The cable privacy mcast command enables the encryption of multicast traffic from a specific IP address. The no cable privacy mcast command disables the encryption of multicast traffic from a specific IP address.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable privacy mcast access <A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D> [<15872-16381>] no cable privacy mcast access <A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D> [<15872-16381>]
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D A.B.C.D 15872-16381 the multicast IP address the multicast subnet mask the multicast SAID number
13-134
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable privacy mcast access

The cable privacy mcast access command configures a multicast access list by specifying a cable modem MAC address and the corresponding multicast IP address.
Note: A cable modem MAC address and the corresponding multicast IP address is required.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable privacy mcast access <H.H.H> <A.B.C.D> [<8192-16381>] no cable privacy mcast access <H.H.H> <A.B.C.D> [<8192-16381>
Command Syntax
H.H.H A.B.C.D 8192-16381 cable modem physical address (MAC) in the form xxxx.xxxx.xxxx multicast IP address. the multicast SAID number
13-135
Release 5.2.1
cable privacy tek life-time

The cable privacy tek life-time command sets the cable privacy Traffic Encryption Key (TEK) life-time value. The no cable privacy tek life-time command returns the cable privacy TEK life-time value to the default value. Note: Baseline privacy is configured with key encryption keys (KEKs), and the TEKs are configured based on the 40 or 56-bit data encryption standard (DES). A life-time or a grace-time TEK value expires based on a life-time or grace-time value, but a cable modem has to renew its TEK grace-time value before it expires. If a lasting TEK lifetime is needed, use a life-time key.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable privacy tek life-time <30-604800> no cable privacy tek life-time
Command Syntax
30-604800 minimum and maximum traffic encryption life-time value in seconds
Command Default
43200 seconds
13-136
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable qos max-burst

The cable qos max-burst command automatically adjusts the downstream maximum burst based on the downstream maximum sustained rate (max-rate) and adjusts the upstream maximum burst and maximum concatenated burst (max-concat-burst) based on the upstream maximum sustained rate. The cable qos max-burst command should be used only for service flows that do not have a not have maximum burst setting defined with the max-burst command. The no cable qos max-burst command disables automatic downstream or upstream maximum burst adjustments.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable qos max-burst {downstream automatic | upstream automatic} no cable qos max-burst {downstream automatic | upstream automatic}
Command Syntax
downstream automatic Automatic maximum burst adjustments are calculated for service flows in the downstream direction only. upstream automatic Automatic maximum burst adjustments are calculated for service flows in the upstream direction only.
Command Default
Disabled
13-137
Release 5.2.1
cable qos-profile
The cable qos-profile command accesses QoS Profile Configuration mode. QoS Profile Configuration mode allows you to create or modify a QoS Profile. The no cable qos-profile command deletes a QoS Profile.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Global Configuration and QoS Profile Configuration
Command Line Usage

cable qos-profile <prof-num> no cable qos-profile <prof-num>
Command Syntax
prof-num the QoS Profile identifying number
Note: Only QoS Profile numbers 1-16 can be configured by the user.
13-138
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable security authorized

The cable security authorized command enables cable security authorization for a MAC domain. The no cable security authorized command disables cable security authorization for a MAC domain.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable security authorized no cable security authorized
Command Default
Disabled
13-139
Release 5.2.1
cable security failure

The cable security failure command configures how the BSR handles an initializing cable modem after the CMs second consecutive security failure. When an initializing CM fails a cable security option check, it is said to have a cable security failure. In order to account for present and future initializing CMs that may change their behavior between initialization attempts, the BSR permits an initializing CM to have one cable security failure before it applies a configured cable security failure action after the second failure.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable security failure {mark | reject }
Command Syntax
mark This configuration allows the CM to register, but the CM is marked as having failed a security option.The BSR displays an exclamation point (!) before the CM status field (e.g. !online) in the show cable modem command output for CMs which were permitted to register with a cable security failure. This configuration means that the BSR continues to reject the CMs registration and resets the consecutive failure count to zero.
reject
Command Default
cable security failure reject
13-140
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable shared-secret
The cable shared-secret command activates or deactivates cable modem authentication with a shared-secret key. The no cable shared-secret command sets the cable shared-secret back to the default. Use the cable shared-secret command to authenticate the cable modem such that all cable modems must return a text string to register for access to the network. If the no cable shared-secret command is enabled on the CMTS, secret key checking is not available on any cable modem. If shared-secret is configured on CMTS, cable modems have to use the secret key obtained from the CM configuration files obtained from the TFTP server.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable shared-secret {0 <string> | 7 <hex-dump-string> | <string>} no cable shared-secret {0 <string> | 7 <hex-dump-string> | <string>}
Command Syntax
0 7 hex-dump-string string Specifies an UNENCRYPTED key will follow Specifies an ENCRYPTED key will follow The authentication key in hex number format. The authentication key (enclosed with double quotes if the key contains spaces). The "%" and "!" characters must not be used.
Command Default
null string
13-141
Release 5.2.1
cable shared-secondary-secret
The cable shared-secondary-secret command activates or deactivates cable modem authentication with a shared-secondary-secret key. The no cable shared-secondary-secret command sets the cable shared-secondary-secret back to the default. Use the cable shared-secondary-secret command to authenticate the cable modem such that all cable modems must return a text string to register for access to the network. If the no cable shared-secondary-secret command is enabled on the CMTS, secret key checking is not available on any cable modem. If shared-secondary-secret is configured on CMTS, cable modems have to use the secret key obtained from the CM configuration files obtained from the TFTP server.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable shared-secondary-secret {0 <string> | 7 <hex-dump-string> | <string>} no cable shared-secondary-secret {0 <string> | 7 <hex-dump-string> | <string>}
Command Syntax
0 7 hex-dump-string string Specifies an UNENCRYPTED key will follow Specifies an ENCRYPTED key will follow The authentication key in hex number format. The authentication key (enclosed with double quotes if the key contains spaces). The "%" and "!" characters must not be used.
Command Default
null string
13-142
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable spectrum-group
The cable spectrum-group command is used to create a cable spectrum group and enter Cable Spectrum Group mode in which to configure a cable spectrum group. All of the cable spectrum parameters are configured from Cable Spectrum Group mode.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable spectrum-group <WORD> no cable spectrum-group <WORD>
Command Syntax
WORD The cable spectrum group name.
13-143
Release 5.2.1
cable spm-management
The cable spm-management command allows for the configuration of either composite SNR or minimum SNR (single cable modem) as the basis for Advanced Spectrum Management agility decisions. The command specifies the basic method that Advanced Spectrum Management uses to determine upstream channel quality. The no cable spm-management command returns the configuration to the default value.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable spm-management {composite | minimum} no cable spm-management {composite | minimum}
Command Syntax
composite use the average of all cable modems to determine upstream channel quality via SNR use a single cable modem to determine upstream channel quality via SNR Note: The 15 cable modems with the lowest SNR are excluded from being the reference modem - refer to the reference-modem-exclusion command for more information on this configuration.
minimum
Command Default
minimum
13-144
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable submgmt default cpe-control active

The cable submgmt default cpe-control active command configures the default filter for controlling active CPEs if it is not signaled in the DOCSIS Registration request. The no cable submgmt default cpe-control active command returns to the default.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable submgmt default cpe-control active {true | false} no cable submgmt default cpe-control active
Command Syntax
true false CPE is active CPE is not active
Command Default
false
13-145
Release 5.2.1
cable submgmt default cpe-control learnable

Sometimes the CMTS does not learn a CPE IP address from the DOCSIS provisioning entries in a CMs configuration file that is signaled in a DOCSIS registration request. The cable submgmt default cpe-control learnable command configures the default for controlling whether or not a CPE IP address can be learned. The no cable submgmt default cpe-control learnable command returns to the default.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable submgmt default cpe-control learnable {true | false} no cable submgmt default cpe-control learnable
Command Syntax
true false CPE can be learned CPE cannot be learned
Command Default
true
13-146
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable submgmt default cpe-control max-cpe

The cable submgmt default cpe-control max-cpe command configures a packet filter for controlling the number of CPEs, if it is not signaled in the DOCSIS Registration request. The no cable submgmt default cpe-control max-cpe command returns to the default value.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable submgmt default cpe-control max-cpe <0-1024> no cable submgmt default cpe-control max-cpe <0-1024>
Command Syntax
0-1024 default packet filter group number
Command Default
16 CPEs upon CMTS initialization
13-147
Release 5.2.1
cable submgmt default filter-group

The cable submgmt default filter-group command configures the default filter group for traffic applied to or from CPEs through its connected CM.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable submgmt default filter-group {downstream | upstream} <1-32>
Command Syntax
downstream default filter group for a CPE, for traffic going to the CPE through its connected CM on the downstream from the CMTS default filter group for a CPE, for traffic going from the CPE through its connected CM on the upstream to the CMTS default packet filter group number
upstream
1-32
13-148
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable submgmt default filter-group cm

The cable submgmt default filter-group cm command configures the default filter group for traffic applied to or from the CM itself. The no cable submgmt default filter-group cm command removes the default filter group.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable submgmt default filter-group cm {downstream | upstream} <1-32> no cable submgmt default filter-group cm {downstream | upstream} <1-32>
Command Syntax
downstream default filter group for a CM, for traffic going to the CM on the downstream from the CMTS default filter group for a CPE, for traffic going from the CM on the upstream to the CMTS default packet filter group number
upstream
1-32
13-149
Release 5.2.1
cable sync-interval
The synchronization message interval is the interval between successive synchronization message transmissions from the BSR CMTS interface to the CMs. The cable sync-interval command sets the synchronization interval between transmission of successive SYNC messages from the CMTS to CMs. The no cable sync-interval returns the interval setting to transmit SYNC messages to the default.
Note: Ensure that you disable the cable interface using the cable shutdown command before using the cable sync-interval command.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable sync-interval <0-200> no cable sync-interval
Command Syntax
0-200 synchronization interval in milliseconds.
Command Default
200
13-150
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable tcpudp-filter group index src-port

The cable tcpudp-filter group index src-port command configures which TCP/UDP source port that should be matched in the classified packet.
Note: The default source port 65536 matches any value in the TCP or UDP source field.
The no cable tcpudp-filter group index src-port command returns to the default value. The no cable tcpudp-filter group index command deletes an assigned TCP/UDP packet filter group.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable tcpudp-filter group <1-32> index <1-64> src-port <0-65536> no cable tcpudp-filter group <1-32> index <1-64> src-port <0-65536> no cable tcpudp-filter group <1-32> index <1-64>
Command Syntax
1-32 1-64 0-65536 TCP/UDP packet filter group number packet filter source port to match in the classified packet
Command Default
65536
Release 5.2.1
cable tcpudp-filter group index dst-port

The cable tcpudp-filter group index dst-port command configures the TCP/UDP destination port that should be matched in the classified packet.
Note: The default destination port 65536 matches any value in the TCP or UDP destination field.
The no tcpudp-filter group index dst-port command disables the configured TCP/ UDP packet filter. The no cable tcpudp-filter group index command deletes an assigned TCP/UDP packet filter group.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable tcpudp-filter group <1-32> index <1-64> dst-port <0-65536> no cable tcpudp-filter group <1-32> index <1-64> dst-port <0-65536> no cable tcpudp-filter group <1-32> index <1-64>
Command Syntax
1-32 1-64 0-65536 TCP/UDP packet filter group number packet filter index number destination port to match in the classified packet
Command Default
Source port 65536
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable tcpudp-filter group index enable

The cable tcpudp-filter group index enable command enables the configured TCP/ UDP packet filter. The no cable tcpudp-filter group index enable command returns to the default. The no cable tcpudp-filter group index command deletes an assigned TCP/UDP packet filter group.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable tcpudp-filter group <1-32> index <1-64> enable no cable tcpudp-filter group <1-32> index <1-64> enable no cable tcpudp-filter group <1-32> index <1-64>
Command Syntax
1-32 1-64 0-65536 TCP/UDP packet filter group number packet filter destination port to match in the classified packet
Command Default
Disabled
13-153
Release 5.2.1
cable tcpudp-filter group index tcp-flag

The cable tcpudp-filter group index tcp-flag command configures the desired TCP packet header flag value and mask to match in the classified packet. The no cable tcpudp-filter group index tcp-flag command returns to the default value. The no cable tcpudp-filter group index command deletes an assigned TCP/UDP packet filter group.
Note: The TCP flag value must always be a subset (proper or otherwise) of the mask field.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable tcpudp-filter group <1-32> index <1-64> tcp-flag <0x0-0x3f> <0x0-0x3f> no cable tcpudp-filter group <1-32> index <1-64> tcp-flag <0x0-0x3f> <0x0-0x3f> no cable tcpudp-filter group <1-32> index <1-64>
Command Syntax
1-32 1-64 0x0-0x3f 0x0-0x3f TCP/UDP packet filter group number packet filter TCP flag value TCP flag mask
Command Default
0x0 (Zero)
13-154
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable ucd-interval
The cable ucd-interval command sets the interval between transmission of successive Upstream Channel Descriptor (UCD) messages. The no cable ucd-interval changes the interval setting to transmit UCD messages back to the default.
Note: Ensure that you disable the cable interface using the cable shutdown command before using the cable ucd-interval command.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable ucd-interval <0-2000> no cable ucd-interval
Command Syntax
0-2000 UCD interval in milliseconds
Command Default
1000
13-155
Release 5.2.1
cable upstream active-codes

The cable upstream active-codes command specifies the number of active codes allowed for an S-CDMA channel type. The active codes value must be a non prime number. Increasing the number of allowed active codes provides more transmission channel capacity. Reducing the number of active codes takes advantage of the S-CDMA spreader processing gain at the expense of channel capacity.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable upstream <X/Y> active-codes <64-128> no cable upstream <X/Y> active-codes <64-128>
Command Syntax
NUM X/Y 64-128 the upstream port number the upstream port and logical channel number (0-3) the total number of allowed active codes
13-156
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable upstream capability

The cable upstream capability command enables/disables concatenation or fragmentation for an upstream port. The no cable upstream capability command disables concatenation or fragmentation for an upstream port. Caution: The cable upstream capability command is intended for Motorola support purposes only. The command may or may not be displayed in a running-configuration, depending on various other configuration settings. Do not add, delete, or change the cable upstream capability configuration setting except as directed by Motorola support personnel.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage cable upstream <NUM> capability {concatenation | fragmentation}

no cable upstream <NUM> capability {concatenation | fragmentation}
Command Syntax
NUM concatenation fragmentation
the upstream port number enable/disable concatenation for this upstream port enable/disable fragmentation for this upstream port
Command Default
concatenation = enabled fragmentation = enabled
13-157
Release 5.2.1
cable upstream channel-id

The cable upstream channel-id command allows a user to specify a Channel ID number for an upstream port and logical channel instead of using the default pre-defined Channel IDs that are automatically assigned to the upstream ports by the BSR CMTS. Refer to the BSR 64000 CMTS Configuration and Management Guide for a listing of the default upstream channel IDs.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (cable interfaces only)
Command Line Usage

cable upstream {<NUM> | <X/Y>} channel-id <1-255> no cable upstream {<NUM> | <X/Y>} channel-id <1-255>
Command Syntax
NUM X/Y the upstream port number the upstream port number and optional logical channel number (0-3). the upstream Channel ID number
1-255
13-158
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable upstream channel-type

The cable upstream channel-type command allows you to specify the channel type for the default upstream channel (0) or specify the channel type for up to four logical channels (0-3).
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable upstream {<NUM> | <X/Y>} channel-type {tdma | atdma | mtdma | scdma} no cable upstream {<NUM> | <X/Y>} channel-type {tdma | atdma | mtdma | scdma}
Command Syntax
NUM X/Y tdma atdma mtdma scdma the upstream port number the upstream port number and logical channel number (0-3) DOCSIS 1.0 or 1.1 channel type DOCSIS 2.0 channel type DOCSIS 1.0, 1.1, 2.0 TDMA channel type DOCSIS 2.0 channel type only used for logical channel configurations
13-159
Release 5.2.1
cable upstream channel-width

The cable upstream channel-width command specifies an upstream channel width for an upstream port. The no cable upstream channel-width command returns the default value.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable upstream <NUM> channel-width [1600000 | 200000 | 3200000 | 400000 | 800000] no cable upstream <NUM> channel-width [1600000 | 200000 | 3200000 | 400000 | 800000]
Command Syntax
NUM X/Y 1600000 200000 3200000 400000 800000 the upstream port number the upstream port number and logical channel number (0-3) 1600000 - channel width 1600 kHz 200000 - channel width 200 kHz 3200000 - channel width 3200 kHz 400000 - channel width 400 kHz 800000 - channel width 800 kHz
13-160
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable upstream codes-minislot

The cable upstream codes-minislot command specifies the number of active codes allowed for each minislot on an S-CDMA channel. The number active codes allowed for each minislot determines the minislot capacity and sets the granularity of the upstream grants.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable upstream <X/Y> codes-minislot <2-32> no cable upstream <X/Y> codes-minislot <2-32>
Command Syntax
X/Y 2-32 the upstream port and logical channel number (0-3) the number of codes allowed per minislot
13-161
Release 5.2.1
cable upstream concatenation

The cable upstream concatenation command enables CMTS concatenation capabilities. The no cable upstream concatenation command disables CMTS concatenation capabilities. Note: Concatenation must be enabled globally with the cable upstream concatenation command before any setting specified with the cable concatenation command is valid. Once concatenation is enabled globally, the cable concatenation command will enable or disable concatentation for DOCSIS 1.0 cable modems only and concatenation will always be enabled for DOCSIS 1.1 and DOCSIS 2.0 cable modems regardless of any setting specified with the cable concatenation command.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable upstream <NUM> concatenation no cable upstream <NUM> concatenation
Command Syntax
NUM the upstream port number
Command Default
Enabled
13-162
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable upstream data-backoff

Use the cable upstream data-backoff command sets data back-off value to assign automatic or fixed start and stop values. The no cable upstream data-backoff command returns to the default data back-off value.
Note: The automatic setting is recommended.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable upstream {<NUM> | <X/Y>} data-backoff {<0-15> <0-15> | automatic} no cable upstream {<NUM> | <X/Y>} data-backoff {<0-15> <0-15> | automatic}
Command Syntax
NUM X/Y 0-15 0-15 automatic the upstream port number the upstream port number and logical channel number (0-3) Start of data backoff End of data backoff Automatic data-backoff.
13-163
Release 5.2.1
cable upstream description

The cable upstream description command is used to specify descriptive information for a upstream port on the BSR. This information is limited to 80 characters and single word descriptions are not allowed. Use the characters: _ or - to separate words. For example, if a upstream port served a certain section of a city, the MSO could assign the following description:
MOT:7A(config-if)#cable upstream 0 description charlestown_1U
Note: The entered description can be seen in the running configuration, and in the command output of show commands such as the show ip interface and show running-config commands.
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable upstream <NUM> description <LINE>
Command Syntax
NUM LINE is the upstream port number is the text that describes the interface
13-164
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable upstream eng-nb-atten-backoff value

The cable upstream eng-nb-atten-backoff value command configures the internal narrow band attenuation backoff. Configuring a backoff in narrow band attenuation may alleviate the potential problem of adjacent upstream channel interference on the DOCSIS 2.0 2:8 CMTS modules. The cable upstream eng-nb-atten-backoff value command is configured on a physical upstream port basis. A 6dB backoff in narrow band attenuation is enabled by default. Setting the backoff value to 0 disables the internal narrow band attenuation backoff. The no cable upstream eng-nb-atten-backoff value command resets the narrow band attenuation backoff value to the default of 6dB. Note: The narrow band attenuation backoff value must be set to a value other than 0 when an upstream channel is configured for SCDMA mode. This change only applies to the DOCSIS 2.0 2:8 CMTS module.
Warning: The cable upstream eng-nb-atten-backoff value command should be used only when instructed to do so by Motorola support personnel.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable upstream <NUM> eng-nb-atten-backoff value <0-15> no cable upstream <NUM> eng-nb-atten-backoff value <0-15>
13-165
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
NUM 0-15 the upstream port number backoff value in dB, 0 disables narrow band attenuation backoff
Command Default
6dB narrow band attenuation backoff is enabled.
13-166
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable upstream eq-magnitude-scaling

The cable upstream eq-magnitude-scaling command allows the equalizer's update to be scaled by the specified value. The default magnitude scaling value is 1 which does not scale the output. With a value configured other than 1, the update is scaled down to either a fourth, an eighth, or a sixteenth of the current update. The no cable upstream eq-magnitude-scaling command returns the magnitude scaling value to the default or another value. The cable upstream eq-magnitude-scaling command is configured on a physical upstream port basis on the CMTS 2:8 DOCSIS 2.0 module
Warning: The cable upstream eq-magnitude-scaling command should be used only when instructed to do so by Motorola support personnel.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable upstream <NUM> eq-magnitude-scaling {16 | 1 | 4 | 8 } no cable upstream <NUM> eq-magnitude-scaling { 16 | 1 | 4 | 8 }
Command Syntax
16 1 magnitude scaling is set to 1/16 magnitude scaling is set to 1 - this is the default value and does not scale the output magnitude scaling is set to 1/4 magnitude scaling is set to 1/8
4 8
13-167
Release 5.2.1
Command Default
magnitude scaling = 1 - this is the default value and does not scale the output
13-168
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable upstream force-frag

The cable upstream force-frag command is used as a traffic shaping tool that forces the CM to fragment large upstream packets. When a CM sends a request to the CMTS for a large data grant that exceeds the configured minislot threshold, the CMTS grants the CM the configured minislot threshold, which forces the CM to make another data grant request for the remaining data, thereby causing data packets in the original grant to be fragmented by the CM.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable upstream {<NUM> | <X/Y>} force-frag <0-255> no cable upstream {<NUM> | <X/Y>} force-frag <0-255>
Command Syntax
NUM X/Y 0-255 the upstream port number the upstream port number and logical channel number (0-3) the configured minislot threshold without fragmentation for large data grants
Command Default
The force fragmentation feature is set to 0 for no forced fragmentation of large data grants.
13-169
Release 5.2.1
cable upstream frequency

The cable upstream frequency command sets the fixed frequency for the upstream cable port in Hz. The no cable upstream frequency command returns the default upstream frequency value. The cable interface does not operate until a fixed upstream frequency is set. The RF upstream frequency must comply with the expected CM output frequency. Note: The Japan DOCSIS Standard must be specified with the cable cmts type command before an upstream frequency can be selected for any Japan DOCSIS Standard CMTS module.
Note: Make sure that the upstream frequency selected does not interfere with the frequencies used for any other upstream applications running in the cable plant.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

North American DOCSIS/Euro-DOCSIS Standard cable upstream <NUM> frequency <5000000-65000000> no cable upstream <NUM> frequency <5000000-65000000>
Japan DOCSIS (J-DOCSIS) Standard cable upstream <NUM> frequency <10000000-55000000> no cable upstream <NUM> frequency <10000000-55000000>
13-170
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
Command Syntax
NUM 5000000-42000000 the upstream port number the upstream frequency value; valid entries are from 5000000 to 42000000 Hertz (Hz) for DOCSIS or 5000000 to 65000000 Hz for Euro-DOCSIS the upstream frequency value for the Japan DOCSIS (J-DOCSIS) Standard
10000000-55000000
Command Default
None
13-171
Release 5.2.1
cable upstream global-clock

The cable upstream global-clock command overrides the automated Global Clock Delay (GCD) setting and the calibrated GCD setting of the BCM3140 global clock register with the specified GCD value for a specified upstream port. The no cable upstream global-clock command disables a specified GCD setting for a specified upstream port.
Caution: Do not use the cable upstream global-clock command unless instructed to do so by Motorola.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable upstream <NUM> global-clock <0-31> no cable upstream <NUM> global-clock <0-31>
Command Syntax
NUM 0-31 the upstream port number the GCD value
13-172
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable upstream global-clock enable

The cable upstream global-clock enable command enables a Global Clock Delay (GCD) setting for a specified upstream port. The no cable upstream global-clock enable command disables a GCD setting for an upstream port and returns the system to use either the automated GCD setting or the calibrated GCD setting.
Caution: Do not use the cable upstream global-clock enable command unless instructed to do so by Motorola.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable upstream <NUM> global-clock enable no cable upstream <NUM> global-clock enable
Command Syntax
Command Default
Disabled
13-173
Release 5.2.1
cable upstream hopping-seed

The cable upstream hopping-seed command specifies the 15 bit S-CDMA hopping seed value used for the code hopping sequence initialization.
Note: The logical channel must be disabled to specify a new hopping seed value.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable upstream <X/Y> hopping-seed <0-32767> no cable upstream <X/Y> hopping-seed <0-32767>
Command Syntax
X/Y 0-32767 the upstream port and logical channel number (0-3) the hopping seed value (0 disables code hopping)
13-174
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable upstream ingress-canceller enable

The cable upstream ingress-canceller enable command enables the ingress canceller feature for an upstream cable port. Ingress cancellation is a DOCSIS 2.0 feature that protects against worst case plant impairments such as common path distortion (CPD), citizen band (CB), short-wave radio, and ham radio by opening unused portions of the upstream Spectrum. The no cable upstream ingress-canceller enable command disables the ingress canceller feature for an upstream cable port.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable upstream <NUM> ingress-canceller enable no cable upstream <NUM> ingress-canceller enable
Command Syntax
Command Default
Enabled
13-175
Release 5.2.1
cable upstream invited-range-interval

The cable upstream invited-range-interval command is used to define the amount of time in milliseconds allowed by the CMTS between ranging requests transmitted by the cable modem (CM). The no cable upstream invited-range-interval command returns to the default value.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable upstream <NUM> invited-range-interval <0-30000> no cable upstream <NUM> invited-range-interval <0-30000>
Command Syntax
NUM 0-30000 the upstream port number the time in milliseconds allowed by the CMTS between ranging requests transmitted by the cable modem
Command Default
10000 milliseconds
13-176
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable upstream iuc11-grant-size

The cable upstream iuc11-grant-size command specifies the size of the Interval Usage Code (IUC) 11 Advanced Unsolicited Grant burst descriptor when configuring a DOCSIS 2.0 upstream logical channel. Note: If a modulation profile for an upstream channel does not support IUC 11, the configuration of the IUC 11 byte size will be not be allowed. If a modulation profile for an upstream channel is changed and the new modulation profile does not support IUC 11, the IUC 11 byte size muset be reset to "0".
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable upstream <X/Y> iuc11-grant-size [<0-1024>] no cable upstream <X/Y> iuc11-grant-size [<0-1024>]
Command Syntax
X/Y 0-1024 the upstream port and logical channel number (0-3) the grant size in bytes
Command Default
0 bytes
13-177
Release 5.2.1
cable upstream loadbalance-group

The cable upstream loadbalance-group command assigns an upstream channel to a load balancing group. The no cable upstream loadbalance-group command removes an upstream channel from a load balancing group.
Note: The upstream channel can not be assigned to multiple load balancing groups unless the load balancing groups are defined as restricted.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable upstream <NUM> loadbalance-group <WORD> no cable upstream <NUM> loadbalance-group <WORD>
Command Syntax
NUM WORD the upstream port number the load balancing group name
13-178
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable upstream maintain-power-density on

The cable upstream maintain-power-density on command enables the Maintain Power Spectral Density feature for each logical channel. If Maintain Power Spectral Density is enabled and the modulation rate is different from the previous UCD, the cable modem must change its transmit power level to keep the power spectral density as close as possible to what it was prior to the modulation rate change. The no cable upstream maintain-power-density on command disables the Maintain Power Spectral Density feature. If Maintain Power Spectral Density is disabled, the cable modem maintains the same power level that it was using prior to the modulation rate change.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable upstream <X/Y> maintain-power-density on no cable upstream <X/Y> maintain-power-density on
Command Syntax
X/Y the upstream port and logical channel number (0-3)
13-179
Release 5.2.1
cable upstream map-interval

The cable upstream map-interval command is used to determine the time interval, in microseconds, for bandwidth maps messages (MAP) to be used by the cable modem to allocate upstream time slots. The no cable upstream map-interval command resets the upstream interval to the default value.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable upstream {<NUM> | <X/Y>} map-interval <500-16000> no cable upstream {<NUM> | <X/Y>} map-interval <500-16000>
Command Syntax
NUM X/Y 500-16000 the upstream port number the upstream port number and logical channel number (0-3) the interval value in microseconds.
Command Default
4000 microseconds
13-180
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable upstream max-calls

The Maximum Assigned Bandwidth (MAB) feature is used on the cable interface to regulate the number of Voice-over-IP (VOIP) calls that are available on a particular upstream channel for Unsolicited Grant Service (UGS) and Unsolicited Grant Service with Activity Detection UGS-AD constant bit rate (CBR) data flows. A definitive limit on the number of voice calls ensures that bandwidth resources are not overused on an upstream channel. Use the cable upstream max-calls command to configure the maximum number of voice calls for an upstream channel. The no cable upstream max-calls command returns the maximum number of voice calls to the default value.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable upstream {<NUM> | <X/Y>} max-calls <0-255> no cable upstream {<NUM> | <X/Y>} max-calls <0-255>
Command Syntax
NUM X/Y 0-255
the upstream port number the upstream port number and logical channel number (0-3) Number of voice calls permitted on the upstream channel.
Command Default
The default maximum number of calls is 0.
13-181
Release 5.2.1
cable upstream minislot-size

Use the cable upstream minislot-size command to set the number of 6.25 microsecond ticks in each upstream minislot. The no cable upstream minislot-size command returns the minislot size to the default value.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable upstream {<NUM> | <X/Y>} minislot-size [2 | 4 | 8 | 16 | 32 | 64 | 128] no cable upstream {<NUM> | <X/Y>} minislot-size [2 | 4 | 8 | 16 | 32 | 64 | 128]
Command Syntax
NUM X/Y 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 the upstream port number the upstream port number and logical channel number (0-3) Channel Width 3200000 Hz 1600000 Hz 800000 Hz 400000 Hz 200000 Hz Valid Minislot Sizes 2,4,8 ticks 4,8,16 ticks 8,16,32 ticks 16,32,64 ticks 32,64,128 ticks
13-182
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
Command Defaults
Channel Width Minislot Size 3200000 Hz 1600000 Hz 800000 Hz 400000 Hz 200000 Hz 4 ticks 8 ticks 16 ticks 32 ticks 64 ticks
13-183
Release 5.2.1
cable upstream modem-ranging-delay

The cable upstream modem-ranging-delay command specifies the maximum cable modem ranging delay in microseconds (usec). The ranging delay of a modem is the timing adjustment that would be sent to the modem if it were located next to the CMTS. For example, if a modem is located next to the CMTS and the show cable modem command indicates a timing offset of 1800 (10MHz clock units), the ranging delay for the modem is (1800 x 100)/1024 = 175-microseconds. The maximum modem ranging delay is used in sizing Initial Maintenance intervals in the upstream and is used for no other purpose. Initial Maintenance is the upstream interval that a cable modem uses to send its initial ranging request message when it wants to join the network. The no cable upstream modem-ranging-delay command restores the default value.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable upstream <NUM> modem-ranging-delay <0-600> no cable upstream <NUM> modem-ranging-delay
Command Syntax
NUM 0-600 the upstream port number the maximum ranging timing offset in microseconds
Command Default
250 microseconds
13-184
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable upstream modulation-profile

The cable upstream modulation-profile is used to apply an upstream modulation profile to an upstream channel. The no cable upstream modulation-profile command returns the modulation profile to modulation profile 1.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable upstream {<NUM> | <X/Y>} modulation-profile <1-600> no cable upstream {<NUM> | <X/Y>} modulation-profile <1-600> Note: When a modulation profile is assigned to an upstream channel, the assignment will be rejected if any of the following rules are violated: Differential encoding can only be enabled for TDMA, MTDMA, and ATDMA channel types not the SCDMA channel type. Differential encoding can only be enabled for bursts using the QPSK and 16QAM modulation types. For the TDMA and MTDMA channel types, the differential encoding setting (enabled or disabled) must be the same for IUC's 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. For the ATDMA channel type, the differential encoding setting (enabled or disabled) must be the same for IUC's 1, 3, and 4. For the MTDMA and ATDMA channel types, the differential encoding setting (enabled or disabled) must be the same for IUC's 9, 10, and (if defined) IUC 11.
13-185
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
NUM X/Y 1-600 the upstream port number the upstream port number and logical channel number (0-3) the modulation profile number
Command Default
modulation profile 1
13-186
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable upstream physical-delay

The CMTS physical delay function is used to specify the maximum round-trip propagation delay between the CMTS and cable modems (CMs). The CMTS can optionally set the physical delay automatically. The cable upstream physical-delay command is used to set fixed or automatic physical delay parameters. You can use the following options to adjust the physical delay function:

A single fixed time can be set for physical delay. Physical delay parameters can be configured so that they are adjusted automatically by the BSR when you specify the automatic option with a specified minimum and maximum microsecond range. If you do not want to specify a range for the automatic option, select the automatic option only.
The no cable upstream physical-delay command changes the physical delay setting back to the default value.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable upstream <NUM> physical-delay {<10-1600> | automatic [<10-1600> <10-1600>]} no cable upstream <NUM> physical-delay {<10-1600> | automatic [<10-1600> <10-1600>]}
13-187
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
NUM 10-1600 automatic 10-1600 the upstream port number the fixed physical delay in microseconds the automatic physical delay in microseconds the automatic minimum physical delay in microseconds - the default is 200 microseconds the automatic maximum physical delay in microseconds - the default is 1600 microseconds
10-1600
Command Default
The fixed physical delay is 800 microseconds The 800 microsecond default setting is an optimal setting for HFC networks with a radius of not more than 50 miles (i.e., distance to the farthest cable modem). However, when the default setting of 800 microseconds is in force on HFC plants with a radius larger than 50 miles, cable modems may not be able to register or pass data reliably since the round-trip propagation delay exceeds the configured value for the physical delay (i.e, cable modems are not given enough time to register). Note: Setting a physical delay value larger than required is allowed, although data passing performance will not be optimized. However, do not set a physical delay value smaller than required since this might cause some cable modems to become inoperable.
13-188
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
Should you need to change the default value for the physical delay, refer to the guidelines in the table that follows or calculate a setting value using the formulas that follow the table. BSR Physical Delay Transit Delay Setting (microsecon (microsecs)
800 700 600 500 400 300 200 100 1,600 1,400 1,200 1,000 800 600 400 200
One-way distance (miles)

100.0 87.5 75.0 62.5 50.0 37.5 25.0 12.5
One-Way Distance (kilometers)

160.9 140.8 120.7 100.6 80.5 60.4 40.2 20.1
Round trip Round trip distance distance (miles) (kilometers)

200.0 175.0 150.0 125.0 100.0 75.0 50.0 25.0 321.9 281.6 241.4 201.2 160.9 120.7 80.5 40.2
To calculate a setting value for your HFC plant, follow these steps using one of the formulas provided in Step 2: 1. Determine the distance from the BSR 64000 (i.e, CMTS) to the most distant cable modem measured in miles (or kilometers) of HFC (i.e, physical cable length). 2. Calculate the value for the physical delay using one of the following formulas: For HFC measured in miles: 16 x L = PD where L is the value determined in Step 1. PD is the value to specify for the command cable upstream physical-delay For HFC measured in kilometers: 9.95 x L = PD
13-189
Release 5.2.1
where L is the value determined in Step 1. PD is the value to specify for the command cable upstream physical-delay
Note: The physical delay cannot be configured to a value less than 10 microseconds.
13-190
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable upstream power-level

The BSR CMTS interface controls cable modem output power levels to meet the desired CMTS upstream input power level. Input power level adjustments to an upstream port compensate for CMTS signal degradation between the optical receiver and the upstream RF port. The cable upstream power-level command is used to set the upstream input power level in absolute mode. In absolute mode, the input power level does not change when the upstream channel width is changed. Defining the input power level in absolute mode could possibly cause upstream return lasers to clip on a completely populated upstream channel. Caution: If the power level is not explicitly set on the upstream interfaces, they default to 0 dBmV in absolute mode with a 3.2 MHz, 2560 kilosymbols per second rate. Ensure that the correct power level is set on each upstream channel. The following table describes how the upstream channel bandwidth corresponds to the input power-level range and default power-level range for a specific upstream channel.
Table Upstream Input Power Level Range Parameters
Modulation Upstream Channel Default Rate Bandwidth Power-level

160 ksym/s 320 ksym/s 640 ksym/s 1280 ksym/s 2560 ksym/s 5120 ksym/s 200 kHz 400 kHz 800 kHz 1600 kHz 3200 kHz 6400 kHz -1 dBmV +2 dBmV +5 dBmV +8 dBmV +11 dBmV
Power-level Range
-16 to +14 dBmV -13 to +17 dBmV -10 to +20 dBmV -7 to +23 dBmV -4 to +26 dBmV -1 to +29 dBmV
Caution: Use caution when increasing the input power level in absolute mode. The CMs on the HFC network increase their transmit power level by 3 dB for every incremental upstream channel bandwidth change, causing an increase in the total power on the upstream channel. This may violate the upstream return laser design parameters
13-191
Release 5.2.1
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable upstream <NUM> power-level <200-3200> no cable upstream <NUM> power-level <200-3200>
Command Syntax
NUM 200-3200 the upstream port number the input power level, expressed in dB
Command Default
0 dB
Command Example The following example shows how to use the cable upstream power-level command to set the upstream input power level to +5 dBmV in absolute mode, which keeps the input power level at +5 dBmV regardless of the upstream channel bandwidth setting, as shown below:
MOT(config-if)#cable upstream 0 power-level 50
13-192
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable upstream power-level default

The BSR CMTS interface controls CM output power levels to meet the desired CMTS upstream input power level. Input power level adjustments to an upstream port compensate for CMTS signal degradation between the optical receiver and the upstream RF port. The cable upstream power-level default command is used to set the upstream input power level in relative mode, which means that the input power level changes when the upstream channel width is changed. For example, if the input power level is +11 dBmV for a DOCSIS 3.2 MHz upstream channel bandwidth setting in relative mode and is changed to 1.6 MHz, the default receive power is +8 dBmV. The default power levels for the 3.2 MHz and 1.6 MHz channels are equal relative to their respective channel bandwidth settings Caution: If the power level is not explicitly set on the upstream interfaces, they default to 0 dBmV in absolute mode with a 3.2 MHz, 2560 kilosymbols per second rate. Ensure that the correct power level is set on each upstream channel. The folliwng table describes how the upstream channel bandwidth corresponds to the input power-level range and default power-level range for a specific upstream channel.
Upstream Channel Bandwidth

200 KHz 400 KHz 800 KHz 1.6 MHz 3.2 MHz
Default Power-level Range

-1 dBmV +2 dBmV +5 dBmV +8 dBmV +11 dBmV
Power-level Range
-16 to +14 dBmV -13 to +17 dBmV -10 to +20 dBmV -7 to +23 dBmV -4 to +26 dBmV
Group Access
MSO
13-193
Release 5.2.1
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable upstream <NUM> power-level default {<-150 - +150>} no cable upstream <NUM> power-level default {<-150 - +150>}
Command Syntax
NUM -150 - +150 the upstream port number the number of dB above or below the default input power level
Command Default
0 dB
Command Example
The following example shows how to use the cable upstream power-level default command to set the input power level for a 3.2 MHz channel in relative mode from +11 dBmV to +5 dBmV:
MOT(config-if)#cable upstream 0 power-level default -60
The default input power level is reduced by 6 dB. The power level is now +5 dBmV. The following example shows how to use the cable upstream power-level default command to set the input power level for a 3.2 MHz channel in relative mode from +11 dBmV to 0 dBmV, as shown below:
MOT(config-if)#cable upstream 0 power-level default -110
The default input power level is reduced by 11 dB.
13-194
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable upstream pre-equalization

The cable upstream pre-equalization command enables pre-equalization adjustment on the upstream port that includes sending pre-equalization coefficients in a ranging response to a CM to compensate for impairment over the transmission line. The no cable upstream pre-equalization command disables the pre-equalization function. Note: Not all CMs support the pre-equalization adjustment. If a CM does not support this adjustment, the BSR CMTS interface may not be able to receive upstream data correctly from the CM.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable upstream <NUM> pre-equalization no cable upstream <NUM> pre-equalization
Command Syntax
13-195
Release 5.2.1
cable upstream range-backoff

Use the cable upstream range-backoff command to set the start and end upstream range-backoff values for a CM or re-establish a CM if a power outage occurs. Use the no cable upstream range-backoff command return the ranging back-off default value. If you choose automatic, the system sets the upstream data-backoff start and end values.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable upstream {<NUM> | <X/Y>} range-backoff {<0-15> <0-15> | automatic} no cable upstream {<NUM> | <X/Y>} range-backoff {<0-15> <0-15> | automatic}
Command Syntax
NUM X/Y 0-15 0-15 automatic the upstream port number the upstream port number and logical channel number (0-3) start of range backoff end of range backoff the automatic range backoff.
Command Default
start 0, end 4
13-196
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable upstream range-forced-continue

The cable upstream range-forced-continue command forces a ranging response to continue for all CMs. The no cable upstream range-forced-continue command disables forcing a ranging response/
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable upstream <NUM> range-forced-continue no cable upstream <NUM> range-forced-continue
Command Syntax
13-197
Release 5.2.1
cable upstream range-power-override

The cable upstream range-power-override command enables CM power adjustment. The no cable upstream range-power-override command disables CM power adjustment.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable upstream <NUM> range-power-override no cable upstream <NUM> range-power-override
Command Syntax
13-198
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable upstream rate-limit

The cable upstream rate-limit command controls whether rate-limiting is applied to any CM sending upstream data to the CMTS on a given upstream interface. The no cable upstream rate-limit command changes the rate limit applied to a cable modem sending upstream data to the CMTS back to the default which is disabled. The token-bucket algorithm is used for rate-limiting. Note: If the rate-limit is enabled, data received from cable modems are rate-limited according to the cable modems configured. Packets may be buffered at times when any cable modem or the hosts behind the cable modems transmit data exceeding the permitted bandwidth.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable upstream <NUM> rate-limit no cable upstream <NUM> rate-limit
Command Syntax
Command Default
Disabled
13-199
Release 5.2.1
cable upstream schedule

The cable upstream schedule command is used to configure the type of scheduling to be applied on upstream ports.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable upstream schedule {priority-only | priority-wfq}
Command Syntax
priority-only priority-wfq specifies the use of straight priority-based scheduling specifies the use of priority-based weighted fair queuing scheduling
13-200
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable upstream shutdown

The cable upstream shutdown command administratively disables the upstream port. The no cable upstream shutdown command enables an upstream port.
Note: Verify that each upstream port is enabled after the port is properly configured and ready for use.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable upstream {<NUM> | <X/Y>} shutdown no cable upstream {<NUM> | <X/Y>} shutdown
Command Syntax
NUM X/Y the upstream port number the upstream port number and logical channel number (0-3)
Command Default
Each upstream port is disabled.
13-201
Release 5.2.1
cable upstream snr-offset

The cable upstream snr-offset command configures the display an SNR value with an offset. The offset can be configured for each upstream port up to a value of 100 (10 dB) in 10 (1 dB) increments. The offset value will be added to the SNR value when it is displayed with the show controllers and show interfaces cable upstream signal-quality CLI commands and through SNMP. The offset value will not be added to the actual SNR reading that is used by critical tasks such as Spectrum Management.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable upstream <NUM> snr-offset {10 | 20 | 30 | 40 | 50 | 60 | 70 | 80 | 90 | 100} no cable upstream <NUM> snr-offset {10 | 20 | 30 | 40 | 50 | 60 | 70 | 80 | 90 | 100}
Command Syntax
NUM the upstream port number the offset value in increments of 10 (1 dB): 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 offset SNR value by 10 offset SNR value by 20 offset SNR value by 30 offset SNR value by 40 offset SNR value by 50 offset SNR value by 60 offset SNR value by 70 offset SNR value by 80 offset SNR value by 90 offset SNR value by 100
13-202
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable upstream spectrum-group

The cable upstream spectrum-group command is used to apply a spectrum group to an upstream port. The no cable upstream spectrum-group command removes the spectrum group.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable upstream <NUM> spectrum-group <WORD> no cable upstream <NUM> spectrum-group <WORD>
Command Syntax
NUM WORD the upstream port number the exact group name applied to the upstream port
13-203
Release 5.2.1
cable upstream spread-interval

The cable upstream spread-interval specifies the spreading interval for an S-CDMA frame. A spreading interval is the time that it takes to transmit one symbol per code across all 128 codes in an S-CDMA frame. The time duration of an S-CDMA frame is determined by a configurable number of spreading intervals and the signaling rate.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable upstream <X/Y> spread-interval <1-32> no cable upstream <X/Y> spread-interval <1-32>
Command Syntax
X/Y 1-32 the upstream port and logical channel number (0-3) the spreading interval value
13-204
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable upstream trap-enable-cmts

The cable upstream trap-enable-cmts command enables the rdnCmtsLinkUpDownTrapEnable trap for an upstream port. The rdnCmtsLinkUpDownTrapEnable trap indicates whether a CMTS link up or link down trap should be generated. The no cable upstream trap-enable-rdn command disables the rdnCmtsLinkUpDownTrapEnable trap.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable upstream {<NUM> | <X/Y>} trap-enable-cmts no cable upstream {<NUM> | <X/Y>} trap-enable-cmts
Command Syntax
NUM X/Y the upstream port number the upstream port number and logical channel number (0-3)
Command Default
Disabled
13-205
Release 5.2.1
cable upstream trap-enable-if

The cable upstream trap-enable-if command enables the ifLinkUpDownTrapEnable trap for an upstream port. The ifLinkUpDownTrapEnable trap indicates whether a link up or link down trap should be generated. The cable upstream no trap-enable-if command disables the ifLinkUpDownTrapEnable trap.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable upstream {<NUM> | <X/Y>} trap-enable-if no cable upstream {<NUM> | <X/Y>} trap-enable-if
Command Syntax
NUM X/Y the upstream port number. the upstream port number and logical channel number (0-3)
Command Default
Disabled
13-206
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cable upstream trap-enable-rdn

The cable upstream trap-enable-rdn command enables the rdnCardIfLinkUpDownEnable trap for an upstream port. The rdnCardIfLinkUpDownEnable trap indicates whether a link up or link down trap should be generated. The no cable upstream trap-enable-rdn command disables the rdnCardIfLinkUpDownEnable trap.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable upstream {<NUM> | <X/Y>} trap-enable-rdn no cable upstream {<NUM> | <X/Y>} trap-enable-rdn
Command Syntax
NUM X/Y the upstream port number. the upstream port number and logical channel number (0-3)
Command Default
Disabled
13-207
Release 5.2.1
cable utilization-interval
The cable utilization-interval command specifies the upstream or downstream channel utilization calculation interval. The no cable utilization-interval returns the channel utilization calculation interval to the default value of "0" (disabled).
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable utilization-interval <0-86400> no cable utilization-interval <0-86400>
Command Syntax
0-86400 the channel utilization interval in seconds, 0 is disabled
Command Default
0 = disabled
13-208
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
channel-type
The channel-type command specifies the channel type for a modulation profile. There are four possible channel-types:

TDMA - DOCSIS 1.1 channel type ATDMA - DOCSIS 2.0 channel type MTDMA - DOCSIS 1.1 or DOCSIS 2.0 channel type S-CDMA - DOCSIS 2.0 channel type only used for logical channel configurations
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Modulation Profile Configuration
Command Line Usage

channel-type {tdma | atdma | scdma | mtdma} no channel-type {tdma | atdma | scdma | mtdma} Note: The channel-type command is applicable to the 2:8 and 2:8 (2.0)CMTS modules only. To determine which CMTS modules are installed in the BSR 64000, use the show chassis status command. It is unnecessary to configure and enable multiple logical channels with the same channel types. The total capacity of the physical channel will not be enhanced by enabling multiple logical channels. However, it is reasonable to assign unique modulation profile to multiple logical channels of the same type for RF impairment investigation.
13-209
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
tdma TDMA, Time Division Multiple Access valid for initial, long, request, short, and station IUC codes Advanced TDMA, Time Division Multiple Access - valid for a-long, a-short, a-ugs, initial, request, and station IUC codes S-CDMA Synchronous CDMA, Code Division Multiple Access - valid for a-long, a-short, a-ugs, initial, request, and station IUC codes TDMA-A-TDMA - valid for a-long, a-short, a-ugs, initial, request, and station IUC codes
atdma
scdma
mtdma
13-210
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
clear cable dcc-stats

The clear cable dcc-stats command clears all Dynamic Channel Change (DCC) statistics for all CMTS modules in the BSR chassis or a CMTS module in a specified slot.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

clear cable dcc-stats [<X/Y>]
Command Syntax
13-211
Release 5.2.1
clear cable downstream bonding-group statistics

The clear cable downstream bonding-group statistics command clears downstream bonding group statistics. The BSR will automatically clear downstream bonding group statistics under the following conditions:

a downstream bonding group configuration is modified. a downstream bonding group is deleted.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

clear cable downstream bonding-group statistics [<X/Y>]
Command Syntax
X/Y
the downstream channel associated with this channel bonding group: X is the 2:8 CMTS module slot number and Y is the MAC domain
13-212
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
clear cable flap-list

The clear cable flap-list command clears the cable flap-list. You can either clear the flap-list of a specific cable modem by specifying its MAC address or clear the flap-lists of all the cable modems by using the all option.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

clear cable flap-list {<mac> | all}
Command Syntax
mac all MAC address in the form of xxxx.xxxx.xxxx apply to all MAC addresses
13-213
Release 5.2.1
clear cable host

The clear cable host command removes a host CPE's IP address, MAC address, or domain name from the BSRs internal address tables. This allows a new host CPE to come online from the previous host's cable modem.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

clear cable host {<mac> | <prefix> | all}
Command Syntax
mac prefix all the host CPEs MAC address the host CPEs IP address reset all host CPEs
13-214
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
clear cable modem

The clear cable modem command is used to either clear the traffic counters or reset a single cable modem or all cable modems connected to the BSR. The clear cable modem command options can be used to do the following:

Clear or reset a single cable modem by using its MAC address or IP address. Clear or reset specific group of cable modems. Clear or reset all cable modems.
Note: Only users with read/write privileges are allowed to clear cable modems with the following exception - read only users can clear cable modems by MAC address or IP address. The clear cable modem all {counters | reset} command requires read/write privileges.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

clear cable modem {<mac> [<mac>] | <prefix> | all } {counters | reset }
Command Syntax
mac mac prefix all counters reset the cable modems MAC address a MAC address mask that specifies a group of cable modems the cable modems IP address clear the cable modem traffic counters or reset all cable modems clear the cable modem traffic counters reset the cable modem
13-215
Release 5.2.1
clear cable modem downstream

The clear cable modem command is used to reset all bonded or non-bonded cable modems on a BSR downstream channel. The clear cable modem command can be used to do the following:

Reset all bonded cable modems on a MAC Domain. Reset all bonded cable modems on a MAC Domain bonding group. Resets all bonding capable cable modems that are registered as non-bonded.
Note: Only users with read/write privileges are allowed to reset cable modems on a downstream channel.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

clear cable modem <X/Y> downstream bonding [<1-65535>] reset clear cable modem <X/Y> downstream non-bonding reset
Command Syntax
X/Y bonding 1-65535 non-bonding reset the slot and MAC Domain number of the CMTS module channel bonded cable modems the downstream channel bonding group number all channel-bonding capable cable modems that are registered as non-bonding reset the cable modems
13-216
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
clear cable modem reject-pk reset clear cable modem reject-pt reset
The clear cable modem reject-pk reset and clear cable modem reject-pt reset commands are used to reset cable modems that are in the reject(pk) or the reject(pt) states, respectively.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

clear cable modem reject-pk reset clear cable modem reject-pt reset
13-217
Release 5.2.1
clear cable modem offline

The clear cable modem offline command removes a cable modem from the list of offline cable modems. This command allows you to do the following:

remove a single offline cable modem from the offline list remove all offline cable modems in a single CMTS from the offline list remove all offline cable modems from the offline list
Note: The cable modem aging timer removes offline cable modems from the list after the configured timeout period has expired. The clear cable modem offline command is useful if you need to remove a modem before the cable modem aging timer has expired or if you are not using the cable modem aging timer feature.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

clear cable modem offline [<mac> | <X/Y> | slot <NUM>]
Command Syntax
mac X/Y slot NUM the cable modems MAC address the slot and MAC Domain number of the CMTS module a CMTS slot number (0-5, 9-14)
13-218
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
clear cable modem sync

The clear cable modem sync command provides a means of updating the SRMs cable modem database if the SRM becomes out of synchronization with the CMTS modules in regard to what cable modems are registered. The clear cable modem sync command is useful when the show cable modem command is not displaying all of the cable modems on the system or is displaying duplicate cable modems. The clear cable modem sync command causes the SRM to clear its cable modem database and then query each CMTS about their cable modems. The response from each CMTS is used to rebuild the SRMs cable modem database. Note: There is no reason to use the clear cable modem sync command unless an operator suspects a problem with the display results from the show cable modem command. It may take several seconds to completely rebuild the SRMs cable modem database.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

clear cable modem sync [slot <NUM>]
Command Syntax
slot NUM specifies a CMTS slot (0-5, 9-14)
Command Defaults
Disabled
13-219
Release 5.2.1
clear cable qos svc-flow statistics

The clear cable qos svc-flow statistics command clears all statistics relating to downstream rate-limiting for a particular service flow. This is the same information displayed with the show cable qos svc-flow statistics command.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

clear cable qos svc-flow statistics [<X/Y>] [<1-4292967295>]
Command Syntax
X/Y 1-4292967295 the slot and MAC Domain number of the CMTS module service flow ID
13-220
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
clear cable srvclass-stats

The clear cable srvclass-stats command clears service class statistics on the BSR. These are the same service class statistics displayed with the show cable srvclass-stats command.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Service Class Configuration
Command Line Usage

clear cable srvclass-stats <NUM> <NUM> {DOWN | UP | <WORD>}
Command Syntax
NUM NUM specify a CMTS slot number specify a CMTS downstream or upstream port number or a TX32 module slot number/downstream port number/downstream channel number refer to the diagram following the Command Syntax table Note: The comma should not be entered as part of the command syntax clear downstream service class statistics clear upstream service class statistics the pre-defined service class name or the user-defined service class name created with the name command
DOWN UP WORD
13-221
Release 5.2.1
<0-7>
,
comma
4/[0-7]/[0-3]
TX32 Module Slot Number/ 2:8 CMTS Module Downstream or Upstream TX32 Downstream Port Number/ TX32 Downstream Channel Number Port Number
13-222
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
clear cable ucc-stats

The clear cable ucc-stats command clears all UCC statistics for all CMTS modules in the BSR chassis or a CMTS module in a specified slot.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

clear cable ucc-stats [<X/Y>]
Command Syntax
X/Y
the slot and MAC Domain number of the CMTS module
13-223
Release 5.2.1
clear cable ugs-stats

The clear cable ugs-stats command clears active voice call statistics for all CMTS modules, a specified CMTS module, or a specified upstream port on a CMTS module.
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

clear cable ugs-stats [<0-15> [<0-7>]]
Command Syntax
0-15 0-7 DOCSIS (CMTS) module slot number the upstream port number.
13-224
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
clear counters cable

The clear counters cable clears counters for a cable interface.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
All modes except User EXEC.
Command Line Usage

clear counters cable <X/Y>
Command Syntax
X/Y
13-225
Release 5.2.1
clear interfaces cable upstream channel-agility-stats

The clear interfaces cable upstream channel-agility-stats command clears ASPM Channel Statistics.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage clear interfaces cable <X/Y> upstream <NUM> channel-agility-stats
Note: When using the clear interfaces cable upstream channel-agility-stats command, only the NUM argument displays for a BCM 3138-based 2:8 CMTS module (For example: clear interfaces cable upstream <NUM> channel-agility-stats). Both the NUM and X/Y arguments display for a BCM 3140-based DOCSIS 2.0 2:8 CMTS (For example: clear interfaces cable upstream {<NUM> | <X/Y>} channel-agility-stats). Only the NUM argument is applicable to this command.
Command Syntax
X/Y NUM the slot and MAC Domain number of the 2:8 CMTS module: the upstream port number
Command Default
Disabled
13-226
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
clear interfaces cable upstream signal-quality

The clear interfaces cable upstream signal-quality command clears the unerroreds, correctables and uncorrectables counters in the show controllers cable upstream command output.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

clear interfaces cable <X/Y> upstream {<NUM>} signal-quality
Command Syntax
X/Y NUM the slot and MAC Domain number of the CMTS module the upstream port number
13-227
Release 5.2.1
clear usage-stats
The clear usage-stats command clears the ASPM statistics displayed per Spectrum Group with the show cable spectrum-group stats command.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

clear usage-stats [upstream <NUM>]
Command Syntax
upstream NUM specify an upstream port number
13-228
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
cmts-id
The method that the BSR uses to generate GateIDs for DQoS allows for unique IDs across CMTSs which is referred to as the CMTS-ID. CMTS-IDs remove the need to constantly update the Call Management Server (CMS) with scope information. The CMTS-ID is configured using the cmts-id command. The BSR generates a unique GateID when a request to create a PacketCable gate is received from a Call Management Server (CMS) or a Policy Server (PS). The cmts-id command allows the user to reserve 1-17 MSBs in the GateID. These bits are used to for specifying a CMTS-ID for identifying the CMTS generating the GateID. The no cmts-id command removes a configured CMTS-ID.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Packet Cable Configuration
Command Line Usage

cmts-id {size <1-14> value <0x0-0x3fff>} no cmts-id {size <1-14> value <0x0-0x3fff>}
Command Syntax
size 1-14 value 0x0-0x3fff the number of bits reserved for specifying the CMTS-ID the CMTS-ID value in hexidecimal - a CMTS-ID must fit within the specified range
Command Default
Disabled. The GateID does not contain a CMTS-ID.
13-229
Release 5.2.1
codes-subframe
The codes-subframe command specifies the sub-frame size for an S-CDMA channel type. The sub-frame size establishes the boundaries over which interleaving is accomplished
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

codes-subframe <1-128> no codes-subframe <1-128>
Command Syntax
1-128 the sub-frame size
13-230
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
collect interval
The collect interval command configures the interval rate at which data collection is performed by the spectrum manager.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

collect interval <60-65535>
Command Syntax
60-65535 The time interval in seconds
13-231
Release 5.2.1
collect resolution
The collect resolution command is used to configure the frequency resolution rate that the spectrum manager performs. The value from the collect resolution command is used as an increment when measuring the upstream frequencies. This value is also used as the channel width so that the measurements over the spectrum contain no gaps nor overlaps.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

collect resolution {200000 | 400000}
Command Syntax
200000 400000 the resolution in Hertz (Hz)
Command Default
200000 Hz
13-232
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
dhcp leasequery authorization on

The dhcp leasequery authorization on command enables the exchange of DHCP lease query messages between the CMTS and a DHCP server. The no dhcp leasequery authorization on command disables this exchange. When an IP packet is either received from or destined to a Host/CPE which does not have an entry in the BSRs DHCP Lease table, the DHCP Lease Query feature will attempt to identify the Host/CPE. If the DHCP Lease Query attempt fails, packets associated with this Host/CPE are discarded. Note: For the DHCP Lease Query feature to function properly, host authorization must also be enabled with the host authorization command. Host authorization is used for security purposes on a cable network.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

dhcp leasequery {authorization {on}} no dhcp leasequery {authorization {on}}
Command Syntax
authorization on Authorization configuration Turn on the authorization (Disables Proxy ARP)
13-233
Release 5.2.1
differential-encoding on
The differential-encoding on command specifies whether or not differential encoding is used in this modulation profile. Differential encoding is a technique where data is transmitted according to the phase change between two modulation symbols instead of by the absolute phase of a symbol. Differential encoding makes the absolute phase of the received signal insignificant and has the effect of doubling the BER for the same C/N. The no differential-encoding on command disables differential encoding for this modulation profile. Note: If a modulation profile is in use, differential encoding cannot be enabled or disabled for any of the burst types. To enable or disable differential encoding for a burst type, an operator must copy the modulation profile to a new modulation profile number, enable or disable differential encoding for the new modulation profile, and assign the new modulation profile to the desired upstream channel. Attempting to enable or disable differential encoding for a modulation profile that is in use will generate the following error message:
[10/07-10:26:06.59- 07:CRMTASK]-E-mod profile in use, cannot change diff encoding
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

differential-encoding on no differential-encoding on
13-234
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
docstest
The docstest command globally enables or disables DOCSIS 2.0 test mode on the BSR through the DOCSIS 2.0 Testing MIB (SP-TestMIBv2.0-D02-030530). The DOCSIS 2.0 Testing MIB is used to test DOCSIS 2.0 protocol compliance through a set of objects used to manage DOCSIS 2.0 Cable Modem (CM) and Cable Modem Termination System (CMTS) programmable test features. Note: The DOCSIS 2.0 Testing MIB is considered to be an adjunct to the DOCSIS 2.0 Specification rather than a part of that specification. Support for this MIB does not indicate compliance with the DOCSIS 2.0 specification. Conversely, lack of support for this MIB does not indicate non-compliance with the DOCSIS 2.0 specification. However, support for this MIB is mandatory for all DOCSIS 2.0 compliant CMs and CMTSs that are submitted for Certification and Qualification by CableLabs. Once DOCSIS 2.0 test mode is enabled with the docstest enable command, the BSR remains in DOCSIS 2.0 test mode until the test mode is disabled with the docstest disable command or the system is rebooted.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

docstest {disable | enable }
Command Syntax
disable enable disable DOCSIS 2.0 test mode enable DOCSIS 2.0 test mode
Command Default
Disabled
Release 5.2.1
docstest type
The docstest type command allows you to specify the type of DOCSIS 2.0 test to be used through a series of enumerated test modes. The enumerated test mode selected with the docstest type command corresponds to an integer "TYPE" field in the DOCSIS 2.0 Testing MIBs CM/CMTS TLV Table.
Note: DOCSIS 2.0 test mode must be enabled with the docstest enable command before a DOCSIS 2.0 test type can be specified.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

docstest type {110 | 111} | slot <NUM> downstream {0 | 1} [LINE] docstest type 112 slot <NUM> [LINE] no docstest type {110 | 111} | slot <NUM> downstream {0 | 1} [LINE] no docstest type 112 slot <NUM> [LINE]
Command Syntax
110 111 the enumerated test type for the downstream channel - the enumerated test types correspond to an integer "TYPE" field in the DOCSIS 2.0 Testing MIBs CM/CMTS TLV Table the enumerated test type for the 10.24 MHz reference clock the slot number in the BSR chassis containing an installed DOCSIS 2.0 2:8 CMTS module
112 slot NUM
13-236
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
downstream 0 downstream 1 LINE
the downstream channel number specifies the data required for the test - up to 510 characters can be entered with first two characters being the length and value of the data that follows - the length and value correspond to the LENGTH and VALUE fields from the DOCSIS 2.0 Testing MIBs CM/CMTS TLV Table
13-237
Release 5.2.1
fec-codeword
This fec codeword command specifies the number of information bytes for each FEC codeword.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

fec-codeword <16-253> no fec-codeword <16-253>
Command Syntax
16-253 the number of information bytes for each FEC codeword
13-238
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
fec-correction
The fec-correction command specifies the number of bytes that can be corrected per Forward Error Correction (FEC) code word. This is the number of bytes that the FEC decoder can correct within a codeword. A FEC codeword consists of information and parity bytes for error correction. The number of parity bytes is equal to two times the number of correctable errors. The size of correctable errors is dictated by channel impairments.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

fec-correction <0-16> no fec-correction <0-16>
Command Syntax
0-16 the FEC correction value - 0 indicates no Forward Error Correction
13-239
Release 5.2.1
fft display
The fft display command displays the FFT power level measurement data to the console or telnet session in one of the two formats: table or graph (ASCII plot). Power level measurement data is retrieved either from an operational CMTS module or a file system. The user specifies a frequency range for which power level measurement data is to be displayed.
Caution: Running the fft display command can impact voice performance.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

fft display {Slot/Port | nvram: <WORD> | flash: <WORD>} startfreq {<0-81920000>} endfreq {<0-81920000>} {table | graph}
Command Syntax
Slot/Port nvram: flash: WORD operational 2:8 CMTS slot number and valid upstream port number retrieve the power level measurement data from the NVRAM file system retrieve the power level measurement data from the flash file system power level measurement data filename limit of 20 characters excluding the ".fft" filename extension start of the frequency range (0 Hz - 81.92 MHz)
startfreq 0-81920000
13-240
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
endfreq 0-81920000 table | graph
end of the frequency range (0 Hz - 81.92 MHz) specify table or graph display format
13-241
Release 5.2.1
fft setup
The fft setup command can be used to configure the FFT processor on the BCM3138/ BCM3140 chip set or to display the current FFT processor configuration.
Caution: Running the fft setup command can impact voice performance.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

fft setup <Slot/Port> [sample {<256-2048>} mode {Tap-in} window {blackman | blackman-harris | hamming | hanning | rectangular}]
Command Syntax
Slot/Port sample 256-2048 mode Tap-in window operational 2:8 CMTS slot number and a valid upstream port number number of samples of the power level measurement RF Sentry operational mode window coefficient to shape the output of the power level measurement (rectangular, hamming, hanning, blackman, or blackman-harris)
Command Defaults
sample = 2048 window = rectangular
13-242
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
fft start
The fft start command initiates the power level measurement using the FFT algorithm via the RF Sentry. Note: The sample, mode, and window arguments are optional with the fft start command but can be used to override the current FFT processor configuration specified with the fft setup command and initiate power level measurement with a new FFT processor configuration.
Caution: Running the fft start command can impact voice performance.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

fft start <Slot/Port> [sample {<256-2048>}] [mode {Tap-in}] [window {rectangular | hamming | hanning | blackman | blackman-harris}]
Command Syntax
Slot/Port sample 256-2048 mode Tap-in window operational 2:8 CMTS slot number and a valid upstream port number number of samples of the power level measurement RF Sentry operational mode window coefficient to shape the output of the power level measurement (rectangular, hamming, hanning, blackman, or blackman-harris)
13-243
Release 5.2.1
fft store
The fft store command saves the latest FFT power level measurement data for a CMTS module to a file system. The user specifies a particular slot and port, the file system (NVRAM or Flash), and a file name without any extension to be used to store the FFT power level measurement data. An extension of ".fft" will be automatically added to the file name.
Caution: Running the fft store command can impact voice performance.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

fft store Slot/Port {nvram:<filename> | flash:<filename>}
Command Syntax
Slot/Port nvram: flash: filename operational 2:8 CMTS slot number and valid upstream port number store the power level measurement data to the NVRAM file system store the power level measurement data to the Flash file system power level measurement data filename limit of 20 characters not including any filename extension
13-244
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
frequency-test-method
The frequency-test-method command allows an operator to select the preferred type of measurement method for frequency agility. Frequency Agility provides the capability of periodically monitoring the quality of the active upstream channel. The no frequency-test-method command disables frequency agility measurement.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

frequency-test-method {fft | snr} no frequency-test-method {fft | snr}
Command Syntax
fft use power level measurement by means of the Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) algorithm FFT transforms a discrete signal in a time domain to a power level in a frequency domain use Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR) measurement which exchanges data between a reference modem and the 2:8 CMTS - a reference modem is a registered cable modem that is selected to send an upstream traffic/ burst used to measure the SNR on that upstream
snr
Command Default
fft
13-245
Release 5.2.1
guard-band
The guard-band command is used to define the minimum spectrum separation or spacing between upstream channels in the same spectrum group.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

guard-band {<0-37000000> | <0-60000000>} no guard-band {<0-37000000> | <0-60000000>}
Command Syntax
0-37000000 0-60000000 The guard band separation size in Hertz for North America. The guard band separation size in Hertz for Europe.
Command Default
North America = 0 Hz Europe = 0 Hz
13-246
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
hop action band

The hop action band command is used to determine the search order for each frequency band during the frequency hop action.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

hop action band <5000000-42000000> <5000000-42000000> [priority <1-255>] no hop action band <5000000-42000000> <5000000-42000000> [priority <1-255>]
Command Syntax
5000000-42000000 5000000-42000000 1-255 The start upstream frequency band in Hertz. The end upstream frequency band in Hertz. The upstream band priority number.The lower number takes precedence.
Command Default
upstream band priority = 128
13-247
Release 5.2.1
hop action channel-width

The hop action channel-width command is used to change the upstream channel-width setting before a frequency hop action.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

hop action channel-width {1600000 | 200000 | 3200000 | 400000 | 800000} [priority <1-255>] no hop action channel-width {1600000 | 200000 | 3200000 | 400000 | 800000} [priority <1-255>]
Command Syntax
The upstream channel width setting. 1600000 200000 3200000 400000 800000 1-255 1600000 = Channel width of 1600 kHz 200000 = Channel width of 200 kHz 3200000 = Channel width of 3200 kHz 400000 = Channel width of 400 kHz 800000 = Channel width of 800 kHz The upstream band priority number.The lower number takes precedence.
Command Default
13-248
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
hop action frequency

The hop action frequency command is used to determine the frequency search order for either discrete center frequencies or frequency bands during the frequency hop action.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

hop action frequency <5000000-42000000> [priority <1-255>] no hop action frequency <5000000-42000000> [priority <1-255>]
Command Syntax
5000000-42000000 1-255 The upstream frequency in Hertz The upstream band priority number.The lower number takes precedence.
Command Default
13-249
Release 5.2.1
hop action modulation-profile

The hop action modulation-profile command is used to change the modulation profile setting before a frequency hop action.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

hop action modulation-profile <1-600> [priority <1-255>] no hop action modulation-profile <1-600> [priority <1-255>] Note: The modulation type for the hopping profile has to be the same as the configured channel profile type (i.e.TDMA to TDMA or ATDMA to ATDMA, etc.)
Command Syntax
1-600 1-255 The modulation profile number. The upstream band priority number.The lower number takes precedence.
Command Default
modulation profiles = 1 or 2 upstream band priority = 128\
13-250
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
hop action power-level

The hop action power-level command is used to change the power-level setting before a frequency hop action.Table Table describes how the upstream channel bandwidth corresponds to the input power-level range and default power-level range for a specific upstream channel.
Upstream Channel Bandwidth

200 KHz 400 KHz 800 KHz 1.6 MHz 3.2 MHz
Default Power-level Range

-1 dBmV +2 dBmV +5 dBmV +8 dBmV +11 dBmV
Power-level Range
-16 to +14 dBmV -13 to +17 dBmV -10 to +20 dBmV -7 to +23 dBmV -4 to +26 dBmV
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

hop action power-level {<200-3200> | default < -150 - +150>} [priority <1-255>] no hop action power-level {<200-3200> | default < -150 - +150>} [priority <1-255>]
Command Syntax
200 - 3200 default -150 - +150 1-255 The input power level, expressed in kHz. The number in tenths of a dB above or below the default input power level. The upstream band priority number.The lower number takes precedence.
13-251
Release 5.2.1
Command Default
13-252
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
hop action roll-back

The hop action roll-back command is used to return the upstream channel width or modulation profile setting, that was adjusted during a hop action, to the original configuration when upstream channel conditions improve.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

hop action roll-back no hop action roll-back
Command Default
Disabled
13-253
Release 5.2.1
hop modulation-rollback-count
The hop modulation-rollback-count command provides an operator with the ability to specify the number of consecutive, good SNR (MER) measurements before ASPM will perform a modulation profile rollback. This ensures that the channel is clean before performing a modulation profile rollback back and also reduces the number of extraneous UCD changes.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

hop modulation-rollback-count <5-100> no hop modulation-rollback-count <5-100>
Command Syntax
5-100 the number of consecutive, good SNR (MER) measurements before ASPM will perform a modulation profile rollback
Command Defaults
18
13-254
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
hop period
The hop period command is used to prevent excessive frequency hops on an upstream port.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

hop period <30-3600> no hop period <30-3600>
Command Syntax
30-3600 The rate at which the frequency hop takes place in seconds.
Command Default
300 seconds
13-255
Release 5.2.1
hop snr hysteresis

The hop snr hysteresis command specifies the amount of dB degradation in a downward direction before a channel will be marked as "IMPAIRED". For example. if a channel is operating in a "NORMAL" state of 20 dB and SNR hysteresis is set to 2 dB, if the channel degrades in a downward direction until it reaches 18 dB, then the channel will be considered to be in the "IMPAIRED" state. If the channel again improves to 20 dB, the channel is no longer considerd to be "IMPAIRED". The user must be aware of the effects of lowering or increasing the SNR hysteresis. A higher SNR hysteresis value will delay switching to a channel that is not impaired. A smaller SNR hysteresis value could result in too many channel transitions.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

hop snr hysteresis <2-3> no hop snr hysteresis <2-3>
13-256
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
Command Syntax
2-3 defines the SNR threshold for the downward transition of a modulation type - the amount of dB improvement in the channel being assessed through the RF Sentry 9th Receiver before switching back to this channel.
Command Default
2dB
13-257
Release 5.2.1
hop sampling-period active-channel

The hop sampling-period active-channel command configures the active channel sampling period which is how often the active channel quality is measured. The signal quality of the active channel is periodically measured for SNR. The active channel sampling period is the time between two consecutive signal quality measurements of the active channel.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

hop sampling-period active-channel <0-15> no hop sampling-period active-channel <0-15>
Command Syntax
0-15
the rate, measured in seconds, at which the signal quality of the active channel is assessed - a value of "0" disables active channel measurement per Spectrum Group
Command Default
3 seconds
13-258
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
hop sampling-period rollback-channel

The hop sampling-period rollback-channel command configures the rollback rollback sampling period which is how often the configured channel quality is measured with RF Sentry. When a primary channel is swapped with the spare channel, if the rollback is configured, the primary channel is periodically measured for signal quality in the background using RF Sentry. The rollback channel sampling period is the time between two consecutive signal quality measurements of the impaired configured channel.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

hop sampling-period rollback-channel <10-300> no hop sampling-period rollback-channel <10-300>
Command Syntax
10-300
the rate, measured in seconds, at which the signal quality of the primary channel is assessed when the receiver is operating on a spare channel, i.e. the receiver is in a rollback mode
Command Default
60 seconds
13-259
Release 5.2.1
hop sampling-period spare-channel

The hop sampling-period spare-channel command configures the spare channel sampling period which is how often the spare channels Spectrum quality is measured when an active channel is in the "NON-OPTIMAL" or "IMPAIRED" states. If a primary channel could not be swapped for noise avoidance with a spare channel, due to poor signal quality of the spare channels, the spare channels are periodically assessed with the RF Sentry 9th receiver. The spare channel sampling period is the time between two consecutive signal quality measurements of all the spare channels. In each spare channel quality sampling cycle, all the spare channels are tested. The quality assessment for a spare channel is performed whenever the active channel of a receiver in the Spectrum Group is in the "NON-OPTIMAL" or "IMPAIRED" state provided a spare channel for the Spectrum Group is available. If all spare channels are searched and no acceptable replacement channel is found, this configurable hold down delay will elapse before the retesting of the spare channels is resumed.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

hop sampling-period spare-channel <10-600> no hop sampling-period spare-channel <10-600>
Command Syntax:
10-600 the rate, measured in seconds, at which the signal quality of the spare channels is assessed when a channel tuned to the receiver is operating at a sub-optimal quality
Command Default
60 seconds
13-260
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
hop threshold error

A frequency hopping error threshold is configured to prevent unnecessary frequency hops in instances when a minimal number of errors are generated. The frequency hopping error threshold is determined by an error percentage. The hop threshold error command is used to trigger the hop error threshold.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

hop threshold error <1-1000> no hop threshold error <1-1000>
Command Syntax
1-1000 the threshold percentage of errors that can generated before the hop threshold flap is triggered - the error rate as a fraction of 1000, for example, an error rate of 1 implies 0.1%
Command Default
Enabled 10, 1%
13-261
Release 5.2.1
hop threshold flap

A frequency hopping threshold is configured to prevent unnecessary frequency hops in instances when one or a minimal number of cable modems (CMs) lose their connection with the BSR. The frequency hopping threshold is determined by the percentage of CMs that lose their connectivity. The hop threshold flap command is used to trigger the hop threshold flap when the number of CMs greater than a set percentage lose their connectivity.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

hop threshold flap <1-100> no hop threshold flap <1-100>
Command Syntax
1-100 the threshold percentage of CMs that can lose connectivity before the hop threshold flap is triggered
Command Default
Disabled
13-262
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
hop threshold snr modulation-type

The hop threshold snr modulation-type command configures the SNR thresholds for each modulation type. SNR threshold is used to determine if a channel is capable of operating error free in the modulation mode that is specified for Long Data or Advanced Long Data IUCs in the configured modulation profile for the upstream receiver. A default SNR threshold is used for each modulation type. The operator can override this by configuring a different SNR threshold for a specific modulation type that is used in the active channel. This threshold is used to transition channel states. SNR thresholds are configurable with a resolution of 1dB.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

hop threshold snr modulation-type {128qam | 16qam | 256qam | 32qam | 64qam | 8qam | qpsk} <13-34> no hop threshold snr modulation-type {128qam | 16qam | 256qam | 32qam | 64qam | 8qam | qpsk} <13-34>
Command Syntax
13-34
is the SNR threshold, in dB, at which a specified modulation type should operate this setting is also used to transition channel states
13-263
Release 5.2.1
Command Defaults
The following table lists the recommended SNR thresholds for different modulation types without FEC. Note: The SNR threshold values for the different modulation types must always be in a low to high order with QPSK being the lowest and 256QAM being the highest.
Modulation Type QPSK 8QAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM
Default SNR Threshold 14dB 17dB 20dB 23dB 27dB 30dB 33dB
13-264
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
init-tech
The init-tech command allows an operator to select the initialization technique to use when using DCC to move a cable modem to RF Sentry. The initialization technique selected will be on a per Spectrum Group basis.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

init-tech <1-4> no init-tech <1-4>
Command Syntax
init-tech 1-4 the initialization technique used for DCC: 1 = perform broadcast initial ranging on the new channel before normal operation 2 = perform unicast ranging on the new channel before normal operation 3 = perform either broadcast or unicast ranging on the new channel before normal operation 4 = use the new channel directly without re-initializing or ranging
Command Default
1
13-265
Release 5.2.1
interface cable
The interface cable command is used to enter cable interface configuration mode.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

interface cable <X/Y>
Command Syntax
X/Y the BSR CMTS slot and port number
13-266
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
interleaver-block-size
The interleaver-block-size command specifies the interleaver block size for an ATDMA or MTDMA channel. Interleaving is a technique which improves the error correction of channel noise such as burst errors. The interleaver re-arranges transmitted data and distributes it among different interleaver blocks. At the receiver end, the interleaved data is arranged back into the original sequence by a de-interleaver. By intermixing the transmitted data and reassembling it on the receiver end, any transmission errors are spread out over a greater transmission time. Forward error correction (FEC) is very effective on errors that are spread out. Interleaving spreads bursts of errors over several blocks so that the maximum number of errors in each block stays within the number of correctable errors. Since most errors occur in bursts, this is an efficient way to improve the error rate. Interleaver transmissions do not transmit each codeword by itself, but instead send bits from multiple codewords at the same time, so that a noise burst affects the minimum number of bits per codeword. This allows the FEC algorithm a greater chance of detecting and correcting any transmission errors.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

interleaver-block-size <32-2048> no interleaver-block-size <32-2048>
Command Syntax
32-2048 the ATDMA or MTDMA interleaver block size value
13-267
Release 5.2.1
interleaver-depth
The interleaver-depth command specifies the interleaver depth for an ATDMA or MTDMA channel. This command sets the interleaver minimum latency. A higher interleaver depth provides more protection from bursts errors by spreading out the bits for each codeword over a greater transmission time. However, a higher depth also increases downstream latency, which may slow TCP/IP throughput for some configurations. DOCSIS 2.0 specifies five different interleaver depths - 128:1 is the highest amount of interleaving and 8:16 is the lowest.
128:1 indicates that 128 codewords made up of 128 symbols each will be intermixed on a 1 for 1 basis 8:16 indicates that 16 symbols will be kept in a row per codeword and intermixed with 16 symbols from 7 other codewords.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

interleaver-depth <0-128> no interleaver-depth <0-128>
Command Syntax
0-128 the ATDMA or MTDMA interleaver depth value
13-268
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
interleaver-step-size
The interleaver-step-size command specifies the interleaver step size for an S-CDMA channel. The interleaver step size is the amount time that symbols are dispersed in time within the frame due to interleaving .
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

interleaver-step-size <1-31> no interleaver-step-size <1-31>
Command Syntax
1-31 the interleaver step size value
13-269
Release 5.2.1
ip address
The ip address command configures a primary or secondary IP address for an interface or defines the Gateway IP address (giaddr) for Customer Premises Equipment (CPE), Multimedia Telephone Adapter (MTA), or cable modem DHCP requests. The no ip address command is used to remove an IP address from the interface. When configuring the cable interface IP address two additional options are supported; the host and mta options. The additional options are only available from cable interface configuration mode when selecting an IP address. During the DHCP process, the relay agent requests an IP address in a particular subnet by inserting the IP address of the interface into the DHCP requests from CMs, hosts, and MTAs. The primary address is always inserted in cable modem DHCP requests. If a secondary address or a secondary host address is defined, then the first secondary or secondary host IP address in the list is inserted into DHCP requests from hosts. If one or multiple secondary mta IP address are defined, then the first secondary mta IP address defined is inserted into DHCP requests from secondary MTA devices. The ip dhcp relay information option command must be enabled to allow the BSR to determine what type of device originated the DHCP request. By default, the primary address will be inserted into DHCP requests. When an operator wants to support multiple ISP providers, the ip address command can be used to group secondary subnets together. Basically one secondary is defined for CMs and another secondary subnet is defined for CPEs. The CM subnet and the CPE subnet are bound through the use of the isp-bind option of the ip address command. First the secondary subnet for CMs is defined and then the secondary subnet for CPE's is defined using isp-bind option. To bind the CPE subnet with the CM subnet, the CM subnet address is entered after the isp-bind option is entered while configuring the secondary subnet for CPE's. Note: Supporting multiple ISPs on the BSR requires significant coordination between the operator provisioning system and the configuration of the BSR. Refer to Selecting a Specific ISP in the BSR 64000 Configuration and Management Guide.
Note: You must configure a primary IP address before configuring a secondary IP address.
13-270
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
Note: The host or mta optional parameters can be specified with a secondary IP address on a loopback interface. However, these parameters will have no effect unless the loopback interface is configured as a virtual cable bundle master.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip address <A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D> [ secondary [ host | mta ][isp-bind <A.B.C.D>]]] no ip address <A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D> [ secondary [ host | mta ][isp-bind <A.B.C.D>]]]
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D A.B.C.D the IP address the subnetwork mask for the IP address - the BSR supports up to a 30-bit subnetwork IP address mask designates the specified IP address as a secondary IP address - on a cable interface, defines this IP address as the IP address to be inserted into host DHCP requests defines the IP address for the cable interface as the giaddr for host DHCP requests - on the cable interface, defines this IP address as the IP address to be inserted into host DHCP requests
secondary
host
13-271
Release 5.2.1
mta
defines the IP address for the cable interface as the giaddr for all MTA DHCP requests - on the cable interface, defines this IP address as the IP address to be inserted into MTA DHCP requests specifies the secondary IP subnet to which this secondary address is bound.
isp-bind A.B.C.D
13-272
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
ip dhcp relay information option

The IP DHCP relay function is used only when multiple subnetworks are configured on the same cable interface. The IP DHCP relay function gathers broadcast DHCP MAC discovery packets from a DHCP host, such as a CM or Customer Premises Equipment (CPE), and redirect the packets to their corresponding DHCP server or DHCP server profile if there is only one DHCP server. The DHCP server assigns an IP address to the CM or CPE that requested the IP address. Use the ip dhcp relay information option command to enable the DHCP option-82 relay-agent on the cable interface. Use the no ip dhcp relay information option command to disable the DHCP option-82 relay-agent on the cable interface.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip dhcp relay information option no ip dhcp relay information option
Command Default
DHCP option-82 disabled
13-273
Release 5.2.1
iuc
The iuc command is used to completely configure a modulation profile without having to enter individual IUC submodes.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

iuc {a-long | a-short | a-ugs | initial | long | request | short | station} [atdma | mtdma | scdma | tdma] {128qam | 16qam | 256qam | 32qam | 64qam | 8qam | qpsk} {<0-16>} {<16-253>} {fixed | short} {<0-255>} {off | on} {<0x0-0x7fff>} {off | on} {none | qpsk0 | qpsk1} {<0-1536>} {<0-2048>} {<0-2048>} {<0-32>} {off | on} {<0-128>} {off | on} no iuc {a-long | a-short | a-ugs | initial | long | request | short | station} [atdma | mtdma | scdma | tdma] {128qam | 16qam | 256qam | 32qam | 64qam | 8qam | qpsk} {<0-16>} {<16-253>} {fixed | short} {<0-255>} {off | on} {<0x0-0x7fff>} {off | on} {none | qpsk0 | qpsk1} {<0-1536>} {<0-2048>} {<0-2048>} {<0-32>} {off | on} {<0-128>} {off | on}
Command Syntax
a-long a-short a-ugs initial long request short station Advanced PHY long data grant Advanced PHY short data grant Unsolicited Grant Service Initial Ranging Burst Long Grant Burst Request Burst Short Grant Burst Station Ranging Burst
13-274
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
128qam 16qam 256qam 32qam 64qam 8qam qpsk
128qam is used for DOCSIS 2.0 ATDMA or S-CDMA channel types only - creates a default 128 -QAM modulation type where all bursts are sent using 128-QAM 256qam is used for DOCSIS 2.0 ATDMA or S-CDMA channel types only - creates a default 256 -QAM modulation type where all bursts are sent using 256-QAM 16qam creates a default 16-QAM modulation type where all bursts are sent using 16-QAM 32qam is used for DOCSIS 2.0 ATDMA or S-CDMA channel types only - creates a default 32-QAM modulation type where all bursts are sent using 32-QAM 64qam used for DOCSIS 2.0 ATDMA or S-CDMA channel types only - creates a default 64-QAM modulation type where all bursts are sent using 64-QAM 8qam is used for DOCSIS 2.0 ATDMA or S-CDMA channel types only - creates a default 8-QAM modulation type where all bursts are sent using 8-QAM qpsk creates a default QPSK modulation type where all bursts are sent using QPSK
16-253 fixed short 0-255 off | on
the FEC code word length fixed handling of FEC for last code word shortened handling of FEC for last code word the maximum burst length in minislots disable/enable scrambler
13-275
Release 5.2.1
0x0-0x7fff off | on
the scrambler seed in hexadecimal format disable/enable differential encoding

Note: If a modulation profile is in use, differential encoding cannot be enabled or disabled for any of the burst types. To enable or disable differential encoding for a burst type, an operator must copy the modulation profile to a new modulation profile number, enable or disable differential encoding for the new modulation profile, and assign the new modulation profile to the desired upstream channel. Attempting to enable or disable differential encoding for a modulation profile that is in use will generate the following error message: [10/07-10:26:06.5907:CRMTASK]-E-mod profile in use, cannot change diff encoding
none qpsk0 qpsk1 0-1536 0-2048 0-2048 0-32 off | on 0-128 off | on
the preamble type low power QPSK preamble high power QPSK preamble the preamble length in bits the interleaver depth value the interleaver block size value the interleaver step size turn spreader off/on (S-CDMA only) the codes subframe value (S-CDMA only) turn TCM encoding off/on - indicates whether trellis code modulation (TCM) is enabled for (S-CDMA only) the FEC code word length
16-253
13-276
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
last-codeword-length
The last-codeword-length command specifies fixed or shortened handling of FEC for last code word.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

last-codeword-length {fixed | shortened} no last-codeword-length {fixed | shortened}
Command Syntax
fixed shortened fixed handling of FEC for last code word shortened handling of FEC for last code word
13-277
Release 5.2.1
load-balancing
The load-balancing command is used to configure a load balancing group.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Load Balancing Group Configuration
Command Line Usage

load-balancing {init-tech <1-31> | mode {disabled | enabled} | policy <WORD>} | restricted {false | true}} no load-balancing {init-tech <1-31> | mode {disabled | enabled} | policy <WORD>} | restricted {false | true}}
Command Syntax
init-tech 1-31 mode configures a default initialization technique bitmap for a load balancing group the load balancing mode; disabled or enabled - enabled means the load balancing will occur autonomously (based on policy rules) between channels that are assigned to this group the load balancing group's policy name the load balancing groups restricted status: false - load-balancing group type is general true - load-balancing group type is restricted
policy WORD restricted
Command Defaults
mode = disabled policy = 0 restricted = false
13-278
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
load-balancing static
Static upstream load balancing evenly distributes cable modems across multiple upstream channels serving the same geographical community or Spectrum Group. Load balancing is based on the cable modem count on each upstream channel. Static load balancing means that the BSR will only attempt to move a cable modem to another upstream channel after the modems registration process is complete. The load-balancing static command enables static load balancing for a Spectrum Group. The no load-balancing static command disables static load balancing.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

load-balancing static no load-balancing static
Command Default
Disabled
Note: The load-balancing static command cannot move cable modems registered with a TLV type 2. To move cable modems registered with a TLV type 2, you must use the cable modem ucc command.
13-279
Release 5.2.1
max-burst
The max-burst command is used to specify the maximum burst length in minislots. The maximum burst length is used to determine the breakpoint between packets that use the short data grant burst profile and packets that use the long data grant burst profile. If the required upstream time to transmit a packet is greater than this value, the long data grant burst profile is used. If the time is less than or equal to this value, the short data grant burst profile is used.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

max-burst <0-255> no max-burst <0-255>
Command Syntax
0-255 the maximum burst value in minislots
13-280
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
mdrc enable
The mdrc enable command allows a user/operator to enable the MDRC feature on a MAC domain. If the MDRC feature is not enabled, the BSR will operate as it did prior to the implementation of the MDRC feature. If multicast capability is not enabled with the cable downstream multicast enable command for a channel/port (but MDRC is enabled), the multicast packet will not be replicated on that downstream channel/port. The multicast capability parameter of a downstream channel/port comes into play only when the MDRC feature is enabled for that MAC domain. The no mdrc enable command disables the MDRC feature.
Group Access
All
Command Modes
Command Line Usage

mdrc enable no mdrc enable
Command Default
Disabled
13-281
Release 5.2.1
modulation-type
The modulation-type command specifies the digital frequency modulation technique used in a modulation profile.
Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (QPSK) is a digital frequency modulation technique is used primarily for sending data from the cable subscriber upstream. Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM) is a digital frequency modulation technique is primarily used for sending data downstream.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

modulation-type {qpsk | 16qam | 8qam | 32qam | 64qam | 128qam | 256qam} no modulation-type {qpsk | 16qam | 8qam | 32qam | 64qam | 128qam | 256qam}
13-282
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
Command Syntax
qpsk 16qam 8qam 32qam 64qam 128qam 256qam qpsk creates a default QPSK modulation type where all bursts are sent using QPSK 16qam creates a default 16-QAM modulation type where all bursts are sent using 16-QAM 8qam is used for DOCSIS 2.0 ATDMA or S-CDMA channel types only - creates a default 8-QAM modulation type where all bursts are sent using 8-QAM 32qam is used for DOCSIS 2.0 ATDMA or S-CDMA channel types only - creates a default 32-QAM modulation type where all bursts are sent using 32-QAM 64qam used for DOCSIS 2.0 ATDMA or S-CDMA channel types only - creates a default 64-QAM modulation type where all bursts are sent using 64-QAM 128qam is used for DOCSIS 2.0 ATDMA or S-CDMA channel types only - creates a default 128 -QAM modulation type where all bursts are sent using 128-QAM. 256qam is used for DOCSIS 2.0 ATDMA or S-CDMA channel types only - creates a default 256 -QAM modulation type where all bursts are sent using 256-QAM.
13-283
Release 5.2.1
ping docsis
The ping docsis command is used to ping a cable modem (CM) on the network at the MAC layer to determine if the CM is online by entering the CMs MAC or IP address. When a DOCSIS ping is initiated, the BSR sends a test packet downstream towards the CM to test its connection. In most instances, this command is used to determine if a particular CM is able to communicate at the MAC address layer when a cable modem has connectivity problems at the network layer. For example, if a CM is unable to register and obtain an IP address, the ping DOCSIS command can help you determine if there are provisioning problems associated with the CM.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC and Interface Configuration
Command Line Usage

ping docsis {<mac> | <prefix>} [<1-100>]
Command Syntax
mac prefix 1-100 The MAC address of the CM in the form of xxxx.xxxx.xxxx. The IP address of the CM. The number of ping test packets to be sent to the cable modem.
13-284
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
policy rule
The policy rule command adds an existing policy rule to a load balancing policy. The no policy rule command removes a policy rule from a load balancing policy.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Load Balancing Policy Configuration
Command Line Usage

policy rule <WORD> [snmp-index <0-4294967295>] no policy rule <WORD> [snmp-index <0-4294967295>]
Command Syntax
WORD snmp-index 0-4294967295 the rule name the SNMP index
13-285
Release 5.2.1
preamble-length
The preamble-length command is used to specify the preamble length in bits. The preamble length is used to define a synchronizing string of modulation symbols that is used to allow the receiver to find the phase and timing of the transmitted burst.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

preamble-length <0-1536> no preamble-length <0-1536>
Command Syntax
0-1536 the preamble length in bits - 0 indicates no preamble: 0-1536 is used for DOCSIS 2.0 bursts 0-1024 is used for DOCSIS 1.x bursts
13-286
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
preamble-type
The preamble-type command specifies the preamble format for DOCSIS ATDMA. MTDMA, and S-CDMA channel type modulation profiles. The preamble format is specified through the Quadrature Phase-Shift Keying (QPSK) digital modulation technique.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

preamble-type {qpsk0 | qpsk1} no preamble-type {qpsk0 | qpsk1}
Command Syntax
qpsk0 qpsk1 low power QPSK preamble high power QPSK preamble
13-287
Release 5.2.1
reference-modem-exclusion
The reference-modem-exclusion command specifies the number of low SNR cable modem(s) on each upstream channel in a Spectrum Group that are not allowed to be used for channel assessment. This value is used to exclude bad or cable modems with errors from being selected as the reference modem. These excluded reference cable modems are those with the lowest SNR values within the reference cable modem list.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

reference-modem-exclusion <0-45> no reference-modem-exclusion <0-45>
Command Syntax
0-45 the number of low SNR cable modem(s) on each upstream in the Spectrum Group that are not allowed to be used for channel assessment - this parameter has no effect when the number of registered cable modems on a specific upstream are less than double this value - a value of "0" indicates that no cable modem is excluded from the reference cable modem list
Command Default
15
13-288
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
scrambler-mode
The scrambler-mode command enables or disables the scrambler. The scrambler is used to generate an almost random sequence of transmission symbols. This ensures an even distribution of transmissions through the channel.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

scrambler-mode {off | on} no scrambler-mode {off | on}
Command Syntax
off on disable the scrambler enable the scrambler
13-289
Release 5.2.1
scrambler-seed
The scramber-seed command specifies a scrambler seed value as a hexidecimal number. The scrambler seed is the initial value that is used to start the scramblers pseudo-randomizer to scramble the bits. As the transmitter and receiver know the scrambler seed value, scrambling can be reversed at the receiver leaving only the original data.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

scrambler-seed <0x00-0x7fff> no scrambler-seed <0x00-0x7fff>
Command Syntax
0x00-0x7fff the scrambler seed value
13-290
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show bindings
The show bindings command shows bindings, or mapping, between CMTS and HSIM. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show bindings command:
CMTS slot 3 is automatically mapped to HSIM slot 9 CMTS slot 4 is automatically mapped to HSIM slot 15
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show bindings [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}] show bindings [ | {count | count-only}]]
Command Syntax
13-291
Release 5.2.1
show cable binding

The show cable binding command displays downstream and upstream binding information. The binding information displayed can include:

a single CMTS slot and its associated MAC domain (0). all MAC domains associated with a single CMTS slot which would include binding information for two MAC domains if a 2:8 Primary CMTS Resource Module is installed in that slot and two MAC domains have been configured on the module. all CMTS slot and MAC domain associations for the entire BSR chassis.
The following is typical screen output from the show cable binding command displaying CMTS slot and MAC domain associations for the entire BSR chassis:
Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable
0/0: downstream 0,1,12/0/0,12/0/1; upstream 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 0/1: downstream NONE; upstream NONE 2/0: downstream 12/2/0,12/2/1; upstream 0,1,2,3 2/1: downstream 12/2/2,12/2/3; upstream 4,5,6,7 4/0: downstream 12/4/0,12/4/1,12/4/2,12/4/3; upstream 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 4/1: downstream NONE; upstream NONE 11/0: downstream 0,12/6/0; upstream 0,1,2,3 11/1: downstream 1,12/7/0; upstream 4,5,6,7
Note: Use the show chassis status command to determine what CMTS modules are installed in the BSR chassis.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable binding [cable <X/Y> | slot <NUM>]
13-292
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
Command Syntax
cable X/Y slot NUM display binding information for a single MAC domain associated with a CMTS slot display binding information for all MAC domains associated with a single CMTS slot binding information for two MAC domains may be displayed if a 2:8 Primary CMTS Resource Module is installed in that slot and more than one MAC domain has been configured on the module
13-293
Release 5.2.1
show cable bonding-group minrr-multipliers

The show cable bonding-group minrr-multipliers command displays the minimum reserved rate multipliers for a cable bonding group. The following is typical screen output from the show cable bonding-group minrr-multipliers command:
Interface 9/0 bonding group 1 9/0 DefBEDown DefRRDown DefBEUp DefRRUp DefUGS DefUGSAD DefRTPS DefNRTPS DefEMUp DefEMDown DefMCDown DefVoiceDown 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 9/1 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 1
Interface 11/0 bonding group 1 11/0 DefBEDown DefRRDown DefBEUp DefRRUp DefUGS DefUGSAD DefRTPS DefNRTPS DefEMUp DefEMDown DefMCDown DefVoiceDown 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 11/1 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
13-294
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable bonding-group minrr-multipliers [<X/Y>]
Command Syntax
X/Y
the downstream channel associated with this channel bonding group: X is the 2:8 CMTS module slot number and Y is the MAC domain
13-295
Release 5.2.1
show cable dcc-stats

The show cable dcc-stats command displays DOCSIS Dynamic Channel Change (DCC) statistics for a MAC domain. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable dcc-stats command:
CMTS Slot: 0 Number of DCC Number of DCC Number of DCC Number of DCC Number of DCC Number of DCC Number of DCC CMTS Slot: 3 Number of DCC Number of DCC Number of DCC Number of DCC Number of DCC Number of DCC Number of DCC CMTS Slot: 3 Number of DCC Number of DCC Number of DCC Number of DCC Number of DCC Number of DCC Number of DCC Number of DCC Number of DCC
MAC Domain: 0 Interface index: 32513 Reqs : 2 Rsps : 4 Rsps(Depart) : 2 Rsps(Arrive) : 2 Acks : 2 : 0 Fails : 0 MAC Domain: 0 Interface index: 229121 Reqs : 0 Rsps : 0 Rsps(Depart) : 0 Rsps(Arrive) : 0 Acks : 0 : 0 Fails : 0 MAC Domain: 1 Interface index: 229122 Reqs : 0 Rsps : 0 Rsps(Depart) : 0 Rsps : 0 Rsps(Depart) : 0 Rsps(Arrive) : 0 Acks : 0 : 0 Fails : 0
Group Access
All
Command Mode
13-296
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
Command Line Usage

show cable dcc-stats [<X/Y>]
Command Syntax
X/Y
13-297
Release 5.2.1
show cable downstream

The show cable downstream command displays the following downstream cable information: ifIndex annex frequency rfModulation interleaveDepth qamMode channelWidth powerLevel Reserved BW Spectrum Group rate limit: On interface index the downstream MPEG framing format radio frequency carrier center frequency radio frequency enabled depth of interleaving to provide protection from noise downstream modulation type radio frequency channel width downstream transmit power level in units of whole dB to one decimal place the amount of reserved downstream bandwidth configured the associated Spectrum Group names indicates whether rate limiting has been enabled
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable downstream command:
13-298
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
ifIndex: description: annex: frequency: rfModulation: interleaveDepth: qamMode: channelWidth: powerLevel: Spectrum Group: rate limit:
98305 B 327000000 true 32 256 6000000 600 (10th of dB) On
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable downstream [<NUM>]
Command Syntax
NUM is a list of local and/or remote downstream channels separated by spaces for a description of the local channels are represented as a single digit channel number NUM syntax for downstream channels, remote channels are in the form slot/ refer to the figure below downstream port number/downstream this table channel number - a remote TX32 downstream channel must be bound before it can be bonded
13-299
Release 5.2.1
4/[0-7]/[0-3] 9/[0-1] 11/[0-1]
13-300
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show cable downstream bonding-groups

The show cable downstream bonding-groups command displays the following downstream channel bonding group information: Interface Group-Id Type Channels cable slot and MAC domain of the Primary downstream channel downstream channel bonding group ID number displays the type of bonding group (DOCSIS or Motorola) the BSR cable interface slot and MAC Domain of the downstream channels that belong to the bonding group. Up indicates the downstream channel is enabled. Down indicates the downstream channel is disabled. downstream Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM). 64 is 6 bits per downstream symbol. 256 is 8 bits per downstream symbol. reflects if the downstream channel in "Primary Capable" (TRUE) or "Non-Primary Capable" (FALSE) - any downstream channel associated with a bonding group can be configured to be "Primary Capable" or "Non-Primary Capable" downstream frequency in Hertz (Hz)
State
QAM
Primary
Frequency
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable downstream bonding-groups command:
13-301
Release 5.2.1
Interface 11/0
Group-Id 10
Type Motorola
Channels 11/0 4/0/0 11/0 4/0/0
ChanId State 1 Up 2 Up 1 2 Up Up
Qam 64 256 64 256
Primary Frequency TRUE 537000000 TRUE 549000000 TRUE TRUE 537000000 549000000
11/0
20
DOCSIS
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable downstream bonding-groups statistics command:
Interface: 11/0 DOCSIS Group-Id: 20 Channel Packets Octets --------------------------------------------11/0 256 4790 4/0/0 498 4524 --------------------------------------Totals 754 9314 Total Registered Modems: 23
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable downstream bonding-groups [statistics | <X/Y> [<1-65535>]]
13-302
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
Command Syntax
statistics X/Y display downstream bonding group statistics the downstream channel associated with this channel bonding group: X is the 2:8 CMTS module slot number and Y is the MAC domain the downstream channel bonding group number
1-65535
13-303
Release 5.2.1
show cable downstream idlist

The show cable downstream idlist command to displays the physical interface, downstream channel ID, Fiber Node Name and Load Balancing Group name associations for each TX32 of CMTS module in the BSR chassis. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable downstream idlist command:
Phy Interface Cable 0/0 Cable 0/1 Cable 2/0 Cable 2/1 Cable 4/0 Cable 4/1 Cable 11/0 Cable 11/1 DTX 12/0/0
DS-CHAN-ID 7 2 NULL NULL NULL NULL 24 5 9
Fiber Node Name RedSox RedSox NULL NULL NULL NULL NULL NULL R dS
Load Balancing Group Name NULL NULL NULL NULL NULL NULL marlborough mansfield NULL
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable downstream idlist [slot <NUM>]
Command Syntax
slot NUM specifies a CMTS or TX32 slot
13-304
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show cable fiber-node

The show cable fiber-node command displays the Fiber Node and MAC Domain associations. The Fiber Node and MAC Domain associations are created when a fiber node name is associated to a downstream port of a MAC Domain with the cable fiber-node command. Once configured, the MD-DS-SG-ID (MacDomain-DownStream-ServingGroup-Identifier) will be assigned internally for the association. Without the optional MAC Domain <X/Y> parameter, the show cable fiber-node command displays the Fiber Node Names and MD-DS-SG-ID for every configured MAC Domain. Use the optional MAC Domain <X/Y> parameter to display the information for a specific MAC Domain. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable fiber-node command:
Interface Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable 3/0 3/0 3/0 3/0 4/0 4/0 4/1 4/1 10/0 10/0 10/0 10/0 11/0 11/0 11/0 11/0
Fiber Node Name FN-A FN-B FN-C FN-D FN-E FN-F FN-G FN-H FN-I FN-J FN-K FN-L FN-M FN-N FN-O FN-P
MD-DS-SG-ID 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2
Group Access
All
13-305
Release 5.2.1
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable fiber-node [<X/Y ] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show cable fiber-node [<X/Y>] [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
X/Y | begin exclude include WORD count count-only the slot and MAC Domain number turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
13-306
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show cable filter

The show cable filter command displays the packet filter configuration.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable filter [group <1-32> [index <1-64>]]
Command Syntax
group 1-32 index 1-64 displays a specified packet filter group displays the packet filter
13-307
Release 5.2.1
show cable flap-list

The show cable flap-list command displays the cable flap-list and provides the following information:. MAC ID Cable IF Hit Customer account or street address. Upstream port. Number of times modem responds to mac layer keep alive messages, minimum hit rate one time/30 seconds, can indicate intermittent upstream, laser clipping, or common-path distortion. Count should be much higher than Miss count, if not, modem having problem maintaining the connection due to upstream problem, flap count increments each time the system transitions from a Hit to a Miss. Number of times modem misses the mac layer keep-alive message, 8% normal, can indicate intermittent upstream, laser clipping, common path distortion. Number of times the modem comes up and connect to the network, number of times RF link reestablished more frequently than time period configured in the cable flap-list insertion time command. Number of times the CMTS instructed the modem to adjust transmit (TX) power beyond threshold configured with the cable flap-list power-adjust threshold command, can indicate unacceptable connections, thermal sensitivity. Total of P-Adj and Ins values, high flap-count modems have high SIDs and may not register. Number of times the modem exceeded the missed ranging threshold.
Miss
Ins
P-Adj
Flap Rng
13-308
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
Type Time
Specifies the type of flap (ranging, timing, or power) Most recent time modem dropped connection.
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable flap-list command:
MAC ID CableIF Hit Miss 000b.0643.3b60 4/0 U1 1469 7 000b.0643.36c8 4/0 U1 1469 7 000b.0643.3b78 4/0 U1 1469 6
Ins 0 0 0
Pow 0 0 0
Rng 1 1 1
Flap 1 1 1
Type Time Rng FRI NOV 05 11:59:39 Rng FRI NOV 05 11:59:40 Rng FRI NOV 05 11:59:40
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable flap-list [sort-flap | sort-interface | sort-time]
Command Syntax
sort-flap sort-interface sort-time Sort by number of times cable modem flapped. Sort cable modem flaps by interface. Sort most recent time cable modem flapped.
13-309
Release 5.2.1
show cable insert-interval

The show cable insert-interval command shows the period (in hundredths of a second) with which Initial Maintenance intervals are scheduled in the upstream. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable insert-interval command:
Cable insert-interval: 20
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable insert-interval
13-310
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show cable loadbalance-group

The show cable loadbalance-group command displays configuration information for all load balancing groups or a specific load balancing group. The following is an example of typical output from the show cable loadbalance-group command:
Load Balance Group: lbg-1 SnmpIdx: 1 Id: 1 Member channels: Cable 11/0 U0 Cable 11/0 U2 Cable 11/0 U3 Cable D0 Cable D1 Configuration: load-balance mode enabled load-balance restricted false load-balance interval 5 load-balance initTech 248 Tech 0: 1 Tech 1: 1 Tech 2: 1 Tech 3: 1 Tech 4: 1 load-balance policy lbp-11
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable loadbalance-group [<WORD>]
13-311
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
WORD the load balancing group name
13-312
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show cable loadbalance-no-move-list

The show cable loadbalance-no-move-list command displays cable modems that have been added to the no-move-list and are not participating in dynamic load balancing. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable loadbalance-no-move-list command:
CM Mac Address 0011.805f.3d18 0014.e835.e8f2 0014.e836.8c84 0011.1aca.2ce4
Interface 1/1/D1/U5/C0 1/1/D1/U5/C0 1/1/D1/U6/C0 1/1/D1/U4/C0
TLV1 OFF OFF OFF OFF
TLV2 OFF OFF OFF OFF
UCC ON ON ON ON
DCC OFF OFF OFF OFF
REJECT OFF OFF OFF OFF
The following table describes the reasons for a cable modem being added to the no-move-list. As reflected by the sample output above, "ON" indicates the reason that the cable modem was added to the no-move-list. All the cable modems displayed above are on the no-move list because they deregistered after receiving a UCC command. TLV1 cable modem is prevented from moving due to TLV1 (Downstream Frequency) being configured in the cable modem configuration file and was placed on the no-move-list cable modem is prevented from moving due to TLV2 (Upstream Channel ID) being configured in the cable modem configuration file and was placed on the no-move-list cable modem deregistered when attempting a UCC and was placed on the no-move-list
TLV2
UCC
13-313
Release 5.2.1
DCC
cable modem deregistered within 5 minutes after attempting a DCC and was placed on the no-move-list cable modem responded to a DCC request with a confirmation code other than a Depart (180) indicating the cable modem is on the old channel and is about to perform the jump to the new channel
REJECT
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable loadbalance-no-move-list [slot]
Command Syntax
slot specify a CMTS slot on the BSR
13-314
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show cable loadbalance-policy

The show cable loadbalance-policy command displays configuration information for all load balancing policies or a specific load balancing policy. The following is an example of typical output from the show cable loadbalance-policy command:
Load Balance Policy: lbp-1 SnmpIdx: 1 Id: 1 Rule List: SnmpIdx: 1 Id: 1 load-balancing is enabled
Load Balance Policy: lbp-2 SnmpIdx: 2 Id: 2 Rule List: SnmpIdx: 1 Id: 2 load-balancing is disabled for 300 seconds starting at 0 seconds after 12:00 A.M.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable loadbalance-policy [<WORD>]
13-315
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
WORD the load balancing policy name
13-316
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show cable loadbalance-restricted

The show cable loadbalance-restricted command lists all cable modems associated with a particular restricted load balancing group or all restricted load balancing groups. The following is an example of typical output from the show cable loadbalance-restricted command
Cable Load Balance Restricted List: Group name = test, cm-index = 1: Mac address: 0000.1111.2222 Mac mask: ffff.ffff.ffff
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable loadbalance-restricted [<1-256> | <WORD>] [snmp-index <0-4294967295>] [ungrouped]
Command Syntax
1-256 WORD snmp-index 0-4294967295 ungrouped the load balancing group ID the load balancing group name the SNMP index value display the ungrouped restricted list
13-317
Release 5.2.1
show cable loadbalance-rule

The show cable loadbalance-rule command displays configuration information for all load balancing rules or a specific load balancing rule. The following is an example of typical output from the show cable loadbalance-rule command:
Load Balance Rule: lbr-10 SnmpIdx: 10 Id: 1 load-balancing is enabled
Load Balance Rule: lbr-20 SnmpIdx: 20 Id: 2 load-balancing is disabled
Load Balance Rule: lbr-30 SnmpIdx: 30 Id: 3 load-balancing is disabled for 300 seconds starting at 0 seconds after 12:00 A.M.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable loadbalance-rule [<WORD>]
Command Syntax
WORD the load balancing rule name
13-318
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show cable md-ds-sg

The show cable md-ds-sg command displays MAC Domain Downstream Service Group (MD-DS-SG) information which is information pertaining to cable interfaces and MAC domains and their associated service groups and downstream channels. This includes the cable interface and MAC domain number, the MD-DS-SG-ID, and the associated list of downstream channels. The following is typical screen output from the show cable md-ds-sg command:
Interface Cable 3/0 Cable 3/1
MD-S-SG-ID 3 1
FN-Count 0 0
CM-Count 0 0
DS Channels 0,10/0 1
Group Access
All
Command Mode
All modes
Command Line Usage

show cable md-ds-sg [<X/Y>] | [{begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show cable md-ds-sg [<X/Y>] | [{count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
X/Y the slot and MAC Domain number of the CMTS module - use this optional slot and MAC Domain parameter to display information for a specific MAC Domain turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string
| begin
13-319
Release 5.2.1
13-320
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show cable modem

The show cable modem command is used to gather a variety of cable modem (CM) statistical information used to evaluate network performance, troubleshoot registration problems, and learn specific registration and ranging information on modems connected to a specific interface. Use the show cable modem command to see detailed modem configuration information for a specific head-end modem. The following information is provided: Interface Upstream IF Index Downsteam IF Index Prim SID Connectivity State CM interface with active connection Upstream interface to which the cable modem belongs. Downstream interface to which the cable modem belongs. Primary Service Identifier number. Describes the connectivity state of a cable modem. The table below describes the 20 cable modem connectivity states supported on the BSR. CM current timing adjustment. CM receive downstream receive power level in units of whole dB to one decimal place CM IP address Media Access Control layer address
Timing offset Rec Power
IP address MAC address
Cable modem connectivity states are as follows: init(o) init(t) init(r1) init(r2) init(rc) Option file transfer was started. Time-of-day (TOD) exchange was started. CM sent initial ranging parameters. CM is ranging. Ranging is complete.
13-321
Release 5.2.1
dhcp(d) dhcp(o) dhcp(req) dhcp(ack) online online(d) online(un) online(pk)
DHCP Discover was sent by CM. DHCP Offer was received. DHCP Request was sent by CM. DHCP Ack was received, IP address was assigned by DHCP server. CM registered; enabled for data. CM registered, but network access for the CM is disabled. CM registered, but not enabled data. Fail to verify modem's identity by BPI module. CM registered; baseline privacy interface (BPI) enabled, and key encryption key (KEK) is assigned. CM registered; BPI enabled, and traffic encryption key (TEK) is assigned. CM did attempt to register; registration was refused due to bad mic. CM did attempt to register; registration was refused due to bad COS. CM did attempt to register, registration was refused due to unavailable resource. KEK modem key assignment is rejected. TEK modem key assignment is rejected. CM is considered to be offline.
online(pt) reject(m) reject(c) reject(r) reject(pk) reject(pt) offline
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable modem command:
13-322
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
Intf Cable 9/0 11/0 11/0 11/0 11/0
Prim DS 9D0C0 11D0C0 11D0C0 11D1C0 11D1C0
Prim US U1C0L0 U1C0L0 U0C0L0 U5C0L0 U5C0L0
Prim Sid 15841 0 1 8193 2
Connect State online offline online online online(pt)
Timing Offset 1267 0 1290 1291 2843
RxPwr Ip Address dBmV 0.0 150.31.92.87 0.0.0.0 -.2 150.31.93.12 -.2 150.31.93.40 -.1 150.31.93.32
Mac Address 0017.ee85.affc 0017.ee90.30ac 0011.1aca.13a6 0019.5eb4.704e 0800.3e08.7f4
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable modem [subinterface] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show cable modem [subinterface] [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
subinterface | begin exclude include WORD show subinterface information turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string
13-323
Release 5.2.1
count count-only
13-324
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show cable modem bonding

The show cable modem bonding command displays information about downstream channel bonded cable modems. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable modem bonding command:
Interface Cable 4/0/D0/U0/C1 Cable 4/0/D0/U0/C0
Prim Sid 2 3
Connect State online online
BgId 1 1
Ip Address 150.31.153.23 150.31.153.24
Mac Address 0010.ee90.3200 0010.ff81.1478
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable modem bonding [<X/Y>] | [{begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show cable modem bonding [<X/Y>] | [{count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
X/Y | begin exclude the downstream channel associated with this channel bonding group turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string
13-325
Release 5.2.1
13-326
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show cable modem cpe

The show cable modem cpe command displays the following Customer Premises Equipment (CPE) information for all cable interfaces, a particular upstream port, or a specific CPE: Interface PSID CM MAC CM IP CPE Count the downstream cable interface and upstream port the cable modem is connected to the upstream Primary SID number associated with this cable modem the cable modems MAC address the cable modems IP address the CPE count per cable modem
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable modem cpe command:
13-327
Release 5.2.1
Intf Prim Prim Cable DS US 9/0 9D0C0 U1C0L0 Intf Prim Prim Cable DS US 11/0 11D0C0 U0C0L0 CPE MAC 0011.1aca.13a8 Intf Prim Prim Cable DS US 11/0 11D1C0 U5C0L0 CPE MAC 00c0.4f63.482c Intf Prim Prim Cable DS US 11/0 11D1C0 U5C0L0
PSID 15841 PSID 1
CM MAC 0017.ee85.affc CM MAC
CM IP 150.31.92.87 CM IP 150.31.93.12
CPE Count 0 CPE Count 1
0011.1aca.13a6 CPE IP 150.31.94.10 PSID CM MAC 8193 0019.5eb4.704e CPE IP 150.31.98.10 PSID CM MAC 2 0800.3e08.7f4e
CM IP 150.31.93.40
CPE Count 1
CM IP 150.31.93.32
CPE Count 0
Total number of CPE : 2
Group Access
All
Command Mode
13-328
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
Command Line Usage

show cable modem <mac> cpe [subinterface] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}] ] show cable modem <mac> cpe [subinterface] [ | {count | count-only}] show cable modem cpe <X/Y> [subinterface |upstream <NUM>] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show cable modem cpe <X/Y> [subinterface | upstream <NUM>] [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
mac subinterface X/Y upstream NUM | begin exclude include WORD count count-only the cable modems MAC address show subinterface information the slot and MAC Domain number of the CMTS module the upstream port number turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
13-329
Release 5.2.1
show cable modem detail

The show cable modem detail command displays information for a SID assigned to a cable modem on a specific CMTS interface or a specific CM connected to a specific interface. The following is typical output from the show cable modem detail command:
CM Record (index 16) Dump: Psid 8211 MD-DS-SG-ID 3 Config 0x3002 Status regComplete BPI Enabled No MAC Address 001f.c4aa.808e IP Addr 30.10.1.34 US Chan 0 DS Chan 0/0/0 0/1/0 2/0/0 2/0/1 Vendor Id 00 20 40 MAX Classifier 0 MAX CPEs 10 Qos Profile 0 Device type eCM --Ranging State-State 0x4 Retry 0 NoReqCount 0 Pending 0 Rx Power(TenthdBmV) 28 Freq Offset 729 Timing Offset 1475 Last Invited 83102932(ms) Max Interval 10125(ms) Max Req Delay 393(ticks) Equalization Data: ff f0 ff d0 00 20 ff f0 ff d0 00 20 ff e0 00 30 00 10 00 10 ff c0 ff f0 EAE: Yes PreDocs30 Fragmentation:Yes
13-330
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
##CM Capability:## Concatenation: 1 DOCSIS Version: DOCSIS 3.0 Fragmentation: 1 PHS: 1 BPI: 1 DS SAIDs: 24 US SIDs: 8 Transmit Equalizer: 1(Taps/Symbol) Transmit Equalizer Taps:24 DCC Support: 1 Expanded Unicast SID Space: 1 Range Holdoff Support: 0 L2VPN Capability: 0 Upstream Frequency Band Support: 0 Upstream Symbol Rate Support: 0 Selectable Active Code Mode 2 Support: 0 Code Hopping Mode 2 Support: 0 Multiple TX Channel Support: 0 5.12 Msps Upstream TX Channel Support: 0 2.56 Msps Upstream TX Channel Support: 0 Total SID Clulster Support: 40 SID Clusters per SF Support: 2 Multiple RX Channel Support: 4 Total DSID Support: 32 Resequence DSID Support: 16 Multicast DSID Support: 0 Multicast DSID Forwarding: 0 Frame Control Type Forwarding Capability: 1 DPV Capability: 0 UGS Upstream Flow Support: 24 MAP and UCD Receipt Support: 0 IPv6 Support: 1
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Release 5.2.1
Command Line Usage

show cable modem detail {<X/Y> <NUM>} {<MAC>} [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show cable modem detail {<X/Y> <NUM>} {<MAC>} [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
X/Y NUM MAC | begin exclude include WORD count count-only the slot and MAC Domain number of the CMTS module the Service Identifier assigned to a CM. the cable modems MAC address. turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
13-332
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show cable modem downstream

The show cable modem downstream command provides configuration information for channel bonded cable modems or channel-bonding capable cable modems that are registered as non-bonding. The show cable modem downstream command displays the following information for each bonded or non-bonded cable modem: Interface Prim SID Connect State the downstream cable interface and upstream port that the cable modem is connected to the primary service identifier assigned to this cable modem the stage of connectivity that the cable modem has achieved with the CMTS - offline or in one of a number of online, init, or reject states downstream channel bonding group ID number the number of downstream channels a cable modem or channel bonded cable modem can support (receive) - this is not necessarily the number of downstream channels being used but the number of downstream channels the cable modems hardware supports the cable modems IP address the cable modems MAC address
BgId (if applicable) Multi RxCap
IP Address MAC Address
13-333
Release 5.2.1
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable modem downstream command:
Interface 11/0 11/0 4D0C0 4D0C0
Prim Sid U4C0L0 8195 U4C0L0 8194
Connect State online online
BgId 20 10
Multi Ip Address RxCap 3 150.31.93.15 4 150.31.93.66
Mac Address 0010.1881.0190 0017.ee85.b07c
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable modem downstream bonding [<X/Y> [<1-65535>]] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show cable modem downstream bonding [<X/Y> [<1-65535>]] [ | {count | count-only}] show cable modem <X/Y> downstream non-bonding [<X/Y>] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show cable modem <X/Y> downstream non-bonding [<X/Y>] [ | {count | count-only}]
13-334
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
Command Syntax
X/Y bonding 1-65535 non-bonding | begin exclude include WORD count count-only the slot and MAC Domain number of the CMTS module channel bonded cable modems the downstream channel bonding group number all channel-bonding capable cable modems that are registered as non-bonding turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
13-335
Release 5.2.1
show cable flap-list

The show cable flap-list command displays the cable flap-list and provides the following information: MAC ID Cable IF Hit the MAC address of the flapping cable modem the upstream port the number of times the cable modem responded to MAC layer keepalive messages (minimum hit rate one time/30 seconds) that can indicate intermittent upstream, laser clipping, or common-path distortion - the Hit count should be much higher than Miss count - if not, the cable modem is having problems maintaining the connection due to an upstream problem - the flap count increments each time the system transitions from a Hit to a Miss the number of times the cable modem missed the MAC layer keepalive message - 8% normal, can indicate intermittent upstream, laser clipping, common path distortion the number of times the cable modem comes up and connects to the network - this can indicated the number of times an RF link was reestablished more frequently than the time period configured with the cable flap-list insertion time command displays the count of CRC errors for each cable modem on the flap-list - this count is also saved in the cable modem history record so that the count remains valid if cable modems flap - the count is a sum of all of the CRC errors for each service flow tied to a cable modem
Miss
Ins
CRC
13-336
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
Pow
the number of times the CMTS instructed the cable modem to adjust transmit (TX) power beyond the threshold configured with the cable flap-list power-adjust threshold command this can indicate unacceptable connections or thermal sensitivity the number of times the modem exceeded the missed ranging threshold the total of Pow and Ins values - high flap-count cable modems have high SIDs and may not register specifies the type of flap (ranging, timing, or power) the most recent time a cable modem dropped a connection
Rng Flap
Type Time
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable flap-list command:
MAC ID CableIF Hit Miss Ins 000b.0643.3b60 4/0 U1 1469 7 0 000b.0643.36c8 4/0 U1 1469 7 0 000b.0643.3b78 4/0 U1 1469 6 0
CRC Pow 3 0 0 0 0 0
Rng 1 1 1
Flap 1 1 1
Type Rng Rng Rng
Time FRI NOV 05 11:59:39 FRI NOV 05 11:59:40 FRI NOV 05 11:59:40
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable flap-list [sort-flap | sort-interface | sort-time]
13-337
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
sort-flap sort-interface sort-time Sort by number of times cable modem flapped. Sort cable modem flaps by interface. Sort most recent time cable modem flapped.
13-338
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show cable modem hosts

The show cable modem hosts command displays the number of Customer Premises Equipment (CPE) hosts connected to a specific CM.
Intf Prim Prim Prim Connect Cable DS US Sid State 9/0 9D0C0 U1C0L0 15841 online Number of Hosts = 0
Timing RxPwr Ip Address Offset dBmV 1267 0.0 150.31.92.87
Mac Address 0017.ee85.affc
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable modem {<mac> | <prefix>} hosts [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show cable modem {<mac> | <prefix>} hosts [{count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
mac prefix | begin exclude include WORD cable modem MAC address cable modem IP address turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string
13-339
Release 5.2.1
count count-only
13-340
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show cable modem loadbalance-group

The show cable modem loadbalance-group command displays cable modem load balancing group assignments. The following is typical output from the show cable modem loadbalance-group command:
Intf Cable 9/0 11/0 11/0 11/0
Prim DS 9D0C0 11D0C0 11D1C0 11D1C0
Prim US U1C0L0 U0C0L0 U5C0L0 U5C0L0
Mac Address 0017.ee85.affc 0011.1aca.13a6 0019.5eb4.704e 0800.3e08.7f4e
Load Balance Group Name Not Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable modem loadbalance-group [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} | {count | count-only}] show cable modem loadbalance-group [ | {count | count-only } {<WORD>}]
Command Syntax
| begin count count-only exclude turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output filter for output that excludes the specified string
13-341
Release 5.2.1
include WORD
filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string
13-342
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show cable modem mac

The show cable modem mac command displays the following MAC layer (layer 2) information for all cable modems attached to the BSR, cable modems on a specific CMTS module, or a specific cable modem: MAC Address MAC State the cable modems MAC address the stage of connectivity that the cable modem has achieved with the CMTS - offline or in one of a number of online, init, or reject states the Primary SID number associated with this cable modem the version of the DOCSIS specification that this cable modem supports (DOC1.0, DOC1.0+, DOC1.1, DOC2.0) - this field does not indicate the DOCSIS version that a cable modem is running. If the modem is offline, a default version of DOCSIS 1.0 is displayed. the version of DOCSIS for which the cable modem is registered and provisioned yes indicates that this cable modem is capable of performing DOCSIS 1.1 style fragmentation yes indicates that this cable modem is capable of performing concatenation yes indicates that this cable modem is capable of performing DOCSIS 1.1 style Payload Header Suppression (PHS) BPI+ indicates that this Cable Modem is capable of supporting BPI+ encryption if not, it displays BPI
Prim SID Version
QoS Prov Frag
Concat PHS
Priv
13-343
Release 5.2.1
DS Saids
the number of BPI+ style downstream Security Association Identifiers (SAIDs) that this cable modem supports (DOCSIS 1.1 modems only) the number of upstream Service IDentifiers (SIDs) that this cable modem supports (DOCSIS 1.1 modems only) the device type field: CM = cable modem eSTB = embedded Set Top Box
US Sids
Dev
Note: If the cable modem supports DOCSIS 1.0+, it will be displayed in the "Version" field of the command output.
The following is typical screen output from the show cable modem mac command:
MAC Address 0011.805f.fd30 0011.8061.3f0e 000b.0643.33fc 000b.0643.3718 0020.409a.24c8 00e0.0c60.2854 0011.1ac9.2094 0011.1aca.1394 0011.1aca.13a6
MAC State online online online online online online offline online online
Prim SID 2 1 195 203 194 213 0 1 2
DOC Ver 2.0 2.0 1.0 1.0 1.1 1.0 1.0 2.0 2.0
Qos Prov 1.1 1.1 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.1 1.1
Frag Con yes yes no no no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes no no no yes yes
PHS yes yes no no no no no yes yes
Priv BPI+ BPI+ BPI BPI BPI BPI BPI BPI+ BPI+
DCC yes yes no no no no no yes yes
DS Saids 15 15 0 0 0 0 0 15 15
US Sids 16 16 0 0 0 0 0 16 16
Dev eCM eCM CM CM CM CM CM eCM eC
Group Access
All
13-344
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable modem <mac> mac [subinterface] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show cable modem <mac> mac [subinterface] [ | {count | count-only}] show cable modem mac [<X/Y> [subinterface]] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show cable modem mac [<X/Y> [subinterface]] [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
mac subinterface X/Y | begin exclude include WORD count count-only the cable modems MAC address show subinterface information the slot and MAC Domain number of the CMTS module turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
13-345
Release 5.2.1
show cable modem mac30

The show cable modem mac30 command displays the following DOCSIS 3.0 MAC layer (layer 2) information for all DOCSIS 3.0 cable modems attached to the BSR, DOCSIS 3.0 cable modems on a specific CMTS module, or a specific DOCSIS 3.0 cable modem: MAC Address MAC State the cable modems MAC address the stage of connectivity that the cable modem has achieved with the CMTS - offline or in one of a number of online, init, or reject states - "bd" indicates a bonded cable modem the Primary SID number associated with this cable modem the number of downstream channels a cable modem or channel bonded cable modem can support (receive) - this is not necessarilly the number of downstream channels being used but the number of downstream channels the cable modems hardware supports yes indicates that this cable modem is capable of performing DOCSIS 1.1 style fragmentation displays whether early authentication and encryption (EAE) signaling for the MAC Domain is enabled (yes) or disabled (no) early authentication functions as a network admission control - only authenticated CMs are allowed to continue their initialization process and may be subsequently admitted to the network and the results of successful authentication are used for securing the subsequent steps in the CMs initialization process
Prim SID Multi RxCap
PReg Frag
EAE
13-346
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
The following is typical screen output from the show cable modem mac30 command:
MAC Address 0017.ee85.affc 0017.ee90.30ac 0011.1aca.13a6 0017.ee85.b020 0017.ee85.b07c 0019.5eb4.704e 0800.3e08.7f4e
MAC State online(bd) online online online(bd) online(bd) online online
Prim SID 15809 2 1 15778 15777 8193 3
Multi RxCap 4 4 0 4 4 3 0
PReg Frag no no no no no no no
EAE no no no no no no no
Group Access
All
Command Mode
All modes
Command Line Usage

show cable modem mac30 <X/Y> [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} | {count | count-only}] show cable modem mac30 <X/Y> [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
X/Y | begin the slot and MAC Domain number of the CMTS module turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string
13-347
Release 5.2.1
13-348
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show cable modem maintenance

The show cable modem maintenance command displays the following station maintenance error statistics for all cable modems attached to the BSR, cable modems on a specific CMTS module, or a specific cable modem: Mac Address I/F Prime Sid SM Exhausted Count - Time SM Aborted Count - Time the MAC address of the cable modem the interface on which the cable modem has an active connection the primary service identifier assigned to the modem the number of times a CM was dropped because it did not reply to station maintenance requests the number of times the CM was dropped because its operational parameters were unacceptable including power level outside of the acceptable range, or the timing offset changes
The following is typical output from the show cable modem maintenance command:
MAC Address 0017.ee85.affc 0011.1aca.13a6 0017.ee90.30ac 0019.5eb4.704e 0800.3e08.7f4e
Intf Cable 9/0 11/0 11/0 11/0 11/0
SM Exhausted Count - Time 0 xxx xx 0 xxx xx 8 APR 17 0 xxx xx 0 xxx xx
xx:xx:xx xx:xx:xx 07:23:19 xx:xx:xx xx:xx:xx
SM Aborted Count - Time 0 xxx xx 0 xxx xx 0 xxx xx 0 xxx xx 0 xxx xx
xx:xx:xx xx:xx:xx xx:xx:xx xx:xx:xx xx:xx:xx
Group Access
All
13-349
Release 5.2.1
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable modem <mac> maintenance [subinterface] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show cable modem <mac> maintenance [subinterface] [ | {count | count-only}] show cable modem maintenance [<X/Y> [subinterface]] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show cable modem maintenance [<X/Y> [subinterface]] [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
mac subinterface X/Y | begin exclude include WORD count count-only the cable modems MAC address show subinterface information the slot and MAC Domain number of the CMTS module turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
13-350
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show cable modem max-rate

The show cable modem max-rate command shows the upstream and downstream maximum sustained rate for the primary service flow. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable modem max-rate command:
Interface
Modem Mac Address
Primary US SFID 3 5 9 13 11 7 1
Upstream Max-Rate 0 1000000 0 1000000 1000000 0 0
Primary DS SFID 4 6 10 14 12 8 2
Downstream Max-Rate 0 5000000 0 5000000 5000000 0 0
Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable
9/0/D0/U0 0011.1a63.e1b4 9/0/D0/U0 0011.1aca.2dda 9/0/D0/U0 0011.aefe.8fbe 9/0/D0/U0 0015.9a6a.88ee 9/0/D0/U0 0015.9a6a.8906 9/0/D0/U0 0015.9adc.7c8c 9/0/D0/U0 0017.ee5a.1bfc
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable modem max-rate [<X/Y>]
Command Syntax
13-351
Release 5.2.1
show cable modem mta show cable modem ps show cable modem stb
The show cable modem mta, show cable modem ps, and show cable modem stb commands are used to display embedded DOCSIS cable modem (eCM) statistics information based on the embedded Service/Application Functional Entity (eSAFE) types, including embedded PacketCable Multimedia Terminal Adapter (MTA), embedded CableHome Portal Services (PS), and embedded Set-Top Box (STB). This device information can used to evaluate network performance, troubleshoot registration problems, and view specific registration and ranging information for devices connected to a specific interface. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable modem {mta | ps | stb}, show cable modem {mta | ps | stb} <X/Y>, and show cable modem {mta | ps | stb} registered commands:
Intf Prim Prim Prim Cable DS US Sid 11/0 11D0C0 U0C0L0 1
Connect State online
Timing RxPwr Ip Address Offset dBmV 1290 -.1 150.31.93.12
Mac Address 0011.1aca.13a6
The show cable modem {mta | ps | stb}, show cable modem {mta | ps | stb} <X/Y>, and show cable modem {mta | ps | stb} registered commands display the following information: Interface Prim Sid Connect State interface with active connection Primary Service Identifier number the device connectivity state - the table below describes the connectivity states supported on the BSR current timing adjustment receive downstream power level in dBmV IP address Media Access Control layer address
Timing Offset RxPwr Ip address Mac address
13-352
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
The supported MTA, PS, and STB device connectivity states are as follows: init(r1) init(r2) init(rc) dhcp(d) dhcp(o) dhcp(req) dhcp(ack) init(o) init(t) online online(d) online(un) online(pk) CM sent initial ranging parameters. CM is ranging. ranging is complete. DHCP Discover was sent by CM. DHCP Offer was received. DHCP Request was sent by CM. DHCP Ack was received, IP address was assigned by DHCP server. option file transfer was started. Time-of-day (TOD) exchange was started. CM registered; enabled for data. CM registered, but network access for the CM is disabled. CM registered, but not enabled data. Fail to verify modem's identity by BPI module. CM registered; baseline privacy interface (BPI) enabled, and key encryption key (KEK) is assigned. CM registered; BPI enabled, and traffic encryption key (TEK) is assigned. CM did attempt to register; registration was refused due to bad mic. CM did attempt to register; registration was refused due to bad COS. CM did attempt to register, registration was refused due to unavailable resource. KEK modem key assignment is rejected. TEK modem key assignment is rejected. CM is considered to be offline.
13-353
Release 5.2.1
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable modem {mta | ps | stb} summary command:
Cable Interface 2/0/U0 2/0/U1 9/0/U0 9/0/U1 9/0/U2 11/1/U4 11/1/U5 11/1/U6 11/1/U7
Total Modem 4 3 4 13 15 16 13 8 13
Reg Modem 4 3 4 13 15 16 13 8 13
Unreg Modem 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Offline Modem 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SpecGrp Name N/A N/A marlborough marlborough marlborough N/A N/A N/A N/A
LbGrp Name N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A mansfield mansfield mansfield mansfield
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable modem {mta | ps | stb} summary total command:
Cable Interface 2/0/U0 2/0/U1 9/0/U0 9/0/U1 9/0/U2 11/1/U4 11/1/U5 11/1/U6 11/1/U7 Total
Total Modems 4 3 4 13 15 16 13 8 13 89
Active Modems 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Registered Modems 4 3 4 13 15 16 13 8 13 89
The show cable modem {mta | ps | stb} summary and show cable modem {mta | ps | stb} summary total commands display the following information:
13-354
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
Cable Interface Total Modem Reg Modem
the BSR 64000 CMTS slot, port, and upstream port number the total number of active, registered, and offline cable modems the number of cable modems which have reached the Online(d), Online (pk), Online(pt) or Online(un) states the number of cable modems in any Init, DHCP, Reject state or substate the number of cable modems which have no state and are not communicating but were previously provisioned - these modems are assumed to be powered off the Spectrum Group name for each upstream channel. the load balancing group assignment for each upstream channel
Unreg Modem Offline Modem
SpecGrp LbGrp
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage show cable modem {mta | ps | stb} [<X/Y> | offline | registered | summary [total ]] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show cable modem {mta | ps | stb} [<X/Y> | offline | registered | summary [total ]] [ | {count | count-only}]
13-355
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
X/Y offline registered summary total the slot and MAC Domain number of the CMTS module displays all offline MTAs, PSs, or STBs displays all registered MTAs, PSs, or STBs displays summarized configuration information for each MTA, PS, or STB displays the total number of all MTAs, PSs, or STBs in each summarized configuration category turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
13-356
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show cable modem offline

The show cable modem offline command provides the following information about cable modems that are offline: Interface Prim Sid Mac address cable modem interface with active connection Primary Service Identifier number cable modem Media Access Control layer address
DeRegistration Timestamp the time at which the modem deregistered in month,date,hh:mm:ss format lastTxBytes lastRxBytes the size of the last transmitted data the size of the last received data
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable modem offline command:
Intf Prim Prim Prim Cable DS US Sid 11/0 11D0C0 U1C0L0 0
Mac Address
DeRegistration Last Us TimeStamp KBytes 0017.ee90.30ac APR 17 06:55:54 0
Last Ds KBytes 0
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable modem offline [<0-15> | <X/Y> | <mac>] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show cable modem offline [<0-15> | <X/Y> | <mac>] [ | {count | count-only}]
13-357
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
0-15 X/Y mac | begin exclude include WORD count count-only the BSR 64000 CMTS slot number the slot and MAC Domain number of the CMTS module the cable modem MAC address turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
13-358
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show cable modem offline-previous

The show cable modem offline-previous command displays the modems previous state prior to going into the offline state. The command provides the following information about cable modems that are offline: Interface Prim Sid Mac address cable modem interface with active connection Primary Service Identifier number cable modem Media Access Control layer address
DeRegistration Timestamp the time at which the modem deregistered in month,date,hh:mm:ss format Previous State the previous state the modem was in before going offline
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable modem offline-previous command:
Cable Interface 0/0 0D0CO U0C0L0 Prim Sid 0 Mac Address DeRegistration Previous TimeStamp State 0011.ae89.7e62 SEP 09 01:48:35 online
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable modem offline-previous [<0-15> | <X/Y> | <mac>] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show cable modem offline-previous [<0-15> | <X/Y> | <mac>] [ | {count | count-only}]
13-359
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
0-15 X/Y mac | begin exclude include WORD count count-only the BSR 64000 CMTS slot number the slot and MAC Domain number of the CMTS module the cable modem MAC address turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
13-360
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show cable modem phy

The show cable modem phy command displays the following physical hardware information for or all cable modems attached to the BSR, cable modems on a specific CMTS module, or a specific cable modem: Mac Address I/F USPwr (dBmV) the MAC address of the cable modem the channel number the upstream power level in dBmV as measured at the CMTS upstream port for this cable modem the estimated upstream signal to noise ratio of signals generated by this cable modem as measured at the CMTS upstream port the ranging time offset for the cable modem the modulation type for the cable modem possible types are: TDMA - DOCSIS 1.X capable modems or DOCSIS 2.0 modems with TLV39 DOCSIS 2.0 Mode disabled ATDMA - DOCSIS 2.0 modems on an ATDMA or MTDMA channel. SCDMA - DOCSIS 2.0 modems on an SCDMA channel
USSNR (tenthdB)
Timing Offset Mod Type
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable modem phy command:
13-361
Release 5.2.1
MAC Address 0017.ee85.affc 0011.1aca.13a6 0019.5eb4.704e 0800.3e08.7f4e
Intf Cable 9/0 11/0 11/0 11/0
Prim US U1C0L0 U0C0L0 U5C0L0 U5C0L0
USPwr (tenthdBmV) 0 -1 -2 -1
USSNR (tenthdB) 328 361 365 342
Timing Offset 1267 1290 1291 2843
Mod Type TDMA TDMA TDMA TDMA
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable modem <mac> phy [subinterface] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} | {count | count-only}] show cable modem <mac> phy [subinterface] [ | {count | count-only } {<WORD>}] show cable modem phy [<X/Y> [subinterface]] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} | {count | count-only}] show cable modem phy [<X/Y> [subinterface]] [ | {count | count-only } {<WORD>}]
Command Syntax
mac subinterface X/Y | begin
the cable modems MAC address show subinterface information the slot and MAC Domain number of the CMTS module turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string
13-362
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
count count-only exclude include WORD
count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string
13-363
Release 5.2.1
show cable modem qos

The show cable modem qos command displays the service class names applied to each MAC domain, the downstream and upstream maximum rates allowed, and whether the cable modem service-class-name command has been used to override service class to temporarily penalize the QoS received by a CM due to violations of the subscribers service level agreement. The following is typical screen output from the show cable modem qos command:
Cable IF 3/0 3/0 3/0 3/0 3/0 3/0 3/0 3/0 3/0 3/0 3/0 3/0 3/0 3/0 3/0 3/0 3/0 3/0 3/0 3/0 3/0 3/0 3/0 3/0 3/0 3/0 /
MAC 0008.0e15.48d0 0008.0e15.4900 0008.0e15.49d2 0008.0e15.a42c 0008.0e15.a61e 0008.0e15.a72c 0008.0e15.a7c2 000e.5cf3.acc0 000e.5cf3.accc 000e.5cf3.ad26 0011.8056.3fee 0011.8059.f796 0011.8060.e598 0011.8060.e5b0 0011.8060.e5bc 0011.8060.e5c2 0011.8061.0aca 0011.8061.0bd8 0011.8061.0c08 0011.8061.0d22 0011.8061.0d64 0011.8061.0d94 0011.8061.0ee4 0011.ae02.56de 0011.ae05.b850 0011.ae89.7820
DS SCN T1up DefRRDown DefRRDown DefRRDown DefRRDown DefBEDown DefRRDown DefBEDown DefBEDown DefBEDown DefBEDown DefBEDown DefBEDown DefBEDown DefBEDown DefBEDown DefBEDown DefBEDown DefBEDown DefBEDown DefBEDown DefBEDown DefBEDown DefBEDown DefBEDown DefBEDown
DS MAX-RATE 0 64000 64000 64000 64000 0 64000 5000000 5000000 5000000 5000000 5000000 5000000 5000000 5000000 5000000 5000000 5000000 5000000 5000000 5000000 5000000 5000000 5000000 5000000 5000000
US SCN DefBEUp DefBEUp DefBEUp DefBEUp DefBEUp DefBEUp DefBEUp DefBEUp penaltyUS DefBEUp DefBEUp DefBEUp DefBEUp DefRRUp DefBEUp DefBEUp DefBEUp DefBEUp DefBEUp DefBEUp DefBEUp DefBEUp DefBEUp DefBEUp DefBEUp DefBEUp
13-364
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
The following table provides descriptions of the output fields: Cable If MAC DS SCN DS Max-Rate US SCN US Max-Rate The slot and MAC Domain of the cable interface. The MAC address of the cable modem. Displays the current operational downstream service class name of the service flow. Displays the current maximum rate of the primary downstream channel. Displays the current operational upstream service-class-name of the service flow. Displays the current maximum rate of the primary upstream channel.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable modem qos [<X/Y> ] [ name <service class name>] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show cable modem qos [<X/Y> ] [ name <service class name>] [ | {count | count-only}]
13-365
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
X/Y name service class name | begin exclude include WORD count count-only Limits output to the slot and MAC domain specified. Limits output to the service class name specified. Turns on output modifiers (filters). Filter for output that begins with the specified string. Filter for output that excludes the specified string. Filter for output that includes the specified string. The specified string. Count the number of outputted lines. Count the number of lines while suppressing screen output.
13-366
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show cable modem qos summary

The show cable modem qos summary command displays a summary of QoS activity for each MAC domain and associated service classes. The following is typical screen output from the show cable modem qos summary command:
Cable IF 3/0 3/0 3/0 3/0 3/0 3/0
Direction downstream downstream downstream upstream upstream upstream
Primary Service Flow Service Name DefBEDown DefRRDown T1up DefBEUp DefRRUp penaltyUS
CMs 23 5 1 27 1 1
Summary Direction downstream downstream downstream upstream upstream upstream Primary Service Flow Service Name DefBEDown DefRRDown T1up DefBEUp DefRRUp penaltyUS SFs 23 5 1 27 1 1
Total downstream 29 Total upstream 29 Total 58
13-367
Release 5.2.1
The following table provides descriptions of the output fields:
Cable I/F Dir Primary SF SCN Service Class Name CMs
Output from the slot and MAC domain specified. Output in the downstream or upstream direction. Output from the service class name specified. The number of cable modems
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable modem qos summary [<X/Y>] [downstream | upstream ] [name <service class name>] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show cable modem qos summary [<X/Y>] [downstream | upstream ] [name <service class name>] [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
downstream upstream X/Y name service class name Limits output to the downstream direction. Limits output to the upstream direction. Limits output to the slot and MAC domain specified. Limits output to the service class name specified.
13-368
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
Turns on output modifiers (filters). Filter for output that begins with the specified string. Filter for output that excludes the specified string. Filter for output that includes the specified string. The specified string. Count the number of outputted lines. Count the number of lines while suppressing screen output.
13-369
Release 5.2.1
show cable modem registered

The show cable modem registered command displays the following information about registered cable modems: Interface Prim Sid Connect State cable modem interface with active connection Primary Service Identifier number describes the connectivity state of a cable modem. The table below describes the 20 cable modem connectivity states supported on the BSR current cable modem timing adjustment. cable modem receive downstream power level in dbmv cable modem IP address cable modem Media Access Control layer address
Timing Offset Rec Power Ip address Mac address
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable modem registered command:
Interface Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable 4/1/D1U1 4/1/D1U1 4/1/D1U1 4/1/D1U1 4/1/D1U1 4/1/D1U1 4/1/D1U1 4/1/D1U1 4/1/D1U1
Prim Sid 4 6 9 7 5 1 2 3 8
Connect State online(pt) online(pt) online(pt) online(pt) online(pt) online(pt) online(pt) online(pt) online(pt)
Timing Offset 580 581 581 580 579 583 583 579 581
Rec Power 0.2 0.1 0.0 0.0 0.1 0.4 0.2 0.1 0.0
Ip Address 150.31.101.14 150.31.101.44 150.31.101.45 150.31.101.46 150.31.101.50 150.31.101.21 150.31.101.17 150.31.101.12 150.31.101.15
Mac Address 000b.0643.36c8 000b.0643.3716 000b.0643.3b60 000b.0643.3b72 000b.0643.3b78 000b.0643.3b84 000b.0643.3b90 000b.0643.3b9a 000b.0643.3bb2
13-370
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
Cable modem connectivity states are as follows: online online(d) online(un) online(pk) CM registered; enabled for data. CM registered, but network access for the CM is disabled. CM registered, but not enabled data. Fail to verify modem's identity by BPI module. CM registered; baseline privacy interface (BPI) enabled, and key encryption key (KEK) is assigned. CM registered; BPI enabled, and traffic encryption key (TEK) is assigned. CM did attempt to register, registration was refused due to unavailable resource. KEK modem key assignment is rejected. TEK modem key assignment is rejected.
online(pt) reject(r) reject(pk) reject(pt)
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable modem registered [subinterface] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show cable modem registered [subinterface] [ | {count | count-only}]
13-371
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
subinterface | begin exclude include WORD count count-only show subinterface information turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
13-372
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show cable modem remote-query

The show cable modem remote-query command displays the polled RF parameters for each cable modem that has registered on the BSR. The show cable modem remote-query command groups the cable modem's RF parameters in a transmitter, receiver or channel order, allowing operators to easily determine when upstream or downstream attenuation on any port needs to be adjusted. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable modem remote-query command:
Remote Query Polling: Enabled
Poll Cycle:
Complete
Last Poll Cycle Started: THU APR 17 07:53:53 2008 Last Poll Cycle Completed: THU APR 17 07:53:54 2008 Intf Cable ----9/0 11/0 11/0 11/0 11/0 Prim Ds -----9D0C0 11D0C0 11D0C0 11D1C0 11D1C0 Prim Us -----U1C0L0 U0C0L0 U1C0L0 U5C0L0 U5C0L0 DS S/N ---40.2 37.0 0.0 38.8 35.4 US DS Tx Micro Modem Pwr Pwr Offs Refln State ---- ----- ----- ----- ------42.8 -6.9 3366 31 online 38.7 -0.4 1290 27 online 0.0 +0.0 0 0 offline 43.5 -2.6 3390 32 online 42.0 -8.0 2843 0 online
Mac Address -------------0017.ee85.affc 0011.1aca.13a6 0017.ee90.30ac 0019.5eb4.704e 0800.3e08.7f4e
The following information is displayed:. Remote Query Enabled indicates that the Remote Query feature is enabled Polling Disabled indicates that the Remote Query feature is disabled Poll Cycle: Complete indicates that Remote Query polling is enabled and no current polling cycle is in progress In Progress indicates that Remote Query polling is enabled and the current poll cycle is in progress Disabled indicates that Remote Query polling is disabled
13-373
Release 5.2.1
Last Poll Cycle the date and time at which the last Remote Query polling cycle Started: was started - if the Remote Query feature has never been enabled, the field is not displayed Last Poll Cycle displays the date and time at which the last Remote Query polling Completed: cycle was completed - if the Remote Query feature has never been enabled or the first Remote Query polling cycle has not yet completed, the field is not displayed Cable Interface the slot/port/downstream channel number/upstream channel number of the cable modem IP Address Mac Address DS S/N the IP address of the cable modem the MAC address of the cable modem the downstream signal to noise ratio in dB - this represents the last polled value of the cable modems docsIfSigQSignalNoise MIB object the cable modems upstream transmit power level, in dBmv, which represents the last polled value of the cable modems docsIfCmStatusTxPower MIB object - DOCSIS specifies this power level to be between 8.0 and 54.0 dbMv the received downstream power level at the cable modem, in dbMv, which represents the last polled value of the cable modems docsIfdownChannelPower MIB object - DOCSIS specifies this power level to be between +5.0 and -15.0 dBmv the cable modems estimate of the current round trip time obtained from the ranging offset (initial ranging offset + ranging offset adjustments) which represents the last polled value of the cable modems docsIfUpChannelTxTimingOffset MIB object - the cable modem uses this offset for timing upstream transmissions to ensure synchronized arrivals at the CMTS - units are in terms of DOCSIS tick sixty-fourths with a duration of 6.25 microseconds/ 64+
US Pwr
DS Pwr
Tx Offs
13-374
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
Micro Refln
estimate of the total microreflections including in-channel responses perceived on the downstream interface, measured in dBc below the signal level, which represents the last polled value of the cable modems docsIfSigQMicroreflections MIB object online indicates that the cable modem is registered properly offline indicates that the cable modem is not registered Note: this field does not display the same set of modem states as the show cable modem command
Modem State
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable modem remote-query bonding downstream command:
Last Poll Cycle Started: InvalidLast Pri Pri Pri 2nd 2nd Mac Address Frq SNR Pwr Frq SNR -------------- --- ---- ----- --- ---001f.c4aa.7ed1 555 39.8 -0.9 513 39.3 001f.c4aa.7f23 555 39.8 -0.5 513 39.3
Poll Cycle Completed: Invalid 2nd 3rd 3rd 3rd 4th 4th 4th Pwr Frq SNR Pwr Frq SNR Pwr ----- --- ---- ----- --- ---- -----1.9 519 40.3 -1.0 525 39.8 -1.2 -2.3 519 39.8 -1.0 525 39.8 -1.8
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable modem remote-query bonding detail command:
13-375
Release 5.2.1
Cable Interface Mac Address Ip Address ------------ -------------- --------------0/0/D0U1C0 001f.c4aa.7ed1 30.10.1.6
0/0/D0U0C0
001f.c4aa.7f23 30.10.1.16
Chan Desc ----dsPri dsSec dsSec dsSec usPri dsPri dsSec dsSec dsSec usPri
Frq --555 513 519 525 24 555 513 519 525 31
SNR ---39.8 39.3 40.3 39.8 0.0 39.8 39.3 39.8 39.8 0.0
Pwr -----0.9 -2.0 -0.9 -1.4 44.5 -0.6 -2.3 -0.9 -1.9 45.8
Tx Micro Offs Refln ---- ----1474 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1475 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable modem remote-query [version | bonding [detail | downstream ]] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} | {count | count-only}] show cable modem remote-query [version | bonding [detail | downstream ]] [ | {count | count-only} {<WORD>}]
13-376
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
Command Syntax
version displays the version of software that a customer cable modem is running, i.e "SB6120 SB6120-1.0.1.7-SCM00-NOSH" displays the SNR and power levels for secondary channels with channel bonding cable modems provides detailed channel bonding information provides downstream channel information only turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string
bonding
detail downstream | begin count count-only exclude include WORD
13-377
Release 5.2.1
show cable modem security

The show cable modem security command displays a summary of initializing CMs security authorization state, one CM per line. The command provides output only for initializing CMs which are CMs which have sent an initial DHCP Discover but have not yet registered. Registered CMs and offline CMs are not displayed by the show cable modem security command. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable modem security command:
CM MAC -------------0000.0001.0002 0000.0001.0003
State --------init(o) reject(m)
DHCP Server --------------10.20.23.121 10.20.23.121
TFTP Server -------------10. 20. 23.121 10. 20. 23.121
P P -
Config Filename -------------------ResLow.bin *ig/BusinessHigh.bin
C C C
The following table provides descriptions of the output fields: CM MAC State The MAC address of the cable modem. Describes the connectivity state of a cable modem - the table below describes the cable modem connectivity states supported on the BSR. The DHCP server selected by the cable modem through a DHCP-REQUEST. This field will display a - if the cable modem has not yet sent a DHCP-REQUEST. The MSO TFTP server address learned from the DHCP-ACK. This field will display a - if a DHCP-ACK has not been received. The P column reports a P if the BSR acts as a TFTP proxy for the authorized TFTP server, or - otherwise.
DHCP Server
TFTP Server
13-378
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
Config Filename
The CM configuration filename. The BSR supports configuration filenames of up to 128 characters. The show cable modem security command will display all 128 characters of the filename. The C column reports whether the TFTP file contents were cached.
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable modem <cm-mac> security command:
CM Mac: State: DHCP Server: TFTP Server: TOD Server: Syslog Server: Config File: Cached: Failure:
0000.0001.0003 reject(m) 10.20.23.121 10.20.23.121 (proxy 172.52.111.1) 10.20.23.121 10.20.23.121 /public/config/BusinessHigh.bin Yes, last updated 19-jun-2008 03:43 Requested tftp file not authorized by DHCP.
13-379
Release 5.2.1
The following table provides descriptions of the output fields: CM MAC State The MAC address of the cable modem. Describes the connectivity state of a cable modem. The table below describes the cable modem connectivity states supported by the BSR. The DHCP server selected by the cable modem through a DHCP-REQUEST. This field will display a - if the cable modem has not yet sent a DHCP-REQUEST. The authorized TFTP Server reported in the DHCP-ACK to the CM. If the BSR served as a TFTP server proxy, the BSRs proxy TFTP server IP address provided to the CM is also reported.This field will display a - if a DHCP-ACK has not been received. The Time of Day server IP address. The Syslog server IP address. The CM configuration filename. The BSR supports configuration filenames of up to 128 characters. The show cable modem <cm-mac> security command will display all 128 characters of the filename. Reports whether the configuration file was retrieved from the cache and, if so, what was the date and time at which it was updated from the MSOs TFTP server. The Failure field provides a user-readable reason for the latest cable security failure reason for the CM, or None if none.
DHCP Server
TFTP Server
TOD Server Syslog Server Config File
Cached
Failure
13-380
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
Cable modem connectivity states are as follows: init(r1) init(r2) init(rc) dhcp(d) dhcp(o) dhcp(req) dhcp(ack) init(o) init(t) online online(d) online(un) online(pk) CM sent initial ranging parameters. CM is ranging. ranging is complete. DHCP Discover was sent by CM. DHCP Offer was received. DHCP Request was sent by CM. DHCP Ack was received, IP address was assigned by DHCP server. option file transfer was started. Time-of-day (TOD) exchange was started. CM registered; enabled for data. CM registered, but network access for the CM is disabled. CM registered, but not enabled data. Fail to verify modem's identity by BPI module. CM registered; baseline privacy interface (BPI) enabled, and key encryption key (KEK) is assigned. CM registered; BPI enabled, and traffic encryption key (TEK) is assigned. CM did attempt to register; registration was refused due to bad mic or cable security failure. CM did attempt to register; registration was refused due to bad COS. CM did attempt to register, registration was refused due to unavailable resource. KEK modem key assignment is rejected. TEK modem key assignment is rejected. CM is considered to be offline.
online(pt) reject(m)
reject(c) reject(r) reject(pk) reject(pt) offline
13-381
Release 5.2.1
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable modem [<cm-mac>] security [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show cable modem [<cm-mac>] security [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
cm-mac | begin exclude include WORD count count-only The MAC address of the cable modem. Turns on output modifiers (filters). Filter for output that begins with the specified string. Filter for output that excludes the specified string. Filter for output that includes the specified string. The specified string. Count the number of outputted lines. Count the number of lines while suppressing screen output.
13-382
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show cable modem stats

The show cable modem stats command displays the following statistics for each cable modem on a CMTS module. This includes cable modems that are off-line. Interface Prim Sid Connect State cable modem interface with active connection Primary Service Identifier number describes the connectivity state of a cable modem. The table below describes the 20 cable modem connectivity states supported on the BSR. cable modem Media Access Control layer address the number of unicast Kbytes on the downstream the number of unicast Kbytes on the upstream
Mac Address DS Kbytes US Kbytes
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable modem stats command:
Intf Prim Cable DS 9/0 9D0C0
Prim Prim Connect US Sid State U1C0L0 15841 online
Mac Address
Us KBytes 0017.ee85.affc 2158
Ds KBytes 0
Cable modem connectivity states are as follows: init(r1) init(r2) init(rc) dhcp(d) dhcp(o) dhcp(req) CM sent initial ranging parameters. CM is ranging. ranging is complete. DHCP Discover was sent by CM. DHCP Offer was received. DHCP Request was sent by CM.
13-383
Release 5.2.1
dhcp(ack) init(o) init(t) online online(d) online(un) online(pk)
DHCP Ack was received, IP address was assigned by DHCP server. option file transfer was started. Time-of-day (TOD) exchange was started. CM registered; enabled for data. CM registered, but network access for the CM is disabled. CM registered, but not enabled data. Fail to verify modem's identity by BPI module. CM registered; baseline privacy interface (BPI) enabled, and key encryption key (KEK) is assigned. CM registered; BPI enabled, and traffic encryption key (TEK) is assigned. CM did attempt to register; registration was refused due to bad mic. CM did attempt to register; registration was refused due to bad COS. CM did attempt to register, registration was refused due to unavailable resource. KEK modem key assignment is rejected. TEK modem key assignment is rejected. CM is considered to be offline.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable modem {<X/Y> | <mac> | <prefix>} stats [subinterface] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]]
13-384
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show cable modem {<X/Y> | <mac> | <prefix>} stats [subinterface] [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
X/Y mac prefix subinterface | begin exclude include WORD count count-only the slot and MAC Domain number of the CMTS module the cable modem MAC address the IP address show subinterface information turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
13-385
Release 5.2.1
show cable modem summary

The show cable modem summary command displays cable modem information for each cable interface on the BSR. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable modem summary command displaying upstream cable modem information:
Cable Upstream Interface 2/0/U0 2/0/U1 9/0/U0 9/0/U1 9/0/U2 11/1/U4 11/1/U5 11/1/U6 11/1/U7
Total Modem 7 9 32 29 29 16 13 8 13
Reg Modem 7 9 32 29 29 16 13 8 13
Unreg Modem 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Offline Modem 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable modem summary downstream command:
Intf Cable 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 Total
Total Modem 3 7 4 3 17
Reg Modem 3 7 4 3 17
Unreg Modem 0 0 0 0 0
Offline Modem 0 0 0 0 0
LbGrp Name RedSox RedSox RedSox RedSox
13-386
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
The following table provides descriptions of the output fields: Intf Cable Prim DS Cable Upstream Interface Total Modem Reg Modem The slot and MAC Domain number. The primary slot, port, and downstream channel number of the CMTS module. The slot, MAC Domain, and upstream port number of the CMTS module. The total number of active, registered, and offline cable modems. The number of cable modems which have reached the Online(d), Online (pk), Online(pt) or Online(un) states. The number of cable modems in any Init, DHCP, Reject state or substate. The number of cable modems which have no state and are not communicating but were previously provisioned - these modems are assumed to be powered off. The Spectrum Group name for each upstream channel. The load balancing group assignment for each upstream or downstream channel.
SpecGrp LbGrp
Group Access
All
Command Mode
13-387
Release 5.2.1
Command Line Usage

show cable modem summary <X/Y> [downstream <NUM> | total ] [total] [upstream <NUM> | total ] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}] show cable modem summary <X/Y> [downstream <NUM> | total ] [total] [upstream <NUM> | total ] [ | {count | count-only}] show cable modem summary [downstream [total ]] | [total] | upstream [total]] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show cable modem summary [downstream [total ]] | [total] | upstream [total]] [ | {count | count-only}]]
Command Syntax
X/Y downstream upstream total | begin exclude include WORD count count-only The slot and MAC Domain number of the CMTS module. Displays downstream summary information. Displays upstream summary information. Displays total summary information. Turns on output modifiers (filters). Filter for output that begins with the specified string Filter for output that excludes the specified string. Filter for output that includes the specified string. The specified string. Count the number of outputted lines. Count the number of lines while suppressing screen output.
13-388
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show cable modem summary total

The show cable modem summary total command displays cable modem information for each cable interface on the BSR. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable modem summary total command and descriptions of the output fields:
Cable Interface 2/0/U0 2/0/U1 9/0/U0 9/0/U1 9/0/U2 11/1/U4 11/1/U5 11/1/U6 11/1/U7 Total
Total Modems 7 9 32 29 29 16 13 8 13 156
Active Modems 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Registered Modems 7 9 32 29 29 16 13 8 13 156
Cable Interface Total Modem Reg Modem
the BSR 64000 CMTS slot, port, and upstream port number the total number of active, registered, and offline cable modems the number of cable modems which have reached the Online(d), Online (pk), Online(pt) or Online(un) states the number of cable modems in any Init, DHCP, Reject state or substate the number of cable modems which have no state and are not communicating but were previously provisioned - these modems are assumed to be powered off
13-389
Release 5.2.1
SpecGrp LbGrp
the Spectrum Group name for each upstream channel. the load balancing group assignment for each upstream channel
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable modem summary total [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show cable modem summary total [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
13-390
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show cable modem svc-flow-id

The show cable modem svc-flow-id command displays the following information for all of the service flows associated with a specific MAC address: Service flow id Interface Flow Direction Flow Max Rate the service flow identifier number cable modem interface with active connection the flow direction for this service flow the maximum sustained traffic rate allowed for this service flow in bits/sec no traffic rate limit for this service flow is indicated by "no restriction"
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable modem svc-flow-id command:
Service flow id 9 10 Interface cable 4/1 cable 4/1 Flow Direction Upstream Downstream Flow Max Rate 96000 10
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable modem <mac> svc-flow-id [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show cable modem <mac> svc-flow-id [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax mac

| begin exclude
cable modem Media Access Control layer address turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string
13-391
Release 5.2.1
13-392
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show cable modem svc-flow-id detail

The show cable modem svc-flow-id detail command provides detailed information on all of the service flows associated with a specific MAC address. The following information is provided: Dir SFID SID Type the flow direction for this service flow the service flow identifier number the service ID assigned to the cable modem the service flow type - possible service flow types are as follows: Stat - Static Flow Stat* - Static Flow Primary DQoS - Dynamic DQoS Flow Normal Priority DQoSE - Dynamic DQoS Flow Emergency Priority Dyn - Dynamic non-DQoS Flow Normal Priority PCMM - PacketCable Multimedia Flow Normal Priority Unknw - Unknown the service flow state - possible service flow states are as follows: Activ - the service flow is in an Active state Admit - the service flow is in an Admitted state Prov - the service flow is in a Provisioned state Defer - the service flow is in a Deferred state
State
13-393
Release 5.2.1
Sched
the upstream service flow scheduling type - possible upstream service flow scheduling types are as follows: Rsvd - Reserved (for future use) Undef - Undefined BE - Best Effort NRTPS - Non Real Time Polling Service RTPS - Real Time Polling Service UGSAD - Unsolicited Grant Service with Activity Detection UGS - Unsolicited Grant Service Unknwn - Unknown for downstream service flow scheduling types this field displays "n/a" the minimum sustained traffic rate allowed for this service flow in bits/sec no traffic rate limit for this service flow is indicated by "none" the maximum sustained traffic rate allowed for this service flow in bits/sec no traffic rate limit for this service flow is indicated by "none" the total number of packets for this service flow the total number of bytes for this service flow
Min-Rate
Max-Rate
Packets Bytes
13-394
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
The following is typical output from the show cable modem svc-flow-id detail command:
CM - 0017.ee85.affc Cable Interface 9/0 9D0C0 U1/C0 Dir SFID SID 15841 n/a Type State Sched BE Undef Min-Rate 100000 5000000 Max-Rate none none Packets 6132 0 Bytes 2394478 0
Up 1 Down 2
Stat* Activ Stat* Activ
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable modem <mac> svc-flow-id detail [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show cable modem <mac> svc-flow-id detail [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
mac | begin exclude include WORD count count-only cable modem Media Access Control layer address turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
13-395
Release 5.2.1
show cable modem time-registered

The show cable modem time-registered command displays how long a cable modem has been registered. This command can be used to specify individual cable modems, cable modems associated with a particular BSR 64000 chassis slot, or cable modems associated with a particular Spectrum Group. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable modem time-registered command:
Intf Prim Cable DS 9/0 9D0C0
Prim Connect US State U1C0L0 online
Mac Address 0017.ee85.affc
Registration Time 000:16:57:25
The following information is provided: Interface Connect State cable modem interface with active connection describes the connectivity state of a cable modem. The table below describes the 20 cable modem connectivity states supported on the BSR. cable modem Media Access Control layer address the length of time a cable modem has been registered in ddd:hh:mm:ss format the associated Spectrum Group name
Mac Address Registration Time Spectrum Group
Cable modem connectivity states are as follows: online online(d) online(un) CM registered; enabled for data. CM registered, but network access for the CM is disabled. CM registered, but not enabled data. Fail to verify modem's identity by BPI module.
13-396
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
online(pk)
CM registered; baseline privacy interface (BPI) enabled, and key encryption key (KEK) is assigned. CM registered; BPI enabled, and traffic encryption key (TEK) is assigned. CM did attempt to register; registration was refused due to bad mic. CM did attempt to register; registration was refused due to bad COS. CM did attempt to register, registration was refused due to unavailable resource. KEK modem key assignment is rejected. TEK modem key assignment is rejected.
online(pt) reject(m) reject(c) reject(r) reject(pk) reject(pt)
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable modem time-registered {<mac> [subinterface] | <X/Y> | slot [<NUM> | subinterface] | subinterface] | spectrum-group [<WORD>[subinterface] | subinterface ]} [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show cable modem time-registered {<mac> [subinterface] | <X/Y> | slot [<NUM> | subinterface] | subinterface] | spectrum-group [<WORD>[subinterface] | subinterface ]} [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
mac subinterface the MAC address of a particular cable modem show subinterface information
13-397
Release 5.2.1
X/Y slot NUM spectrum-group WORD | begin exclude include WORD count count-only
the slot and MAC Domain number of the CMTS module the BSR 64000 chassis slot number the Spectrum Group name turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
13-398
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show cable modem timing-offset

This show cable modem timing-offset command allows the user to select which cable modems are displayed on the console based on their timing offset value. The timing offset stored at the cable modem is the accumulation of all the timing adjustments sent to the cable modem. The cable modem starts at an initial timing offset which takes into account the cable modems internal delays. The BSR cannot determine at what timing offset a particular cable modem starts and therefore the values stored and displayed by the BSR are the summation of the adjustments from the cable modems initial timing offset. Since most manufacturers use a different initial timing offset value, the values stored by the BSR will vary per cable modem based on the manufacturer. Note: The true timing offset that a CM is using should be read at the CM using SNMP. A CM with the highest recorded timing offset could be the furthest unit away from the BSR and be functioning correctly. The show cable modem timing-offset command displays the following information about a cable modem:
Interface Prim Sid Connect State
cable modem interface with active connection Primary Service Identifier number describes the connectivity state of a cable modem. The table below describes the 20 cable modem connectivity states supported on the BSR current cable modem timing adjustment cable modem receive downstream power level in dbmv cable modem IP address cable modem Media Access Control layer address
13-399
Release 5.2.1
The following is typical output from the show cable modem timing-offset command:
Intf Cable 9/0 11/0 11/0 11/0 11/0
Prim Sid 15841 1 3 8193 2
Connect State online online init(r2) online online(pt)
Timing Offset 1267 1290 1282 1291 2844
RxPwr dBmV 0.0 -.1 -4.4 -.1 -.1
Ip Address 150.31.92.87 150.31.93.12 0.0.0.0 150.31.93.40 150.31.93.32
Mac Address 0017.ee85.affc 0011.1aca.13a6 0017.ee90.30ac 0019.5eb4.704e 0800.3e08.7f4e
Cable modem connectivity states are as follows: init(r1) init(r2) init(rc) dhcp(d) dhcp(o) dhcp(req) dhcp(ack) init(o) init(t) online online(d) online(un) online(pk) CM sent initial ranging parameters. CM is ranging. ranging is complete. DHCP Discover was sent by CM. DHCP Offer was received. DHCP Request was sent by CM. DHCP Ack was received, IP address was assigned by DHCP server. option file transfer was started. Time-of-day (TOD) exchange was started. CM registered; enabled for data. CM registered, but network access for the CM is disabled. CM registered, but not enabled data. Fail to verify modem's identity by BPI module. CM registered; baseline privacy interface (BPI) enabled, and key encryption key (KEK) is assigned. CM registered; BPI enabled, and traffic encryption key (TEK) is assigned.
online(pt)
13-400
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
reject(m) reject(c) reject(r) reject(pk) reject(pt) offline
CM did attempt to register; registration was refused due to bad mic. CM did attempt to register; registration was refused due to bad COS. CM did attempt to register, registration was refused due to unavailable resource. KEK modem key assignment is rejected. TEK modem key assignment is rejected. CM is considered to be offline.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable modem timing offset {above | below} <0-500000> [<X/Y> [subinterface] | subinterface] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show cable modem timing offset {above | below} <0-500000> [<X/Y> [subinterface] | subinterface] [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
above below 0-500000 X/Y subinterface identify all cable modems with a timing offset above the entered number identify all cable modems with a timing offset below the entered number the timing offset value the slot and MAC Domain number of the CMTS module show subinterface information
13-401
Release 5.2.1
13-402
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show cable modem unregistered

The show cable modem unregistered command displays the following information about unregistered cable modems: Interface Prim Sid Connect State cable modem interface with active connection Primary Service Identifier number describes the connectivity state of a cable modem. The table below describes the 20 cable modem connectivity states supported on the BSR. current cable modem timing adjustment cable modem receive downstream power level in dbmv cable modem IP address cable modem Media Access Control layer address
Cable modem connectivity states are as follows: init(r1) init(r2) init(rc) dhcp(d) dhcp(o) dhcp(req) dhcp(ack) init(o) init(t) offline CM sent initial ranging parameters. CM is ranging. ranging is complete. DHCP Discover was sent by CM. DHCP Offer was received. DHCP Request was sent by CM. DHCP Ack was received, IP address was assigned by DHCP server. option file transfer was started. Time-of-day (TOD) exchange was started. CM is considered to be offline.
13-403
Release 5.2.1
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable modem unregistered command:
Cable 11/0/D0/U6/C0 0
offline
0.0.0.0
0011.1ac9.2094
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable modem unregistered [subinterface] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show cable modem unregistered [subinterface] [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
subinterface | begin exclude include WORD count count-only show subinterface information turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
13-404
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show cable modem vendor

The show cable modem vendor command displays the cable modems vendor name which is returned from the Organizational Unique Identifier (OUI) vendor table. If no match is found in the OUI vendor table, the vendor field is left blank. Currently, 71 vendors and 729 OUI's are supported by this command. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable modem vendor command:
Vendor Motorola Motorola Motorola Motorola Motorola Motorola Motorola Motorola
MAC Address 0020.4041.7c40 0020.4041.7d18 0011.aefe.8fbe 0015.2f48.0f0a 0015.9a6a.88ee 0015.9a6a.8906 0015.9a6a.8932 0015.9adc.7c8c
I/F 4/0/U1 4/0/U0 9/0/U0 9/0/U0 9/0/U0 9/0/U0 9/0/U0 9/0/U0
Connect State online online online online online online online online
Prim Sid 21 22 62 71 68 69 67 70
RxPwr (dBmV) 0.4 0.0 0.0 0.2 0.0 0.1 -.2 -.1
Timing Offset 1888 567 1792 1297 1280 1281 1279 1279
Num CPE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
BPI N N N N N N N N
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable modem vendor {<cm-mac> | <X/Y>} [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show cable modem vendor {<cm-mac> | <X/Y>} [ | {count | count-only}]
13-405
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
cm-mac X/Y | begin exclude include WORD count count-only cable modem Mac address in the form of xxxx.xxxx.xxxx the slot and MAC Domain number of the CMTS module turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
13-406
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show cable modem vendor summary

The show cable modem vendor summary command displays cable modem summary totals per vendor OUI. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable modem vendor summary command:
Interface: 5/0 Vendor OUI Motorola 000e.5c Motorola 0011.ae Motorola 0012.25 Motorola 0017.ee Interface: 5/1 Vendor OUI Motorola 0017.ee
Total CM's Registered 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Unregistered 0 0 0 0
Offline 0 0 0 0
Total CM's Registered Unregistered Offline 1 1 0 0
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable modem vendor summary {<X/Y>} [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show cable modem vendor summary {<X/Y>} [ | {count | count-only}]
13-407
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
X/Y | begin exclude include WORD count count-only the slot and MAC Domain number of the CMTS module turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
13-408
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show cable modem verbose

The show cable modem verbose command displays detailed cable modem information The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable modem verbose command:
MAC Address: IP Address: Prim Sid: QoS Profile Index: Interface: sysDescr: Upstream Power: Downstream Power: Timing Offset: Received Power: MAC Version: Qos Provisioned Mode: Phy Operating Mode: Capabilities: Sid/Said Limit: Transmit Eq. Support: Number of CPE IP's: Max number of CPE's: Total US Data: Total US Throughput: Total DS Data: Total DS Throughput: Max Classifiers: Total Time Online:
0017.ee85.b020 150.31.93.65 8194 0 Cable 11/1/D1/U5/C0 Vendor = Motorola , Model = 0.0 0.0 1280 -1 Docsis 2.0 1.1 TDMA Frag = yes , Concat = yes , PHS = yes , Priv = Max US Sids = 16 , Max DS Saids = 15 Taps/Symbol = 1 , Num of Taps = 24 0 16 0 bytes 0 bytes/sec 0 byte 0 bytes/sec 0 002:13:43:43
BPI
Group Access
All
Command Mode
13-409
Release 5.2.1
Command Line Usage

show cable modem [<cm-mac>] verbose [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show cable modem [<cm-mac>] verbose [ | {count | count-only}]]
Command Syntax
cm-mac | begin exclude include WORD count count-only cable modem Mac address in the form of xxxx.xxxx.xxxx turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
13-410
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show cable modulation-profile

The show cable modulation-profile command displays all configured modulation profiles on the BSR. A modulation profile contains six burst profiles sent out in a UCD message to configure CM transmit parameters. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable modulation-profile command:
Cable Modulation Profile 1 +--------------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+ | | 1 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 9 | 10 | 11 | | IUC | Req | Init | Per | Short| Long | Adv | Adv | Adv | | | | Maint| Maint| Data | Data | Short| Long | UGS | +--------------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+ Modulation qpsk qpsk qpsk 16qam 16qam 64qam 64qam XXXX Diff Encoding OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF XXXX Preamble Len 64 128 128 384 384 120 120 XXXX FEC Err CRC 0 5 5 5 10 12 16 XXXX FEC CW Len 16 34 34 78 235 75 220 XXXX Scrambler Seed 338 338 338 338 338 338 338 XXXX Max Burst 0 0 0 8 0 6 0 XXXX Guard Time 8 48 48 8 8 8 8 XXXX Last Codeword FIXED FIXED FIXED SHORT SHORT SHORT SHORT XXXX Scrambler ON ON ON ON ON ON ON XXXX Intlv Depth 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 XXXX Intlv Blk Sz 1536 1536 1536 0 0 1536 1536 XXXX Preamble Type QPSK0 QPSK0 QPSK0 NONE NONE QPSK1 QPSK1 XXXX SCDMA Spreader OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF XXXX Codes Subfrm 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 XXXX Intlv Stp Sz 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 XXXX TCM Encoding OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF XXXX Channel Type mtdma mtdma mtdma mtdma mtdma mtdma mtdma XXXX
13-411
Release 5.2.1
The show cable modulation-profile command displays the following modulation profile group information:: Modulation Diff Encoding Preamble Len FEC Err CRC FEC CW Len Scrambler Seed Max Burst Guard Time Last Codeword Scrambler Intlv Depth Intlv Blk Sz Preamble Type SCDMA Spreader Codes Subfrm Intlv Stp Sz TCM Encoding Channel Type the upstream modulation type indicates if differential encoding is enabled/disabled the preamble length in bits the number of corrected Forward Error Correction (FEC) errors the FEC code word length in bytes the scrambler seed in decimal format the maximum burst length in minislots Guard time size Last codeword shortened Scramble enabled indication the interleaver depth value the interleaver block size value the preamble type: NONE, QPSK0, QPSK1 enabled/disabled SCDMA spreader the codes subframe value the interleaver step size value enabled/disabled TCM encoding the channel type: atdma, mtdm, scdma, tdma
Note: For a complete list and configuration of all 35 pre-defined modulation profiles, refer to Appendix A, Pre-Defined Modulation Profiles of the BSR 64000 Configuration and Management Guide.
Group Access
All
13-412
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable modulation-profile [<1-600> [<1-11>]]
Command Syntax
1-600 1-11 the modulation profile number a specific IUC code: 1 = Request Burst 3 = Initial Maintenance 4 = Station Maintenance 5 = Short Grant Burst 6 = Long Grant Burst 9 = Advanced PHY Short Data Grant 10 = Advanced PHY Long Data Grant 11 = Unsolicited Grant Service
13-413
Release 5.2.1
show cable modulation-profile brief

The show cable modulation-profile brief command displays cursory information for all configured modulation profiles on the BSR. The show cable modulation-profile brief command displays which modulation profiles are pre-defined, pre-defined but modified by the user, or user configured as shown in the sample commnad output below:
Profile 1 2 to 4 5 6 101 102 to 104 201 to 205 301 to 310
Chan-type tdma tdma tdma tdma mtdma mtdma atdma scdma
Config-status pre-defined pre-defined user-configured user-configured pre-defined, changed pre-defined pre-defined pre-defined
In-use yes
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable modulation-profile brief
13-414
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show cable modulation-profile description

The show cable modulation-profile description command displays a description of the specified modulation profile. The profile number is optional, and if none is specified, a list of all of the profile descriptions is displayed. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable modulation-profile description command:
+----+-----------------------------------------------------------------------+ | Id | Profile Description | +----+-----------------------------------------------------------------------+ 1 DOCSIS 1.X-TDMA 16-QAM & Transmit POST-EQ & FEC - for linear distortion and impulse noise
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable modulation-profile description [<1-600>]
Command Syntax
1-600 the modulation profile number
13-415
Release 5.2.1
show cable privacy auth

The show cable privacy auth command displays the AK grace time and life time values, in seconds. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable privacy auth command:
Interface Cable 3/0 Auth grace time: 600 Auth life time: 604800
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable privacy auth
13-416
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show cable privacy cm-auth

The show cable privacy cm-auth command displays baseline privacy (BPI) authorization key (AK) information for an individual cable modem (CM) using its MAC address. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable privacy cm-auth command:
Version: 1 authCmMacAddr: 0011.805f.fd30 authCmPubKey: 30.81.89.02.81.81.00.AC.2D.1C.37.2D.60.07.43.BC.93.A8.7D.C9.AB.14 .09.CB.C4.37.88.56.09.ED.89.4D.BC.11.17.C8.4F.21.EE.FD.C5.B3.D6.51.A2.67.0E.80.8 E.E1.67.DE.F8.E1.2B.9E.A4.C6.4C.D6.52.76.5F.D5.AB.E6.DD.99.82.D5.5F.1D.99.1A.37. B6.0D.FC.15.E6.77.3A.70.99.84.EB.D1.BD.E0.1A.3C.33.B0.E3.FD.10.61.89.18.24.F9.2E .84.AA.73.81.52.9E.24.0A.B4.1D.EC.41.7E.B4.A3.85.F8.09.54.2C.CB.50.E7.FE.97.F0.C E.BC.5D.D0.8C.7A.D7.02.03.01.00.01 authKeySeqNum: 1 authGraceTime: 600 seconds authLifeTime: 604800 seconds authCmReset: 1 authCmReqs: 1 authCmReplys: 1 authCmRejects: 0 authCmInvalids: 0 authRejectErrCode: 1
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable privacy cm-auth [<mac>]
Command Syntax
mac cable modems MAC address in the form of xxxx.xxxx.xxxx.
13-417
Release 5.2.1
show cable privacy cm-tek

The show cable privacy cm-tek command displays Traffic Encryption Key (TEK) information for a cable modem. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable privacy cm-tek command:
sid: 1 tekLifeTime: 43200 tekGraceTime: 3600 tekReset: 2 keyCmReqs: 24 keyCmReplys: 24 keyCmRejects: 0 tekCmInvalids: 0 keyRejectErrCode: 1 keyRejectErrStr: tekInvalidErrCode: 1 tekInvalidErrStr:
sid: 2 tekLifeTime: 43200 tekGraceTime: 3600 tekReset: 2 keyCmReqs: 24 keyCmReplys: 24 keyCmRejects: 0 tekCmInvalids: 0 keyRejectErrCode: 1 keyRejectErrStr: tekInvalidErrCode: 1 tekInvalidErrStr:
Group Access
All
Command Mode
13-418
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
Command Line Usage

show cable privacy cm-tek [<1-8192>]
Command Syntax
1-8192 cable modems Service ID number
13-419
Release 5.2.1
show cable privacy cmts

The show cable privacy cmts command displays all the baseline privacy statistics specified by the MIB for the cable interface. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable privacy cmts command:
authGraceTime: 600 authLifeTime: 604800 tekGraceTime: 3600 tekLifeTime: 43200 certTrust: 2 certVerPeriod: 1 authCmtsReqs: 9 authCmtsReplys: 9 authCmtsRejects: 0 authCmtsInvalids: 0 authenInfos: 0 saMapReqs: 0 saMapReplys: 0 saMapRejects: 0
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable privacy cmts
13-420
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show cable privacy enforce-bpi-plus

The show cable privacy enforce-bpi-plus command displays whether BPI+ is enabled and enforced on a MAC domain. The following is typical screen output from the show cable privacy enforce-bpi-plus command:
- for no cable privacy enforce-bpi-plus E for cable privacy enforce-bpi-plus Interface --------Global cable 3/0 cable 3/1 cable 10/0 cable 10/1 Configuration ------------E Operation --------E -
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable privacy enforce-bpi-plus
13-421
Release 5.2.1
show cable privacy mandatory

The show cable privacy mandatory command displays the cable privacy configuration for each MAC domain. The following is typical screen output from the show cable privacy enforce-bpi-plus command:
- for no cable privacy mandatory M for cable privacy mandatory M+ for cable privacy mandatory bpi-plus-only Interface --------Global cable 3/0 cable 3/1 cable 10/0 cable 10/1 Configuration ------------M+ Operation --------M+ -
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable privacy mandatory
13-422
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show cable privacy tek

The show cable privacy tek command shows Traffic Encryption Key (TEK) grace time and life-time values. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable privacy tek command:
Interface Cable 3/0 Tek grace time: 3600 Tek life time: 43200 Interface Cable 4/0 Tek grace time: 3600 Tek life time: 43200 Interface Cable 4/1 Tek grace time: 3600 Tek life time: 43200
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable privacy tek
13-423
Release 5.2.1
show cable qos profile

The show cable qos profile command displays information about all the QoS Profiles in use for each slot.
Note: This command is only valid for DOCSIS 1.0, DOCSIS 1.0+, and Euro-DOCSIS 1.0 cable modems.
Slot Prof Idx Pri
the slot number the QoS Profile identifying number the relative priority number assigned to upstream traffic by this QoS profile with 7 being the highest priority. the maximum upstream bandwidth the guaranteed minimum upstream bandwidth the maximum downstream bandwidth. the maximum transmit burst size in bytes valid range is from 0 (the default) to the largest 16-bit integer "true" indicates that Baseline Privacy is enabled for this QoS profile - "false" indicates that Baseline Privacy is not enabled for this Qos profile the number of cable modems that have registered using this QoS Profile - active Qos Profiles are those with Flow Count = 0 overwrites the Type of Service (TOS) field in IP datagrams received on the upstream before forwarding them downstream if the value is not "0"
Max UP BW
Guar UP BW
Max DOWN BW Max Tx burst
BPI Mode
Flow Count
Tos Mask
13-424
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
Tos Value Created By
the overwrite value substituted for the received TOS value. "Oper" indicates a user configured QoS Profile and "Modem" indicates a QoS Profile learned from the cable modem during registration
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable qos profile command:
Slot Prof Pri Max Idx UP BW 5 17 0 10000000 5 18 0 5000000 10 17 0 5000000
Guar UP BW 0 0 0
Max DOWN BW 10000000 5000000 5000000
Max Tx Burst 0 0 0
BPI Mode
Flow Tos Tos Created Cnt Mask Value By 0 0 0 0 0 0 Modem Modem Modem
false 2 false 2 false 2
Note: The "Prof Idx" field output indicates a user defined QoS Profiles unique identifying number in the range of 1-16. All QoS Profile identifying numbers in the range of 17-32 indicate a QoS Profile that was learned from cable modem registrations. When using the show cable qos profile command to view the class of service configuration for DOCSIS 1.0, DOCSIS 1.0+, and Euro-DOCSIS 1.0 cable modems, you will obtain inconsistent results under the following conditions:
If you have not given each user configurable QoS Profile a unique identifying number (in the range of 1 through 16) in the CM configuration file. When you modify a CMs configuration file and specify parameter values that are already in use by other registered modems and fail to change the QoS Profile identifying number to a unique value.
Note: All registered CMs are using the QoS parameters as defined in their respective configuration files and only the output from the show cable qos profile command is inconsistent.
13-425
Release 5.2.1
Once all DOCSIS 1.0, DOCSIS 1.0+, and Euro-DOCSIS 1.0 cable modems have a a unique QoS Profile number, the display of the show cable qos profile command is accurate.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable qos profile [<NUM> [<1-32> [mac]]]
Note: The show cable qos profile command without any arguments displays all user-defined QoS profiles on the BSR regardless of whether they are in use. The show cable qos profile command without arguments does not display any QoS profiles that have been learned via modem registration. The show cable qos profile command with the <NUM> argument displays all active Qos Profiles either user-configured or learned via modem registration for the specified CMTS slot.
Command Syntax
NUM 1-32 the BSR slot number the QoS Profiless identifying number based on a valid range of defined service classes numbers 1-16 are user configured and numbers 17-32 are learned by the CMTS during cable modem registration adds the MAC addresses of the cable modems to the display
mac
13-426
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show cable qos profile user-defined

The show cable qos profile user-defined command displays information about all QoS Profiles or a selected user defined QoS Profile.
Note: This command is only valid for DOCSIS 1.0, DOCSIS 1.0+, and Euro-DOCSIS 1.0 cable modems.
Prof Idx Pri
the QoS Profile identifying number the relative priority number assigned to upstream traffic by this QoS profile with 7 being the highest priority. the maximum upstream bandwidth the guaranteed minimum upstream bandwidth the maximum downstream bandwidth. the maximum transmit burst size in bytes valid range is from 0 (the default) to the largest 16-bit integer "true" indicates that Baseline Privacy is enabled for this QoS profile - "false" indicates that Baseline Privacy is not enabled for this Qos profile the number of cable modems that have registered using this QoS Profile - active Qos Profiles are those with Flow Count = 0 overwrites the Type of Service (TOS) field in IP datagrams received on the upstream before forwarding them downstream if the value is not "0"
Max UP BW
Guar UP BW
Max DOWN BW Max Tx burst
BPI Mode
Flow Count
Tos Mask
13-427
Release 5.2.1
Tos Value Created By
the overwrite value substituted for the received TOS value. "Oper" indicates a user configured QoS Profile and "Modem" indicates a QoS Profile learned from the cable modem during registration
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable qos profile user-defined command:
Slot Prof Pri Max Idx UP BW 2 10 1 2500000 4 12 1 2500000
Guar UP BW 0 0
Max DOWN BW 10000000 10000000
Max Tx Burst 0 0
BPI Mode
Flow Tos Tos Created Cnt Mask Value By 0 0 0 0 Oper Oper
false 4 false 2
Note: The "Prof Idx" field output indicates a user defined QoS Profiles unique identifying number in the range of 1-16. All QoS Profile identifying numbers in the range of 17-32 indicate a QoS Profile that was learned from cable modem registrations. When using the show cable qos profile user-defined command to view the class of service configuration for DOCSIS 1.0, DOCSIS 1.0+, and Euro-DOCSIS 1.0 cable modems, you will obtain inconsistent results under the following conditions:
If you have not given each user configurable QoS Profile a unique identifying number (in the range of 1 through 16) in the CM configuration file. When you modify a CMs configuration file and specify parameter values that are already in use by other registered modems and fail to change the QoS Profile identifying number to a unique value.
Note: All registered CMs are using the QoS parameters as defined in their respective configuration files and only the output from the show cable qos profile user-defined command is inconsistent.
13-428
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
Once all DOCSIS 1.0, DOCSIS 1.0+, and Euro-DOCSIS 1.0 cable modems have a a unique QoS Profile number, the display of the show cable qos profile user-defined command is accurate.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable qos profile user-defined
Note: The show cable qos profile user-defined command displays all user-defined QoS profiles on the BSR regardless of whether they are in use. The show cable qos profile user-defined command does not display any QoS profiles that have been learned via modem registration.
13-429
Release 5.2.1
show cable qos svc-flow classifier

A service flow classifier matches a packet to a service flow using a service flow reference. The service flow reference associates a packet classifier encoding with a service flow encoding to establish a SFID. Classifiers have the following features:

Classifiers are loosely ordered by priority. Several classifiers can refer to the same service flow. More than one classifier may have the same priority. The CMTS uses a downstream classifier to assign packets to downstream service flows. The cable modem uses an upstream classifier to assign packets to upstream service flows.
The show cable qos svc-flow classifier command is used to display the packet classifiers of a service flow configured on the cable interface. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable qos svc-flow classifier command:
13-430
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
Interface index: Service flow id: Packet class id: Packet class direction: Packet class priority: Packet class IP tos low: Packet class IP tos high: Packet class IP tos mask: Packet class IP protocol: Packet class IP source addr: Packet class IP source mask: Packet class IP dest addr: Packet class IP dest mask: Packet class source port start: Packet class source port end: Packet class dest port start: Packet class dest port end: Packet class dest Mac Addr: Packet class enet prot type: Packet class enet protocol: Packet class state: Packet class packets:
75431936 6 2 Downstream 20 0 0 0 258 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0 65535 0 65535 1214.2428.3848 0 0x0 Active 0
Group Access
All
Command Mode
13-431
Release 5.2.1
Command Line Usage

show cable qos svc-flow classifier [<X/Y> [<1-4292967295> [<1-65535>]]]
Note: If the Classifier ID is not given, all the classifiers with the given SFID are listed.
Command Syntax
X/Y 1-4292967295 1-65535 the slot and MAC Domain number of the CMTS module SFID Classifier identification
13-432
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show cable qos svc-flow dynamic-stat

The show cable qos svc-flow dynamic-stat command displays the statistics for dynamic service additions, deletions, and changes for both upstream and downstream service flows. The following is and example of typical screen output from the show cable qos svc-flow dynamic-stat command:
Interface index: 294658 Qos DS Direction: 1 Qos DSA Reqests: 0 Qos DSA Rsps: 0 Qos DSA Acks: 0 Qos DSC Reqs: 0 Qos DSC Rsps: 0 Qos DSC Acks: 0 Qos DSD Reqs: 0 Qos DSD Rsps: 0 Qos dynamic adds: Qos dynamic add fails: Qos dynamic changes: Qos dynamic change fails: Qos dynamic deletes: Qos dynamic delete fails:
0 0 0 0 0 0
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable qos svc-flow dynamic-stat
13-433
Release 5.2.1
show cable qos svc-flow log

The show cable qos svc-flow log command displays the time that the service flow was created or deleted, the total number of packets counted, and the MAC address of the cable modem (CM) that used the service flow. The following is and example of typical screen output from the show cable qos svc-flow log command:
Qos Qos Qos Qos Qos Qos Qos Qos Qos Qos Qos Qos Qos Qos Qos Qos Qos Qos Qos Qos
service service service service service service service service service service service service service service service service service service service service
flow flow flow flow flow flow flow flow flow flow flow flow flow flow flow flow flow flow flow flow
log log log log log log log log log log log log log log log log log log log log
index: interface index: service flow id: cm mac: packets: octets: time deleted: time created: time active: control: index: interface index: service flow id: cm mac: packets: octets: time deleted: time created: time active: control:
2415919105 159318272 7 00e0.0c60.2854 1727 329836 5085076 21666 50634 1 2415919106 159318272 8 00e0.0c60.2854 12 4152 5085076 21666 50634 1
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable qos svc-flow log
13-434
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show cable qos svc-flow param-set

The show cable qos svc-flow param-set command displays parameter settings for all service classes configured on an individual CMTS slot and port or all CMTS modules on the BSR. The following is typical output from the show cable qos svc-flow param-set command:
Interface index: Qos service flow id: Qos parameter set type: Qos parameter set bit map: Qos classname: Qos active timeout: Qos admitted timeout: Qos scheduling type: Qos traffic priority: Qos max traffic rate: Qos max traffic burst: Qos min reserved rate: Qos min reserved pkt size: Qos max concatenated burst: Qos tos AND mask: Qos tos OR mask: Qos req/trans policy: 159318016 1 Active 0x10800000 DefRRUp 0 200 Best Effort 0 0 3044 100000 128 1522 0xff 0x0 0x0
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable qos svc-flow param-set [X/Y] [<1-4292967295>]
13-435
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
X/Y 1-4292967295 the slot and MAC Domain number of the CMTS module service flow ID
13-436
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show cable qos svc-flow phs

The show cable qos svc-flow phs command displays the payload header suppression (PHS) configured for an interface that is used for a specific service flow. The following is typical output from the show cable qos svc-flow phs command:
Interface index: 192872704 Qos service flow id: 1599 Qos PHS index: 1 Qos PHS field: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 13 71 38 e1 74 08 00 45 a0 00 c8 00 00 00 00 40 11 00 00 96 33 01 34 96 33 01 37 c0 02 c0 02 00 b4 00 00 Qos PHS Mask: 03 ff 3f 3c 30 c0 Qos PHS size: 42 Qos PHS verify: 1 Qos PHS classifier index: 662 Packets: 533
Note: If the PHS is not specified, all PHS entries with the specified SFIDs are listed.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable qos svc-flow phs [<X/Y> [<1-4292967295> [<1-65535>]]]
13-437
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
X/Y 1-4292967295 1-65535 the slot and MAC Domain number of the CMTS module SFID Classifier identification
13-438
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show cable qos svc-flow statistics

The show cable qos svc-flow statistics command is used to determine the number of dropped packets due to downstream rate-limiting for a particular service flow. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable qos svc-flow statistics command:
Interface index: Qos service flow Qos service flow Qos service flow Qos service flow Qos service flow Qos service flow Qos service flow Qos service flow Qos service flow Qos service flow Qos service flow Qos service flow Qos service flow Bonding group Id
id: packets: octets: time created: time active: PHS unknowns: policed drop packets: policed delay packets: class: admit status: admit restrict time: PHS octets: PHS packets: (0=non-bonded)
159318016 1 6280 2452091 16335 64996 seconds 0 0 0 DefRRUp Success 0 0 0 0
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable qos svc-flow statistics [<X/Y> [<1-4292967295>]]
13-439
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
X/Y 1-4292967295 the slot and MAC Domain number of the CMTS module SFID
13-440
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show cable qos svc-flow summary

The show cable qos svc-flow summary command displays the service flow information, including the SID, and QoS parameters sets associated with the service flow. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable qos svc-flow summary command:
Interface index: Qos service flow Qos service flow Qos service flow Qos service flow Interface index: Qos service flow Qos service flow Qos service flow Qos service flow 294658 1 2 Upstream True 294658 2 0 Downstream True
id: SID: direction: primary:
id: SID: direction: primary:
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable qos svc-flow summary [<X/Y> [<1-4292967295>]]
Command Syntax
X/Y 1-4292967295 the slot and MAC Domain number of the CMTS module SFID
13-441
Release 5.2.1
show cable qos svc-flow upstream-stat

The show cable qos svc-flow upstream-stat command is used to display the number of fragmented packets, incomplete fragmented packets, and the number of concatenated bursts counted on the service flow. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable qos svc-flow upstream-stat command:
Interface index: Qos service flow SID: Qos upstream frag packets: Qos upstream incomplete packets: Qos upstream concat bursts: Interface index: Qos service flow SID: Qos upstream frag packets: Qos upstream incomplete packets: Qos upstream concat bursts: 294658 1 0 0 0 294658 2 0 0 0
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable qos svc-flow upstream-stat [<X/Y> [<1-16383>]]
Command Syntax
X/Y 1-16383 the slot and MAC Domain number of the CMTS module Classifier identification
13-442
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show cable spectrum-group

The show cable spectrum-group command is used to verify if an assigned Spectrum Group is activated for an upstream port and if and how the Spectrum Group is configured for Advanced Spectrum Management. The show cable spectrum-group command displays the following Spectrum Group information:: Member channel the channels which belong to the Spectrum Group being displayed CfgFreq Cfg MP the configured center frequency - this is the frequency set in the running configuration for this upstream channel the configured modulation profile - this is the number of the modulation profile set in the running configuration for this upstream channel the active center frequency - this is the frequency this upstream is currently tuned to the active modulation profile - this is the Modulation Profile Number which the upstream channel is currently using the modulation type - this is the Modulation type currently being used on this upstream channel the configured hop threshold snr modulation-type value for the modulation type currently in use on this upstream channel the channel width currently in use on this upstream channel the quality of this upstream channel - NORMAL or IMPAIRED
ActFreq Act MP ModType Thresh ChanWidth ChanQual
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable spectrum-group command:
13-443
Release 5.2.1
Spectrum Group: sg1 Member channel CfgFreq Cfg MP ActFreq Act MP ModType Thresh ChanWidth ChanQual Cable 9/0/U0 10000000 1 25000000 1 16qam 20db 3200000 NORMAL Cable 9/0/U1 13200000 1 13200000 1 16qam 20db 3200000 NORMAL hop snr hysteresis hop sampling-period active-channel hop sampling-period rollback-channel hop sampling-period spare-channel reference-modem-exclusion 2 db 0 sec 10 sec 60 sec 0
hop action modulation-profile 2 priority 128 hop action frequency 25000000 priority 128
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable spectrum-group schedule command:
Spectrum Group : spectrum1 start Frequency (Hz) stop Frequency (Hz) 0000000 12000000 25000000
Timer Info (if any)
35000000 ADD TIMER DAILY THU JUL 26 16:00:00 2004 DEL TIMER DAILY THU JUL 26 20:00:00 2004 29000000 ADD TIMER WEEKLY THU JUL 26 10:00:00 2004 DEL TIMER WEEKLY THU JUL 26 11:00:00 2004 22000000 30000000
21000000
17000000 26000000
Group Access
All
Command Mode
13-444
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
Command Line Usage

show cable spectrum-group [<WORD> [schedule ]]
Command Syntax
WORD schedule the Spectrum Group name applied to the upstream port display the Spectrum Group schedule
Group Access
All
Command Mode
13-445
Release 5.2.1
show cable spectrum-group load-balance summary

This show cable spectrum-group load-balance summary command displays a summary of cable modem distribution and load balancing statistics for the spectrum group. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable spectrum-group load-balance summary command:
Spectrum Group: Mansfield Static Load Balancing: enabled Interface Registered Move Modems Success Cable 2/0/U0 3 1 Cable 2/0/U1 1 1 Cable 2/0/U2 6 3 Cable 2/0/U3 2 1 Total 12 6
Move Failure 0 0 0 0 0
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable spectrum-group <WORD> load-balance summary
Command Syntax
WORD The Spectrum Group name.
13-446
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show cable spectrum-group map

The show cable spectrum-group command displays the state of each channel in the Spectrum Group. The command displays the following Spectrum Group map states:
SPEC_RESERVED this portion of the upstream spectrum has been configured as the primary channel for use by the listed Member Channel and is not currently being used - this portion of the spectrum is not available for use by other upstream interfaces SPEC_OCCUPIED this portion of the upstream spectrum is currently being used by the listed Member Channel. This portion of the spectrum is the configured primary channel for the listed Member Channel - this portion of the spectrum is not available for use by other upstream interfaces
SPEC_HOP_AVAIL this portion of the upstream spectrum is not currently being used and is available for use by any member channel which belongs to this Spectrum Group SPEC_AGILE this portion of the upstream spectrum is currently being used by the listed member channel - this is being used because the configured primary channel was impaired the last time it was checked - this portion of the spectrum is not available for use by other upstream interfaces until the listed member channel switches back to its primary channel or another portion of the spectrum
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable spectrum-group map command:
13-447
Release 5.2.1
Spectrum Group : sg1 Start Frequency (Hz) stop Frequency (Hz) Map status 8400000 11600000 SPEC_RESERVED 11600000 14800000 SPEC_OCCUPIED 23400000 26600000 SPEC_HOP_AVAIL 36400000 39600000 SPEC_AGILE
Member channels Cable 9/0/U0 Cable 9/0/U1 ------Cable 9/0/U0
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable spectrum-group [<WORD>] map
Command Syntax
WORD the Spectrum Group name applied to the upstream port
13-448
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show cable spectrum-group modem-exclusion-list

The show cable spectrum-group modem-exclusion-list command displays the list of low SNR cable modems that are not allowed to be used for channel assessment. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable spectrum-group modem-exclusion-list command:
Spectrum Group: sg1 Interface: Cable 9/0/U0
Last built on: MON MAR 19 07:40:01 2007 SNR (Tenth DB) 147 156
Mac Address 0015.9a6a.88ee 0015.9a6a.8906
Ip Address 150.31.32.76 150.31.32.71
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage show cable spectrum-group [<WORD>] modem-exclusion-list Command Syntax
WORD
the Spectrum Group name applied to the upstream port
13-449
Release 5.2.1
show cable spectrum-group reference-modem

The show cable spectrum-group reference-modem command displays the active and rollback reference cable modems being used for channel assessment. The reference cable modem list is built every 5 minutes. The active reference cable modem is listed first and the rollback reference cable modem is listed second. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable spectrum-group reference-modem command:
Spectrum Group: sg1, reference-modem-exclusion = 2 Interface: Cable 9/0 U0 SNR Mac Address Ip Address (Tenth DB) Active Reference 0015.9a6a.8932 150.31.32.68 230 Cable Modem 0015.2f48.0f0a 150.31.32.67 235
Rollback Reference Cable Modem
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage show cable spectrum-group [<WORD>] reference-modem Command Syntax
WORD
13-450
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show cable spectrum-group snr-thresholds

The show cable spectrum-group snr-thresholds command displays the default and user configured SNR threshold configuration for each modulation type. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable spectrum-group snr-thresholds command:
Spectrum Group : sg1 Default Thresholds (dB) qpsk 14 8qam 17 16qam 20 32qam 23 64qam 27 128qam 30 256qam 33
Configured Thresholds (dB) qpsk 14 8qam 17 16qam 21 32qam 24 64qam 28 128qam 31 256qam 34
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable spectrum-group [<WORD>] snr-thresholds
Command Syntax
WORD
13-451
Release 5.2.1
show cable spectrum-group stats

The show cable spectrum-group stats command displays statistics per Spectrum Group for the ASPM feature. The command provides an overall picture on how the Spectrum Group is operating. The show cable spectrum-group stats command displays the following Spectrum Group information: Member channel Freq Hops the channels which belong to the Spectrum Group being displayed the number of times that the channel has changed (hopped) to spare frequencies due to noise - this total also includes the number of times the frequency has rolled back to its configured frequency the number of times that the channel has hopped to a spare modulation profile due to noise - this total also includes the number of times the modulation profile has rolled back to its configured modulation profile the percentage of time that the configured frequency was in use over the sampling period the percentage of time that each modulation profile was in use over the sampling period the start time of the statistical sampling period in mm/ dd-hh:ss format the stop time of the statistical sampling period in mm/ dd-hh:ss format - this is the current time
MProf Hops
%Cfg Freq % in Modulation modes
Start Time Stop Time
The following is typical screen output from the show cable spectrum-group stats command:
Member Freq Channel Hops 4/0/U0 0
MProf %Cfg Hops Freq 0 100
| % in Modulation modes | 256 128 64 32 16 8 qpsk 0 0 0 0 100 0 0
Start Stop Time Time 01/29-13:55 01/30-13:15
13-452
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable spectrum-group [<WORD>] stats
Command Syntax
WORD the Spectrum Group name applied to the upstream port
13-453
Release 5.2.1
show cable submgmt default

The show cable submgmt default command displays default filter control parameters for CPEs.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable submgmt default
13-454
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show cable sync-interval

The show cable sync-interval command shows the configured sync-interval value between CMTS transmission of successive SYNC messages. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable sync-interval command:
Cable sync-interval: 10
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable sync-interval
13-455
Release 5.2.1
show cable tcpudp-filter

The show cable tcpudp-filter command displays the TCP/UDP packet filter configuration.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable tcpudp-filter [group <1-32> [index <1-64>]]
Command Syntax
group 1-32 index 1-64 displays a specified TCP/UDP packet filter group displays the packet filter
13-456
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show cable ucc-stats

The show cable ucc-stats command displays DOCSIS Upstream Channel Change (UCC) statistics for a MAC domain. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable ucc-stats command:
CMTS Slot: 3 Number of UCC Number of UCC Number of UCC Number of UCC
MAC Domain: 1 Reqs : 0 Rsps : 0 : 0 Fails : 0
Interface index: 58654976
CMTS Slot: 10 MAC Domain: 0 Number of UCC Reqs : 0 Number of UCC Rsps : 0 Number of UCC : 0 Number of UCC Fails : 0 CMTS Slot: 10 MAC Domain: 1 Number of UCC Reqs : 0 Number of UCC Rsps : 0 Number of UCC : 0 Number of UCC Fails : 0 CMTS Slot: 14 MAC Domain: 0 Number of UCC Reqs : 0 Number of UCC Rsps : 0 Number of UCC : 0 Number of UCC Fails : 0
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable ucc-stats [<X/Y>]
13-457
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
13-458
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show cable ucd-interval

The show cable usd-interval command shows configured ucd-interval between transmission of successive UCD messages. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable ucd-interval command:
Cable ucd-interval: 1000
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable ucd-interval
13-459
Release 5.2.1
show cable ugs-stats

The show cable ugs-stats command is used to determine how many calls are active on a given BSR upstream port at a specific time. The following is an example of screen output from the show cable ugs-stats command:
US Interface slot/port: Current flow count: Flow count Max (last 5 min window): Flow count Min (last 5 min window): Flow count Ave (last 5 min window): Flow count Max (last 10 min window): Flow count Min (last 10 min window): Flow count Ave (last 10 min window): 4/1 3 <Valid <Valid <Valid <Valid <Valid <Valid
in in in in in in
5 minute(s)> 5 minute(s)> 5 minute(s)> 10 minute(s)> 10 minute(s)> 10 minute(s)>
The Current Flow Count output field is updated every time statistics are displayed. The Maximum, Minimum and Average UGS flow counts for voice calls are updated once every minute to display their status within the configured sample period. Once enough samples are collected, these statistics become valid. Note: The UGS Statistics window is refeshed every 60 seconds. The sampling time period displayed in the show cable ugs-stats command outputis specified with the ugs-stats-window command.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable ugs-stats {<0-15> <0-7>}
13-460
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
Command Syntax
0-15 0-7 CMTS module number the upstream port number
13-461
Release 5.2.1
show cable upstream

The show cable upstream command displays the following upstream cable information: ifIndex description centerFreq rng_back_st rng_back_en data_back_st data_back_en channelWidth powerLevel slotSize force-frag map-interval pre-equalization invited-range-interval range-forced-continue range-power-override concatenation physical-delay rate-limit interface index displays the user-defined description of the upstream port center frequency for cable modem use initial ranging backoff fixed start value initial ranging backoff fixed end value initial data backoff fixed start value initial data backoff fixed end value radio frequency channel width power level in units of whole dB to one decimal place port minislot size in number of time ticks forced fragmentation enabled configured map interval value pre-equalization adjustment enabled the number of invited range interval requests configured for this upstream channel range forced continue enabled specifies whether range power override is enabled (true) or disabled (false) specifies whether concatenation is on (true) or off (false). the upstream physical delay configuration upstream data transmission rate-limit
13-462
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
modulation-profile max-calls Spectrum Group modem ranging delay
physical layer profile characteristics the maximum number of voice calls configured for this upstream channel displays the associated Spectrum Group name the maximum ranging timing offset for a modem that is co-located with (next to) the CMTS, in microseconds.The range, 0 to 600 (with a default of 250), corresponds to ranging timing offsets in REFCLK units of 0 to 6144 (with a default of 2560).
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable upstream command:
13-463
Release 5.2.1
ifIndex: description: centerFreq: rng_back_st: rng_back_en: data_back_st: data_back_en: channelWidth: powerLevel: slotSize: force-frag: map-interval: pre-equalization: invited-range-interval: range-forced-continue: range-power-override: concatenation: physical-delay: rate-limit: modulation-profile: max-calls: Spectrum Group: modem ranging delay:
295173 22800000 0 4 2 8 3200000 0 (10th of dB) 4 0 4000 0 10000 0 false true Mode 0, Min 400, Max 1600 0 1 0 250 (usec)
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable upstream {<NUM> | <X/Y>}
13-464
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
Note: When using the show cable upstream command, both the NUM and X/Y arguments display for a BCM 3140-based DOCSIS 2.0 2:8 CMTS. | To determine which 2:8 CMTS module is installed in the BSR 64000, use the show chassis status command. For BCM 3138-based 2:8 CMTS modules, the command display reads 2:8 CMTS, and for the BCM 3140-based DOCSIS 2.0 2:8 CMTS, the display reads, 2:8 CMTS (DOCSIS 2.0)
Command Syntax
NUM X/Y
the upstream port number the upstream port and logical channel number (0-3)
13-465
Release 5.2.1
show cable upstream global-clock

The show cable upstream global-clock command displays the Global Clock Delay (GCD) setting for a specified upstream port and if the GCD setting is enabled for that upstream port. The following is typical screen output from the show cable upstream global-clock command:
Global Clock: 16 Global Clock Enabled: TRUE
Note: When using the show cable upstream global-clock command, both the NUM and X/Y arguments display for a BCM 3140-based DOCSIS 2.0 2:8 CMTS module. The show cable upstream global-clock command is only applicable for an upstream port (NUM) and is not applicable for an upstream port and logical channel (X/Y). The show cable upstream global-clock command will only be available through the NUM argument.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable upstream <NUM> global-clock
Command Syntax
13-466
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show controllers cable ds-mac

The show controllers cable ds-mac command displays the downstream MAC parameters (BCM3215 devices) of a TX32 slot. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show controllers cable ds-mac command:
*** ds-mac module 0 *** DS MAC part_id=3215, rev_id=C8F0001 Mac Address: 0200.0000.0100 ENP version: 000101 RX 2818004 337034878 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TX 8003011 1549103444 0 0 0 0 0 N/A N/A N/A 0 0 0 N/A
Total: FCS Error: Multicast: Broadcast: Control: Pause: Unknown OPCode: Alignment Error: Frame Len Error: Undersize: Oversize: Fragment: Dropped:
Pkts Bytes Pkts Pkts Pkts Pkts Pkts Pkts Pkts Pkts Pkts Pkts Pkts Pkts
Pkts Bytes Pkts Pkts Pkts Pkts Pkts
Pkts Pkts Pkts
13-467
Release 5.2.1
Ingress Control: Dropped: DOCSIS: Status: Chan S/P/C 0 0/0/0 1 0/0/1 2 0/0/2 3 0/0/3 4 0/1/0 5 0/1/1 6 0/1/2 7 0/1/3 Egress Chan 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Chans 0-3 4-7 Chans 0-3 4-7 DOCSIS: S/P/C 0/0/0 0/0/1 0/0/2 0/0/3 0/1/0 0/1/1 0/1/2 0/1/3
881359 Pkts 0 Pkts 75496164 Pkts 0x00000000 Hi Que (pkts) Med Que (pkts) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 75496164 Pkts MPT (bps) Hi Byte Cnt 37700000 0 37700000 0 37700000 0 37700000 0 37700000 0 37700000 0 37700000 0 37700000 0
Lo Que (pkts) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Lo Byte Cnt 2725219244 2729065023 0 0 0 0 0 0
Packet Cnt 52715990 52745617 0 0 0 0 0 0
PHS Auto-CRC Cnt 0 0 DOCSIS Pkts 75496128 36
PHS Mask-Field Cnt 0 0 Invalid DOCSIS Pkts 0 0
PHS Mask-Ones Cnt 0 0
13-468
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
Ring Manager Ring Base Address: 0x01F9D800 Control Status: 0x00000000 FIFO Status: 0x0001021E Chan Queue Status0 Status1 Status2 Status3 Status4 ------------------------------------------------------------------------0 LO 0x00000000 0x81A00000 0xEA12303E 0x87198719 0x00000007 0 MED 0x00000000 0x81A3E800 0xEA12303E 0x82548254 0x00000007 0 HI 0x00000000 0x81A7D000 0x6A12303E 0x87820782 0x00000007 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 7 7 7 LO MED HI LO MED HI LO MED HI LO MED HI LO MED HI LO MED HI LO MED HI 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x81ABB800 0x81AFA000 0x81B38800 0x81B77000 0x81BB5800 0x81BF4000 0x81C32800 0x81C71000 0x81CAF800 0x81CEE000 0x81D2C800 0x81D6B000 0x81DA9800 0x81DE8000 0x81E26800 0x81E65000 0x81EA3800 0x81EE2000 0x81F20800 0x81F5F000 0x81F9D800 0x6A12303E 0xEA12303E 0xEA12303E 0xEA12303E 0x6A12303E 0xEA12303E 0xEA12303E 0x6A12303E 0x6A12303E 0x6212303E 0x6212303E 0xEA12303E 0x6212303E 0x6212303E 0xEA12303E 0x6212303E 0x6212303E 0xEA12303E 0x6212303E 0x6212303E 0xEA12303E 0x86690669 0x82C282C2 0x83478347 0x86AE86AE 0x82810281 0x834A834A 0x817D817D 0x82530253 0x87850785 0x80000000 0x80000000 0x80048004 0x80000000 0x80000000 0x80048004 0x80000000 0x80000000 0x80048004 0x80000000 0x80000000 0x80048004 0x00000007 0x00000007 0x00000007 0x00000007 0x00000007 0x00000007 0x00000007 0x00000007 0x00000007 0x00000007 0x00000007 0x00000007 0x00000007 0x00000007 0x00000007 0x00000007 0x00000007 0x00000007 0x00000007 0x00000007 0x00000007
13-469
Release 5.2.1
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show controllers cable ds-mac <X> module <0-3>
Command Syntax
X 0-3 the TX32 slot number the BCM3215 chip number
13-470
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show controllers cable ds-phy

The show controllers cable ds-phy command displays the downstream PHY information for the 4QRM devices of a TX32 slot. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show controllers cable ds-phy command:
4QRM module 0 DS S/N= 01860807263705500013 Frequency 555000000 HZ, Power Level 520 10th dBmV, channel-mode 4 channel FPGA Interface version fe020006 RF Output Level: 52.10 Muting (0-Unmute): 0 Reference Input Signal Status: 0 Base plate Temerature in Celsius: 41 +5VDC supply input: 5.060 +3.3VDC supply input: 3.190 Loss of Sync: 0 Not Locked to the 27 MHz Ref: 0 Not Detected the 27 MHz Ref: 0 Loss of Data Clock: 0 Synchroization Fault: 0 Initialization Error: 0 RF level exceeds upper threshold: 0 RF level below lower threshold: 0 +3.3VDC above upper threshold: 0 +3.3VDC below lower threshold: 0 +5VDC above upper threshold: 0 +5VDC below lower threshold: 0 Plate temp above upper threshold: 0 Plate temp threshold: 0 Missing Digital Data Input Ch0 0 Missing Digital Data Input Ch1 0 Missing Digital Data Input Ch2 0 Missing Digital Data Input Ch3 0
13-471
Release 5.2.1
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show controllers cable ds-phy <X> module <0-7>
Command Syntax
X 0-7 the TX32 slot number the 4QRM device number - selects one of the eight 4QRM devices on the TX32
13-472
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show docsis-version
The show docsis-version command displays the DOCSIS version of a slot in the BSR 64000 chassis. Returned values are DOCSIS 1.X (DOCSIS 1.0 or DOCSIS 1.1) and DOCSIS 2.0.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show docsis-version <0-15>
Command Syntax
0-15 the BSR slot number
13-473
Release 5.2.1
show docstest
The show docstest command displays DOCSIS 2.0 testing information. A displayed value of "0" indicates that no test has been initiated.
Note: DOCSIS 2.0 test mode must be enabled with the docstest enable command before DOCSIS 2.0 testing information can be displayed.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

show docstest
13-474
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show interfaces cable

The show interfaces cable command displays the following cable interface information: cable port up/ administratively down up/administratively down hardware internet address MTU BW received broadcast cable downstream up/ administratively down packets output bytes discarded output errors cable upstream up/ administratively down received broadcasts cable modem active or taken down by administrator determines if software processes handling lineup/protocol down interface is operational or taken down by the administrator hardware type and address internet address then subnet mask interface maximum transmission unit (MTU) bandwidth (BW) in kilobits per second total number of broadcast or multicast packets that interface receives downstream interface location interface administrative state number of packets transmitted from the interface number of bytes transmitted from the interface number of packets discarded errors that prevented downstream transmission of packets from the interface upstream cable location upstream interface administrative status upstream interface broadcast packets received
13-475
Release 5.2.1
multicasts unicasts discards errors unknown protocol packets input corrected uncorrectable noise microreflections guaranteed-rate
upstream interface multicast packets received upstream interface unicast packets received upstream interface discarded packets total errors preventing upstream interface transmission through interface upstream interface packets received through interface upstream interface packets received through interface with no errors upstream interface packets that were uncorrected upstream interface packets that were corrected corrupted packet as a result of line noise corrupted packets as a result of microreflections number of bandwidth requests queued in the guarantee-rate queue from modems that have minimum upstream rates for their class of service number of bandwidth requests queued in the best-effort queue depth queue from modems without a reserved rate on the upstream interface modems, active or inactive, sharing upstream channel on this channel reserved for modems sharing an upstream channel interface
best-effort service
total modems current total
13-476
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
bandwidth
requiring the QoS for that modem. Each time the modem connects to an upstream channel, the value for the guaranteed upstream value increments by the QoS rate. number of SNMP packets sent by the other router modem larger than maximum packet size sent by the router modem name errors non-existent number, undefinable MIB number of set requests that detail an invalid value for a MIB object number of requests failed due to some other error, excluding a noSuchName error, badValue error, or any of the other specific errors number of responses number of traps sent
snmp out packets packets too big no such name errors bad values errors general errors
response trap
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show interfaces cable command:
13-477
Release 5.2.1
cable 0/0 is up, line protocol is up Hardware is Cable, Mac address is 00:30:b8:c1:d6:00 snmpIndex=0x7f0000(8323072) MTU 1500 bytes Last clearing of "show interface " counters 01:11:24 5 minute Input rate 815 bytes/sec, 5 packets/sec 5 minute Output rate 140564 bytes/sec, 10 packets/sec 24508 packets input, 4024761 bytes Received 269 broadcasts+multicasts 0 input errors, 44549 packets output, 574571990 bytes 0 output errors Length of output packet queue 0 downstream port 0, snmpIndex=0x800000(8388608) upstream port 0, snmpIndex=0x810000(8454144) upstream port 1, snmpIndex=0x810001(8454145) upstream port 2, snmpIndex=0x810002(8454146) upstream port 3, snmpIndex=0x810003(8454147) upstream port 4, snmpIndex=0x810004(8454148) upstream port 5, snmpIndex=0x810005(8454149) upstream port 6, snmpIndex=0x810006(8454150) upstream port 7, snmpIndex=0x810007(8454151) downstream port 1, snmpIndex=0x800010(8388624) downstream slot 12, port/chan 0/0, snmpIndex=0xc800000(209715200) downstream slot 12, port/chan 0/1, snmpIndex=0xc800001(209715201)
Group Access
All
Command Mode
13-478
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
Command Line Usage

show interfaces cable <X/Y> [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show interfaces cable <X/Y> [ | {count | count-only}]]
13-479
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
13-480
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show interfaces cable bandwidth voice

The show interface cable bandwidth voice command displays voice bandwidth statistics for a specified interface. The following is typical output from the show interface cable bandwidth voice command:
Cable Interface Voice Bandwidth Statistics: Channel Intf Total Peak Cable DS/US Alloc #Calls ---------------------------9/0 9D0C0 0.36% 0 9/0 U0C0 0.00% 0 9/0 U1C0 0.73% 0 9/0 U2C0 0.00% 0 9/0 U3C0 0.00% 0 Normal Calls Allow Curr Curr BW Alloc #Calls --------------------25% 0.00% 0 30% 0.00% 0 30% 0.00% 0 30% 0.00% 0 30% 0.00% 0 Emergency Calls Allow Curr Curr BW Alloc #Calls --------------------1% 0.00% 0 1% 0.00% 0 1% 0.00% 0 1% 0.00% 0 1% 0.00% 0
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show interface cable <X/Y> bandwidth voice [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show interface cable <X/Y> bandwidth voice [ | {count | count-only}]]
13-481
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
13-482
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show interfaces cable configuration

The show interfaces cable configuration command displays cable interface configuration information. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show interfaces cable configuration command:
Invited Ranging Attempts: --US PORT 0-Max Tx Timing Offset: Forced Continue Ranging: Ranging Interval: Power Offset Threshold: Power Desired: --CHAN 0-Channel Type: Rx Pwr Lvl Config: Max SM Power Adj: AdjCtrlFlag: --US PORT 1-Max Tx Timing Offset: Forced Continue Ranging: Ranging Interval: Power Offset Threshold: Power Desired: --CHAN 0-Channel Type: Rx Pwr Lvl Config: Max SM Power Adj: AdjCtrlFlag:
16 0 0 10000(ms) 24 1500(linear) tdma 0(10th of dB) 8 8 1659 0 10000(ms) 24 1500(linear) tdma 0(10th of dB) 8 8
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show interfaces cable <X/Y> configuration [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show interfaces cable <X/Y> configuration [ | {count | count-only}]
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
13-484
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show interfaces cable downstream

The show interfaces cable downstream command displays the following downstream cable information: cable upstream up/ administratively down packets output bytes discarded total active modems Spectrum Group downstream cable location downstream interface administrative status number of packets transmitted from the interface number of bytes transmitted from the interface number of packets discarded total active cable modems on this downstream channel the associated upstream Spectrum Group names
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show interfaces cable downstream command:
Cable 9/0: Downstream 0 is up 48326 packet output, 3734348280 bytes, 0 discarded Avg downstream channel utilization : 0 1 total active modems Spectrum Group: N/A LB Group: N/A MD-DS-SG-ID: None Fiber-Node: FN-1
Group Access
All
13-485
Release 5.2.1
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show interfaces cable <X/Y> downstream [<NUM>] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show interfaces cable <X/Y> downstream [<NUM>] [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
X/Y NUM the slot and MAC Domain number of the CMTS module
is a list of local and/or remote downstream channels separated by for a description of the NUM spaces local channels are represented as syntax for downstream a single digit channel number channels, refer to the figure below this table remote channels are in the form slot/downstream port number/ downstream channel number - a remote TX32 downstream channel must be bound before it can be bonded | begin exclude include WORD turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string
13-486
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
count count-only
4/[0-7]/[0-3] 9/[0-1] 11/[0-1]
13-487
Release 5.2.1
show interfaces cable intercept

Use the show interfaces cable intercept command to view statistical information for each intercepted Customer Premises Equipment (CPE) MAC address. Note: The show interfaces cable intercept command is only available to a user logged in as securityuser - refer to Configuring Cable Intercepts in the BSR 64000 CMTS Configuration and Management Guide. The show interfaces cable intercept command displays the following CPE information: MAC Address Destination IP Address Destination UDP Port Packets MAC (hardware) address of a CPE, such as a customers PC or VoIP phone. IP address of the data collection server. UDP Port number that is used exclusively by the data collection server. The total number of packets that have been intercepted from each specified CPE on this CMTS interface. The total number of bytes that have been intercepted from each specified CPE on this CMTS interface.
Bytes
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show interfaces cable intercept command:
Type: R - Layer 3 Intercept, B - Layer 2 (Bridged) Intercept Destination Destination MAC Address IP Address UDP Port Type Packets 00c0.4f5e.e476 150.31.98.100 10000 R 0
Bytes 0
Group Access
MSO
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
Command Mode
All modes except User EXEC mode.
Command Line Usage

show interfaces cable <X/Y> intercept
Command Syntax
13-489
Release 5.2.1
show interfaces cable service-class

The show interfaces cable service-class command displays interface level service class information for all downstream and upstream service classes, downstream service classes, or upstream service classes. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show interfaces cable service-class command:
Service Level Interface database | non-bonded flow counts | Dir Ch ClassName Pri Thr CAP MAB FreeBW | Defer Succe Restr HighPri | ========================================================================== Dn 0 DefBEDown 1 0 0 10 100% 0 0 0 0 Dn 0 DefRRDown 1 0 5 10 96% 0 0 0 0 Dn 0 DefEMDown 1 0 100 1 100% 0 0 0 0 Dn 0 DefMCDown 1 0 100 1 100% 0 0 0 0 Dn 0 DefVoiceD 5 0 100 25 100% 0 0 0 0 Dn 0 mysc 1 0 5 20 100% 0 0 0 0 Dn 0 Multicast 20 0 100 30 100% 0 0 0 0 Dn 0 myclass2 1 0 0 1 100% 0 0 0 0 Dn 0 myclass3 1 0 0 1 100% 0 0 0 0 -------------------------------------------------------------------------Up 0 DefBEUp 1 0 0 10 100% 0 0 0 0 Up 0 DefRRUp 1 0 50 25 100% 0 0 0 0 Up 0 DefUGS 1 0 100 25 100% 0 0 0 0 Up 0 DefUGSAD 1 0 80 5 100% 0 0 0 0 Up 0 DefRTPS 1 0 5 5 100% 0 0 0 0 Up 0 DefNRTPS 1 0 5 5 100% 0 0 0 0 Up 0 DefEMUp 1 0 100 1 100% 0 0 0 0
Group Access
All
Command Mode
13-490
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
Command Line Usage

show interfaces cable <X/Y> service-class [all | downstream <NUM> | upstream <NUM>] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show interfaces cable <X/Y> service-class [all | downstream | upstream] [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
X/Y all the slot and MAC Domain number of the CMTS module display both upstream and downstream service class information
NUM
is a list of local and/or remote downstream channels separated by for a description of the NUM spaces local channels are represented as syntax for downstream a single digit channel number channels, refer to the figure below this table remote channels are in the form slot/downstream port number/ downstream channel number - a remote TX32 downstream channel must be bound before it can be bonded upstream NUM | begin exclude include display upstream service class information only turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string
13-491
Release 5.2.1
4/[0-7]/[0-3] 9/[0-1] 11/[0-1]
13-492
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show interfaces cable stats

The show interfaces cable stats command displays upstream statistical information for all ports. The following is typical screen output from the show interfaces cable stats command:
Channel 0/0 1/0 2/0 3/0 8/0
Reg 0 1 0 0 0
Rng 0 0 0 0 0
Abort 0 0 0 0 0
Denied 0 0 0 0 0
IP Cmp 0 0 0 0 0
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show interfaces cable <X/Y> stats [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show interfaces cable <X/Y> stats [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
X/Y | begin exclude the slot and MAC Domain number of the CMTS module turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string
13-493
Release 5.2.1
13-494
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show interfaces cable upstream

The show interfaces cable upstream command displays the following upstream cable interface information: Cable Upstream up/ administratively down Received broadcasts Received multicasts Received unicasts discarded errors unknown protocol Avg upstream channel utilization packets input upstream cable location upstream interface administrative status upstream interface broadcast packets received upstream interface multicast packets received upstream interface unicast packets received upstream interface discarded packets total errors preventing upstream transmission of packets packets received that were generated using a protocol unknown to the BSR 64000 the average percentage of upstream channel utilization total packets received through the upstream interface with no errors
Total Modems On This active or inactive cable modems on this Upstream Channel upstream channel Spectrum Group the associated Spectrum Group name
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show interfaces cable upstream command:
13-495
Release 5.2.1
Cable 9/0: Upstream 0 is up Received 0 broadcasts, 0 multicasts, 13 unicasts 0 discarded, 0 errors, 0 unknown protocol Avg upstream channel utilization : 0 13 packets input Total Modems On This Upstream Channel: 0 Spectrum Group: LB Group: N/A
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show interfaces cable upstream signal-quality command:
Upstream 3 channel 0 ifIndex 46989452 includesContention 0 unerroreds 0 correctables 0 uncorrectables 0 signalToNoise 0 microReflections 0 equalData FF.FA.00.01.00.09.00.0B
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show interfaces cable upstream spectrum command:
13-496
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
Frequency (Hz) 5000000 5200000 5400000 5600000 5800000 6000000 6200000 6400000 6600000 6800000 7000000 7200000 7400000 7600000 7800000 8000000 8200000 8400000 8600000 8800000 9000000 9200000
Voltage (microvolt) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Power (dBmV) -60.0 -60.0 -60.0 -60.0 -60.0 -60.0 -60.0 -60.0 -60.0 -60.0 -60.0 -60.0 -60.0 -60.0 -60.0 -60.0 -60.0 -60.0 -60.0 -60.0 -60.0 -60.0
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show interfaces cable upstream stats command:
Channel 0 1 2 3
Reg 0 5 0 0
Rng 0 0 0 0
Abort 0 0 0 0
Denied 0 0 0 0
IP Cmp 0 0 0 0
Group Access
All
13-497
Release 5.2.1
Command Mode
All modes except User EXEC Note: When using the show cable interfaces upstream command, only the NUM option displays for BCM 3138-based 2:8 CMTS modules. Both the NUM and X/Y arguments display for a BCM 3140-based DOCSIS 2.0 2:8 CMTS. The show cable interfaces upstream signal-quality, show cable interfaces upstream spectrum, and show cable interfaces upstream stats commands are applicable for an upstream port and will be available through the NUM argument. The show cable interfaces upstream signal-quality and show cable interfaces upstream stats commands are also applicable for an upstream port and logical channel and will be available through the X/Y argument. To determine which 2:8 CMTS module is installed in the BSR 64000, use the show chassis status command. For BCM 3138-based 2:8 CMTS modules, the command display reads 2:8 CMTS, and for the BCM 3140-based DOCSIS 2.0 2:8 CMTS, the display reads, 2:8 CMTS (DOCSIS 2.0)
Command Line Usage

show interfaces cable <X/Y> upstream {<NUM> | <X/Y>} [signal-quality | spectrum <5000000-42000000> <5000000-42000000>| stats] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show interfaces cable <X/Y> upstream {<NUM> | <X/Y>} [signal-quality | spectrum <5000000-42000000> <5000000-42000000>| stats] [ | {count | count-only}]
13-498
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
Command Syntax
X/Y NUM X/Y signal-quality spectrum 5000000-42000000 5000000-42000000 stats | begin exclude include WORD count count-only the slot and MAC Domain number of the CMTS module the upstream port number the upstream port and logical channel number (0-3) display signal-quality information view the noise power level for the whole spectrum start frequency in Hz end frequency in Hz display upstream statistical information turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
13-499
Release 5.2.1
show interfaces cable upstream channel-agility-stats

The show interfaces cable upstream channel-agility-stats command displays ASPM Channel Statistics. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show interfaces cable upstream channel-agility-stats command:
Spectrum Group: Channel: State: Number of State Transitions: Last State Transitions: Elapsed time in Current state
sg1 Cable 9/0 U0 SPM_CHAN_NORMAL_ST 6 THU MAR 08 01:23:01 2007 02:06:25.0
Note: The displayed "Elapsed time in Current state" value is dependant on the amount of elapsed time. In the example above, the time is displayed in Hours:Minutes:Seconds.10ths of a Second. If the BSR has been running for a longer period of time, the display could be similar to the following: 1w:10d:6h which would indicate Weeks:Days:Hours.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage show interfaces cable <X/Y> upstream <NUM> channel-agility-stats
13-500
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
Note: When using the show cable interfaces upstream channel-agility-stats command, only the NUM argument displays for a BCM 3138-based 2:8 CMTS module (For example: show cable interfaces upstream <NUM> channel-agility-stats). Both the NUM and X/Y arguments display for a BCM 3140-based DOCSIS 2.0 2:8 CMTS (For example: show cable interfaces upstream {<NUM> | <X/Y>} channel-agility-stats). Only the NUM argument is applicable to this command.
Command Syntax
X/Y NUM the slot and MAC Domain number of the 2:8 CMTS module: the upstream port number
13-501
Release 5.2.1
show running-config cable downstream port

The show running-config cable downstream port command displays the downstream port configuration for a TX32 RF port. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show running-config cable downstream port command:
cable downstream port 10/0 cable downstream interleave-depth 16 cable downstream 0 channel-id 2 no cable downstream 0 shutdown cable downstream 1 shutdown cable downstream 2 shutdown cable downstream 3 shutdown no cable downstream shutdown
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show running-config cable downstream port <X/Y > [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show running-config cable downstream port <X/Y> [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
X/Y | begin the slot and port number of the TX32 module turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string
13-502
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
13-503
Release 5.2.1
show stats cmts

The show stats cmts command displays the following upstream and downstream statistical information: Upstream Statistics cable upstream up/ administratively down Received broadcasts Received multicasts Received unicasts discarded errors unknown protocol upstream cable location upstream interface administrative status upstream interface broadcast packets received upstream interface multicast packets received upstream interface unicast packets received upstream interface discarded packets total errors preventing upstream transmission of packets packets received that were generated using a protocol unknown to the BSR 64000
Total Modems On This total active or inactive cable modems on this Upstream Channel upstream channel Spectrum Group the associated Spectrum Group name
Downstream Statistics cable downstream up/ administratively down packets output bytes downstream cable location downstream interface administrative status number of packets transmitted from the interface number of bytes transmitted from the interface
13-504
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
discarded total active modems Spectrum Group
number of packets discarded total active cable modems on this downstream channel the associated upstream Spectrum Group names
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show stats cmts command:
CMTS Statistics for slot 4: Downstream Statistics: Cable 4/0: Downstream 0 is up 16770244 packet output, 866426355 bytes, 0 discarded Avg downstream channel utilization : 0 2 total active modems Spectrum Group: N/A Group Id: 0
Upstream Statistics: Cable 4/0: Upstream 0/0 is up Received 0 broadcasts, 0 multicasts, 0 unicasts 0 discarded, 0 errors, 0 unknown protocol Avg upstream channel utilization : 0 0 packets input Total Modems On This Upstream Channel: 0 Spectrum Group: Group Id: 0
Group Access
All
13-505
Release 5.2.1
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show stats <NUM> cmts [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show stats <NUM> cmts [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
NUM | begin exclude include WORD count count-only the CMTS slot number turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
13-506
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
show stats summary error

The show stats summary error command displays the following statistical information on FEC (forward error correction) errors: MAC Address I/F SID CorrFec Count CorrFec Ratio UnCorrFec Count UnCorrFec Ratio MAC Address of the cable modem interface on which the cable modem has an active connection Service ID number the number of correctable forward error correction (FEC) errors correctable forward error correction ratio the number of uncorrectable forward error correction (FEC) errors correctable forward error correction ratio
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show stats summary error command:
13-507
Release 5.2.1
MAC Address 000b.0643.36c8 000b.0643.3716 000b.0643.375a 000b.0643.3766 000b.0643.3ac6 000b.0643.3b60 000b.0643.3b72 000b.0643.3b78 000b.0643.3b84 000b.0643.3b90 000b.0643.3b9a 000b.0643.3bb2 000b.063b.b320 000b.0643.33fc 000b.0643.361a 000b.0643.3718 000b.0643.3bb0 0020.4027.a15c 0020.409a.24f0 0020.409a.760c
I/F 4/0/U2 4/0/U2 4/0/U3 4/0/U3 4/0/U3 4/0/U0 4/0/U2 4/0/U1 4/0/U1 4/0/U1 4/0/U0 4/0/U0 4/1/U7 4/1/U4 4/1/U5 4/1/U4 4/1/U5 4/1/U7 4/1/U6 4/1/U6
SID 5 8 20 6 11 12 10 7 15 13 14 9 7 2 19 5 4 6 3 17
CorrFec Count 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
CorrFec UnCorrFec Ratio Count 0.00000000 0 0.00000000 6330272 0.00000000 0 0.00000000 0 0.00000000 0 0.00000000 0 0.00000000 6330272 0.00000000 0 0.00000000 0 0.00000000 0 0.00000000 0 0.00000000 0 0.00000000 0 0.00000000 0 0.00000000 0 0.00000000 0 0.00000000 0 0.00000000 0 0.00000000 0 0.00000000 0
UnCorrFec Ratio 0.00000000 0.00000000 0.00000000 0.00000000 0.00000000 0.00000000 0.00000000 0.00000000 0.00000000 0.00000000 0.00000000 0.00000000 0.00000000 0.00000000 0.00000000 0.00000000 0.00000000 0.00000000 0.00000000 0.00000000
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

show stats summary error [sid <1-2049> | slot <NUM>]
Command Syntax
sid 1-2049 slot NUM the Service ID number the BSR slot number
13-508
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
snr display
The snr display command displays SNR measurement data to a console or telnet session. SNR measurement data is retrieved either from an operational CMTS module or a file system.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

snr display {<NUM>{<NUM>}} | flash:<filename> <WORD> | loop-data {<NUM>{<NUM>}} | nvram:<filename> <WORD>}
Command Syntax
NUM NUM flash:<filename> loop-data nvram:<filename> WORD operational 2:8 CMTS slot number valid upstream port number retrieve the SNR measurement data from the Flash file system displays SNR loop measurement data retrieve the SNR measurement data from the NVRAM file system SNR measurement data filename - limit of 20 characters excluding the ".snr" filename extension
13-509
Release 5.2.1
snr loop
The snr loop command allows an operator to perform SNR measurements for a specified number of times on one particular frequency.
Note: Equalization settings on the snr loop command is for POST equalization.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

snr loop {<NUM>} {<NUM>}{<NUM>}{<NUM>}{<frequency>} {1600000 | 200000 | 3200000 | 400000 | 6400000 | 800000} [<mac> | equalization {off | on} | ingress-cancel {off | on} | modulation-type {16qam | qpsk}]
Command Syntax
NUM NUM NUM NUM frequency the slot number of an operational 2:8 CMTS module (0-5, 9-15) valid upstream port number (0-7) the number SNR measurement repetitions (1-100) use a ranging test pattern for SNR measurement the particular frequency to perform SNR measurements on
13-510
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
1600000 200000 3200000 400000 6400000 800000 mac
channel width 1600 kHz channel width 200 kHz channel width 3200 kHz channel width 400 kHz channel width 6400 kHz channel width 800 kHz the MAC address, in the form of xxxx.xxxx.xxxx, of a device to perform SNR measurements on off - perform SNR measurements without equalization on - perform SNR measurements with equalization off - perform SNR measurements without ingress cancellation on - perform SNR measurements with ingress cancellation 16qam - perform SNR measurements for 16qam mode qpsk - perform SNR measurements for QPSK mode
equalization
ingress-cancel
modulation-type
13-511
Release 5.2.1
snr setup
The snr setup command is used to configure SNR measurement on the BCM3138/ BCM3140 chip set.
Note: Equalization settings on the snr setup command is for POST equalization.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

snr setup {<NUM>{<NUM>}} {<5000000-42000000> | <5000000-42000000> | <5000000-65000000>} {<5000000-65000000> | <1000000-55000000> | <1000000-55000000>} {1600000 | 200000 | 3200000 | 400000 | 6400000 | 800000} [equalization {off | on}] Note: Depending on the configuration of the installed 2:8 CMTS Resource Module, the start and end frequencies will reflect the North American DOCSIS, EURODOCSIS, or J-DOCSIS standards
Command Syntax
NUM NUM 5000000-42000000 5000000-42000000 operational 2:8 CMTS slot number valid upstream port number is the North America standard start frequency in Hz is the North America standard end frequency in Hz.
13-512
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
5000000-65000000 5000000-65000000 1000000-55000000 1000000-55000000 1600000 200000 3200000 400000 6400000 800000 equalization
is the EURODOCSIS standard start frequency in Hz is the EURODOCSIS standard start frequency in Hz is the J-DOCSIS standard start frequency in Hz is the J-DOCSIS standard end frequency in Hz. channel width 1600 kHz channel width 200 kHz channel width 3200 kHz channel width 400 kHz channel width 6400 kHz channel width 800 kHz off - evaluate the SNR without equalization on - evaluate the SNR with equalization
13-513
Release 5.2.1
snr setup-get
The snr setup-get command dispalys the current SNR measurement feature configuration.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

snr setup-get [<NUM> [<NUM>]]
Command Syntax
NUM NUM operational 2:8 CMTS slot number valid upstream port number
13-514
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
snr setup-spare-mod-profile
The snr setup-spare-mod-profile command determines the modulation profile to be used by RF Sentry during the snr start command.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

snr setup-spare-mod-profile <NUM> <1-600>
Command Syntax
NUM 1-600
the 2:8 CMTS module slot number the secondary modulation profile number
Note: Modulation profiles 1-4, 101-116, 201-205, and 301-310 are pre-configured modulation profiles. Motorola recommends that user-created modulation profiles use the numbering range of 401-600 to ensure better future portability.
13-515
Release 5.2.1
snr start
The snr start command initiates SNR measurement via the RF Sentry
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

snr start {<NUM>{<NUM>}} [<mac>]
Command Syntax
NUM NUM mac operational 2:8 CMTS slot number valid upstream port number MAC address of the reference modem in the form of xxxx.xxxx.xxxx
13-516
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
snr store
The snr store command saves the latest SNR measurement data for a 2x8 CMTS module to a file system. The user specifies a particular slot and port, the file system (NVRAM or Flash), and a file name without any extension to be used to store the SNR measurement data. An extension of ".snr" will be automatically added to the file name.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

snr store {<NUM>{<NUM>}} {flash:<filename> <WORD> | nvram:<filename> <WORD>}
Command Syntax
NUM NUM flash:<filename> nvram:<filename> WORD operational 2:8 CMTS slot number valid upstream port number store the SNR measurement data from the Flash file system store the SNR measurement data from the NVRAM file system SNR measurement data filename - limit of 20 characters excluding the ".snr" filename extension
13-517
Release 5.2.1
spectrum-copy
The spectrum-copy command allows an operator to copy Spectrum Group configurations from one Spectrum Group to another and assign the CMTS slot and port numbers to the Spectrum Group at the time of the copy.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

spectrum-copy <WORD> <WORD> [slot <NUM> ] upstream <NUM> ]]
Command Syntax
WORD WORD slot NUM upstream NUM the source Spectrum Group name the destination Spectrum Group name specify a CMTS slot number specify an upstream port number
13-518
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
spreader on
The spreader on command enables or disables the spreader for this S-SDMA channel.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

spreader on no spreader on
13-519
Release 5.2.1
tcm-encoding on
The tcm encoding on command enables trellis-coded modulation (TCM) for this S-CDMA channel. The trellis-coded modulation technique partitions the constellation into subsets called cosets so as to maximize the minimum distance between pairs of points in each coset. The no tcm encoding on command disables trellis-coded modulation (TCM) for this S-CDMA channel.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

tcm encoding on no tcm encoding on
13-520
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
time band
The time band command is used to schedule when a spectrum group band is available. The spectrum group band can be made available on either a daily or weekly schedule.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

time {<day> | <hh:mm:ss>} band <5000000-42000000> <5000000-42000000> no time {<day> | <hh:mm:ss>} band <5000000-42000000> <5000000-42000000>
Command Syntax
day hh:mm:ss 5000000-42000000 5000000-42000000 the three letter abbreviation for day of the week the time during the day when the band becomes available the start upstream frequency in Hertz the end upstream frequency in Hertz
13-521
Release 5.2.1
time delete
The time delete command can be used to schedule the time when the spectrum group band is removed on a daily or weekly basis.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

time {<day> <hh:mm:ss>} delete <5000000-42000000> <5000000-42000000> no time {<day> <hh:mm:ss>} delete <5000000-42000000> <5000000-42000000>
Command Syntax
day hh:mm:ss 5000000-42000000 5000000-42000000 the three letter abbreviation for day of the week the time during the day when the band is removed the start upstream frequency in Hertz the end upstream frequency in Hertz
13-522
Release 5.2.1
CMTS Commands
vendor-class-identifier
The vendor-class-identifier command configures a vendor class identifier (VCI) string and maps it to a vendor class identifier group. Any number of VCI strings can be bounded to a single VCI group. The no vendor-class-identifier command removes a VCI string.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

vendor-class-identifier <1-32> <WORD> no vendor-class-identifier <1-32> <WORD>
Command Syntax
1-32 WORD the vendor class identifier group number the vendor class identifier string
13-523
14
QoS Commands
Introduction
Quality of Service (QoS) addresses consistent, predictable delivery of data to satisfy customer application requirements during periods of congestion. QoS commands let you define a level of system performance consistent with negotiated service level agreements (SLAs).
QoS Command Descriptions

This section contains an alphabetized list and descriptions of the QoS commands supported by the BSR.
14-1
Release 5.2.1
qos bw default
The qos bw default command sets all the queues in an interface to a specific default bandwidth.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet interfaces only)
Command Line Usage

qos bw default
Command Default
the default bandwidth is 25%
14-2
Release 5.2.1
QoS Commands
qos queue bw
The qos queue bw command sets the percentage of bandwidth for the specified queue of an interface. Use the qos queue bw command to manage traffic such that higher bandwidth is appropriated to the high priority traffic. The remaining percentage bandwidth is shared among the other queues, which have not been set by this command. If all of the queues have been set and if the total of all bandwidth allocated does not match 100%, an error message is displayed.
Note: Each queue has to carry a minimum of 1% and a maximum of 93%, in order for all 8 queue to acheive the 100% bandwidth goal.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet interfaces only)
Command Line Usage

qos queue <0-7> bw <0-100> no qos queue <0-7> bw <0-100>
Command Syntax
0-7 0-100 the queue number belonging to a physical interface the percentage of total bandwidth allocated to the queue
14-3
Release 5.2.1
qos queue dot1p

The qos queue dot1p command is used to configure the 802.1p class of service.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

qos queue <0-7> dot1p <0-7> no qos queue <0-7> dot1p <0-7>
Command Syntax
0-7 0-7
qos queue number 802.1p CoS priority setting
14-4
Release 5.2.1
QoS Commands
show qos queue config

The show qos queue config command displays QoS queue configuration status. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show qos queue config command:
ethernet 15/0: queue 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ethernet 15/1: queue 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
bandwidth (%) quantum (in bytes) 12 2048 12 2048 12 2048 12 2048 12 2048 12 2048 12 2048 12 2048 bandwidth (%) quantum (in bytes) 12 2048 12 2048 12 2048 12 2048 12 2048 12 2048 12 2048 12 2048
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show qos queue config [ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y> | pos <X/Y>]
14-5
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
ethernet X/Y gigaether X/Y pos X/Y Ethernet interface slot and port number Gigabit Ethernet interface slot and port number POS interface slot and port number
14-6
15
POS Commands
Introduction
The Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) standard provides for data transmission over fiber optic cable and high-bandwidth utilization and efficiency over Internet links. The SONET standard defines industry interface standards at the physical layer of the OSI seven-layer model. This standard defines a hierarchy of interface rates that allow data streams at different rates to be multiplexed. SONET establishes Optical Carrier (OC) levels from 51.8 Mbps to 2.48 Gbps. Prior rate standards used by different countries specified rates that were not compatible for multiplexing. Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH), the international equivalent of SONET, defines a standard rate of transmission at 155.52 Mbps. With the implementation of SONET/SDH, communication carriers throughout the world can interconnect existing digital carrier and fiber optic systems. The APS feature provides redundancy for BSR 64000 POS modules and allows for a switchover of POS circuits in the event of a circuit failure. There are two types of redundancy supported using APS on a POS module:
Port Level Redundancy - a port on a POS module is backed by another port on the same module Module Level Redundancy - all of the ports on a POS module are backed by all of the ports on another POS module
15-1
Release 5.2.1
For both of these redundancy types, the active ports and the redundant ports have to be the same speed and have APS enabled. Switchover to a different POS circuit is dynamic and is not saved in the configuration. If the BSR 64000 reboots because of a power failure or some other reason after a switchover has occurred, the initial startup configuration will be re-applied after the BSR is back online.
POS Command Descriptions

This section contains an alphabetized list and descriptions of the POS commands supported by the BSR.
15-2
Release 5.2.1
POS Commands
aps force
The aps force command manually switches the specified circuit to a protect (working) port. The no aps force command cancels the switch. Use the aps force configuration command unless a request of equal or higher priority is in effect. Use the aps force command to manually switch the port to the protect port when you are not using the aps revert command. Note: The aps force command has a higher priority than any of the signal failures or the aps manual command. The aps force command is configured on protect or working ports. The aps force command takes effect immediately and is not saved with the configuration.
Group Access
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (POS interface) and Slot Configuration
Command Line Usage

aps force <0-15> no aps force <0-15>
Command Syntax
0-15 the board/port number
15-3
Release 5.2.1
aps group
The aps group command assigns a specific board to a board group.The no aps group command removes a specific board from a board group. Four APS board groups are available (0-3).
Note: A protection board and a working board must be assigned to a group in order for APS to work correctly.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

aps group <0-3> no aps group <0-3>
Command Syntax
0-3 the APS group number
15-4
Release 5.2.1
POS Commands
aps lockout
The aps lockout command prevents a working board from switching to a protection board. The no aps lockout command removes the lockout.
Note: The aps lockout command is configured only on protection boards.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

aps lockout no aps lockout
15-5
Release 5.2.1
aps manual
The aps manual command manually switches all ports from the specified working board to a protection board. The no aps manual command cancels this switch. Use the aps manual command to manually switch the working board to the protection board when you are not using the aps revert command. The aps manual command reverts all ports back to the working board before the wait to restore (WTR) time has expired. The WTR time period is set by the aps revert command. Note: The aps manual command is a lower priority than any of the signal failures or the aps force command. The aps manual command is configured on protection or working boards. The aps manual command takes effect immediately and is not saved with the configuration.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

aps manual <0-15> no aps manual <0-15>
Command Syntax
0-15 the APS board/port number
15-6
Release 5.2.1
POS Commands
aps protect
The aps protect command configures a port as a protection port. The no aps protect command disables the protection.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

aps protect no aps protect
15-7
Release 5.2.1
aps revert
The aps revert command enables and sets the time period for automatic switchover from the protect port to the working port after the working port becomes available. If revertive mode is selected, the BSR will wait a specified amount of time before switching back from a protection port to a working port. The no aps revert command disables automatic switchover.
Note: The aps revert command is configured only on protection ports.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

aps revert <1-255> <0-3> no aps revert <1-255> <0-3>
Command Syntax
1-255 the number of minutes until the protection port is switched back to the working port after the working port becomes available (wait to restore) the number of the port group that is to be configured for revertive switching (refer to the aps group command)
0-3
15-8
Release 5.2.1
POS Commands
aps signal-degrade ber threshold

The aps signal-degrade ber threshold command sets the BER threshold for b2 signal degrade alarms. The no aps signal-degrade ber threshold command removes the BER threshold.
Group Access
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (POS interface)
Command Line Usage

aps signal-degrade ber threshold <5-9> no aps signal-degrade ber threshold <5-9>
Command Syntax
5-9 10E-5 to 10E-9 rate
15-9
Release 5.2.1
aps signal-fail ber threshold

The aps signal-fail ber threshold command sets the BER threshold for b2 signal failure alarms. The no aps signal-fail ber threshold command removes the BER threshold.
Group Access
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (POS interface)
Command Line Usage

aps signal-fail ber threshold <3-5> no aps signal-fail ber threshold <3-5>
Command Syntax
3-5 10E-3 to 10E-5 rate
15-10
Release 5.2.1
POS Commands
aps unidirectional
The aps unidirectional command initially configures a port for the type of Automatic Protection Switching that will be used, The BSR64000 supports linear 1+1 unidirectional or bi-directional operation, and can be configured for either revertive or non-revertive switching. Use the aps unidirectional configuration command to configure APS for unidirectional operation. Use the no aps unidirectional command to configure APS for bi-directional operation.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

aps unidirectional <0-3> no aps unidirectional <0-3>
Command Syntax
0-3 the APS group number
15-11
Release 5.2.1
aps working
The aps working command configures a board or port as working. The no aps working command disables a working board or port.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

aps working <1-15> no aps working <1-15>
Command Syntax
1-15 the APS switching priority number
15-12
Release 5.2.1
POS Commands
crc
The crc command sets the mode of the cyclic redundancy check (CRC). Use the crc command supports four checksum formats. The checksum formats are: 16 bits, 16 bits big-endian, 32 bits, and 32 bits big-endian. The checksum format must be synchronized on both ends of a PPP link for the link to come up.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

crc {16 | 32} [big-endian]
Command Syntax
16 32 big-endian 16 bits 32 bits use big-endian byte ordering
Command Default
16
15-13
Release 5.2.1
interface pos
The interface pos command accesses Interface Configuration mode for a POS interface.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

interface pos <X/Y>
Command Syntax
X Y POS module slot in the BSR chassis POS port number on the POS module
15-14
Release 5.2.1
POS Commands
ip address
The ip address command assigns an IP address and subnet mask for the POS interface.
Note: An IP address is necessary for the PPP link to be established.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip address {<A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D>} [secondary] no ip address {<A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D>} [secondary]
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D A.B.C.D secondary IP address to assign subnet address to assign secondary IP address; secondary subnet-mask
15-15
Release 5.2.1
peer default ip address

The peer default ip address command specifies a default IP address for a remote peer connecting to this interface. The no peer default ip address command removes the default IP address from the configuration.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

peer default ip address {A.B.C.D} no peer default ip address
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D the default IP address for remote end of this interface
15-16
Release 5.2.1
POS Commands
pos ais-shut
The pos ais-shut command sends the LAIS when the POS interface is placed in administrative shut down state. The no pos ais-shut command disables the sending of LAIS. Use the pos ais-shut command to send the LAIS.
Note: In Automatic Protection Switching (APS) environment, AIS-L can be used to force a protection switch.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

pos ais-shut no pos ais-shut
Command Default
no LAIS is sent
15-17
Release 5.2.1
pos flag
The pos flag command sets SONET overhead bytes in the SONET frame. The no pos flag command removes the setting, and sets it back to the default. This command can be used to assign values for specific elements of the frame header. Use the pos flag command to ensure communications other vendor equipment or to meet specific standards. Note: Although the j1 64byte <string> command is labeled as a 64 byte string, the user can only enter 62 characters because the last two characters are reserved for framing.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

pos flag {c2 <hexnum> | c2-exp <hexnum> | j0 <hexnum> | j0 16byte <string> | j1 <hexnum> | j1 16byte <string> | j1 64byte <string> | s1 <hexnum>} no pos flag {c2 <hexnum> | c2-exp <hexnum> | j0 <hexnum> | j0 16byte <string> | j1 <hexnum> | j1 16byte <string> | j1 64byte <string> | s1 <hexnum>}
Command Syntax
c2 hexnum path signal identifier used to identify the payload content type, value is 0xCF for PPP or HDLC without scrambling; 0x16 for PPP or HDLC with scrambling
c2-exp hexnum j0 hexnum the section trace byte, value is 0x1 for interoperability with some SDH devices in Japan
15-18
Release 5.2.1
POS Commands
j0 16 byte string
the section trace byte sequence, a character string of 15 characters may be entered for interface labeling. (The first byte contains a calculated CRC-7 byte. the path trace byte, default value of 0x0. the path trace byte sequence, a character string of 15 characters may be entered for STS Channel labeling. The last two bytes are set to CR and LF for framing purposes the path trace byte sequence, a character string of 62 characters may be entered for STS Channel labeling. The last two bytes are set to CR and LF for framing purposes. for synchronous status messaging.
j1 hexnum j1 16 byte string
j1 64 byte string
s1 hexnum
Command Default
for c2, 0xCF for j0, -xCC for s1 0x0
15-19
Release 5.2.1
pos framing
The pos framing command sets framing to SONET STS-3C or 12C, or SDH STM-1 or STM-4 framing. This is based upon the pos signal mode command. The no pos framing command resets the default.
Note: If in OC3-C mode, STS-3C or STM-1 applies; if OC12-C then STS-12C or STM-4 applies.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

pos framing {sdh | sonet} no pos framing {sdh | sonet}
Command Default
SONET
15-20
Release 5.2.1
POS Commands
pos internal-clock
The pos internal-clock command sets the SONET clock to use a local timing source, either from the STRATUM 3 clock on the SRM or the Local PLL device on the HSIM board. The no pos internal-clock command enables loop timing, so that the SONET interface recovers its clock from the received SONET signal of another piece of Line Terminating SONET equipment.
Note: STRATUM represents clock types used for network synchronization.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

pos internal-clock no pos internal-clock
Command Default
internal clock enabled
15-21
Release 5.2.1
pos report
The pos report command enables selected SONET alarms for console logging for a POS interface. The no pos report command disables selected SONET alarms for console logging for a POS interfaces.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

pos report {all | b1-tca | b2-tca | b3-tca | lais | lrdi | pais | plop | prdi | rdool | sd-ber | sf-ber | slof | slos} no {all | b1-tca | b2-tca | b3-tca | lais | lrdi | pais | plop | prdi | rdool | sd-ber | sf-ber | slof | slos}
Command Syntax
all b1-tca b2-tca b3-tca lais lrdi pais plop prdi rdool sd-ber enables/disables all possible alarm reporting B1 Bit Error Rate (BER) threshold crossing alarm errors B2 BER threshold crossing alarm errors B3 BER threshold crossing alarm errors line alarm indication signal line remote defect indication path alarm indication signal path loss of pointer errors path remote defect indication receive data out of lock errors signal degradation BER errors (for APS)
15-22
Release 5.2.1
POS Commands
sf-ber slof slos
signal failure BER errors (for APS) section loss of frame errors section loss of signal errors
Command Default
All error reporting disabled
15-23
Release 5.2.1
pos scramble
The pos scramble command enables POS Synchronous Payload Envelope (SPE) scrambling. The no pos scramble command disables POS SPE scrambling.
Note: The show interfaces pos command or the more nvram:startup-config command displays scrambling status on the system.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

pos scramble no pos scramble
Command Default
Enabled
15-24
Release 5.2.1
POS Commands
pos signal mode

The pos signal mode command changes ports on the High Speed I/O Module (HSIM) board to OC3-C or OC12-C Use the pos signal mode command to change the ports on the HSIM board to either OC3-C or OC12-C. If you select a mode that is already configured, it notifies the user and does not reset the mode. Note: To change to OC12-C mode, this command must be executed from POS Interface 0. When switched to OC12-C mode, all of the other three SONET ports are disabled and are inaccessible through the CLI. The only way to access these other three ports is to switch back to OC3-C mode.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

pos signal mode {oc3 | oc12}
Command Syntax
oc3 oc12 OC3-C mode, 155M OC12-C mode, 622M
15-25
Release 5.2.1
pos threshold
The pos threshold command sets the Bit Error Rate (BER) threshold values of specific alarms on the POS interface. The no pos threshold command sets the rate to the default setting. Note: For B1-TCA, the bit interleaved parity error report is calculated by comparing the BIP-8 code with the BIP-8 code extracted from the B1 byte of the following frame for B1. Differences indicate that section level bit errors have occurred. For B2-TCA, the bit interleaved parity error report is calculated by comparing the BIP-8/24 code with the BIP-8 code extracted from the B2 byte of the following frame for B2. Differences indicate that line level bit errors have occurred. For B3-TCA, the bit interleaved parity error report is calculated by comparing the BIP-8 code with the BIP-8 code extracted from the B3 byte of the following frame for B3. Differences indicate that path level bit errors have occurred. SF-BER and SD-BER are directly related to B2 BIP-8 error counts (as is B2-TCA). SF-BER and SD-BER feed into the APS state machine and can lead to a protection switch if APS is configured. B1-TCA, B2-TCA, and B3-TCA print a log message to the console if reports for them are enabled. To determine the BER thresholds configured on the interface, use the show controllers pos command.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
15-26
Release 5.2.1
POS Commands
Command Line Usage

pos threshold {b1-tca <3-9> | b2-tca <3-9> | b3-tca <3-9>} no pos threshold {b1-tca | b2-tca | b3-tca}
Command Syntax
b1-tca b2-tca b3-tca 3-9 B1 BER threshold crossing alarm B2 BER threshold crossing alarm B3 BER threshold crossing alarm 1E-3 to 1E-9 Rate
Command Default
b2-tca pos threshold 3 (10e-3) all others default at 6
15-27
Release 5.2.1
ppp magic-number
The ppp magic-number command sends a magic number in a negotiation request. The no ppp magic-number command disables sending a magic number in a negotiation request.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ppp magic-number no ppp magic-number
15-28
Release 5.2.1
POS Commands
ppp negotiation-count
The ppp negotiation-count command sets the number of times to send the negotiation request to the peer in order to bring a PPP link up. The no ppp negotiation-count command reverts to the default of continuous sending requests to bring the PPP link up.
Note: Defaults to continuous sending of negotiation requests to bring up PPP link.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ppp negotiation-count <1-100> no ppp negotiation-count
Command Syntax
1-100 number of allowed attempts to try negotiating with a peer
Command Default
Continuous
15-29
Release 5.2.1
ppp timeout
The ppp timeout command sets the maximum timeout period from the start of a PPP negotiation request to a response from the remote host. The no ppp timeout command restores the default maximum timeout period. Use the ppp timeout command to set the timeout period for PPP negotiation.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ppp timeout {ncp 1-2147483> | retry 0-2147483>} no ppp timeout {ncp | retry}
Command Syntax
ncp 1-2147483 amount of time, in seconds, configured before timing out from lack of response at the NCP layer amount of time, in seconds, configured before timing out from lack of response at the LCP layer
retry 0-2147483
Command Default
10 seconds
15-30
Release 5.2.1
POS Commands
show aps
The show aps command provides APS configuration and statistics information for groups containing working and protection ports.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show aps
15-31
Release 5.2.1
show controllers pos

The show controllers pos command displays high level information on the POS controllers. Use the show controllers pos command for troubleshooting. The following POS controller information is provided: SECTION: section portion of the SONET link errors; a section can be between the Customer Premise Equipment (CPE) and SONET Service Provider Equipment (SPE) B1_ERRORS = B1 BER threshold crossing alarm LINE: line portion errors; a line can be between a SONET SPE, regenerators and another SONET SPE B2_ERRORS = B2 BER threshold crossing alarm REI_ERRORS = Remote Error Indicator PATH: errors that occur on the path portion of the SONET link; a path can be between a CPE, SONET SPE, regenerators and another SONET SPE and CPE B3_ERRORS = B3 BER threshold crossing alarm GI_ERRORS = G1 threshold crossing alarm Active Defects: Active Alarms: Alarm reporting enabled for: APS: PATH SIGNAL LABEL: list of all active SONET defects list of current alarms as enforce by SONET alarm hierarchy alarms enabled through the pos report command Rx(K1/K2)/Tx(K1/K2) = contents of the received and transmitted K1 and K2 bytes. C2 = received value from the SONET path signal label byte
15-32
Release 5.2.1
POS Commands
SYNCHRONOUS STATUS MESSAGE: CLOCK RECOVERY: PATH TRACE BUFFER: APS BER thresholds: TCA thresholds:
S1 = lower 4 bits of S1 byte.
SONET clock recovered using information in the SONET overhead. RDOOL = an inexact count of the number of
times Receive Data Out Of Lock has been detected.

SONET path trace buffer for communication information about remote hostname, interface name and number, and IP address, or any other message you choose list of the APS bit-error rate (BER) thresholds configured with the pos threshold command list of threshold crossing alarms (TCA) configured with the pos threshold command
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show controllers pos [<X/Y>]
Command Syntax
X/Y POS interface slot and port number
15-33
Release 5.2.1
show interfaces pos

The show interfaces pos command displays the SONET interface configuration. The following information is provided: POS 15/0 is indicates whether the interface hardware is currently active and administratively can transmit and receive or if it has been taken down by an up/down, line administrator protocol is up/down Hardware MTU BW Encapsulation Keepalive Scramble LCP Initial IPCP Initial Last input hardware type maximum transmission units of the interface interface bandwidth in kilobits per second encapsulation method assigned to interface keepalive set indicator POS scramble enable LCP initialized IPCP initialized hours, minutes, and seconds since the last packet was successfully received by an interface.; useful for knowing when a dead interface failed hours, minutes, and seconds since the last packet was successfully transmitted by an interface of show interface counters hours, minutes, and seconds when the interface was reset first-in, first-out queuing strategy (other queueing strategies you might see are priority-list, custom-list, and weighted fair) number of packets in output and input queues. Each number is followed by a slash, the maximum size of the queue, and the number of packets dropped because a queue was full error-free packets received by the system
Last output Last clearing Last state change Queueing strategy Output queue, drops/input queue, drops packets input
15-34
Release 5.2.1
POS Commands
bytes (input) broadcasts multicasts input errors
number of bytes, including data and MAC encapsulation, in the error-free packets received by the system number of broadcast packets received by the interface number of multicast packets received by the interface number of no buffer, runts, giants, CRCs, frame, overrun, ignored, and abort counts; other input-related errors can also increment the count, so that this sum might not balance with the other counts cyclic redundancy checksum generated by the originating LAN station or far-end device does not match the checksum calculated from the data received. On a LAN, this usually indicates noise or transmission problems on the LAN interface or the LAN bus itself. A high number of CRCs is usually the result of collisions or a station transmitting bad data. On a serial link, CRCs usually indicate noise, gain hits or other transmission problems on the data link number of times the serial receiver hardware was unable to hand received data to a hardware buffer because the input rate exceeded the receiver's ability to handle the data packets that are discarded because they are smaller than the medium's minimum packet size packets that are discarded because they exceed the medium's maximum packet size illegal sequence of one bits on the interface total number of messages transmitted by the system total number of bytes, including data and MAC encapsulation, transmitted by the system sum of all errors that prevented the final transmission of datagrams out of the interface being examined. Note that this might not balance with the sum of the enumerated output errors, as some datagrams can have more than one error, and others can have errors that do not fall into any of the specifically tabulated categories.
CRC
overruns
runts giants aborts packets output bytes (output) output errors
15-35
Release 5.2.1
collisions underruns carrier transitions
collision indication Number of times that the far-end transmitter has been running faster than the near-end router's receiver can handle Number of times the carrier detect signal of the interface has changed state.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show interfaces pos [<X/Y>] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show interfaces pos [<X/Y>] [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
X/Y | begin exclude include WORD count count-only POS interface slot and port number turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
15-36
Release 5.2.1
POS Commands
show ppp info

The show ppp info command displays PPP link and statistic information.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ppp info [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show ppp info [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
15-37
Release 5.2.1
show ppp statistics

The show ppp statistics command displays the PPP running statistics.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ppp statistics [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show ppp statistics [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
15-38
16
BGP Commands
Introduction
This chapter describes the Border Gateway Protocol version 4 (BGP-4) commands used with the BSR. BGP is an Inter-Autonomous System (AS) routing protocol that exchanges network availability information with any other router speaking BGP. The information for a network is the complete list of ASs that traffic must transport to reach that network and is then used to assure loop-free paths. This information is used to construct a graph of AS connectivity from which routing loops may be pruned, and some policy decisions at the AS level may be enforced.
BGP Command Descriptions

This section contains an alphabetized list and descriptions of the BGP commands supported by the BSR.
16-1
Release 5.2.1
aggregate-address
The aggregate-address command creates an entry in the BGP routing table. The no aggregate-address command disables this function. Use the aggregate-address command to implement aggregate routing by redistributing the route in BGP.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

aggregate-address <A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D> [advertise-map <WORD>] [as-set] [attribute-map <WORD>] [summary-only] [suppress-map <WORD>] no aggregate-address <A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D> [advertise-map <WORD>] [as-set] [attribute-map <WORD>] [summary-only] [suppress-map <WORD>]
Command Syntax A.B.C.D

A.B.C.D advertise-map WORD
aggregate address in routing table aggregate mask in routing table name of route map to choose the routes to include into the aggregate and generate associated attributes if as-set is specified route map name to establish aggregate route attribute generates AS set path information creates aggregate route and suppresses advertisements of all aggregated, more specific routes suppresses chosen, specific routes
attribute-map WORD as-set summary-only
suppress-map WORD
Command Default
Disabled
16-2
Release 5.2.1
BGP Commands
auto-summary
The auto-summary command returns the user back to the automatic summarization default of subnet routes into network-level routes. The no auto-summary command disables this function. When the route is summed up, it reduces the amount of routing information in the routing tables. Use the network command or the no auto-summary command to advertise and transmit subnet routes in BGP. BGP will not accept subnets distributed from IGP. If a network command is not entered, and auto-summarization is disabled, network routes will not be advertised for networks with subnet routes unless they contain a summary route.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

auto-summary no auto-summary
Command Default
Enabled
16-3
Release 5.2.1
bgp always-compare-med
The bgp always-compare-med command enables comparison of the Multi-exit Discriminator (MED) from path entries from different ASs. The no bgp always-compare-med command stops comparisons. Use the bgp always-compare-med command to change the default, allowing comparison of MEDs, which are received from any autonomous system. By default, during the best-path selection process, MED comparison is done only among paths from the same autonomous system. This command changes the default behavior by allowing comparison of MEDs among paths regardless of the autonomous system from which the paths are received. The MED path, considered the best path, is the parameter used when selecting the paths compared to many other options. The preference between a path with a lower MED and a path with a higher MED, is the lower MED path.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

bgp always-compare-med no bgp always-compare-med
16-4
Release 5.2.1
BGP Commands
bgp client-to-client reflection

The bgp client-to-client reflection command re-establishes route reflection from a BGP router reflector client to other clients. The no bgp client-to-client reflection command stops the re-establishment of route reflection from a BGP router reflector. Use the bgp client-to-client-reflection command to configure the cluster if it has more than one route and to increase redundancy. The routes from a client, or route reflector, are reflected to other clients. Clients of a route reflector are not required to be fully interconnected. More often than not, a cluster of clients will have a single route reflector. The router ID of the route reflector identifies the cluster. To ensure increased redundancy, and evade a single point of failure, a cluster might have more than one route reflector. If this is the case, all route reflectors that are in the cluster must be configured with a 4-byte cluster ID. Use the no bgp client-to-client command to disable BGP client-to-client reflection. If client-to-client reflection is enabled, clients of a route reflector can not be members of a peer group.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

bgp client-to-client reflection no bgp client-to-client reflection
Command Default
When a route reflector is configured, it reflects routes from a client to other clients.
16-5
Release 5.2.1
bgp cluster-id
The bgp cluster-id command configures a cluster ID if the BGP cluster has more than one route reflector. The no bgp cluster-id command removes the cluster. Use the bgp cluster-id command to increase redundancy and avoid a single point of failure. Route reflectors in a cluster must be configured with a 4-byte cluster ID in order to be recognized from route reflectors in the same cluster. Use this command to configure the cluster ID if the route reflector has more than one route.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

bgp cluster-id <value> no bgp cluster-id <value>
Command Syntax
value router (as a route reflector) ID in IP address format
Command Default
router ID route reflector in cluster
16-6
Release 5.2.1
BGP Commands
bgp confederation identifier

The bgp confederation identifier command configures a BGP confederation identifier. The no bgp confederation identifier command removes a BGP confederation identifier. Use the bgp confederation identifier command to reduce the IBGP mesh. It splits an autonomous system into many autonomous systems. They are then grouped into an individual confederation. Each autonomous system is entirely engaged and has a small number of connections to other autonomous systems in the confederation. The confederation appears to be an individual autonomous system to all else.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

bgp confederation identifier <1-65535> no bgp confederation identifier <1-65535>
Command Syntax
1-65535 autonomous system number to identify the confederation as a whole
16-7
Release 5.2.1
bgp confederation peers

The bgp confederation peers command configures the ASs that belong to the confederation. The no bgp confederation peer command removes an AS from the confederation. Use the bgp confederation peers command to configure the ASs that belong to a confederation. Autonomous systems specified in this command are visible internally to a confederation. Each autonomous system is fully meshed within itself. The BGP confederation identifier command specifies the confederation to which the autonomous systems belong.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Router configuration
Command Line Usage

bgp confederation peers <1-65535> [1-65535...] no bgp confederation peers <1-65535>
Command Syntax[
1-65535 autonomous system number
16-8
Release 5.2.1
BGP Commands
bgp dampening
The bgp dampening command enables BGP route dampening. The no bgp dampening command to sets the default values or disables this function. Note: The penalty is halved after the half-life period when a route is flapping. The router configured for damping (dampening) assigns a penalty to a route when a route flaps. Penalties are cumulative and are stored in the BGP routing table. A flapping route is suppressed when its penalty exceeds the suppress limit. A suppressed route is reused when its decayed penalty falls below the reuse limit.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

bgp dampening [<1-45> <1-20000> <1-20000> <1-255>| route-map <WORD>] no bgp dampening
Command Syntax
1-45 half-life period in minutes, each time a route is assigned a penalty, the penalty is decreased by half after the half-life period in 5 second intervals, with penalties being cumulative allows route to be reused if penalty for flapping route falls below reuse value route suppresses when its penalty exceeds this value maximum suppression time in minutes route map name
1-20000 1-20000 1-255 route-map WORD
16-9
Release 5.2.1
Command Default
half life route reuse route suppression = 15 minutes = 750 = 2000
maximum suppression = 4 times the half-life time
16-10
Release 5.2.1
BGP Commands
bgp default
The bgp default command specifies the default route advertisement which is sent to all routers in the local ASs. The no bgp default command disables a default advertisement. A default route in a router IP forwarding table is used by the router if a routing entry for a destination does not exist. By convention, a default route is represented by the network mask combination 0.0.0.0/0.0.0.0. Any AS advertising the default route represents itself as the gateway of last resort to other systems.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

bgp default { ipv4-unicast | local-preference <0-4294967295> | route-refresh | vpnv4 } no bgp default { ipv4-unicast | local-preference <0-4294967295> | route-refresh | vpnv4 }
Command Syntax
ipv4-unicast local-preference 0-4294967295 activate IP Version 4 (IPv4) Unicast for a peer by default local preference value (higher values receive preference) - when multiple paths exist to the same destination, the local preference specifies the preferred path activate Route Refresh for a peer by default activate VPN-IP Version 4 (VPNv4) for a peer by default
route-refresh vpnv4
16-11
Release 5.2.1
bgp permit
The bgp permit command permits updates with either the AGGREGATOR attribute set to the 0 Autonomous System (AS) or with the 0.0.0.0 address in the BGP routing process. The no bgp permit command disables the updates.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

bgp permit [aggregator-AS-0 | aggregator-address-0] no bgp permit [aggregator-AS-0 | aggregator-address-0]
Command Syntax
aggregator-AS-0 aggregator-address-0 permits updates to AGGREGATOR attribute set with an AS of 0. permits updates with the AGGREGATOR attribute set with a 0.0.0.0 address.
Command Default
Disabled
16-12
Release 5.2.1
BGP Commands
bgp router-id
The bgp router-id command overrides a configured BGP router identifier (IP address) by manually configuring a new identifier. The no bgp router-id command restores the initial configuration.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

bgp router-id <A.B.C.D> no bgp router-id
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D the new BGP router identifier (IP address)
16-13
Release 5.2.1
clear ip bgp
The clear ip bgp command resets a BGP connection using soft reconfiguration.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

clear ip bgp {* | <A.B.C.D> | <WORD>}[soft [in | out]]
Command Syntax
* A.B.C.D WORD soft in resets active BGP sessions IP address of BGP neighbor to clear name of a specific BGP peer group to clear the state reapply any export policies and sends refresh updates without clearing the state inbound soft reconfiguration; reapply any import policies and send refresh updates without clearing the state outbound soft reconfiguration
out
Command Default
Disabled
16-14
Release 5.2.1
BGP Commands
clear ip bgp dampening

The clear ip bgp dampening command clears route dampening information and unsuppresses the suppressed routes.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

clear ip bgp dampening [<A.B.C.D> | <A.B.C.D>]
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D A.B.C.D IP address of the network about which to clear dampening information network mask applied to the above address
16-15
Release 5.2.1
clear ip bgp flap-statistics

The clear ip bgp flap-statistics clears BGP flap statistics.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

clear ip bgp flap-statistics [<A.B.C.D> | filter-list <1-199> | regexp <LINE>]
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D filter-list 1-199 regexp LINE network to clear flap statistics clear flap statistics for all the paths that pass the access list clear flap statistics for all the paths that match the regular expression clear flap statistics for all the paths that match the regular expression. a regular-expression to match the BGP AS paths
16-16
Release 5.2.1
BGP Commands
The default-information originate command generates a default route into the BGP database. The no default-information originate command disables default route generation.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

default-information originate no default-information originate
Command Default
Disabled
16-17
Release 5.2.1
default-metric
The default metric feature is used to eliminate the need for separate metric definitions for each routing protocol redistribution.The default-metric command forces the BGP routing protocol to use the same metric value for all distributed routes from other routing protocols. The no default-metric command removes or changes the default metric value for the BGP routing protocol.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

default-metric <0-4294967295> no default-metric
Command Syntax
0-4294967295 Default metric value.
16-18
Release 5.2.1
BGP Commands
distance bgp
The distance bgp command sets external, internal, and local administrative distances for routes to function. The no distance bgp command sets the default values. Use the distance bgp command to administer distance based on the preferred routing information source received from a router or group of routers. This enables the system to prioritize protocols dependant upon the distances between 1 to 255, where 0 is the best route, and the most unreliable route is 255. The bgp distance command has an influence on whether the BGP-learned routes are installed in the routing table.
Note: It is recommended that the administrative distance not be changed.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

distance bgp [<1-255> < 1-255> <1-255>] no distance bgp
Command Syntax
1-255 1-255 administrative distance for routes external to the AS administrative distance for routes external to the AS - routes with a distance of 255 are not installed in the routing table administrative distance for local route
1-255
16-19
Release 5.2.1
Command Default
external distance internal distance local distance = = = 20 200 200
16-20
Release 5.2.1
BGP Commands
distribute-list in
The distribute-list in command filters networks received in routing updates. The no distribute-list in command changes or cancels the filters received in updates.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

distribute-list <1-199> <1300-2699> in no distribute-list <1-199> <1300-2699> in
Command Syntax
1-199 1300-2699 in access list number extended access list number applies access list to incoming route updates
Command Default
Disabled
16-21
Release 5.2.1
distribute-list out
The distribute-list out command prevents networks from being advertised in updates. The no distribute-list out command enables update advertisements. Use the distribute-list out command to apply the access list to outgoing route updates.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

distribute-list <1-199> <1300-2699> out no distribute-list <1-199> <1300-2699> out
Command Syntax
1-199 1300-2699 out pre-defined access list number applies access list to outgoing route updates
Command Default
Disabled
16-22
Release 5.2.1
BGP Commands
ip as-path access-list
The ip as-path access-list command creates or modifies a BGP related access list and its elements. The no ip as-path access command deletes the corresponding list element. Use the no ip as-path access-list command to modify elements and add to the IP as-path access list of corresponding elements. Use the ip as-path access-list and the neighbor filter-list commands to use as-path filters to filter BGP advertisements.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip as-path access-list <1-199> {permit <LINE> | deny <LINE>} no ip as-path access <1-199>
Command Syntax
1-199 permit deny LINE access list number permits access for matching conditions denies access to matching conditions regular expression describing the as-paths to be matched
16-23
Release 5.2.1
ip bgp-community new-format
The ip bgp-community new-format command enables the extended community format to be represented as a two byte number. In the most recent version of RFC 1997, an extended community is in the form AA:NN. The first part (AA) is the autonomous system number and the second part (NN) is a 2-byte number. The BSRs default community format is one 32-bit number. The ip bgp-community new-format command changes the community format from one 32-bit number to the AA:NN format to conform to RFC 1997. The following command sequence example illustrates how the ip bgp-community new-format command enables the extended AA:NN format:
MOT:7A(config)# ip bgp-community new-format MOT:7A(config)# route-map test MOT:7A(config-rmap)# set community 123456 MOT:7A(config-rmap)# show route-map
route-map test, permit, sequence 10 Match clauses: Set clauses: community 1:57920
The decimal number of 123456, specified with the set community command, converts to a binary number of 11110001001000000. The last two bytes from this binary number are 1110001001000000 which equals 57920 in decimal. This leaves a single binary number of 1 which translates to a decimal number of 1. Thus, the AA:NN format is 1:57920. The ip bgp-community new-format command does not change the actual community it just changes the way the bits are presented.
Group Access
ISP
16-24
Release 5.2.1
BGP Commands
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip bgp-community new-format
Command Default
Disabled
16-25
Release 5.2.1
ip community-list
The ip community-list command creates a BGP related access list and its elements.There are two types of community lists: standard and extended. The standard community lists have a list number from 1 to 99. The extended community lists have a list number from 100 to 199. The no ip community-list deletes the community lists and all associated elements. The community lists are used in the match community-list command and the set communities set comm-list delete commands. The route maps are used for inbound and outbound filtering. Note: The community lists are related to the respective elements, and are of the standard and extended types: Standard community lists: To create a standard community list and its elements, use the ip community-list command. To delete the list element use the no ip community-list command. If there is no elements left in the list, the list will be removed too. To delete the community list and all its elements use the no ip community-list command. Extended community lists: To create an extended community list and its elements use the ip community-list command. To delete the list element use the no ip community-list command. If there are no elements left in the list, the list will be removed too.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
16-26
Release 5.2.1
BGP Commands
Command Line Usage

ip community-list <1-99>{deny | permit } [<1-4294967295>/<aa:nn> | internet | local-AS | no-advertise | no-export ] ip community-list <100-199>{deny | permit } <LINE> [<LINE>...] no ip community-list <1-99>{deny | permit } [<1-4294967295>/<aa:nn> | internet | local-AS | no-advertise | no-export ] no ip community-list <100-199>{deny | permit } <LINE> [<LINE>...]
Command Syntax
1-99 100-199 deny permit 1-4294967295 standard access list number extended access list number prevents access for matching allows access for matching a community number - you can specify a

aa:nn the extended community in the form AA:NN the first part (AA) is the autonomous system number and the second part (NN) is a 2-byte number internet community do not advertise this route to peers outside of the local autonomous system do not advertise this route to any peer internal or external routes with this community are sent to peers in other sub-autonomous systems within a confederation an ordered list as a regular expression
internet local-AS no-advertise no-export
LINE
16-27
Release 5.2.1
match as-path
The match as-path command matches a BGP autonomous system path access list match entries or appends new list numbers to the existing match entry. The no match as-path command removes the list numbers from the match entry used in the command. Use the match as-path command to match a BGP autonomous system path to advertise on the route-map. Values can be set using the match as-path command. Use the match as-path command to match at least one BGP autonomous system path to ensure advertisement on the route-map. Use the match as-path command to globally replace values matched and set with the match as-path command and the set weight command to supersede weights established with the neighbor weight and the neighbor filter-list commands. The values set by the match and set commands override global values. For example, the weights assigned with the match as-path and set weight route-map commands override the weights assigned using the neighbor weight and neighbor filter-list commands. The implemented weight is established by the initial autonomous system match.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

match as-path [<1-199>]
no match as-path [<1-199>]

Command Syntax
1-199 as-path list number - you can specify a
16-28
Release 5.2.1
BGP Commands
match community
The match community command creates a BGP autonomous system community access list match entry or appends new list numbers to the existing match entry. The no match community command removes the match entry completely. The no match community command removes the list numbers or the exact-match attribute from the match entry use the command Use the match community-list command to ensure that the route is advertised for outbound and inbound route-maps. If a change to some of the information is to match is needed, configure a second route-map with specifics.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

match community [<1-99> <100-199>] exact-match] no match community [<1-99> <100-199>] exact-match]
Command Syntax
1-99 100-199 exact-match standard community list number extended community list number exact match required; all of the communities and only those communities in the community list must be present
16-29
Release 5.2.1
maximum-paths
Group Access
RESTRICTED
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

Command Syntax
16-30
Release 5.2.1
BGP Commands
neighbor advertisement-interval
The neighbor advertisement-interval command sets the minimum amount of time between sending BGP routing updates. Use the no neighbor advertisement-interval form of this command to delete an entry. Use the neighbor advertisement-interval command to configure all the members of the peer group with the same attributes.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

neighbor {<A.B.C.D> | <WORD>} advertisement-interval <0-600> no neighbor {<A.B.C.D> | <WORD>} advertisement-interval <0-600>
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D WORD 0-600 neighbor IP address neighbor peer-group-name amount of time in seconds
Command Default
30 seconds for external peers 5 seconds for internal peers
16-31
Release 5.2.1
neighbor confed-segment
The neighbor confed-segment command allows you configure a neighbor to use either AS confederation sequence or AS confederation set as the path segment type in the AS path attribute. The no neighbor confed-segment command disables the AS confederation path segment type attribute.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

neighbor {<A.B.C.D>} confed-segment {sequence | set} no neighbor {<A.B.C.D>} confed-segment {sequence | set}
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D sequence set neighbor IP address convert to AS_CONFED_SEQUENCE (rfc3065: value 3) convert to AS_CONFED_SET (rfc3065: value 4)
Command Default
AS confederation path segment type attribute is disabled.
16-32
Release 5.2.1
BGP Commands
neighbor default-originate
The neighbor default-originate command allows a BGP speaker to send the default route 0.0.0.0 to a neighbor for the neighbors default. The no neighbor default-originate command sends no route as a default. The neighbor default-originate command does not require the presence of 0.0.0.0 in the local router, and when used with a route map, the default route 0.0.0.0 is injected only if the route map contains a match ip address clause and there is a route that matches the IP access list exactly. The route map can contain other match clauses also. The user can use standard or extended access lists with the neighbor default-originate command.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

neighbor {<A.B.C.D> | <WORD>} default-originate [route-map <WORD>] no neighbor {<A.B.C.D> | <WORD>} default-originate [route-map <WORD>]
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D WORD WORD neighbor IP address peer group name route map name
16-33
Release 5.2.1
neighbor description
The neighbor description command provides a description of a neighbor. The no neighbor description clears the provided neighbor description.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

neighbor {<A.B.C.D> | <WORD>} description [LINE] no neighbor {<A.B.C.D> | <WORD>} description [LINE]
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D WORD LINE neighbor IP address name of a BGP peer group up to 80 characters in length to describe neighbor
16-34
Release 5.2.1
BGP Commands
neighbor distribute-list
The neighbor distribute-list command distributes BGP neighbor information based on the access list. The no neighbor distribute-list command deletes an entry. Use the neighbor distribute-list command to filter BGP advertisements. Also, use the ip as-path access-list and the neighbor filter-list commands to use as-path filters to filter BGP advertisements. If a BGP peer group is specified, all members of that group are associated. Specifying the neighbor distribute-list command with an IP address to replace the value already in the peer group.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

neighbor {<A.B.C.D> | <WORD>} distribute-list <1-199> <1300-2699>{in | out} no neighbor {<A.B.C.D> | <WORD>} distribute-list <1-199> <1300-2699>{in | out}
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D WORD 1-199 1300-2699 in out neighbor IP address name of a BGP peer group number of a standard or extended access list number of an expanded range access list within the group outside the group
16-35
Release 5.2.1
neighbor ebgp-multihop
The neighbor ebgp-mulithop command accepts route updates from external peers residing on the network that are not directly connected. The no neighbor ebgp-mulithop command blocks route updates. Use the neighbor ebgp-multihop command to modify BGP peer groups for unified configuration by specifying a peer-group-name.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

neighbor {<A.B.C.D> | <WORD>} ebgp-multihop <1-255> no neighbor {<A.B.C.D> | <WORD>} ebgp-multihop <1-255>
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D WORD 1-255 IP address of external peer, BGP neighbor external BGP group name the maximum hop count - if no value is entered, the default value of 255 is used
16-36
Release 5.2.1
BGP Commands
neighbor filter-list
The neighbor filter-list command creates a BGP filter. The no neighbor filter-list command disables this function. Use the neighbor filter-list command to create filters on both inbound and outbound BGP routes. Unlimited weight filters are accepted on a per-neighbor principle, but only one inbound or one outbound filter is accepted, not both. Route selection rules determine the weight of a route. Weight assignment is based on the initial autonomous system path, or as-path. Weights announced override weights assigned by global neighbor commands. This happens when the initial match is made. Therefore, weights assigned using match as-path and set weight commands override weights assigned by the neighbor weight and neighbor filter-list commands. Members of a peer group realize configured specifics when the peer-group-name argument is used with the neighbor filter-list command. If the neighbor filter-list command is used with a specified IP address, then the IP address overrides the value from the peer group. Note: Using the command in the form, no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group} filter-list <access-list-number> weight [<weight>], the optional [<weight>] argument has no effect. Using the command in the form, neighbor {ip-address | peer-group} filter-list [<access-list-number>] {in | out }, the optional [<access-list-number>] argument has no effect.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

neighbor {<A.B.C.D> | <WORD>} filter-list <1-199> {in | out | weight <0-65535>} no neighbor {<A.B.C.D> | <WORD>} filter-list <1-199> {in | out | weight <0-65535>}
16-37
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D WORD 1-199 in out weight 0-65535 neighbor IP address BGP peer group filter list number access list to incoming routes access list to outgoing routes BGP weight metric assigned for competing incoming routes; accepted values are 0 to 65535; the largest weight is preferred
Command Default
Disabled
16-38
Release 5.2.1
BGP Commands
neighbor maximum-prefix
The neighbor maximum-prefix command controls the number of prefixes accepted from a neighbor. The no neighbor maximum-prefix command stops the controlled number of prefixes accepted from a neighbor. Use the neighbor maximum-prefix command to manage the number of prefixes accepted from a neighbor. Note: A prefix is a classless route or a route with a particular starting point and length, with unlimited prefixes. Therefore, 198.7.97.0/27 and 198.7.97.0/ 20 are not the same prefix (route). If the maximum number of acceptable prefixes configured is exceeded, the router ends peering, which is the default.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

neighbor {<A.B.C.D> | <WORD>} maximum-prefix <1-65536> [<1-100 > | warning-only ] no neighbor {<A.B.C.D> | <WORD>} maximum-prefix <1-65536> [<1-100> | warning-only ]
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D WORD 1-65536 neighbor IP address name of BGP peer-group maximum number of configured prefixes allowed from specific neighbor
16-39
Release 5.2.1
1-100
integer specifying what percentage of the maximum number that the router generates a warning message only generate a warning message when the maximum number is exceeded
warning-only
Command Default
Disabled Threshold default, 75%
16-40
Release 5.2.1
BGP Commands
neighbor next-hop-self
The neighbor next-hop-self command disables BGP processing updates. The no neighbor next-hop-self command enables BGP processing updates. Note: Members of a peer group realize configured specifics when the peer-group-name argument is used with the neighbor next-hop-self command. Specifying the command with an IP address will override the value inherited from the peer group. Use the set ip next-hop command for additional control.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

neighbor {<A.B.C.D> | <WORD>} next-hop-self no neighbor {<A.B.C.D> | <WORD>} next-hop-self
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D WORD neighbor IP address name of neighbor peer-group
Command Default
Disabled
16-41
Release 5.2.1
neighbor password
The neighbor password command enables the Message Digest 5 (MD5) authentication on a TCP connection between two BGP peers. The no neighbor password command disables the Message Digest 5 (MD5) authentication on a TCP connection between two BGP peers. Use the neighbor password command to authenticate and to verify TCP connections between two BGP peers, of which the same password is configured. This command begins the MD5 generation for outgoing packets and check every segment on a TCP connection for incoming packets.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

neighbor {<A.B.C.D> | <WORD>} password {0 | 7 }<LINE> no neighbor {<A.B.C.D> | <WORD>} password {0 | 7} <LINE>
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D WORD 0 7 LINE neighbor IP address name of neighbor peer-group specifies an UNENCRYPTED password will follow specifies an ENCRYPTED password will follow the password (1-32 characters)
Command Default
Disabled
16-42
Release 5.2.1
BGP Commands
neighbor peer-group (assigning members)

The neighbor peer-group (assigning members) command configures a BGP neighbor to be a member a BGP peer group. The no neighbor peer-group (assigning members) command removes the neighbor from the peer group. The neighbor peer-group creates a new member of a peer-group. If there is no such peer, it will be created and assigned to the group. If there is such peer already, and it does not belong to any other group, it will be assigned to the group and inherit its AS number and all its policies. If an existing peer belongs to another group, it must be removed from that group first with no neighbor peer-group command. The neighbor at the IP address specified completes all of the configuration options of the peer group.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

neighbor <A.B.C.D> peer-group <WORD> no neighbor <A.B.C.D> peer-group <WORD>
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D WORD address of the BGP neighbor the name of the peer-group
16-43
Release 5.2.1
neighbor peer-group (creating)

The neighbor peer-group (creating) command creates a BGP peer group. The no neighbor peer-group (creating) command removes the peer group and all of its members.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

neighbor <WORD> peer-group no neighbor <WORD> peer-group
Command Syntax
WORD peer group name
16-44
Release 5.2.1
BGP Commands
neighbor remote-as
The neighbor remote-as command performs many functions as described below. Use the neighbor remote-as command to assign a BGP router to an autonomous system.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

neighbor <A.B.C.D> remote-as <1-65535> creates a new BGP peer and assigns an AS number to it. If such peer does not exist already, it assigns a new AS number to existing peer. Such assignment can be done for the existing peer only if it is not a member of any peer-group. no neighbor <A.B.C.D> [remote-as [<1-65535>]] deletes the corresponding peer, regardless if it is peer-group member or not. neighbor <WORD> remote-as <1-65535> assigns a new AS number to existing peer-group. If the peer-group has an AS number already, it will be replaced with the new one. All existing peer-group members will inherit this AS number too. no neighbor <WORD> remote-as [<1-65535>] removes the peer-group and all its members.
16-45
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D WORD 1-65535 BGP peer address name of BGP peer group neighbor autonomous system number
16-46
Release 5.2.1
BGP Commands
neighbor remove-private-as
The neighbor remove-private-as command triggers the removal of private AS numbers from outbound updates. Use no neighbor remove-private-as command to stops such removal.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

neighbor {<A.B.C.D> | <WORD>} remove-private-as no neighbor {<A.B.C.D> | <WORD>} remove-private-as
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D WORD address of the BGP neighbor name of neighbor peer-group
Command Default
No removal
16-47
Release 5.2.1
neighbor route-map
The neighbor route-map command applies a route map to incoming or outgoing routes. The no neighbor route-map command clears a route map for incoming and outgoing routes.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

neighbor {<A.B.C.D> | <WORD>} route-map <WORD> {in | out} no neighbor {<A.B.C.D> | <WORD>} route-map <WORD> {in | out}
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D WORD WORD in out neighbor IP address name of BGP peer group name of route-map apply to incoming routes apply to outgoing routes
16-48
Release 5.2.1
BGP Commands
neighbor route-reflector-client
The neighbor route-reflector-client command configures the router as a BGP route-reflector. The no neighbor route-reflector-client command configures a router back to a BGP route-reflector. Use the neighbor route-reflector-client command to establish a local router to act as the route-reflector with the specified neighbor as a client.
Note: When all clients are disabled, the local router is no longer a route-reflector.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

neighbor {<A.B.C.D> | <WORD>} route-reflector-client no neighbor {<A.B.C.D> | <WORD>} route-reflector-client
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D WORD neighbor IP address name of BGP peer group
16-49
Release 5.2.1
neighbor route-refresh
The neighbor route-refresh command allows a BGP neighbor to accept route refresh requests. The no neighbor route-refresh command disables the acceptance of reoute refresh requests for a BGP neighbor.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

neighbor {<A.B.C.D> | <WORD>} route-refresh no neighbor {<A.B.C.D> | <WORD>} route-refresh
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D WORD BGP neighbor IP address name of BGP peer group
16-50
Release 5.2.1
BGP Commands
neighbor send-community
The neighbor send-community command will allow a communities attribute, if any, to be sent in outbound updates to a neighbor. The no neighbor send-community command stops sending communities attribute.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

neighbor {<A.B.C.D> | <WORD>} send-community [both | extended | standard] no neighbor {<A.B.C.D> | <WORD>} send-community [both | extended | standard]
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D WORD both extended standard neighbor IP address name of BGP peer group send standard and extended community attributes send extended community attributes send standard community attributes
16-51
Release 5.2.1
neighbor shutdown
The neighbor shutdown command disables a neighbor or peer group. The no neighbor shutdown command enables a neighbor or peer group. Use the neighbor shutdown command to end an session for a particular neighbor or peer group. This removes all routing information associated. Use the show ip bgp summary command for a list of neighbors and peer-group connection. Those neighbors with an Idle status and the Administrative entry have been disabled by the neighbor shutdown command.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

neighbor {<A.B.C.D> | <WORD>} shutdown no neighbor {<A.B.C.D> | <WORD>} shutdown
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D WORD neighbor IP address name of BGP peer group
16-52
Release 5.2.1
BGP Commands
neighbor soft-reconfiguration inbound

The neighbor soft-reconfiguration inbound command starts the storage of incoming updates without any modification. The no neighbor soft-reconfiguration inbound command stops this storage and releases the memory used for them. Use the neighbor soft-reconfiguration inbound command to start update story required to enable inbound software configuration with the clear ip bgp soft [in] command. Outbound BGP soft-reconfiguration does not need inbound software configuration. Outbound BGP soft-reconfiguration does not need inbound software configuration. Note: When the neighbor soft-reconfiguration inbound command is issued, the peer will first be disabled and then enabled again. The no form of this command doesn't bring the peer down.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

neighbor {<A.B.C.D> | <WORD>} soft-reconfiguration inbound no neighbor {<A.B.C.D> | <WORD>} soft-reconfiguration inbound
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D WORD inbound neighbor IP address name of BGP peer group specific inbound update
Command Default
No storage
16-53
Release 5.2.1
neighbor timers
The neighbor timers command sets the timers for a particular BGP peer or peer group. The no neighbor timers command clears the timers for a particular BGP peer or peer group. Use the neighbor timers command to configure a specific neighbor or peer-group timers values to bypass the timers configured for all BGP neighbors using the timers bgp command. Note: If, during the negotiated holdtime (which is the smallest of configured hold time and the holdtime advertised by the neighbor), no messages arrive, the peer will be brought down. If the negotiated holdtime is 0, then the peer will never be brought down, because it hasn't received any messages. If the value of the keepalive timer is 0, then no keepalive messages will be sent.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

neighbor {<A.B.C.D> | <WORD>} timers {<0-21845>} [<0-65535>] no neighbor {<A.B.C.D> | <WORD>} timers
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D WORD 0-21845 0-65535 neighbor IP address name of BGP peer group frequency of keepalive messages to peers in seconds amount of time passed when no keepalive message is sent, in seconds
16-54
Release 5.2.1
BGP Commands
Command Default
keepalive = 60 seconds hold time = 180 seconds
16-55
Release 5.2.1
neighbor update-source loopback

The neighbor update-source loopback command allows an internal BGP session to use any loopback interface for the TCP session. The no neighbor update-source loopback command blocks a BGP session from using a loopback interface for the TCP session.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

neighbor {<A.B.C.D> | <WORD>} update-source loopback <1-255> no neighbor {<A.B.C.D> | <WORD>} update-source loopback <1-255>
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D WORD loopback 1-255 neighbor IP address name of BGP peer group loopback interface loopback interface number
Command Default
Best local address
16-56
Release 5.2.1
BGP Commands
neighbor weight
The neighbor weight command establishes a weight to a neighbor connection. The no neighbor weight command removes a weight to a neighbor connection. Note: Initially, all routes learned from this neighbor will have the assigned weight. The route with the highest weight is chosen as the choice route when multiple routes are available on the network.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

neighbor {<A.B.C.D> | <WORD>} weight <0-65535> no neighbor {<A.B.C.D> | <WORD>} weight <0-65535>
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D WORD 0-65535 neighbor IP address name of BGP peer group weight assignment
Command Default
learned routes = 0 routes sourced by local router = 32768
16-57
Release 5.2.1
network
The network command specifies the list of networks for the BGP routing process. The no network command deletes the entry. Use the network command to control what networks are originated. be included in the BGP updates. Network types are learned from connected routes, dynamic routing, and static route sources. Because BGP can handle subnetting and supernetting, the mask is used. The maximum number of network commands is based on the configured nvram or ram.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

network <A.B.C.D> [mask <A.B.C.D>] no network <A.B.C.D> [mask <A.B.C.D>]
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D A.B.C.D network that BGP will advertise network or subnetwork mask address
16-58
Release 5.2.1
BGP Commands
redistribute
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

redistribute {connected | ospf [match {internal | external | external 1 | external 2}] | rip | static} [metric <0-4294967295>] [route-map <WORD>] [weight <0-65535>] no redistribute {connected | ospf [match {internal | external | external 1 | external 2}] | rip | static} [metric <0-4294967295>] [route-map <WORD>] [weight <0-65535>]
Command Syntax
connected ospf match internal external established routes as result of IP enabled on an interface OSPF source protocol the criteria by which OSPF routes are redistributed into BGP routes that are internal to an autonomous system routes external to an autonomous system, but are imported into OSPF as either Type 1 or Type 2 external route routes that are external to an autonomous system, but are imported into OSPF as Type 1 external routes
external 1
16-59
Release 5.2.1
external 2
routes that are external to an autonomous system, but are imported into OSPF as Type 2 external routes RIP source protocol IP or BGP static routes metric value used for the redistributed route. the name of the route-map used to conditionally control the route redistribution set a network weight value when redistributing into BGP
rip static metric 0-4294967295 route-map WORD weight 0-65535
Command Default
Disabled
16-60
Release 5.2.1
BGP Commands
route-map
The route-map command creates or modifies route-maps and their sequences. The no route-map command removes the corresponding sequence from the route-map.If there are no sequences left in the route-map, the route-map will be deleted too. Use the route-map command, and the match and set commands to configure the rules for redistributing routes from one routing protocol to another. Each route-map command has a list of match and set commands associated with it. The match commands specify the match criteria, which are the conditions under which redistribution is allowed for the current route-map command. The set commands specify the set actions, the particular redistribution actions to perform if the criteria enforced by the match commands are met. The no route-map command deletes the route map. Note: If the optional sequence number [<0-65535>] is omitted, the default sequence number 10 is used. If the optional access value [permit | deny] is omitted, the default value permit is used.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

route-map <WORD> [deny | permit] [<0-65535>] no route-map <WORD> [deny | permit] [<0-65535>]
Command Syntax
WORD 0-65535 deny permit route-map name route-map sequence number denies access for matching conditions permits access for matching conditions
16-61
Release 5.2.1
router bgp
The router bgp command configures the BGP routing process. Use the no router bgp command clears BGP routing process configuration. Use the router bgp command to establish a distributed routing core that automatically guarantees the loop-free exchange of routing information between autonomous systems.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

router bgp <1-65535> no router bgp <1-65535>
Command Syntax
1-65535 number of the autonomous system identifying the router to other BGP routers
16-62
Release 5.2.1
BGP Commands
set as-path prepend

The set as-path prepend command modifies AS system path attributes for the matched BGP routes. The no set as-path prepend command ends modification of a system path for BGP routes. Use the set as-path prepend command to guide the path information to control the BGP decision process.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

set as-path prepend <1-65535> [<1-65535>] no set as-path prepend <1-65535> [<1-65535>]
Command Syntax
1-65535 prepend string - you can specify a single
number or multiple numbers separated by a space
16-63
Release 5.2.1
set comm-list
The set comm-list command deletes communities from the community attribute of an inbound or outbound update. The no set comm-list command deletes the entry. Use the set comm-list command to delete communities from the community attribute of inbound or outbound updates using a route map to filter and determine the communities to be deleted. If the standard list is referred in the set comm-list delete command, only the elements with the single community number or no community number in them will be used. All others will be quietly ignored. Any element specified with the 'internet' keyword is equivalent to element without community number. If the set community comm and set comm-list list-num delete commands are configured in the same sequence of a route-map attribute, the deletion operation (set comm-list list-num delete) is performed before the set operation (set community comm). Note: If the set community and set comm-list delete commands are configured in the same sequence of a route-map attribute, the deletion operation (set comm-list delete) is performed before the set operation (set community).
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

set comm-list {<1-99> | <100-199>} delete no set comm-list {<1-99> | <100-199>} delete
16-64
Release 5.2.1
BGP Commands
Command Syntax
1-99 100-199 delete standard community list number extended community list number delete inbound or outbound communities from the community attribute
16-65
Release 5.2.1
set community
The set community command adds or replaces communities from the community attribute of an inbound or outbound update. Use the no set community command removes the specified communities from the set. Use the route-map command, and the match and set commands to configure the rules for redistributing routes from one routing protocol to another. Each route-map command has a list of match and set commands associated with it. The match commands specify the match criteria, which are the conditions under which redistribution is allowed for the current route-map command. The set commands specify the set actions, the particular redistribution actions to perform if the criteria enforced by the match commands are met. The no route-map command deletes the route map. Note: The communities could be specified as numbers; the result will be the same; none removes community attribute from the update unless additive is specified for the set entry. In this case it doesn't modify update community attributes. In other words, the no set community command, if the entry had some community numbers in it before removal, and as the result of the removal no numbers are left, then the entry itself is deleted. The command set community none removes all community numbers from set entry, if any, but leaves the value of the additive attribute intact.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

set community {<1-4294967295>/<aa:nn> | local-AS | no-advertise | no-export | additive | none} no set community {<1-4294967295>/<aa:nn> | local-AS | no-advertise | no-export | additive | none}
16-66
Release 5.2.1
BGP Commands
Command Syntax
1-4294967295 aa:nn the community number the extended community in the form AA:NN the first part (AA) is the autonomous system number and the second part (NN) is a 2-byte number add to the existing community do not advertise this route to peers outside of the local autonomous system do not advertise this route to any peer internal or external routes with this community are sent to peers in other sub-autonomous systems within a confederation no community attribute
additive local-AS no-advertise no-export
none
16-67
Release 5.2.1
set ip next-hop
The set ip next-hop command establishes a next-hop value for the AS path. The no ip next-hop command deletes the entry. Use the ip policy route-map interface configuration command, the route-map global configuration command, and the match and set route-map configuration commands, to define the conditions for policy routing packets. The ip policy route-map command identifies a route map by name. Each route-map command has a list of match and set commands associated with it. The match commands specify the match criteria---the conditions under which policy routing occurs. The set commands specify the set actions---the particular routing actions to perform if the criteria enforced by the match commands are met. If the interface associated with the first next hop specified with the set ip next-hop command is down, the optionally specified IP addresses are tried in turn.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

set ip next-hop <A.B.C.D> no set ip next-hop
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D IP address of the next hop to which packets are output; address of the adjacent router
Command Default
Disabled
16-68
Release 5.2.1
BGP Commands
set local-preference
The set-local preference command establishes a preference value for the AS system path. Use the set local-preference command to send the local-preference to all routers in the local autonomous system. Use the no set-local preference form of this command to delete the entry.
Note: In the no set-local preference command, the optional <0-4294967295> argument has no effect.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

set local-preference <0-4294967295> no set local-preference <0-4294967295>
Command Syntax
0-4294967295 local preference value
16-69
Release 5.2.1
set metric-type
The set metric-type command sets the destination routing protocol. The no set metric-type command returns the default. Use the set metric-type command, and the match and set commands to configure the rules for redistributing routes from one routing protocol to another. Each set metric-type command has a list of match and set commands associated with it. The match commands specify the match criteria, which are the conditions under which redistribution is allowed for the current set metric-type command. The set commands specify the set actions, the particular redistribution actions to perform if the criteria enforced by the match commands are met. The no set metric-type command deletes the route map.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Route-map configuration
Command Line Usage

set metric-type {internal | external | type-1 | type-2} no set metric-type {internal | external | type-1 | type-2}
Command Syntax
internal external type-1 type-2 internal metric external metric OSPF external type 1 metric OSPF external type 2 metric
Command Default
Disabled
16-70
Release 5.2.1
BGP Commands
set origin
The set origin command configures the conditions for redistributing routes from any protocol to any protocol. The no set origin command deletes the BGP origin code. When the set origin command configures redistributing routes from any protocol to any protocol, any match clause is necessary which includes pointing to a permit everything to set tags.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Route-Map Configuration
Command Line Usage

set origin {egp | igp | incomplete} no set origin {egp | igp | incomplete}
Command Syntax
egp igp incomplete remote EGP local IGP unknown heritage
16-71
Release 5.2.1
set tag
The set tag command sets the value of the destination routing protocol. The no set tag command removes the value. The route-map global configuration command and the match and set route-map configuration commands are used together to define the conditions for redistributing routes from one routing protocol into another. Each route-map command has a list of match and set commands associated with it. The match commands specify the conditions for redistribution for the current route-map command. The set commands specify the particular redistribution actions to perform if the criteria enforced by the match commands are met. The no route-map command deletes the route map.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

set tag <0-4294967295> no set tag <0-4294967295>
Command Syntax
0-4294967295 tag value
Command Default
If not specified, tag is forwarded to the new destination protocol.
16-72
Release 5.2.1
BGP Commands
set weight
The set-weight command to set the route weight on the network. The first autonomous system match determines the weight to be set. Use the set weight command to set the route weight on the network. The first AS match determines the weight to be set. The route with the highest weight is chosen as the choice route when multiple routes are available on the network. Weights spoken when an as path is matched, override any weight set by the neighbor command. Any match clause is necessary which includes pointing to a permit everything to set tags
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

set weight <0-65535> no set weight
Command Syntax
0-65535 weight value
16-73
Release 5.2.1
show ip as-path-access-list
The show ip as-path-access-list command displays configured AS path access lists and their elements. Use the show ip as-path-access-list command to display configured as-path access lists and their elements. With the optional access list number argument, it displays the specified as-path access list, if such list exists. Without it, it displays all configured as-path access lists.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip as-path-access-list [<1-199>]
Command Syntax
1-199 access list number
16-74
Release 5.2.1
BGP Commands
show ip bgp
The show ip bgp command displays entries in the BGP routing table. Use the show ip bgp command to determine whether the session is active or not.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip bgp [<A.B.C.D>] [<A.B.C.D>] [longer-prefixes] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show ip bgp [<A.B.C.D>] [<A.B.C.D>] [longer-prefixes] [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D A.B.C.D longer-prefixes | begin exclude include WORD network address in the BGP routing table to display displays all BGP routes matching the network address/network mask pair displays route and more specific routes turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string
16-75
Release 5.2.1
count count-only
16-76
Release 5.2.1
BGP Commands
show ip bgp cidr-only

The show ip bgp cidr-only command displays routes without natural network masks, or Classless Inter-domain Routing (CIDR) routes.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip bgp cidr-only [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show ip bgp cidr-only [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
16-77
Release 5.2.1
show ip bgp community

The show ip bgp community command display routes that belong to specified BGP communities.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip bgp community [ <1-4294967295>/<aa:nn> | <LINE> | exact-match <LINE> | expanded | local-AS | no-advertise | no-export ] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show ip bgp community [ <1-4294967295>/<aa:nn> | <LINE> | exact-match <LINE> | extended | local-AS | no-advertise | no-export ] [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
1-4294967295 aa:nn the community number the extended community in the form AA:NN the first part (AA) is the autonomous system number and the second part (NN) is a 2-byte number an ordered list as a regular expression display routes that have an exact match extended access list format do not advertise this route to peers outside of the local autonomous system do not advertise this route to any peer internal or external
LINE exact-match expanded local-AS no-advertise
16-78
Release 5.2.1
BGP Commands
no-export
routes with this community are sent to
peers in other sub-autonomous systems within a confederation

16-79
Release 5.2.1
show ip bgp community-list

The show ip bgp community-list command display routes that are permitted by the BGP community list.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip bgp community-list {<1-99> | <100-199>} [exact-match] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show ip bgp community-list {<1-99> | <100-199>} [exact-match] [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
1-99 100-199 exact-match | begin exclude include WORD count count-only standard community list number extended community list number display routes that have an exact match turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
16-80
Release 5.2.1
BGP Commands
show ip bgp dampened-paths

The show ip bgp dampened-paths command displays BGP dampened routes.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip bgp dampened-paths [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show ip bgp dampened-paths [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
16-81
Release 5.2.1
show ip bgp flap-statistics

The show ip bgp flap-statistics command displays BGP flap statistics.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip bgp flap-statistics [<A.B.C.D>] [<A.B.C.D>] [longer-prefixes ] [filter-list <1-199> ] [ regexp <LINE> ] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show ip bgp flap-statistics [<A.B.C.D>] [<A.B.C.D>] [longer-prefixes ] [filter-list <1-199> ] [ regexp <LINE> ] [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D A.B.C.D longer-prefixes filter-list 1-199 regexp LINE | begin exclude network address in the BGP routing table to display displays all BGP routes matching the network address/network mask pair displays route and more specific routes number of an autonomous system path access list a regular-expression to match the BGP autonomous system paths turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string
16-82
Release 5.2.1
BGP Commands
16-83
Release 5.2.1
show ip bgp ipv4 unicast

The show ip bgp ipv4 unicast command displays IPv4 address family unicast BGP routing information.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip bgp ipv4 unicast [<A.B.C.D>] [<A.B.C.D>]] [longer-prefixes]]] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show ip bgp ipv4 unicast [<A.B.C.D>] [<A.B.C.D>]] [longer-prefixes]]] {<LINE>} [ | {count | count-only}] show ip bgp ipv4 unicast cidr-only [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show ip bgp ipv4 unicast cidr-only [ | {count | count-only}] show ip bgp ipv4 unicast community [ <1-4294967295> | <LINE> | exact-match <LINE> | expanded | local-AS | no-advertise | no-export ] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show ip bgp ipv4 unicast community [ <1-4294967295> | <LINE> | exact-match <LINE> | expanded | local-AS | no-advertise | no-export ] {<LINE>} [ | {count | count-only}] show ip bgp ipv4 unicast community-list {<1-99> | <100-199>} [exact-match] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show ip bgp ipv4 unicast community-list {<1-99> | <100-199>} [exact-match] {<LINE>} [ | {count | count-only}]
16-84
Release 5.2.1
BGP Commands
show ip bgp ipv4 unicast dampened-paths [ | {begin | exclude | include} show ip bgp ipv4 unicast dampened-paths {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show ip bgp ipv4 unicast dampened-paths [ | {count | count-only}] show ip bgp ipv4 unicast flap-statistics [<A.B.C.D>] [<A.B.C.D>] [longer-prefixes] [filter-list <1-199> ] [ regexp <LINE> ] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show ip bgp ipv4 unicast flap-statistics [<A.B.C.D>] [<A.B.C.D>] [longer-prefixes] [filter-list <1-199> ] [ regexp <LINE> ] {<LINE>} [ | {count | count-only}] show ip bgp ipv4 unicast paths [<LINE>] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}] show ip bgp ipv4 unicast paths [<LINE>] [ | {count | count-only}] show ip bgp ipv4 unicast regexp {<LINE>} [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show ip bgp ipv4 unicast regexp{<LINE>} [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D A.B.C.D longer-prefixes cidr-only network address in the BGP routing table to display displays all BGP routes matching the network address/network mask pair displays route and more specific routes displays routes without natural network masks, or Classless Inter-domain Routing (CIDR) routes displays routes that belong to specified BGP communities the community number
community 1-4294967295
16-85
Release 5.2.1
LINE exact-match expanded local-AS no-advertise no-export
an ordered list as a regular expression display routes that have an exact match extended access list format do not advertise this route to peers outside of the local autonomous system do not advertise this route to any peer internal or external routes with this community are sent to peers in other sub-autonomous systems within a confederation displays routes that are permitted by the BGP community list. standard community list number extended community list number displays BGP dampened routes displays BGP flap statistics number of an autonomous system path access list displays routes matching the regular expression regular expression to match BGP autonomous systems paths displays all BGP paths in the database turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string
community-list 1-99 100-199 dampened-paths flap-statistics filter-list 1-199 regexp LINE paths | begin exclude
16-86
Release 5.2.1
BGP Commands
16-87
Release 5.2.1
show ip bgp memory

The show ip bgp memory command displays BGP memory usage information. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show ip bgp memory command:
Mem Pool Size Free Used High Water Mark -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Bgp Node 116036 Bgp 32B 32 1024 ( 32768) 0 ( 0) 0 ( 0) Bgp 64B 64 1024 ( 65536) 0 ( 0) 0 ( 0) Bgp 128B 128 4096 ( 524288) 0 ( 0) 0 ( 0) Bgp 256B 256 16 ( 4096) 0 ( 0) 0 ( 0) Bgp 512B 512 15 ( 7680) 1 ( 512) 1 ( 512) Bgp 2048B 2048 512 ( 1048576) 0 ( 0) 0 ( 0) Bgp 8192B 8192 128 ( 1048576) 0 ( 0) 0 ( 0) BgpRte 40 16384 ( 655360) 0 ( 0) 0 ( 0) BgpRt 76 16384 ( 1245184) 0 ( 0) 0 ( 0) BgpExp 36 16384 ( 589824) 0 ( 0) 0 ( 0) BgpCB 2284 256 ( 584704) 0 ( 0) 0 ( 0) -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Total Free 5670K (5806592) + Used 113K (116548) = 5784K (5923140)
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip bgp memory [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show ip bgp memory [ | {count | count-only}]
16-88
Release 5.2.1
BGP Commands
Command Syntax
16-89
Release 5.2.1
show ip bgp neighbors

The show ip bgp neighbors command displays information about TCP and BGP connections to neighbors.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip bgp neighbors [<A.B.C.D> | global [<A.B.C.D>] | ipv4 [<A.B.C.D>] | vpnv4 [<A.B.C.D>]] [advertised-routes | dampened-routes | received-routes | routes] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show ip bgp neighbors [<A.B.C.D> | global [<A.B.C.D>] | ipv4 [<A.B.C.D>] | vpnv4 [<A.B.C.D>]] [advertised-routes | dampened-routes | received-routes | routes] [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D global ipv4 vpnv4 advertised-routes dampened-routes received-routes the IP address of a neighbor - if not specified, all neighbors are displayed displays all neighbors for global BGP routing/ forwarding displays all neighbors active in the IPv4 address family displays all neighbors active in the VPNv4 address family displays all routes advertised to a BGP neighbor displays the dampened routes received from BGP neighbor displays all received routes (both accepted and filtered) from a specific neighbor
16-90
Release 5.2.1
BGP Commands
routes | begin exclude include WORD count count-only
displays all routes that were received and accepted for the specified neighbor turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
16-91
Release 5.2.1
show ip bgp next-hops

The show ip bgp next-hops command displays BGP next-hop information.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip bgp next-hops [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show ip bgp next-hops [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
16-92
Release 5.2.1
BGP Commands
show ip bgp paths

The show ip bgp paths command displays all BGP paths in the database.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip bgp paths [<LINE>] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show ip bgp paths [<LINE>] [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
LINE | begin exclude include WORD count count-only regular expression to match BGP autonomous systems paths turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
16-93
Release 5.2.1
show ip bgp peer-group

The show ip bgp peer-group command displays information about BGP peer groups.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip bgp peer-group [<WORD> | global [<WORD>] | ipv4 [<WORD>] | vpnv4 [<WORD>]] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show ip bgp peer-group <WORD> | global [<WORD>] | ipv4 [<WORD>] | vpnv4 [<WORD>]] [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
WORD global ipv4 vpnv4 | begin exclude include display information about a specific peer-group; number of peers and groups displays all peer-groups for global BGP routing/forwarding displays all peer-groups active in the IPv4 address family displays all neighbors peer-groups in the VPNv4 address family turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string
16-94
Release 5.2.1
BGP Commands
16-95
Release 5.2.1
show ip bgp regexp

The show ip bgp regexp command displays routes matching the regular expression.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip bgp regexp {<LINE>} [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show ip bgp regexp {<LINE>} [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
LINE | begin exclude include WORD count count-only regular expression to match the BGP autonomous system paths turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
16-96
Release 5.2.1
BGP Commands
show ip bgp summary

The show ip bgp summary command displays the status of all BGP connections. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show ip bgp summary command:
BGP router identifier 150.31.108.1, local AS number 3 Message statistics: Open Update Notify Keepalive Route Refresh Total Rcvd 0 0 0 0 0 0 RcvdLast Sent 0 0 0 0 0 0 SentLast
New since last show 2w3d ago: none CONF/RCVD values: U IPv4 unicast, u IPv4 unicast (no capabilities) V VPNv4, M IPv4 multicast, L MPLS Neighbor AS CONF/RCVD MsgRcvd MsgSent TblVer Up/Down State/PfxUsed
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip bgp summary [ global | ipv4 | vpnv4] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show ip bgp summary [ global | ipv4 | vpnv4] [ | {count | count-only}]
16-97
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
global ipv4 vpnv4 | begin exclude include WORD count count-only displays all neighbors for global BGP routing/ forwarding displays all neighbors active in the IPv4 address family displays all neighbors active in the VPNv4 address family turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
16-98
Release 5.2.1
BGP Commands
show ip community-list
The show ip community-list command displays a configured community access list and associated elements. With the optional access list number argument, the command displays the specified community access list, if such a list exists. Without the optional access list number argument, the command displays all configured community access lists. The following is typical screen output from the show ip community-list command:
Community standard list 10 permit 100:100 permit 10000:10000 permit 1:35474 permit 100:1 permit 1:57920 Community expanded list 100 permit line
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip community-list [<1-99> | <100-199>]
Command Syntax
1-99 100-199 standard community list number extended community list number
16-99
Release 5.2.1
synchronization
The synchronization command enables IGP synchronization. The no synchronization command disables IGP synchronization.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

synchronization no synchronization
16-100
Release 5.2.1
BGP Commands
timers bgp
The timers bgp command adjusts BGP network timers. The no timers bgp command resets the BGP timing defaults values.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

timers bgp <0-21845> [<0-65535>] no timers bgp <0-21845>
Command Syntax
0-21845 0-65535 the frequency, in seconds, at which the software sends keepalive messages to its peer the holdtime interval, in seconds, which, after not receiving a keepalive message, that the software declares a BGP peer dead - the holdtime value is always three times the keepalive value
Command Syntax
keepalive = 60 seconds holdtime = 180 seconds
16-101
17
PIM Commands
Introduction
This chapter describes the Protocol-Independent Multicast (PIM) commands that are supported on the BSR 64000. The BSR supports PIM in sparse mode.
PIM Command Descriptions

This section contains an alphabetized list and descriptions of the PIM commands supported by the BSR.
17-1
Release 5.2.1
ip pim border
Use the ip pim border command to configure a PIM domain boundary on the interface of a border router peering with one or more neighbors outside the PIM domain.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip pim border no ip pim border
17-2
Release 5.2.1
PIM Commands
ip pim bsr-candidate
Use the ip pim bsr-candidate command to configure the BSR to be a candidate bootstrap router.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip pim bsr-candidate <0-32> no ip pim bsr-candidate <0-32>
Command Syntax
0-32 specifies the hash mask length from 0 to 32 bits.
Command Default
30 bits
17-3
Release 5.2.1
ip pim bsr-candidate ip-address

Use the ip pim bsr-candidate ip-address command to specifiy the IP address of a specific interface on the candidate Bootstrap Router (BSR).
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip pim bsr-candidate ip-address <A.B.C.D> <0-32> no ip pim bsr-candidate ip-address <A.B.C.D> <0-32>
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D 0-32 the interface IP address the hash mask length
Command Default
Hash mask length = 30 bits
17-4
Release 5.2.1
PIM Commands
ip pim dr-priority
The ip pim dr-priority command sets the priority for which a router is elected as the Designated Router (DR). When a DR is an election candidate, the router with the highest priority is elected as the DR. The DR priority is configured on the routers interface. If a DR priority is assigned on multiple router interfaces, then the interface with the highest IP address is used as the DR. If a router does not advertise its priority in its hello messages, the router is elected as the DR. If multiple routers have the highest priority status, then the router with the highest IP address configured on an interface is elected to be the DR. The no ip pim dr-priority command removes a router from the list of potential Designated Routers.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip pim dr-priority <1-255> no ip pim dr-priority <1-255>
Command Syntax
1-255 the DR priority
Command Default
The default DR priority is 1 (highest).
17-5
Release 5.2.1
ip pim message-interval
Use the ip pim message-interval command to specify the PIM router join/prune messages interval.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip pim message-interval <1-65535> no ip pim message-interval
Command Syntax
1-65535 join/prune interval in seconds
Command Default
60 seconds
17-6
Release 5.2.1
PIM Commands
ip pim query-interval
The ip pim query-interval command adjusts how often PIM router query messages are sent to other PIM routers. IP multicast routers send PIM query "Hello" messages to determine which router is the Designated Router (DR) for each LAN segment. The DR sends Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) host query messages to all hosts on the directly connected LAN. When PIM operates in sparse mode, the DR sends source registration messages to the Rendezvous Point (RP). The no ip pim query-interval command disables the PIM router query message interval to the default.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip pim query-interval <0-65535> no ip pim query-interval
Command Syntax
0-65535 the PIM router query message interval in seconds
Command Default
30 seconds
17-7
Release 5.2.1
ip pim rp-candidate
Use the ip pim rp-candidate command to configure and advertise the router as a single Rendezvous Point (RP) candidate on the PIM domain.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip pim rp-candidate no ip pim rp-candidate
17-8
Release 5.2.1
PIM Commands
ip pim rp-candidate group-list

Use the ip pim rp-candidate group-list command to configure one or more groups that are associated with this Rendezvous Point (RP) candidates on the PIM domain.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip pim rp-candidate group-list <1-99> no ip pim rp-candidate group-list <1-99>
Command Syntax
1-99 the access list reference number for group prefixes
17-9
Release 5.2.1
ip pim rp-candidate interval

Use the ip pim rp-candidate interval command to change the candidate Rendezvous Point (RP) advertisement interval.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip pim rp-candidate interval <1-200> no ip pim rp-candidate interval <1-200>
Command Syntax
1-200 the candidate Rendezvous Point interval in seconds
Command Default
60 seconds
17-10
Release 5.2.1
PIM Commands
ip pim rp-candidate ip-address

Use the ip pim rp-candidate ip-address command to advertise the IP address of a specific interface for the candidate Rendezvous Point (RP).
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip pim rp-candidate ip-address <A.B.C.D> no ip pim rp-candidate ip-address <A.B.C.D>
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D the IP address of the candidate RP
17-11
Release 5.2.1
ip pim rp-candidate priority

Use the ip pim rp-candidate priority command to specify the candidate Rendezvous Point (RP) priority for the BSR on the PIM domain.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip pim rp-candidate priority <0-255> no ip pim rp-candidate priority <0-255>
Command Syntax
0-255 the assigned priority of the candidate RP
Command Default
0
17-12
Release 5.2.1
PIM Commands
ip pim spt-threshold lasthop

The ip pim spt-threshold lasthop command configures when a PIM last-hop router should join the shortest path tree (SPT). This is determined by specifying a network traffic threshold. The no ip pim spt-threshold lasthop command restores the default value or changes the setting.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip pim spt-threshold lasthop {<0-4294967294> | infinity} no ip pim spt-threshold lasthop [<0-4294967294> | infinity]
Command Syntax
0-4294967294 infinity the traffic rate in kilobits per second never switch to the shortest path tree indicates that the Rendezvous Point (RP) always uses a shared tree
Command Default
1024 kbps
17-13
Release 5.2.1
ip pim spt-threshold rp
Use the ip pim spt-threshold rp command to specify the multicast traffic threshold that must be reached by the Rendezvous Point (RP) router before the distribution tree is switched over to the Shortest Path Tree (SPT).
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip pim spt-threshold rp {<0-4294967294> | infinity } no ip pim spt-threshold rp
Command Syntax
0-4294967294 the multicast traffic rate in kilobits per second (kbps) infinity indicates that the shared tree distribution control method is always used by the RP
Command Default
0
17-14
Release 5.2.1
PIM Commands
ip pim ssm
The ip pim ssm command is used to select the SSM range so that IP unicast source address and the multicast group address channel subscriptions from IGMP are ignored for groups outside the selected range. Once a range is specified, only Source Specific Join Messages within this specified range can be generated.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip pim ssm [default | range {<1-99> | <1300-1999>}] no ip pim ssm
Command Syntax
default selects the default address range 232.0.0.0 through 232.255.255.255 (232/8) for SSM applications and protocols. selects a range that uses a standard or extended access-list number.
range
Command Default
Disabled
17-15
Release 5.2.1
network
The PIM version of the network command enables IP networks for the PIM routing process. The no network command disables networks for the PIM routing process.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

network <A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D> no network <A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D>
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D A.B.C.D IP address of directly connected network PIM wild card bits
17-16
Release 5.2.1
PIM Commands
pim accept-rp
The pim accept-rp command configures the router to accept only Join or Prune messages destined for the specified Rendezvous Point (RP) for a specific list of multicast groups. The no pim accept-rp command removes the RP address. The multicast groups must be in the range specified by the access list. If no access list is provided, the default is all class D group addresses. When the group address is not in the group range, the RP will not accept Join or Register messages and will respond immediately to Register messages with Register-Stop messages.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

pim accept-rp <A.B.C.D> [1-99] no pim accept-rp <A.B.C.D> [1-99]
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D 1-99 The IP address of the RP. The access list number that defines which groups the RP is allowed to send Join messages. If not specified, the whole class D groups are subject to the check.
Command Default
Disabled
17-17
Release 5.2.1
pim graceful-restart restart-interval

If multicast data traffic is being forwarded in the active SRM, the same multicast data traffic will remain forwarded across an SRM switchover. For multicast data that is being forwarded in the slow path on the SRM, there will be a slight interruption of data as the new active SRM is taking over. This interruption should be less than 3 seconds. For multicast data that is being forwarded in the fast path, there should be no significant interruption of data forwarding as the fast path is not being reset across an SRM switchover. The pim graceful-restart restart-interval command provides a configurable PIM graceful restart interval that will complete the protocol relearn process which validates all the replicated forwarding entries after an SRM switchover. The no pim graceful-restart restart-interval command returns to the default value. Note: The BSR does not support multicast data forwarding across a SRM switchover for traffic learned from other multicast routing protocols except for PIM-SM and PIM-SSM. When the newly active SRM initializes, all multicast forwarding entries that are learned from protocols other than PIM-SM or PIM-SSM will be deleted when graceful restart completes. These traffic flows will be recreated as soon as new traffic arrives.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

pim graceful-restart restart-interval <30-180> no pim graceful-restart restart-interval
Command Syntax
30-180 the graceful restart period in seconds
Command Default
120 seconds
17-18
Release 5.2.1
PIM Commands
pim register-checksum
Use the pim register-checksum command to register a packet checksum type.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

pim register-checksum [ new | old ]
Command Syntax
new old use only IP and PIM Control Headers use complete IP packet length
Command Default
Complete IP packet length
17-19
Release 5.2.1
pim rp-address
The pim rp-address command configures the address of a static PIM Rendezvous Point (RP) for a particular group. The no pim rp-address command removes an RP address for a particular group.
Note: You must configure the IP address of RPs on all routers (including the RP router) if you use static RP.
First-hop routers send register packets to the RP address on behalf of source multicast hosts. Routers also use this address on behalf of multicast hosts that want to become members of a group. These routers send Join and Prune messages towards the RP. The RP must be a PIM router but does not require any special configuration to recognize that it is the RP. RPs are not members of the multicast group but serve as a "meeting place" for multicast sources and group members. You can configure a single RP for more than one group. The access list determines which groups the RP can be used for. If no access list is configured, the RP is used for all groups. A PIM router can use multiple RPs, but only one per group. Statically configured RP will take precedence over RP learned though a dynamic mechanism such as the bootstrap mechanism.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

pim rp-address <A.B.C.D> [1-99] no ip pim rp-address <A.B.C.D>
17-20
Release 5.2.1
PIM Commands
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D The IP address of the router to be a statically configured PIM RP. This is a unicast IP address in four-part, dotted notation. The number of an access list that defines for which multicast groups the RP should use. This is a standard IP access list. If no number is entered, then the default is the whole class D group range.
1-99
Command Default
No PIM Rendezvous Points are preconfigured.
17-21
Release 5.2.1
pim unicast-route-lookup
The pim unicast-route-lookup command retrieves routes from the BSRs unicast routing table.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

pim unicast-route-lookup no pim unicast-route-lookup
17-22
Release 5.2.1
PIM Commands
router pim
Use the router pim command to enter Router Configuration mode from Global Configuration mode and enable PIM routing.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

router pim
17-23
Release 5.2.1
show ip pim
The show ip pim command displays various PIM routing information. Use the show ip pim command to determine whether the session is active or not.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip pim bsr-router show ip pim interface [cable <X/Y> | count | ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y> | loopback <1-64>] show ip pim neighbor [<A.B.C.D> | cable <X/Y> | detail | ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y> | loopback <1-64>] show ip pim rp [<A.B.C.D> | mapping] show ip pim rp-hash <A.B.C.D> show ip pim unresolved-groups
Command Syntax
bsr-router interface cable X/Y count ethernet X/Y gigaether X/Y loopback 1-64 neighbor Bootstrap router (v2) information PIM interface information the slot and MAC Domain number of the CMTS module Internet multicast packet count Ethernet interface Gigabit Ethernet interface Loopback interface PIM neighbor information
17-24
Release 5.2.1
PIM Commands
A.B.C.D detail rp A.B.C.D mapping rp-hash unresolved-groups | begin exclude include WORD count count-only
IP address of a specific neighbor Shows all joins/prunes towards this neighbor PIM Rendezvous Point (RP) information IP group address show group-to-RP mappings RP to be chosen based on group selected information unresolved groups information turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
17-25
18
MPLS Commands
Introduction
Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) provides a mechanism for engineering network traffic patterns that is independent of routing tables. In a standard routed network (without MPLS), as a packet travels from a source to a destination, an independent forwarding decision must be made at each router along the path. As a packet travels through the network, each router analyzes the packet and determines the next hop router that the packet must be sent to in order for the packet to arrive at its final destination. With MPLS, a packet only has to be analyzed once it enters the network. As the packet is received at the first router in the network, the router assigns a short label to the packet. When the packet is forwarded to the next router, the label is included in the packet. At subsequent routers, there is no further analysis of the packets layer 3 address. Instead, the label is used to instruct the router how to forward the packet. An MPLS network consists of Label Edge Routers (LERs) and Label Switch Routers (LSRs).
The LER is responsible for classifying each packet based on some user-configurable policy (source, destination, port, QoS class, etc.), and assigning a label to the packet.
18-1
Release 5.2.1
The LSRs are responsible for forwarding the packet along the correct Label Switched Path (LSP) based upon the label. LSPs are configured from end-to-end across the network. In order for a packet to properly travel across the network, all routers in the path must be aware of the label for each packet and which LSP to send the packet on. LSPs are configured statically at each router along the path or dynamically using the Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP).
MPLS supports a variety routing protocols by creating end-to-end links across a network that serve as tunnels for all packets that need to travel to the same destination.
18-2
Release 5.2.1
MPLS Commands
About RSVP
Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) data transfer occurs between a router that serves as the links entrance point and another router that serves as the links exit point. RSVP is used in conjunction with MPLS to distribute MPLS labels. RSVP is a resource reservation setup protocol that is used by both network hosts and routers. Hosts use RSVP to request a specific quality of service (QoS) from the network for particular application flows. Routers use RSVP to deliver QoS requests to all routers along the data path. RSVP also can maintain and refresh states for a requested QoS application flow. RSVP is not a routing protocol, but rather is designed to inter-operate with current and future unicast and multicast routing protocols. The routing protocols are responsible for choosing the routes to use to forward packets, and RSVP consults local routing tables to obtain routes. RSVP is responsible only for ensuring the QoS of packets traveling along a data path.
MPLS Command Descriptions

This chapter contains an alphabetized list and descriptions of the MPLS commands supported by the BSR.
18-3
Release 5.2.1
clear ip rsvp statistics

The clear ip rsvp statistics command clears RSVP statistics for all interfaces or selected interfaces with RSVP enabled.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

clear ip rsvp statistics [ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y> | pos <X/Y>]
Command Syntax
rsvp statistics ethernet X/Y gigaether X/Y pos X/Y clear RSVP statistics for all or selected interfaces the Ethernet/Fast Ethernet IEEE 802.3 slot and port number on the BSR the Gigabit Ethernet slot and port number on the BSR the Packet over SONET slot and port number on the BSR
18-4
Release 5.2.1
MPLS Commands
clear mpls traffic

The clear mpls traffic command clears MPLS protocol statistics for the entire system.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

clear mpls traffic
18-5
Release 5.2.1
debug mpls forwarding

The debug mpls forwarding command enables debugging for MPLS forwarding. The no debug mpls forwarding disables debugging for MPLS forwarding.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

debug mpls forwarding no debug mpls forwarding
18-6
Release 5.2.1
MPLS Commands
debug mpls rsvp

The debug mpls rsvp command enables various debugging functions for MPLS RSVP protocol messages. The no debug mpls rsvp command disables debugging for MPLS RSVP protocol messages.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

debug mpls rsvp {all | path | resv | ptear | rtear | error} no debug mpls rsvp {all | path | resv | ptear | rtear | error}
Command Syntax
all path debug all MPLS RSVP protocol messages debug MPLS RSVP protocol Path messages each sender transmits Path messages downstream along the routes provided by the unicast and multicast routing protocols debug MPLS RSVP protocol Resv messages each receiver sends reservation request (Resv) messages upstream toward senders and sender applications and follow the reverse route of Path messages debug MPLS RSVP protocol PathTear messages - PathTear messages remove path states and dependent reservation states in any routers along a path and follow the same route as Path messages.
resv
ptear
18-7
Release 5.2.1
rtear
debug MPLS RSVP protocol ResvTear messages - ResvTear messages remove reservation states along a path and travel upstream toward senders of the session debug MPLS RSVP protocol PathErr and ResvErr error messages
error
18-8
Release 5.2.1
MPLS Commands
ip rsvp
The ip rsvp command is used to enable the RSVP protocol on an interface. The no ip rsvp command is used to disable the RSVP protocol on an interface. The ip rsvp command can also be used to enable message aggregation and to specify the interval in seconds between the transmission of RSVP bundle messages, hello packets, message acknowledgements, and refresh messages.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip rsvp {aggregate | bundle-time <1-30> | hello-interval <0-65535> | hello-misses <4-10> | msgack-time <1-65535> | refresh-time <1-65535> | summary-refresh} no ip rsvp {aggregate | bundle-time <1-30> | hello-interval <0-65535> | hello-misses <4-10> | msgack-time <1-65535> | refresh-time <1-65535> | summary-refresh}
Command Syntax
aggregate enable message aggregation which allows the bundling of multiple RSVP messages in a single RSVP transmission specify the maximum interval in seconds between the generation of bundle messages
bundle-time 1-30
hello-interval 0-65535 specify the value in seconds as to how often this MPLS link generates hello packets hello-misses 4-10 the number of sequential Hello acknowledgments that a node can miss before the LSP can be removed
18-9
Release 5.2.1
msgack-time 1-65535
specify the maximum interval in seconds between the acknowledgement of bundle messages specify the interval in seconds between the successive generation of refresh messages RSVP summary refresh
refresh-time 1-65535 summary-refresh
Command Default
bundle time = 10 seconds hello-misses = 4 msgack-time = 2 seconds refresh-time = 30 seconds
Note: Setting the hello-interval to "0" disables the transmission of hello packets.
18-10
Release 5.2.1
MPLS Commands
mpls create-lsp rsvp

The mpls create-lsp rsvp command creates a dynamic MPLS LSP using RSVP.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

mpls create-lsp rsvp <string> <A.B.C.D> [<A.B.C.D>] no mpls create-lsp rsvp <string>
Command Syntax
string A.B.C.D A.B.C.D the LSP name the destination IP address the source IP address
18-11
Release 5.2.1
mpls create-lsp rsvp explicit-route identifier

The mpls create-lsp rsvp explicit-route identifier command is used to create one or more named paths on an ingress router. The no mpls create-lsp rsvp explicit-route identifier command removes a named path.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

mpls create-lsp rsvp explicit-route identifier <string> [hops [<1-20>]] no mpls create-lsp rsvp explicit-route identifier <string>
Command Syntax
identifier string hops 1-20 the name of the LSP the number of hops - if not specified, the default number of hops is 10
18-12
Release 5.2.1
MPLS Commands
mpls create-lsp rsvp next-hop

The mpls create-lsp rsvp next-hop command is used to specify one or more transit router addresses and whether the route from the previous hop router is a direct path.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

mpls create-lsp rsvp <string> next-hop <A.B.C.D> { Loose | Strict } [ Last-Hop ]
Command Syntax
string A.B.C.D Loose the name of the LSP the IP address of the next hop router specifies that the route taken from the previous router to this router does not need to be a direct path, can include other routers, and can be received on any interface species that the route taken from the previous router to this router is a direct path and does not include any other routers - the IP address of the next hop router should be directly connected and should be one of the interface addresses in the LSP path the keyword that signifies that this is the last hop in the LSP configuration
Strict
Last-Hop
18-13
Release 5.2.1
mpls create-lsp static

The mpls create-lsp static command is used to create an MPLS LSP static route that uses push-label, pop-label, or swap-label operations. The no mpls create-lsp static command deletes an existing static LSP.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

mpls create-lsp static <lsp-path-name> {ip-to-mpls-push <16-1048575> <A.B.C.D> | mpls-to-mpls-push <16-1048575> <16-1048575> <A.B.C.D> | pop-label <16-1048575> | swap-label <16-1048575> <16-1048575> <A.B.C.D> [queue <0-3>]} no mpls create-lsp static <lsp-path-name>
Command Syntax
lsp-path-name ip-to-mpls-push 16-1048575 A.B.C.D mpls-to-mpls-push 16-1048575 16-1048575 A.B.C.D the LSP name perform ip-to-mpls push label operation push label adds a new label to the packet MPLS label to push on the packet IP address of the next hop router perform mpls-to-mpls push label operation push label adds a new label to the packet MPLS label to match the packet MPLS label to push on the packet the IP address of the next hop router
18-14
Release 5.2.1
MPLS Commands
pop-label
create an MPLS LSP static route that uses pop-label operation - pop-label removes the label from the beginning of the packet MPLS label to pop on the packet create an MPLS LSP static route that uses swap-label operation - swap-label replaces the label at the top of the label stack with a new label MPLS label to swap out from the packet MPLS label to swap in to the packet IP address of the next hop router QoS queue identifier
16-1048575 swap-label
16-1048575 16-1048575 A.B.C.D queue 0-3
18-15
Release 5.2.1
mpls fp max
The mpls fp max command sets the maximum number of MPLS fastpath forwarding entries. The configurable MPLS entries feature allows a user to increase the number of IP forwarding entries by setting a maximum number for MPLS forwarding entries. By decreasing the number of MPLS entries from 10,000, the number of allowable IP entries is increased. The no mpls fp max command restores the default value.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

mpls fp max <256-10000> no mpls fp max
Command Syntax
256-10000 the number of MPLS forwarding entries
Command Default
MPLS Fastpath Entries = 10,000
18-16
Release 5.2.1
MPLS Commands
mpls ip
The mpls ip command enables dynamic label switching and MPLS forwarding of IP (IPv4) packets on the interface. The mpls ip propagate-ttl command enables the traceroute command to show all the hops traversed by the MPLS packet in the network. When the no mpls ip propagate-ttl command is used, the hops will not displa on the output of the traceroute command.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

mpls ip [ propagate-ttl ] no mpls ip [ propagate-ttl ]
Command Syntax
propagate-ttl propagate IP TTL into the label stack
Command Default
time-to-live = 64 hops
18-17
Release 5.2.1
mpls label range

The mpls label range command allows you to specify an MPLS minimum and maximum label range for static or dynamic LSPs.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

mpls label range {dynamic-lsp | static-lsp}{<16-1048575> <16-1048575>} no mpls label range {dynamic-lsp | static-lsp}
Command Syntax
dynamic-lsp static-lsp 16-1048575 16-1048575 specify a label range for a dynamic LSP specify a label range for a static LSP the minimum label value the maximum label value
Note: A dynamic-lsp range can not overlap a static-lsp range.
18-18
Release 5.2.1
MPLS Commands
mpls mtu
The mpls mtu command allows you to specify the MPLS maximum transmission unit for an interface.
Group Access
All
Command Mode Interface Configuration Command Line Usage mpls mtu <64-65536> no mpls mtu Command Syntax
64-65536 the maximum transmission size in bytes
18-19
Release 5.2.1
mpls rsvp restart-lsp

The mpls rsvp restart-lsp command restarts an MPLS LSP specified by name. If no name is specified, the command restarts all configures LSPs specified in the running-configuration file.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC, Global Configuration, and Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Gigabit Ethernet, and POS interfaces only)
Command Line Usage

mpls rsvp restart-lsp [<string>]
Command Syntax
string the LSP name
18-20
Release 5.2.1
MPLS Commands
mpls ttl
The mpls ttl command changes the default time-to-live value used by the mpls ip propagate-ttl command. The no mpls ttl command restores the default value (64 hops) in the mpls ip propagate-ttl command.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

mpls ttl <1-255> no mpls ttl
Command Syntax
1-255 the time-to-live value
18-21
Release 5.2.1
show fast-path ranges

The show fast-path ranges command displays the IP Table Entry size and the MPLS Label entry size in the Fast Path. The following is typical screen output from the show fast-path ranges command:
FP Entry Type ------------IP MPLS
Range ----<0 - 54999> <55000 - 64999>
Group Access
All
Command Mode
All modes except for User EXEC mode
Command Line Usage

show fast-path ranges [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]]
Command Syntax
18-22
Release 5.2.1
MPLS Commands
show ip rsvp explicit-routed-lsps

The show ip rsvp explicit-routed-lsps command displays all LSPs created with the mpls create-lsp rsvp explicit-route identifier command.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip rsvp explicit-routed-lsps
18-23
Release 5.2.1
show ip rsvp interface

The show ip rsvp interface command displays the following running system interface information for the RSVP routing process: Interface State Neighbor Count Query Interval interface type, slot, and port number on the BSR 64000 the state of the interface - either "Up" or "Down" the number of routers connected to this interface the specified Hello Interval, in seconds, for this interface
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip rsvp interface [ ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y> | pos <X/Y> ]
Command Syntax
ethernet X/Y gigaether X/Y pos X/Y the Ethernet/Fast Ethernet IEEE 802.3 slot and port number on the BSR the Gigabit Ethernet slot and port number on the BSR the Packet over SONET slot and port number on the BSR
18-24
Release 5.2.1
MPLS Commands
show ip rsvp lsp

The show ip rsvp lsp command displays LSP information.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip rsvp lsp [ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y> | pos <X/Y>]
Command Syntax
18-25
Release 5.2.1
show ip rsvp neighbor

The show ip rsvp neighbor command displays the following running system information for current RSVP neighbors: Neighbor Address Interface Reduction Capable Uptime Expires Reduction Type IP address of the RSVP neighbor the interface on which Hello packets are sent to this neighbor refresh reduction creation - enabled or disabled the total time, in seconds, that the neighbor has been up the times, in seconds, that if a Hello packet is not received, this neighbor entry is deleted Summary Ref, Aggregate, or both
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip rsvp neighbor [ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y> | pos <X/Y>]
Command Syntax
18-26
Release 5.2.1
MPLS Commands
show ip rsvp reservation

The show ip rsvp reservation command displays the following running system RSVP-related receiver information: Senders Dest Tun-Id NHOP Style LSP Id the IP address of the sender the IP address of the receiver of this LSP the tunnel interface number or address to which packets with this label are going IP address of the next hop the reservation style the LSP ID used for sender identification
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip rsvp reservation [ ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y> | pos <X/Y> ]
Command Syntax
18-27
Release 5.2.1
show ip rsvp sender

The show ip rsvp sender command displays the following running system RSVP-related sender information: Source Addr LSP Dest Addr Phop Tun_Id LSP_Name Intf the IP address of the sender the number of LSPs the IP address to which the LSP is created the IP address of the previous hop the tunnel interface number or address to which packets with this label are going the user-defined name assigned to the LSP the interface on which this LSP is created
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip rsvp sender [ ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y> | pos <X/Y>]
Command Syntax
18-28
Release 5.2.1
MPLS Commands
show ip rsvp statistics

The show ip rsvp statistics command displays running system statistical information for the MPLS RSVP routing process.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip rsvp statistics [ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y> | pos <X/Y>]
Command Syntax
18-29
Release 5.2.1
show mpls filters

The show mpls filters command displays the MPLS filter table including the flow classification type (mpls-to-mpls-push, etc.) and the number of filters. The following information is provided: Dest Ip Address Src Ip Address Pro SP DP DS In If FT the destination IP address the source address in the packet the protocol the source port - either TCP or UDP the destination port Diff-serv Code Point (differentiated services) the incoming (Ingress) interface the flow classification type: PU = IP to MPLS Label Push PS = IP to MPLS Push Stacked IG = Ignore CAM use LME Lbl1 Lbl2 Out If Exp0 Exp1 Mac Mtu QId label 1 label 2 the outgoing interface the available experimental field class of service the standard experimental class of service the MAC address the change in the outgoing MTU Oueue ID used for POS
18-30
Release 5.2.1
MPLS Commands
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show mpls filters [ hitCount <NUM> | summary | vrf {<word>}] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show mpls filters [ hitCount <NUM> | summary | vrf {<word>}] [ | {count | count-only }]
Command Syntax
hitCount NUM summary vrf word | begin exclude include WORD count count-only the access list hit count and optional BSR chassis slot number summary of all MPLS Fast Path filters select a VPN Routing/Forwarding instance turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
18-31
Release 5.2.1
show mpls forwarding-table

The show mpls forwarding-table command displays the LSP forwarding table including the route label type and network. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show mpls forwarding-table command:
PU = MPLS Label Push, SW = MPLS Label Switch, LS = MPLS Label To SRM VRF IN Label OUT Lbl1 OUT Lbl2 Phys If ------ -------- -------- -------- ------1034 1035 1036 1037 1044 1045 1046 1047 ----------------RT -PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
PO = MPLS Label Pop,
Next Hop Ip MAC Address QId --------------- -------------- -------------------
HitCnt ------
0 0 2834493 0 0 0 6514681 0
The following information is provided: Label IN Label OUT Mtu Phys If the label assigned by this router the label assigned by next hop
the maximum transmission unit (MTU) of labeled packet

the interface through which packets with this label are sent
18-32
Release 5.2.1
MPLS Commands
RT
the forwarding flow classification type: PU = MPLS Label Push SW = MPLS Label Switch PO = MPLS Label Pop IP = MPLS Label to IP LS = MPLS Label To SRM
Next Hop Ip MAC Address QId
the IP address of the neighbor that assigned the outgoing label the MAC address (not valid for POS) the QoS queue ID
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show mpls forwarding-table [ hitCount <NUM> | summary | vrf {<word>}] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} | {count | count-only}] show mpls forwarding-table [ hitCount <NUM> | summary | vrf {<word>}] [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
hitCount NUM summary vrf word |
the access list hit count and optional BSR chassis slot number summary of all MPLS Fast Path filters select a VPN Routing/Forwarding instance turns on output modifiers (filters)
18-33
Release 5.2.1
begin exclude include WORD count count-only
filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
18-34
Release 5.2.1
MPLS Commands
show mpls label range

The show mpls label range command displays the configured minimum and maximum label range for both static and dynamic LSPs, as follows: Static LSP Min/Max label: X/Y the minimum and maximum label range for static LSPs
Dynamic LSP Min/Max the minimum and maximum label range for label: X/Y dynamic LSPs
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show mpls label range command:
Local label pool: Static LSP Min/Max label: 16/1023, Dynamic LSP Min/Max label: 1024/1048575
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show mpls label range
18-35
Release 5.2.1
show mpls lsp

The show mpls lsp command displays all configured LSPs on this BSR, as well as all the number of Ingress, Transit, and Egress routers that are part of an LSP. The show mpls lsp detail command displays the following information: Incoming label Outgoing label Prefix or TunnelId Incoming interface Outgoing interface Next Hop Status proto lspName initiator destination label stack the label assigned by this router the label assigned by next hop the address or tunnel to which packets with this label are going the interface through which packets with this label are received the interface through which packets with this label are sent the IP address of neighbor that assigned the outgoing label the status of the LSP - either up or down the protocol with which the LSP was setup either RSVP or Static the name of the LSP the source address of the LSP the destination address of the LSP all of the outgoing labels and associated label operations (PUSH/SWAP/POP)
18-36
Release 5.2.1
MPLS Commands
The show mpls lsp summary command displays the following information: STATIC : INGRESS : TRANSIT : EGRESS : Total : RSVP : INGRESS : TRANSIT : EGRESS : Total : Total LSPs : summary of static LSPs the number of Ingress routers that are part of this static LSP that are either up or down the number of Transit routers that are part of this static LSP that are either up or down the number of Engress routers that are part of this static LSP that are either up or down the total number of static LSPs with status either up or down summary of dynamic LSPs set up via RSVP the number of Ingress routers that are part of this LSP that are either up or down the number of Transit routers that are part of this LSP that are either up or down the number of Engress routers that are part of this LSP that are either up or down the total number of dynamic LSPs set up via RSVP with status either up or down
the total number of static and dynamic LSPs
Group Access
All
Command Mode
18-37
Release 5.2.1
Command Line Usage

show mpls lsp [detail | labels <16-1048575> <16-1048575> [detail] | lsp-tunnel <0-65536> [detail] | network <A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D> [detail] | next-hop <A.B.C.D> [detail] | summary ]] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show mpls lsp [detail | labels <16-1048575> <16-1048575> [detail] | lsp-tunnel <0-65536> [detail] | network <A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D> [detail] | next-hop <A.B.C.D> [detail] | summary ]] [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
detail labels 16-1048575 16-1048575 lsp-tunnel 0-65536 network A.B.C.D A.B.C.D next-hop A.B.C.D summary | begin exclude include WORD count count-only display detailed information match label values low label value high label value match specific LSP tunnel identifier destination IP address and network mask IP address of next hop display a summary of all LSPs turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
18-38
Release 5.2.1
MPLS Commands
show mpls lsp interface

The show mpls lsp command displays all configured LSPs on this BSR, as well as all the number of Ingress, Transit, and Egress routers that are part of an LSP that are associated with a specific interface.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show mpls lsp interface {ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y> | pos <X/Y>} [detail] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show mpls lsp interface {ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y> | pos <X/Y>} [detail] [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
ethernet X/Y gigaether X/Y pos X/Y detail | begin exclude include the Ethernet/Fast Ethernet IEEE 802.3 slot and port number on the BSR the Gigabit Ethernet slot and port number on the BSR the Packet over SONET slot and port number on the BSR display detailed information turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string
18-39
Release 5.2.1
18-40
Release 5.2.1
MPLS Commands
show mpls rsvp refresh-time

The show mpls rsvp refresh-time command displays the global refresh time.
Group Access
All
Command Mode All modes except User EXEC Command Line Usage
show mpls rsvp refresh-time
18-41
Release 5.2.1
show mpls traffic

The show mpls traffic command displays the following MPLS network traffic information: total header errors bad hop count runt unreachable no lsp other error the total number of MPLS packets that have been received counted when a MPLS packet is discarded because of error in the packet header counted when a MPLS packet is discarded because its time-to-live (TTL) field was decremented to zero counted when a MPLS packet length is too small to hold a single label counted when a MPLS packet is discarded because its nextHop is unreachable. counted when there is no LSP established to forward the incoming MPLS packet counted when a MPLS packet is discarded without processing, such as when MPLS forwarding is not enabled on this router or for some other reason the total number of MPLS packets that have been sent the total number of MPLS packets that have been dropped
forwarded drop
18-42
Release 5.2.1
MPLS Commands
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show mpls traffic command:
MPLS statistics: Rcvd: 1112 total, 0 header errors 0 bad hop count, 0 runt, 0 unreachable 0 no lsp, 3 other error Sent: 1109 forwarded Drop: 3 drop
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show mpls traffic
18-43
19
Introduction
Service levels provide a means of defining service flows with specific QoS parameters (such as maximum, minimum, or reserved traffic rates, priority, and service scheduling types) and binding them to a named service class. The concept of maximum assigned bandwidth, in the context of a service class, provides a means for controlling the amount of bandwidth that a particular service class can use on an interface. This allows a user to configure levels of service to support applications with specific bandwidth and priority requirements such as voice, video, and data and to further permit users to provide differentiated levels of service. Admission control is an authorization mechanism that provides a method of controlling the admission of service flows belonging to specific service classes on individual interfaces. Admission control is determined by the bandwidth percentage (maximum assigned bandwidth) and the amount of over-booking (configured active percent) allowed for a service class on an interface. The creation of service classes involves assigning service flows to a service class and providing all flows belonging to that class with a defined Quality of Service. DOCSIS 1.1 has defined a set of QoS parameters, a means for associating specific QoS parameter values to a service flow, and assigning service flows their QoS parameters by referencing a service class name. A set of pre-defined, default service classes are provided with the BSR 64000 and a user has the capability of modifying these default service class parameters.
Release 5.2.1
Entering Service Class Configuration Mode

Service Class Configuration mode provides access to the service class commands described in this section. To enter Service Class Configuration mode, do the following: 1. From Global Configuration mode, enter cable service-class and press the <Enter> key: MOT(config)# cable service-class <Enter> The command line prompt changes to: MOT(config-srvclass)# To return to Global Configuration mode: 2. Enter the end or exit press the <Enter> key: MOT(config-srvclass)# end <Enter> -orMOT(config-srvclass)# exit <Enter>
Service Class Command Descriptions

This section contains an alphabetized list and descriptions of the service class commands supported by the BSR.
19-2
Release 5.2.1
activity-timeout
The activity-timeout command specifies the timeout for active QoS parameters which is the maximum duration that resources may remain unused on an active service flow. The no activity-timeout command restores the default value.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

activity-timeout <WORD> <0-65535> no activity-timeout <WORD> <0-65535>
Command Syntax
WORD 0-65535 the user-defined service class name created with the name command the activity timeout value in seconds
Command Default
0
19-3
Release 5.2.1
admission-timeout
The admission-timeout command specifies the timeout for admitted QoS parameters which is the duration that the CMTS must hold resources for a service flow's admitted QoS parameter set while they are in excess of its active QoS parameter set. The no admission-timeout command a restores the default value.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

admission-timeout <WORD> <0-65535> no admission-timeout <WORD> <0-65535>
Command Syntax
WORD 0-65535 the user-defined service class name created with the name command the admission timeout value in seconds
Command Default
200
19-4
Release 5.2.1
admitted-bw-threshold
The admitted-bw-threshold command specifies the amount of admitted bandwidth, in percentage, for a service class on an interface. If this bandwidth threshold is exceeded, an event will be generated. The no admitted-bw-threshold command restores the default value.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

admitted-bw-threshold <WORD> <0-100> no admitted-bw-threshold <WORD> <0-100>
Command Syntax
WORD 0-100 the user-defined service class name created with the name command the percentage of admitted bandwidth
Command Default
0
19-5
Release 5.2.1
allow-share
The allow-share command provides the ability to share bandwidth between different service level classes. Enabling bandwidth sharing, allows the bandwidth of a service level class to be used as a bandwidth pool that can be shared by multiple service level classes.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

allow-share <WORD> <0-1> no allow-share <WORD> <0-1>
Command Syntax
WORD 0 1 the name of the service class disables bandwidth sharing enables bandwidth sharing
Command Default
Disabled for every service class.
19-6
Release 5.2.1
cable service-class
The cable service-class command enters Service Class Configuration mode from Global Configuration mode. To return to Global Configuration mode, use the end command.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable service-class
19-7
Release 5.2.1
cap
The cap command specifies the configured active percent (CAP) parameter for a service flow. This parameter controls overbooking for a service class. The no cap command restores the default value. The configured active percent of a service class is an estimation of what fraction, expressed as a percentage, of service flows belonging to that service class that will be simultaneously active on an interface.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cap <WORD> <0-100> no cap <WORD> <0-100>
Command Syntax
WORD 0-100 the user-defined service class name created with the name command the configured active percentage value
Command Defaults
Upstream Services Classes DefBEUp = 0 DefRRUp = 0 DefUGS = 100 DefUGSAD = 80 DefRTPS = 5 DefNRTPS = 5 DefEMUp = 100 Downstream Service Classses DefBEDown = 0 DefRRDown = 0 DefEMDown = 100 DefMCDown = 100
19-8
Release 5.2.1
clear cable srvclass-stats

The clear cable srvclass-stats command clears service class statistics on the BSR. These are the same service class statistics displayed with the show cable srvclass-stats command.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

clear cable srvclass-stats [<X/Y> <NUM> [DOWN | UP | <WORD>]]
Command Syntax
X/Y NUM DOWN UP WORD the BSR 64000 slot number and MAC Domain the port number on the specified MAC Domain clear downstream service class statistics clear upstream service class statistics the user-defined service class name created with the name command
19-9
Release 5.2.1
enforce-cmts-qos
The enforce-cmts-qos command enforces all service level parameters for all cable modems belonging to a service class regardless of the parameters specified in the cable modems configuration file. When MAB, CAP, and the maximum or minimum reserve rates are configured for a given service class, these parameters are overriden by a cable modems configuration file if the cable modem was configured after the service class was set up. The enforce-cmts-qos command overrides the cable modems configuration file QoS settings with the CMTSs service class configuration. The no enforce-cmts-qos command disables the cable modems configuraion file override. Note: The enforce-cmts-qos command will not override service flow TLV settings in cable modem configuration files for dynamically created service flows.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

enforce-cmts-qos <WORD> no enforce-cmts-qos <WORD>
Command Syntax
WORD the name of the service class
Command Default
Disabled
19-10
Release 5.2.1
grant-interval
The grant-interval command specifies the nominal time between grants. The no grant-interval command restores the default value. Note: Specifying a grant interval is only relevant for service flows using Unsolicited Grant Service (UGS ) or Unsolicited Grant Service with Activity Detection (UGS-AD) scheduling.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

grant-interval <WORD> <0-4294967295> no grant-interval <WORD> <0-4294967295>
Command Syntax
WORD 0-4294967295 the user-defined service class name created with the name command the grant interval in microseconds
Command Default
UGS = 10000 UGS-AD = 10000
19-11
Release 5.2.1
grant-jitter
The grant-jitter command specifies the tolerated grant jitter which is the maximum amount of time that the transmission opportunities may be delayed from the nominal periodic schedule for this service flow. The no grant-jitter command restores the default value. Note: Specifying a tolerated grant jitter is only relevant for service flows using Unsolicited Grant Service (UGS ) or Unsolicited Grant Service with Activity Detection (UGS-AD) scheduling.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

grant-jitter <WORD> <0-4294967295> no grant-jitter <WORD> <0-4294967295>
Command Syntax
WORD 0-4294967295 the user-defined service class name created with the name command the tolerated grant jitter in microseconds
Command Default
UGS = 2000 UGS-AD = 2000
19-12
Release 5.2.1
grant-size
The grant-size command specifies the unsolicited grant size. Grant size includes the entire MAC frame data PDU from the Frame Control byte to end of the MAC frame. The no grant-size command restores the default value. Note: Specifying an unsolicited grant size is only relevant for service flows using Unsolicited Grant Service (UGS ) or Unsolicited Grant Service with Activity Detection (UGS-AD) scheduling.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

grant-size <WORD> <0-65535> no grant-size <WORD> <0-65535>
Command Syntax
WORD 0-65535 the user-defined service class name created with the name command the unsolicited grant size in bytes
Command Default
UGS = 152 UGS-AD = 152
19-13
Release 5.2.1
grants-per-interval
The grants-per-interval command specifies the number of data grants per grant interval. The no grants-per-interval command restores the default value. Note: Specifying the number of data grants per grant interval is only relevant for service flows using Unsolicited Grant Service (UGS )or Unsolicited Grant Service with Activity Detection (UGS-AD) scheduling: for UGS, the value of this parameter indicates the actual number of data grants per Nominal Grant Interval for UGS-AD, the value of this parameter indicates the maximum number of Active Grants per Nominal Grant Interval
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

grants-per-interval <WORD> <0-127> no grants-per-interval <WORD> <0-127>
Command Syntax
WORD 0-127 the user-defined service class name created with the name command the number of grants
Command Default
1
19-14
Release 5.2.1
mab
The mab command specifies the Maximum Assigned Bandwidth (MAB) which is the amount of bandwidth a service class is permitted to use on an interface. It is expressed as a percentage of the total interface bandwidth capacity. The MAB of a service class is applied during admission control to determine whether to admit a new service flow and again by the packet schedulers to provide a class-based weighting to the scheduler. The no mab command restores the default value. Note: For scheduling purposes, each service class gets its bandwidth based on its MAB fraction relative to other classes, not based on the absolute value of the MAB. For example, if there are only two active service classes and both have the same MAB, each service class would get 50% of the bandwidth. The absolute value of the MAB is only used for admission control not scheduling.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

mab <WORD> <1-100> no mab <WORD> <1-100>
Command Syntax
WORD 1-100 the user-defined service class name created with the name command the percentage of bandwidth a service class is permitted to use on an interface
19-15
Release 5.2.1
Command Defaults
Upstream Services Classes DefBEUp = 10 DefRRUp = 10 DefUGS = 25 DefUGSAD = 5 DefRTPS = 5 DefNRTPS = 5 DefEMUp = 1 Downstream Service Classses DefBEDown = 10 DefRRDown = 10 DefEMDown = 1 DefMCDown = 1
19-16
Release 5.2.1
max-burst
The max-burst command specifies the maximum traffic burst size for flows belonging to a specific service class. The no max-burst command restores the default value.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

max-burst <WORD> <1522-4294967295> no max-burst <WORD> <1522-4294967295>
Command Syntax
WORD 1522-4294967295 the user-defined service class name created with the name command the token bucket size in bytes for this service flow - the minimum value is the larger of 1522 bytes or the value of Maximum Concatenated Burst size
Command Defaults
BE-DOWN = 3044 BE-UP = 3044 RTPS = 3044 NRTPS = 3044
19-17
Release 5.2.1
max-concat-burst
The max-concat-burst command specifies the maximum concatenated burst in bytes which a service flow is allowed. The maximum concatenated burst is calculated from the FC byte of the Concatenation MAC Header to the last CRC in the concatenated MAC frame. The no max-concat-burst command restores the default value.
Note: Specifying a maximum concatenated burst is only relevant for upstream service flows.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

max-concat-burst <WORD> <0-65535> no max-concat-burst <WORD> <0-65535>
Command Syntax
WORD 0-65535 the user-defined service class name created with the name command the maximum concatenated burst in bytes - a value of "0" means there is no limit
Command Default
All upstream non-UGS service classes = 1522
19-18
Release 5.2.1
max-latency
The max-latency command specifies the maximum allowable time for sending a packet from a CMTS network interface to an RF interface starting at the point the packet is received on the network interface. The no max-latency command restores the default value.
Note: Specifying a maximum latency value is only relevant for downstream service flows.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

max-latency <WORD> <0-4294967295> no max-latency <WORD> <0-4294967295>
Command Syntax
WORD 0-4294967295 the user-defined service class name created with the name command the latency value in microseconds
Command Default
0
19-19
Release 5.2.1
max-rate
The max-rate command specifies the maximum data rate the CM must adhere to and the CMTS must enforce. The no max-rate command restores the default value.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

max-rate <WORD> <0-4294967295> no max-rate <WORD> <0-4294967295>
Command Syntax
WORD 0-4294967295 the user-defined service class name created with the name command the maximum data rate value in bits per second
Command Default
0
19-20
Release 5.2.1
min-pkt-size
The min-pkt-size command specifies the minimum packet size in bytes reserved for a service flow. The minimum reserved rate (min-rate) must be set in conjunction with the minimum packet size for this service flow. The no min-pkt-size command restores the default value.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

min-pkt-size <WORD> <64-1522> no min-pkt-size <WORD> <64-1522>
Command Syntax
WORD 64-1522 the user-defined service class name created with the name command the minimum packet size in bytes
Command Default
128
19-21
Release 5.2.1
min-rate
The min-rate command specifies the minimum reserved traffic rate reserved for this service flow. The minimum packet size (min-pkt-size) must be set in conjunction with the minimum reserved traffic rate for this service flow.The no min-rate command restores the default value.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

min-rate <WORD> <0-4294967295> no min-rate <WORD> <0-4294967295>
Command Syntax
WORD 0-4294967295 the user-defined service class name created with the name command the minimum reserved traffic rate in bits-per-second
Command Default
0
19-22
Release 5.2.1
name
The name command creates a service class record with a user-specified name that is entered on the command line. The no name command deletes this service class record. Commands for specifying configuration parameters will use the service class name as the key word for distinguishing which service class record is being configured.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

name <WORD> [schedtype [be-down | be-up | non-rtps | rtps | ugs | ugs-ad]] no name <WORD>
Command Syntax
WORD schedtype the user-defined service class name, 1-15 characters in length specifies which upstream scheduling service is used for upstream transmission requests and packet transmissions best effort service on the downstream port best effort service on the upstream port non-real-time polling real-time polling unsolicited grant service unsolicited grant service with activity detection
be-down be-up non-rtps rtps ugs ugs-ad
19-23
Release 5.2.1
over-max-rate
The over-max-rate command allows the maximum sustained rate to be increased for voice calls. This command is only functional for downstream voice flows.
Note: A setting of 100% (the default) will have the effect of disabling rate limting for voice calls.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Service-Class Configuration
Command Line Usage

over-max-rate <0-100>
Command Syntax
<0-100>
the amount of increase, specified as a percent of the configured max rate
Command Default
100%
19-24
Release 5.2.1
poll-interval
The poll-interval command specifies the nominal polling interval between successive unicast request opportunities for this service flow on the upstream channel. The no poll-interval command restores the default value. Note: Specifying a nominal polling interval is only relevant for service flows using Unsolicited Grant Service with Activity Detection (UGS-AD), Real-Time Polling Service (RTPS), or Non-Real-Time Polling Service (NRTPS) scheduling.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

poll-interval <WORD> <0-4294967295> no poll-interval <WORD> <0-4294967295>
Command Syntax
WORD 0-4294967295 the user-defined service class name created with the name command the nominal polling interval in microseconds
Command Default
UGS-AD = 10000 RTPS = 50000 NRTPS = 50000
19-25
Release 5.2.1
poll-jitter
The poll-jitter command specifies the maximum amount of time that the unicast request interval may be delayed from the nominal periodic schedule for this service flow. The no poll-jitter command restores the default value. Note: Specifying a poll jitter value is only relevant for service flows using Unsolicited Grant Service with Activity Detection (UGS-AD) or Real-Time Polling Service (RTPS) scheduling.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

poll-jitter <WORD> <0-4294967295> no poll-jitter <WORD> <0-4294967295>
Command Syntax
WORD 0-4294967295 the user-defined service class name created with the name command maximum amount of delay in microseconds
Command Default
UGS-AD = 5000 RTPS = 25000
19-26
Release 5.2.1
req-trans-policy
The req-trans-policy command specifies:
which IUC opportunities the CM uses for upstream transmission requests and packet transmissions for this service flow whether requests for this Service Flow may be piggybacked with data whether data packets transmitted on this service flow can be concatenated, fragmented, or have their payload headers suppressed
For UGS, it also specifies how to treat packets that do not fit into the UGS grant. The no req-trans-policy command restores the default value.
Note: Specifying a req-trans-policy value is only relevant for upstream service flows.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

req-trans-policy <WORD> <0x0-0x7fff> no req-trans-policy <WORD> <0x0-0x7fff>
Command Syntax
WORD 0x0-0x7fff the user-defined service class name created with the name command the Request/Transmission Policy bit mask
19-27
Release 5.2.1
Command Default
BE-UP = 0 UGS = 0x7f UGS-AD = 0x7f RTPS = 0x1f NRTPS = 0
19-28
Release 5.2.1
restricted admission disabled

The restricted admission disabled command disables the admission of service flows in the admission restricted state. The admission restricted state is when a service flow is admitted when there is insufficient resources to meet its reserved rate and, subsequently, the flow only receives best effort service. The no restricted admission disabled command enables the admission of service flows in the admission restricted state.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

restricted admission disabled no restricted admission disabled
Command Default
Enabled
19-29
Release 5.2.1
schedpriority
The schedpriority command assigns a scheduling priority for a service class. The no schedpriority command a restores the default value. Each service class must be assigned a scheduling priority to determine the order in which service flows are serviced for transmitting packets (downstream) and generating data grants (upstream). Schedule priority is separate from the traffic priority parameter which is specified to differentiate priority for service flows with identical QoS parameter sets.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

schedpriority <WORD> <1-32> no schedpriority <WORD> <1-32>
Command Syntax
WORD 1-32 the user-defined service class name created with the name command the scheduling priority value
Command Default
1
19-30
Release 5.2.1
show cable service-class

The show cable service-class command displays a configuration summary for all service classes, including all default service classes, that are active on the BSR.The complete configuration of an individual service class can also be displayed. The following default service classes are supported:
DefBEDown DefRRDown DefBEUp DefRRUp DefUGS DefUGSAD DefRTPS DefNRTPS DefEMUp DefEMDown DefMCDown
downstream service class, no minimum rate downstream service class, non-zero minimum rate upstream best-effort service class, no minimum rate upstream best-effort service class, non-zero minimum rate upstream unsolicited grant service class upstream unsolicited grant service with activity detection service class upstream real-time polling service class upstream non-real-time polling service class upstream emergency call service class downstream emergency call service class downstream mulitcast service class
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable service-class command:
19-31
Release 5.2.1
Upstream Service Classes Service Class enforce admitted bw cmts-qos threshold -------------------------------------------------------------------------------DefBEUp 10 0 1 no no 0 DefRRUp 10 0 1 no no 0 DefUGS 25 100 1 no no 0 DefUGSAD 5 80 1 no no 0 DefRTPS 5 5 1 no no 0 DefNRTPS 5 5 1 no no 0 DefEMUp 1 100 1 no no 0 Total assigned bandwidth (mab sum): 61% mab cap priority allowShared
Downstream Service Classes Service Class enforce admitted bw cmts-qos threshold ------------------------------------------------------------------------------DefBEDown 10 0 1 no no 0 DefRRDown 10 0 1 no no 0 DefEMDown 1 100 1 no no 0 DefMCDown 1 100 1 no no 0 Total assigned bandwidth (mab sum): 22% mab cap priority allowShared
The admitted bw threshold field specifies the amount of admitted bandwidth, in percentage, for a service class on an interface. If this bandwidth threshold is exceeded, an event will be generated.
19-32
Release 5.2.1
The following is an example of typical screen output for an individual service class from the show cable service-class <WORD> command:
service class name: direction: schedule type: maximum assigned bandwidth: configured active percent: scheduling priority: admitted bw threshold: traffic priority: maximum sustained rate: maximum traffic burst: minimum reserved rate: assumed minimum rate packet size: maximum concatenated burst: active QoS parameter timeout: admitted QoS parameter timeout: tos overwrite AND mask: tos overwrite OR mask: request/transmission policy: allow sharing: enforce cmts qos:
DefBEUp upstream best effort 10 0 1 0 0 0 3044 0 128 1522 0 200 0xff 0x0 0x0 no no
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable service-class [<WORD>]
19-33
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
WORD displays the complete configuration of a user-defined service class created with the name command or one of the default service classes
19-34
Release 5.2.1
show cable srvclass-stats

The show cable srvclass-stats command displays service class statistics for a specified service class on a specified interface. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable srvclass-stats command:
Qos service class name: De Direction: upstream Interface slot/port/chan: 11/0/0 Total packets: 3187 Total bytes: 953566 Service flow counts: MacSlot/Port BGID Admit Defer Restrict Reject _________ ____ _____ _____ ________ __________ 11/0 NA 5 0 0 0 11/0 1 0 0 0 0 11/1 1 0 0 0 0 9/0 1 0 0 0 0 total 5 0 0 0
Admitted BW ___________ 0 0 0 0 0
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable srvclass-stats <NUM> <NUM> <WORD>
19-35
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
NUM NUM specify a CMTS slot number specify a CMTS downstream or upstream port number or a TX32 module slot number/downstream port number/downstream channel number - refer to the diagram following the Command Syntax table Note: The comma should not be entered as part of the command syntax. the pre-defined service class name or the user-defined service class name created with the name command
WORD
<0-7>
,
comma
4/[0-7]/[0-3]
TX32 Module Slot Number/ 2:8 CMTS Module Downstream or Upstream TX32 Downstream Port Number/ TX32 Downstream Channel Number Port Number
19-36
Release 5.2.1
tos-overwrite
The tos-overwrite command provides an "AND" and "OR" mask which the CMTS must use to overwrite the "type of service" field on all upstream IP packets on a service flow. If this parameter is omitted, then the TOS field will not be modified by the CMTS. The no tos-overwrite command restores the default value.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

tos-overwrite <WORD> <0x0-0xff> <0x0-0xff> no tos-overwrite <WORD> <0x0-0xff> <0x0-0xff>
Command Syntax
WORD 0x0-0xff 0x0-0xff the user-defined service class name created with the name command TOS AND mask TOS OR mask
Command Default
TOS AND mask BE-UP = 0xff UGS = 0xff UGS-AD = 0xff RTPS = 0xff NRTPS = 0xff
TOS OR mask BE-UP = 0 UGS = 0 UGS-AD = 0 RTPS = 0 NRTPS = 0
19-37
Release 5.2.1
trafpriority
The trafpriority command specifies the relative priority of service flows that have identical QoS parameters. The no trafpriority command restores the default value.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

trafpriority <WORD> <0-7> no trafpriority <WORD> <0-7>
Command Syntax
WORD 0-7 the user-defined service class name created with the name command the service flow priority value
Command Default
0
19-38
Release 5.2.1
ugs-stats-window
The ugs-stats-window command sets the UGS Flow Voice Call statistics sample period. The no ugs-stats-window command returns to the default value.
Note: The ugs-stats-window command specifies the sampling time period displayed in the show cable ugs-stats command output.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ugs-stats-window [<0> | <5-120>] no ugs-stats-window
Command Syntax
0 5-120 disables UGS Flow Statistics sampling sets the UGS Flow Statistics sampling time interval in minutes
Command Default
60 minutes
19-39
20
Introduction
Secure Shell server (SSH) is a program that allows remote hosts to login to the BSR over a non-secure network and execute commands in a secure manner. SSH provides strong authentication and secure communications over non-secure networks such as the public Internet. The SSH protocol uses TCP as the transport layer. An SSH server listens for connections from SSH clients on a well-known TCP port. An SSH client is launched from a remote host and connects to the SSH server. The SSH server and SSH client then handle key exchange, encryption, authentication, command execution, and data exchange.
Secure Shell Server Command Descriptions

This chapter contains an alphabetized list and descriptions of the SSH commands supported by the BSR.
20-1
Release 5.2.1
password ssh-passphrase
The password ssh-passphrase command establishes a password that must be specified by users attempting to establish an SSH session with the BSR. An SSH session will not be established if the correct password is not specified by the user. The no password ssh-passphrase command removes the password.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

password ssh-passphrase [0 | 7] <WORD> no password ssh-passphrase
Command Syntax
0 7 WORD specifies an UNENCRYPTED password specifies a HIDDEN password the password (31 character maximum, 78 character maximum for option 7) - enclosed with double quotes if the key contains spaces) the "%" and "!" characters must not be used
20-2
Release 5.2.1
show ssh config

The show ssh config command displays the following configuration information for an SSH session. SSH2 Secure Shell sshTaskId debugMode the SSH version number the task identifier for this SSH session "0" indicates that SSH debugging is turned off - "1" indicates that SSH debugging is turned on "1" indicates that SSH debugging is turned off - "0" indicates that SSH debugging is turned on the inactivity timeout value (in seconds) for SSH sessions to time out a specified with the ssh timeout command
quiet_mode
idle_timeout
portStr
the defined TCP port number for SSH to listen for incoming connections as specified with the ssh port command
the maximum number of allowed, simultaneous SSH sessions specified with the ssh session-limit command the number of authentication attempts that will be allowed for an SSH client attempting a connection as specified with the ssh password-guesses command the message authentication (data integrity) algorithm used for SSH sessions as specified with the ssh message-authentication command the cipher for the encryption of SSH session data as specified with the ssh ciphers command
max_connections
password_guesses
macs
ciphers
20-3
Release 5.2.1
subsystemString Private HostKey file Public HostKey file
the type of SSH server the private hostkey authentication filename the public hostkey authentication filename
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show ssh config command:
SSH2 Secure Shell 3.0.4 sshTaskId = 0x0 sshTaskFatalError = 0x0 debugMode = 0 quiet_mode = 1 idle_timeout = 300 portStr = 22 max_connections = 8 password_guesses = 3 macs = any ciphers = any subsystemString = subsystem-sftp sftp-server authenticationString = AllowedAuthentications publickey,password Private HostKey file = NVRAM:hostkey Public HostKey file = NVRAM:hostkey.pub Zlib compression level = 0 accessGroup = 0
Total SSH resources used=0, pty's tied-up=0
Note: To display modifications to the default SSH configuration, use the following command: show running-config | include ssh
20-4
Release 5.2.1
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ssh config
20-5
Release 5.2.1
show ssh hostkey-fingerprint

The show ssh hostkey-fingerprint command displays the fingerprint of a public key.
Note: The SSH server must be disabled to execute this command.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ssh hostkey-fingerprint {nvram: <filename> | flash: <filename>}
Command Syntax
nvram: filename flash: filename display fingerprint of public hostkey file stored in NVRAM display fingerprint of public hostkey file stored in Flash
20-6
Release 5.2.1
show users ssh

The show users ssh command displays information about active SSH sessions including SSH resource use and active calls.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show users ssh
20-7
Release 5.2.1
ssh ciphers
The ssh ciphers command configures a cipher for the encryption of SSH session data.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ssh ciphers [3des-cbc | aes128-cbc | aes192-cbc | aes256-cbc | any | arcfour | blowfish-cbc | cast128-cbc | none | twofish-cbc | twofish192-cbc | twofish256-cbc] no ssh ciphers
Command Syntax
3des-cbc aes128-cbc aes192-cbc aes256-cbc any arcfour blowfish-cbc cast128-cbc none twofish-cbc three-key triple DES in cbc mode, with 168-bit keys Advanced Encryption standard (AES) with 128-bit keys Advanced Encryption standard (AES) with 192-bit keys Advanced Encryption standard (AES) with 256-bit keys attempt all possible Ciphers, none excluded stream cipher with 128-bit keys Blowfish in CBC mode, with 128-bit keys CAST cipher in cbc mode no encryption alias for twofish128-cbc
20-8
Release 5.2.1
twofish192-cbc twofish256-cbc
Twofish in cbc mode with 192-bit keys Twofish in cbc mode with 256-bit keys
20-9
Release 5.2.1
ssh enable
The ssh enable command enables an SSH process. The no ssh enable command disables the SSH process. If SSH is disabled, all existing SSH sessions will be terminated.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ssh enable no ssh enable
20-10
Release 5.2.1
ssh-keygen2
The ssh-keygen2 tool generates authentication key files for the BSR Secure Shell Server. Host keys are required for the SSH Server and can either be generated in the BSR 64000 or generated on another BSR and copied over.
Note: The SSH Server must be disabled on the BSR 64000 before running the ssh-keygen2 tool.
Caution: The BSR 64000 Secure Shell Server only accepts host key files generated with the ssh-keygen2 tool. Keys files generated using the OpenSSH ssh-keygen tool will not work with the BSR 64000 Secure Shell Server. The ssh-keygen2 tool resolves interoperability problems associated with OpenSSH. A key file must be generated using the ssh-keygen2 tool for the BSR 64000 Secure Shell Server to interoperate properly with OpenSSH Secure Shell clients.
Group Access
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

ssh-keygen2 [bits <512-1024> | hostkeyfile {flash: <filename> | nvram: <filename>} | passphrase <WORD> | type {dsa | rsa}]
Command Syntax
bits 512-1024 hostkeyfile flash: filename specify the key strength in bits create private hostkey file name stored in Flash
20-11
Release 5.2.1
hostkeyfile nvram: filename passphrase WORD
create private hostkey file name stored in NVRAM set a password (31 character maximum,) for SSH connections - the "%" and "!" characters must not be used Digital Signature Algorithm key type Rivest-Shamir-Adleman public-key algorithm key type
type dsa type rsa
Command Default
bits = 1024 hostkeyfile = nvram: hostkey type = dsa
20-12
Release 5.2.1
ssh load-host-key-files
The ssh load-host-key-files command specifies a new private or public hostkey authentication file. The default hostkey authentication file names are hostkey and hostkey.pub. These two files must exist and must be valid key files. Use the UNIX ssh-keygen2 tool to generate a new hostkey authentication file.
Note: If the hostkey authentication files are invalid, SSH will not run.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ssh load-host-key-files {flash: | nvram:} {<filename>} no ssh load-host-key-files
Command Syntax
flash: nvram: specifies Flash memory as the location of the SSH hostkey authentication file specifies Non-volatile Random Access Memory (NVRAM) as the location of the hostkey authentication file filename of the hostkey authentication file stored in Flash or NVRAM
filename
Command Default
hostkey = hostkey.pub
20-13
Release 5.2.1
ssh logout session-id

The ssh logout session-id command will terminate an SSH session in progress. This command can be used when a user wants to reconnect using new configuration parameters.
Group Access
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

ssh logout session-id <0-7>
Command Syntax
0-7 the session-id number - the session-id is the number displayed with the show users ssh ssh command
20-14
Release 5.2.1
ssh message-authentication
The ssh message-authentication command specifies the message authentication (data integrity) algorithm used for SSH sessions.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ssh message-authentication [any | hmac-md5 | hmac-md5-96 | hmac-sha1 | hmac-sha1-96 | none] no ssh message-authentication
Command Syntax
any hmac-md5 hmac-md5-96 hmac-sha1 hmac-sha1-96 none attempt all possible MAC algorithms except "none" digest length = key length = 20 first 96 bits of HMAC-MD5 (digest length=12, key length=16) digest length = key length = 20 first 96 bits of HMAC-SHA1 (digest length=12, key length=20) no message authentication
Command Default
any
20-15
Release 5.2.1
ssh password-authentication radius

The ssh password-authentication radius command enables RADIUS services to be used for password authentication. The no ssh password-authentication radius command disables this feature.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ssh password-authentication radius [ local-password ] no ssh password-authentication radius [ local-password ]
Command Syntax
local-password authenticate with a locally configured password if there is no response from the RADIUS server
20-16
Release 5.2.1
ssh password-guesses
The ssh password-guesses command specifies how many authentication attempts (login and password exchange) will be allowed for an SSH client attempting a connection.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ssh password-guesses <1-5> no ssh password-guesses
Command Syntax
1-5 password guess attempt number
Command Default
3
20-17
Release 5.2.1
ssh port
The ssh port command configures SSH to listen for incoming connections on a defined TCP port number.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ssh port <1-65535> no ssh port
Command Syntax
1-65535 port number
Command Default
22
20-18
Release 5.2.1
ssh session-limit
The ssh session-limit command specifies the maximum number of simultaneous SSH sessions that the BSR accepts.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ssh session-limit <0-8> no ssh session-limit
Command Syntax
0-8 number of simultaneous SSH sessions
Command Default
8
20-19
Release 5.2.1
ssh timeout
The ssh timeout command specifies an inactivity timeout value for SSH sessions to time out. Specifying a value of "0" will disable time-out for SSH sessions.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ssh timeout <0-60>
Command Syntax
0-60 the timeout value in minutes
Command Default
5 minutes
20-20
21
Overview
The BSR fully supports the Cablelabs PacketCable 1.x and PacketCable Multimedia (PCMM) specifications. PacketCable Multimedia, building on the VoIP capabilities of PacketCable 1.x, provides an IP-based platform for delivering Quality-of-Service (QoS)-enhanced multimedia services over DOCSIS 1.1 and 2.0 HFC networks. Using PacketCable Multimedia, cable operators can offer subscribers, in addition to the VoIP telephony services available through PacketCable 1.x, additional services that include interactive gaming, streaming media, video telephony, and video conferencing.
Command Descriptions
This chapter contains an alphabetized list and descriptions of PacketCable and PacketCable Multimedia commands used with the BSR.
21-1
Release 5.2.1
cable dynamic-service authorization-mode

The cable dynamic-service authorization-mode command allows the cable interface to accept dynamic service. The no cable dynamic-service command rejects dynamic service on the cable interface.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable dynamic-service authorization-mode {auth_no_ecn02064 | authorize | disable | unauthorize}
Command Syntax
auth_no_ecn02064 authorize authorize Dynamic Service based on DQoS gates without PacketCable ECN 2064 support authorize CM initiated Dynamic Service based on DQoS gates, which only accepts DOCSIS DSX MAC management message types (DSA-REQ, DSC-REQ, DSD-REQ) from the CM that is authorized through DQoS. This argument is required when DQoS is enabled. reject all Dynamic Service accept all Dynamic Service
disable unauthorize
Note: ECN 2064 (dqos-n-02064) places additional requirements on the authorization of dynamic service requests by an MTA. Set this value if the MTAs connected to the cable interface do not support this ECN.
21-2
Release 5.2.1
Command Default
Disabled
21-3
Release 5.2.1
cable dynamic-service active-timeout

CMs dynamically allocate resources such as service identifiers (SIDs) and bandwidth by using a Dynamic Service Addition (DSA) transaction. If the CM fails to issue a Dynamic Service Deletion Request (DSD-REQ) to the cable interface or the DSD-REQ is being dropped for any reasons (e.g. due to noise), these resources could be held by the cable interface indefinitely. For this reason, an active timeout interval could be configured on the cable interface so that the cable interface can remove the dynamic service flows by issuing the DSD-REQs to the CM when the timer expires. The cable dynamic-service active-timeout command specifies an active timeout for dynamic service flows. The active timeout is the time since the dynamic service was used. As long as the dynamic service continues to receive at least one packet within this interval, the service is not deleted.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (cable interface)
Command Line Usage

cable dynamic-service active-timeout <0-65535> no cable dynamic-service active-timeout
Command Syntax
0-65535 active timeout value in seconds - "0" disables the active timer
Note: If the CM requests an active timeout for that dynamic service flow in the DSA-REQ, this active timer starts using the timeout value specified in the DSA-REQ.
Command Default
0
Release 5.2.1
clear configuration
The clear configuration command resets the Dynamic QoS, event message, electronic surveillance, or PacketCable Multimedia configuration parameters to the default settings.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
PacketCable Configuration
Command Line Usage

clear configuration [cops | dqos | em | es | mm]
Command Syntax
cops dqos em es mm set all COPS configuration parameters to their default values set all DQoS configuration parameters to their default values set all event message configuration parameters to their default values set the electronic surveillance feature to the default value. set all PacketCable Multimedia configuration parameters to their default values
21-5
Release 5.2.1
clear cops pdp-ip all

The clear cops pdp-ip all command removes all Policy Decision Point (PDP) IP addresses.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

clear cops pdp-ip all
21-6
Release 5.2.1
clear counters ipsec

The clear counters ipsec command clears the IPSec statistical counters.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

clear counters ipsec
21-7
Release 5.2.1
clear packet-cable cops

The clear packet-cable statistics command clears specific, inactive, or all COPS connections.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

clear packet-cable cops {<0-99> | all | inactive}
Command Syntax
0-99 all inactive shutdown specific COPS connection shutdown all active COPS connections clear inactive COPS connections
21-8
Release 5.2.1
clear packet-cable gate

The clear packet-cable gate command releases reserved or committed DQoS and Multimedia gates.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

clear packet-cable gate {all | cops <0-99> | dqos | identifier <0x00000000-0xffffffff> | mm | modem <mac> | slot <NUM> | subscriber <A.B.C.D> }
Command Syntax
all cops 0-99 dqos identifier 0x00000000-0xffffffff mm modem mac slot NUM subscriber A.B.C.D releases all gates releases a gate for a specified COPS Client handle releases all DQoS gates Gate Identifier in hexadecimal notation releases all Multimedia gates CM MAC address releases all gates associated with a specified BSR slot number MTA or Client IP address.
21-9
Release 5.2.1
clear packet-cable statistics

The clear packet-cable statistics command clears event messages, gate, or electronic surveillance statistical counters.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

clear packet-cable statistics [em | gate | es identifier {<0x00000000-0xffffffff>}]
Command Syntax
em gate es 0x00000000-0xffffffff event message statistics specify gate statistics ES duplicated packet and byte counts clear a specific ES identifier
21-10
Release 5.2.1
cmts-ip
The cmts-ip command specifies the network or loopback interface IP address used for the PacketCable protocols.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cmts-ip <A.B.C.D> no cmts-ip <A.B.C.D>
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D network or loopback interface IP address
Command Default
Any network or loopback IP address
21-11
Release 5.2.1
cops client-timer
If the show packet-cable statistics gate command output for the Client-Open Sent field in the COPS Statistics section is incrementing, the network and the PDP server need to be examined to determine the reason for the COPS Client timeouts. The COPS Client Timer (which is the response timer for sending the COPS Client-Open message) can be specified if COPS connections time out before receiving a Client-Accept message. The cops client-timer command specifies the time permitted for the BSR to receive the Client-Accept message from the PDP before terminating the COPS connection. The no cops client-timer command restores the default setting.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cops client-timer <1-3600000> no cops client-timer <1-3600000>
Command Syntax
1-3600000 COPS Client timer value in milliseconds
Command Default
3000 milliseconds
21-12
Release 5.2.1
cops pdp-ip
The cops pdp-ip command restricts COPS connections to a specific Policy Decision Point (PDP). A PDP is either the Call Management Server in the PacketCable architecture or the Policy Server in the PacketCable Multimedia architecture where a Client/MTA policy request is either serviced or rejected. The no cops pdp-ip command removes an IP address from the list. Note: If one or more PDP IP addresses are configured, only connections from these PDP IP addresses are accepted. Up to 100 trusted PDP IP addresses can be configured.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cops pdp-ip <A.B.C.D> no cops pdp-ip <A.B.C.D>
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D PDP IP address
Command Default
Any PDP IP address is allowed to make a COPS connection.
21-13
Release 5.2.1
cops pep-id
The cops pep-id command specifies the default Policy Enforcement Point (PEP) text string, that is used in COPS messaging, to uniquely identify the BSR within the PacketCable/PacketCable Multimedia domain The no cops pep-id command restores the default value.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cops pep-id <WORD> [<WORD>] no cops pep-id <WORD> [<WORD>]
Command Syntax
WORD COPS PEP ID string that is between 1 and 32 characters.
Command Default
"Motorola CMTS"
21-14
Release 5.2.1
cops status-trap-enable
The cops status-trap-enable command enables or disables the COPS status SNMP trap through the DQoSCopsTrap SNMP MIB object. If the COPS status SNMP trap is enabled, the BSR generates an SNMP trap when one or more of the following conditions are occur:

a keep alive timeout the COPS connection is disconnected a failure to establish a TCP connection a COPS connection is established an unauthorized PDP attempt to establish a COPS connection
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cops status-trap-enable {disable | enable}
Command Syntax
disable enable disables COPS status SNMP trap (if previously enabled). enables COPS status SNMP trap. The default is disabled.
Command Default
Disabled
21-15
Release 5.2.1
dqos dscp
The dqos dscp command sets a Differentiated Services Code Point for Dynamic Quality-of-Service (DQoS) Connections. The command adds a DSCP (TOS) byte value to all DQoS COPS connection packets locally generated by the BSR.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

dqos dscp <0-63>
Command Syntax
0-63 the DSCP value
Command Default
0
21-16
Release 5.2.1
dqos emergency-preempt
The dqos emergency-preempt command is used to select one or all of three emergency pre-emption options for admitting additional normal voice bandwidth for high-priority 911 calls. The no dqos emergency-preempt command returns the command default.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

dqos emergency-preempt [most-recent | oldest | random] no dqos emergency-preempt [most-recent | oldest | random]
Command Syntax
most-recent oldest random admits bandwidth from the most recent active normal voice calls admits bandwidth from the oldest active normal voice calls. admits bandwidth from random normal voice calls.
Command Default
Disabled
21-17
Release 5.2.1
dqos emergency-trap-enable
The dqos emergency-trap-enable command enables or disables an SNMP trap for Emergency Calls through the rdnPktDQoSEmergencyTrapEnable SNMP MIB object. If the Emergency Call SNMP trap is enabled, the BSR generates an SNMP trap if an Emergency Call is initiated.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

dqos emergency-trap-enable {disable | enable}
Command Syntax
disable enable disable Emergency Call SNMP trap (if previously enabled) enable Emergency Call SNMP trap
Command Default
Disabled
21-18
Release 5.2.1
dqos res-req-trap-enable
The dqos res-req-trap-enable command enables or disables a Resource Request SNMP trap through the DQoSResReq SNMP MIB object. If the Resource Request SNMP trap is enabled, the BSR generates an SNMP trap if a Resource Request from an MTA is invalid. This would include one or more of the following conditions:

an invalid gate ID (DSA-REQ contains an unknown gate ID) a missing gate ID (DSA-REQ is missing gate ID) requested resources are exceeded
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

dqos res-req-trap-enable {disable | enable}
Command Syntax
disable enable disable Resource Request SNMP trap (if previously enabled) enable Resource Request SNMP trap
Command Default
Disabled
21-19
Release 5.2.1
dqos shutdown
The dqos shutdown command disables Dynamic QoS (DQoS) and COPS operation on the BSR.The no dqos shutdown command enables DQoS and the COPS operation on the BSR.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

dqos shutdown [vrf <WORD>] no dqos shutdown [vrf <WORD>]
Command Syntax
vrf WORD the name of a specific VPN
Command Default
Disabled
21-20
Release 5.2.1
dqos t0-timer/t1-timer
If T0 and T1 timeouts are being counted in the show packet-cable statistics gate command output, the network and the PDP server need to be examined. T0 and T1 timers may need to be increased from their default values to avoid T0 and T1 timeouts. The dqos t0-timer and dqos t1-timer commands configure the T0 and T1 timers. The T0 timer specifies the period of time that a gate is allocated without being authorized. The T1 timer specifies the time that can elapse between the authorization and commit. The no dqos t0-timer and no dqos t1-timer commands restore the default values.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

dqos {t0-timer | t1-timer} <1-3600>
Command Syntax
t0-timer time, in seconds, that a gate ID can remain allocated without any specified gate parameters time, in seconds, that an authorization for a gate can remain valid number of seconds
t1-timer 1-3600
Command Default
t0-timer = 30 t1-timer = 250
21-21
Release 5.2.1
em dscp
The em dscp command sets a Differentiated Services Code Point for Event Message (EM) Call Data Connections. The command adds a DSCP (TOS) byte value to all EM COPS connection packets locally generated by the BSR.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

em dscp <0-63>
Command Syntax
0-63 the DSCP value
Command Default
0
21-22
Release 5.2.1
em element-number
The em element-number command specifies a unique event message Element ID for the BSR. The no em element-number command restores the default setting.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

em element-number <0-99999> no em element-number <0-99999>
Command Syntax
0-99999 Element ID number
Command Default
0
21-23
Release 5.2.1
em event-disable-mask
The em event-disable-mask command specifies a hexidecimal mask to disable event messages. The no em event-disable-mask command restores the default setting. The following table describes the QoS event message bit definitions. These hexidecimal values can also be combined. For example, QoS_Release and QoS_Commit event messages can be disabled by entering the hexidecimal number: 0x00040080.
Event Message
QoS_Reserve QoS_Release Time_Change QoS_Commit
Bit Definition (1 Based)

7 8 17 19
Hexidecimal value
0x00000040 0x00000080 0x00010000 0x00040000
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

em event-disable-mask <0x00000000-0xffffffff>
Command Syntax
0x00000000-0xffffffff set bits correspond to event message IDs being disabled
Command Default
0x00000000 (which is no mask)
21-24
Release 5.2.1
em event-priority
The em event-priority command specifies the priority of event messages generated from the BSR relative to other events. The no em event-priority command restores the default setting.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

em event-priority <0-255> no em event-priority <0-255>
Command Syntax
0-255 event message priority value
Command Default
128
21-25
Release 5.2.1
em flag-override
The Call Management Server directs the BSR (for PacketCable only) to send event messages to the Record Keeping Server in either batch mode (putting event messages together in a packet) or in realtime mode (sending event messages in packets as they come). The event flag, which tells the BSR to send event messages to the Record Keeping Server can be overridden. The em flag-override command forces the BSR to use realtime mode or batch mode regardless of what the Call Manager Server directs the BSR to do. The no em flag-override command disables event flag override.
Note: PacketCable Multimedia supports realtime mode only.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

em flag-override {batch | realtime} no em flag-override
Command Syntax
batch realtime send the event message in batch mode send the event message in realtime mode
Command Default
Disabled
21-26
Release 5.2.1
em max-batch-events
Event messages are batched together before being sent to the Record Keeping Server. The em max-batch-events command specifies the amount of event messages that are batched. The no em max-batch-events command restores the default setting. The collected messages are sent when the em max-batch-time parameter expires.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

em max-batch-events <2-32> no em max-batch-events <2-32>
Command Syntax
2-32 maximum number of batched event messages
Command Default
6
21-27
Release 5.2.1
em max-batch-time
The hold-time for batched event messages can be specified to allow more time so that multiple event messages are combined into one packet to reduce network traffic. The em max-batch-time command specifies the interval that the batched event messages are held before they are sent to the Record Keeping Server. The no em max-batch-time command restores the default setting.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

em max-batch-time <1-60> no em max-batch-time <1-60>
Command Syntax
1-60 maximum time in seconds
Command Default
10
21-28
Release 5.2.1
em qos-descriptor-disable
The QoS Descriptor attribute can be disabled if an MSO administrator decides it does not need it because it wants to reduce the event message size for network traffic management purposes. The QoS descriptor attribute contains the Service Class profile name and QoS parameters. The em qos-descriptor-disable command disables the QoS Descriptor attribute. The no em qos-descriptor-disable command enables the QoS Descriptor.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

em qos-descriptor-disable no em qos-descriptor-disable
Command Default
Enabled
21-29
Release 5.2.1
em retry-count
If an Accounting-Response event message is not received by the BSR from the Record Keeping Server, the BSR sends the event message again. Once all retries are exhausted, the BSR tries an alternate Record Keeping Server (if one is available). The network and the Record Keeping Server should be examined to determine the reason for these timeouts. The event message retry count can be specified depending on the amount of network congestion and the distance between the BSR and the Record Keeping Server. For example, if network congestion causes reported timeouts in the Account Request Failure field in the show packet-cable statistics command output, the event message retry count may need to be changed. The em retry-count command specifies the number of retries that should occur before the BSR tries an alternate Record Keeping Server. The no em retry-count command restores the default setting.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

em retry-count <0-16> no em retry-count <0-16>
Command Syntax
0-16 maximum number of retransmissions for each Record Keeping Server
Command Default
3
21-30
Release 5.2.1
em retry-interval
The event message retry interval can be configured depending on the amount of network congestion and the distance between the BSR and the Record Keeping Server. For example, if the distance caused a time delay, the event message retry interval can be extended from the default value to allow more time for the BSR to receive an Accounting-Response message. The network and the Record Keeping Server should be examined to determine the reason for these timeouts. In most cases the em retry-count command parameter should be increased before the em retry-interval command parameter is modified. The em retry-interval command specifies the event message retry interval for receiving an Accounting Response. The no em retry-interval command restores the default value.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

em retry-interval <1-3600> no em retry-interval
Command Syntax
1-3600 retry interval in seconds
Command Default
2
21-31
Release 5.2.1
em rks-failure-trap-enable
The em rks-failure-trap-enable command enables/disables PacketCable EM RKS Failure traps. PacketCable EM RKS Failure traps are generated if an Accounting-Response event message is not received by the BSR from the Record Keeping Server (RKS) after the BSR sends the RKS an Accounting-Request event message. The RKS stores event messages which are used by applications for billing, settlements, network usage monitoring, and fraud detection purposes. If an Accounting-Response event message from the RKS is not received by the BSR , the BSR re-sends the Accounting-Request event message according to a pre-configured retry count. If the retry count is exceeded without a returned Accounting-Response event message, the BSR tries an alternate (secondary) RKS if one is available. A PacketCable EM RKS Failure trap is generated if the Accounting-Request event mesage retry count has been exceeded for both the Primary RKS and the optional Secondary RKS. The event message retry count is specified on the BSR with the em retry-count command. If PacketCable EM RKS Failure traps are being generated, the event message retry count may need to be increased. Repeated Accounting-Request event message failures may indicate too much network congestion and/or distance between the BSR and the RKS. The number of Accounting-Request event message failures can be viewed through the Account Request Failure field in the show packet-cable statistics em command output.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

em rks-failure-trap-enable { disable | enable } no em rks-failure-trap-enable { disable | enable }
21-32
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
disable enable disables the PacketCable EM RKS Failure trap enables the PacketCable EM RKS Failure trap
Command Default
Disabled
21-33
Release 5.2.1
em shutdown
The em shutdown command disables event messages generated from the BSR if they are not needed. The no em shutdown command enables event messages.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

em shutdown no em shutdown
Command Default
Enabled
21-34
Release 5.2.1
em udp-port
If the default UDP port is already in use, another UDP port can be specified for PacketCable event messages. A different UDP port can also be specified for event messages because of security reasons. The em udp-port command specifies a UDP port number for event messages. The no em udp-port command restores the default setting.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

em udp-port <1-65535> no em udp-port <1-65535>
Command Syntax
1-65535 UDP port number for event messages.
Command Default
1813
21-35
Release 5.2.1
es
The no es shutdown command enables electronic surveillance. The es shutdown command disables electronic surveillance. The es ccc-source-port command specifies the UDP source port number for Electronic Surveillance Call Content Connections. Changes made to the ccc-source-port configuration are displayed with the show packet-cable configuration es and show running-config commands. The no es ccc-source-port command removes a non-default ccc-source-port configuration and re-establishes the default ccc-source-port configuration of 60000. The es trap-enable enable command enables the electronic surveillance SNMP trap. The no es trap-enable disable command disables the electronic surveillance SNMP trap.
Note: Electronic surveillance conforms to Communications Assistance for Law Enforcement Act (CALEA) requirements.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

es {ccc-source-port <0-65535> | shutdown | trap-enable {disable | enable}} no es {ccc-source-port <0-65535> | shutdown | trap-enable {disable | enable}}
21-36
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
ccc-source-port 0-65535 shutdown trap-enable {disable | enable} the UDP source port number for Electronic Surveillance Call Content Connections Shutdown electronic surveillance functionality Enable/disable the electronic surveillance SNMP trap
Command Default
Electronic Surveillance = disabled
21-37
Release 5.2.1
es ccc-dscp
The es ccc-dscp command sets a Differentiated Services Code Point for Electronic Surveillance (ES) Call Content Connections. The command adds a DSCP (TOS) byte value to all ES COPS connection packets locally generated by the BSR.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

es ccc-dscp <0-63>
Command Syntax
0-63 the DSCP value
Command Default
0
21-38
Release 5.2.1
ike client-addr
The ike client-addr command specifies the IP address used by the BSR for its source address during IKE protocol exchanges.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
IPSec Configuration
Command Line Usage

ike client-addr <A.B.C.D>
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D host IP address used for IKE
21-39
Release 5.2.1
ike phase1
The IKE Phase 1 Lifetime Interval and IKE Phase 1 Lifesize can be specified to enhance security. These settings determine how long the key is exposed. For example, an MSO administrator can decide to update this key on a regular basis to prevent successful hacking. The ike phase1 command specifies the IKE phase 1 lifetime value and the lifesize value that can either trigger or prevent the expiration of the IKE security association:
Group Access
All
Command Mode
IPSec Configuration
Command Line Usage

ike phase1 [lifetime <0, 300-2592000> | lifesize <0, 10240-4190000>]
Command Syntax
0, 300-2592000 0, 10240-4190000 lifetime interval value in seconds - "0" indicates an unlimited lifetime lifesize value in kilobytes - "0" indicates an unlimited lifesize
Command Default
Lifetime is 28800. Lifesize is 0, which indicates an unlimited size in kilobytes.
21-40
Release 5.2.1
ike phase2
The IKE Phase 2 Lifetime Interval and IKE Phase 2 Lifesize can be specified to enhance security. These settings determine how long the key is exposed. For example, an MSO administrator can decide to update this key on a regular basis to prevent successful hacking. The ike phase2 command specifies the IKE phase 2 lifetime value and lifesize value for the lifetime:
Group Access
All
Command Mode
IPSec Configuration
Command Line Usage

ike phase2 [lifetime <300-2592000> | lifesize <0, 10240-4190000>]
Command Syntax
300-2592000 0, 10240-4190000 lifetime interval value in seconds lifesize value in kilobytes - "0" indicates an unlimited lifesize
Command Default
Lifetime is 28800 Lifesize is 0, which indicates an unlimited size in kilobytes.
21-41
Release 5.2.1
ike retries
The number of IKE retries can be specified for network problems. Observe the number of IKE retries in the show ipsec ike command output. If the number of IKE retries is increasing, then the network and server should be examined to determine the reason for the excessive number of IKE retries. The ike retries command specifies the number of IKE retries.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
IPSec Configuration
Command Line Usage

ike retries <1-10>
Command Syntax
1-10 number of retransmissions
Command Default
3
21-42
Release 5.2.1
ike timeout
The IKE retransmission timeout interval can be specified for network problems. Observe the number of IKE timeouts in the show ipsec ike command output. If the number of IKE timeouts is increasing, then the network and server should be examined to determine the reason for the excessive number of IKE timeouts. The ike timeout command specifies the IKE retransmission timeout interval.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
IPSec Configuration
Command Line Usage

ike timeout <1-20>
Command Syntax
1-20 timeout value in seconds
Command Default
10
21-43
Release 5.2.1
ipsec
The ipsec command accesses IPSec Configuration mode from Global Configuration mode.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ipsec
21-44
Release 5.2.1
ipsec shutdown
The ipsec shutdown command disables IPSecIKE for the BSR.The no ipsec shutdown command enables IPSec/IKE for the BSR. Note: For the initial configuration of IPSec/IKE, the IPSec configurable parameters should be configured, before IPSec is enabled. At a minimum, the ike client-addr command should be configured prior to enabling IPSec.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
IPSec Configuration
Command Line Usage

ipsec shutdown no ipsec shutdown
Command Default
Disabled
21-45
Release 5.2.1
mm dscp
The mm dscp command sets a Differentiated Services Code Point for Multimedia (MM) Connections. The command adds a DSCP (TOS) byte value to all MM COPS connection packets locally generated by the BSR.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

mm dscp <0-63>
Command Syntax
0-63 the DSCP value
Command Default
0
21-46
Release 5.2.1
mm shutdown
The mm shutdown command disables PacketCable Multimedia and COPS operation on the BSR. The no mm shutdown command enables PacketCable Multimedia and COPS operation on the BSR.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

mm shutdown no mm shutdown
Command Default
Disabled (shut down)
21-47
Release 5.2.1
mm t1-timer
The mm t1-timer command specifies the Multimedia Gate Timer T1 interval that elapses between authorizing and reserving a PacketCable Multimedia gate. The multimedia T1 timer starts when a gate is authorized. The Multimedia T1 timer is stopped when an operation is performed (e.g. The gate state is switched). On expiration of this timer, the BSR deletes the gate. The no mm t1-timer command restores the default setting.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

mm t1-timer <1-3600> no mm t1-timer <1-3600>
Command Syntax
1-3600 T1 timer in seconds
Command Default
200 seconds
21-48
Release 5.2.1
packet-cable
The packet-cable command is used to access PacketCable Configuration mode from Global Configuration mode.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

packet-cable
21-49
Release 5.2.1
show cable dynamic-service

The show cable dynamic-service command displays the dynamic service configuration status for the cable interfaces. The following provides typical screen output from the show cable dynamic-service command:
Cable dynamic-service auth-mode: authorize Cable dynamic-service active-timeout: 0 Cable dynamic-service loadbalance: disable
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable dynamic-service
21-50
Release 5.2.1
show ipsec
The show ipsec command displays the configuration of IKE, IPSec, Security Association Database (SADB), Security Policy Database (SPD), SPD preshared-keys, or SPD Policies. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show ipsec sadb policy command:
SADB: Initialized = false Outbound DB Outbound Tunnel DB Inbound ESP DB Inbound AH DB Inbound Other Protocol DB
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show ipsec spd policy command:
Index Source Address Processing Indicator 1 150.31.40.10 Apply 2 150.31.50.10 Apply 3 0.0.0.0:0.0.0.0 ByPass 4 0.0.0.0-255.255.255.255 ByPass 5 0.0.0.0-255.255.255.255 Discard
Destination Address IPsec Mode 150.31.50.10 Transport Mode 150.31.40.10 Transport Mode 0.0.0.0:0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0-255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0-255.255.255.255
SPort Proto 0 0 0 0 0 0 500 17 0 0
DPort Handle 0 3 0 4 0 5 500 1 0 2
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show ipsec ike command:
21-51
Release 5.2.1
IKE: Initialized = false Timeout in seconds = 0 Number of retries = 0 IKE Client IP Address = 150.31.50.10 IKE Phase1 Lifetime in Seconds = 28800 IKE Phase1 Lifesize in Kilobytes = 0 IKE Phase2 Lifetime in Seconds = 28800 IKE Phase2 Lifesize in Kilobytes = 0
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show ipsec ipsec command:
IPsec: Initialized = false IPsec Retain DF bit = disabled IPsec IPsec IPsec IPsec Bypass : Outbound Ah : Outbound ESP : Output(total): 0 0 0 0 Ipsec IPsec IPsec IPsec Discard : Inbound Ah : Inbound ESP : Input(total): 0 0 0 0
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ipsec {ike | ipsec | sadb | spd [policy | preshared-key]}
21-52
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
ike ipsec sadb spd policy preshared-key display IKE-specific configuration display IPSec-specific configuration display the Security Association Database (SADB) configuration display SPD-specific configuration display SPD policy configuration display SPD preshared-key and IP address configuration
21-53
Release 5.2.1
show packet-cable configuration

The show packet-cable configuration command displays COPS, DQoS, event messaging, electronic surveillance, and PacketCable Multimedia configuration information. The following provides typical screen output and output field descriptions for the show packet-cable configuration command:
PacketCable Configuration ------------------------CMTS IP address: 150.31.50.10 COPS Configuration -----------------PEP ID: Motorola CMTS Client Timer: 4000 milliseconds Status trap: disabled Dynamic QoS Configuration ------------------------DQoS is enabled T0 Timer: 30 seconds T1 Timer: 60 seconds Resource Request trap: disabled Emergency trap: disabled Multimedia Configuration -----------------------MM is enabled T1 Timer: 300 seconds
PacketCable Configuration COPS Configuration
display the cable (CMTS) interface IP address. display the PEP ID, Client Timer, and if the Status SNMP trap is enabled or disabled.
21-54
Release 5.2.1
PDP IP Address
display the Policy Decision Point (PDP) for one or more Call Management Servers (PacketCable architecture) or Policy Server(s) (PSs) (PacketCable Multimedia architecture)
Dynamic QoS Configuration displays if DQoS is enabled or disabled, T0 and T1 timer parameters, and whether the COPS status and Resource Request SNMP traps are enabled or disabled. Multimedia Configuration displays if PacketCable Multimedia is enabled or disabled and the configured T1 Timer interval. displays if event messages are enabled or disabled and other event message configuration parameters displays if ES is enabled or disabled and if the ES status SNMP trap is enabled or disabled.
Event Message Configuration Electronic Surveillance Configuration
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show packet-cable configuration cops command:
COPS Configuration -----------------PEP ID: Motorola CMTS Client Timer: 4000 milliseconds Status trap: disabled
21-55
Release 5.2.1
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show packet-cable configuration dqos command:
Dynamic QoS Configuration ------------------------DQoS is enabled T0 Timer: 30 seconds T1 Timer: 60 seconds Resource Request trap: disabled Emergency trap: disabled
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show packet-cable configuration em command:
Event Message Configuration --------------------------EM is enabled UDP Port Number: 1813 Element Number: 0 Event Priority: 128 Retry Interval: 2 seconds Retry Count: 3 Maximum Batch Events: 6 Maximum Batch Time: 10 seconds Event Disable Mask: 0x00000000 Flag Override: None QoS Descriptor: enabled
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show packet-cable configuration es command:
21-56
Release 5.2.1
MOT:7A#show packet-cable configuration es Electronic Surveillance Configuration ------------------------------------ES is disabled ES trap: disabled
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show packet-cable configuration mm command:
Multimedia Configuration -----------------------MM is enabled T1 Timer: 300 seconds
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show packet-cable configuration [cops | dqos | em | es | mm]
Command Syntax
cops dqos em display the COPS configuration and status information display DQoS configuration and status information display event message configuration and status information
21-57
Release 5.2.1
es mm
display electronic surveillance configuration and status information

display PacketCable Multimedia T1 timer interval and PacketCable Multimedia status information.
21-58
Release 5.2.1
show packet-cable cops

The show packet-cable cops command display all COPS connections, which includes the COPS Client handle, PDP IP address, port number, keep-alive timeout, and duration time. The following provides typical screen output from the show packet-cable cops command and output field descriptions:
COPS Connection Information ---------------------------------------------------------------------------| Handle | Type | IP Address | Port | Keep-Alive Timeout | Connected Time | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------0 DQoS 172.50.1.100 52287 60 01:05:02 1 MM 150.31.1.143 46351 30 01:05:02 4 MM 150.31.1.140 59970 60 00:49:25
Handle CMS IP Address Port Number Keep-Alive Timeout
COPS handle ID PDP IP address Socket connection port number. Keep-Alive timeout interval between when a Keep-Alive packet is sent and received for a COPS connection. time (days and hours) the COPS connection has been active. If a COPS handle has been disconnected it display "disconnected".
Duration Time
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show packet-cable cops [inactive]
21-59
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
inactive specify the COPS Client(s) that are inactive
21-60
Release 5.2.1
show packet-cable gate

The show packet-cable gate command displays currently allocated packet cable DQoS and Multimedia gates. The following table provides the show packet-cable gate command output field descriptions:
GateID (0x) Modem MAC Address Subscriber IP Address CMTS SFID display the gate Identifier in hexadecimal notation cable modem (CM) MAC address the client IP address cable slot number display the upstream (Up) SFID number, and the downstream (Dn) Service Flow Identifier (SFID) number. gate priority, which is either high or low. gate status time at which the gate was committed
Pri Status Committed Time
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show packet-cable gate command:
21-61
Release 5.2.1
p g DQoS Gates: 2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------GateID | Modem | Subscriber |CM| SFID |Pri| Status |Committed (0x) | MAC Address | IP Address |TS| Up | Dn | | | Time -------------------------------------------------------------------------------00000D3C 0011.8065.f57a 150.31.55.101 9 57 58 Low Committed 00:21:58 00000E86 0011.8065.f580 150.31.55.102 9 55 56 Low Committed 00:21:58 Multimedia Gates: 8 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------GateID | Modem | Subscriber |CM| SFID |Pri| Status |Committed (0x) | MAC Address | IP Address |TS| Up | Dn | | | Time -------------------------------------------------------------------------------010004E5 000e.5c6c.98f2 150.31.56.5 9 0 37 Low Committed 00:24:20 010005CA 000e.5c6c.98f2 150.31.56.5 9 39 0 Low Committed 00:24:19 01000600 000e.5c6c.98f2 150.31.56.5 9 0 41 Low Committed 00:24:19 0100077E 000e.5c6c.98f2 150.31.56.5 9 43 0 Low Committed 00:24:19 0100084A 000e.5c6c.9810 150.31.56.103 9 0 45 Low Committed 00:24:19 010009E5 000e.5c6c.9810 150.31.56.103 9 47 0 Low Committed 00:24:19 01000A4C 000e.5c6c.9810 150.31.56.103 9 0 49 Low Committed 00:24:19 01000BBA 000e.5c6c.9810 150.31.56.103 9 51 0 Low Committed 00:24:19
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show packet-cable gate [am-tag <0-65535> | application-type <0-65535> | cops <0-99> | dqos | identifier <0x00000000-0xffffffff> | mm | modem <mac> | not-committed | slot <NUM> | subscriber <A.B.C.D>| summary ]
21-62
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
am-tag 0-65535 application-type 0-65535 cops 0-99 dqos identifier 0x00000000-0xffffffff mm modem mac not-committed slot NUM subscriber A.B.C.D summary Application Manager tag application type specify a COPS connection and COPS handle to display specify all DQoS gates Gate Identifier in hexadecimal notation to display detailed information about the DQoS or Multimedia gate. specify all Multimedia gates specify a cable modem MAC address to display only display gates not in COMMITTED state cable slot number to display specify a CPE (subscriber) IP address to display display summary information
21-63
Release 5.2.1
show packet-cable statistics

The show packet-cable statistics command displays COPS statistics, DQoS gate statistics, PacketCable Multimedia gate statistics, event message statistics, DQoS event message statistics, electronic surveillance event message statistics, and PacketCable Multimedia event message statistics. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show packet-cable statistics em command:
Event Message Statistics -------------------------------------------------------------------------Account Request Sent: 3 Account Response Received: 3 Account Request Failure: 0 Account Response Discarded: 0 DQoS Event Message Statistics -------------------------------------------------------------------------QoS_Reserve Count: 0 Primary RKS Retries: 0 QoS_Commit Count: 0 Primary RKS Exhausted: 0 QoS_Release Count: 0 Secondary RKS Retries: 0 Time_Change Count: 0 Secondary RKS Exhausted: 0 Electronic Surveillance Event Message Statistics -------------------------------------------------------------------------QoS_Reserve Count: 0 DF Retries: 0 QoS_Commit Count: 0 DF Exhausted: 0 QoS_Release Count: 0 Multimedia Event Message Statistics -------------------------------------------------------------------------QoS_Reserve Count: 1 Primary RKS Retries: 0 QoS_Commit Count: 1 Primary RKS Exhausted: 0 QoS_Release Count: 1 Secondary RKS Retries: 0 Time_Change Count: 0 Secondary RKS Exhausted: 0
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show packet-cable statistics gate command:
21-64
Release 5.2.1
COPS Statistics -------------------------------------------------------------------------COPS Established: 1 Client-Open Sent: 1 COPS Terminated: 0 Client-Accept Received: 1 COPS Unauthorized: 0 Request Sent: 1 Keep-Alive Sent: 7 Client-Close Received: 0 Keep-Alive Received: 7 Client-Close Sent: 0 Keep-Alive Timeout: 0 Sync-State-Req Received: 0 Del-Req-State Sent: 0 Sync-State-Comp Sent: 0 DQoS Gate Statistics -------------------------------------------------------------------------Gate-Alloc Count: 0 Gate-Open Count: 8 Gate-Alloc-Ack Count: 0 Gate-Close Count: 8 Gate-Alloc-Err Count: 0 T0 Timeout: 0 Gate-Set Count: 8 T1 Timeout: 0 Gate-Set-Ack Count: 8 T7 Timeout: 0 Gate-Set-Err Count: 0 T8 Timeout: 0 Gate-Delete Count: 0 CM Delete: 6 Gate-Delete-Ack Count: 0 CM Dereg: 0 Gate-Delete-Err Count: 0 Admin Delete: 0 Gate-Info Count: 0 Resource Reassign: 2 Gate-Info-Ack Count: 0 Gate-Info-Err Count: 0 Multimedia Gate Statistics -------------------------------------------------------------------------Gate-Set Count: 0 Gate-Report-State Count: 0 Gate-Set-Ack Count: 0 T1 Timeout: 0 Gate-Set-Err Count: 0 T2 Timeout: 0 Gate-Delete Count: 0 T3 Timeout: 0 Gate-Delete-Ack Count: 0 T4 Timeout: 0 Gate-Delete-Err Count: 0 Volume Limit: 0 Gate-Info Count: 0 CM Dereg: 0 Gate-Info-Ack Count: 0 Admin Delete: 0 Gate-Info-Err Count: 0
21-65
Release 5.2.1
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show packet-cable statistics [em | gate [ cops [<0-99>]]]
Command Syntax
em gate cops 0-99 display event message statistics display gate statistics specify a COPS connection and COPS handle to display
21-66
Release 5.2.1
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show packet-cable statistics gate command:
COPS Statistics -------------------------------------------------------------------------COPS Established: 6 Client-Open Sent: 6 COPS Terminated: 3 Client-Accept Received: 6 COPS Unauthorized: 0 Request Sent: 6 Keep-Alive Sent: 519 Client-Close Received: 0 Keep-Alive Received: 519 Client-Close Sent: 0 Keep-Alive Timeout: 0 Sync-State-Req Received: 0 Del-Req-State Sent: 0 Sync-State-Comp Sent: 0 DQoS Gate Statistics -------------------------------------------------------------------------Gate-Alloc Count: 3 Gate-Open Count: 4 Gate-Alloc-Ack Count: 3 Gate-Close Count: 2 Gate-Alloc-Err Count: 0 T0 Timeout: 0 Gate-Set Count: 4 T1 Timeout: 0 Gate-Set-Ack Count: 4 T7 Timeout: 0 Gate-Set-Err Count: 0 T8 Timeout: 0 Gate-Delete Count: 1 CM Delete: 2 Gate-Delete-Ack Count: 1 CM Dereg: 0 Gate-Delete-Err Count: 0 Admin Delete: 0 Gate-Info Count: 0 Gate-Info-Ack Count: 0 Gate-Info-Err Count: 0
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show packet-cable statistics [em | es identifier <0x00000000-0xffffffff> | gate [ cops [<0-99>]]]
21-67
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
em es identifier 0x00000000-0xffffffff gate cops 0-99 display event message statistics
display electronic surveillance statistics

Gate Identifier in hexadecimal notation to display detailed information about the DQoS or Multimedia gate display gate statistics specify a COPS connection and COPS handle to display
21-68
Release 5.2.1
spd allow-dynamic-rsp
The spd allow-dynamic-rsp command allows a dynamic response from a peer to negotiate Internet Key Exchange (IKE) even though the SPD policy setting is other than the "APPLY" policy setting. The no spd allow-dynamic-rsp command is used to return the default setting.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
IPSec Configuration
Command Line Usage

spd allow-dynamic-rsp no spd allow-dynamic-rsp
Command Default
BSR strictly follows the configured SPD.
21-69
Release 5.2.1
spd override
The spd override command is used to override IP addresses, ports, or protocols that are configured in the IPSec Security Policy Database (SPD). The no spd override is used to remove the address, port, or protocol override.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
IPSec Configuration
Command Line Usage

spd override [addr-selector | port-selector | protocol-selector] no spd override [addr-selector | port-selector | protocol-selector]
Command Syntax
addr-selector SPD overrides a specific IP address within a range of IP addresses or a wild card IP address set in the SPD. SPD overrides a specific port with a range of port(s) or wild card set in the SPD. SPD overrides a specific protocol with a range of protocol or wild card of protocol set in the SPD.
port-selector protocol-selector
Command Default
No SPD override address selector is configured. SPD override port selector is configured. SPD override protocol selector is configured.
21-70
Release 5.2.1
spd policy
The spd policy command specifies a security policy for the given peers IPSec Security Policy Database (SPD). The SPD policy is priority based. The lower number index has a higher priority. Data packets are compared against rules in the SPD policy, starting with the first index. When a match is found, that rule is applied and no further comparisons are made against the SPD policy for that data packet. When deleting entries, a single rule or all the rules in the table can be deleted at once.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
IPSec Configuration
Command Line Usage

spd policy <ipAddr{-ipAddr2|:ipMask}> <ipAddr{-ipAddr2|:ipMask}> <num> <0-65535> <0-65535> {apply | bypass | discard} transport [after <num>] no spd policy {<num> | all}
Command Syntax
ipAddr{-ipAddr2|:ipMask} source network IP address followed by a colon and subnetwork mask. If a hyphen is used between ipAddr and ipAddr2, this specifies a range of source network IP addresses. destination network IP address followed by a colon and subnetwork mask. If a hyphen is used between ipAddr and ipAddr2, this specifies a range of destination network IP addresses.
ipAddr{-ipAddr2|:ipMask}
21-71
Release 5.2.1
num
transport protocol number which is the IP protocol from the IP protocol header. The format is a decimal number. A value of 0 represents any protocol. For example, the Call Management Server/Gate Controller or Call Management Server/Policy Server can use TCP Port 6 and the Record Keeping Server can use UDP Port 17. source TCP/UDP port number. 0 represents any port. destination TCP/UDP port number. 0 represents any port used if the packet matches the rule for this policy (i.e., ipAddr, ipAddr2, num, source port, or destination port matches the packet being processed), then apply transport mode IPSEC to the IP Packet. used if the packet matches the rule for this policy (i.e., ipAddr, ipAddr2, num, source port, or the destination port matches the packet being processed), then the IPSEC processing is bypassed and the IP packet is processed. used if the packet matches the rule for this policy (i.e., ipAddr, ip Addr2, num, source port, or destination port matches the packet being processed), then discard this IP packet. allows a rule to be inserted after an existing rule in the SPD. If the after is not present, the new rule is added to the first index. policy security index number from the show ipsec spd policy command. The index numbering begins at 1.
0-65535 0-65535 apply transport
bypass
discard
after
num
21-72
Release 5.2.1
spd preshared-key
The spd preshared-key command specifies the Pre-shared Key IP address to allow a Pre-shared secret key to be passed between parties in a communication flow to authenticate their mutual identities. The no spd preshared-key removes the Pre-shared Key IP address.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
IPSec Configuration
Command Line Usage

spd preshared-key <A.B.C.D> <string> no spd preshared-key <A.B.C.D>
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D string cable interface IP address Pre-shared Key name which is between 1 to 128 characters
21-73
22
Introduction
This chapter describes the commands used to configure and manage the VLAN Tagging feature on the BSR. VLAN Tagging allows the BSR to forward traffic received from a CPE connected to a bridging CM to a uniquely numbered VLAN using the 802.1Q industry-standard trunking encapsulation on a selected "bridge mode trunk" port.
VLAN Tagging Command Descriptions

This section contains an alphabetized list and descriptions of the VLAN Tagging commands supported by the BSR.
22-1
Release 5.2.1
bridge cable intercept

The bridge cable intercept command creates a cable intercept on a specified bridging CM as a respone to a CALEA request from law enforcement for traffic regarding a specific user. The no bridge cable intercept command deletes a bridge cable intercept on a specified bridging CM. Note: The bridge cable intercept command is only available to a user logged in as securityuser - refer to Configuring Cable Intercepts in the BSR 64000 CMTS Configuration and Management Guide.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

bridge cable intercept <mac> modem <mac> <A.B.C.D> <0-65535> no bridge cable intercept <mac> modem <mac> <A.B.C.D> <0-65535>
Command Syntax
mac the intercept source, which is the MAC address from which traffic is intercepted. Packets with a source or destination MAC address that matches this address are copied and forwarded to the data collection server - this MAC address is always the user's CPE device (such as a PC or VoIP phone), and not the MAC address of the user's CM. The MAC address of the user's CM.
modem mac
22-2
Release 5.2.1
A.B.C.D
Specifies the destination IP address for the data collection server that receives copies of the forwarded traffic. The destination User Datagram Port (UDP) port number, which is used exclusively by the data collection server. A default UDP port number is not provided.
0-65535
22-3
Release 5.2.1
bridge cable modem

The bridge cable modem command designates a particular cable modem as a bridging CM and associates its CPE traffic to a specified VLAN.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

bridge cable modem <mac> <2-4094> [stackable] no bridge cable modem <mac> <2-4094> [stackable]
Command Syntax
mac 2-4094 stackable cable modem MAC Address in the form xxxx.xxxx.xxxx the VLAN ID allows stacking of multiple IEEE 802.1Q tags
Note: VLAN ID 1 is reserved for use by the attached Layer 2 switch/router for management purposes and as the default "native" VLAN for that equipment. VLAN ID 1 may not be configured on the BSR for Ethernet port tagged routing or for cable modem Layer 2 bridging.
22-4
Release 5.2.1
bridge mode trunk

The bridge mode trunk command enables VLAN tagged bridging on a network interface. Only the ports of a Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Module are permitted to be configured for VLAN Tagging.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

bridge mode trunk [priority <0-255>] no bridge mode trunk [priority <0-255>]
Command Syntax
priority 0-255
the optional priority value for the "bridge mode trunk "port - if multiple network ports are configured with bridge mode trunk command, the BSR selects the port with the highest priority value with its link state up for forwarding VLAN tagged layer 2 packets. If not specified, the default priority value is 128
22-5
Release 5.2.1
clear bridge vlan counters

The clear bridge vlan counters command clears all receive and transmit statistics for all VLANs associated with a VLAN cable modem. These are the same statistics displayed with the show bridge vlan counters command.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC
Command Line Usage

clear bridge vlan counters [<2-4094>]
Command Syntax
2-4094 the VLAN ID - if omitted, all VLAN counters are cleared
22-6
Release 5.2.1
encapsulation dot1q
The encapsulation dot1q command configures VLAN tagged routing. This means that all layer 3 packets routed by the BSR that egress the port are tagged with a particular 802.1Q VLAN ID tag. The no encapsulation dot1q disables VLAN tagged routing. The encapsulation dot1q command associates a sub-interface with a unique 802.1q tag that must be configured in the sub-interface shell. The no encapsulation dot1q command removes the sub-interface.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

encapsulation dot1q <1-4094> no encapsulation dot1q <1-4094>
Command Syntax
1-4094 the VLAN ID for routed traffic
22-7
Release 5.2.1
show bridge vlan

The show bridge vlan command display the bridging cable modem MAC addresses for all VLANS or a specific VLAN. The following is typical screen output from the show bridge vlan command:
Selected Network Bridge Port: gigaether 15/2 Vlan CM Stackable ---- -------------- --------400 0008.0e10.39be disabled 900 000b.0643.33fc disabled 910 0020.409a.24c8 disabled
The show bridge vlan counters command displays statistical counters for all VLANs or a specific VLAN. The following is typical screen output from the show bridge vlan counters command:
VLAN ID ---2 3
Upstream Packets -------714 50
Upstream Discards ------------23 0
Downstream Packets ---------922 45
Downstream Discards ---------34 0
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show bridge vlan [<2-4094>] show bridge vlan counters [<2-4094>]
22-8
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
counters 2-4094 display statistical counters for all VLANs or a specific VLAN the VLAN ID - if omitted, all VLANs are displayed
Note: VLAN ID 1 is reserved for use by the attached Layer 2 switch/router for management purposes and as the default "native" VLAN for that equipment. VLAN ID 1 may not be configured on the BSR for Ethernet port tagged routing or for cable modem Layer 2 bridging.
22-9
23
DSG Commands
Introduction
This chapter describes the commands used to configure the DOCSIS Digital Set-top Gateway (DSG) feature on the BSR. DSG allows the BSR CMTS to provide out-of-band (OOB) cable services over a DOCSIS network. DSG allows MSOs to merge both set-top box and DOCSIS operations into a single, open network without having to re-configure their existing network or cable modems.
This section contains an alphabetized list and descriptions of the DSG commands supported by the BSR.
23-1
Release 5.2.1
cable downstream dsg

The cable downstream dsg command associates a channel list, timer, or vendor parameter with a downstream channel. The no cable downstream dsg command disassociates a channel list, timer, or vendor parameter with a downstream channel.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable downstream <NUM> dsg {channel-list | timer | vendor-param} <1-4294967295> no cable downstream <NUM> dsg {channel-list | timer | vendor-param} <1-4294967295>
Command Syntax
NUM channel-list timer vendor-param 1-4294967295 the downstream port number (default=0) associates a channel list with a downstream cable channel associates a DSG timer with a downstream cable channel associates a DSG vendor parameter list with a downstream cable channel the channel list, timer, or vendor-param index
23-2
Release 5.2.1
DSG Commands
cable downstream dsg enable

The cable downstream dsg enable command enables or disables DSG Downstream Channel Descriptor (DCD) messages on a downstream channel. The no cable downstream dsg enable command disables DSG DCD messages on a downstream channel.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable downstream <NUM> dsg enable no cable downstream <NUM> dsg enable
Command Syntax
Command Default
Enabled
23-3
Release 5.2.1
cable dsg
The cable dsg command accesses DOCSIS Set-top Gateway Configuration mode. DOCSIS Set-top Gateway Configuration Mode allows you to configure or modify various DSG configurations including channel lists, classifiers, client lists, group maps, timers and DSG tunnels. The no cable dsg command disables the DSG configuration.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable dsg no cable dsg
23-4
Release 5.2.1
DSG Commands
channel-list
The channel-list command creates or modifies a channel list. A channel list is a list of one or multiple downstream frequencies that are carrying DSG tunnels. The appropriate DSG Channel List will be included in the DCD messages on the associated downstream channel. The DSG Client uses the channel list to determine which downstream frequencies have DSG Tunnels present. The no channel-list command deletes a channel list. Note: Configuring a DSG channel list is optional. A DSG channel list provides a faster means of searching for DSG Tunnels but is not a mandatory configuration.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
DOCSIS Set-top Gateway Configuration
Command Line Usage

channel-list <1-4294967295> channel <1-4294967295> {delete | ds-freq <91000000-857000000>} no channel-list <1-4294967295> channel <1-4294967295> ds-freq <91000000-857000000>
Command Syntax
1-4294967295 specifies a channel list index
channel 1-4294967295 specifies a channel index delete ds-freq 91000000-857000000 removes this channel list specifies the downstream channel frequency (s)
23-5
Release 5.2.1
classifier
The classifier command provides parameters for classifying DSG packets. The DSG Agent applies the DSG classifier parameters to DSG packets transmitted from the BSR to assign the DSG packet to the appropriate DSG tunnel. The DSG Agent can also include the classifier configuration in the DCD messages on the downstream channels to which the classifiers apply. The no classifier command deletes a classifier.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

classifier <1-65535> {delete | destination <A.B.C.D> | destination-port <0-65535> <0-65535> | include-in-dcd | priority <0-255> | source <A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D>} no classifier <1-65535> {destination <A.B.C.D> | destination-port <0-65535> <0-65535> | include-in-dcd | priority <0-255> | source <A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D>}
Command Syntax
1-65535 delete destination A.B.C.D the classifier number removes this classifier the destination IP address to be matched for this classifier Note: Specifying a destination IP address is required for the operation of this DSG classifier the low and high end destination port range to be matched for this classifier specifies the inclusion of this DSG classifier in DCD messages
destination-port 0-65535 0-65535 include-in-dcd
23-6
Release 5.2.1
DSG Commands
priority 0-255 source A.B.C.D A.B.C.D
the priority of this classifier - the default value of 0 indicates the lowest priority the IP address and network mask of the DSG server
Command Default
priority = 0 include-in-dcd = false
23-7
Release 5.2.1
client-list
The client-list command creates a new DSG client list or modifies an existing DSG client list. A DSG client terminates the DSG tunnel and receives transmission from the CMTS. There may be more than one DSG Client within a Set-top Device. Configuring a DSG client involves specifying the matching parameters for the DSG clients for which the DSG rules applies. A DSG client ID uniquely identifies each DSG client. The same DSG client can exist in multiple Set-top Devices. In DSG Advanced Mode, the DSG client ID can be a 6 byte MAC address or may additionally be a 2 byte Application ID, a 2 byte CA_system_ID, or a broadcast ID. The Set-top Device has a fixed MAC address that must be matched by the DSG tunnel. The no client-list command deletes a client list.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

client-list <1-4294967295> client-id <1-4294967295> {application-id <line> | broadcast [<1-4>] | ca-id <line> | delete | mac-address <mac> | vendor-param <1-4294967295>} no client-list <1-4294967295> client-id <1-4294967295> {application-id <line> | broadcast [<1-4>] | ca-id <line> | mac-address <mac> | vendor-param <1-4294967295>}
Command Syntax
1-4294967295 1-4294967295 application-id line the client list number the client identifier specifies an application ID in 2-byte hex string (e.g. 12ab) - indicating a numeric ID for an application running on the Set-top Device
23-8
Release 5.2.1
DSG Commands
broadcast 1-4
specifies the broadcast ID which identifies what types of data streams are provided through the Broadcast Tunnel - the following list provides Broadcast ID data stream type values and definitions: 1 = contains SCTE-65 [SCTE-65] delivery as defined in Annex D 2 = contains SCTE-18 [SCTE-18] delivery as defined in Annex D 3 = contains OCAP Object Carousel [OC-SP-OCAP1.0 4 = contains OpenCable Common Download Carousel
ca-id line
specifies a CA ID in 2-byte hex string (e.g. 12ab) - indicating the type of CA system applicable for the associated embedded Cable Modem (ECM) streams delete this DSG client specifies a DSG client MAC address in the form of xxxx.xxxx.xxxx - this refers to the MAC address of the DSG Client within the Set-top Device the index of the vendor parameter list specifying the vendor specific DSG parameters
delete mac-address mac
vendor-param 1-4294967295
23-9
Release 5.2.1
group-map
The group-map command associates groups of tunnels to one or more downstream channels. A DSG group map contains the downstream port number, DSG rule priority, UCID range, and vendor parameter identifications. At least one tunnel must be configured before a tunnel group can be mapped to a downstream channel through a group map. The no group-map command deletes a DSG group map.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

group-map <1-4294967295> tunnel-group <1-4294967295> {delete | interface cable <X/Y> downstream <NUM> | priority <0-255> | ucid <1-255> [<1-255>...] | vendor-param <1-4294967295>} no group-map <1-4294967295> tunnel-group <1-4294967295> {interface cable <X/Y> downstream <NUM> | priority <0-255> | ucid <1-255> [<1-255>...] | vendor-param <1-4294967295>}
Command Syntax
1-4294967295 1-4294967295 delete interface cable X/Y downstream NUM priority 0-255 specifies a group map number specifies the tunnel group number delete this group map the cable interface slot and MAC domain and the downstream port number specifies a DSG rule priority level - DSG rule priority determines the order of which the channel and its associated UCIDs should be applied by the DSG client
23-10
Release 5.2.1
DSG Commands
ucid 1-255...1-255... vendor-param 1-4294967295
specifies the upstream channel ID (UCID) for which the DSG rule applies specifies the index of the vendor parameter specifying the vendor specific DSG parameters
23-11
Release 5.2.1
show cable dsg

The show cable dsg command displays all DSG configuration information provided with the following show commands:

show cable dsg channel-list show cable dsg classifier show cable dsg client-list show cable dsg downstream show cable dsg group-map show cable dsg timer show cable dsg tunnel show cable dsg tunnel-group show cable dsg vendor-param
Additionally, the show cable dsg command displays tunnel group associations to one or more downstream channels. The following is typical screen output from the show cable dsg for tunnel group associations to one or more downstream channels.
Cable DSG GroupChan 1 1: Downstream ifIndex: 32769 (cable 0/0 D0) Priority: 1 Ucid list: 1 2 3 4 Vendor Param Id: 1 Mapped slot/dsPort (slot<<4 | port): 00 mask = 0x00000000, grpChanUpdate=0 Status: 1 Cable DSG GroupChan 1 2: Downstream ifIndex: 32769 (cable 0/0 D0) Priority: 1 Mapped slot/dsPort (slot<<4 | port): 00 mask = 0x00000000, grpChanUpdate=0 Status: 1
23-12
Release 5.2.1
DSG Commands
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable dsg
23-13
Release 5.2.1
show cable dsg channel-list

The show cable dsg channel-list command displays DSG channel list configuration information. The following is typical screen output from the show cable dsg channel-list command:
Cable DSG Channel List 1 1: Downstream Frequency: 575000000 Cable DSG Channel List 1 2: Downstream Frequency: 600000000 Cable DSG Channel List 1 3: Downstream Frequency: 625000000 Cable DSG Channel List 1 4: Downstream Frequency: 650000000
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable dsg channel-list [<1-4294967295> channel <1-4294967295>]
Command Syntax
1-4294967295 specifies a channel list index
channel 1-4294967295 specifies a channel index
23-14
Release 5.2.1
DSG Commands
show cable dsg classifier

The show cable dsg classifier command displays DSG classifier configuration information. The following is typical screen output from the show cable dsg classifier command:
Cable DSG Classifier 10 : Tunnel index: 1 Priority: 10 Source IP address: 10.100.10.1 Source IP prefix length: 32 Destination IP address: 230.10.10.10 Destination-port: low = 100, high = 300 Include in DCD: TRUE
Cable DSG Classifier 20 : Tunnel index: 2 Priority: 0 Source IP address: 10.100.10.1 Source IP prefix length: 32 Destination IP address: 230.20.20.20 Destination-port: low = 100, high = 300 Include in DCD: TRUE
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable dsg classifier [<1-65535>]
Command Syntax
1-65535 specifies a classifier number
23-15
Release 5.2.1
show cable dsg client-list

The show cable dsg client-list command displays DSG client list information. The following is typical screen output from the show cable dsg client-list command:
Cable DSG Client List 1 1: Client Id Type: Broadcast Cable DSG Client List 1 2: Client Id Type: Application Id Client Id Value: 0x1000 Cable DSG Client List 2 1: Client Id Type: MAC address Client Id Value: 010b.0b0b.0b0b Cable DSG Client List 2 2: Client Id Type: CA system Id Client Id Value: 0x3717
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable dsg client-list [<1-4294967295> client-id <1-4294967295>]
Command Syntax
1-4294967295 specifies a client list number
client-id 1-4294967295 specifies a client identifying number
23-16
Release 5.2.1
DSG Commands
show cable dsg downstream

The show cable dsg downstream command displays DSG downstream channel configuration information. The following is typical screen output from the show cable dsg downstream command:
Cable DSG Downstream Vendor Param: 2 Timer: 1 Channel List: 1 DCD Enabled: TRUE Cable DSG Downstream DCD Enabled: FALSE Cable DSG Downstream DCD Enabled: FALSE Cable DSG Downstream DCD Enabled: FALSE Cable DSG Downstream DCD Enabled: FALSE
32769(cable 0/0 D0):
32770(cable 0/1 D1): 163841(cable 2/0 D0): 163842(cable 2/1 D1): 294913(cable 4/0 D0):
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable dsg downstream
23-17
Release 5.2.1
show cable dsg group-map

The show cable dsg group-map command displays DSG group map configuration information. The following is typical screen output from the show cable dsg group-map command:
Cable DSG GroupChan 10 10: Downstream ifIndex: 8388608 (cable 5/0 D0) Priority: 10 Mapped slot/dsPort (slot<<4 | port): 00 Status: 1
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable dsg timer [<1-4294967295>]
Command Syntax
1-4294967295 specifies a group map number
23-18
Release 5.2.1
DSG Commands
show cable dsg timer

The show cable dsg timer command displays DSG timer configuration information. The following is typical screen output from the show cable dsg timer command:
DSG Timer 1: Tdsg1: 20 Tdsg2: 2000 Tdsg3: 300 Tdsg4: 1000
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable dsg timer [<1-4294967295>]
Command Syntax
1-4294967295 specifies a timer index
23-19
Release 5.2.1
show cable dsg tunnel

The show cable dsg tunnel command displays DSG tunnel configuration information. The following is typical screen output from the show cable dsg tunnel command:
Cable DSG Tunnel 1: Client list index: 1 Classifier indices: 10 Mac address: 010a.0a0a.0a0a Cable DSG Tunnel 2: Client list index: 2 Classifiers indices: 20 Mac address: 010b.0b0b.0b0b
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable dsg tunnel [<1-4294967295>]
Command Syntax
1-4294967295 specifies a tunnel number
23-20
Release 5.2.1
DSG Commands
show cable dsg tunnel-group

The show cable dsg tunnel-group command displays DSG tunnel group information. The following is typical screen output from the show cable dsg tunnel-group command:
Cable DSG Tunnel Group 1: Tunnel indices: 1 Cable DSG Tunnel Group 2: Tunnel indices: 2
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable dsg tunnel-group [<1-4294967295>]
Command Syntax
1-4294967295 specifies a tunnel group number
23-21
Release 5.2.1
show cable dsg vendor-param

The show cable dsg vendor-param command displays DSG vendor parameter configuration information. The following is typical screen output from the show cable dsg vendor-param command:
Cable DSG VendorParam 1 1: Vendor OUI: 010203 Vendor Value: "10" Cable DSG VendorParam 2 1: Vendor OUI: 010203 Vendor Value: "20"
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable dsg vendor-param [<1-4294967295> vendor <1-4294967295> ]
Command Syntax
1-4294967295 specifies a vendor parameter group number
vendor 1-4294967295 specifies a vendor index
23-22
Release 5.2.1
DSG Commands
timer
The timer command specifies the 4 timeout timers that are sent to DSG clients through the DCD message. Each downstream channel is mapped to only one set of timers. The no timer command deletes a timer group.
Note: Configuring a DSG timer is optional.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

timer <1-4294967295> {delete | dsg1 <1-65535> | dsg2 <1-65535> | dsg3 <1-65535> | dsg4 <1-65535>} no timer <1-4294967295> {dsg1 <1-65535> | dsg2 <1-65535> | dsg3 <1-65535> | dsg4 <1-65535>}
Command Syntax
1-4294967295 delete dsg1 the timer group number delete this timer group initialization timeout - this is the timeout period for DSG packets during the initialization of the DSG client operational timeout - this is the timeout period for DSG packets during the normal operation of the DSG client
dsg2
23-23
Release 5.2.1
dsg3
two-way retry timer - this is the retry timer that determines when the DSG client attempts to reconnect with the DSG Agent and establish two-way connectivity - a value of 0 indicates that the DSG client will continuously retry two-way operation one-way retry timer - the retry timer that determines when the DSG client attempts to rescan for a DOCSIS downstream channel that contains DSG packets after a dsg1 or dsg2 timeout - a value of 0 indicates that the DSG client will immediately begin scanning upon a dsg1 or dsg2 timeout the timer value in seconds
dsg4
1-65535
Command Defaults
dsg1 = 2 seconds dsg2 = 600 seconds (10 minutes) dsg3 = 300 seconds (5 minutes) dsg4 = 1800 seconds (30 minutes)
23-24
Release 5.2.1
DSG Commands
tunnel
The tunnel command configures a DSG tunnel. The no tunnel command deletes a DSG tunnel. Note: A DSG tunnel with a minimum specification of classifier, client-list, and mac-address must be configured before the configuration of a DSG tunnel group.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

tunnel <1-4294967295> {classifier <1-65535> | client-list <1-4294967295> | delete | mac-address <mac> | service-class <WORD> | tunnel-group <1-4294967295>} no tunnel <1-4294967295> {classifier <1-65535> | client-list <1-4294967295> | mac-address <mac> | service-class <WORD> | tunnel-group <1-4294967295>}
Command Syntax
1-4294967295 classifier 1-65535 client-list 1-4294967295 delete mac-address mac specifies the DSG tunnel number specifies a classifier number for this DSG tunnel specifies a client list number for this DSG tunnel deletes this DSG tunnel specifies a DSG tunnel MAC address in the form of xxxx.xxxx.xxxx
23-25
Release 5.2.1
service-class WORD tunnel-group 1-4294967295
specifies a Service Class name add this DSG tunnel to a DSG tunnel group specify an a new or existing DSG tunnel group number
23-26
Release 5.2.1
DSG Commands
vendor-param
The vendor-param command allows a vendor to send vendor specific parameters. The no vendor-param command deletes a vendor parameter entry.
Group Access
MSO
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

vendor-param <1-4294967295> vendor <1-4294967295> {delete | oui <line> value <octet-string>} no vendor-param <1-4294967295> vendor <1-4294967295>
Command Syntax
1-4294967295 vendor 1-4294967295 delete oui line specifies a vendor parameter index specifies a vendor index delete this vendor parameter entry specifies a vendor assigned Organization Unique ID (OUI) which is three bytes of an octet string (e.g. aa056b) specifies a vendor value string of up to 50 characters
value octet-string
23-27
24
IPDR Commands
Introduction
This chapter describes the IPDR commands supported by the BSR 64000 for Release 5.2.0. IPDR based subscriber usage data accounting allows MSOs to accurately and reliably collect and account for user traffic data from a DOCSIS access network.
This section contains an alphabetized list and descriptions of the IPDR commands supported by the BSR.
24-1
Release 5.2.1
debug ipdr
The debug ipdr command enables IPDR debugging. The no debug ipdr command turns IPDR debugging off.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

debug ipdr { all | common | exporter | ipdr | platform | transport} no debug ipdr { all | common | exporter | ipdr | platform | transport}
Command Syntax
all common exporter ipdr platform transport
all of the following debugging modes debug mode for common debug mode for the IPDR Exporter debug mode for IPDR debug mode for platform debug mode for transport
24-2
Release 5.2.1
IPDR Commands
ipdr acksequenceinterval
The ipdr acksequenceinterval command configures the maximum number of unacknowledged IPDR records within a session with a collector. Unacknowledged IPDR records are the maximum number of ACKs which will be allowed to be pending at any given time. The no ipdr acksequenceinterval command re-establishes the default value. Note: Changing the ackSequenceInterval value will not affect an existing IPDR session with the collector. A changed ackSequenceInterval value will be used for a new, subsequently established IPDR session.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ipdr acksequenceinterval <1-128> no ipdr acksequenceinterval
Command Syntax
1-128
the maximum number of unacknowledged (pending) IPDR records
Command Default
64 unacknowledged IPDR records
24-3
Release 5.2.1
ipdr acktimeinterval
The ipdr acktimeinterval command configures the maximum time between ACKs received from a collector within a session. The no ipdr acktimeinterval command re-establishes the default value. Note: Changing the ackTimeInterval value will not affect an existing IPDR session with the collector. A changed ackTimeInterval value will be used for a new, subsequently established IPDR session.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ipdr acktimeinterval <1-60> no ipdr acktimeinterval
Command Syntax
1-60
the maximum time between ACKs in seconds
Command Default
30 seconds
24-4
Release 5.2.1
IPDR Commands
ipdr collection-interval
The ipdr collection-interval command configures the collection interval for exporting the subscribers IPDR records to the collector. The no ipdr collection-interval command re-establishes the default value.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ipdr collection-interval <15-1440> no ipdr collection-interval
Command Syntax
15-1440
the collection interval in minutes
Command Default
30 minutes
24-5
Release 5.2.1
ipdr collector
The ipdr collector command adds, deletes, or modifies authorized IPDR collectors.
Note: The Session Id should be configured as "0" in the IPDR Collector when configuring the Exporter (BSR) information in the IPDR Collector.
Note: The ipdr collector command allows for the provisioning of a maximum of four IPDR collectors. An IPDR collector configured with this command is uniquely identified using its IP address.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ipdr collector <A.B.C.D> {<0-3>} [<1024-65535>] [cpe-list-suppress] [new-session-per-interval] no ipdr collector <A.B.C.D>
24-6
Release 5.2.1
IPDR Commands
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D 0-3 the IP Address of the collector the priority value of the collector - the collector with highest priority value (the one with highest numerical value) is selected as the primary collector for a given IPDR session - if the priority value for two or more collectors is the same, the collector with the lowest IP Address will be selected as the primary collector - if the primary collector is unreachable for any reason, a session will be established with the next highest priority collector specifies the TCP port for the collector connection - this should be one of the non-reserved non-assigned TCP port number. for the IPDR connection - if not specified, a default port number of 4737 is used
1024-65535
24-7
Release 5.2.1
cpe-list-suppress
optionally suppresses the inclusion of the CPE IP address list as part of IPDR data record being exported to the collector - this could be useful for improving performance and also for disabling the inclusion of CPE IP Address List in IPDR records to be sent to collectors which do not support CPE IP Address List ECN - if not specified, by default CPE IP Address list will be included in IPDR records sent to a particular collector optionally sends "session close" messages to IPDR collectors at the end of each streaming interval - during IPDR data collection, some collectors require a "session close" message to write the data to a file - this parameter should be enabled for those collectors that require it - when enabled, the BSR sends a file closure message at the end of each streaming interval
new-session-per-interval
Command Default
collector port = 4737 cpe-list-suppress = included new-session-per-interval = disabled
24-8
Release 5.2.1
IPDR Commands
ipdr enable
The ipdr enable command enables IPDR export of subscriber usage based accounting information. The no ipdr enable command disables IPDR export of subscriber usage based accounting information.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ipdr enable no ipdr enable
Command Default
Disabled
24-9
Release 5.2.1
ipdr keepaliveinterval
The ipdr keepaliveinterval command configures the keepalive interval for IPDR connections. A keepalive interval is the maximum amount of idle time on an IDPR connection before a keepalive message is sent to verify that the underlying TCP connection is still available. The no ipdr keepaliveinterval command re-establishes the default value.
Note: Changing the KeepAliveInterval value will not affect any existing IPDR connection(s) with a collector(s). The existing IPDR connection(s) will continue to use the previously negotiated value (as per the previous configuration) with the collector. A changed KeepAliveInterval value will be used for a new, subsequently established IPDR connection.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ipdr keepaliveinterval <10-300> no ipdr keepaliveinterval
Command Syntax
10-300 the keepalive interval in seconds
Command Default
60 seconds
24-10
Release 5.2.1
IPDR Commands
ipdr poll-rate
The ipdr poll-rate command configures the subscriber accounting information transmission rate from CMTS to SRM. The subscriber accounting information transmission rate is the number of subscriber accounting records per second. The no ipdr poll-rate command re-establishes the default value. The no ipdr poll-rate slot command resets the poll rate value for a specified slot to the default.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ipdr poll-rate {<16-100> | slot <NUM>{<16-100>}} no ipdr poll-rate [slot <NUM>]
Command Syntax
16-100 slot NUM the number subscriber accounting records transmitted per second configures the subscriber accounting information transmission rate for a specific the BSR 64000 CMTS slot number
Command Default
32 subscriber accounting records per second
24-11
Release 5.2.1
ipdr source-interface
The ipdr source-interface command optionally configures a source protocol address for IPDR transport (TCP) connections to any of the configured collectors as an IP address associated with one of the BSRs physical or loopback interfaces. The no ipdr source-interface command removes this configuration.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ipdr source-interface {cable <X/Y> | ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y> | loopback <1-255>} no ipdr source-interface
Command Syntax
cable X/Y ethernet X/Y gigaether X/Y loopback 1-255 the slot and MAC Domain number of the CMTS module the Ethernet interface slot and port number the Gigabit Ethernet interface slot and port number the loopback interface number
24-12
Release 5.2.1
IPDR Commands
show cable metering-status

The show cable metering-status command displays the status of most recent IPDR streaming operation to currently selected IPDR collector. The following information is provided: Destination Complete-Time the IP address and port number of the IPDR collector to which IPDR records are streamed the date (month:day) and time (hh:mm:ss) when the last billing record was streamed to the IPDR collector indicates whether the CPE IP addresses are included or suppressed in the billing records indicates the status of the last streaming operation - this could one of the following: success - the billing records were successfully sent to the IPDR collector connect-failed - the BSR was able to establish the TCP level connection but could not establish the IPDR level connection write-error the write on IPDR TCP connection failed no-memory the BSR has insufficient memory to collect the billing records unknown - an unknown error occurred
Cpe-Supp Status
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable metering-status comman
Destination 10.11.37.2 :4737
Complete-Time Jun 12 09:33:05
Cpe-Supp No
Status success
24-13
Release 5.2.1
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable metering-status
24-14
Release 5.2.1
IPDR Commands
show ipdr connection

The show ipdr connection command displays the current transport status of an IPDR connection with a specific collector or for all the configured collectors. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show ipdr connection command:
Collector 10.10.10.10 20.20.20.20 30.30.30.30 40.40.40.40
Port No. 4737 4737 5321 8181
Connection Status Connected Connected Disconnected ReadyToReceive
ConnUpTime 12:34:45 22:11:13 15:56:23
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ipdr connection [<A.B.C.D>]
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D
the IP Address of a specific collector
24-15
Release 5.2.1
show ipdr session

The show ipdr session command displays the current status of a specific IPDR session or all of the currently active sessions. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show ipdr session command:
Session-Id 0
SessUpTime 14:37:46
Collector 10.10.10.10 20.20.20.20 30.30.30.30
Primary Yes No No
The following is an example of typical screen output from the show ipdr session detail command:
Session-Id 0
SessUpTime 14:37:46
Collector 10.10.10.10 20.20.20.20 30.30.30.30
Primary Yes No No 2367589043 0 243 657 12:05:23 1234
No of IPDR Records Transmitted: No of erroneous IPDR Records Received: Current Record Sequence Number: Last ACK Sequence Number: Time since Last ACK Received: Sessions Template ID:
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ipdr session [<NUM> [ detail ]]
24-16
Release 5.2.1
IPDR Commands
Command Syntax
NUM the IPDR unique session identifier - "0" indicates that the statistics associated with session ID 0 will be displayed display the details of a specific IPDR session
detail
24-17
25
Cable Traffic Management Commands
Introduction
This chapter discusses commands introduced with the Cable Traffic Management feature for Release 5.0.1 of the BSR 64000.
This section contains an alphabetized list and descriptions of the Cable Traffic Management commands supported by the BSR.
25-1
Release 5.2.1
bidirectional
The bidirectional command specifies that when a primary service flow controlled by a cable traffic policy is enforced in one direction, the penalty is also enforced for that primary service flow in the opposite direction. If the opposite directions primary service flow does not have a cable traffic policy applied and the policy is not enabled when the bidirectional attribute is configured, the BSR logs an event. Each cable traffic policy can have bidirectional configured as an option. Note: The bidirectional configuration is intended to match the behavior of other vendors Subscriber Traffic Management enforce-rule options which penalize both the upstream and downstream primary service flows when a downstream service flow or upstream service flow's traffic count exceeds its policy credit maximum. Motorola recommends omitting the bidirectional configuration.
Group Access
Command Mode
Cable Traffic Management Configuration
Command Line Usage

bidirectional no bidirectional
Command Default
Disabled
25-2
Release 5.2.1
cable traffic sample-interval

The cable traffic sample-interval command configures the cable sample interval at which Traffic Token Buckets (TTBs) are updated and enforcement applied. The Cable Traffic Management feature operates in the background of data forwarding, periodically updating a Traffic Token Bucket based on background sampling of the bytes transferred for a service flow. The configured cable sample interval controls the interval between updates of a TTB for a single service flow. Note: When any cable traffic policies are enabled, setting the cable traffic sample-interval will disable and re-enable these policies after the interval is changed. This will reset any current enforcement. A user will receive the following warning message: Changing sample-interval will reset any enabled cable traffic policies. Continue? [yes/no]:
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable traffic sample-interval <5-60>
Command Syntax
5-60 the cable sample interval in minutes
Command Default
5 minutes
25-3
Release 5.2.1
cable traffic policy

The cable traffic policy command configures a cable traffic policy named in a specified direction and enters a Cable Traffic Policy configuration mode. Cable Traffic Policy configuration mode allows a user to configure a cable traffic policy. A user can either create a new named cable traffic policy in a specified direction and enters Cable Traffic Policy configuration mode for the new policy or enters Cable Traffic Policy configuration mode for an existing cable traffic policy. The no cable traffic policy command deletes an existing cable traffic policy. Specifying the direction is optional when deleting a cable traffic policy and is not verified to match the existing policy direction.
Note: A cable traffic policys direction cannot be changed once the policy is created.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable traffic policy <ctp-name> {downstream | upstream} no cable traffic policy <ctp-name> [downstream | upstream]
Command Syntax
ctp-name the cable traffic policy name- from one to 12 case-sensitive alphanumeric characters including underscores and must start with a letter
25-4
Release 5.2.1
downstream upstream
indicates that this cable traffic policy applies in the downstream direction indicates that this cable traffic policy applies in the upstream direction
25-5
Release 5.2.1
clear cable traffic enforcement

The clear cable traffic enforcement command clears the traffic counts for traffic token buckets (TTBs) and thereby expires any enforcement penalty periods in effect. The clear cable traffic enforcement command clears the Traffic Count fields displayed with the show cable subscriber-usage command and, depending on the parameter specified with the clear cable traffic enforcement command, will effect the summary counts in the show cable subscriber-usage summary output. In all cases except the clearing of a single cable modems traffic, the clear cable traffic enforcement command also sets the Last Cleared field of the show cable traffic summary command to the current time for the combinations of cable traffic policy and interface that are cleared.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

clear cable traffic enforcement {<cmMac> | <ctp-name> | <X/Y> | all}
Command Syntax
cmMac a cable modem MAC address - clears the TTBs for the downstream and upstream primary service flows of the indicated cable modem a cable traffic policy name - clears all TTBs created by that policy on all cable interface clears the TTBs for all online cable modems registered in the indicated cable interface and MAC domain clears the TTBs for all online cable modems on all cable interfaces
ctp-name X/Y
all
25-6
Release 5.2.1
clear cable traffic history

The clear cable traffic history command starts a new Enforced Since history period for the show cable subscriber-usage command. The clear cable traffic history command clears the Last Enforced timestamp for all TTBs and the Last Enforced field of the show cable subscriber-usage command for all service flows. Subsequent use of show cable subscriber-usage command will display as over consumed only those service flows that had started enforcement since the clear cable traffic history command was issued.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

clear cable traffic history
25-7
Release 5.2.1
credit
The credit command configures how a TTB controlled by a cable traffic policy determines its credit maximum. If the mbytes option is used, the credit maximum is the absolute number of megabytes specified. If the seconds option is used, the credit maximum is calculated relative to the configured maximum rate (max-rate). The credit maximum is set to the number of megabytes (rounded up) that can be transferred in the specified seconds at the configured maximum rate for each flow. For example, if the primary service flows maximum rate is 2 mbps and the credit maximum is configured as 300 seconds, the credit maximum would be set to 2 * 300 / 8 = 75 mbytes. Although the absolute credit maximum option (mbytes) is intended for a single-tier-per-policy strategy and the relative credit maximum option (seconds) is intended for a multiple-tier-per-policy strategy, the BSR does not enforce this as a restriction.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

credit {mbytes <1-2147483> | seconds <1-43200> } no credit [mbytes <1-2147483> | seconds <1-43200> ]
Note: Motorola recommends that the credit mbytes option for TTBs be configured to be at least 10 megabytes.
Command Default
The default cable sample interval in seconds. The default cable sample interval is 300 seconds (5 minutes), so the default credit maximum is 300 seconds.
25-8
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
mbytes 1-2147483 seconds 1-43200 the credit maximum is the absolute number of megabytes specified the credit maximum is calculated relative to the configured maximum rate (max-rate) - the credit maximum is set to the number of megabytes (rounded up) that can be transferred in the specified seconds at the configured maximum rate for each flow
25-9
Release 5.2.1
enabled
The enabled command enables a configured cable traffic policy. When a cable traffic policy is first created, it is disabled by default. A disabled cable traffic policy can be configured and displayed but does not affect packet forwarding unless enabled. TTBs are created only for enabled cable traffic policies and are deleted when the cable traffic policy is disabled. The no enabled command disables an already enabled cable traffic policy. Cable traffic policies are configured with working defaults and may be enabled immediately after creation without any additional configuration. The default values are:
Command max-rate credit
Command Default max-rate all The default cable sample interval in seconds. The default cable sample interval is 5 minutes, so the default credit maximum is 300 seconds. enforce percent = 50 Disabled Disabled Disabled
enforce bidirectional penalty-period peak-time
Note: No attribute of an existing cable traffic policy can be changed while it is enabled. For example, you must disable a cable traffic policy in order to change the max-rate attribute. When a cable traffic policy is disabled, all TTBs configured by the policy are deleted and all service flows controlled by those TTBs are restored to their configured maximum rate.
Group Access
25-10
Release 5.2.1
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

enabled no enabled
Command Default
Disabled
25-11
Release 5.2.1
enforce
The enforce command configures how a TTB controlled by the cable traffic policy determines its enforce rate for a service flow to which the policy applies. The enforce rate can be configured to an absolute number with enforce rate command or as a relative percentage of the configured maximum rate (max-rate) with the enforce percent command. The no enforce command resets the enforce rate to the default value. The BSR packet scheduler implements its scheduler rate limiter with a minimum granularity of 8 kbps and a maximum rate of 200000 kbps. A configured maximum rate (max-rate) or enforce rate is rounded down to a multiple of 8 kbps. The BSR does not check or prevent an absolute enforce rate being set higher than a flows configured maximum rate. Setting a relative enforce configuration to 100% is convenient for cable traffic monitoring only and determining which subscribers would be penalized without actually doing so. Note: Setting the enforce percent to 0 is the equivalent of no enforcement and allows all traffic from the service flow for an entire cable sample interval and is not recommended.
Note: When a cable traffic policy is applies to service flows with no configured maximum rate, then setting enforcement by percent will have no effect - i.e. no penalization.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

enforce {percent <0-100> | rate <8-200000> } no enforce [percent <0-100> | rate <8-200000>]
25-12
Release 5.2.1
Command Default
enforce percent = 50
Command Syntax
percent 0-100 configures the enforce rate relative to the percentage of the service flow's Maximum Rate (max-rate) configures the enforce rate to a absolute number in kbps
rate 8-200000
25-13
Release 5.2.1
max-rate
The max-rate command specifies whether a cable traffic policy only applies to primary service flows with a particular configured maximum rate. When a cable traffic policy is created, the default setting is max-rate all which means that the policy applies to all configured maximum rate values (all service flows in the direction of the cable traffic policy). If max-rate 0-4294967 is configured, the policy will apply to a service flow only if that service flows configured maximum rate value equals the value specified in the 0-4294967 argument of the command. Operators may define different subscriber tiers of service with different combinations of QOS parameters that have the same configured maximum rate in a given direction. For example, an operator may define a 10/128 tier with 10 Mbps configured for the maximum rate downstream and 128 kbps upstream as well as a 10/256 tier with 10 Mbps downstream and 256 kbps upstream. If the operator wishes to have different cable traffic policies in a direction that apply to the different tiers with the same maximum rate in that direction, the operator can configure slightly different maximum rate values in order to uniquely match the desired cable traffic policy. For example, the operator can define the "10/128" tier with a configured maximum rate of 10000001 bps and the 10/256 tier with a configured maximum rate of 10000002 bps. These would match separate cable traffic policies with max-rate 10000001 and max-rate 10000002, respectively. When a CM registers, the BSR selects a cable traffic policy for its primary downstream and primary upstream service flows based on the configured maximum rate of the service flow. The BSR prioritizes matching to a cable traffic policy configured with an exact match with the max-rate 0-4294967 option. The BSR selects the first matching policy in alphabetic order of policy name. To thwart hackers who register with unauthorized maximum rates, an operator can define cable traffic policies with the max-rate 0-4294967 option for all authorized maximum rates, and then define a default cable traffic policy with the max-rate all option and very low credit maximum and enforce rate attributes.
Group Access
Command Mode
25-14
Release 5.2.1
Command Line Usage

max-rate {<0-4294967> | all}
Command Syntax
0-4294967 Note: the cable traffic policy will apply to a service flow only if that service flows configured maximum rate value equals the value specified in the 0-4294967 argument entering a max-rate of "0" will specify that the cable traffic policy applies to all service flows of cable modems without configured max rates (enforcement by percent is not allowed) the cable traffic policy applies to all configured maximum rate values - all service flows in the direction of the cable traffic policy - a more specific max-rate policy will take precedence over the all policy
all
Command Default
max-rate all
25-15
Release 5.2.1
peak-time
The peak-time command configures a cable traffic policy for peak-time monitoring mode. In peak-time monitoring mode, a service flow is permitted to send a traffic count up to a credit limit during a configured peak-interval in the day before being penalized to an enforced rate. A policy can be configured with up to four non-overlapping peak-time attributes, each with a different index value. If any peak-time interval is configured, the policy operates only during the set of configured peak-times using peak-time traffic monitoring by counting absolute bytes during the peak time only. If no peak-time intervals are configured, the policy operates in continuous monitoring mode by measuring a traffic count only in excess of an enforce rate The no peak-time command deletes the peak-time attribute of the cable traffic policy. At a minimum, the index must be specified with the no peak-time command. All other arguments are optional and are not checked to verify that they match the configuration of the peak-time index being deleted.
Note: Peak-time monitoring mode is disabled by default. Not configuring peak-time causes the CTM to use Continuous Mode.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

peak-time <1-4> {daily | weekday | weekend} start {<hh:mm> | <0-23>} duration <1-1440> no peak-time <1-4> [daily | weekday | weekend] [start {<hh:mm> | <0-23>} duration <1-1440>]
25-16
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
1-4 a required index argument that uniquely identifies the peak-time interval within the cable traffic policy specifies a peak-time that is defined as all seven days of the week specifies a peak-time interval that is defined as only Monday through Friday specifies the peak-time interval as only on Saturday or Sunday specifies the starting hour (and optionally, minute) of the peak time during the day - hh = 0-23 mm = 0-59 specifies the number of minutes that the peak-time interval lasts - the duration may not extend past 24 hours
daily weekday weekend start hh:mm start 0-23 duration 1-1440
Command Default
Disabled
25-17
Release 5.2.1
penalty-period
The penalty-period command configures a cable traffic policy to penalize a service flow exceeding its traffic count credit for a fixed duration penalty period. The penalty is also enforced for that primary service flow in the opposite direction, provided a policy is applied in that direction.
For continuous monitoring, when no peak-time is configured, the enforcement period always lasts for the configured penalty in minutes. For peak-time monitoring, a penalty-period can continue beyond the end of the peak-time interval. If the expires-end-peak option is specified, then any penalty-period being enforced at the end of the peak-time expires. If expires-end-peak parameter is omitted, a penalty period can extend beyond the end of the current peak-time. Any such late penalty-period expires automatically at the start of the next peak-time interval. The expires-end-peak option is ignored with continuous traffic monitoring (when no peak-time is configured).
The minimum penalty-period can be specified as "0" minutes in order to monitor subscriber traffic without enforcing it. Subscribers which exceed their traffic count credit may be observed through the show cable subscriber-usage command even though such subscribers never had their scheduler rate limits enforced. The maximum penalty-period is 1440 minutes or 24 hours. The no penalty-period removes a penalty-period configuration if one exists and is ignored if no penalty-period configuration exists. The optional arguments after no penalty-period command are not checked to verify that they match the existing configuration. Note: The penalty-period mode of traffic enforcement is intended for compatibility with other vendors subscriber traffic management feature. Motorola recommends NOT using the penalty-period configuration and using token-based enforcement instead. Token-based enforcement restores subscribers to their configured maximum rate limit as soon as they have earned the tokens to do so thus minimizing the enforcement duration for the subscriber.
25-18
Release 5.2.1
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

penalty-period <0-1440> [expires-end-peak] no penalty-period [<0-1440> [expires-end-peak]]
Command Syntax
0-1440 specifies the penalty period duration in minutes (24 hour maximum) - the minimum penalty-period may be specified as "0" minutes in order to monitor subscriber traffic without enforcing it stops enforcement of a service flow at the end of the policy peak time if the expires-end-peak option is specified, then any penalty-period being enforced at the end of the peak-time expires if the expires-end-peak option is omitted, a penalty period can extend beyond the end of the current peak-time any such late penalty-period expires automatically at the start of the next peak-time interval - the expires-end-peak option is ignored with continuous traffic monitoring, i.e. when no peak-time is configured
expires-end-peak
Command Default
Disabled
25-19
Release 5.2.1
show cable subscriber-usage

The show cable subscriber-usage command displays the cable traffic policy enforcement state for downstream and upstream primary service flows of online cable modems for which a cable traffic policy is applied. The show cable subscriber-usage command only displays the cable modems for which a cable traffic policy is applied. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable subscriber-usage command:
E=Enforced, M=Monitored, B=Bidirectional Enforced since: THU JUL 24 10:55:04 2008 Cable Sfid I/F CM Mac Address Traffic Policy Monitored Last Remain Limit M R
Traffic(K) Enforced Enforced Rate (K) -------- -------- -------- - 0:07:53 0:15:11 0:17:39 0:10:17 0:03:03 0:03:03 0:07:53 0:34:47 0:05:20 0:03:03 0:10:17 0:05:00 0:00:18 0:05:00 0:05:00 0:05:00 0:05:00 0:05:00 0:05:00 0:05:00 3350 M E 100 M E 34000 M 100 M E 100 M E 100 M E 3350 M E 100 M B 3350 M E 100 M E 100 M E
----- ----- -------------- ----------- --------1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 / 3764 000b.0626.5bc8 ctp-ds-6700 3774 000b.0623.ffa4 ctp-ds-3400 3780 0011.ae05.bcda ctp-ds-all 3806 000b.0623.fe4c ctp-ds-3400 3842 000b.0626.afa8 ctp-ds-3400 3850 000b.0623.fe68 ctp-ds-3400 3852 000b.0626.5b10 ctp-ds-6700 3858 000b.0627.b41c ctp-ds-3400 3862 000b.0626.5dcc ctp-ds-6700 3864 000b.0627.577c ctp-ds-3400 3866 000b.0627.b44c ctp-ds-3400 30397 26535 1352 23053 17450 17463 31103 13906 27747 17714 22466
25-20
Release 5.2.1
The show cable subscriber-usage command displays the following cable traffic policy enforcement state information:
Cable I/F Sfid
the <slot/MAC Domain> number of a cable interface the service flow identifier of a primary downstream service flow for an online cable modem on this cable interface the MAC address of the subscriber cable modem. the name of the cable traffic policy applying to the service flow the current traffic token bucket (TTB) credit used (i.e. credit maximum less the traffic token count) for traditional TTBs, this is a measure of recent traffic in excess of the enforce rate for penalty-period TTBs, this is a total count of transferred bytes since the TTB was cleared a penalty-period TTB is cleared at the start of a peak-time, after expiration of penalty-period, or by using the clear cable traffic command - penalty-period TTB Traffic Counts remain fixed outside of a peak-time if the service flow has been enforced, this field displays the amount of time since the service flow was last enforced by it's applied cable traffic policy (not by a bidirectional policy) - if the service flow has not undergone enforcement, this field displays a -character
CM Mac Address Traffic Policy Monitored Traffic
Last Enforced
25-21
Release 5.2.1
Remain Enforced
if the service flow is currently being enforced, this field is the amount of time of the earliest cable sample interval boundary at which time the enforcement can be removed for traditional TTBs, this is calculated as when a completely idle flow would earn tokens back to a positive token level for enforced penalty-period TTBs, this is the cable sample interval boundary for this flow at which the penalty will expire if the Remain Enforced field is in the form hh:mm, the hour and minute indicate a time within the next 24 hours if the Remain Enforced field is in the form hh:mm+dd, the +dd gives a number of additional 24-hour days from now until the enforcement ends at hh:mm from that point in time the Remain Enforced field will only have a time displayed if R (Reason) = E (Enforced) the current scheduler limit rate L for the service flow in kilobits per second (kbps) this is either the configured maximum rate or the enforce rate (if the service flow is currently being enforced) - an asterisk (*) following the Limit Rate means that because maximum rate limiting is not enabled on at least one of the downstream channels of the MAC domain, the limit rate does not apply
Limit Rate (K)
25-22
Release 5.2.1
the monitored flag will be displayed as "M" if the service flow is currently being monitored - if the service flow is not currently being monitored, this field displays a - character the reason flag which is displayed as E if the service flow is currently being enforced (i.e. its current scheduler limit rate is lower than its configured maximum rate) or "B" if the service flow is bidirectional and being enforced - if the service flow is not currently being enforced, his field displays a - character
Note: If rate limiting is not enabled for any channel with the cable downstream rate-limiting or cable upstream rate-limiting commands, the Limit Rate field displayed for a service flow may not actually be enforced.
Note: The clear counters and clear stats commands do not affect the Traffic Count statistics displayed with the show cable subscriber-usage summary command.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable subscriber-usage [ <mac> | <X/Y> ] [ downstream | upstream ] [<ctp-name> | over-consume | sort-byte-count ] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show cable subscriber-usage [ <mac> | <X/Y> ] [ downstream | upstream ] [<ctp-name> | over-consume | sort-byte-count ] [ | {count | count-only}]
25-23
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
mac displays the cable traffic policy enforcement state for downstream and upstream primary service flows, for which a cable traffic policy is applied, of the indicated cable modems MAC address restricts the command output to a single cable interface and MAC domain, otherwise, all interfaces are shown in order of slot and MAC domain number displays a traffic count summary for cable traffic policies in the downstream direction displays a traffic count summary for cable traffic policies in the upstream direction the name of a cable traffic policy - only the configuration for the this named policy is displayed restricts the command output to service flows that have been penalized (or were being penalized at that time) since the last clear cable traffic history command was issued - the "Last Enforced" field in the command output will display a time only for service flows that are newly enforced displays the service flows on a given cable traffic policy are shown in decreasing order of Traffic Count, otherwise, the service flows are shown in increasing order of the service flow ID turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string
X/Y
downstream upstream ctp-name
over-consume
sort-byte-count
| begin
25-24
Release 5.2.1
25-25
Release 5.2.1
show cable subscriber-usage summary

The show cable subscriber-usage summary command displays a summary of the traffic transferred for all service flows controlled by a particular cable traffic policy on a particular cable interface. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable subscriber-usage summary command:
Dir
Interface
Traffic Policy
Monitored Count (K)
Total Enforced Flows Flows
---down down down down up up up up
---------1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0
------------ctp-ds-0 ctp-ds-3400 ctp-ds-6700 ctp-ds-all ctp-us-0 ctp-us-1500 ctp-us-670 ctp-us-all
----------- ----- -------170690 1477193 1824075 455760 446046 2011912 1911957 3547 1497 68 66 118 1497 89 66 97 10 67 65 21 10 88 65 0
25-26
Release 5.2.1
The show cable subscriber-usage summary command displays the following cable traffic policy summary information:
Dir Interface Traffic Policy
the direction of the traffic - down for downstream or up for upstream the <slot/MAC Domain> number of a cable interface the name of the cable traffic policy that applies to service flows that were active on this cable interface since the last time cable traffic statistics were cleared with the clear cable traffic enforcement command the sum of the Traffic Counts for all TTBs for currently active service flows to which this cable traffic policy applies - the Traffic Count for a TTB is the credit used (the credit maximum minus the token count) - the Traffic Count is shown in kilobytes, with 1000 bytes per kilobyte and does not include traffic for offline cable modems the number of service flows on the MAC Domain that the cable traffic policy applies to the number of applied service flows currently under enforcement
Monitored Count (K)
Total Flows Enforced Flows
Note: The clear counters and clear stats commands do not affect the Traffic Count statistics displayed with the show cable subscriber-usage summary command.
Group Access
All
25-27
Release 5.2.1
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable subscriber-usage summary [ downstream | upstream ] [<X/Y>] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show cable subscriber-usage summary [ downstream | upstream ] [<X/Y>] [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
X/Y restricts the command output to a single cable interface and MAC domain, otherwise, all interfaces are shown in order of slot and MAC domain number displays a traffic count summary for cable traffic policies in the downstream direction displays a traffic count summary for cable traffic policies in the upstream direction turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
downstream upstream | begin exclude include WORD count count-only
25-28
Release 5.2.1
show cable traffic policy

The show cable traffic policy command displays the configuration of all existing cable traffic policies. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show cable traffic policy command:
Cable Traffic Policy ------------ctp_all ctp_ds1 ctp_us1 test
Dir Max Rate (K) --- --------dn all dn 20000 up 20000 up all
Pk Fq Start Dur Pen X B Credit Enforce En Mins Mins Rate -- -- ----- ----- ----- - - ----------- --------- -- - - - N 300s 50% Y 1 dy 20:20 35 - - N 1000mb 5000 N 1 dy 08:00 20 - - Y 300s 5000 N - - - - N 300s 75% N
The show cable traffic policy command displays the following cable traffic policy information:
Cable Traffic Policy Dir Max Rate
the name of a cable traffic policy - only the configuration for this policy is displayed the cable traffic policy direction abbreviated as dn for downstream or up for upstream. the value of the max-rate attribute of the cable traffic policy which controls the service flows to which the policy applies the index of the peak-time attribute configured for this cable traffic policy - if no peak-time is configured, a -is displayed the frequency of the peak-time configuration abbreviated as dy for daily, wd for weekday, we for weekend - if no peak-time is configured, a - is displayed the starting hour and minute of the peak-time configuration in a 24-hour format - if no peak-time is configured, a - is displayed
Pk
Fq
Start
25-29
Release 5.2.1
Dur Mins
the duration of the peak-time configuration in minutes,- if no peak-time is configured, a - is displayed the penalty-period configuration in minutes, if any, or - if no penalty-period or peak-time configured, "Y" if expires-off-peak is configured the bidirectional status - Y if configured, N if not configured the value of the credit mbytes or credit seconds attribute of the cable traffic policy the value of the enforce rate attribute of the cable traffic policy. For absolute enforce rate configurations, the value shown is in the form xxxxxx K in kilobits per second, where xxxxxx is the configured enforce rate divided by 1000. For relative enforce rate configurations, the value shown is of the form NNN % the enforced status - Y if enabled, N if disabled
Pen Mins
X B Credit Enforce Rate
En
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show cable traffic policy [<ctp-name>] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show cable traffic policy [<ctp-name>] [ | {count | count-only}]
25-30
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
ctp-name | begin exclude include WORD count count-only the name of a cable traffic policy - only the configuration for this policy is displayed turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
25-31
26
IPv6 Commands
Introduction
This chapter describes the IPv6 commands supported by the BSR 64000. IPv6 represents the evolution of the Internet Protocol from IPv4. IPv6 maintains the same basic operational principles of IPv4 but makes some important modifications particularly in the area of addressing. One of the most significant changes is the creation of an entirely new support protocol for IPv6 which combines several tasks previously performed by other protocols in IPv4. This new protocol is called the IPv6 Neighbor Discovery (ND). The Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMPv6) provides a method for error reporting, route discovery and diagnostics. In addition, it provides information about multicast group membership, and performs address resolution (Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) in IPv4). Significant functionality of ICMPv6 includes neighbor discovery and auto configuration. Neighbor discovery allows one device in a network to find out about other nearby devices, and stateless address auto configuration allows a device to dynamically configure an IPv6 address.
IPv6 Command Descriptions

This section contains an alphabetized list and descriptions of the IPv6 commands supported by the BSR.
26-1
Release 5.2.1
cable ipv6 helper-address

The cable helper address function disassembles a DHCP broadcast packet, and reassembles it into a unicast packet so that the packet can traverse the BSR and communicate with the DHCP server. The cable ipv6 helper-address command can also be used to define the cable helper address to be used for all CPEs whose CMs have an IP address in a particular subnets address space. This forces the BSR relay agent to forward DHCP requests from a CPE using a selected ISP to a DHCP server configured for that selected ISP. Note: The cable ipv6 helper-address command allows operators to support multiple CM subnets bound to a single cable helper-address. Any DHCP requests from clients that are attached to CMs that are part of the Multiple ISP configuration will have their requests relayed to any defined IPv6 helper-addresses.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

cable ipv6 helper-address <A:B:C:D:E:F:G:H> cable-modem no cable ipv6 helper-address <A:B:C:D:E:F:G:H> cable-modem
26-2
Release 5.2.1
IPv6 Commands
Command Syntax
A:B:C:D:E:F:G: cable-modem the IPv6 address of the destination DHCP server specifies that only CM UDP broadcasts are forwarded
26-3
Release 5.2.1
cable ip prov-mode
The cable ip prov-mode command specifies the provisioning mode of DOCSIS 3.0 cable modems on a particular cable interface (MAC domain). The no cable ip prov-mode command disables the specified provisioning mode.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (cable interfaces only)
Command Line Usage

cable ip prov-mode {apm | dpm | ipv4-only | ipv6-only} no cable ip prov-mode {apm | dpm | ipv4-only | ipv6-only}
Command Syntax
apm Alternate Provisioning Mode - i.e. the cable modem will first try to acquire IPv6 address, if that fails then modem will try to acquire IPv4 address Dual-Stack Provisioning Mode - i.e. the cable modem will try to acquire both IPv6 and IPv4 address. If IPv6 address acquisition was successful, modem will complete the registration using that address otherwise modem will complete the registration with the acquired IPv4 address
dpm
26-4
Release 5.2.1
IPv6 Commands
ipv4-only
IPv4 only provisioning mode - i.e. the cable modem will acquire only the IPv4 address IPv6 only provisioning mode - i.e. the cable modem will acquire only the IPv6 address
ipv6-only
26-5
Release 5.2.1
clear ipv6 neighbor-cache

The clear ipv6 neighbor-cache command clears the entire IPv6 neighbor cache or a specific neighbor cache entry.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

clear ipv6 neighbor-cache [<A:B:C:D:E:F:G:H> | <A:B:C:D:E:F:G:H>]
Command Syntax
A:B:C:D:E:F:G:H A:B:C:D:E:F:G:H the IPv6 address of the neighbor cache entry the Link Local address of the neighbor cache entry
26-6
Release 5.2.1
IPv6 Commands
clear ipv6 traffic

The clear ipv6 traffic command clears IPv6 protocol statistics.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

clear ipv6 traffic Command Syntax
26-7
Release 5.2.1
ipv4 range
IPv6-mapped addresses are used by an IPv4 host to communicate with an IPv6 host. The IPv4 host addresses the packet to the mapped address. The ipv4 range command establishes IPv4 to IPv6 address mapping. The no ipv4 range command removes the address mapping association.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ipv4 range <A:B:C:D/1-32> mapto <A:B:C:D:E:F:G:H> no ipv46 range <A:B:C:D/1-32> mapto <A:B:C:D:E:F:G:H>
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D/1-32 mapto A:B:C:D:E:F:G:H the IPv4 address/Prefix Length to be mapped to an IPv6 address translate the above IPv4 address/Prefix Length into an IPv6 address map to this IPv6 address
26-8
Release 5.2.1
IPv6 Commands
ipv6 address
The ipv6 address command configures a primary or secondary IP address for an interface. The no ipv6 address command is used to remove an IP address from the interface. The following rules apply to IPv6 addressing:
The default link local address for the interface is automatically configured when first IPv6 prefix is configured on that interface. A user specified link-local address can be configured before any primary or secondary IPv6 address is configured for the interface, or to overwrite an existing link-local address on an interface. BSR will not allow IPv6 addresses to be configured on an interface if Tagged Router Interface (TRI) is enabled on that interface (via the encapsulation dot1q command). Similarly the BSR will not allow TRI to be enabled on an interface if IPv6 subnets are already configured on that interface. The automatically generated default link local address for the interface is deleted when the primary IPv6 prefix is deleted on that interface. The user configured link local address for the interface will not be automatically be deleted when the primary IPv6 prefix is deleted on that interface. Deleting the primary IPv6 prefix of the interface without deleting all the secondary prefixes of the interface is not allowed. When the user specified link local address for the interface is deleted, the default link local address for the interface is automatically generated if the primary IPv6 subnet was previously configured for the interface. The BSR will not allow the IPv4-Mapped IPv6 addresses to be configured as part of the ipv6 address command.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ipv6 address <A:B:C:D:E:F:G:H/1-128> [eui-64 [secondary] | secondary ]] ipv6 address <FE80:0:0:0:E:F:G:H> link-local
Release 5.2.1
Note: The link-local option will not be visible until the correct upper 8 octects of the link-local address, which must be FE80:0:0:0, is entered. The lower 8 octets can be any valid entry.
Command Syntax
A:B:C:D:E:F:G:H A:B:C:D:E:F:G:H/1-128 eui-64 secondary the Link-local IPv6 address the IPv6 address/Prefix Length use EUI-64 interface identifier make this IPv6 address a secondary address
Note: The Extended Unique Identifier (EUI). EUI-64 is a 64-bit identifier that is formed by concatenating the 24-bit Organizationally Unique Identifier (OUI) with a 40-bit extension identifier that is assigned by the organization that purchased the OUI. The resulting identifier is generally represented as a set of octets separated by dashes (hexadecimal notation) or colons (bit-reversed notation) as in xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx or xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx. RFC 3513 specifies the use of EUI-64 identifiers as part of an IPv6 address.
26-10
Release 5.2.1
IPv6 Commands
ipv6 helper-address
The ipv6 helper-address command specifies the destination IPv6 address of the DHCP server for where broadcast packets are forwarded. The no ipv6 helper-address command removes the IPv6 address. In most cases, the cable ipv6 helper-address command will be used instead of this command.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (cable and loopback interfaces only
Command Line Usage

ip ipv6 helper-address <A:B:C:D:E:F:G:H> no ipv6 helper-address <A:B:C:D:E:F:G:H>
Command Syntax
A:B:C:D:E:F:G:H the IPv6 address of the destination DHCP server
26-11
Release 5.2.1
ipv6 icmp error-interval

The ipv6 icmp error-interval command configures ICMPv6 error message rate limiting. The command specifies the minimum interval between ICMPv6 error messages and the maximum number of ICMPv6 error messages allowed to be queued in the Rate Limiting Bucket. The no ipv6 icmp error-interval command disables the limiting of ICMP error messages.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ipv6 icmp error-interval <0-2147483647> [<1-200>] no ipv6 icmp error-interval
Command Syntax
0-2147483647 1-200 the minimum interval between ICMP error messages in milliseconds the maximum number of ICMP error messages in the Rate Limiting Bucket
Command Default
100 10
26-12
Release 5.2.1
IPv6 Commands
ipv6 nd
The ipv6 nd command configures Neighbor Discovery on the BSR. Neighbor Discovery is an ICMPv6 function that allows a router or host to identify other devices on its links. The discovered information is used in address auto configuration which redirects a node to use a more appropriate router, if necessary, and to maintain reachability information with its neighbors. IPv6 Neighbor Discovery is similar to a combination of the ARP, ICMP Router Discovery and ICMP Redirect IPv4 protocols. Neighbor Discovery provides the following functions:

Duplicate Address Detection Neighbor Solicitation Retransmission Interval Suppression of IPv6 Router Advertisement Router Advertisement Interval Router Advertisement Lifetime Advertised Reachability Time Interval
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ipv6 nd dad attempts <0-600> ipv6 nd ns-interval <1000-3600000> ipv6 nd ra suppress ipv6 nd ra-interval {<3-1800> | msec <500-1800000>} ipv6 nd ra-lifetime <0-9000> ipv6 nd reachable-time <0-3600000> no ipv6 nd dad attempts no ipv6 nd ns-interval no ipv6 nd ra suppress no ipv6 nd ra-interval
Release 5.2.1
no ipv6 nd ra-lifetime no ipv6 nd reachable-time
Command Syntax
dad attempts 0-600 ns-interval 1000-3600000 ra suppress ra-interval 3-1800 ra-interval msec 500-1800000 ra-lifetime 0-9000 reachable-time 0-3600000 sets the number of duplicate address detection attempts sets the neighbor solicitation retransmission interval value in milliseconds suppress router advertisement messages sets router advertisement interval value in seconds sets the router advertisement interval value in milliseconds sets the router advertisement lifetime value in seconds sets the reachability time in milliseconds
Command Defaults
dad attempts = 3 ns-interval = 1000 ra-interval msec = 200000 ra suppress = disabled ra-lifetime = 1800 reachable-time = 0
26-14
Release 5.2.1
IPv6 Commands
ipv6 neighbor
The ipv6 neighbor command establishes IPv6 static neighbors. The is referred to as a static arp configuration. The no ipv6 neighbor command removes the static neighbor association.
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ipv6 neighbor <A:B:C:D:E:F:G:H> <H.H.H> {arpa | snap} interface {ethernet <X/Y>| gigaether <X/Y>} no ipv6 neighbor <A:B:C:D:E:F:G:H>
Command Syntax
A:B:C:D:E:F:G:H H.H.H arpa snap interface ethernet X/Y gigaether X/Y the IPv6 address of the ARP entry associated with the local data link address the 48-bit local data link address (MAC address) in the format xxxx.xxxx.xxxx standard Ethernet-style ARP (RFC 826) IEEE 802.3 usage of ARP packets conforming to RFC 1042 the IPv6 interface the Ethernet interface slot and port number the Gigabit Ethernet interface slot and port number
26-15
Release 5.2.1
ipv6 range
IPv4-mapped addresses are used by an IPv6 host to communicate with an IPv4 host. The IPv6 host addresses the packet to the mapped address. The ipv6 range command establishes IPv6 to IPv4 address mapping. The no ipv6 range command removes the mapping association.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ipv6 range <A:B:C:D:E:F:G:H/1-128> mapto <A.B.C.D> no ipv6 range <A:B:C:D:E:F:G:H/1-128> mapto <A.B.C.D>
Command Syntax
A:B:C:D:E:F:G:H/ 1-128 mapto A.B.C.D the IPv6 address/Prefix Length to be mapped to an IPv4 address translate the above IPv6 address/Prefix Length into an IPv4 address map to this IPv4 address
26-16
Release 5.2.1
IPv6 Commands
ipv6 redirects
The ipv6 redirects command enables the processing of "Host Redirect" messages. If enabled, the BSR will send an ICMPv6 Host Redirect packet to the originating IPv6 source when:

The interface the packet is received on is the same as the outgoing interface. The source subnet is on the same subnet as the next-hop address. Both the source and destination IP addresses of the packet are within a logical IPv6 subnet.
The no ipv6 redirects command disables the sending of "Host Redirect" messages. When disabled, the BSR will not send an ICMPv6 "Host Redirect" message to the source.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (not supported for cable interfaces)
Command Line Usage

ipv6 redirects no ipv6 redirects
Command Default
Enabled
26-17
Release 5.2.1
ipv6 route
The ipv6 route command is used to configure a static route when the router cannot dynamically build a route to the specific destination or if the route must be in place permanently. The no ip route command removes a static route.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ipv6 route <A:B:C:D:E:F:G:H/1-128> {<A:B:C:D:E:F:G:H> | <A:B:C:D:E:F:G:H>} [<1-255>] no ipv6 route <A:B:C:D:E:F:G:H/1-128> [<A:B:C:D:E:F:G:H> | <A:B:C:D:E:F:G:H>] [<1-255>]
Command Syntax
A:B:C:D:E:F:G:H/ 1-128 A:B:C:D:E:F:G:H A:B:C:D:E:F:G:H 1-255 IP address of the destination network the Link-local IPv6 address IP address of the forwarding router administrative distance
Command Default
Administrative distance = 1
26-18
Release 5.2.1
IPv6 Commands
ipv6 unicast-routing
The ipv6 unicast-routing command enables the forwarding of IPv6 unicast datagrams. The no ipv6 unicast-routing command disables the forwarding of IPv6 unicast datagrams.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ipv6 unicast-routing no ipv6 unicast-routing
Command Default
Enabled
26-19
Release 5.2.1
ping6
The Packet Internet Groper (PING) ping6 command sends an Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMPv6) echo request to a remote host which replies with an ICMPv6 echo reply. Use the ping6 command to verify network routing and basic network connectivity. Note: The address of the source in an echo message will be the destination of the echo reply message. To form an echo reply message, the source and destination addresses are simply reversed, the type code changed to 0, and the checksum recomputed. ICMPv6 is used to report problems with delivery of IPv6 datagrams within an IPv6 network. It can also show when a particular node is not responding, when an IP network is not reachable, when a node is overloaded, when an error occurs in the IP header information, etc. The protocol is also frequently used by Internet managers to verify correct operations of nodes and to check that routers are correctly routing packets to the specified destination address.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ping6 {<A:B:C:D:E:F:G:H> | <A:B:C:D:E:F:G:H>}
Command Syntax
A:B:C:D:E:F:G:H A:B:C:D:E:F:G:H the destination IPv6 address the Link-local IPv6 address
26-20
Release 5.2.1
IPv6 Commands
service ipv6 cpe-forwarding enable

The service ipv6 cpe-forwarding enable command enables IPv6 CPE forwarding. The no service ipv6 cpe-forwarding enable command disables IPv6 CPE forwarding.
Group Access
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

service ipv6 cpe-forwarding enable no service ipv6 cpe-forwarding enable
Command Default
Disabled
26-21
Release 5.2.1
show ipv6 dhcp

The show ipv6 dhcp command displays DHCP messages sent and received for all slots on the BSR. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show ipv6 dhcp command:
DHCP IPv6 Statistics: CMTS Slot Upstream Downstream 4 30238 30234 6 0 0 9 0 0 11 40174 40160
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ipv6 dhcp [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show ipv6 dhcp [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
26-22
Release 5.2.1
IPv6 Commands
count count-only
26-23
Release 5.2.1
show ipv6 interface

The show ipv6 interface command displays the status, statistical information, and configuration for the network interfaces. The show ipv6 interface command without any command arguments displays status, statistical information, and configuration for all interfaces configured for IPv6. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show ipv6 interface command:
26-24
Release 5.2.1
IPv6 Commands
ethernet 15/6 is up, line protocol is up IPv6 is enabled, link-local address is FE80::230:B8FF:FEC1:D6F6 Primary address: 2000:300::18, subnet is 2000:300::/64 [UP] Joined Group address(es): FF02::1 FF02::2 FF02::1:2 FF02::1:FF00:18 FF02::1:FFC1:D6F6 FF05::1:3 MTU 1500 bytes ICMP redirects are enabled ND DAD is enabled, number of DAD attempts: 3 ND reachable time is 0 milliseconds ND advertised reachable time is 0 milliseconds ND advertised retransmit interval is 1000 milliseconds ND router advertisements are sent every 200000 milliseconds ND router advertisements live for 0 milliseconds loopback 2 is up, line protocol is up IPv6 is enabled, link-local address is FE80::230:B8FF:FEC1:D600 Primary address: 2001:900:101::1, subnet is 2001:900:101::/64 [UP] Joined Group address(es): FF02::1 FF02::1:2 FF02::1:FF00:1 FF02::1:FFC1:D600 MTU 1514 bytes IPv6 helper address(es): Cable IPv6 cable-modem helper address(es): 2000:300::2 cable-modem ICMP redirects are disabled Secondary address(es): 2001:900:102::1, subnet is 2001:900:102::/64 [UP] cable 0/0 is up, line protocol is up IPv6 is enabled, link-local address is FE80::230:B8FF:FEC1:D600 cable 0/1 is administratively down, line protocol is down IPv6 is enabled, link-local address is FE80::230:B8FF:FEC1:D601 bl 2/0 i d i i t ti l d li t l i d
[UP]
[UP]
[UP] [TEN]
26-25
Release 5.2.1
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ipv6 interface [cable <X/Y> | ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y> | loopback <1-255>] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show ipv6 interface [cable <X/Y> | ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y> | loopback <1-255>] [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
cable X/Y ethernet X/Y gigaether X/Y loopback 1-255 | begin exclude include WORD count count-only the cable interface slot and MAC domain number the Ethernet interface slot and port number the Gigabit Ethernet interface slot and port number the loopback interface number turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
26-26
Release 5.2.1
IPv6 Commands
show ipv6 interface brief

The show ipv6 interface brief command provides a summary of IPv6 status and configuration. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show ipv6 interface brief command:
ethernet 15/6 [up/up] FE80::230:B8FF:FEC1:D6F6 2000:300::18 loopback 2 [up/up] FE80::230:B8FF:FEC1:D600 2001:900:101::1 2001:900:102::1 cable 0/0 [up/up] FE80::230:B8FF:FEC1:D600 cable 0/1 [up/down] FE80::230:B8FF:FEC1:D601 cable 2/0 [up/down] FE80::230:B8FF:FEC1:D620 cable 2/1 [up/down] FE80::230:B8FF:FEC1:D621 cable 4/0 [up/down] FE80::230:B8FF:FEC1:D640 cable 4/1 [up/down] FE80::230:B8FF:FEC1:D641
[UP] [UP] [UP] [UP] [UP] [UP] [TEN] [TEN] [TEN] [TEN] [TEN]
Group Access
All
Command Mode
26-27
Release 5.2.1
Command Line Usage

show ipv6 interface brief [ cable <X/Y> | ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y> | loopback <1-255>] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show ipv6 interface brief [ cable <X/Y> | ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y> | loopback <1-255>] [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
cable X/Y ethernet X/Y gigaether X/Y loopback 1-255 | begin exclude include WORD count count-only the cable interface slot and MAC domain number the Ethernet interface slot and port number the Gigabit Ethernet interface slot and port number the loopback interface number turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
26-28
Release 5.2.1
IPv6 Commands
show ipv6 neighbor

The show ipv6 neighbor command displays IPv6 neighbor information. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show ipv6 neighbor command:
IPv6 Address 2001:0DB8:0:4::2 FE80::XXXX:A0FF:FED6:141E 2001:0DB8:1::45a
Age 0 0 -
Link-layer Addr 0003.a0d6.141e 0003.a0d6.141e 0002.7d1a.9472
State REACH REACH REACH
Interface Ethernet2 Ethernet2 Ethernet2
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ipv6 neighbor [<A:B:C:D:E:F:G:H> | cable <X/Y> | ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y> | loopback <1-255>] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show ipv6 neighbor [ <A:B:C:D:E:F:G:H> | cable <X/Y> | ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y> | loopback <1-255>] [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
A:B:C:D:E:F:G:H cable X/Y ethernet X/Y the IPv6 Address of the neighbor entry the cable interface slot and MAC domain number the Ethernet interface slot and port number
26-29
Release 5.2.1
gigaether X/Y loopback 1-255 | begin exclude include WORD count count-only
the Gigabit Ethernet interface slot and port number the loopback interface number turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
26-30
Release 5.2.1
IPv6 Commands
show ipv6 route

The show ipv6 route command displays active entries in the IPv6 routing table. The following is typical screen output from the show ipv6 route command:
IPv6 Routing Table Codes: C - Connected, L - Local, S - Static IPv6 Routing Table - Total number of routes 3 C C C 2000:300::/64 [0/0] via 2000:300::18, ethernet 15/6 2001:900:101::/64 [0/0] via 2001:900:101::1, loopback 2 2001:900:102::/64 [0/0] via 2001:900:102::1, loopback 2
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ipv6 route [ <A:B:C:D:E:F:G:H> | <A:B:C:D:E:F:G:H/ 1-128 > | connected | static | summary] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show ipv6 route [ <A:B:C:D:E:F:G:H> | <A:B:C:D:E:F:G:H/ 1-128 > | connected | static | summary] [ | {count | count-only}]
26-31
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
A:B:C:D:E:F:G:H A:B:C:D:E:F:G:H/ 1-128 connected static summary | begin exclude include WORD count count-only the destination IPv6 Address the IPv6 address/Prefix Length displays connected routes displays static routes displays a summary of routes in the IPv6 routing table turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
26-32
Release 5.2.1
IPv6 Commands
show ipv6 traffic

The show ipv6 traffic command displays IPv6, ICMPv6, UDPv6, and DHCPv6 statistics. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show ipv6 traffic command:
26-33
Release 5.2.1
IPv6 statistics: Rcvd: 1139 input, 600 local destination 0 source-routed, 0 truncated 0 format errors, 0 hop count exceeded 0 bad header, 0 unknown option, 0 bad source 0 unknown protocol, 0 not a router 0 fragments, 0 total reassembled 0 reassembly timeouts, 0 reassembly failures 0 unicast RPF drop, 0 suppressed RPF drop 0 not a member, 0 bad scope 0 too short, 0 too small 0 fragments dropped, 0 fragments overflow 0 bad version, 0 nobuffer drop, 0 too big Sent: 170 generated, 0 forwarded 0 fragmented into, 0 fragments, 0 failed 0 encapsulation failed, 0 no route, 0 too big Mcast: 1100 received, 261 sent ICMPv6 statistics: Rcvd: 561 input, 0 checksum errors, 0 too short 0 unknown info type, 0 unknown error type unreach: 0 routing, 0 admin, 0 neighbor, 0 address, 0 po parameter: 0 error, 0 header, 0 option 0 hopcount expired, 0 reassembly timeout,0 too big 0 echo request, 0 echo reply 0 group query, 0 group report, 0 group reduce 0 router solicit, 553 router advert, 0 redirects 0 neighbor solicit, 0 neighbor advert Sent: 131 output, 0 rate unreach: 0 routing, 0 admin, 0 neighbor, 0 address, 0 po parameter: 0 error, 0 header, 0 option 0 hopcount expired, 0 reassembly timeout,0 too big 0 echo request, 0 echo reply 0 group query, 0 group report, 0 group reduce 0 router solicit, 119 router advert, 0 redirects 12 neighbor solicit, 0 neighbor advert UDPv6 statistics: Rcvd: 39 input, 0 checksum errors, 0 length errors 0 no port, 0 dropped Sent: 39 output
26-34
Release 5.2.1
IPv6 Commands
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ipv6 traffic [detail ] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show ipv6 traffic [detail ] [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
detail | begin exclude include WORD count count-only display detailed statistics turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
26-35
Release 5.2.1
traceroute6
The traceroute6 command is used to trace the route that packets take through the network from their source to their destination. The BSR sends out a sequence of User Datagram Protocol (UDP) datagrams to an invalid port number at the remote host to trace the route through the network, as follows:
First, three UDP datagrams are sent, each with a TTL field value set to 1. The TTL value of 1 causes the datagram to "timeout" as soon as it reaches the first router in the path. The router responds with an ICMP "time exceeded" message indicating that the datagram has expired. Next, three more UDP datagrams are sent, each with the TTL value set to 2. This causes the second router in the path to the destination to return an ICMP "time exceeded" message.
This process continues until the UDP datagrams reach the destination and the system originating the traceroute has received an ICMP "time exceeded" message from every router in the path to the destination. Since the UDP datagrams are trying to access an invalid port at the destination host, the host responds with an ICMP "port unreachable" message which signals the traceroute program to finish. The following is typical screen output from the traceroute6 command:
traceroute to 150.31.40.10 : 1-64 hops, 38 byte packets 1 172.17.103.65 0.000 ms 0.000 ms 0.000 ms 2 172.17.1.1 0.000 ms 0.000 ms 0.000 ms 3 150.31.1.21 0.000 ms 16.7 ms 0.000 ms 4 150.31.40.10 0.000 ms 0.000 ms 0.000 ms Trace complete
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

traceroute6 {<A:B:C:D:E:F:G:H > | options <WORD> {<A:B:C:D:E:F:G:H >}} [source <A:B:C:D:E:F:G:H >] [timeout <1-1024>] [nprobes <1-1024>] [maxhops <2-1024>] [port <0-65535>]
Release 5.2.1
IPv6 Commands
Command Syntax
A:B:C:D:E:F:G:H WORD the destination IPv6 address any combination of d, l, n, r, or v d = SO_DEBUG l = hostnames and addresses n = addresses r = SO_DONTROUTE v = verbose the IPv6 address of the source interface the number of seconds to wait for a response to a probe packet the number of probes to send the maximum TTL value - the traceroute6 command terminates when the destination or this value is reached the destination port used by the UDP probe messages
source A:B:C:D:E:F:G:H timeout 1-1024 nprobes 1-1024 maxhops 2-1024
port 0-65535
Command Defaults
timeout = 3 seconds nprobes = 3 maxhops = 64 port = 32868
26-37
27
IS-IS Commands
Introduction
This chapter describes the integrated Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS) commands. The Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS) is a link state based intra-domain routing protocol used to build a complete and consistent picture of a networks topology by sharing link state information across all network Intermediate System (IS) devices. IS-IS is based on an SPF routing algorithm and shares all the advantages common to other link-state protocols. It also routes both IP packets and pure OSI packets with no extra encapsulation by design. IS-IS supports type of service (TOS) identifiers, IP subnetting, variable subnet masks, external routing, and authentication.
IS-IS Command Descriptions

This section contains an alphabetized list and descriptions of the IS-IS commands supported by the BSR.
27-1
Release 5.2.1
area-password
The area-password command is used to configure an IS-IS area authentication password for an area.The area authentication password is inserted in Level 1 (station router level) LSPs, CSNPs, and Partial Sequence Number PDUs (PSNPs).
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
IS-IS Router Configuration
Command Line Usage

area-password <WORD>
Command Syntax
WORD the unencrypted text password, 1-8 characters in length.
27-2
Release 5.2.1
IS-IS Commands
authentication mode
The authentication mode command specifies global IS-IS authentication mode control. The no authentication mode command disables global IS-IS authentication.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

authentication mode {md5 | text} no authentication mode {md5 | text}
Command Syntax
md5 text MD5 based authentication clear text authentication
Command Default
Disabled
27-3
Release 5.2.1
clear isis
The clear isis command clears the IS-IS database.
Group Access
All
Command Mode
All modes except User EXEC.
Command Line Usage

clear isis *
27-4
Release 5.2.1
IS-IS Commands
The BSR must be configured to force a default route into the IS-IS routing domain. The default-information originate command is used to force a default route into the IS-IS routing domain.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

default-information originate [route-map <WORD>]
Command Syntax
route-map WORD the route map name - this keyword is not supported at this time
27-5
Release 5.2.1
distance
An administrative distance is a rating of the trustworthiness of a routing information source, such as an individual router or a group of routers. Numerically, an administrative distance is an integer between 1 and 255. The higher the value, the lower the trust rating. For example, an administrative distance of 255 means the routing information source cannot be trusted and should be ignored. The distance command is used to set the administrative distance for the IS-IS router.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

distance <1-255>
Command Syntax
1-255 the IS-IS routing administrative distance
Command Default
115
27-6
Release 5.2.1
IS-IS Commands
domain-password
The routing domain authentication password is inserted in Level 2 (the area router level) LSP, CSNP, and PSNPs. The domain-password command is used to configure authentication password for an IS-IS routing domain.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

domain-password <WORD>
Command Syntax
WORD the unencrypted text password 1-8 characters in length
27-7
Release 5.2.1
hello padding
The hello padding command pads IS-IS hello PDUs to the full MTU. The no hello padding command disables hello PDU padding.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

hello padding no hello padding
27-8
Release 5.2.1
IS-IS Commands
ignore-lsp-errors
The ignore-lsp-errors command allows the BSR to ignore IS-IS link-state packets that are received with internal checksum errors rather than deleting the link-state packets. Link-state packets are used by receiving routers to maintain their routing tables. The no ignore-lsp-errors command disables this function. The IS-IS protocol requires that a received link-state packet with an internal checksum error be deleted by the receiving router. This causes the transmitting router to resend the packet. If a network has a link that causes data corruption while still delivering link-state packets with correct checksums, a continuous cycle of deleting and resending large numbers of packets can occur which may create network problems.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ignore-lsp-errors no ignore-lsp-errors
Command Default
Disabled
27-9
Release 5.2.1
ip router isis
The ip router isis command is used to enable IS-IS routing on the interface.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

ip router isis no ip router isis
27-10
Release 5.2.1
IS-IS Commands
isis authentication mode

The isis authentication mode command specifies IS-IS authentication mode control for an interface. The no isis authentication mode command disables IS-IS authentication for an interface.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

isis authentication mode {md5 | text } no isis authentication mode {md5 | text }
Command Syntax
md5 text MD5 based authentication cleartext authentication
Command Default
Disabled
27-11
Release 5.2.1
isis circuit-type
The default IS-IS interface circuit type is for Level 1 and Level 2. The isis circuit-type command is used to select the IS-IS interface circuit type of adjacency desired for neighbors on the BSR interface (IS-IS interface circuit type).
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

isis circuit-type [level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2-only] no isis circuit-type [level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2-only]
Command Syntax
level-1 indicates that a Level 1 adjacency may be established if there is at least one area address in common between this system and its neighbors indicates that a Level 1 and 2 adjacency is established if the neighbor is also configured as level-1-2 and there is at least one area in common. If there is no area in common, a Level 2 adjacency is established indicates that a Level 2 adjacency is established only if the neighbor is configured exclusively to be a Level 2 router
level-1-2
level-2-only
27-12
Release 5.2.1
IS-IS Commands
isis csnp-interval
Complete Sequence Number PDUs (CSNPs) hold a complete list of all LSPs in the IS-IS routing database. CSNPs are sent periodically on all links, and the receiving systems use the information in the CSNP to update and synchronize their LSP databases. The designated router multicasts CSNPs on broadcast links in place of sending explicit acknowledgments for each LSP. By default, IS-IS sends CSN packets periodically. If the BSR is the designated router on a LAN, IS-IS sends CSN packets every 10 seconds. Depending on your network topology you may want to modify the default interval to protect against LSP flooding. The isis csnp-interval command is used to adjust the IS-IS CSNP interval for Intranet connections if the Intranet is a part of a multiaccess meshed network on the interface.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

isis csnp-interval <1-65535> [level-1 | level-2] no isis csnp-interval [level-1 | level-2]
Command Syntax
1-65535 level-1 level-2 the IS-IS CSNP interval in seconds indicates that the interface is a Level 1 IS-IS interface indicates that the interface is a Level 2 IS-IS interface
27-13
Release 5.2.1
isis hello padding

The isis hello padding command pads IS-IS hello PDUs to the full MTU on an IS-IS enabled interface. The no isis hello padding command disables hello PDU padding on an IS-IS enabled interface.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

isis hello padding
27-14
Release 5.2.1
IS-IS Commands
isis hello-interval
IS-IS hello packets are broadcast to discover the identity of neighboring IS-IS systems and to determine whether the neighbors are Level 1 or Level 2 intermediate systems. The hello-interval is the amount of time between sending hello packets. The hello interval can be configured independently for Level 1 and Level 2. The isis hello-interval command is used to specify the length of time between hello packets that the BSR sends on either the Level 1 or Level 2 IS-IS router interface.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

isis hello-interval <1-65535> [level-1 | level-2] no isis hello-interval [level-1 | level-2]
Command Syntax
1-65535 level-1 level-2 the ISIS hello interval in seconds Level 1 IS-IS routing Level 2 IS-IS routing
27-15
Release 5.2.1
isis hello-multiplier
The isis hello-multiplier command is used to specify the number of Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System (IS-IS) hello packets a neighbor can miss before the BSR determines the adjacency between the BSR interface and the neighbor is down.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

isis hello-multiplier <3-1000> [level-1 | level-2] no isis hello-multiplier [level-1 | level-2]
Command Syntax
3-1000 level-1 level-2 the number of missing hello packets Level 1 IS-IS routing Level 2 IS-IS routing
27-16
Release 5.2.1
IS-IS Commands
isis lsp-interval
IS-IS Link-state PDUs (LSPs) contain information about the state of adjacencies to neighboring IS-IS systems. LSPs are flooded periodically throughout an area. The isis lsp-interval command configures the time delay between successive link state packet (LSP) transmissions.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

isis lsp-interval <1-65535> no isis lsp-interval
Command Syntax
1-65535 the time delay between successive LSPs in milliseconds
Command Default
33 milliseconds
27-17
Release 5.2.1
isis message-digest-key
The isis message-digest-key md5 command is used to configure a Message Digest 5 (MD5) Authentication key for an IS-IS interface. The no isis message-digest-key md5 command disables MD5 auhentication for an IS-IS interface.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

isis message-digest-key <1-255> md5 {7 <password> | <password>} [level-1 | level-2 ] no isis message-digest-key <1-255> [level-1 | level-2 ]
Command Syntax
1-255 7 <password> password level-1 level-2 the range of numbers from which an MD5 secret Key ID can be selected specifies a hidden (encrypted) MD5 password between 18-50 characters specifies an MD5 cleartext password between 1-16 characters configure MD5 for Level 1 IS-IS routing configure MD5 for Level 2 IS-IS routing
27-18
Release 5.2.1
IS-IS Commands
isis metric
You can configure a cost for a specified interface. A cost is an arbitrary routing metric value assigned for crossing or intersecting networks. This metric can be applied to both Level 1 and/or Level 2 routing. The isis metric command is used to configure the metric cost for the specified IS-IS interface. The no isis metric command disables the metric cost for the specified IS-IS interface.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

isis metric {<0-63> | <0-16777214>} [level-1 | level-2] no isis metric [level-1 | level-2]
Command Syntax
0-63 the assigned narrow metric style value for the interface - metric styles are specified with the metric-style command the assigned wide metric style value for the interface - metric styles are specified with the metric-style command configure a cost for Level 1 IS-IS routing configure a cost for Level 2 IS-IS routing
0-16777214
level-1 level-2
Command Default
Disabled
27-19
Release 5.2.1
isis network point-to-point

The isis network point-to-point command enables IS-IS point-to-point operations over broadcast media interfaces. The no isis network point-to-point command disables IS-IS point-to-point operations over broadcast media interfaces.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

isis network point-to-point no isis network point-to-point
Command Default
Disabled
27-20
Release 5.2.1
IS-IS Commands
isis password
You can assign different passwords for the different IS-IS routing levels. Specifying Level 1 or Level 2 configures the password for only Level 1 or Level 2 routing, respectively. By default, password authentication is disabled. The isis password command is used to configure the authentication password for hello packets on the specified interface. The no isis password command removes the password.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

isis password <WORD> [level-1 | level-2] no isis password [<WORD>] [level-1 | level-2]
Command Syntax
WORD level-1 level-2 the unencrypted cleartext password 1-8 characters in length. configure a password for Level 1 IS-IS routing configure a password for Level 2 IS-IS routing
Command Default
Disabled
27-21
Release 5.2.1
isis priority
A BSR uses hello packets to advertise its priority to become a designated router. IS-IS uses the advertised priorities on all multiaccess networks to elect a designated router for the network. This router is responsible for sending network LSP advertisements, which describe all the routers attached to the network. These advertisements are flooded throughout a single area. The priority value is meaningful only on a multiaccess network. A routers priority for becoming the designated router is indicated by an arbitrary number. Routers with a higher value are more likely to become the designated router. The isis priority command is used to select the designated router priority. The no isis priority command restores the default priority value.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

isis priority <0-127> [level-1 | level-2] no isis priority [level-1 | level-2]
Command Syntax
0-127 level-1 level-2 a number that assigns a priority value to the designated router. designate a priority for Level 1 IS-IS routing designate a priority for Level 2 IS-IS routing
Command Default
32
27-22
Release 5.2.1
IS-IS Commands
isis retransmit-interval
Note: The isis retransmit-interval command is not valid on the BSR as IS-IS point-to-point links are not supported.
When LSPs are dropped, LSPs are retransmitted. The isis retransmit-interval command is used to set the number of seconds between retransmission of the same LSP. The no isis retransmit-interval command disables the retransmission of LSPs. Note: The number of seconds should be greater than the expected round-trip delay between any two routers on the attached network. Set this parameter conservatively to avoid unnecessary retransmission. Increase the number of seconds for networks that have serial lines and virtual links.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

isis retransmit-interval <1-65535> no isis retransmit-interval
Command Syntax
1-65535 the number of seconds between retransmission of the same LSP
Command Default
5 seconds Disabled
27-23
Release 5.2.1
isis retransmit-throttle-interval
Note: The isis retransmit-throttle-interval command is not valid on the BSR as IS-IS point-to-point links are not supported.
The isis retransmit-throttle-interval command to configure the amount of time between any LSP retransmissions.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

isis retransmit-throttle-interval <1-65535> no isis retransmit-throttle-interval
Command Syntax
1-65535 the minimum delay in milliseconds between LSP retransmissions on the interface
Command Default
33 milliseconds
27-24
Release 5.2.1
IS-IS Commands
is-type
The is-type command is used to specify that the BSR acts as a Level 1 (intra-area) router, as both a Level 1 router and a Level 2 (inter-area) router, or as a Level-2 router only. The no is-type command disables the IS-IS type.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

is-type {level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2-only} no is-type
Command Syntax
level-1 level-1-2 level-2-only indicates a Level 1 IS-IS router indicates a Level 1 and Level 2 IS-IS router indicates a Level 2 IS-IS router
Command Default
Disabled
27-25
Release 5.2.1
log-adjacency-changes
The log-adjacency-changes command logs adjacency changes with neighboring Intermediate Systems without having to use a debug command.The command logs Level-1 and Level-2 Intermediate System to Intermediate System Hellos (IIH). IIHs are used for establishing L1/L2 adjacencies with other Intermediate Systems.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

log-adjacency-changes [all] no log-adjacency-changes [all]
Command Syntax
all Log adjacency changes generated by non-IIH events.
Command Default
Disabled
27-26
Release 5.2.1
IS-IS Commands
lsp-gen-interval
The lsp-gen-interval command specifies the minimum interval between regenerating the same LSP. The no lsp-gen-interval command disables regenerating the same LSP.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

lsp-gen-interval <1-120> no lsp-gen-interval
Command Syntax
1-120 the minimum LSP regeneration interval in seconds
Command Default
Disabled
27-27
Release 5.2.1
lsp-refresh-interval
The lsp-refresh-interval command specifies the LSP refresh interval. The no lsp-refresh-interval command disables LSP refresh.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

lsp-refresh-interval <1-65234> no lsp-refresh-interval
Command Syntax
1-65234 the LSP refresh interval in seconds
Command Default
900 seconds
27-28
Release 5.2.1
IS-IS Commands
max-lsp-lifetime
The max-lsp-lifetime command specifies the maximum LSP lifetime value. The no max-lsp-lifetime command disables maximum LSP lifetime.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

max-lsp-lifetime <301-65535> no max-lsp-lifetime
Command Syntax
301-65535 the maximum LSP lifetime in seconds
Command Default
Disabled
27-29
Release 5.2.1
maximum-paths
The maximum-paths command specifies the maximum number of parallel routes an IP routing protocol can support. The no maximum-paths command cancels the number of maximum paths.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

Command Syntax
27-30
Release 5.2.1
IS-IS Commands
message-digest-key md5
The message-digest-key md5 command is used to configure a global Message Digest 5 (MD5) Authentication key for IS-IS. The no message-digest-key md5 command disables global MD5 authentication for IS-IS.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

message-digest-key <1-255> md5 {7 <password> | <password>} [level-1 | level-2 ] no message-digest-key <1-255> [level-1 | level-2 ]
Command Syntax
1-255 7 <password> password level-1 level-2 the range of numbers from which an MD5 secret Key ID can be selected specifies a hidden (encrypted) MD5 password between 18-50 characters specifies an MD5 cleartext password between 1-16 characters configure MD5 for Level 1 IS-IS routing configure MD5 for Level 2 IS-IS routing
27-31
Release 5.2.1
metric-style
The metric-style command specifies the metric style to be used with IS-IS.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

metric-style {narrow} {transition [ level-1 | level-2] } {wide [ level-1 | level-2 | transition] } no metric-style [narrow] [transition [ level-1 | level-2] ] [wide [ level-1 | level-2 | transition] ]
Command Syntax
narrow transition wide level-1 level-2 wide transition use the old style of TLVs with narrow metric send and accept both styles of TLVs during transition use the new style of TLVs to carry a wider metric set the metric style for Level 1 IS-IS routing set the metric style for Level 2 IS-IS routing send the new style of TLVs to carry a wider metric and accept both styles of TLVs in return
27-32
Release 5.2.1
IS-IS Commands
net
The net command is used to define a Network Entity Title (NET) for the area address and the system ID of an IS-IS router. Most end systems and intermediate systems have one NET. Intermediate systems that participate in multiple areas can have multiple NETs. A user can configure 3 net commands. The following example configures IS-IS for IP routing, with an area ID of 01.0001 and a system ID of 0000.0000.0002.00:
MOT(config-isis)#net 01.0001.0000.0000.0002.00
The following criteria is used to interpret the IS-IS NET address format:
The first portion of the NET address is the area number, which is a variable number from 1 through 13 bytes. The first byte of the area number (01) is the authority and format indicator (AFI). The next bytes are the assigned domain (area) identifier, which can be from 0 through 12 bytes. In the example above, the area identifier is 0001. The next six bytes form the system identifier (SYSID). The SYSID can be any six bytes that are unique throughout the entire domain. The system identifier commonly is either the Media Access Control (MAC) address or the IP address expressed in binary-coded decimal (BCD). The last byte (00) is the n-selector.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

net <XX.XXXX.XXXX. ... .XXXX.XX> no net <XX.XXXX.XXXX. ... .XXXX.XX>
Command Syntax
XX.XXXX.XXXX. ... .XXXX.XX is the IS-IS area ID and system ID for an IS-IS router
27-33
Release 5.2.1
passive-interface
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

passive-interface {cable <X/Y> | ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y> | loopback <1-255>} no passive-interface {cable <X/Y> | ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y> | loopback <1-255>}
Command Syntax
cable X/Y ethernet X/Y gigaether X/Y loopback 1-255 the cable interface slot and MAC domain number the Ethernet interface slot and port number the Gigabit Ethernet interface slot and port number the loopback interface number
Command Default
Enabled
27-34
Release 5.2.1
IS-IS Commands
redistribute
You can advertise networks by redistributing routes learned from one routing protocol into another. The redistribute command is used to redistribute a BGP, OSPF, RIP, or static route into the IS-IS routing process.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

redistribute {bgp | connected | ospf | rip | static} [level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2 ] [metric <1-16777215>] [metric-type {1 | 2}] [route-map <WORD>] no redistribute {bgp | connected | ospf | rip | static}
Command Syntax
bgp connected ospf rip static level-1 level-1-2 level-2 metric 0-63 indicates a BGP route indicates a connected route indicates an OSPF route indicates a RIP route indicates a static route specifies that IS-IS Level 1 routes are redistributed independently specifies that IS-IS Level 1 and Level 2 routes are redistributed independently specifies that IS-IS Level 2 routes are redistributed independently the assigned narrow metric style value for the interface - metric styles are specified with the metric-style command
27-35
Release 5.2.1
metric 0-16777214
the assigned wide metric style value for the interface - metric styles are specified with the metric-style command IS-IS exterior metric type for redistributed routes the name of the route-map used to conditionally control the route redistribution
metric-type route-map WORD
27-36
Release 5.2.1
IS-IS Commands
router isis
The router isis command enables IS-IS routing, specifies an IS-IS process for IP communication and enters IS-IS router configuration mode.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

router isis [<WORD>]
Command Syntax
WORD the name for the routing process - if a tag is not specified, a null tag is assumed
27-37
Release 5.2.1
set-overload-bit
The LSP overload bit is enabled for the IS-IS routing process to ensure that no paths through the BSR are seen by other routers in the IS-IS area when the Link State routing table on the BSR is incomplete or inaccurate. However, IP and CLNS prefixes directly connected to the BSR continue to be reachable. Use the set-overload-bit command to allow other routers on the network to ignore IS-IS routing problems on the BSR in their SPF calculations until the IS-IS routing process on the BSR has recovered. The no set-overload-bit command disables the overload bit.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

set-overload-bit no set-overload-bit
Command Default
Disabled
27-38
Release 5.2.1
IS-IS Commands
show clns interface

The show clns interface command displays the CLNS interface status and configuration. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show clns interface command:
ethernet 7/0 is up,line protocol is up CLNS protocol processing is disabled loopback 1 is up,line protocol is up CLNS protocol processing is disabled loopback 2 is up,line protocol is up CLNS protocol processing is disabled loopback 3 is up,line protocol is up CLNS protocol processing is disabled loopback 5 is up,line protocol is up CLNS protocol processing is disabled loopback 6 is up,line protocol is up CLNS protocol processing is disabled ethernet 2/3 is up,line protocol is up CLNS protocol processing is enabled Checksums enabled, MTU 1500 Next Esh/Ish is 1 seconds Routing Protocol: IS-IS Circuit Type:level-1 Level-1 Metric:18 Priority: 32 Circuit ID:0011.0011.0016 Number of active level-1 adjacencies:1 Next IS-IS LAN Level-1 Hello in 7 seconds ethernet 2/4 is up,line protocol is up CLNS protocol processing is enabled Checksums enabled, MTU 1500 Next Esh/Ish is 1 seconds Routing Protocol: IS-IS Circuit Type:level-2 only Level-2 Metric:12 Priority: 32 Circuit ID:0011.0011.0012 Number of active level-2 adjacencies:0 Next IS-IS LAN Level-2 hello in 7 seconds
27-39
Release 5.2.1
The show clns interface command displays the following information: interface the specific interface is described in the output and is described as being up (functional) and the line protocol as being up (functional) or administratively down describes whether or not the CLNS protocol is enabled or disabled the checksums can be enabled or disabled the maximum transmission unit size for a packet on this interface displays when the next IS-IS hello packet is sent on this interface describes the routing protocol on this interface - below this field, information for Level 1 and/or Level 2 is displayed indicates whether the interface has been configured for local routing (Level 1), area routing, (Level 2), or local and area routing (Level 1 and 2) indicates the routing metric assigned to the Level 1 or Level 2 router indicates the priority of the IS on this interface indicates the ISIS circuit ID
CLNS protocol processing Checksums enabled MTU Next Esh/Ish Routing Protocol Circuit Type
Metric Priority Circuit ID
Number of active indicates the number of active Level 1 adjacencies level-1 adjacencies Number of active indicates the number of active Level 2 adjacencies level-2 adjacencies
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Release 5.2.1
IS-IS Commands
Command Line Usage

show clns interface [ ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y> | loopback <1-255> ] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show clns interface [ ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y> | loopback <1-255> ] [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
ethernet X/Y gigaether X/Y loopback 1-255 | begin exclude include WORD count count-only the Ethernet interface slot and port number the Gigabit Ethernet interface slot and port number the loopback interface number turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
27-41
Release 5.2.1
show clns is-neighbors

The show clns is-neighbors command displays IS-IS information for IS-IS router adjacencies. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show clns is-neighbors command:
System Id 0011.0011.0016
Interface Ethernet2/3
State Up
Type L1
Priority Circuit Id 64 0011.0011.0016.02
The show clns is-neighbors command displays the following information: System Id Interface State Type Priority Circuit Id the System ID of the IS-IS router the interface on which the router was discovered the Adjacency state - "Up" and "Init" are the states of the IS-IS neighbor displays whether the IS-IS router type is Level 1 or Level 2 indicates the routing priority indicates the IS-IS circuit ID
Group Access
All
Command Mode
27-42
Release 5.2.1
IS-IS Commands
Command Line Usage

show clns is-neighbors [ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y> | loopback <1-255>] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show clns is-neighbors [ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y> | loopback <1-255>] [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
27-43
Release 5.2.1
show clns neighbors

The show clns neighbors command displays IS-IS neighbor information. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show clns neighbors command:
System Id 0011.0011.0016
SNPA 0030.942e.ddc1
State Up
Holdtime 7
Type Protocol L1 IS-IS
The show clns neighbors command displays the following information: System ID SNPA Interface State Init Up Holdtime Type Protocol the System ID of the IS-IS router the Subnetwork Point of Attachment, which is the data-link layer address the interface from which the system was learned the Adjacency state - "Up" and "Init" are the states of the IS neighbor the system is an IS and is waiting for an IS-IS hello message IS-IS regards the neighbor as not adjacent the IS is reachable the number of seconds before this adjacency entry times out the level of the IS-IS router the protocol through which the adjacency was learned - valid protocol source is IS-IS
Group Access
All
Command Mode
27-44
Release 5.2.1
IS-IS Commands
Command Line Usage

show clns neighbors [detail] [ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y> | loopback <1-255>] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show clns neighbors [detail] [ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y> | loopback <1-255>] [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
detail ethernet X/Y gigaether X/Y loopback 1-255 | begin exclude include WORD count count-only displays detailed information the Ethernet interface slot and port number the Gigabit Ethernet interface slot and port number the loopback interface number turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
27-45
Release 5.2.1
show clns protocol

The show clns protocol command displays the protocol-specific information for each IS-IS routing process in the BSR. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show clns protocol command:
IS-IS Router: System Id:0011.0011.0012.00 IS-Type: level-1-2 Manual area address(es): 49 Routing for area address(es): 49 Interfaces supported by IS-IS: Ethernet2/3 - IP Ethernet2/4 - IP Distance:115 Generate narrow metrics: level-1-2 Accept narrow metrics: level-1-2 Generate wide metrics: none Accept wide metrics: none
The show clns protocol command displays the following information: IS-IS Router System Id IS-Type: Manual area address(es): Routing for area address(es): indicates that the IS-IS protocol is enabled on the BSR the Identification value of the system indicates the IS-IS routing level (Level 1, Level 2 or both) is enabled on the router the area addresses that have been configured the manually configured and learned area addresses
27-46
Release 5.2.1
IS-IS Commands
Interfaces supported by the interfaces on the BSR that have IS-IS configured IS-IS: Distance: the configured IS-IS administrative routing distance
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show clns protocol [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show clns protocol [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
27-47
Release 5.2.1
show clns traffic

The show clns traffic command lists the CLNS packets that the BSR has processed. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show clns traffic command:
IS-IS: IS-IS: IS-IS: IS-IS: IS-IS: IS-IS: IS-IS: IS-IS: IS-IS: IS-IS: IS-IS: IS-IS: IS-IS: IS-IS: IS-IS: IS-IS: IS-IS: IS-IS: IS-IS: IS-IS: IS-IS: IS-IS: IS-IS: IS-IS:
Corrupted LSPs: L1 LSP Database Overloads: L2 LSP Database Overloads: Area Addresses Dropped: Attempts to Exceed Max Seq: Sequence Numbers Skipped: Own LSPs Purges: System ID Length Mismatches: Maximum Area Mismatches: Level-1 Hellos(sent/rcvd): Level-2 Hellos(sent/rcvd): PTP Hellos(sent/rcvd): Level-1 LSPs(sent/rcvd): Level-2 LSPs(sent/rcvd): Level-1 CSNP(sent/rcvd): Level-2 CSNP(sent/rcvd): Level-1 PSNP(sent/rcvd): Level-2 PSNP(sent/rcvd): Level-1 SPF Calculations: Level-2 SPF Calculations: Tot IS-Task Recvd pkts: Packets (sent/recvd): Mux Level Isis Pkts recvd: Total xmit failed:
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 17153/65132 17171/0 0/0 3564/10879 0/0 0/16273 0/0 6/0 0/0 3596 3802 92284 37894/92284 92284 0
The show clns traffic command displays the following information: Corrupted LSPs the number of corrupted LSPs recorded on BSR L1 LSP Database Overloads the number of times that the Level 1 LSP database has overloaded
27-48
Release 5.2.1
IS-IS Commands
L2 LSP Database Overloads
the number of times that the Level 2 LSP database has overloaded
Area Addresses the number of area addresses dropped by the BSR Dropped Attempts to Exceed Max Sequence Own LSPs Purges System ID Length Mismatches the maximum sequence number is 232 -1 - the number of times the BSR reaches that number when the generating new LSPs the number of LSPs received which have the same system ID as the BSR the number of IS-IS packets received which have an ID length other than 6
Maximum Area the number of IS-IS packets received which have a maximum Mismatches area number greater than 3 Level-1 Hellos (sent/rcvd) Level-2 Hellos (sent/rcvd) Level-1 LSPs (sent/rcvd) Level-2 LSPs (sent/rcvd) Level-1 CSNP (sent/rcvd) Level-2 CSNP (sent/rcvd) the number of Level 1 IS-IS hello packets sent and received the number of Level 2 IS-IS hello packets sent and received the number of Level 1 link-state PDUs sent and received the number of Level 2 link-state PDUs sent and received the number of Level 1 CSNPs sent and received the number of Level 2 CSNPs sent and received
Level-1 PSNPs the number of Level 1 PSNPs sent and received (sent/rcvd) Level-2 PSNPs the number of Level 2 PSNPs sent and received (sent/rcvd)
27-49
Release 5.2.1
Level-1 SPF Calculations Level-2 SPF Calculations
the number of times a Level 1 shortest -path-first (SPF) tree was computed the number of times a Level 2 SPF tree was computed
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show clns traffic [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show clns traffic [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
27-50
Release 5.2.1
IS-IS Commands
show ip redistribute
The show ip redistribute command displays which routing processes are being redistributed to other routing domains. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show ip redistribute command:
To isis in ipv4 redistribute ospf match internal match external 1 match external 2 route-map OSPF redistribute connected level-1 redistribute static
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show ip redistribute [ bgp | isis | ospf | rip ] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show ip redistribute [ bgp | isis | ospf | rip ] [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
bgp isis ospf rip displays only the routing domains redistributed into BGP displays only the routing domains redistributed into ISIS displays only the routing domains redistributed into OSPF displays only the routing domains redistributed into RIP
27-51
Release 5.2.1
| begin exclude include WORD
turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string
27-52
Release 5.2.1
IS-IS Commands
show isis database

The show isis database command is used to display all or specific IS-IS database information. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show isis database command:
IS-IS Level-1 Link State LSPID 0011.0011.0005.00-00 0011.0011.0005.03-00 0011.0011.0012.00-00 * IS-IS Level-2 Link State LSPID 0011.0011.0012.00-00 * 0011.0011.0016.00-00 0011.0011.0016.02-00
Database LSP Seq Num 0x0000001B 0x0000000B 0x00000014 Database LSP Seq Num 0x00000014 0x00004DFC 0x00000013
LSP Checksum 0xD0C2 0x08BF 0x6D7E
LSP Holdtime 370 380 329
ATT/P/OL 0/0/0 0/0/0 0/0/0
LSP Checksum 0x0633 0xE624 0xF432
LSP Holdtime 329 284 279
ATT/P/OL 0/0/0 0/0/0 0/0/0
The show isis database command displays the following information: LSPID the LSP identifier
LSP Seq Num the sequence number for the LSP. Allows other systems to determine if they have received the latest information from source LSP Checksum the checksum of the LSP packet
LSP Holdtime the number of seconds the LSP remains valid ATT P OL the Attach bit - this indicates that router is a Level 2 router and can reach other areas the P bit - this detects if Intermediate System is capable of area partition repair the Overload bit - this determines if Intermediate System is congested
27-53
Release 5.2.1
Group Access
All
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show isis database [detail <WORD> | l1 | l2 | level-1 | level-2] [<WORD> | detail <WORD>] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show isis database [detail <WORD> | l1 | l2 | level-1 | level-2] <WORD> | detail <WORD>] [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
detail WORD l1 l2 level-1 level-2 | begin exclude include WORD displays the contents of each LSP the LSPID in the form xxxx.xxxx.xxxx.xx-xx or name.xx-xx abbreviation for the level-1 option abbreviation for the level-2 option displays the Level 1 IS-IS routing link state database displays the Level 2 IS-IS routing link state database turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string
27-54
Release 5.2.1
IS-IS Commands
count count-only
27-55
Release 5.2.1
show isis hostname

The show isis hostname command displays IS-IS hostname information. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show isis hostname command:
Level *
System ID 0011.0011.0012
Dynamic Hostname MOT-Marlboro
Command Line Usage

show isis hostname [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show isis hostname [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
27-56
Release 5.2.1
IS-IS Commands
show isis neighbors

The show isis neighbors command displays IS-IS neighbor information. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show isis neighbors command:
System Id 0011.0011.0016 0011.0011.0005
Interface Ethernet2/3 Ethernet2/4
State Up Up
Type L2 L1
Priority Circuit Id 64 0011.0011.0016.02 64 0011.0011.0005.03
The show isis neighbors command displays the following information: System Id Interface State Type Priority Circuit Id the System ID of the IS-IS router the interface from which the system was learned the Adjacency state - "Up" and "Init" are the states of the IS neighbor displays whether the IS-IS router type is Level 1 or Level 2 indicates the routing priority indicates the IS-IS circuit ID
Command Line Usage

show isis neighbors [ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y> | loopback <1-255>] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show isis neighbors [ethernet <X/Y> | gigaether <X/Y> | loopback <1-255>] [ | {count | count-only}]
27-57
Release 5.2.1
Command Syntax
27-58
Release 5.2.1
IS-IS Commands
show isis spf-log

The show isis spf-log command displays how often and why the router has run a full SPF calculation for the Level 1 and Level 2 IS-IS routers. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show isis spf-log command:
27-59
Release 5.2.1
Level 1 SPF log When Duration Nodes Count Last trigger LSP 00:09:48 0 7 1 0011.0011.0016.02-00 00:09:43 0 9 1 0011.0011.0016.00-00 00:09:36 0 9 1 0000.0000.0000.00-00 00:09:06 0 7 2 0011.0011.0016.00-00 VCONTENT 00:08:36 0 7 1 0000.0000.0000.00-00 00:08:04 0 7 2 0000.0000.0000.00-00 ONTENT ADJCHANGE 00:07:56 16 12 1 0011.0011.0005.00-00 00:07:54 16 12 1 0011.0011.0005.03-00 00:07:34 0 12 1 0000.0000.0000.00-00 00:07:04 0 12 1 0011.0011.0005.00-00 00:06:34 0 12 1 0011.0011.0005.00-00 00:05:58 0 12 1 0011.0011.0005.03-00 00:05:18 0 12 1 0011.0011.0005.03-00 00:04:38 0 12 1 0011.0011.0005.03-00 00:03:58 0 12 1 0011.0011.0005.03-00 00:03:18 16 12 1 0011.0011.0005.00-00 00:02:38 0 12 1 0011.0011.0005.03-00 00:01:58 0 12 1 0011.0011.0005.03-00 00:01:18 0 12 1 0011.0011.0005.03-00 00:00:38 16 12 1 0011.0011.0005.03-00 Level 2 SPF log When Duration Nodes Count Last trigger LSP 00:09:38 16 8 1 0000.0000.0000.00-00 00:09:13 0 12 1 0011.0011.0016.00-00 00:09:08 0 12 1 0000.0000.0000.00-00 00:08:41 0 8 1 0000.0000.0000.00-00 00:08:38 0 8 1 0011.0011.0005.00-00 00:07:58 0 8 1 0011.0011.0005.03-00 00:07:56 0 8 0 0000.0000.0000.00-00 00:07:28 0 8 1 0011.0011.0005.00-00 00:06:58 0 8 1 0011.0011.0005.00-00 00:06:29 16 8 1 0011.0011.0005.03-00 00:05:57 0 8 1 0011.0011.0005.03-00 00:05:17 0 8 1 0011.0011.0005.03-00 00:04:37 0 8 1 0011.0011.0005.03-00 00:03:57 16 8 1 0011.0011.0005.00-00
Triggers NEWLSP NEWLSP PERIODIC PERIODIC NEWLEVEL TLVCODE TL PERIODIC PERIODIC NEWADJ TLVCODE TLVC PERIODIC NEWLSP NEWLSP PERIODIC PERIODIC PERIODIC PERIODIC PERIODIC PERIODIC PERIODIC PERIODIC PERIODIC PERIODIC PERIODIC PERIODIC Triggers PERIODIC TLVCODE PERIODIC TLVCODE PERIODIC TLVCODE TLVCONTENT TLVCODE PERIODIC TLVCODE PERIODIC NEWADJ PERIODIC TLVCODE PERIODIC PERIODIC PERIODIC PERIODIC PERIODIC PERIODIC
27-60
Release 5.2.1
IS-IS Commands
The show isis spf-log command displays the following information: When The amount of time since a full SPF calculation took place given in hours:minutes:seconds. The previous 20 calculations are logged. The number of milliseconds to complete this SPF run - the elapsed time is the time from the start to the finish of the SPF run including time spent doing other tasks Number of routers and pseudonodes (LANs) that make up the topology calculated in this SPF run. Number of events that triggered this SPF run. When there is a topology change, often multiple LSPs are received in a short time period. A router waits 5 seconds before running a full SPF run, so it can include all new information. This count denotes the number of events (such as receiving new LSPs) that occurred while the router was waiting its 5 seconds before running full SPF. Whenever a full SPF calculation is triggered by a new LSP, the LSP ID is stored in the router and displayed here
Duration
Nodes Count
Last trigger LSP Triggers
The reason the full SPF calculation occurred - refer to the following table for a list of the possible SPF triggers
The following table describes a list of possible SPF triggers
Trigger PERIODIC NEWSYSID NEWAREA NEWLEVEL NEWMETRIC
Reason Typically, every 15 minutes a router runs a periodic full SPF calculation. A new system ID through the net command was configured on this router. A new area (via the net command) was configured on this router. A new level (via the is-type command) was configured on this router. A new metric was configured on an interface of this router.
27-61
Release 5.2.1
Trigger IPBACKUP
Reason An IP route disappeared, which was not learned via IS-IS, but via another protocol with better administrative distance. IS-IS will run a full SPF to install an IS-IS route for the disappeared IP prefix. A clear ip route command was issued on this router. The router has either attached or lost contact with the Level 2 backbone. Another administrative distance was configured for the IS-IS process on this router. Set of learned area-addresses in this area changed. This router has created a new adjacency to another router. A clear isis * command was issued on this router.
IPQUERY ATTACHFLAG ADMINDIST AREASET NEWADJ DBCHANGED
BACKUPOVFL An IP prefix disappeared. The router knows there is another way to reach that prefix, but has not stored that backup route. The only way to find the alternative route is to perform a full SPF run NEWLSP LSPEXPIRED LSPHEADER TLVCODE TLVCONTENT A new router or pseudonode appeared in the topology. An LSP in the LS database has aged out. The Attach, Partition, or Overload bits or the is-type in an LSP header changed. TLV code mismatch, indicating that different TLVs are included in the newest version of an LSP. TLV contents changed. This normally indicates that an adjacency somewhere in the area has come up or gone down. Look at the "Last trigger LSP" address to get an indication of where the instability may have occurred.
Group Access
All
27-62
Release 5.2.1
IS-IS Commands
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

show isis spf-log [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show isis spf-log [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
27-63
Release 5.2.1
show isis topology

The show isis topology command displays the IS-IS paths to Intermediate Systems. The following is an example of typical screen output from the show isis topology command:
IS-IS paths to level-1 routers System Id Metric Next-Hop 0011.0011.0012 --0011.0011.0016 18 0011.0011.0016 IS-IS paths to level-2 routers System Id Metric Next-Hop 0011.0011.0012 --0011.0011.0016 18 0011.0011.0016 0011.0011.0005 12 0011.0011.0005 0011.0011.0013 19 0011.0011.0005
SNPA 0030.942e.ddc1
Interface Ethernet2/3 Ethernet2/4 Ethernet2/4
SNPA 0030.942e.ddc1 000c.854b.1d32 000c.854b.1d32
The show isis topology command displays the following information: System ID Metric Next-Hop Interface SNPA the System ID of the IS-IS router indicates the routing metric assigned to the Level 1 or Level 2 router the MAC address of the next hop router the interface from which the system was learned the Subnetwork Point of Attachment, which is the data-link layer address
Group Access
All
Command Mode
27-64
Release 5.2.1
IS-IS Commands
Command Line Usage

show isis topology [ l1| l2 | level-1 | level-2 ] [ | {begin | exclude | include} {<WORD>} [ | {count | count-only}]] show isis topology [ l1| l2 | level-1 | level-2 ] [ | {count | count-only}]
Command Syntax
l1 l2 level-1 level-2 | begin exclude include WORD count count-only abbreviation for the option level-1 abbreviation for the option level-2 display the Level 1 IS-IS routing link state database display the Level 2 IS-IS routing link state database turns on output modifiers (filters) filter for output that begins with the specified string filter for output that excludes the specified string filter for output that includes the specified string the specified string count the number of outputted lines count the number of lines while suppressing screen output
27-65
Release 5.2.1
summary-address
A range of IP addresses listed in a routing table can be represented by a summary address. Routes learned from other routing protocols also can be summarized. The metric used to advertise the summary is the smallest metric of all the more specific routes. The summary-address command is used to create a summary address for a range of IP addresses.
Group Access
ISP
Command Mode
Command Line Usage

summary-address <A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D> [level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2 | metric] no summary-address <A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D>
Command Syntax
A.B.C.D A.B.C.D level-1 level-1-2 level-2 metric the summary IP address the subnetwork mask for the summary IP address indicates a Level 1 IS-IS router indicates a Level 1 and 2 IS-IS router indicates a Level 2 IS-IS router sets a metric for the summary route
Command Default
level-2
27-66
Index
A
aaa accounting commands default, 1-3 aaa accounting exec default, 1-5 aaa authentication enable, 1-7 aaa authentication enable default, 1-7 aaa authentication fail-message, 1-8 aaa authentication local-override, 1-9 aaa authentication login default, 1-9, 1-10 aaa authorization commands default, 1-11 aaa authorization exec default, 1-13 aaa console authentication, 1-14 aaa console authorization commands default, 1-15 aaa new-model, 1-16 access-class in, 5-2 access-list (extended), 5-4 access-list (standard), 5-3 aggregate-address, 16-2 alias, 1-17 allow-share, 19-6 aps force, 15-3 aps group, 15-4 aps lockout, 15-5 aps manual, 15-6 aps protect, 15-7 aps revert, 15-8 aps signal-degrade ber threshold, 15-9 aps signal-fail ber threshold, 15-10 aps unidirectional, 15-11 aps working, 15-12 area authentication, 8-2 area default-cost, 8-3 area nssa, 8-4 area range, 8-5 area stub, 8-6 area virtual-link, 8-7 area-password, 27-2 arp, 2-3 arp (global), 2-3 arp timeout, 2-5, 13-2 authentication mode, 27-3 auto-cost reference-bandwidth, 8-9 auto-summary, 7-2, 16-3 auto-virtual link, 8-10
B
balance, 13-3 band, 13-4 banner motd, 1-18 batch, 1-19 bgp always-compare-med, 16-4 bgp client-to-client reflection, 16-5 bgp cluster-id, 16-6 bgp confederation identifier, 16-7 bgp confederation peers, 16-8 bgp dampening, 16-9
Index-1
Release 5.2.1
bgp default, 16-11 bgp permit, 16-12 bgp router-id, 16-13 bind cmts, 13-5 boot system, 1-20 bootrom-filename, 13-6 bootrom-invalidate slot, 13-7 bridge cable intercept, 22-2 bridge cable modem, 22-4 bridge mode trunk, 22-5 broadcast, 1-21
cable downstream description, 13-32, 13-164 cable downstream dsg, 23-2 cable downstream dsg enable, 23-3 cable downstream fiber-node, 13-33 cable downstream frequency, 13-34 cable downstream interleave-depth, 13-36 cable downstream loadbalance-group, 13-38 cable downstream modulation, 13-39 cable downstream mot-bonding-group, 13-40 cable downstream port, 13-44 cable downstream power-level, 13-45 cable downstream primary-capable, 13-47 cable downstream rate-limit, 13-48 cable downstream scrambler on, 13-50 cable downstream shutdown, 13-51 cable downstream sync-interval, 13-52 cable downstream threshold, 13-53 cable downstream trap-enable-if, 13-55 cable downstream trap-enable-rdn, 13-56 cable dsg, 13-66, 23-4 cable dtx type, 13-57 cable dynamic-service, 21-2 cable dynamic-service active-timeout, 21-4 cable fast-path cm, 13-59 cable filter group index action, 13-64 cable filter group index dst-ip, 13-61 cable filter group index enable, 13-65 cable filter group index src-ip, 13-60 cable filter group index tos, 13-63 cable filter group index ulp, 13-62 cable flap-list aging, 13-66 cable flap-list insertion-time, 13-68 cable flap-list miss-threshold, 13-69 cable flap-list percentage threshold, 13-70 cable flap-list power-adjust threshold, 13-71 cable flap-list size, 13-72 cable flap-list trap-enable, 13-73
C
cabel upstream channel-type, 13-158 cable, 13-50, 13-129, 23-4 cable bind, 13-8 cable bundle, 13-10 cable bundle master, 13-11 cable cmts type, 13-12 cable concatenation docsis-1.0, 13-13 cable deny ip, 13-14 cable dhcp force-unicast, 13-15 cable dhcp leasequery message-type, 13-18 cable dhcp preserve-server-id, 13-16 cable dhcp-giaddr primary, 13-17 cable disable 3140-nbpwr-adjustment, 13-20 cable disable bpi-cmcert, 13-21 cable disable eth-pkt-filtering, 13-22 cable downstream aggregate, 13-23 cable downstream bdm-interval, 13-24 cable downstream bonding disable, 13-25 cable downstream bonding-domain, 13-26 cable downstream bonding-group, 13-27 cable downstream carrier-only, 13-29 cable downstream channel-id, 13-30 cable downstream channel-mode, 13-31
Index-2
Release 5.2.1
Index
cable helper-address, 2-6, 13-74 cable host authorization range, 13-77 cable insert-interval, 13-78 cable intercept, 13-79 cable ip prov-mode, 26-4 cable ip-broadcast-echo, 13-81 cable ip-multicast-echo, 13-82 cable ipv6 helper-address, 26-2 cable load-balance, 13-83 cable load-balance spectrum-group, 13-91 cable loadbalance-group, 13-84 cable loadbalance-policy, 13-85 cable loadbalance-restricted, 13-86 cable loadbalance-rule, 13-88 cable mdd-interval, 13-92 cable modem dcc, 13-94 cable modem deny, 13-96 cable modem disable loadbalancing, 13-97 cable modem max-hosts, 13-98 cable modem max-hosts-all, 13-99 cable modem qos dsa, 13-98, 13-100 cable modem qos dsc, 13-102 cable modem qos dsd, 13-103 cable modem remote-query, 13-104 cable modem remote-query source-interface, 13-105 cable modem service-class-name, 13-108 cable modem ucc, 13-110 cable modem updis, 13-112 cable modem-aging-timer, 13-93 cable modulation-profile, 13-113 cable modulation-profile copy, 13-117 cable modulation-profile description, 13-118 cable modulation-profile reset, 13-119 cable mta-protection enable, 13-120 cable multicast, 13-121 cable multi-ds-override, 13-123 cable privacy auth life-time, 13-124
cable privacy cert, 13-125 cable privacy cm-auth life-time, 13-126 cable privacy cm-auth reset, 13-127 cable privacy cm-tek life-time, 13-129 cable privacy cm-tek reset, 13-130 cable privacy enforce-bpi-plus, 13-131 cable privacy mandatory, 13-132 cable privacy mcast, 13-134 cable privacy mcast access, 13-135 cable privacy tek life-time, 13-136 cable qos max-burst, 13-137 cable qos-profile, 13-138 cable security authorized, 13-139 cable security failure, 13-140 cable service-class, 19-7 cable shared-secondary-secret, 13-142 cable shared-secret, 13-141 cable spectrum-group, 13-143 cable spm-management, 13-144 cable submgmt default cpe-control active, 13-145 cable submgmt default cpe-control learnable, 13-146 cable submgmt default cpe-control max-cpe, 13-147 cable submgmt default filter-group, 13-148 cable submgmt default filter-group cm, 13-149 cable sync-interval, 13-150 cable tcpudp-filter group index dst-port, 13-152 cable tcpudp-filter group index enable, 13-153 cable tcpudp-filter group index src-port, 13-151 cable tcpudp-filter group index tcp-flag, 13-154 cable ucd-interval, 13-155 cable upstream active_codes, 13-156 cable upstream capability, 13-157 cable upstream channel-id, 13-158 cable upstream channel-type, 13-159 cable upstream channel-width, 13-160 cable upstream codes-minislot, 13-161 cable upstream concatenation, 13-162
Index-3
Release 5.2.1
cable upstream data-backoff, 13-163 cable upstream eng-nb-atten-backoff value, 13-165 cable upstream eq-magnitude-scaling, 13-167 cable upstream force-frag, 13-169 cable upstream frequency, 13-170 cable upstream global-clock enable, 13-173 cable upstream hopping-seed, 13-174 cable upstream ingress-canceller enable, 13-175 cable upstream invited-range-interval, 13-176 cable upstream iuc11-grant-size, 13-177 cable upstream loadbalance-group, 13-178 cable upstream maintain-power-density on, 13-179 cable upstream map-interval, 13-180 cable upstream max-calls, 13-181 cable upstream minislot-size, 13-182 cable upstream modem-ranging-delay, 13-184 cable upstream modulation-profile, 13-185 cable upstream physical-delay, 13-187 cable upstream power-level, 13-191 cable upstream power-level default, 13-193 cable upstream pre-equalization, 13-195 cable upstream range-backoff, 13-196 cable upstream range-forced-continue, 13-197 cable upstream range-power-override, 13-198 cable upstream rate-limit, 13-199 cable upstream schedule, 13-200 cable upstream shutdown, 13-201 cable upstream snr-offset, 13-202 cable upstream spectrum-group, 13-203 cable upstream spread-interval, 13-204 cable upstream trap-enable-cmts, 13-205 cable upstream trap-enable-if, 13-206 cable upstream trap-enable-rdn, 13-207 cable utilization-interval, 13-208 cap, 19-8 carriage-return-lf-mode, 1-22 channel-list, 13-209, 23-5
channel-type, 13-209 chassis alias, 1-23 chassis assetid, 1-24 chkdsk, 1-25 classifier, 23-6 clear arp-cache, 2-8 clear bridge, 22-6 clear cable dcc-stats, 13-211 clear cable downstream bonding-group statistics,
13-212
clear cable flap-list, 13-213 clear cable modem, 13-215 clear cable modem downstream, 13-216 clear cable modem offline, 13-218 clear cable modem sync, 13-219 clear cable qos svc-flow statistics, 13-220 clear cable srvclass-stats, 13-221, 19-9 clear cable ucc-stats, 13-223 clear cable ugs-stats, 13-224 clear core log, 1-26 clear counters, 2-9 clear counters cable, 13-225 clear counters ipsec, 21-7 clear evt, 1-27 clear host, 2-10 clear interfaces cable upstream signal-quality, 13-227 clear ip bgp, 16-14 clear ip bgp dampening, 16-15 clear ip bgp flap-statistics, 16-16 clear ip igmp counters, 9-3 clear ip multicast fwd-cache, 11-8 clear ip multicast proto-cache, 11-9 clear ip ospf, 8-11 clear ip rip statistics, 7-3 clear ip route, 2-11 clear ip rsvp statistics, 18-4 clear ip traffic, 2-12
Index-4
Release 5.2.1
Index
clear ip vrrp, 10-2 clear ipv6 neighbor-cache, 26-6 clear ipv6 traffic, 26-7 clear isis, 27-4 clear log, 1-29 clear mpls traffic, 18-5 clear packet-cable configuration, 21-5 clear packet-cable cops, 21-6, 21-8 clear packet-cable gate, 21-9 clear packet-cable statistics, 21-10 clear redundancy stats, 1-30 clear sntp history, 2-13 clear usage-stats, 13-228 Client-Accept message, 21-12 client-list, 13-230, 23-8 client-timer, 21-12 clock set, 1-31 clock summer-time, 1-32 clock timezone, 1-34 cmts-id, 13-229 cmts-ip, 21-11 codes-subframe, 13-230 collect interval, 13-231 collect resolution, 13-232 commands snmp-server community, 3-26 snmp-server host, 3-26 Communications Assistance for Law Enforcement Act (CALEA), 21-36 configure, 1-36 console authentication radius, 1-37 cops status-trap-enable, 21-15 copy, 1-38 copy core, 1-40 core, 1-41 crc, 15-13
D
datapath keepalive, 1-42 datapath pause enable, 1-43 debug aps, 4-2 debug arp, 4-3 debug cable cra, 4-4 debug cable err, 4-4 debug cable keyman, 4-5 debug cable mac, 4-6 debug cable map, 4-7 debug cable modem-select, 4-8 debug cable privacy, 4-9 debug cable qos, 4-10 debug cable range, 4-11 debug cable reg, 4-12 debug cable remote-query, 4-13 debug cable ucc, 4-14 debug ip access-list, 4-15 debug ip bgp, 4-16 debug ip dvmrp, 4-18 debug ip icmp, 4-19 debug ip igmp, 4-20 debug ip mfm, 4-21 debug ip mrtm, 4-22 debug ip ospf, 4-23 debug ip packet, 4-25 debug ip pim, 4-27 debug ip policy, 4-29 debug ip redistribute, 4-30 debug ip rip, 4-32 debug ip rip database, 4-33 debug ip rip events, 4-34 debug ip rip trigger, 4-35 debug ip tcp transactions, 4-36 debug ip udp, 4-37 debug ip vrrp, 4-38
Index-5
Release 5.2.1
debug ipdr, 24-2 debug ipsec, 4-39 debug isis spf-statistics, 4-51 debug isis update-packets, 4-53 debug mpls forwarding, 4-54, 18-6 debug mpls rsvp, 4-55, 18-7 debug nd, 4-57 debug packet-cable, 4-58 debug ppp fsm, 4-59 debug ppp packet, 4-60 debug radius, 4-61 debug snmp, 4-62 debug sntp, 4-63 debug specmgr, 4-64 debug ssh, 4-65 debug tacacs, 4-66 debug tacacs events, 4-67 debug task monitor, 4-68 debug tunnel, 4-72 default-information originate, 8-12, 16-17, 27-5 default-information originate (OSPF), 6-2 default-information originate (RIP), 7-4 default-metric, 6-4, 16-18 default-metric (OSPF), 8-13 default-metric (RIP), 7-5 delete, 1-44 description, 1-45 dhcp leasequery authorization on, 13-233 differential-encoding on, 13-234 dir, 1-46 disable, 1-47 distance, 7-6, 8-14, 27-6 distance bgp, 16-19 distance ospf, 8-15 distribute-list, 8-17 distribute-list in, 7-7, 16-21 distribute-list out, 7-8, 16-22
docstest, 13-235 domain-password, 27-7 dqos cops-trap-enable, 21-18 dqos dscp, 21-16 dqos emergency-preempt, 21-17 dqos emergency-trap-enable, 21-18 dqos res-req-trap-enable, 21-19 dqos shutdown, 21-20 dqos t0/t1-timer, 21-21 dqos t0-timer/t1-timer, 21-21 duplex, 1-48
E
Element ID, 21-23 em dscp, 21-22 em element-number, 21-23 em event-disable-mask, 21-24 em event-priority, 21-25 em flag-override, 21-26 em max-batch-events, 21-27 em max-batch-time, 21-28 em qos-descriptor-disable, 21-29 em retry-count, 21-30 em retry-interval, 21-31 em rks-failure-trap-enable, 21-32 em shutdown, 21-34 em udp-port, 21-35 enable, 1-49 enable authentication radius, 1-50 enable password, 1-51 enable rdn-process, 1-52 enable secret, 1-53 encapsulation dot1q, 22-7 encapsulation snap, 1-54 enforce-cmts-qos, 19-10 erase, 1-55
Index-6
Release 5.2.1
Index
es, 21-36 exception, 1-56 exit, 1-57
hop period, 13-255 hop sampling-period active-channel, 13-258 hop sampling-period rollback-channel, 13-259 hop sampling-period spare-channel, 13-260 hop snr hysteresis, 13-256 hop threshold error, 13-261 hop threshold flap, 13-262 hop threshold snr modulation-type, 13-263 host authorization, 2-14 hostname, 1-62 hsim4 slot, 1-63
F
fec-codeword, 13-238 fec-correction, 13-239 fft display, 13-240 fft setup, 13-242 fft start, 13-243 fft store, 13-244 forced-download, 1-58 format, 1-59
I
icp keepalive, 1-64 ignore-lsp-errors, 27-9 ike client-addr, 21-39 ike phase1, 21-40 ike phase2, 21-41 ike retries, 21-42 ike timeout, 21-43 init-tech, 13-265 interface, 2-16 interface cable, 13-266 interface pos, 15-14 interleaver-block-size, 13-267 interleaver-depth, 13-268 interleaver-step-size, 13-269 ip access-group, 2-18, 5-12 ip access-list, 5-13 ip address, 2-19, 13-270 ip as-path access-list, 16-23 ip bgp-community new-format, 16-24 ip broadcast-address, 2-23 ip community-list, 16-26 ip dhcp relay information, 2-24 ip dhcp relay information option, 13-273
G
graceful-restart, 8-18 graceful-restart-period, 7-9 grant-interval, 19-11 grant-jitter, 19-12 grant-size, 19-13 grants-per-interval, 19-14 group-map, 23-10 guard-band, 13-246
H
hello padding, 27-8 help, 1-60 helper-mode, 8-19 history, 1-61 hop action band, 13-247 hop action channel-width, 13-248 hop action frequency, 13-249 hop action modulation-profile, 13-250 hop action power-level, 13-251 hop action roll-back, 13-253 hop modulation-rollback-count, 13-254
Index-7
Release 5.2.1
ip domain-lookup, 2-27 ip domain-name, 2-28 ip dvmrp accept-filter, 12-2 ip dvmrp default-information originate, 12-3 ip dvmrp metric-offset, 12-4 ip dvmrp output-report-delay, 12-5 ip dvmrp out-report-filter, 12-6 ip dvmrp probe-interval, 12-7 ip dvmrp reject-non-pruners, 12-8 ip dvmrp summary-address, 12-9 ip forwarding, 2-30 ip forward-protocol udp, 2-29 ip ftp password, 1-66 ip ftp username, 1-67 ip helper-address, 2-31, 26-11 ip host, 2-32 ip igmp access-group, 9-4 ip igmp last-member-query-interval, 9-8 ip igmp querier-timeout, 9-5 ip igmp query-interval, 9-6 ip igmp query-max-response-time, 9-9 ip igmp static-group, 9-10 ip igmp version, 9-11 ip igmp version1-querier, 9-12 ip irdp, 2-33 ip local policy route-map, 6-5 ip mask-reply, 2-35 ip mroute, 11-2 ip mroute distance, 11-3 ip mroute unicast distance, 11-4 ip mtu, 2-36 ip multicast fastpath, 2-37 ip multicast-routing, 11-5 ip name-server, 2-39 ip netmask-format, 1-68 ip ospf authentication-key, 8-21 ip ospf cost, 8-22
ip ospf database-filter all out, 8-23 ip ospf dead-interval, 8-24 ip ospf hello-interval, 8-25 ip ospf message-digest-key, 8-26 ip ospf network, 8-27 ip ospf priority, 8-28 ip ospf retransmit-interval, 8-29 ip ospf transmit-delay, 8-30 ip pim border, 17-2 ip pim bsr-candidate, 17-3 ip pim bsr-candidate ip-address, 17-4 ip pim dr-priority, 17-5 ip pim message-interval, 17-6 ip pim query-interval, 17-7 ip pim rp-candidate, 17-8 ip pim rp-candidate group-list, 17-9 ip pim rp-candidate interval, 17-10 ip pim rp-candidate ip-address, 17-11 ip pim rp-candidate priority, 17-12 ip pim spt-threshold lasthop, 17-13 ip pim spt-threshold rp, 17-14 ip pim ssm, 17-15 ip policy route-map, 6-6 ip proxy-arp, 2-40 ip qos-group, 14-2 ip rarp-server, 2-41 ip redirects, 2-42 ip rip authentication key, 7-10 ip rip host-routes, 7-11 ip rip message-digest-key md5, 7-12 ip rip receive version, 7-13 ip rip send version, 7-14 ip route, 2-43 ip router isis, 27-10 ip routing, 2-44 ip rsvp, 18-9 ip source-route, 2-45
Index-8
Release 5.2.1
Index
ip split-horizon, 7-15 ip tacacs source-interface, 1-69 ip tftp source-interface loopback, 1-70 ip unreachables, 2-46 ip vrrp, 10-3 ip vrrp (virtual router ID), 10-4 ip vrrp address, 10-5 ip vrrp authentication key, 10-6 ip vrrp authentication type, 10-7 ip vrrp enable, 10-8 ip vrrp preempt, 10-9 ip vrrp primary-ip, 10-11 ip vrrp priority, 10-10 ip vrrp timer, 10-12 ip vrrp verify-availability, 10-13 ip-address (pos), 15-15 ipdr acksequenceinterval, 24-3 ipdr acktimeinterval, 24-4 ipdr collection-interval, 24-5 ipdr collector, 24-6 ipdr enable, 24-9 ipdr keepaliveinterval, 24-10 ipdr poll-rate, 24-11 ipdr source-interface, 24-12 ipsec, 21-44 ipsec shutdown, 21-45 ipv4 range, 26-8 ipv6 address, 26-9 ipv6 helper-address, 26-11 ipv6 icmp error-interval, 26-12 ipv6 nd, 26-13 ipv6 neighbor, 26-15 ipv6 range, 26-16 ipv6 redirects, 26-17 ipv6 route, 26-18 ipv6 unicast-routing, 26-19 isis authentication mode, 27-11
isis circuit-type, 27-12 isis csnp-interval, 27-13 isis hello padding, 27-14 isis hello-interval, 27-15 isis hello-multiplier, 27-16 isis lsp-interval, 27-17 isis message-digest-key, 27-18 isis metric, 27-19 isis network point-to-point, 27-20 isis password, 27-21 isis priority, 27-22 isis retransmit-interval, 27-23 isis retransmit-throttle-interval, 27-24 is-type, 27-25 iuc, 13-274
L
last-codeword-length, 13-277 ldap client, 1-71 ldap search-base, 1-72 ldap server, 1-73 load-balancing, 13-278 load-balancing static, 13-279 load-interval, 1-74 log-adjacency-changes, 27-26 logging, 1-76 logging admin-status, 1-77 logging buffered, 1-79 logging console, 1-81 logging control docsis, 1-83 logging default, 1-84 logging disable bpi_auth_invalid_messages, 1-85 logging disable bpi_auth_reject_messages, 1-86 logging disable bpi_map_reject_messages, 1-87 logging disable bpi_tek_invalid_messages, 1-88 logging disable cm_ranging_fail_r103_0, 1-89
Index-9
Release 5.2.1
logging evt clear, 1-92 logging evt set, 1-93 logging facility, 1-94 logging on, 1-95 logging rate-limit, 1-96 logging reporting, 1-97 logging reporting default, 1-100 logging session, 1-101 logging snmp-trap, 1-102 logging source-interface loopback, 1-104 logging trap, 1-105 login, 1-107 logout, 1-108 Loopback interface, 21-11 lsp-gen-interval, 27-27 lsp-refresh-interval, 27-28
message, 1-111 message-digest-key md5, 27-31 metric-style, 27-32 min-pkt-size, 19-21 min-rate, 19-22 mm dscp, 21-46 mm shutdown, 21-47 mm t1-timer, 21-48 modulation-type, 13-282 more, 1-115 moto-nsf, 8-32 mpls create-lsp rsvp, 18-11 mpls create-lsp rsvp explicit-route identifier, 18-12 mpls create-lsp rsvp next-hop, 18-13 mpls create-lsp static, 18-14 mpls ip, 18-17 mpls label range, 18-18 mpls mtu, 18-19 mpls rsvp restart-lsp, 18-20 mpls ttl, 18-21 mtrace, 11-10
M
mab, 19-15 macro, 1-109 match as-path, 6-7, 16-28 match community, 6-8, 16-29 match ip address, 6-9 match ip next-hop, 6-10 match ip route-source, 6-11 match metric, 6-12 match route-type external, 6-13 match route-type internal, 6-14 match tag, 6-15 max-burst, 13-280, 19-17 max-concat-burst, 19-18 maximum-paths, 7-16, 8-31, 16-30, 27-30 max-latency, 19-19 max-lsp-lifetime, 27-29 max-rate, 19-20 memory checkzero, 1-110
N
name, 19-23 neighbor advertisement-interval, 16-31 neighbor confed-segment, 16-32 neighbor default-originate, 16-33 neighbor description, 16-34 neighbor distribute-list, 16-35 neighbor ebgp-multihop, 16-36 neighbor filter-list, 16-37 neighbor maximum-prefix, 16-39 neighbor next-hop-self, 16-41 neighbor password, 16-42 neighbor peer-group (assigning members), 16-43 neighbor peer-group (creating), 16-44
Index-10
Release 5.2.1
Index
neighbor remote-as, 16-45 neighbor remove-private-as, 16-47 neighbor route-map, 16-48 neighbor route-reflector client, 16-49 neighbor route-refresh, 16-50 neighbor send-community, 16-51 neighbor shutdown, 16-52 neighbor soft-reconfiguration inbound, 16-53 neighbor timers, 16-54 neighbor update-source loopback, 16-56 neighbor weight, 16-57 net, 27-33 network, 7-17, 12-10, 16-58, 17-16 network area, 8-34 network-clock-select, 15-16 network-clock-select revertive, 1-114
pim graceful-restart restart-interval, 17-18 pim register-checksum, 17-19 pim rp-address, 17-20 pim unicast-route-lookup, 17-22 ping, 2-49 ping docsis, 13-284 ping6, 26-20 Policy Enforcement Point (PEP), 21-14 policy rule, 13-285 poll-interval, 19-25 poll-jitter, 19-26 pos ais-shut, 15-17 pos flag, 15-18 pos framing, 15-20 pos internal-clock, 15-21 pos report, 15-22 pos scramble, 15-24 pos signal mode, 15-25 pos threshold, 15-26 ppp magic-number, 15-28 ppp negotiation-count, 15-29 ppp timeout, 15-30 preamble-length, 13-286 preamble-type, 13-287 privilege restricted, 1-120
O
offset-list, 7-18 output-delay, 7-20 over-max-rate, 19-24
P
PacketCable description, 21-1 packet-cable, 21-49 PacketCable Multimedia description, 21-1 page, 1-117 passive-interface, 2-47, 7-21, 8-35, 27-34 password, 1-118 password ssh-passphrase, 20-2 patch install, 1-119 pdp-ip, 21-13 peer default ip address, 15-16 pep-id, 21-14 pim accept-rp, 17-17
Q
qos bw default, 14-2 qos queue bw, 14-3 qos queue dot1p, 14-4 qos-list queue, 14-3
R
radius-server, 1-121 radius-server source-interface loopback, 1-123 redistribute, 7-22, 8-36, 16-59, 27-35
Index-11
Release 5.2.1
redundancy cmts, 1-124 redundancy dtx, 1-126 redundancy force-switchover cmts, 1-127 redundancy force-switchover dtx, 1-129 redundancy force-switchover srm, 1-130 reference-modem-exclusion, 13-288 reload, 1-131 reload switched, 1-132 remote copy, 1-136 repeat, 1-141 req-trans-policy, 19-27 reset, 1-142 restricted admission disabled, 19-29 RF output upstream frequency setting, 13-170 rfc1583-compatible, 8-38 route-map, 6-16, 16-61 router bgp, 16-61, 16-62 router dvmrp, 12-11 router isis, 27-37 router ospf, 8-40 router pim, 17-23 router rip, 7-24 router-id, 8-39
set community, 6-22 set default interface, 6-24 set interface, 6-25 set ip default next-hop, 6-26 set ip diff-serv, 6-27 set ip next-hop, 6-29, 16-68 set ip qos queue, 6-30 set local-preference, 6-31, 16-69 set metric, 6-32 set metric-type, 6-33, 16-70 set origin, 6-34, 16-71 set stats poll, 1-147 set tag, 6-35, 16-72 set weight, 6-36, 16-73 set-overload-bit, 27-38 setting RF output upstream frequency, 13-170 show access-lists, 5-14 show aliases, 1-149 show aps, 15-31 show arp, 2-51 show bindings, 13-291 show boot, 1-151 show bridge vlan, 22-8 show cable binding, 13-292 show cable bonding-group minrr-multipliers, 13-294 show cable dcc-stats, 13-296 show cable downstream, 13-298 show cable downstream bonding-groups, 13-301 show cable downstream id-list, 13-304 show cable dsg, 23-12 show cable dsg channel-list, 23-14 show cable dsg classifier, 23-15 show cable dsg client-list, 23-16 show cable dsg downstream, 23-17 show cable dsg group-map, 23-18 show cable dsg timer, 23-19
S
schedpriority, 19-30 scrambler-mode, 13-289 scrambler-seed, 13-290 service ipv6 cpe-forwarding enable, 26-21 service password-encryption, 1-143 session-timeout, 1-144 session-window set, 1-145 set as-path prepend, 6-18, 16-63 set automatic-tag, 6-19 set bandwidth-factor, 1-146 set comm-list, 6-20, 16-64
Index-12
Release 5.2.1
Index
show cable dsg tunnel, 23-20 show cable dsg tunnel-group, 23-21 show cable dsg vendor-param, 23-22 show cable dynamic-service, 21-50 show cable fiber-node, 13-305 show cable filter, 13-307 show cable flap-list, 13-308 show cable insert-interval, 13-310 show cable loadbalance-group, 13-311 show cable loadbalance-no-move-list, 13-313 show cable loadbalance-policy, 13-315 show cable loadbalance-restricted, 13-317 show cable loadbalance-rule, 13-318 show cable md-ds-sg, 13-319 show cable metering-status, 24-13 show cable modem, 13-321 show cable modem bonding, 13-325 show cable modem cpe, 13-327 show cable modem detail, 13-330 show cable modem downstream, 13-333 show cable modem hosts, 13-339 show cable modem loadbalance-group, 13-341 show cable modem mac, 13-343 show cable modem mac30, 13-346 show cable modem maintenance, 13-349 show cable modem max-rate, 13-351 show cable modem mta, 13-352 show cable modem offline, 13-357 show cable modem phy, 13-361 show cable modem ps, 13-352 show cable modem qos, 13-364 show cable modem qos summary, 13-367 show cable modem registered, 13-370 show cable modem remote-query, 13-373 show cable modem security, 13-378 show cable modem stats, 13-383 show cable modem stb, 13-352
show cable modem summary, 13-386, 13-391 show cable modem summary total, 13-389, 13-391 show cable modem svc-flow-id, 13-391 show cable modem svc-flow-id detail, 13-393 show cable modem time-registered, 13-396 show cable modem timing-offset, 13-399 show cable modem unregistered, 13-403 show cable modem vendor, 13-405 show cable modem vendor summary, 13-407 show cable modem verbose, 13-409 show cable modulation-profile, 13-411 show cable modulation-profile brief, 13-414 show cable modulation-profile description, 13-415 show cable privacy auth, 13-416 show cable privacy cm-auth, 13-417 show cable privacy cm-tek, 13-418 show cable privacy cmts, 13-420 show cable privacy tek, 13-423 show cable qos profile, 13-424 show cable qos profile user-defined, 13-427 show cable qos svc-flow classifier, 13-430 show cable qos svc-flow dynamic-stat, 13-433 show cable qos svc-flow log, 13-434 show cable qos svc-flow param-set, 13-435 show cable qos svc-flow phs, 13-437 show cable qos svc-flow statistics, 13-439 show cable qos svc-flow summary, 13-441 show cable qos svc-flow upstream-stat, 13-442 show cable service-class, 19-31 show cable spectrum-group, 13-443, 13-445 show cable spectrum-group load-balance summary,
13-446
show cable spectrum-group map, 13-447 show cable spectrum-group modem-exclusion-list,
13-449
show cable spectrum-group reference-modem, 13-450 show cable spectrum-group snr-thresholds, 13-451
Index-13
Release 5.2.1
show cable spectrum-group stats, 13-452 show cable srvclass-stats, 19-35 show cable submgmt cpe-control default, 13-454 show cable sync-interval, 13-455 show cable tcpudp-filter, 13-456 show cable ucc-stats, 13-457 show cable ucd-interval, 13-459 show cable ugs-stats, 13-460 show cable upstream, 13-462 show cable upstream global-clock, 13-466 show chassis alias, 1-152 show chassis assetid, 1-153 show chassis serial-num, 1-154 show chassis status, 1-155 show clns interface, 27-39 show clns is-neighbors, 27-42 show clns neighbors, 27-44 show clns protocol, 27-46 show clns traffic, 27-48 show clock, 1-159 show controllers, 2-53 show controllers cable ds-mac, 13-467 show controllers cable ds-phy, 13-471 show controllers pos, 15-32 show core log, 1-160 show debugging, 4-73 show docsis-version, 13-473 show docstest, 13-474 show evt, 1-161 show fast-path ranges, 18-22 show forced-download, 1-165 show history, 1-167 show host authorization, 2-55 show host authorization cpe, 2-56 show host authorization interface cable, 2-58 show host authorization summary, 2-60 show host unauthorized cpe, 2-62
show hosts, 2-63 show interfaces, 2-64 show interfaces cable, 13-475 show interfaces cable bandwidth voice, 13-481 show interfaces cable configuration, 13-483 show interfaces cable downstream, 13-485 show interfaces cable intercept, 13-488 show interfaces cable service-class, 13-490 show interfaces cable stats, 13-493 show interfaces cable upstream, 13-495 show interfaces cable upstream channel-agility-stats,
13-500
show interfaces pos, 15-34 show ip arp, 2-66 show ip as-path-access-list, 16-74 show ip bgp, 16-74, 16-75 show ip bgp cidr-only, 16-77 show ip bgp community, 16-78 show ip bgp community-list, 16-80 show ip bgp dampened-paths, 16-81 show ip bgp flap-statistics, 16-82 show ip bgp ipv4 unicast, 16-84 show ip bgp memory, 16-88 show ip bgp neighbors, 16-90 show ip bgp next-hops, 16-92 show ip bgp paths, 16-93 show ip bgp peer-group, 16-94 show ip bgp regexp, 16-96 show ip bgp summary, 16-97 show ip community-list, 16-100 show ip dhcp stats, 2-69 show ip dvmrp information, 12-12 show ip dvmrp interface, 12-13 show ip dvmrp neighbor, 12-14 show ip dvmrp network, 12-15 show ip dvmrp route, 12-16 show ip dvmrp route hold-down, 12-17
Index-14
Release 5.2.1
Index
show ip dvmrp summary-route, 12-18 show ip dvmrp tunnels, 12-19 show ip filters, 2-70 show ip filters summary, 2-74 show ip flows, 2-77 show ip forwarding-table, 2-79 show ip igmp groups, 9-13 show ip igmp interface, 9-15 show ip igmp statistics, 9-17 show ip interface, 2-81 show ip irdp, 2-84 show ip multicast cache-summary, 11-11 show ip multicast fastpath, 2-86 show ip multicast fwd-cache, 2-87, 11-12 show ip multicast interface, 11-13 show ip multicast no-oi-fwd-cache, 11-15 show ip multicast oi-fwd-cache, 11-14 show ip multicast proto-cache, 11-16 show ip ospf, 8-41 show ip ospf border-routers, 8-43 show ip ospf database, 8-44 show ip ospf interface, 8-47 show ip ospf memory, 8-49 show ip ospf neighbor, 8-51 show ip ospf network, 8-53 show ip ospf virtual-links, 8-54 show ip pim, 17-24 show ip protocols, 2-89 show ip redistribute, 6-37, 27-51 show ip rip database, 7-25 show ip route, 2-91 show ip rpf, 11-6 show ip rsvp explicit-routed-lsps, 18-23 show ip rsvp interface, 18-24 show ip rsvp lsp, 18-25 show ip rsvp neighbor, 18-26 show ip rsvp reservation, 18-27
show ip rsvp sender, 18-28 show ip rsvp statistics, 18-29 show ip traffic, 2-94, 6-39 show ip vrrp, 10-14 show ipdr connection, 24-15 show ipdr session, 24-16 show ipsec, 21-51 show ipv6 dhcp, 26-22 show ipv6 interface, 26-24 show ipv6 interface brief, 26-27 show ipv6 neighbor, 26-29 show ipv6 route, 26-31 show ipv6 traffic, 26-33 show isis database, 27-53 show isis hostname, 27-56 show isis neighbors, 27-57 show isis spf-log, 27-59 show isis topology, 27-64 show keepalive, 1-169 show l2-cam, 2-98 show log, 1-171 show logging evt, 1-174 show logging reporting, 1-175 show logging syslog, 1-178 show macro, 1-179 show memory, 1-180 show mpls filters, 18-30 show mpls forwarding-table, 18-32 show mpls label range, 18-35 show mpls lsp, 18-36 show mpls lsp interface, 18-39 show mpls rsvp refresh-time, 18-41 show mpls traffic, 18-42 show network-clocks, 1-183, 15-37 show packet-cable configuration, 21-54 show packet-cable cops, 21-59 show packet-cable gate, 21-61
Index-15
Release 5.2.1
show packet-cable statistics, 21-64 show patches-installed, 1-184 show pool, 1-186 show ppp info, 15-37 show ppp statistics, 15-38 show process, 1-188 show process cpu, 1-190 show process memory, 1-194 show process msg-q-info, 1-197 show process semaphores, 1-198 show process stack, 1-200 show qos queue config, 14-5 show qos-lists, 14-5 show redundancy, 1-202 show redundancy cmts, 1-205 show redundancy dtx, 1-209 show redundancy srm, 1-212 show reload, 1-214 show route-map, 6-40 show running-config, 1-215 show running-config cable downstream port, 13-502 show snmp, 3-3 show sntp, 2-101 show srm alias, 1-217 show srm assetid, 1-218 show srm serial-num, 1-219 show ssh config, 20-3 show ssh hostkey-fingerprint, 20-6 show startup-config, 1-220 show stats cmts, 13-504 show stats fastpath, 1-222 show stats summary error, 13-507 show stats xfabric, 1-225 show system, 1-226 show system alarms, 1-230 show system fans, 1-233 show tacacs, 1-235
show tacacs statistics, 1-236 show tcp brief, 2-102 show tcp statistics, 2-103 show tech, 1-237 show update, 1-240 show user-group, 1-241 show users, 1-243 show users ssh, 20-7 show vectron slot, 1-245 show version, 1-247 show xfabric, 1-249 shutdown, 2-107 slot, 1-251 snmp-server access, 3-9 snmp-server chassis-id, 3-11 snmp-server community, 3-12 snmp-server community-table, 3-13 snmp-server contact, 3-16 snmp-server context, 3-17 snmp-server convert, 3-18 snmp-server docs-trap-control, 3-19 snmp-server enable informs, 3-21 snmp-server enable traps, 3-22 snmp-server engineID, 3-24 snmp-server group, 3-25 snmp-server host, 3-26 snmp-server location, 3-29 snmp-server manager response-timeout, 3-30 snmp-server notify, 3-31 snmp-server notify-filter, 3-33 snmp-server notify-filter-profile, 3-35 snmp-server packetsize, 3-37 snmp-server port number, 3-38 snmp-server shutdown, 3-39 snmp-server sysname, 3-40 snmp-server target-addr, 3-41 snmp-server target-params, 3-44
Index-16
Release 5.2.1
Index
snmp-server trap rate-limit, 3-47 snmp-server trap-source loopback, 3-48 snmp-server user, 3-49 snmp-server view, 3-51 snr display, 13-509 snr loop, 13-510 snr setup, 13-512 snr setup-get, 13-514, 13-516 snr setup-spare-mod-profile, 13-515 snr start, 13-516 snr store, 13-517 sntp authenticate, 2-108 sntp authentication-key, 2-109 sntp broadcast client, 2-111 sntp broadcastdelay, 2-110 sntp disable, 2-112 sntp response timeout, 2-113 sntp server, 2-114 sntp source-interface loopback, 2-116 sntp timer, 2-117 sntp trusted-key, 2-118 source-port 520, 7-27 spd allow-dynamic-rsp, 21-69 spd override, 21-70 spd policy, 21-71 spd preshared-key, 21-73 spectrum-copy, 13-518 speed, 1-252 spreader on, 13-519 srm alias, 1-253 srm assetid, 1-254, 1-255 ssh ciphers, 20-8 ssh enable, 20-10 ssh load-host-key-files, 20-13 ssh logout session-id, 20-14 ssh message-authentication, 20-15 ssh password-authentication radius, 20-16
ssh password-guesses, 20-17 ssh port, 20-18 ssh session-limit, 20-19 ssh timeout, 20-20 ssh-keygen2, 20-11 summary-address, 8-55, 27-66 sync file, 1-256 synchronization, 16-100
T
tacacs-server host, 1-260 tacacs-server key, 1-262 tacacs-server port, 1-263 tacacs-server reset-connections, 1-259 tacacs-server retry, 1-264 tacacs-server timeout, 1-265 tcm-encoding on, 13-520 telnet, 1-266 telnet authentication radius, 1-267 telnet session-limit, 1-268 time band, 13-521 time delete, 13-522 timer, 23-23 timers basic, 7-28 timers bgp, 16-101 timers spf, 8-56 tos-overwrite, 19-37 traceroute, 2-119 traceroute6, 26-36 trafpriority, 19-38 trap-enable-if, 2-121 trap-enable-rdn, 2-122 tunnel, 23-25 tunnel destination, 2-123 tunnel mode, 2-124 tunnel source, 2-125
Index-17
Release 5.2.1
U
ugs-stats-window, 19-39 undebug all, 4-74 unresolved-ip-packet-throttle, 2-126 update bypass, 1-269 update chassis, 1-270 update slot, 1-271 username, 1-272 username privilege, 1-274 username user-group, 1-275
V
vendor-class-identifier, 13-523 vendor-param, 23-27 version, 7-30
X
xfabric keepalive, 1-276, 1-277
Index-18
Visit our website at: www.motorola.com
Compass ID: 327594480 Version 3 9/09

BSR 64000 Command Reference Guide

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originalbeschreibung:

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

BSR 64000 Command Reference Guide

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

BSR 64000 Command Reference Guide

Compass ID: 327594480 Version 3 Release 5.2.1

Compass ID: 327594480 Version 3 Release 5.2.1 Published: 9/09

System Administration Commands

Compass ID: 327594480 Version 3